-
Contents
-
Table of Contents
-
Bookmarks
Quick Links
®
Relion
670 series
Customized
Product Guide
Related Manuals for ABB RED670
Summary of Contents for ABB RED670
-
Page 1
® Relion 670 series Line differential protection RED670 ANSI Customized Product Guide… -
Page 2: Table Of Contents
22. Ordering……………..99 Disclaimer The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by ABB. ABB assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document. © Copyright 2012 ABB.
-
Page 3: Application
1. Application High set instantaneous phase and ground overcurrent, four RED670 is used for the protection, control and monitoring of step directional or non-directional delayed phase and ground overhead lines and cables in all types of networks. The IED can overcurrent, thermal overload and two step under- and be used from distribution up to the highest voltage levels.
-
Page 4: Available Functions
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 2. Available functions Main protection functions = number of basic instances = option quantities IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Line Differential RED670 Differential protection HZPDIF 1Ph high impedance differential protection…
-
Page 5
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Back-up protection functions IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Line Differential RED670 Current protection PHPIOC Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection OC4PTOC 51_67 Four step phase overcurrent protection EFPIOC Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection… -
Page 6
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Control and monitoring functions IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Line Differential RED670 Control SESRSYN Synchrocheck, energizing check and synchronizing SMBRREC Autorecloser APC15 Apparatus control for single bay, max 15 apparatuses (2CBs) incl. interlocking… -
Page 7
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Line Differential RED670 SP16GGIO IEC61850 generic communication I/O functions 16 inputs MVGGIO IEC61850 generic communication I/O functions BSStatReport Logical signal status report RANGE_XP Measured value expander block… -
Page 8
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Designed to communicate IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Line Differential RED670 Station communication SPA communication protocol LON communication protocol IEC60870-5-103 communication protocol 20/1 Operation selection between SPA and IEC60870-5-103 for SLM DNP3.0 for TCP/IP and EIA-485 communication protocol… -
Page 9: Differential Protection
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Basic IED functions IEC 61850 Function description Basic functions included in all products IntErrorSig Self supervision with internal event list TIME Time and synchronization error TimeSynch Time synchronization ActiveGroup…
-
Page 10
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 current differential protection with high sensitivity and provides Line differential protection, 3 or 6 CT sets L3CPDIF, L6CPDIF phase selection information for single-pole tripping. (87L) Line differential protection applies the Kirchhoff’s law and… -
Page 11
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Protected zone Communication Channel Communication Channel Communication Channel ANSI05000040_2_en.vsd ANSI05000040 V2 EN Figure 2. Example of application on a three-terminal line with breaker-and-a-half breaker arrangements The current differential algorithm provides high sensitivity for… -
Page 12
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 protection zone. Both two- and three-winding transformers are Line differential protection 3 or 6 CT sets, with in-zone correctly represented with phase shift compensations made in transformers LT3CPDIF, LT6CPDIF (87LT) the algorithm. -
Page 13
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Protected zone Communication Channel ANSI05000043_2_en.vsd ANSI05000043 V2 EN Figure 4. Five terminal lines with master-master system… -
Page 14
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Protected zone Communication Channels en05000044_ansi.vsd ANSI05000044 V1 EN Figure 5. Five terminal line with master-slave system Current samples from IEDs located geographically apart from The communication link is continuously monitored, and an… -
Page 15: Impedance Protection
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 The differential function can be allowed to trip as no load is fed • Startup element is sensitive enough to detect the abnormal through the line and protection is not working correctly.
-
Page 16
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 achieve. Therefore, FDPSPDIS (21) has a built-in algorithm for load encroachment, which gives the possibility to enlarge the resistive setting of both the phase selection and the measuring zones without interfering with the load. -
Page 17
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Faulty phase identification with load encroachment FMPSPDIS (21) The operation of transmission networks today is in many cases close to the stability limit. Due to environmental considerations Operation area… -
Page 18
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 achieve. Therefore, the function has a built in algorithm for load encroachment, which gives the possibility to enlarge the resistive setting of both the phase selection and the measuring zones without interfering with the load. -
Page 19: Current Protection
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 5. Current protection Directional operation can be combined together with corresponding communication logic in permissive or blocking Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection PHPIOC (50) teleprotection scheme. Current reversal and weak-end infeed The instantaneous three phase overcurrent function has a low functionality are available as well.
-
Page 20: Voltage Protection
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Thermal overload protection, one time constant LPTTR Pole discordance protection CCRPLD (52PD) The increasing utilizing of the power system closer to the An open phase can cause negative and zero sequence currents…
-
Page 21: Frequency Protection
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Two step overvoltage protection (OV2PTOV, 59) function can Underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81) is used for load be used to detect open line ends, normally then combined with shedding systems, remedial action schemes, gas turbine a directional reactive over-power function to supervise the startup and so on.
-
Page 22: Secondary System Supervision
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 CVGAPC can also be used to improve phase selection for high For better adaptation to system requirements, an operation resistive ground faults, outside the distance protection reach, mode setting has been introduced which makes it possible to for the transmission line.
-
Page 23
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 close first and the second will only close if the fault proved to function handles interlocking of one bay. The interlocking be transient. function is distributed to each IED and is not dependent on any central function. -
Page 24: Scheme Communication
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 • fast clearance of faults is also achieved at the line end for AutomationBits, command function for DNP3.0 AUTOBITS which the faults are on the part of the line not covered by AutomationBits function for DNP3 (AUTOBITS) is used within its underreaching zone.
-
Page 25
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 The logic can be controlled either by the autorecloser (zone IED. To overcome these conditions, weak-end infeed (WEI) extension) or by the loss-of-load current (loss-of-load echo logic is used. -
Page 26: Logic
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Features: length, as well as all functionality necessary for correct co- operation with autoreclosing functions. • Carrier redundancy to ensure security in DTT scheme • Blocking function output on CR Channel Error The trip function block also includes a settable latch •…
-
Page 27: Monitoring
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 an IED, either for forcing the unused inputs in other function • Trip value recorder blocks to a certain level/value, or for creating certain logic. • Disturbance recorder • Fault locator 13.
-
Page 28
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 The event recorder logs all selected binary input signals the Event function (EVENT). The event function block is used for connected to the Disturbance report function. Each recording remote communication. -
Page 29: Metering
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 35-40 degrees apart the accuracy can be still maintained with the advanced compensation included in fault locator. 14. Metering Pulse counter logic PCGGIO Pulse counter (PCGGIO) function counts externally generated binary pulses, for instance pulses coming from an external energy meter, for calculation of energy consumption values.
-
Page 30: Remote Communication
An IED can communicate with up to 4 remote IEDs. SPA communication protocol A single glass or plastic port is provided for the ABB SPA Binary signal transfer to remote end, 192 signals protocol. This allows extensions of simple substation…
-
Page 31
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 enables extensive monitoring and evaluation of operation of the leased telephone lines. The module supports 64 kbit/s data IED and for all associated electrical circuits. communication between IEDs. Binary output module BOM… -
Page 32
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 xx05000003.vsd IEC05000003 V1 EN Figure 11. 1/2 x 19” case with rear cover xx05000004.vsd IEC05000004 V1 EN Figure 12. Side-by-side mounting Case size 6U, 1/2 x 19” 10.47 8.81 7.92… -
Page 33
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 • Wall mounting kit See ordering for details about available mounting alternatives. -
Page 34: Connection Diagrams
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 20. Connection diagrams Table 1. Designations for 1/2 x 19” casing with 1 TRM slot Module Rear Positions BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM or X31 and X32 etc. to X51…
-
Page 35
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Table 2. Designations for 3/4 x 19” casing with 1 TRM slot Module Rear Positions BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM or X31 and X32 etc. to X101 and X102 X301:A, B, C, D… -
Page 36
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Table 3. Designations for 3/4 x 19” casing with 2 TRM slot Module Rear Positions BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM or X31 and X32 etc. to X71 and X301:A, B, C, D… -
Page 37
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Table 4. Designations for 1/1 x 19” casing with 1 TRM slot Module Rear Positions BIM, BOM, SOM, X31 and X32 etc. to X161 IOM or MIM and X162… -
Page 38
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Table 5. Designations for 1/1 x 19” casing with 2 TRM slots Module Rear Positions BIM, BOM, SOM, X31 and X32 etc. to X131 IOM or MIM and X132… -
Page 39
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Table 6. CT/VT-input designation AI01 AI02 AI03 AI04 AI05 AI06 AI07 AI08 AI09 AI10 AI11 AI12 12I, 1A 12I, 5A 9I+3V, 1A 110-220V 110-220V 110-220V 9I+3V, 5A 110-220V 110-220V… -
Page 40
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 1MRK002802-AB-11-670-1.2-PG-ANSI V1 EN Figure 15. Binary input module (BIM). Input contacts named XA corresponds to rear position X31, X41, etc. and input contacts named XB to rear position X32, X42, etc. -
Page 41
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 1MRK002802-AB-8-670-1.2-PG-ANSI V1 EN Figure 20. IED with basic functionality communication interfaces… -
Page 42: Technical Data
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 21. Technical data General Definitions Reference value The specified value of an influencing factor to which are referred the characteristics of the equipment Nominal range The range of values of an influencing quantity (factor) within which, under specified conditions, the equipment meets the specified…
-
Page 43
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Table 8. TRM — Energizing quantities, rated values and limits for measuring transformer modules Quantity Rated value Nominal range Current = 1 or 5 A (0-1.8) × I at I = 1 A (0-1.6) ×… -
Page 44
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Auxiliary DC voltage Table 11. PSM — Power supply module Quantity Rated value Nominal range Auxiliary dc voltage, EL (input) EL = (24 — 60) V EL ± 20% EL = (90 — 250) V EL ±… -
Page 45
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Table 13. BIM — Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities Quantity Rated value Nominal range Binary inputs DC voltage, RL 24/30 V RL ± 20% 48/60 V RL ±… -
Page 46
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Table 15. IOM — Binary input/output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2) Function or quantity Trip and signal relays Fast signal relays (parallel reed relay) Binary outputs Max system voltage… -
Page 47
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Table 16. IOM with MOV and IOM 220/250 V, 110mA — contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2) Function or quantity Trip and Signal relays Fast signal relays (parallel reed relay) -
Page 48
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Table 17. SOM — Static Output Module (reference standard: IEC 61810-2): Static binary outputs Function of quantity Static binary output trip Rated voltage 48 — 60 VDC 110 — 250 VDC… -
Page 49
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Table 19. BOM — Binary output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2) Function or quantity Trip and Signal relays Binary outputs Max system voltage 250 V AC, DC… -
Page 50
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Table 22. Frequency influence (reference standard: IEC 60255–1) Dependence on Within nominal range Influence Frequency dependence, operate value ± 2.5 Hz for 50 Hz ± 1.0% / Hz ± 3.0 Hz for 60 Hz Frequency dependence for distance protection operate value ±… -
Page 51
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Table 24. Insulation Test Type test values Reference standard Dielectric test 2.0 kV AC, 1 min. ANSI C37.90 Impulse voltage test 5 kV, 1.2/50 ms, 0.5 J Insulation resistance >100 MW at 500 VDC… -
Page 52
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Differential protection Table 28. 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF (87) Function Range or value Accuracy Operate voltage (20-400) V ± 1.0% of I I=V/R Reset ratio >95% Maximum continuous power V>Pickup… -
Page 53
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Table 30. Additional security logic for differential protection STSGGIO (11) Function Range or value Accuracy Operate current, zero sequence (1-100)% of lBase ±1,0% of I Operate current, low operation (1-100)% of lBase ±1,0% of I… -
Page 54
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Impedance protection Table 31. Distance measuring zone, Quad ZMQPDIS (21) Function Range or value Accuracy Number of zones 5 with selectable direction Minimum operate residual (5-1000)% of IBase current, zone 1… -
Page 55
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Table 32. Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines ZMCPDIS, ZMCAPDIS (21) Function Range or value Accuracy Number of zones 5 with selectable direction IBase Minimum operate residual… -
Page 56
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Table 34. Full-scheme distance protection, Mho characteristic ZMHPDIS (21) Function Range or value Accuracy Number of zones with selectable 5 with selectable direction directions Minimum operate current (10–30)% of I… -
Page 57
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Table 36. Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic, separate settings ZMRPDIS, ZMRAPDIS (21) Function Range or value Accuracy Number of zones 5 with selectable direction Minimum operate residual (5-1000)% of IBase… -
Page 58
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Table 37. Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic FRPSPDIS (21) Function Range or value Accuracy Minimum operate current (5-500)% of IBase Reactive reach, positive (0.50–3000.00) Ω/phase ± 2.0% static accuracy sequence ±… -
Page 59
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Table 40. Phase preference logic PPLPHIZ Function Range or value Accuracy Operate value, phase-to-phase (10.0 — 100.0)% of VBase ± 0,5% of V and phase-to-neutral undervoltage Reset ratio, undervoltage <… -
Page 60
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Current protection Table 42. Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection PHPIOC (50) Function Range or value Accuracy Operate current (1-2500)% of lBase ± 1.0% of I at I £ I ± 1.0% of I at I > I Reset ratio >… -
Page 61
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Table 44. Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC (50N) Function Range or value Accuracy Operate current (1-2500)% of lBase ± 1.0% of I at I £ I ± 1.0% of I at I > I Reset ratio >… -
Page 62
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Table 46. Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC (46I2) Function Range or value Accuracy lBase Operate value, negative (1-2500)% of ± 1.0% of I at I £ I sequence current, step 1-4 ±… -
Page 63
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Table 47. Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection SDEPSDE (67N) Function Range or value Accuracy lBase Operate level for 3I ·cosj (0.25-200.00)% of ± 1.0% of I at I £ I directional residual ±… -
Page 64
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Table 47. Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection SDEPSDE (67N) , continued Function Range or value Accuracy Operate time, non-directional 60 ms typically at 0 to 2 x I… -
Page 65
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Table 49. Breaker failure protection CCRBRF (50BF) Function Range or value Accuracy lBase Operate phase current (5-200)% of ± 1.0% of I at I £ I ± 1.0% of I at I > I Reset ratio, phase current >… -
Page 66
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Table 52. Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP (37) Function Range or value Accuracy SBase Power level (0.0–500.0)% of ± 1.0% of S at S < S ± 1.0% of S at S > S At low setting: (0.5-2.0)% of… -
Page 67
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Voltage protection Table 55. Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV (27) Function Range or value Accuracy Operate voltage, low and high step (1–100)% of VBase ± 0.5% of V Absolute hysteresis (0–100)% of… -
Page 68
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Table 57. Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV (59N) Function Range or value Accuracy VBase Operate voltage, step 1 and step 2 (1-200)% of ± 0.5% of V at V < V ±… -
Page 69
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Table 60. Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV (27) Function Range or value Accuracy Operate voltage (0–100)% of VBase ± 0.5% of V Pulse timer (0.050–60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms Timers (0.000–60.000) s… -
Page 70
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Frequency protection Table 61. Underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81) Function Range or value Accuracy Operate value, pickup function (35.00-75.00) Hz ± 2.0 mHz Operate time, pickup function 100 ms typically… -
Page 71
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Table 63. Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC (81) Function Range or value Accuracy Operate value, pickup function (-10.00-10.00) Hz/s ± 10.0 mHz/s Operate value, internal blocking level (0-100)% of VBase ±… -
Page 72
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Multipurpose protection Table 64. General current and voltage protection CVGAPC Function Range or value Accuracy Measuring current input Phase A, Phase B, Phase C, PosSeq, NegSeq, 3*ZeroSeq, MaxPh, MinPh,… -
Page 73
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Table 64. General current and voltage protection CVGAPC , continued Function Range or value Accuracy Reset time pickup undervoltage 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x V High and low voltage limit, voltage dependent operation (1.0 — 200.0)% of VBase… -
Page 74
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Secondary system supervision Table 65. Current circuit supervision CCSRDIF (87) Function Range or value Accuracy Operate current (5-200)% of I ± 10.0% of I at I £ I ± 10.0% of I at I > I… -
Page 75
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Control Table 67. Synchronizing, synchronism check and energizing check SESRSYN (25) Function Range or value Accuracy Phase shift, j (-180 to 180) degrees line Voltage ratio, V 0.500 — 2.000… -
Page 76
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Table 68. Autorecloser SMBRREC (79) Function Range or value Accuracy Number of autoreclosing shots 1 — 5 Autoreclosing open time: shot 1 — t1 1Ph (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms… -
Page 77
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Scheme communication Table 69. Scheme communication logic for distance or overcurrent protection ZCPSCH (85) Function Range or value Accuracy Scheme type Intertrip Permissive Underreach Permissive Overreach Blocking Co-ordination time for blocking (0.000-60.000) s… -
Page 78
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Table 72. Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase segregated communication ZC1WPSCH Function Range or value Accuracy Detection pickup phase to (10-90)% of VBase ± 0.5% of V… -
Page 79
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Direct transfer trip Table 75. Low active power and power factor protection LAPPGAPC (37_55) Function Range or value Accuracy Operate value, low active power (2.0-100.0)% of SBase ± 1,0% of S Reset ratio, low active power <105%… -
Page 80
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Table 79. Negative sequence overvoltage protection LCNSPTOV (47) Function Range or value Accuracy Operate value, negative sequence overvoltage (1-200)% of VBase ± 0.5% of V at V<V ± 0.5% of V at V>V Reset ratio, negative sequence overvoltage >95%… -
Page 81
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Table 82. Zero sequence overcurrent protection LCZSPTOC (51N) Function Range or value Accuracy Operate value, zero sequence overcurrent (1-2500)% of IBase ± 1.0% of I at I<I ± 1.0% of I at I>I Reset ratio, zero sequence overcurrent >95%… -
Page 82
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Logic Table 85. Tripping logic SMPPTRC (94) Function Range or value Accuracy Trip action 3-ph, 1/3-ph, 1/2/3-ph Minimum trip pulse length (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms Timers (0.000-60.000) s… -
Page 83
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Monitoring Table 87. Measurements CVMMXN Function Range or value Accuracy Frequency (0.95-1.05) × f ± 2.0 mHz Voltage (0.1-1.5) ×V ± 0.5% of V at V£V ± 0.5% of V at V > V Connected current (0.2-4.0) ×… -
Page 84
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Table 91. Current sequence component measurement CMSQI Function Range or value Accuracy Current positive sequence, I1 (0.1–4.0) × I ± 0.2% of I at I ≤ 0.5 × I Three phase settings ±… -
Page 85
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Table 95. Disturbance report DRPRDRE Function Range or value Accuracy Pre-fault time (0.05–9.90) s Post-fault time (0.1–10.0) s Limit time (0.5–10.0) s Maximum number of recordings 100, first in — first out… -
Page 86
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Table 98. Indications Function Value Buffer capacity Maximum number of indications presented for single disturbance Maximum number of recorded disturbances Table 99. Event recorder Function Value Buffer capacity Maximum number of events in disturbance report… -
Page 87
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Metering Table 102. Pulse counter PCGGIO Function Setting range Accuracy Input frequency See Binary Input Module (BIM) Cycle time for report of counter (1–3600) s value Table 103. Energy metering ETPMMTR… -
Page 88
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Station communication Table 104. IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol Function Value Protocol IEC 61850-8-1 Communication speed for the IEDs 100BASE-FX Protocol IEC 608–5–103 Communication speed for the IEDs 9600 or 19200 Bd Protocol DNP3.0… -
Page 89
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Table 109. SLM – SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3 port Quantity Range or value Optical connector Glass fiber: type ST Plastic fiber: type HFBR snap-in Fiber, optical budget Glass fiber: 11 dB (3000ft/1000 m typically *) -
Page 90
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Remote communication Table 113. Line data communication module Characteristic Range or value Type of LDCM Short range (SR) Medium range (MR) Long range (LR) Type of fiber Graded-index Singlemode 9/125 µm Singlemode 9/125 µm… -
Page 91
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Hardware Table 114. Case Material Steel sheet Front plate Steel sheet profile with cut-out for HMI Surface treatment Aluzink preplated steel Finish Light grey (RAL 7035) Table 115. Water and dust protection level according to IEC 60529… -
Page 92
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Basic IED functions Table 119. Self supervision with internal event list Data Value Recording manner Continuous, event controlled List size 40 events, first in-first out Table 120. Time synchronization, time tagging… -
Page 93
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Table 123. IRIG-B Quantity Rated value Number of channels IRIG-B Number of channels PPS Electrical connector: Electrical connector IRIG-B Pulse-width modulated 5 Vpp Amplitude modulated – low level 1-3 Vpp –… -
Page 94
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Inverse characteristic Table 124. ANSI Inverse time characteristics Function Range or value Accuracy Operating characteristic: td = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01 æ ö ç ÷ × ç ÷… -
Page 95
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Table 125. IEC Inverse time characteristics Function Range or value Accuracy Operating characteristic: td = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01 æ ö ç ÷ × ç ÷ è ø… -
Page 96
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Table 126. RI and RD type inverse time characteristics Function Range or value Accuracy RI type inverse characteristic td = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01 IEC 60255-151, 5% + 40 ×… -
Page 97
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Table 128. Inverse time characteristics for undervoltage protection Function Range or value Accuracy Type A curve: td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01 5% +40 ms æ ö VPickup V ç… -
Page 98
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Table 129. Inverse time characteristics for residual overvoltage protection Function Range or value Accuracy Type A curve: td = (0.05-1.10) in steps 5% +40 ms of 0.01 æ ö… -
Page 99: Ordering
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 22. Ordering Guidelines Carefully read and follow the set of rules to ensure problem-free order management. Be aware that certain functions can only be ordered in combination with other functions and that some functions require specific hardware selections.
-
Page 100
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Optional functions Differential protection 1Ph High impedance differential protection (HZPDIF, 87) Qty: 1MRK 002 901-HB Additional security logic for differential protection (STSGGIO, 11REL) Qty: 1MRK 002 903-PA… -
Page 101
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Impedance protection Rule: One and only one of the alternatives (Alt. 1-4) can be ordered Alternative 1: Rule: Distance protection and Directional impedance must be ordered together Note: Phase selection FDPSPDIS always included in this package) -
Page 102
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle (FRPSPDIS, 21) Qty: 1MRK 002 925-XA Directional impedance quadrilateral (ZDRDIR, 21D) Qty: 1MRK 002 904-YB Note: Optional with alternative 1 Directional impedance element for mho characteristic (ZDMRDIR, 21D) -
Page 103
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Current protection Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection (PHPIOC, 50) Qty: 1MRK 002 906-AC Four step phase overcurrent protection (OC4PTOC, 51/67) Qty: 1MRK 002 906-BD Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection (EFPIOC, 50N) -
Page 104
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Frequency protection Underfrequency protection (SAPTUF, 81) Qty: 1MRK 002 908-NC Overfrequency protection (SAPTOF, 81) Qty: 1MRK 002 908-RC Rate-of-change frequency protection (SAPFRC, 81) Qty: 1MRK 002 908-SB Multipurpose protection… -
Page 105
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Direct transfer trip Direct transfer trip (DTT) Qty: 1MRK 002 927-XA Station communication Note: Require 2-channel OEM IEC 62439-3 Edition 1 parallel redundancy protocol 1MRK 002 924-YR IEC 62439-3 Edition 2 parallel redundancy protocol… -
Page 106
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Analog system Rule: One Transformer input module must be ordered Note: The same type of connection terminals has to be ordered for both TRMs Transformer input module, compression terminals… -
Page 107
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Transformer input module, compression terminals 6I, 5A, 50/60 Hz Qty: 1MRK 002 247-DH Transformer input module, ring lug terminals 12I, 1A, 50/60 Hz Qty: 1MRK 002 247-CC Transformer input module, ring lug terminals… -
Page 108
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Transformer input module, ring lug terminals 6I, 1A, 50/60 Hz Qty: 1MRK 002 247-DC Transformer input module, ring lug terminals 6I, 5A, 50/60 Hz Qty: 1MRK 002 247-DD Note: One Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization is always delivered with each Transformer input module. -
Page 109
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Binary input/output modules Make BIM with 50 mA inrush current the primary choice. BIM with 50 mA inrush current fulfill additional standards. As a consequence the EMC withstand capability is further increased. -
Page 110
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Binary input module (BIM) with enhanced pulse counting capabilities, 16 inputs RL 24-30 VDC Qty: 1MRK 000 508-HA 10 11 12 13 RL 48-60 VDC Qty: 1MRK 000 508-EA… -
Page 111
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Make IOM with 50 mA inrush current the primary choice. IOM with 50 mA inrush current fulfill additional standards. As a consequence the EMC withstand capability is further increased. -
Page 112
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Station communication ports Note: Optical ethernet module, 2 glass interfaces is not allowed together with SLM. Optical ethernet module, 1 channel glass 1MRK 002 266-AA Optical ethernet module, 2 channel glass 1MRK 002 266-BA Serial and LON communication module, supports SPA/IEC 60870-5-103, LON and DNP 3.0… -
Page 113
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Flush mounting kit for terminal Quantity: 1MRK 000 020-Y Flush mounting kit + IP54 sealing (factory mounted). Cannot be ordered separately thus must be Quantity: 1MRK 002 420-EA specified when ordering a terminal. -
Page 114
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Protection cover Protective cover for rear side of RHGS6, 6U, 1/4 x 19” Quantity: 1MRK 002 420-AE Protective cover for rear side of terminal, 6U, 1/2 x 19” Quantity: 1MRK 002 420-AC Protective cover for rear side of terminal, 6U, 3/4 x 19”… -
Page 115
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI 1MRK505226-BUS D Customized Product version: 1.2 Rule: Specify additional quantity of IED Connect CD requested . Quantity: 1MRK 002 290-AB Rule: Specify the number of printed manuals requested Operator’s manual ANSI Quantity: 1MRK 505 223-UUS… -
Page 116
670 series SPA and signal list 1MRK 500 092-WUS IEC 61850 Data objects list for 670 series 1MRK 500 091-WUS Engineering manual 670 series 1MRK 511 240-UUS Communication set-up for Relion 670 series 1MRK 505 260-UEN More information can be found on www.abb.com/substationautomation. -
Page 118
ABB Inc. 3450 Harvester Road Burlington, ON L7N 3W5, Canada Phone Toll Free: 1-800-HELP-365, menu option #8 ABB Mexico S.A. de C.V. Paseo de las Americas No. 31 Lomas Verdes 3a secc. 53125, Naucalpan, Estado De Mexico, MEXICO Phone (+1) 440-585-7804, menu…
This manual is also suitable for:
Rel670
File Specifications:894/894018-red670.pdf file (10 Aug 2023) |
Accompanying Data:
ABB RED670 Relion 670 series Controller, Power distribution unit PDF Commissioning Manual (Updated: Thursday 10th of August 2023 07:39:13 AM)
Rating: 4.7 (rated by 68 users)
Compatible devices: ACS580-01 drives, System pro M RLI, STD 420E, UniSec DY800, SPAU 341 C, TZIDC-110, REG670, Relion 630 Series RET630.
Recommended Documentation:
Commissioning Manual (Text Version):
(Ocr-Read Summary of Contents of some pages of the ABB RED670 Relion 670 series Document (Main Content), UPD: 10 August 2023)
-
ABB RED670 Relion 670 series User Manual
-
ABB RED670 Relion 670 series User Guide
-
ABB RED670 Relion 670 series PDF Manual
-
ABB RED670 Relion 670 series Owner’s Manuals
Recommended: 920 S EKG, PYD18, DXAI5588-2, PR302, CVM 3000
Links & Tools
-
wattswater.frBA BMDN15-50mmInstallation manualUKITDEFRESPLNLRUDKInstallation and Operation ManualManuale di Installazione e UsoManuel d’Installation et d’UtilisationInstallatie- en bedieningshandleidingInstallations- und BedienungsanleitungManual de instalación y funcionamientoРуководство по м …
BA BM 64
-
OEM-Kit for SINAMICS S120 Chassis-2Document: A5E48010019DMontage des Medium-KitAssembly Medium KitSchutzart-Kit Medium für AIM für Schrankbreite 800 mmProtection Kit Medium for AIM for cabinet width 800mmProduct ID: 6SL3760-8CV00-0FA0 …
6SL3760-8CV00-0FA0 7
-
GE Multilin215 Anderson AvenueL6E 1B3 Markham, ON -CANADAT (905) 294 6222 F (905) 294 8512E [email protected]: www.GEMultilin.comFirmware version: 3.02EnerVista 650 Setup version: 3.02Copyright © 2006 GE MultilinW650Wind Generator Protection SystemInstruction manualGEK-113032AGE MultilinAvda. Pinoa, 1048 …
Multilin W650 622
-
CPS-OPEN4MONITORED DUAL-SIDED PHOTO EYES LiftMaster.comLiftMaster’s® CPS-OPEN4 Monitored Dual-Sided Photo Eyes are weatherproof and durable. The exible rubber housings absorb minor contact allowing the photo eyes to maintain alignment. With its NEMA 4X safety rating, the CPS-OPEN4 provides moi …
CPS-OPEN4 2
Operating Impressions, Questions and Answers:
Relion 670 series
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI Technical reference manual
Document ID: 1MRK505222-UUS Issued: February 2015
Revision: C Product version: 1.2
Copyright 2012 ABB. All rights reserved
Copyright This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written permission from ABB, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party, nor used for any unauthorized purpose.
The software and hardware described in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license.
Trademarks ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group. All other brand or product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.
Warranty Please inquire about the terms of warranty from your nearest ABB representative.
ABB Inc.
1021 Main Campus Drive
Raleigh, NC 27606, USA
Toll Free: 1-800-HELP-365, menu option #8
ABB Inc.
3450 Harvester Road
Burlington, ON L7N 3W5, Canada
Toll Free: 1-800-HELP-365, menu option #8
ABB Mexico S.A. de C.V.
Paseo de las Americas No. 31 Lomas Verdes 3a secc.
53125, Naucalpan, Estado De Mexico, MEXICO
Phone: (+1) 440-585-7804, menu option #8
Disclaimer The data, examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for the concept or product description and are not to be deemed as a statement of guaranteed properties. All persons responsible for applying the equipment addressed in this manual must satisfy themselves that each intended application is suitable and acceptable, including that any applicable safety or other operational requirements are complied with. In particular, any risks in applications where a system failure and/or product failure would create a risk for harm to property or persons (including but not limited to personal injuries or death) shall be the sole responsibility of the person or entity applying the equipment, and those so responsible are hereby requested to ensure that all measures are taken to exclude or mitigate such risks.
This document has been carefully checked by ABB but deviations cannot be completely ruled out. In case any errors are detected, the reader is kindly requested to notify the manufacturer. Other than under explicit contractual commitments, in no event shall ABB be responsible or liable for any loss or damage resulting from the use of this manual or the application of the equipment.
Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility (EMC Directive 2004/108/EC) and concerning electrical equipment for use within specified voltage limits (Low-voltage directive 2006/95/EC). This conformity is the result of tests conducted by ABB in accordance with the product standards EN 50263 and EN 60255-26 for the EMC directive, and with the product standards EN 60255-1 and EN 60255-27 for the low voltage directive. The product is designed in accordance with the international standards of the IEC 60255 series and ANSI C37.90.
Table of contents
Section 1 Introduction………………………………………………………………..35 Introduction to the technical reference manual…………………………………35
About the complete set of manuals for an IED…………………………….35 About the technical reference manual………………………………………..36 This manual……………………………………………………………………………37
Introduction………………………………………………………………………..37 Principle of operation…………………………………………………………..37 Input and output signals………………………………………………………41 Function block……………………………………………………………………41 Setting parameters……………………………………………………………..42 Technical data……………………………………………………………………42
Intended audience…………………………………………………………………..42 Related documents………………………………………………………………….42 Revision notes………………………………………………………………………..43
Section 2 Analog inputs……………………………………………………………..45 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………………45 Operation principle……………………………………………………………………….45 Function block……………………………………………………………………………..46 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………………47
Section 3 Local HMI………………………………………………………………….55 Human machine interface …………………………………………………………….55 Medium size graphic HMI……………………………………………………………..56
Medium………………………………………………………………………………….56 Design……………………………………………………………………………………56
Keypad……………………………………………………………………………………….58 LED……………………………………………………………………………………………59
Introduction…………………………………………………………………………….59 Status indication LEDs…………………………………………………………….59 Indication LEDs………………………………………………………………………60
Local HMI related functions…………………………………………………………..61 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………….61 General setting parameters………………………………………………………61 Status LEDs……………………………………………………………………………61
Design………………………………………………………………………………61
Table of contents
1 Technical reference manual
Function block……………………………………………………………………62 Input and output signals………………………………………………………62
Indication LEDs………………………………………………………………………62 Introduction………………………………………………………………………..62 Design………………………………………………………………………………63 Function block……………………………………………………………………71 Input and output signals………………………………………………………71 Setting parameters……………………………………………………………..72
Section 4 Basic IED functions…………………………………………………….75 Authorization……………………………………………………………………………….75
Principle of operation……………………………………………………………….75 Authorization handling in the IED………………………………………….77
Self supervision with internal event list……………………………………………78 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………….78 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………….78
Internal signals…………………………………………………………………..80 Run-time model………………………………………………………………….82
Function block………………………………………………………………………..83 Output signals…………………………………………………………………………83 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………….83 Technical data………………………………………………………………………..83
Time synchronization……………………………………………………………………84 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………….84 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………….84
General concepts……………………………………………………………….84 Real-time clock (RTC) operation…………………………………………..87 Synchronization alternatives…………………………………………………88 Process bus IEC 61850-9-2LE synchronization………………………91
Function block………………………………………………………………………..91 Output signals…………………………………………………………………………92 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………….92 Technical data………………………………………………………………………..95
Parameter setting groups……………………………………………………………..95 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………….95 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………….95 Function block………………………………………………………………………..96 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………..97 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………….97
ChangeLock function CHNGLCK…………………………………………………..98
Table of contents
2 Technical reference manual
Introduction…………………………………………………………………………….98 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………….98 Function block………………………………………………………………………..99 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………..99 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………….99
Test mode functionality TEST………………………………………………………..99 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………….99 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..100 Function block………………………………………………………………………102 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………102 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..102
IED identifiers……………………………………………………………………………103 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..103 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..103
Product information…………………………………………………………………….103 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..103 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..104 Factory defined settings…………………………………………………………104
Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI……………………………………………..104 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..104 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..105 Function block………………………………………………………………………105 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………105
Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO …………………………………………106 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..106 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..106 Function block………………………………………………………………………107 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………107
Signal matrix for mA inputs SMMI………………………………………………..107 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..107 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..108 Function block………………………………………………………………………108 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………108
Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI…………………………………………….109 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..109 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..109 Frequency values………………………………………………………………….109 Function block………………………………………………………………………111 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………111 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..112
Table of contents
3 Technical reference manual
Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM…………………………………………….114 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..114 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..114 Function block………………………………………………………………………115 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………115 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..115
Authority status ATHSTAT…………………………………………………………..116 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..116 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..116 Function block………………………………………………………………………117 Output signals……………………………………………………………………….117 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..117
Denial of service DOS………………………………………………………………..117 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..117 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..117 Function blocks……………………………………………………………………..118 Signals…………………………………………………………………………………118 Settings………………………………………………………………………………..119
Section 5 Differential protection………………………………………………..121 Line differential protection……………………………………………………………121
Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..122 Line differential protection, 3 or 6 CT sets L3CPDIF, L6CPDIF………………………………………………………………………….122 Line differential protection 3 or 6 CT sets, with in-zone transformers LT3CPDIF, LT6CPDIF……………………………………124 Analog signal transfer for line differential protection……………….124
Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..126 Algorithm and logic……………………………………………………………126 Time synchronization…………………………………………………………134 Analog signal communication for line differential protection…….135 Open CT detection feature…………………………………………………138 Binary signal transfer…………………………………………………………140 Line differential coordination function LDLPDIF (87L)…………….140
Function block………………………………………………………………………141 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………145 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..150 Technical data………………………………………………………………………160
1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF (87)…………………161 Identification…………………………………………………………………………161
Table of contents
4 Technical reference manual
Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..161 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..162
Logic diagram…………………………………………………………………..162 Function block………………………………………………………………………163 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………163 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..163 Technical data………………………………………………………………………164
Additional security logic for differential protection STSGGIO (11)……..164 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..164 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..165 Function block………………………………………………………………………170 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………170 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..171 Technical data………………………………………………………………………172
Section 6 Impedance protection ……………………………………………….173 Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic ZMQPDIS (21), ZMQAPDIS (21), ZDRDIR (21D)…………………………………………..173
Identification…………………………………………………………………………173 Introduction(21)…………………………………………………………………….173 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..174
Full scheme measurement…………………………………………………174 Impedance characteristic……………………………………………………175 Minimum operating current…………………………………………………179 Measuring principles………………………………………………………….180 Directional impedance element for quadrilateral characteristics…………………………………………………………………..182 Simplified logic diagrams……………………………………………………185
Function block………………………………………………………………………189 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………190 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..192 Technical data………………………………………………………………………194
Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines ZMCPDIS (21), ZMCAPDIS (21), ZDSRDIR (21D)………………………………………………………………………………………..195
Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..195 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..196
Full scheme measurement…………………………………………………196 Impedance characteristic……………………………………………………197 Minimum operating current…………………………………………………201 Measuring principles………………………………………………………….202
Table of contents
5 Technical reference manual
Directionality for series compensation………………………………….204 Simplified logic diagrams……………………………………………………207
Function block………………………………………………………………………211 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………212 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..214 Technical data………………………………………………………………………218
Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with fixed angle FDPSPDIS (21)…………………………………………………………………………218
Identification…………………………………………………………………………218 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..218 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..219
Phase-to-ground fault………………………………………………………..221 Phase-to-phase fault…………………………………………………………223 Three-phase faults…………………………………………………………….225 Load encroachment…………………………………………………………..225 Minimum operate currents………………………………………………….230 Simplified logic diagrams……………………………………………………231
Function block………………………………………………………………………236 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………236 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..237 Technical data………………………………………………………………………239
Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic ZMHPDIS (21)………………………………………………………………………………………….239
Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..239 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..241
Full scheme measurement…………………………………………………241 Impedance characteristic……………………………………………………241 Basic operation characteristics……………………………………………242 Theory of operation…………………………………………………………..244 Simplified logic diagrams……………………………………………………254
Function block………………………………………………………………………257 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………258 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..259 Technical data………………………………………………………………………260
Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for earth faults ZMMPDIS (21), ZMMAPDIS (21)…………………………………………………261
Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..261 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..262
Full scheme measurement…………………………………………………262 Impedance characteristic……………………………………………………263
Table of contents
6 Technical reference manual
Minimum operating current…………………………………………………265 Measuring principles………………………………………………………….266 Directional lines………………………………………………………………..268 Simplified logic diagrams……………………………………………………270
Function block………………………………………………………………………273 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………273 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..275 Technical data………………………………………………………………………276
Directional impedance element for mho characteristic and additional distance protection directional function for earth faults ZDMRDIR (21D), ZDARDIR………………………………………………………..276
Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..277 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..277
Directional impedance element for mho characteristic ZDMRDIR (21D)……………………………………………………………….277 Additional distance protection directional function for ground faults ZDARDIR………………………………………………………………..280
Function block………………………………………………………………………282 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………283 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..284
Mho impedance supervision logic ZSMGAPC………………………………..285 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..285 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..285
Fault inception detection…………………………………………………….285 Function block………………………………………………………………………287 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………287 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..288
Faulty phase identification with load encroachment FMPSPDIS (21)………………………………………………………………………………………….288
Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..288 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..289
The phase selection function………………………………………………289 Function block………………………………………………………………………301 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………302 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..302 Technical data………………………………………………………………………303
Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic, separate settings ZMRPDIS (21), ZMRAPDIS (21) and ZDRDIR (21D)………….303
Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..304 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..305
Full scheme measurement…………………………………………………305
Table of contents
7 Technical reference manual
Impedance characteristic……………………………………………………306 Minimum operating current…………………………………………………310 Measuring principles………………………………………………………….310 Directional impedance element for quadrilateral characteristics…………………………………………………………………..313 Simplified logic diagrams……………………………………………………316
Function block………………………………………………………………………320 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………321 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..323 Technical data………………………………………………………………………325
Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle FRPSPDIS (21)…………………………………………………………………………326
Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..326 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..326
Phase-to-ground fault………………………………………………………..329 Phase-to-phase fault…………………………………………………………331 Three-phase faults…………………………………………………………….332 Load encroachment…………………………………………………………..333 Minimum operate currents………………………………………………….338 Simplified logic diagrams……………………………………………………339
Function block………………………………………………………………………344 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………344 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..345 Technical data………………………………………………………………………346
Power swing detection ZMRPSB (68)…………………………………………..347 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..347 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..347
Resistive reach in forward direction……………………………………..349 Resistive reach in reverse direction……………………………………..349 Reactive reach in forward and reverse direction……………………350 Basic detection logic………………………………………………………….350 Operating and inhibit conditions………………………………………….352
Function block………………………………………………………………………353 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………354 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..354 Technical data………………………………………………………………………355
Power swing logic ZMRPSL ……………………………………………………….356 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..356 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..356
Communication and tripping logic……………………………………….356
Table of contents
8 Technical reference manual
Blocking logic……………………………………………………………………358 Function block………………………………………………………………………359 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………359 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..360
Pole slip protection PSPPPAM (78)………………………………………………360 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..360 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..361 Function block………………………………………………………………………366 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………366 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..367 Technical data………………………………………………………………………368
Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage and current based ZCVPSOF ………………………………………………………………………………..368
Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..368 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..369 Function block………………………………………………………………………371 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………371 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..371 Technical data………………………………………………………………………372
Phase preference logic PPLPHIZ…………………………………………………372 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..372 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..373 Function block………………………………………………………………………375 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………376 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..376
Section 7 Current protection……………………………………………………..379 Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output PHPIOC (50)……………………………………………………………………………..379
Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..379 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..379 Function block………………………………………………………………………380 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………380 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..381 Technical data………………………………………………………………………381
Four step phase overcurrent protection OC4PTOC (51/67)……………..381 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..382 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..382 Function block………………………………………………………………………388 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………388
Table of contents
9 Technical reference manual
Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..390 Technical data………………………………………………………………………396
Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC (50N)………….396 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..397 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..397 Function block………………………………………………………………………397 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………398 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..398 Technical data………………………………………………………………………398
Four step residual overcurrent protection, zero, negative sequence direction EF4PTOC (51N/67N)…………………………………………………….399
Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..399 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..400
Operating quantity within the function………………………………….400 Internal polarizing……………………………………………………………..401 External polarizing for ground-fault function………………………….403 Base quantities within the protection……………………………………404 Internal ground-fault protection structure………………………………404 Four residual overcurrent steps…………………………………………..404 Directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison function………………………………………………………….405 Second harmonic blocking element……………………………………..408 Switch on to fault feature……………………………………………………410
Function block………………………………………………………………………413 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………414 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..415 Technical data………………………………………………………………………420
Four step directional negative phase sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC (46I2)…………………………………………………………421
Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..421 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..422
Operating quantity within the function………………………………….422 Internal polarizing facility of the function……………………………….423 External polarizing for negative sequence function………………..424 Base quantities within the function………………………………………424 Internal negative sequence protection structure…………………….424 Four negative sequence overcurrent stages…………………………424 Directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison function………………………………………………………….426
Function block………………………………………………………………………429
Table of contents
10 Technical reference manual
Input and output signals…………………………………………………………429 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..430 Technical data………………………………………………………………………435
Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection SDEPSDE (67N)………………………………………………………………………..436
Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..436 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..438
Function inputs…………………………………………………………………438 Function block………………………………………………………………………445 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………445 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..446 Technical data………………………………………………………………………448
Thermal overload protection, one time constant LPTTR………………….449 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..449 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..450 Function block………………………………………………………………………454 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………454 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..455 Technical data………………………………………………………………………456
Breaker failure protection CCRBRF (50BF)……………………………………456 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..457 Operation principle………………………………………………………………..457 Function block………………………………………………………………………460 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………460 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..461 Technical data………………………………………………………………………461
Stub protection STBPTOC (50STB)……………………………………………..462 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..462 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..462 Function block………………………………………………………………………463 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………464 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..464 Technical data………………………………………………………………………465
Pole discrepancy protection CCRPLD (52PD)……………………………….465 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..465 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..466
Pole discrepancy signaling from circuit breaker…………………….468 Unsymmetrical current detection…………………………………………468
Function block………………………………………………………………………469 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………469
Table of contents
11 Technical reference manual
Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..470 Technical data………………………………………………………………………470
Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP (37)…………………………470 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..471 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..472
Low pass filtering………………………………………………………………474 Calibration of analog inputs………………………………………………..474
Function block………………………………………………………………………476 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………476 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..477 Technical data………………………………………………………………………478
Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP (32)…………………………..478 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..478 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..479
Low pass filtering………………………………………………………………482 Calibration of analog inputs………………………………………………..482
Function block………………………………………………………………………484 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………484 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..485 Technical data………………………………………………………………………486
Broken conductor check BRCPTOC (46)………………………………………486 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..486 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..487 Function block………………………………………………………………………488 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………488 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..489 Technical data………………………………………………………………………489
Section 8 Voltage protection…………………………………………………….491 Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV (27)…………………………..491
Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..491 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..491
Measurement principle………………………………………………………492 Time delay……………………………………………………………………….492 Blocking…………………………………………………………………………..498 Design…………………………………………………………………………….499
Function block………………………………………………………………………501 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………501 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..502 Technical data………………………………………………………………………504
Table of contents
12 Technical reference manual
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV (59)……………………………505 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..505 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..505
Measurement principle………………………………………………………506 Time delay……………………………………………………………………….507 Blocking…………………………………………………………………………..512 Design…………………………………………………………………………….512
Function block………………………………………………………………………514 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………514 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..515 Technical data………………………………………………………………………517
Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV (59N)……………518 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..518 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..518
Measurement principle………………………………………………………519 Time delay……………………………………………………………………….519 Blocking…………………………………………………………………………..524 Design…………………………………………………………………………….524
Function block………………………………………………………………………525 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………526 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..526 Technical data………………………………………………………………………528
Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH (24)……………………………………..529 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..529 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..529
Measured voltage……………………………………………………………..532 Operate time of the overexcitation protection………………………..533 Cooling……………………………………………………………………………537 Overexcitation protection function measurands…………………….537 Overexcitation alarm………………………………………………………….538 Logic diagram…………………………………………………………………..539
Function block………………………………………………………………………539 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………540 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..540 Technical data………………………………………………………………………541
Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV (60)……………………………….542 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..542 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..542 Function block………………………………………………………………………544 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………544
Table of contents
13 Technical reference manual
Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..545 Technical data………………………………………………………………………545
Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV (27)…………………………………………..546 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..546 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..546 Function block………………………………………………………………………547 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………548 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..548 Technical data………………………………………………………………………549
Section 9 Frequency protection…………………………………………………551 Underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81)………………………………………551
Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..551 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..551
Measurement principle………………………………………………………552 Time delay……………………………………………………………………….552 Voltage dependent time delay…………………………………………….553 Blocking…………………………………………………………………………..554 Design…………………………………………………………………………….554
Function block………………………………………………………………………555 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………555 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..556 Technical data………………………………………………………………………557
Overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81)………………………………………..557 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..558 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..558
Measurement principle………………………………………………………558 Time delay……………………………………………………………………….558 Blocking…………………………………………………………………………..559 Design…………………………………………………………………………….559
Function block………………………………………………………………………560 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………560 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..561 Technical data………………………………………………………………………561
Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC (81)……………………….561 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..562 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..562
Measurement principle………………………………………………………562 Time delay……………………………………………………………………….563 Blocking…………………………………………………………………………..563
Table of contents
14 Technical reference manual
Design…………………………………………………………………………….563 Function block………………………………………………………………………565 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………565 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..565 Technical data………………………………………………………………………566
Section 10 Multipurpose protection……………………………………………..567 General current and voltage protection CVGAPC…………………………..567
Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..567 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..567
Measured quantities within CVGAPC…………………………………..567 Base quantities for CVGAPC function………………………………….570 Built-in overcurrent protection steps…………………………………….570 Built-in undercurrent protection steps…………………………………..576 Built-in overvoltage protection steps…………………………………….577 Built-in undervoltage protection steps………………………………….577 Logic diagram…………………………………………………………………..577
Function block………………………………………………………………………583 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………584 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..585 Technical data………………………………………………………………………593
Section 11 Secondary system supervision……………………………………597 Current circuit supervision CCSRDIF (87)……………………………………..597
Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..597 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..597 Function block………………………………………………………………………599 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………599 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..600 Technical data………………………………………………………………………600
Fuse failure supervision SDDRFUF………………………………………………600 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..601 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..601
Zero and negative sequence detection………………………………..601 Delta current and delta voltage detection……………………………..605 Dead line detection……………………………………………………………607 Main logic………………………………………………………………………..607
Function block………………………………………………………………………611 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………611 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..612 Technical data………………………………………………………………………613
Table of contents
15 Technical reference manual
Section 12 Control…………………………………………………………………….615 Synchronism check, energizing check, and synchronizing SESRSYN (25)………………………………………………………………………….615
Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..615 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..616
Basic functionality……………………………………………………………..616 Logic diagrams…………………………………………………………………616
Function block………………………………………………………………………626 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………627 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..629 Technical data………………………………………………………………………632
Autorecloser SMBRREC (79)………………………………………………………633 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..633 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..633
Logic Diagrams…………………………………………………………………633 Auto-reclosing operation Disabled and Enabled……………………634 Auto-reclosing mode selection……………………………………………634 Initiate auto-reclosing and conditions for initiation of a reclosing cycle………………………………………………………………….634 Control of the auto-reclosing open time for shot 1………………….636 Long trip signal…………………………………………………………………637 Time sequence diagrams…………………………………………………..643
Function block………………………………………………………………………648 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………648 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..650 Technical data………………………………………………………………………652
Apparatus control APC……………………………………………………………….652 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..652 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..653 Error handling……………………………………………………………………….653 Bay control QCBAY……………………………………………………………….655
Introduction………………………………………………………………………655 Principle of operation…………………………………………………………655 Function block………………………………………………………………….657 Input and output signals…………………………………………………….657 Setting parameters……………………………………………………………658
Local/Remote switch LOCREM, LOCREMCTRL……………………….658 Introduction………………………………………………………………………658 Principle of operation…………………………………………………………658
Table of contents
16 Technical reference manual
Function block………………………………………………………………….660 Input and output signals…………………………………………………….660 Setting parameters……………………………………………………………661
Switch controller SCSWI…………………………………………………………662 Introduction………………………………………………………………………662 Principle of operation…………………………………………………………662 Function block………………………………………………………………….667 Input and output signals…………………………………………………….667 Setting parameters……………………………………………………………669
Circuit breaker SXCBR…………………………………………………………..669 Introduction………………………………………………………………………669 Principle of operation…………………………………………………………670 Function block………………………………………………………………….674 Input and output signals…………………………………………………….674 Setting parameters……………………………………………………………675
Circuit switch SXSWI……………………………………………………………..675 Introduction………………………………………………………………………675 Principle of operation…………………………………………………………676 Function block………………………………………………………………….680 Input and output signals…………………………………………………….680 Setting parameters……………………………………………………………681
Bay reserve QCRSV………………………………………………………………681 Introduction………………………………………………………………………681 Principle of operation…………………………………………………………682 Function block………………………………………………………………….684 Input and output signals…………………………………………………….685 Setting parameters……………………………………………………………686
Reservation input RESIN………………………………………………………..686 Introduction………………………………………………………………………686 Principle of operation…………………………………………………………686 Function block………………………………………………………………….688 Input and output signals…………………………………………………….689 Setting parameters……………………………………………………………690
Interlocking (3)…………………………………………………………………………..690 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..690 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..691 Logical node for interlocking SCILO (3)…………………………………….694
Introduction………………………………………………………………………694 Logic diagram…………………………………………………………………..695 Function block………………………………………………………………….695
Table of contents
17 Technical reference manual
Input and output signals…………………………………………………….695 Interlocking for busbar grounding switch BB_ES (3)…………………..696
Introduction………………………………………………………………………696 Function block………………………………………………………………….696 Logic diagram…………………………………………………………………..697 Input and output signals…………………………………………………….697
Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS (3)………………………697 Introduction………………………………………………………………………697 Function block………………………………………………………………….698 Logic diagram…………………………………………………………………..699 Input and output signals…………………………………………………….700
Interlocking for bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC (3)………………702 Introduction………………………………………………………………………702 Function block………………………………………………………………….702 Logic diagram…………………………………………………………………..703 Input and output signals…………………………………………………….704
Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC (3)…………………………….704 Introduction………………………………………………………………………705 Function block………………………………………………………………….706 Logic diagram…………………………………………………………………..707 Input and output signals…………………………………………………….709
Interlocking for breaker-and-a-half diameter BH (3)……………………712 Introduction………………………………………………………………………712 Function blocks…………………………………………………………………714 Logic diagrams…………………………………………………………………716 Input and output signals…………………………………………………….721
Interlocking for double CB bay DB (3)………………………………………725 Introduction………………………………………………………………………726 Function block………………………………………………………………….727 Logic diagrams…………………………………………………………………729 Input and output signals ……………………………………………………732
Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE (3)……………………………………..736 Introduction………………………………………………………………………736 Function block………………………………………………………………….738 Logic diagram…………………………………………………………………..739 Input and output signals…………………………………………………….744
Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO (3)…………………………747 Introduction………………………………………………………………………747 Function block………………………………………………………………….748 Logic diagram…………………………………………………………………..749
Table of contents
18 Technical reference manual
Input and output signals…………………………………………………….751 Position evaluation POS_EVAL……………………………………………….753
Introduction………………………………………………………………………753 Logic diagram…………………………………………………………………..753 Function block………………………………………………………………….753 Input and output signals…………………………………………………….753
Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation SLGGIO……………………………………………………………………………………754
Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..754 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..754
Functionality and behaviour ……………………………………………….756 Graphical display………………………………………………………………756
Function block………………………………………………………………………758 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………758 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..760
Selector mini switch VSGGIO………………………………………………………760 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..760 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..760 Function block………………………………………………………………………761 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………762 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..762
IEC61850 generic communication I/O functions DPGGIO……………….762 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..763 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..763 Function block………………………………………………………………………763 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………763 Settings………………………………………………………………………………..764
Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GGIO………………………….764 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..764 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..764 Function block………………………………………………………………………765 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………765 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..766
AutomationBits, command function for DNP3.0 AUTOBITS…………….766 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..767 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..767 Function block………………………………………………………………………768 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………768 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..769
Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD……………………………………785
Table of contents
19 Technical reference manual
Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..785 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..785 Function block………………………………………………………………………786 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………786 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..787
Section 13 Scheme communication…………………………………………….789 Scheme communication logic for distance or overcurrent protection ZCPSCH(85)………………………………………………………………789
Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..789 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..790
Blocking scheme………………………………………………………………790 Permissive underreaching scheme……………………………………..790 Permissive overreaching scheme………………………………………..791 Unblocking scheme…………………………………………………………..791 Intertrip scheme………………………………………………………………..792 Simplified logic diagram……………………………………………………..792
Function block………………………………………………………………………794 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………794 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..795 Technical data………………………………………………………………………795
Phase segregated scheme communication logic for distance protection ZC1PPSCH (85)…………………………………………………………796
Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..796 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..796
Blocking scheme………………………………………………………………797 Permissive underreach scheme………………………………………….798 Permissive overreach scheme……………………………………………798 Unblocking scheme…………………………………………………………..798 Intertrip scheme………………………………………………………………..799 Simplified logic diagram……………………………………………………..799
Function block………………………………………………………………………801 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………801 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..803 Technical data………………………………………………………………………803
Current reversal and WEI logic for distance protection 3-phase ZCRWPSCH (85)……………………………………………………………………….803
Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..804 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..804
Current reversal logic………………………………………………………..804 Weak-end infeed logic……………………………………………………….805
Table of contents
20 Technical reference manual
Function block………………………………………………………………………806 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………806 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..807 Technical data………………………………………………………………………808
Local acceleration logic ZCLCPLAL……………………………………………..808 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..808 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..808
Zone extension…………………………………………………………………808 Loss-of-Load acceleration………………………………………………….809
Function block………………………………………………………………………810 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………810 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..811
Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection ECPSCH (85)……………………………………………………………………………811
Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..811 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..812
Blocking scheme………………………………………………………………812 Permissive under/overreaching scheme………………………………813 Unblocking scheme…………………………………………………………..815
Function block………………………………………………………………………816 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………816 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..817 Technical data………………………………………………………………………817
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection ECRWPSCH (85)………………………………………817
Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..818 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..818
Directional comparison logic function…………………………………..818 Fault current reversal logic…………………………………………………819 Weak-end infeed logic……………………………………………………….819
Function block………………………………………………………………………821 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………821 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..822 Technical data………………………………………………………………………822
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase segregated communication ZC1WPSCH (85)…………………………………………………822
Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..823 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..823
Current reversal logic ……………………………………………………….823 Function block………………………………………………………………………825
Table of contents
21 Technical reference manual
Input and output signals…………………………………………………………826 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..827 Technical data………………………………………………………………………827
Direct transfer trip logic……………………………………………………………….828 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..828 Low active power and power factor protection LAPPGAPC (37_55)…………………………………………………………………………………829
Introduction………………………………………………………………………830 Principle of operation…………………………………………………………830 Function block………………………………………………………………….832 Input and output signals…………………………………………………….832 Setting parameters……………………………………………………………833 Technical data………………………………………………………………….834
Compensated over and undervoltage protection COUVGAPC (59_27)…………………………………………………………………………………834
Introduction………………………………………………………………………834 Principle of operation…………………………………………………………835 Function block………………………………………………………………….837 Input and output signals…………………………………………………….837 Setting parameters……………………………………………………………838 Technical data………………………………………………………………….839
Sudden change in current variation SCCVPTOC (51)………………..839 Introduction………………………………………………………………………840 Principle of operation…………………………………………………………840 Function block………………………………………………………………….841 Input and output signals…………………………………………………….841 Setting parameters……………………………………………………………841 Technical data………………………………………………………………….842
Carrier receive logic LCCRPTRC (94)………………………………………842 Introduction………………………………………………………………………842 Principle of operation…………………………………………………………842 Function block………………………………………………………………….843 Input and output signals…………………………………………………….843 Setting parameters……………………………………………………………844 Technical data………………………………………………………………….844
Negative sequence overvoltage protection LCNSPTOV (47)……….844 Introduction………………………………………………………………………844 Principle of operation…………………………………………………………845 Function block………………………………………………………………….845 Input and output signals…………………………………………………….845
Table of contents
22 Technical reference manual
Setting parameters……………………………………………………………846 Technical data………………………………………………………………….846
Zero sequence overvoltage protection LCZSPTOV (59N)…………..846 Introduction………………………………………………………………………846 Principle of operation…………………………………………………………847 Function block………………………………………………………………….847 Input and output signals…………………………………………………….847 Setting parameters……………………………………………………………848 Technical data………………………………………………………………….848
Negative sequence overcurrent protection LCNSPTOC (46)……….848 Introduction………………………………………………………………………848 Principle of operation…………………………………………………………849 Function block………………………………………………………………….849 Input and output signals…………………………………………………….849 Setting parameters……………………………………………………………850 Technical data………………………………………………………………….850
Zero sequence overcurrent protection LCZSPTOC (51N)…………..850 Introduction………………………………………………………………………851 Principle of operation…………………………………………………………851 Function block………………………………………………………………….851 Input and output signals…………………………………………………….851 Setting parameters……………………………………………………………852 Technical data………………………………………………………………….852
Three phase overcurrent LCP3PTOC (51)………………………………..852 Introduction………………………………………………………………………852 Principle of operation…………………………………………………………853 Function block………………………………………………………………….853 Input and output signals…………………………………………………….853 Setting parameters……………………………………………………………854 Technical data………………………………………………………………….854
Three phase undercurrent LCP3PTUC (37)………………………………855 Introduction………………………………………………………………………855 Principle of operation…………………………………………………………855 Function block………………………………………………………………….855 Input and output signals…………………………………………………….856 Setting parameters……………………………………………………………856 Technical data………………………………………………………………….857
Section 14 Logic……………………………………………………………………….859 Tripping logic SMPPTRC (94)……………………………………………………..859
Table of contents
23 Technical reference manual
Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..859 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..859
Logic diagram…………………………………………………………………..861 Function block………………………………………………………………………865 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………866 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..867 Technical data………………………………………………………………………867
Trip matrix logic TMAGGIO…………………………………………………………867 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..868 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..868 Function block………………………………………………………………………870 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………870 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..871
Configurable logic blocks…………………………………………………………….872 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..872 Inverter function block INV……………………………………………………..873 OR function block OR…………………………………………………………….873 AND function block AND………………………………………………………..874 Timer function block TIMER……………………………………………………874 Pulse timer function block PULSETIMER………………………………….875 Exclusive OR function block XOR……………………………………………876 Loop delay function block LOOPDELAY…………………………………..876 Set-reset with memory function block SRMEMORY…………………..877 Reset-set with memory function block RSMEMORY…………………..878 Controllable gate function block GATE……………………………………..879 Settable timer function block TIMERSET………………………………….880 Technical data………………………………………………………………………880
Fixed signal function block FXDSIGN……………………………………………881 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..881 Function block………………………………………………………………………882 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………882 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..882
Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I………………………………………….883 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..883 Operation principle………………………………………………………………..883 Function block………………………………………………………………………884 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………884 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..885
Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with logic node representation B16IFCVI………………………………………………………………………………….885
Table of contents
24 Technical reference manual
Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..885 Operation principle………………………………………………………………..886 Function block………………………………………………………………………887 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………887 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..888
Integer to Boolean 16 conversion IB16………………………………………….888 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..888 Operation principle………………………………………………………………..888 Function block………………………………………………………………………890 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………890 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..891
Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation IB16FCVB…………………………………………………………………………………891
Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..891 Operation principle………………………………………………………………..891 Function block………………………………………………………………………893 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………893 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..894
Section 15 Monitoring………………………………………………………………..895 Measurements…………………………………………………………………………..895
Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..896 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..897
Measurement supervision………………………………………………….897 Measurements CVMMXN…………………………………………………..901 Phase current measurement CMMXU………………………………….906 Phase-phase and phase-neutral voltage measurements VMMXU, VNMMXU…………………………………………………………..907 Voltage and current sequence measurements VMSQI, CMSQI…………………………………………………………………………….907
Function block………………………………………………………………………907 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………909 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..913 Technical data………………………………………………………………………926
Event counter CNTGGIO…………………………………………………………….928 Identification…………………………………………………………………………928 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..928 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..929
Reporting…………………………………………………………………………929 Design…………………………………………………………………………….929
Function block………………………………………………………………………930
Table of contents
25 Technical reference manual
Input signals…………………………………………………………………………930 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..931 Technical data………………………………………………………………………931
Event function EVENT………………………………………………………………..931 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..931 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..931 Function block………………………………………………………………………933 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………933 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..934
Logical signal status report BINSTATREP…………………………………….936 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..936 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..937 Function block………………………………………………………………………937 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………938 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..939
Fault locator LMBRFLO………………………………………………………………939 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..939 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..940
Measuring Principle…………………………………………………………..940 Accurate algorithm for measurement of distance to fault………..941 The non-compensated impedance model…………………………….945 IEC 60870-5-103………………………………………………………………945
Function block………………………………………………………………………945 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………946 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..946 Technical data………………………………………………………………………947
Measured value expander block RANGE_XP………………………………..947 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..948 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..948 Function block………………………………………………………………………948 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………949
Disturbance report DRPRDRE…………………………………………………….949 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..949 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..950 Function block………………………………………………………………………958 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………959 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..961 Technical data………………………………………………………………………971
Sequential of events…………………………………………………………………..971 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..971
Table of contents
26 Technical reference manual
Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..971 Function block………………………………………………………………………972 Input signals…………………………………………………………………………972 Technical data………………………………………………………………………972
Indications…………………………………………………………………………………973 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..973 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..973 Function block………………………………………………………………………974 Input signals…………………………………………………………………………974 Technical data………………………………………………………………………974
Event recorder ………………………………………………………………………….974 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..974 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..975 Function block………………………………………………………………………975 Input signals…………………………………………………………………………975 Technical data………………………………………………………………………976
Trip value recorder……………………………………………………………………..976 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..976 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..976 Function block………………………………………………………………………977 Input signals…………………………………………………………………………977 Technical data………………………………………………………………………977
Disturbance recorder………………………………………………………………….977 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..977 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..978
Memory and storage………………………………………………………….979 IEC 60870-5-103………………………………………………………………980
Function block………………………………………………………………………981 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………981 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..981 Technical data………………………………………………………………………981
Section 16 Metering………………………………………………………………….983 Pulse-counter logic PCGGIO……………………………………………………….983
Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..983 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..983 Function block………………………………………………………………………986 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………986 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..987 Technical data………………………………………………………………………987
Table of contents
27 Technical reference manual
Function for energy calculation and demand handling ETPMMTR……987 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..988 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………..988 Function block………………………………………………………………………989 Input and output signals…………………………………………………………989 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..990
Section 17 Station communication………………………………………………993 Overview…………………………………………………………………………………..993 IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol………………………………………..993
Introduction…………………………………………………………………………..993 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………..994 Technical data………………………………………………………………………994 IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions SPGGIO, SP16GGIO……………………………………………………………………………994
Introduction………………………………………………………………………994 Principle of operation…………………………………………………………994 Function block………………………………………………………………….995 Input and output signals…………………………………………………….995 Setting parameters……………………………………………………………996
IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions MVGGIO………….996 Principle of operation…………………………………………………………996 Function block………………………………………………………………….996 Input and output signals…………………………………………………….997 Setting parameters……………………………………………………………997
IEC 61850-8-1 redundant station bus communication………………..997 Introduction………………………………………………………………………998 Principle of operation…………………………………………………………998 Function block………………………………………………………………..1000 Output signals…………………………………………………………………1000 Setting parameters………………………………………………………….1000
IEC 61850-9-2LE communication protocol…………………………………..1000 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………1000 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………1000 Consequence on accuracy for power measurement functions when using signals from IEC 61850-9-2LE communication……….1004 Function block…………………………………………………………………….1005 Output signals……………………………………………………………………..1005 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………1006 Technical data…………………………………………………………………….1006
Table of contents
28 Technical reference manual
LON communication protocol…………………………………………………….1006 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………1006 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………1007 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………1026 Technical data…………………………………………………………………….1026
SPA communication protocol……………………………………………………..1026 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………1026 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………1027
Communication ports……………………………………………………….1035 Design……………………………………………………………………………….1035 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………1036 Technical data…………………………………………………………………….1036
IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol…………………………………..1036 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………1036 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………1037
General………………………………………………………………………….1037 Communication ports……………………………………………………….1047
Function block…………………………………………………………………….1047 Input and output signals……………………………………………………….1050 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………1055 Technical data…………………………………………………………………….1058
Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking GOOSEINTLKRCV…………………………………………………………………..1059
Function block…………………………………………………………………….1059 Input and output signals……………………………………………………….1060 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………1061
Goose binary receive GOOSEBINRCV……………………………………….1062 Function block…………………………………………………………………….1062 Input and output signals……………………………………………………….1062 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………1063
Multiple command and transmit MULTICMDRCV, MULTICMDSND………………………………………………………………………1064
Introduction…………………………………………………………………………1064 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………1064 Design……………………………………………………………………………….1065
General………………………………………………………………………….1065 Function block…………………………………………………………………….1065 Input and output signals……………………………………………………….1066 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………1068
Table of contents
29 Technical reference manual
Section 18 Remote communication……………………………………………1069 Binary signal transfer………………………………………………………………..1069
Introduction…………………………………………………………………………1069 Principle of operation……………………………………………………………1069 Function block…………………………………………………………………….1071 Input and output signals……………………………………………………….1072 Setting parameters………………………………………………………………1073
Transmission of analog data from LDCM LDCMTransmit………………1076 Function block…………………………………………………………………….1076 Input and output signals……………………………………………………….1077
Section 19 IED hardware…………………………………………………………1079 Overview…………………………………………………………………………………1079
Variants of case and local HMI display size…………………………….1079 Case from the rear side………………………………………………………..1081
Hardware modules……………………………………………………………………1085 Overview…………………………………………………………………………….1085 Combined backplane module (CBM)………………………………………1086
Introduction…………………………………………………………………….1086 Functionality…………………………………………………………………..1087 Design…………………………………………………………………………..1087
Universal backplane module (UBM)……………………………………….1089 Introduction…………………………………………………………………….1089 Functionality…………………………………………………………………..1089 Design…………………………………………………………………………..1089
Numeric processing module (NUM)……………………………………….1091 Introduction…………………………………………………………………….1091 Functionality…………………………………………………………………..1092 Block diagram…………………………………………………………………1093
Power supply module (PSM)…………………………………………………1093 Introduction…………………………………………………………………….1093 Design…………………………………………………………………………..1094 Technical data………………………………………………………………..1094
Local human-machine interface (Local HMI)……………………………1094 Transformer input module (TRM)…………………………………………..1095
Introduction…………………………………………………………………….1095 Design…………………………………………………………………………..1095 Technical data………………………………………………………………..1095
Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization (ADM) ……………………………………………………………………………….1096
Table of contents
30 Technical reference manual
Introduction…………………………………………………………………….1096 Design…………………………………………………………………………..1097
Binary input module (BIM)…………………………………………………….1099 Introduction…………………………………………………………………….1099 Design…………………………………………………………………………..1099 Technical data………………………………………………………………..1103
Binary output modules (BOM)……………………………………………….1104 Introduction…………………………………………………………………….1104 Design…………………………………………………………………………..1104 Technical data………………………………………………………………..1105
Static binary output module (SOM)………………………………………..1106 Introduction…………………………………………………………………….1106 Design…………………………………………………………………………..1106 Technical data………………………………………………………………..1108
Binary input/output module (IOM)…………………………………………..1110 Introduction…………………………………………………………………….1110 Design…………………………………………………………………………..1110 Technical data………………………………………………………………..1112
mA input module (MIM)………………………………………………………..1114 Introduction…………………………………………………………………….1114 Design…………………………………………………………………………..1115 Technical data………………………………………………………………..1116
Serial and LON communication module (SLM) ……………………….1117 Introduction…………………………………………………………………….1117 Design…………………………………………………………………………..1117 Technical data………………………………………………………………..1118
Galvanic RS485 communication module…………………………………1119 Introduction…………………………………………………………………….1119 Design…………………………………………………………………………..1119 Technical data………………………………………………………………..1121
Optical ethernet module (OEM)……………………………………………..1121 Introduction…………………………………………………………………….1121 Functionality…………………………………………………………………..1121 Design…………………………………………………………………………..1121 Technical data………………………………………………………………..1122
Line data communication module (LDCM)………………………………1123 Introduction…………………………………………………………………….1123 Design…………………………………………………………………………..1123 Technical data………………………………………………………………..1124
Galvanic X.21 line data communication (X.21-LDCM)………………1125
Table of contents
31 Technical reference manual
Introduction…………………………………………………………………….1125 Design…………………………………………………………………………..1126 Functionality…………………………………………………………………..1128 Technical data………………………………………………………………..1128
GPS time synchronization module (GTM)……………………………….1129 Introduction…………………………………………………………………….1129 Design…………………………………………………………………………..1129 Technical data………………………………………………………………..1130
GPS antenna………………………………………………………………………1130 Introduction…………………………………………………………………….1130 Design…………………………………………………………………………..1130 Technical data………………………………………………………………..1132
IRIG-B time synchronization module IRIG-B……………………………1132 Introduction…………………………………………………………………….1132 Design…………………………………………………………………………..1132 Technical data………………………………………………………………..1134
Dimensions……………………………………………………………………………..1135 Case without rear cover………………………………………………………..1135 Case with rear cover…………………………………………………………….1137 Flush mounting dimensions…………………………………………………..1139 Side-by-side flush mounting dimensions…………………………………1140 Wall mounting dimensions…………………………………………………….1142 External resistor unit for high impedance differential protection….1142
Mounting alternatives………………………………………………………………..1144 Flush mounting……………………………………………………………………1144
Overview………………………………………………………………………..1144 Mounting procedure for flush mounting………………………………1145
19 panel rack mounting……………………………………………………….1146 Overview………………………………………………………………………..1146 Mounting procedure for 19 panel rack mounting…………………1147
Wall mounting……………………………………………………………………..1148 Overview………………………………………………………………………..1148 Mounting procedure for wall mounting……………………………….1148 How to reach the rear side of the IED………………………………..1149
Side-by-side 19 rack mounting……………………………………………..1150 Overview………………………………………………………………………..1150 Mounting procedure for side-by-side rack mounting…………….1150 IED in the 670 series mounted with a RHGS6 case……………..1151
Side-by-side flush mounting………………………………………………….1151 Overview………………………………………………………………………..1151
Table of contents
32 Technical reference manual
Mounting procedure for side-by-side flush mounting…………….1152 Technical data…………………………………………………………………………1153
Enclosure……………………………………………………………………………1153 Connection system………………………………………………………………1153 Influencing factors……………………………………………………………….1154 Type tests according to standard…………………………………………..1155
Section 20 Labels……………………………………………………………………1159 Labels on IED………………………………………………………………………….1159
Section 21 Connection diagrams………………………………………………1163
Section 22 Inverse time characteristics………………………………………1179 Application………………………………………………………………………………1179 Principle of operation………………………………………………………………..1182
Mode of operation………………………………………………………………..1182 Inverse characteristics………………………………………………………………1188
Section 23 Glossary………………………………………………………………..1215
Table of contents
33 Technical reference manual
Section 1 Introduction
About this chapter This chapter explains concepts and conventions used in this manual and provides information necessary to understand the contents of the manual.
1.1 Introduction to the technical reference manual
1.1.1 About the complete set of manuals for an IED The users manual (UM) is a complete set of five different manuals:
IEC09000744-1-en.vsd
P la
nn in
g &
p ur
ch as
e
di sp
os al
E ng
in ee
rin g
In st
al lin
g
C om
m is
si on
in g
O pe
ra tio
n
M ai
nt en
an ce
D ec
om m
is si
on in
g de
in st
al lin
g &
Application manual
Operators manual
Installation and
Engineeringmanual
Commissioning manual
manual Technical reference
IEC09000744 V1 EN
The Application Manual (AM) contains application descriptions, setting guidelines and setting parameters sorted per function. The application manual should be used to find out when and for what purpose a typical protection function could be used. The manual should also be used when calculating settings.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 1 Introduction
35 Technical reference manual
The Technical Reference Manual (TRM) contains application and functionality descriptions and it lists function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and technical data sorted per function. The technical reference manual should be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during normal service.
The Installation and Commissioning Manual (ICM) contains instructions on how to install and commission the protection IED. The manual can also be used as a reference during periodic testing. The manual covers procedures for mechanical and electrical installation, energizing and checking of external circuitry, setting and configuration as well as verifying settings and performing directional tests. The chapters are organized in the chronological order (indicated by chapter/section numbers) in which the protection IED should be installed and commissioned.
The Operators Manual (OM) contains instructions on how to operate the protection IED during normal service once it has been commissioned. The operators manual can be used to find out how to handle disturbances or how to view calculated and measured network data in order to determine the cause of a fault.
The Engineering Manual (EM) contains instructions on how to engineer the IEDs using the different tools in PCM600. The manual provides instructions on how to set up a PCM600 project and insert IEDs to the project structure. The manual also recommends a sequence for engineering of protection and control functions, LHMI functions as well as communication engineering for IEC 61850 and DNP3.
1.1.2 About the technical reference manual The following chapters are included in the technical reference manual.
Local HMI describes the control panel on the IED and explains display characteristics, control keys and various local HMI features.
Basic IED functions presents functions for all protection types that are included in all IEDs, for example, time synchronization, self supervision with event list, test mode and other general functions.
Differential protection describes differential functions and restricted ground fault protection.
Impedance protection describes functions for distance zones with their quadrilateral characteristics, phase selection with load encroachment, power swing detection and similar.
Current protection describes functions, for example, over current protection, breaker failure protection and pole discordance.
Voltage protection describes functions for under voltage and over voltage protection and residual over voltage protection.
Frequency protection describes functions for over frequency, under frequency and rate of change of frequency protection.
Section 1 1MRK505222-UUS C Introduction
36 Technical reference manual
Multipurpose protection describes the general protection function for current and voltage.
Secondary system supervision describes current based functions for current circuit supervision and fuse failure supervision.
Control describes control functions, for example, synchronization and energizing check and other product specific functions.
Scheme communication describes functions related to current reversal and weak end infeed logic.
Logic describes trip logic and related functions. Monitoring describes measurement related functions that are used to provide data
regarding relevant quantities, events and faults, for example. Metering describes pulse counter logic. Station communication describes Ethernet based communication in general,
including the use of IEC 61850 and horizontal communication via GOOSE. Remote communication describes binary and analog signal transfer, and the
associated hardware. Hardware describes the IED and its components. Connection diagrams provides terminal wiring diagrams and information
regarding connections to and from the IED. Inverse time characteristics describes and explains inverse time delay, inverse
time curves and their effects. Glossary is a list of terms, acronyms and abbreviations used in ABB technical
documentation.
1.1.3 This manual The description of each IED related function follows the same structure (where applicable). The different sections are outlined below.
1.1.3.1 Introduction
Outlines the implementation of a particular protection function.
1.1.3.2 Principle of operation
Describes how the function works, presents a general background to algorithms and measurement techniques. Logic diagrams are used to illustrate functionality.
Logic diagrams Logic diagrams describe the signal logic inside the function block and are bordered by dashed lines.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 1 Introduction
37 Technical reference manual
Signal names Input and output logic signals consist of two groups of letters separated by two dashes. The first group consists of up to four letters and presents the abbreviated name for the corresponding function. The second group presents the functionality of the particular signal. According to this explanation, the meaning of the signal BLKTR in figure 4 is as follows:
BLKTR informs the user that the signal will BLOCK the TRIP command from the under-voltage function, when its value is a logical one (1).
Input signals are always on the left hand side, and output signals on the right hand side. Settings are not displayed.
Input and output signals In a logic diagram, input and output signal paths are shown as a lines that touch the outer border of the diagram.
Input and output signals can be configured using the ACT tool. They can be connected to the inputs and outputs of other functions and to binary inputs and outputs. Examples of input signals are BLKTR, BLOCK and VTSU. Examples output signals are TRIP, START, STL1, STL2, STL3.
Setting parameters Signals in frames with a shaded area on their right hand side represent setting parameter signals. These parameters can only be set via the PST or LHMI. Their values are high (1) only when the corresponding setting parameter is set to the symbolic value specified within the frame. Example is the signal Block TUV=Yes. Their logical values correspond automatically to the selected setting value.
Internal signals Internal signals are illustrated graphically and end approximately 2 mm from the frame edge. If an internal signal path cannot be drawn with a continuous line, the suffix -int is added to the signal name to indicate where the signal starts and continues, see figure 1.
Section 1 1MRK505222-UUS C Introduction
38 Technical reference manual
TEST
Block TUV=Yes
PU_V_A
PU_V_B
PU_V_C
AND
TEST
xx04000375_ansi.vsd
0-t
BLKTR
BLOCK
VTSU
TRIP
PICKUP
PU_A
PU_B
PU_C
BLOCK-int.
BLOCK-int.
BLOCK-int.
BLOCK-int.
OR
AND
AND
AND
OR AND
0
ANSI04000375 V1 EN
Figure 1: Logic diagram example with -int signals
External signals Signal paths that extend beyond the logic diagram and continue in another diagram have the suffix -cont., see figure 2 and figure 3.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 1 Introduction
39 Technical reference manual
AND
PHSEL
PUND_AB-cont.
PUND_BC-cont.
PUND_CA-cont.
PUND_AG-cont.
PUND_BG-cont.
PUND_CG-cont.
STZMPP-cont.
PUND_GND-cont.
1—BLOCK
LOVBZ PU_ND
BLK-cont.
xx04000376_ansi.vsd
AB
BC
CA
AG
BG
CG
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
OR
OR
AND
OR
OR
ANSI04000376 V1 EN
Figure 2: Logic diagram example with an outgoing -cont signal
or
or
or
AND
AND
AND
AND
BLK-cont.
PICKUP
PU_C
PU_B
PU_A 15 ms
0
15 ms 0
15 ms 0
15 ms 0
or
STND_AG-cont.
STND_BG-cont.
STND_CG-cont.
STND_AB-cont.
STND_BC-cont.
STND_CA-cont.
Xx04000377_ansi.vsd ANSI04000377 V1 EN
Figure 3: Logic diagram example with an incoming -cont signal
Section 1 1MRK505222-UUS C Introduction
40 Technical reference manual
1.1.3.3 Input and output signals
Input and output signals are presented in two separate tables. Each table consists of two columns. The first column contains the name of the signal and the second column contains the description of the signal.
1.1.3.4 Function block
Each function block is illustrated graphically.
Input signals are always on the left hand side and output signals on the right hand side. Settings are not displayed. Special kinds of settings are sometimes available. These are supposed to be connected to constants in the configuration scheme and are therefore depicted as inputs. Such signals will be found in the signal list but described in the settings table.
The ^ character in front of an input or output signal name in the function block symbol given for a function, indicates that the user can set a signal name of their own in PCM600.
The * character after an input or output signal name in the function block symbol given for a function, indicates that the signal must be connected to another function block in the application configuration to achieve a valid application configuration.
en05000511-1-en.vsd
IEC 61850 — 8 -1 Logical Node
OutputsInputs
Diagram Number
Mandatory signal (*)
PCGGIO BLOCK READ_VAL BI_PULSE* RS_CNT
INVALID RESTART BLOCKED NEW_VAL
^SCAL_VAL
User defined name (^)
IEC05000511 V2 EN
Figure 4: Example of a function block
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 1 Introduction
41 Technical reference manual
1.1.3.5 Setting parameters
These are presented in tables and include all parameters associated with the function in question.
1.1.3.6 Technical data
The technical data section provides specific technical information about the function or hardware described.
1.1.4 Intended audience
General This manual addresses system engineers, installation and commissioning personnel, who use technical data during engineering, installation and commissioning, and in normal service.
Requirements The system engineer must have a thorough knowledge of protection systems, protection equipment, protection functions and the configured functional logics in the protective devices. The installation and commissioning personnel must have a basic knowledge in the handling electronic equipment.
1.1.5 Related documents Documents related to RED670 Identity number Operators manual 1MRK 505 223-UUS
Installation and commissioning manual 1MRK 505 224-UUS
Technical reference manual 1MRK 505 222-UUS
Application manual 1MRK 505 225-UUS
Product guide customized 1MRK 505 226-BUS
Product guide pre-configured 1MRK 505 228-BUS
Sample specification SA2005-001281
Connection and Installation components 1MRK 513 003-BEN
Test system, COMBITEST 1MRK 512 001-BEN
Accessories for 670 series IEDs 1MRK 514 012-BEN
670 series SPA and signal list 1MRK 500 092-WUS
Table continues on next page
Section 1 1MRK505222-UUS C Introduction
42 Technical reference manual
IEC 61850 Data objects list for 670 series 1MRK 500 091-WUS
Engineering manual 670 series 1MRK 511 240-UUS
Communication set-up for Relion 670 series 1MRK 505 260-UEN
More information can be found on www.abb.com/substationautomation.
1.1.6 Revision notes Revision Description A Minor corrections made
B Maintenance updates, PR corrections
C Maintenance updates, PR corrections
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 1 Introduction
43 Technical reference manual
Section 2 Analog inputs
2.1 Introduction
Analog input channels must be configured and set properly to get correct measurement results and correct protection operations. For power measuring and all directional and differential functions the directions of the input currents must be defined properly. Measuring and protection algorithms in the IED use primary system quantities. Setting values are in primary quantities as well and it is important to set the data about the connected current and voltage transformers properly.
A reference PhaseAngleRef can be defined to facilitate service values reading. This analog channels phase angle will always be fixed to zero degrees and all other angle information will be shown in relation to this analog input. During testing and commissioning of the IED the reference channel can be changed to facilitate testing and service values reading.
The availability of VT inputs depends on the ordered transformer input module (TRM) type.
2.2 Operation principle
The direction of a current depends on the connection of the CT. The main CTs are typically star (WYE) connected and can be connected with the Star (WYE) point to the object or from the object. This information must be set in the IED.
The convention of the directionality is defined as follows:
Positive value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction into the object.
Negative value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction out from the object.
For directional functions the directional conventions are defined as follows (see figure 5)
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 2 Analog inputs
45 Technical reference manual
Forward means direction into the object. Reverse means direction out from the object.
Protected Object Line, transformer, etc
ForwardReverse
Definition of direction for directional functions
Measured quantity is positive when flowing towards the object
e.g. P, Q, I
ReverseForward
Definition of direction for directional functions
e.g. P, Q, I Measured quantity is positive when flowing
towards the object
Set parameter CT_WyePoint
Correct Setting is «ToObject»
Set parameter CT_WyePoint
Correct Setting is «FromObject»
en05000456_ansi.vsd ANSI05000456 V1 EN
Figure 5: Internal convention of the directionality in the IED
If the settings of the primary CT is right, that is CTStarPoint set as FromObject or ToObject according to the plant condition, then a positive quantity always flows towards the protected object, and a Forward direction always looks towards the protected object.
The settings of the IED is performed in primary values. The ratios of the main CTs and VTs are therefore basic data for the IED. The user has to set the rated secondary and primary currents and voltages of the CTs and VTs to provide the IED with their rated ratios.
The CT and VT ratio and the name on respective channel is done under Main menu/ Hardware/Analog modules in the Parameter Settings tool.
2.3 Function block
The function blocks are not represented in the configuration tool. The signals appear only in the SMT tool when a TRM is included in the configuration with the function selector tool. In the SMT tool they can be mapped to the desired virtual input (SMAI) of the IED and used internally in the configuration.
Section 2 1MRK505222-UUS C Analog inputs
46 Technical reference manual
2.4 Setting parameters
Dependent on ordered IED type.
Table 1: AISVBAS Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description PhaseAngleRef TRM40-Ch1
TRM40-Ch2 TRM40-Ch3 TRM40-Ch4 TRM40-Ch5 TRM40-Ch6 TRM40-Ch7 TRM40-Ch8 TRM40-Ch9 TRM40-Ch10 TRM40-Ch11 TRM40-Ch12 TRM41-Ch1 TRM41-Ch2 TRM41-Ch3 TRM41-Ch4 TRM41-Ch5 TRM41-Ch6 TRM41-Ch7 TRM41-Ch8 TRM41-Ch9 TRM41-Ch10 TRM41-Ch11 TRM41-Ch12 MU1-IA MU1-IB MU1-IC MU1-I0 MU1- VA MU1- VB MU1-VC MU1-V0 MU2-IA MU2-IB MU2-IC MU2-I0 MU2-VA MU2-VB MU2-VC MU2-V0 MU3-IA MU3-IB MU3-IC MU3-I0 MU3-VB MU2-VB MU3-VC MU3-V0
— — TRM40-Ch1 Reference channel for phase angle presentation
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 2 Analog inputs
47 Technical reference manual
Table 2: TRM_12I Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description CT_WyePoint1 FromObject
ToObject — — ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 1 — 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint2 FromObject ToObject
— — ToObject ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 1 — 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint3 FromObject ToObject
— — ToObject ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 1 — 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint4 FromObject ToObject
— — ToObject ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 1 — 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint5 FromObject ToObject
— — ToObject ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 1 — 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint6 FromObject ToObject
— — ToObject ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 1 — 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim6 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint7 FromObject ToObject
— — ToObject ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite
CTsec7 1 — 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim7 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint8 FromObject ToObject
— — ToObject ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite
CTsec8 1 — 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim8 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint9 FromObject ToObject
— — ToObject ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite
CTsec9 1 — 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim9 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint10 FromObject ToObject
— — ToObject ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite
CTsec10 1 — 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
Table continues on next page
Section 2 1MRK505222-UUS C Analog inputs
48 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description CTprim10 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint11 FromObject ToObject
— — ToObject ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite
CTsec11 1 — 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim11 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint12 FromObject ToObject
— — ToObject ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite
CTsec12 1 — 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim12 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
Table 3: TRM_6I_6U Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description CT_WyePoint1 FromObject
ToObject — — ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 1 — 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint2 FromObject ToObject
— — ToObject ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 1 — 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint3 FromObject ToObject
— — ToObject ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 1 — 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint4 FromObject ToObject
— — ToObject ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 1 — 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint5 FromObject ToObject
— — ToObject ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 1 — 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint6 FromObject ToObject
— — ToObject ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 1 — 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim6 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
VTsec7 0.001 — 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim7 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec8 0.001 — 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 2 Analog inputs
49 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description VTprim8 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec9 0.001 — 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim9 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec10 0.001 — 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim10 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec11 0.001 — 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim11 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec12 0.001 — 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim12 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
Table 4: TRM_6I Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description CT_WyePoint1 FromObject
ToObject — — ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 1 — 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint2 FromObject ToObject
— — ToObject ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 1 — 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint3 FromObject ToObject
— — ToObject ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 1 — 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint4 FromObject ToObject
— — ToObject ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 1 — 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint5 FromObject ToObject
— — ToObject ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 1 — 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint6 FromObject ToObject
— — ToObject ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 1 — 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim6 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
Section 2 1MRK505222-UUS C Analog inputs
50 Technical reference manual
Table 5: TRM_7I_5U Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description CT_WyePoint1 FromObject
ToObject — — ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 1 — 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint2 FromObject ToObject
— — ToObject ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 1 — 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint3 FromObject ToObject
— — ToObject ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 1 — 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint4 FromObject ToObject
— — ToObject ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 1 — 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint5 FromObject ToObject
— — ToObject ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 1 — 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint6 FromObject ToObject
— — ToObject ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 1 — 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim6 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint7 FromObject ToObject
— — ToObject ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite
CTsec7 1 — 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim7 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
VTsec8 0.001 — 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim8 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec9 0.001 — 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim9 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec10 0.001 — 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim10 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec11 0.001 — 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim11 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec12 0.001 — 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim12 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 2 Analog inputs
51 Technical reference manual
Table 6: TRM_9I_3U Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description CT_WyePoint1 FromObject
ToObject — — ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 1 — 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint2 FromObject ToObject
— — ToObject ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 1 — 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint3 FromObject ToObject
— — ToObject ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 1 — 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint4 FromObject ToObject
— — ToObject ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 1 — 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint5 FromObject ToObject
— — ToObject ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 1 — 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint6 FromObject ToObject
— — ToObject ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 1 — 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim6 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint7 FromObject ToObject
— — ToObject ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite
CTsec7 1 — 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim7 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint8 FromObject ToObject
— — ToObject ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite
CTsec8 1 — 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim8 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint9 FromObject ToObject
— — ToObject ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite
CTsec9 1 — 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim9 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
VTsec10 0.001 — 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim10 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec11 0.001 — 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
Table continues on next page
Section 2 1MRK505222-UUS C Analog inputs
52 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description VTprim11 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec12 0.001 — 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim12 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 2 Analog inputs
53 Technical reference manual
Section 3 Local HMI
About this chapter This chapter describes the structure and use of local HMI, which is the control panel at the IED.
3.1 Human machine interface
The local human machine interface is available in a medium sized model. Up to 12 single line diagram pages can be defined, depending on the product capability.
The local HMI is divided into zones with different functionality.
Status indication LEDs. Alarm indication LEDs, which consist of 15 LEDs (6 red and 9 yellow) with user
printable label. All LEDs are configurable from PCM600. Liquid crystal display (LCD). Keypad with push buttons for control and navigation purposes, switch for
selection between local and remote control and reset. Isolated RJ45 communication port.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 3 Local HMI
55 Technical reference manual
IEC07000077 V1 EN
Figure 6: Medium graphic HMI, 15 controllable objects
3.2 Medium size graphic HMI
3.2.1 Medium The following case sizes can be equipped with the medium size LCD:
1/2 x 19 3/4 x 19 1/1 x 19
This is a fully graphical monochrome LCD which measures 4.7 x 3.5 inches. It has 28 lines with up to 40 characters per line. To display the single line diagram, this LCD is required.
3.2.2 Design The different parts of the medium size local HMI are shown in figure 7. The local HMI exists in an IEC version and in an ANSI version. The difference is on the keypad operation buttons and the yellow LED designation.
Section 3 1MRK505222-UUS C Local HMI
56 Technical reference manual
IEC07000077-CALLOUT V1 EN
Figure 7: Medium size graphic HMI
1 Status indication LEDs
2 LCD
3 Indication LEDs
4 Label
5 Local/Remote LEDs
6 RJ45 port
7 Communication indication LED
8 Keypad
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 3 Local HMI
57 Technical reference manual
3.3 Keypad
The keypad is used to monitor and operate the IED. The keypad has the same look and feel in all IEDs. LCD screens and other details may differ but the way the keys function is identical.
IEC06000531 V1 EN
Figure 8: The HMI keypad.
Table 7 describes the HMI keys that are used to operate the IED.
Table 7: HMI keys on the front of the IED
Key Function
IEC06000532 V1 EN
Press to close or energize a breaker or disconnector.
IEC06000533 V1 EN
Press to open a breaker or disconnector.
IEC05000103 V1 EN
Press to open two sub menus: Key operation and IED information.
IEC05000104 V1 EN
Press to clear entries, cancel commands or edit.
IEC05000105 V1 EN
Press to open the main menu and to move to the default screen.
Table continues on next page
Section 3 1MRK505222-UUS C Local HMI
58 Technical reference manual
Key Function
IEC05000106 V1 EN
Press to set the IED in local or remote control mode.
IEC05000107 V1 EN
Press to open the reset screen.
IEC05000108 V1 EN
Press to start the editing mode and confirm setting changes, when in editing mode.
IEC05000109 V1 EN
Press to navigate forward between screens and move right in editing mode.
IEC05000110 V1 EN
Press to navigate backwards between screens and move left in editing mode.
IEC05000111 V1 EN
Press to move up in the single line diagram and in the menu tree.
IEC05000112 V1 EN
Press to move down in the single line diagram and in the menu tree.
3.4 LED
3.4.1 Introduction The LED module is a unidirectional means of communicating. This means that events may occur that activate a LED in order to draw the operators attention to something that has occurred and needs some sort of action.
3.4.2 Status indication LEDs The three LEDs above the LCD provide information as shown in the table below.
LED Indication Information Green:
Steady In service
Flashing Internal failure
Dark No power supply
Yellow:
Steady Dist. rep. triggered
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 3 Local HMI
59 Technical reference manual
LED Indication Information Flashing Terminal in test mode
Red:
Steady Trip command issued
3.4.3 Indication LEDs The LED indication module comprising 15 LEDs is standard in 670 series. Its main purpose is to present an immediate visual information for protection indications or alarm signals.
Alarm indication LEDs and hardware associated LEDs are located on the right hand side of the front panel. Alarm LEDs are located on the right of the LCD screen and show steady or flashing light.
Steady light indicates normal operation. Flashing light indicates alarm.
Alarm LEDs can be configured in PCM600 and depend on the binary logic. Therefore they can not be configured on the local HMI.
Typical examples of alarm LEDs
Bay controller failure CB close blocked Interlocking bypassed Differential protection trip SF6 Gas refill Position error CB spring charge alarm Oil temperature alarm Thermal overload trip
The RJ45 port has a yellow LED indicating that communication has been established between the IED and a computer.
The Local/Remote key on the front panel has two LEDs indicating whether local or remote control of the IED is active.
Section 3 1MRK505222-UUS C Local HMI
60 Technical reference manual
3.5 Local HMI related functions
3.5.1 Introduction The local HMI can be adapted to the application configuration and to user preferences.
Function block LocalHMI Function block LEDGEN Setting parameters
3.5.2 General setting parameters Table 8: SCREEN Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Language English
OptionalLanguage — — English Local HMI language
DisplayTimeout 10 — 120 Min 10 60 Local HMI display timeout
AutoRepeat Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Activation of auto-repeat (On) or not (Off)
ContrastLevel -10 — 20 % 1 0 Contrast level for display
DefaultScreen 0 — 0 — 1 0 Default screen
EvListSrtOrder Latest on top Oldest on top
— — Latest on top Sort order of event list
SymbolFont IEC ANSI
— — IEC Symbol font for Single Line Diagram
3.5.3 Status LEDs
3.5.3.1 Design
The function block LocalHMI controls and supplies information about the status of the status indication LEDs. The input and output signals of local HMI are configured with PCM600.
The function block can be used if any of the signals are required in a configuration logic.
See section «Status indication LEDs» for information about the LEDs.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 3 Local HMI
61 Technical reference manual
3.5.3.2 Function block
ANSI05000773-2-en.vsd
LocalHMI RSTLEDS HMI-ON
RED-S YELLOW-S YELLOW-F RSTPULSE
LEDSRST
ANSI05000773 V2 EN
Figure 9: LocalHMI function block
3.5.3.3 Input and output signals
Table 9: LocalHMI Input signals
Name Type Default Description RSTLEDS BOOLEAN 0 Input to reset the LCD-HMI LEDs
Table 10: LocalHMI Output signals
Name Type Description HMI-ON BOOLEAN Backlight of the LCD display is active
RED-S BOOLEAN Red LED on the LCD-HMI is steady
YELLOW-S BOOLEAN Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is steady
YELLOW-F BOOLEAN Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is flashing
RSTPULSE BOOLEAN A reset pulse is provided when the LEDs on the LCD- HMI are cleared
LEDSRST BOOLEAN Active when the LEDs on the LCD-HMI are not ON
3.5.4 Indication LEDs
3.5.4.1 Introduction
The function block LEDGEN controls and supplies information about the status of the indication LEDs. The input and output signals of LEDGEN are configured with PCM600. The input signal for each LED is selected individually with the Signal Matrix Tool in PCM600.
LEDs (number 16) for trip indications are red. LEDs (number 715) for pickup indications are yellow.
Section 3 1MRK505222-UUS C Local HMI
62 Technical reference manual
Each indication LED on the local HMI can be set individually to operate in six different sequences
Two sequences operate as follow type. Four sequences operate as latch type.
Two of the latching sequence types are intended to be used as a protection indication system, either in collecting or restarting mode, with reset functionality.
Two of the latching sequence types are intended to be used as signaling system in collecting (coll) mode with an acknowledgment functionality.
The light from the LEDs can be steady (-S) or flashing (-F). See the technical reference manual for more information.
3.5.4.2 Design
The information on the LEDs is stored at loss of the auxiliary power to the IED in some of the modes of LEDGEN. The latest LED picture appears immediately after the IED is successfully restarted.
Operating modes
Collecting mode LEDs which are used in collecting mode of operation are accumulated
continuously until the unit is acknowledged manually. This mode is suitable when the LEDs are used as a simplified alarm system.
Re-starting mode In the re-starting mode of operation each new pickup resets all previous
active LEDs and activates only those which appear during one disturbance. Only LEDs defined for re-starting mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S) will initiate a reset and a restart at a new disturbance. A disturbance is defined to end a settable time after the reset of the activated input signals or when the maximum time limit has elapsed.
Acknowledgment/reset
From local HMI Active indications can be acknowledged or reset manually. Manual
acknowledgment and manual reset have the same meaning and is a common signal for all the operating sequences and LEDs. The function is positive edge triggered, not level triggered. The acknowledged or reset is performed
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 3 Local HMI
63 Technical reference manual
via the reset button and menus on the local HMI. See the operator’s manual for more information.
From function input Active indications can also be acknowledged or reset from an input, RESET,
to the function. This input can, for example, be configured to a binary input operated from an external push button. The function is positive edge triggered, not level triggered. This means that even if the button is continuously pressed, the acknowledgment or reset only affects indications active at the moment when the button is first pressed.
Automatic reset Automatic reset can only be performed for indications defined for re-starting
mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S). When automatic reset of the LEDs has been performed, still persisting indications will be indicated with a steady light.
Operating sequences The operating sequences can be of type Follow or Latched.
For the Follow type the LED follows the input signal completely. For the Latched type each LED latches to the corresponding input signal until it is
reset.
Figure 10 show the function of available sequences that are selectable for each LED separately.
The acknowledgment or reset function is not applicable for sequence 1 and 2 (Follow type).
Sequence 3 and 4 (Latched type with acknowledgement) are only working in collecting mode.
Sequence 5 is working according to Latched type and collecting mode. Sequence 6 is working according to Latched type and re-starting mode.
The letters S and F in the sequence names have the meaning S = Steady and F = Flashing.
At the activation of the input signal, the indication operates according to the selected sequence diagrams.
In the sequence diagrams the LEDs have the characteristics as shown in figure 10.
Section 3 1MRK505222-UUS C Local HMI
64 Technical reference manual
en05000506.vsd
= No indication = Steady light = Flash
IEC05000506 V1 EN
Figure 10: Symbols used in the sequence diagrams
Sequence 1 (Follow-S) This sequence follows all the time, with a steady light, the corresponding input signals. It does not react on acknowledgment or reset. Every LED is independent of the other LEDs in its operation.
Activating signal
LED
IEC01000228_2_en.vsd IEC01000228 V2 EN
Figure 11: Operating sequence 1 (Follow-S)
Sequence 2 (Follow-F) This sequence is the same as sequence 1, Follow-S, but the LEDs are flashing instead of showing steady light.
Sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S) This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. Every LED is independent of the other LEDs in its operation. At the activation of the input signal, the indication starts flashing. After acknowledgment the indication disappears if the signal is not present any more. If the signal is still present after acknowledgment it gets a steady light.
Activating signal
LED
Acknow. en01000231.vsd
IEC01000231 V1 EN
Figure 12: Operating sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S)
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 3 Local HMI
65 Technical reference manual
Sequence 4 (LatchedAck-S-F) This sequence has the same functionality as sequence 3, but steady and flashing light have been alternated.
Sequence 5 (LatchedColl-S) This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. At the activation of the input signal, the indication will light up with a steady light. The difference to sequence 3 and 4 is that indications that are still activated will not be affected by the reset that is, immediately after the positive edge of the reset has been executed a new reading and storing of active signals is performed. Every LED is independent of the other LEDs in its operation.
IEC01000235_2_en.vsd
Activating signal
LED
Reset
IEC01000235 V2 EN
Figure 13: Operating sequence 5 (LatchedColl-S)
Sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S) In this mode all activated LEDs, which are set to sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), are automatically reset at a new disturbance when activating any input signal for other LEDs set to sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S). Also in this case indications that are still activated will not be affected by manual reset, that is, immediately after the positive edge of that the manual reset has been executed a new reading and storing of active signals is performed. LEDs set for sequence 6 are completely independent in its operation of LEDs set for other sequences.
Definition of a disturbance A disturbance is defined to last from the first LED set as LatchedReset-S is activated until a settable time, tRestart, has elapsed after that all activating signals for the LEDs set as LatchedReset-S have reset. However if all activating signals have reset and some signal again becomes active before tRestart has elapsed, the tRestart timer does not restart the timing sequence. A new disturbance start will be issued first when all signals have reset after tRestart has elapsed. A diagram of this functionality is shown in figure 14.
Section 3 1MRK505222-UUS C Local HMI
66 Technical reference manual
New disturbance
From disturbance length control per LED set to sequence 6
en01000237_ansi.vsd
ANDOR
ANDOR
OR
0 0-100s
tRestart
AND
OR
ANSI01000237 V1 EN
Figure 14: Activation of new disturbance
In order not to have a lock-up of the indications in the case of a persisting signal each LED is provided with a timer, tMax, after which time the influence on the definition of a disturbance of that specific LED is inhibited. This functionality is shown i diagram in figure 15.
Activating signal
AND To disturbance
length control
To LED
en05000507_ansi.vsd
0-tMax 0
ANSI05000507 V1 EN
Figure 15: Length control of activating signals
Timing diagram for sequence 6 Figure 16 shows the timing diagram for two indications within one disturbance.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 3 Local HMI
67 Technical reference manual
IEC01000239_2-en.vsd
Activating signal 2
LED 2
Manual reset
Activating signal 1
Automatic reset
LED 1
Disturbance
tRestart
IEC01000239 V2 EN
Figure 16: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within same disturbance
Figure 17 shows the timing diagram for a new indication after tRestart time has elapsed.
Section 3 1MRK505222-UUS C Local HMI
68 Technical reference manual
IEC01000240_2_en.vsd
Activating signal 2
LED 2
Manual reset
Activating signal 1
Automatic reset
LED 1
Disturbance
tRestart
Disturbance
tRestart
IEC01000240 V2 EN
Figure 17: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two different disturbances
Figure 18 shows the timing diagram when a new indication appears after the first one has reset but before tRestart has elapsed.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 3 Local HMI
69 Technical reference manual
IEC01000241_2_en.vsd
Activating signal 2
LED 2
Manual reset
Activating signal 1
Automatic reset
LED 1
Disturbance
tRestart
IEC01000241 V2 EN
Figure 18: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within same disturbance but with reset of activating signal between
Figure 19 shows the timing diagram for manual reset.
Section 3 1MRK505222-UUS C Local HMI
70 Technical reference manual
IEC01000242_2_en.vsd
Activating signal 2
LED 2
Manual reset
Activating signal 1
Automatic reset
LED 1
Disturbance
tRestart
IEC01000242 V2 EN
Figure 19: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), manual reset
3.5.4.3 Function block
IEC05000508_2_en.vsd
LEDGEN BLOCK RESET LEDTEST
NEWIND ACK
IEC05000508 V2 EN
Figure 20: LEDGEN function block
3.5.4.4 Input and output signals
Table 11: LEDGEN Input signals
Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Input to block the operation of the LED-unit
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input to acknowledge/reset the indications of the LED- unit
LEDTEST BOOLEAN 0 Input for external LED test
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 3 Local HMI
71 Technical reference manual
Table 12: LEDGEN Output signals
Name Type Description NEWIND BOOLEAN A new signal on any of the indication inputs occurs
ACK BOOLEAN A pulse is provided when the LEDs are acknowledged
3.5.4.5 Setting parameters
Table 13: LEDGEN Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Operation mode for the LED function
tRestart 0.0 — 100.0 s 0.1 0.0 Defines the disturbance length
tMax 0.0 — 100.0 s 0.1 0.0 Maximum time for the definition of a disturbance
SeqTypeLED1 Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S
— — Follow-S Sequence type for LED 1
SeqTypeLED2 Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S
— — Follow-S Sequence type for LED 2
SeqTypeLED3 Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S
— — Follow-S Sequence type for LED 3
SeqTypeLED4 Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S
— — Follow-S Sequence type for LED 4
SeqTypeLED5 Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S
— — Follow-S Sequence type for LED 5
Table continues on next page
Section 3 1MRK505222-UUS C Local HMI
72 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description SeqTypeLED6 Follow-S
Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S
— — Follow-S Sequence type for LED 6
SeqTypeLED7 Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S
— — Follow-S Sequence type for LED 7
SeqTypeLED8 Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S
— — Follow-S sequence type for LED 8
SeqTypeLED9 Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S
— — Follow-S Sequence type for LED 9
SeqTypeLED10 Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S
— — Follow-S Sequence type for LED 10
SeqTypeLED11 Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S
— — Follow-S Sequence type for LED 11
SeqTypeLED12 Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S
— — Follow-S Sequence type for LED 12
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 3 Local HMI
73 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description SeqTypeLED13 Follow-S
Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S
— — Follow-S Sequence type for LED 13
SeqTypeLED14 Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S
— — Follow-S Sequence type for LED 14
SeqTypeLED15 Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S
— — Follow-S Sequence type for LED 15
Section 3 1MRK505222-UUS C Local HMI
74 Technical reference manual
Section 4 Basic IED functions
About this chapter This chapter presents functions that are basic to all 670 series IEDs. Typical functions in this category are time synchronization, self supervision and test mode.
4.1 Authorization
To safeguard the interests of our customers, both the IED and the tools that are accessing the IED are protected, by means of authorization handling. The authorization handling of the IED and the PCM600 is implemented at both access points to the IED:
local, through the local HMI remote, through the communication ports
4.1.1 Principle of operation There are different levels (or types) of users that can access or operate different areas of the IED and tools functionality. The pre-defined user types are given in Table 14.
Be sure that the user logged on to the IED has the access required when writing particular data to the IED from PCM600.
The meaning of the legends used in the table:
R= Read W= Write — = No access rights
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 4 Basic IED functions
75 Technical reference manual
Table 14: Pre-defined user types
Access rights Guest Super User SPA Guest System Operator
Protection Engineer
Design Engineer
User Administrator
Basic setting possibilities (change setting group, control settings, limit supervision)
R R/W R R/W R/W R/W R
Advanced setting possibilities (for example protection settings)
R R/W R R R/W R/W R
Basic control possibilities (process control, no bypass)
R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R
Advanced control possibilities (process control including interlock trigg)
R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R
Basic command handling (for example clear LEDs, manual trigg)
R R/W R R/W R/W R/W R
Advanced command handling (for example clear disturbance record)
R R/W R R R/W R/W R/W
Basic configuration possibilities (I/O- configuration in SMT)
R R/W R R R R/W R/W
Advanced configuration possibilities (application configuration including SMT, GDE and CMT)
R R/W R R R R/W R/W
File loading (database loading from XML-file)
— R/W — — — R/W R/W
File dumping (database dumping to XML-file)
— R/W — — — R/W R/W
File transfer (FTP file transfer) — R/W — R/W R/W R/W R/W
File transfer (limited) (FTP file transfer) R R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W
File Transfer (SPA File Transfer) — R/W — — — R/W —
Database access for normal user R R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W
User administration (user management FTP File Transfer)
R R/W R R R R R/W
User administration (user management SPA File Transfer)
— R/W — — — — —
The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only with the IED User Management within PCM600. The user can only LogOn or LogOff on the local HMI on the IED, there are no users, groups or functions that can be defined on local HMI.
Only characters A — Z, a — z and 0 — 9 should be used in user names and passwords. The maximum of characters in a password is 18.
Section 4 1MRK505222-UUS C Basic IED functions
76 Technical reference manual
At least one user must be included in the UserAdministrator group to be able to write users, created in PCM600, to IED.
4.1.1.1 Authorization handling in the IED
At delivery the default user is the SuperUser. No Log on is required to operate the IED until a user has been created with the IED User Management..
Once a user is created and downloaded to the IED, that user can perform a Log on, introducing the password assigned in the tool.
If there is no user created, an attempt to log on will display a message box: No user defined!
If one user leaves the IED without logging off, then after the timeout (set in Main menu/Settings/General Settings/HMI/Screen/Display Timeout) elapses, the IED returns to Guest state, when only reading is possible. The display time out is set to 60 minutes at delivery.
If there are one or more users created with the IED User Management and downloaded into the IED, then, when a user intentionally attempts a Log on or when the user attempts to perform an operation that is password protected, the Log on window will appear.
The cursor is focused on the User identity field, so upon pressing the E key, the user can change the user name, by browsing the list of users, with the up and down arrows. After choosing the right user name, the user must press the E key again. When it comes to password, upon pressing the E key, the following character will show up: $. The user must scroll for every letter in the password. After all the letters are introduced (passwords are case sensitive) choose OK and press the E key again.
If everything is alright at a voluntary Log on, the local HMI returns to the Authorization screen. If the Log on is OK, when required to change for example a password protected setting, the local HMI returns to the actual setting folder. If the Log on has failed, then the Log on window opens again, until either the user makes it right or presses Cancel.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 4 Basic IED functions
77 Technical reference manual
4.2 Self supervision with internal event list
4.2.1 Introduction Self supervision with internal event list function listens and reacts to internal system events, generated by the different built-in self-supervision elements. The internal events are saved in an internal event list.
4.2.2 Principle of operation The self-supervision operates continuously and includes:
Normal micro-processor watchdog function. Checking of digitized measuring signals. Other alarms, for example hardware and time synchronization.
The self-supervision function status can be monitored from the local HMI, from the Event Viewer in PCM600 or from a SMS/SCS system.
Under the Diagnostics menu in the local HMI the present information from the self- supervision function can be reviewed. The information can be found under Main menu/Diagnostics/Internal events or Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/General. The information from the self-supervision function is also available in the Event Viewer in PCM600.
A self-supervision summary can be obtained by means of the potential free alarm contact (INTERNAL FAIL) located on the power supply module. The function of this output relay is an OR-function between the INT-FAIL signal see figure 22 and a couple of more severe faults that can occur in the IED, see figure 21
Section 4 1MRK505222-UUS C Basic IED functions
78 Technical reference manual
en04000520_ansi.vsd
Power supply fault
Watchdog TX overflow Master resp. Supply fault
ReBoot I/O
Internal Fail (CPU)
Power supply module
I/O nodes
CEM
AND
Fault
Fault
Fault
INTERNAL FAIL
I/O nodes = BIM, BOM, IOM xxxx = Inverted signal
ANSI04000520 V1 EN
Figure 21: Hardware self-supervision, potential-free alarm contact
TIMESYNCHERROR
e.g. BIM 1 Error IO fail
IO stopped IO started
OR Set Reset
OR e.g. IOM2 Error e.g. IO (n) Error
OR
OR Internal
FAIL
Set Reset
LON ERROR
Watchdog RTE fatal error
RTE Appl-fail RTE OK
IEC61850 not ready
RTCERROR
FTF fatal error
RTC OK
TIMESYNCHERROR Time reset
SYNCH OK Settings changed
NUMFAIL
Set Reset
OR
Internal WARN
Set Reset
OR
NUMWARNING OR
1 second pulse
SETCHGD
RTCERROR
en04000519-1.vsd IEC04000519 V2 EN
Figure 22: Software self-supervision, IES (IntErrorSign) function block
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 4 Basic IED functions
79 Technical reference manual
Some signals are available from the INTERRSIG function block. The signals from this function block are sent as events to the station level of the control system. The signals from the INTERRSIG function block can also be connected to binary outputs for signalization via output relays or they can be used as conditions for other functions if required/desired.
Individual error signals from I/O modules can be obtained from respective module in the Signal Matrix tool. Error signals from time synchronization can be obtained from the time synchronization block TIMEINTERRSIG.
4.2.2.1 Internal signals
Self supervision provides several status signals, that tells about the condition of the IED. As they provide information about the internal status of the IED, they are also called internal signals. The internal signals can be divided into two groups.
Standard signals are always presented in the IED, see Table 15. Hardware dependent internal signals are collected depending on the hardware
configuration, see Table 16.
Explanations of internal signals are listed in Table 17.
Table 15: Self-supervision’s standard internal signals
Name of signal Description FAIL Internal Fail status
WARNING Internal Warning status
NUMFAIL CPU module Fail status
NUMWARNING CPU module Warning status
RTCERROR Real Time Clock status
TIMESYNCHERROR Time Synchronization status
RTEERROR Runtime Execution Error status
IEC61850ERROR IEC 61850 Error status
WATCHDOG SW Watchdog Error status
LMDERROR LON/Mip Device Error status
APPERROR Runtime Application Error status
SETCHGD Settings changed
SETGRPCHGD Setting groups changed
FTFERROR Fault Tolerant Filesystem status
Section 4 1MRK505222-UUS C Basic IED functions
80 Technical reference manual
Table 16: Self-supervision’s hardware dependent internal signals
Card Name of signal Description PSM PSM-Error Power Supply Module Error status
ADOne ADOne-Error Analog In Module Error status
BIM BIM-Error Binary In Module Error status
BOM BOM-Error Binary Out Module Error status
IOM IOM-Error In/Out Module Error status
MIM MIM-Error Millampere Input Module Error status
LDCM LDCM-Error Line Differential Communication Error status
Table 17: Explanations of internal signals
Name of signal Reasons for activation FAIL This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal
signals are active; NUMFAIL, LMDERROR, WATCHDOG, APPERROR, RTEERROR, FTFERROR, or any of the HW dependent signals
WARNING This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal signals are active; RTCERROR, IEC61850ERROR, TIMESYNCHERROR
NUMFAIL This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal signals are active; WATCHDOG, APPERROR, RTEERROR, FTFERROR
NUMWARNING This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal signals are active; RTCERROR, IEC61850ERROR
RTCERROR This signal will be active when there is a hardware error with the real time clock.
TIMESYNCHERROR This signal will be active when the source of the time synchronization is lost, or when the time system has to make a time reset.
RTEERROR This signal will be active if the Runtime Engine failed to do some actions with the application threads. The actions can be loading of settings or parameters for components, changing of setting groups, loading or unloading of application threads.
IEC61850ERROR This signal will be active if the IEC 61850 stack did not succeed in some actions like reading IEC 61850 configuration, startup, for example
WATCHDOG This signal will be activated when the terminal has been under too heavy load for at least 5 minutes. The operating systems background task is used for the measurements.
LMDERROR LON network interface, MIP/DPS, is in an unrecoverable error state.
APPERROR This signal will be active if one or more of the application threads are not in the state that Runtime Engine expects. The states can be CREATED, INITIALIZED, RUNNING, for example
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 4 Basic IED functions
81 Technical reference manual
Name of signal Reasons for activation SETCHGD This signal will generate an Internal Event to the Internal Event list if
any settings are changed.
SETGRPCHGD This signal will generate an Internal Event to the Internal Event list if any setting groups are changed.
FTFERROR This signal will be active if both the working file and the backup file are corrupted and can not be recovered.
4.2.2.2 Run-time model
The analog signals to the A/D converter is internally distributed into two different converters, one with low amplification and one with high amplification, see Figure 23.
u1
x2
x1
u1
x2
x1
ADx ControllerADx_High
ADx_Low ADx
IEC05000296-3-en.vsd IEC05000296 V3 EN
Figure 23: Simplified drawing of A/D converter for the IED.
The technique to split the analog input signal into two A/D converter(s) with different amplification makes it possible to supervise the A/D converters under normal conditions where the signals from the two A/D converters should be identical. An alarm is given if the signals are out of the boundaries. Another benefit is that it improves the dynamic performance of the A/D conversion.
The self-supervision of the A/D conversion is controlled by the ADx_Controller function. One of the tasks for the controller is to perform a validation of the input signals. This is done in a validation filter which has mainly two objects: First is the validation part that checks that the A/D conversion seems to work as expected. Secondly, the filter chooses which of the two signals that shall be sent to the CPU, that is the signal that has the most suitable signal level, the ADx_LO or the 16 times higher ADx_HI.
Section 4 1MRK505222-UUS C Basic IED functions
82 Technical reference manual
When the signal is within measurable limits on both channels, a direct comparison of the two A/D converter channels can be performed. If the validation fails, the CPU will be informed and an alarm will be given for A/D converter failure.
The ADx_Controller also supervise other parts of the A/D converter.
4.2.3 Function block
IEC09000787 V1 EN
Figure 24: INTERRSIG function block
4.2.4 Output signals Table 18: INTERRSIG Output signals
Name Type Description FAIL BOOLEAN Internal fail
WARNING BOOLEAN Internal warning
CPUFAIL BOOLEAN CPU fail
CPUWARN BOOLEAN CPU warning
4.2.5 Setting parameters The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.
4.2.6 Technical data Table 19: Self supervision with internal event list
Data Value Recording manner Continuous, event controlled
List size 40 events, first in-first out
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 4 Basic IED functions
83 Technical reference manual
4.3 Time synchronization
4.3.1 Introduction The time synchronization source selector is used to select a common source of absolute time for the IED when it is a part of a protection system. This makes it possible to compare event and disturbance data between all IEDs in a station automation system. A common source shall be used for IED and merging unit when IEC 61850-9-2LE process bus communication is used.
Micro SCADA OPC server should not be used as a time synchronization source.
4.3.2 Principle of operation
4.3.2.1 General concepts
Time definitions The error of a clock is the difference between the actual time of the clock, and the time the clock is intended to have. Clock accuracy indicates the increase in error, that is, the time gained or lost by the clock. A disciplined clock knows its own faults and tries to compensate for them.
Design of the time system (clock synchronization) The time system is based on a software clock, which can be adjusted from external time sources and a hardware clock. The protection and control modules will be timed from a hardware clock, which runs independently from the software clock. See figure 25
Section 4 1MRK505222-UUS C Basic IED functions
84 Technical reference manual
SW-time
Time- Regulator
(fast or slow)
Time tagging and general synchronisation
Time- Regulator
(Setting, see
technical reference manual)
Comm- unication
Events
Synchronization for differential protection (ECHO-mode or GPS)
Diff.- comm-
unication
*IEC 61850-9-2
Connected when GPS-time is used for differential protection
IEC08000287-2-en.vsd
External Synchronization
sources
Trans- ducers*
LON
SPA
GPS
SNTP
IRIG-B
PPS
Off
Min. pulse
DNP
GPS
IRIG-B
PPS
Off
Protection and control functions
A/D converter
HW-time
IEC08000287 V2 EN
Figure 25: Design of time system (clock synchronization)
All time tagging is performed by the software clock. When for example a status signal is changed in the protection system with the function based on free running hardware clock, the event is time tagged by the software clock when it reaches the event recorder. Thus the hardware clock can run independently.
The echo mode for the differential protection is based on the hardware clock. Thus, there is no need to synchronize the hardware clock and the software clock.
The synchronization of the hardware clock and the software clock is necessary only when GPS or IRIG B 00X with optical fibre, IEEE 1344 is used for differential protection. The two clock systems are synchronized by a special clock synchronization unit with two modes, fast and slow. A special feature, an automatic fast clock time regulator is used. The automatic fast mode makes the synchronization time as short as possible during start up or at interruptions/disturbances in the GPS timing. The setting fast or slow is also available on the local HMI.
If a GPS clock is used for 670 series IEDs other than line differential RED670, the hardware and software clocks are not synchronized
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 4 Basic IED functions
85 Technical reference manual
Fast clock synchronization mode At startup and after interruptions in the GPS or IRIG B time signal, the clock deviation between the GPS time and the internal differential time system can be substantial. A new startup is also required after for example maintenance of the auxiliary voltage system.
When the time difference is >16s, the differential function is blocked and the time regulator for the hardware clock automatically uses a fast mode to synchronize the clock systems. The time adjustment is made with an exponential function, that is, big time adjustment steps in the beginning, then smaller steps until a time deviation between the GPS time and the differential time system of >16s has been reached. Then the differential function is enabled and the synchronization remains in fast mode or switches to slow mode, depending on the setting.
Slow clock synchronization mode During normal service, a setting with slow synchronization mode is normally used, which prevents the hardware clock to make too big time steps, >16s, emanating from the differential protection requirement of correct timing.
Synchronization principle From a general point of view synchronization can be seen as a hierarchical structure. A function is synchronized from a higher level and provides synchronization to lower levels.
Function
Synchronization from a higher level
Optional synchronization of modules at a lower level
IEC09000342-1-en.vsd IEC09000342 V1 EN
Figure 26: Synchronization principle
A function is said to be synchronized when it periodically receives synchronization messages from a higher level. As the level decreases, the accuracy of the synchronization decreases as well. A function can have several potential sources of synchronization, with different maximum errors. This gives the function the possibility
Section 4 1MRK505222-UUS C Basic IED functions
86 Technical reference manual
to choose the source with the best quality, and to adjust its internal clock after this source. The maximum error of a clock can be defined as:
The maximum error of the last used synchronization message The time since the last used synchronization message The rate accuracy of the internal clock in the function.
4.3.2.2 Real-time clock (RTC) operation
The IED has a built-in real-time clock (RTC) with a resolution of one second. The clock has a built-in calendar that handles leap years through 2038.
Real-time clock at power off During power off, the system time in the IED is kept by a capacitor-backed real-time clock that will provide 35 ppm accuracy for 5 days. This means that if the power is off, the time in the IED may drift with 3 seconds per day, during 5 days, and after this time the time will be lost completely.
Real-time clock at startup
Time synchronization startup procedure The first message that contains the full time (as for instance LON, SNTP and GPS) gives an accurate time to the IED. After the initial setting of the clock, one of three things happens with each of the coming synchronization messages configured as fine:
If the synchronization message, which is similar to the other messages, has an offset compared to the internal time in the IED, the message is used directly for synchronization, that is, for adjusting the internal clock to obtain zero offset at the next coming time message.
If the synchronization message has an offset that is large compared to the other messages, a spike-filter in the IED removes this time-message.
If the synchronization message has an offset that is large, and the following message also has a large offset, the spike filter does not act and the offset in the synchronization message is compared to a threshold that defaults to 100 milliseconds. If the offset is more than the threshold, the IED is brought into a safe state and the clock is set to the correct time. If the offset is lower than the threshold, the clock is adjusted with 1000 ppm until the offset is removed. With an adjustment of 1000 ppm, it takes 100 seconds or 1.7 minutes to remove an offset of 100 milliseconds.
Synchronization messages configured as coarse are only used for initial setting of the time. After this has been done, the messages are checked against the internal time and only an offset of more than 10 seconds resets the time.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 4 Basic IED functions
87 Technical reference manual
Rate accuracy In the IED, the rate accuracy at cold start is 100 ppm but if the IED is synchronized for a while, the rate accuracy is approximately 1 ppm if the surrounding temperature is constant. Normally, it takes 20 minutes to reach full accuracy.
Time-out on synchronization sources All synchronization interfaces has a time-out and a configured interface must receive time-messages regularly in order not to give an error signal (TSYNCERR). Normally, the time-out is set so that one message can be lost without getting a TSYNCERR, but if more than one message is lost, a TSYNCERR is given.
4.3.2.3 Synchronization alternatives
Three main alternatives of external time synchronization are available. The synchronization message is applied:
via any of the communication ports of the IED as a telegram message including date and time
as a minute pulse connected to a binary input via GPS
The minute pulse is used to fine tune already existing time in the IEDs.
Synchronization via SNTP SNTP provides a ping-pong method of synchronization. A message is sent from an IED to an SNTP server, and the SNTP server returns the message after filling in a reception time and a transmission time. SNTP operates via the normal Ethernet network that connects IEDs together in an IEC 61850 network. For SNTP to operate properly, there must be an SNTP server present, preferably in the same station. The SNTP synchronization provides an accuracy that gives +/- 1 ms accuracy for binary inputs. The IED itself can be set as an SNTP-time server.
SNTP server requirements The SNTP server to be used is connected to the local network, that is not more than 4-5 switches or routers away from the IED. The SNTP server is dedicated for its task, or at least equipped with a real-time operating system, that is not a PC with SNTP server software. The SNTP server should be stable, that is, either synchronized from a stable source like GPS, or local without synchronization. Using a local SNTP server without synchronization as primary or secondary server in a redundant configuration is not recommended.
Synchronization via Serial Communication Module (SLM) On the serial buses (both LON and SPA) two types of synchronization messages are sent.
Section 4 1MRK505222-UUS C Basic IED functions
88 Technical reference manual
Coarse message is sent every minute and comprises complete date and time, that is, year, month, day, hours, minutes, seconds and milliseconds.
Fine message is sent every second and comprises only seconds and milliseconds.
The SLM module is located on the AD conversion Module (ADM).
Synchronization via Built-in-GPS The built in GPS clock modules receives and decodes time information from the global positioning system. The modules are located on the GPS time synchronization Module (GTM).
Synchronization via binary input The IED accepts minute pulses to a binary input. These minute pulses can be generated from, for example station master clock. If the station master clock is not synchronized from a world wide source, time will be a relative time valid for the substation. Both positive and negative edge on the signal can be accepted. This signal is also considered as a fine time synchronization signal.
The minute pulse is connected to any channel on any Binary Input Module in the IED. The electrical characteristic is thereby the same as for any other binary input.
If the objective of synchronization is to achieve a relative time within the substation and if no station master clock with minute pulse output is available, a simple minute pulse generator can be designed and used for synchronization of the IEDs. The minute pulse generator can be created using the logical elements and timers available in the IED.
The definition of a minute pulse is that it occurs one minute after the last pulse. As only the flanks are detected, the flank of the minute pulse shall occur one minute after the last flank.
Binary minute pulses are checked with reference to frequency.
Pulse data:
Period time (a) should be 60 seconds. Pulse length (b):
Minimum pulse length should be >50 ms. Maximum pulse length is optional.
Magnitude (c) — please refer to section «Binary input module (BIM)».
Deviations in the period time larger than 50 ms will cause TSYNCERR.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 4 Basic IED functions
89 Technical reference manual
a
b
c
en05000251.vsd IEC05000251 V1 EN
Figure 27: Binary minute pulses
The default time-out-time for a minute pulse is two minutes, and if no valid minute pulse is received within two minutes a SYNCERR will be given.
If contact bounce occurs, only the first pulse will be detected as a minute pulse. The next minute pulse will be registered first 60 s — 50 ms after the last contact bounce.
If the minute pulses are perfect, for example, it is exactly 60 seconds between the pulses, contact bounces might occur 49 ms after the actual minute pulse without effecting the system. If contact bounce occurs more than 50 ms, for example, it is less than 59950 ms between the two most adjacent positive (or negative) flanks, the minute pulse will not be accepted.
Binary synchronization example An IED is configured to use only binary input, and a valid binary input is applied to a binary input card. The HMI is used to tell the IED the approximate time and the minute pulse is used to synchronize the IED thereafter. The definition of a minute pulse is that it occurs one minute after the previous minute pulse, so the first minute pulse is not used at all. The second minute pulse will probably be rejected due to the spike filter. The third pulse will give the IED a good time and will reset the time so that the fourth minute pulse will occur on a minute border. After the first three minutes, the time in the IED will be good if the coarse time is set properly via the HMI or the RTC backup still keeps the time since last up-time. If the minute pulse is removed for instance for an hour, the internal time will drift by maximum the error rate in the internal clock. If the minute pulse is returned, the first pulse automatically is rejected. The second pulse will possibly be rejected due to the spike filter. The third pulse will either synchronize the time, if the time offset is more than 100 ms, or adjust the time, if the time offset is small enough. If the time is set, the application will be brought to a safe state before the time is set. If the time is adjusted, the time will reach its destination within 1.7 minutes.
Section 4 1MRK505222-UUS C Basic IED functions
90 Technical reference manual
Synchronization via IRIG-B IRIG-B is a protocol used only for time synchronization. A clock can provide local time of the year in this format. The B in IRIG-B states that 100 bits per second are transmitted, and the message is sent every second. After IRIG-B there numbers stating if and how the signal is modulated and the information transmitted.
To receive IRIG-B there are two connectors in the IRIG-B module, one galvanic BNC connector and one optical ST connector. IRIG-B 12x messages can be supplied via the galvanic interface, and IRIG-B 00x messages can be supplied via either the galvanic interface or the optical interface, where x (in 00x or 12x) means a number in the range of 1-7.
00 means that a base band is used, and the information can be fed into the IRIG-B module via the BNC contact or an optical fiber. 12 means that a 1 kHz modulation is used. In this case the information must go into the module via the BNC connector.
If the x in 00x or 12x is 4, 5, 6 or 7, the time message from IRIG-B contains information of the year. If x is 0, 1, 2 or 3, the information contains only the time within the year, and year information has to come from PCM600 or local HMI.
The IRIG-B module also takes care of IEEE1344 messages that are sent by IRIG-B clocks, as IRIG-B previously did not have any year information. IEEE1344 is compatible with IRIG-B and contains year information and information of the time-zone.
It is recommended to use IEEE 1344 for supplying time information to the IRIG-B module. In this case, send also the local time in the messages, as this local time plus the TZ Offset supplied in the message equals UTC at all times.
4.3.2.4 Process bus IEC 61850-9-2LE synchronization
For the time synchronization of the process bus communication (IEC 61850-9-2LE protocol) an optical PPS or IRIG-B signal can be used. This signal should emanate from either an external GPS clock, or from the merging unit.
An optical PPS signal can be supplied to the optical interface of the IRIG-B module.
4.3.3 Function block
IEC05000425-2-en.vsd
TIMEERR TSYNCERR
RTCERR
IEC05000425 V2 EN
Figure 28: TIMEERR function block
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 4 Basic IED functions
91 Technical reference manual
4.3.4 Output signals Table 20: TIMEERR Output signals
Name Type Description TSYNCERR BOOLEAN Time synchronization error
RTCERR BOOLEAN Real time clock error
4.3.5 Setting parameters Path in the local HMI is located under Main menu/Setting/Time
Path in PCM600 is located under Main menu/Settings/Time/Synchronization
Table 21: TIMESYNCHGEN Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description CoarseSyncSrc Disabled
SPA LON SNTP DNP
— — Disabled Coarse time synchronization source
FineSyncSource Disabled SPA LON BIN GPS GPS+SPA GPS+LON GPS+BIN SNTP GPS+SNTP IRIG-B GPS+IRIG-B PPS
— — Disabled Fine time synchronization source
SyncMaster Disabled SNTP-Server
— — Disabled Activate IED as synchronization master
TimeAdjustRate Slow Fast
— — Fast Adjust rate for time synchronization
HWSyncSrc Disabled GPS IRIG-B PPS
— — Disabled Hardware time synchronization source
AppSynch NoSynch Synch
— — NoSynch Time synchronization mode for application
SyncAccLevel Class T5 (1us) Class T4 (4us) Unspecified
— — Unspecified Wanted time synchronization accuracy
Section 4 1MRK505222-UUS C Basic IED functions
92 Technical reference manual
Table 22: SYNCHBIN Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description ModulePosition 3 — 16 — 1 3 Hardware position of IO module for time
synchronization
BinaryInput 1 — 16 — 1 1 Binary input number for time synchronization
BinDetection PositiveEdge NegativeEdge
— — PositiveEdge Positive or negative edge detection
Table 23: SYNCHSNTP Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description ServerIP-Add 0 — 18 IP
Address 1 0.0.0.0 Server IP-address
RedServIP-Add 0 — 18 IP Address
1 0.0.0.0 Redundant server IP-address
Table 24: DSTBEGIN Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description MonthInYear January
February March April May June July August September October November December
— — March Month in year when daylight time starts
DayInWeek Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday
— — Sunday Day in week when daylight time starts
WeekInMonth Last First Second Third Fourth
— — Last Week in month when daylight time starts
UTCTimeOfDay 0 — 172800 s 1 3600 UTC Time of day in seconds when daylight time starts
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 4 Basic IED functions
93 Technical reference manual
Table 25: DSTEND Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description MonthInYear January
February March April May June July August September October November December
— — October Month in year when daylight time ends
DayInWeek Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday
— — Sunday Day in week when daylight time ends
WeekInMonth Last First Second Third Fourth
— — Last Week in month when daylight time ends
UTCTimeOfDay 0 — 172800 s 1 3600 UTC Time of day in seconds when daylight time ends
Table 26: TIMEZONE Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description NoHalfHourUTC -24 — 24 — 1 0 Number of half-hours from UTC
Table 27: SYNCHIRIG-B Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description SynchType BNC
Opto — — Opto Type of synchronization
TimeDomain LocalTime UTC
— — LocalTime Time domain
Encoding IRIG-B 1344 1344TZ
— — IRIG-B Type of encoding
TimeZoneAs1344 MinusTZ PlusTZ
— — PlusTZ Time zone as in 1344 standard
Section 4 1MRK505222-UUS C Basic IED functions
94 Technical reference manual
4.3.6 Technical data Table 28: Time synchronization, time tagging
Function Value Time tagging resolution, events and sampled measurement values 1 ms
Time tagging error with synchronization once/min (minute pulse synchronization), events and sampled measurement values
1.0 ms typically
Time tagging error with SNTP synchronization, sampled measurement values
1.0 ms typically
4.4 Parameter setting groups
4.4.1 Introduction Use the six different groups of settings to optimize the IED operation for different power system conditions. Creating and switching between fine-tuned setting sets, either from the local HMI or configurable binary inputs, results in a highly adaptable IED that can cope with a variety of power system scenarios.
4.4.2 Principle of operation Parameter setting groups ActiveGroup function has six functional inputs, each corresponding to one of the setting groups stored in the IED. Activation of any of these inputs changes the active setting group. Seven functional output signals are available for configuration purposes, so that up to date information on the active setting group is always available.
A setting group is selected by using the local HMI, from a front connected personal computer, remotely from the station control or station monitoring system or by activating the corresponding input to the ActiveGroup function block.
Each input of the function block can be configured to connect to any of the binary inputs in the IED. To do this PCM600 must be used.
The external control signals are used for activating a suitable setting group when adaptive functionality is necessary. Input signals that should activate setting groups must be either permanent or a pulse exceeding 400 ms.
More than one input may be activated at the same time. In such cases the lower order setting group has priority. This means that if for example both group four and group two are set to activate, group two will be the one activated.
Every time the active group is changed, the output signal GRP_CHGD is sending a pulse.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 4 Basic IED functions
95 Technical reference manual
The parameter MAXSETGR defines the maximum number of setting groups in use to switch between.
ANSI05000119-2-en.vsd
IOx-Bly1
IOx-Bly2
IOx-Bly3
IOx-Bly4
+RL2
ACTIVATE GROUP 4 ACTIVATE GROUP 3 ACTIVATE GROUP 2
ACTIVATE GROUP 1
ACTGRP1
ACTGRP2
ACTGRP3
ACTGRP4
GRP1
GRP2
GRP3
GRP4
ActiveGroup
ACTGRP5
ACTGRP6 GRP5
GRP6
IOx-Bly5
IOx-Bly6
ACTIVATE GROUP 5 ACTIVATE GROUP 6
GRP_CHGD
ANSI05000119 V2 EN
Figure 29: Connection of the function to external circuits
The above example also includes seven output signals, for confirmation of which group that is active.
SETGRPS function block has an input where the number of setting groups used is defined. Switching can only be done within that number of groups. The number of setting groups selected to be used will be filtered so only the setting groups used will be shown on the Parameter Setting Tool.
4.4.3 Function block
ANSI05000433-2-en.vsd
ActiveGroup ACTGRP1 ACTGRP2 ACTGRP3 ACTGRP4 ACTGRP5 ACTGRP6
GRP1 GRP2 GRP3 GRP4 GRP5 GRP6
GRP_CHGD
ANSI05000433 V2 EN
Figure 30: ActiveGroup function block
Section 4 1MRK505222-UUS C Basic IED functions
96 Technical reference manual
IEC05000716_2_en.vsd
SETGRPS MAXSETGR
IEC05000716 V2 EN
Figure 31: SETGRPS function block
4.4.4 Input and output signals Table 29: ActiveGroup Input signals
Name Type Default Description ACTGRP1 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 1 as active
ACTGRP2 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 2 as active
ACTGRP3 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 3 as active
ACTGRP4 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 4 as active
ACTGRP5 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 5 as active
ACTGRP6 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 6 as active
Table 30: ActiveGroup Output signals
Name Type Description GRP1 BOOLEAN Setting group 1 is active
GRP2 BOOLEAN Setting group 2 is active
GRP3 BOOLEAN Setting group 3 is active
GRP4 BOOLEAN Setting group 4 is active
GRP5 BOOLEAN Setting group 5 is active
GRP6 BOOLEAN Setting group 6 is active
GRP_CHGD BOOLEAN Pulse when setting changed
4.4.5 Setting parameters Table 31: ActiveGroup Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description t 0.0 — 10.0 s 0.1 1.0 Pulse length of pulse when setting changed
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 4 Basic IED functions
97 Technical reference manual
Table 32: SETGRPS Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description ActiveSetGrp SettingGroup1
SettingGroup2 SettingGroup3 SettingGroup4 SettingGroup5 SettingGroup6
— — SettingGroup1 ActiveSettingGroup
MAXSETGR 1 — 6 No 1 1 Max number of setting groups 1-6
4.5 ChangeLock function CHNGLCK
4.5.1 Introduction Change lock function (CHNGLCK) is used to block further changes to the IED configuration and settings once the commissioning is complete. The purpose is to block inadvertent IED configuration changes beyond a certain point in time.
4.5.2 Principle of operation The Change lock function (CHNGLCK) is configured using ACT.
The function, when activated, will still allow the following changes of the IED state that does not involve reconfiguring of the IED:
Monitoring Reading events Resetting events Reading disturbance data Clear disturbances Reset LEDs Reset counters and other runtime component states Control operations Set system time Enter and exit from test mode Change of active setting group
The binary input signal LOCK controlling the function is defined in ACT or SMT:
Section 4 1MRK505222-UUS C Basic IED functions
98 Technical reference manual
Binary input Function 1 Activated
0 Deactivated
4.5.3 Function block
IEC09000946-1-en.vsd
CHNGLCK LOCK
IEC09000946 V1 EN
Figure 32: CHNGLCK function block
4.5.4 Input and output signals Table 33: CHNGLCK Input signals
Name Type Default Description LOCK BOOLEAN 0 Parameter change lock
4.5.5 Setting parameters Table 34: CHNGLCK Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation LockHMI and Com
LockHMI, EnableCom EnableHMI, LockCom
— — LockHMI and Com Operation mode of change lock
4.6 Test mode functionality TEST
4.6.1 Introduction When the Test mode functionality TESTMODE is activated, all the functions in the IED are automatically blocked. It is then possible to unblock every function(s) individually from the local HMI to perform required tests.
When leaving TESTMODE, all blockings are removed and the IED resumes normal operation. However, if during TESTMODE operation, power is removed and later
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 4 Basic IED functions
99 Technical reference manual
restored, the IED will remain in TESTMODE with the same protection functions blocked or unblocked as before the power was removed. All testing will be done with actually set and configured values within the IED. No settings will be changed, thus mistakes are avoided.
4.6.2 Principle of operation Put the IED into test mode to test functions in the IED. Set the IED in test mode by
configuration, activating the input SIGNAL on the function block TESTMODE. setting TestMode to Enabled in the local HMI, under Main menu/TEST/IED test
mode.
While the IED is in test mode, the ACTIVE of the function block TESTMODE is activated. The other outputs of the function block TESTMODE shows the cause of the «Test mode: Enabled» state input from configuration (OUTPUT output is activated) or setting from local HMI (SETTING output is activated).
While the IED is in test mode, the yellow PICKUP LED will flash and all functions are blocked. Any function can be unblocked individually regarding functionality and event signalling.
Most of the functions in the IED can individually be blocked by means of settings from the local HMI. To enable these blockings the IED must be set in test mode (output ACTIVE is activated), see example in figure 33. When leaving the test mode, that is entering normal mode, these blockings are disabled and everything is set to normal operation. All testing will be done with actually set and configured values within the IED. No settings will be changed, thus no mistakes are possible.
The blocked functions will still be blocked next time entering the test mode, if the blockings were not reset.
The blocking of a function concerns all output signals from the actual function, so no outputs will be activated.
When a binary input is used to set the IED in test mode and a parameter, that requires restart of the application, is changed, the IED will re-enter test mode and all functions will be blocked, also functions that were unblocked before the change. During the re-entering to test mode, all functions will be temporarily unblocked for a short time, which might lead to unwanted operations. This is only valid if the IED is put in TEST mode by a binary input, not by local HMI.
The TESTMODE function block might be used to automatically block functions when a test handle is inserted in a test switch. A contact in the test switch (RTXP24 contact
Section 4 1MRK505222-UUS C Basic IED functions
100 Technical reference manual
29-30) or an FT switch finger can supply a binary input which in turn is configured to the TESTMODE function block.
Each of the functions includes the blocking from the TESTMODE function block. A typical example from the undervoltage function is shown in figure 33.
The functions can also be blocked from sending events over IEC 61850 station bus to prevent filling station and SCADA databases with test events, for example during a maintenance test.
Time
V
Normal voltage
Pickup1
Pickup2
IntBlkStVal1
IntBlkStVal2
Disconnection
tBlkUV1 < t1,t1Min
tBlkUV2 < t2,t2Min
Block step 1
Block step 2 en05000466_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000466 V1 EN
Figure 33: Example of blocking the time delayed undervoltage protection function.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 4 Basic IED functions
101 Technical reference manual
4.6.3 Function block TESTMODE
INPUT ACTIVE OUTPUT SETTING
NOEVENT
IEC09000219-1.vsd IEC09000219 V1 EN
Figure 34: TESTMODE function block
4.6.4 Input and output signals Table 35: TESTMODE Input signals
Name Type Default Description INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Sets terminal in test mode when active
Table 36: TESTMODE Output signals
Name Type Description ACTIVE BOOLEAN IED in test mode when active
OUTPUT BOOLEAN Test input is active
SETTING BOOLEAN Test mode setting is (Enabled) or not (Disabled)
NOEVENT BOOLEAN Event disabled during testmode
4.6.5 Setting parameters Table 37: TESTMODE Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description TestMode Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Test mode in operation (Enabled) or not
(Disabled)
EventDisable Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Event disable during testmode
CmdTestBit Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Command bit for test required or not during testmode
Section 4 1MRK505222-UUS C Basic IED functions
102 Technical reference manual
4.7 IED identifiers
4.7.1 Introduction IED identifiers (TERMINALID) function allows the user to identify the individual IED in the system, not only in the substation, but in a whole region or a country.
Use only characters A-Z, a-z and 0-9 in station, object and unit names.
4.7.2 Setting parameters Table 38: TERMINALID Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description StationName 0 — 18 — 1 Station name Station name
StationNumber 0 — 99999 — 1 0 Station number
ObjectName 0 — 18 — 1 Object name Object name
ObjectNumber 0 — 99999 — 1 0 Object number
UnitName 0 — 18 — 1 Unit name Unit name
UnitNumber 0 — 99999 — 1 0 Unit number
4.8 Product information
4.8.1 Introduction The Product identifiers function identifies the IED. The function has seven pre-set, settings that are unchangeable but nevertheless very important:
IEDProdType ProductDef FirmwareVer SerialNo OrderingNo ProductionDate
The settings are visible on the local HMI , under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/ Product identifiers
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 4 Basic IED functions
103 Technical reference manual
They are very helpful in case of support process (such as repair or maintenance).
4.8.2 Setting parameters The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.
4.8.3 Factory defined settings The factory defined settings are very useful for identifying a specific version and very helpful in the case of maintenance, repair, interchanging IEDs between different Substation Automation Systems and upgrading. The factory made settings can not be changed by the customer. They can only be viewed. The settings are found in the local HMI under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/Product identifiers
The following identifiers are available:
IEDProdType Describes the type of the IED (like REL, REC or RET). Example: REL670
FirmwareVer Describes the firmware version. Example: 1.4.51 Firmware versions numbers are running independently from the release
production numbers. For every release numbers (like 1.5.0.17) there can be one or more firmware versions, depending on the small issues corrected in between releases.
IEDMainFunType Main function type code according to IEC 60870-5-103. Example: 128
(meaning line protection). SerialNo OrderingNo ProductionDate
4.9 Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI
4.9.1 Introduction The Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI) function is used within the Application Configuration Tool (ACT) in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), see
Section 4 1MRK505222-UUS C Basic IED functions
104 Technical reference manual
the application manual to get information about how binary inputs are brought in for one IED configuration.
4.9.2 Principle of operation The Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI) function , see figure 35, receives its inputs from the real (hardware) binary inputs via the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), and makes them available to the rest of the configuration via its outputs, BI1 to BI10. The inputs and outputs, as well as the whole block, can be given a user defined name. These names will be represented in SMT as information which signals shall be connected between physical IO and SMBI function. The input/output user defined name will also appear on the respective output/input signal.
4.9.3 Function block
IEC05000434-2-en.vsd
SMBI ^VIN1 ^VIN2 ^VIN3 ^VIN4 ^VIN5 ^VIN6 ^VIN7 ^VIN8 ^VIN9 ^VIN10
^BI1 ^BI2 ^BI3 ^BI4 ^BI5 ^BI6 ^BI7 ^BI8 ^BI9
^BI10
IEC05000434 V2 EN
Figure 35: SMBI function block
4.9.4 Input and output signals Table 39: SMBI Input signals
Name Type Default Description VIn1 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
VIn2 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
VIn3 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
VIn4 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
VIn5 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
VIn6 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
VIn7 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
VIn8 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
VIn9 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
VIn10 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 4 Basic IED functions
105 Technical reference manual
Table 40: SMBI Output signals
Name Type Description BI1 BOOLEAN Binary input 1
BI2 BOOLEAN Binary input 2
BI3 BOOLEAN Binary input 3
BI4 BOOLEAN Binary input 4
BI5 BOOLEAN Binary input 5
BI6 BOOLEAN Binary input 6
BI7 BOOLEAN Binary input 7
BI8 BOOLEAN Binary input 8
BI9 BOOLEAN Binary input 9
BI10 BOOLEAN Binary input 10
4.10 Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO
4.10.1 Introduction The Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO) function is used within the Application Configuration Tool (ACT) in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), see the application manual to get information about how binary inputs are sent from one IED configuration.
4.10.2 Principle of operation The Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO) function , see figure 36, receives logical signal from the IED configuration, which is transferring to the real (hardware) outputs, via the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT). The inputs in SMBO are BO1 to BO10 and they, as well as the whole function block, can be tag-named. The name tags will appear in SMT as information which signals shall be connected between physical IO and the SMBO.
It is important that SMBO inputs are connected when SMBOs are connected to physical outputs through the Signal Matrix Tool. If SMBOs are connected (in SMT) but their inputs not, all the physical outputs will be set by default. This might cause malfunction of primary equipment and/or injury to personnel.
Section 4 1MRK505222-UUS C Basic IED functions
106 Technical reference manual
4.10.3 Function block
IEC05000439-2-en.vsd
SMBO BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 BO5 BO6 BO7 BO8 BO9 BO10
^BO1 ^BO2 ^BO3 ^BO4 ^BO5 ^BO6 ^BO7 ^BO8 ^BO9
^BO10
IEC05000439 V2 EN
Figure 36: SMBO function block
4.10.4 Input and output signals Table 41: SMBO Input signals
Name Type Default Description BO1 BOOLEAN 1 Signal name for BO1 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO2 BOOLEAN 1 Signal name for BO2 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO3 BOOLEAN 1 Signal name for BO3 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO4 BOOLEAN 1 Signal name for BO4 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO5 BOOLEAN 1 Signal name for BO5 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO6 BOOLEAN 1 Signal name for BO6 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO7 BOOLEAN 1 Signal name for BO7 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO8 BOOLEAN 1 Signal name for BO8 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO9 BOOLEAN 1 Signal name for BO9 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO10 BOOLEAN 1 Signal name for BO10 in Signal Matrix Tool
4.11 Signal matrix for mA inputs SMMI
4.11.1 Introduction The Signal matrix for mA inputs (SMMI) function is used within the Application Configuration Tool (ACT) in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), see the application manual to get information about how milliamp (mA) inputs are brought in for one IED configuration.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 4 Basic IED functions
107 Technical reference manual
4.11.2 Principle of operation The Signal matrix for mA inputs (SMMI) function, see figure 37, receives its inputs from the real (hardware) mA inputs via the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), and makes them available to the rest of the configuration via its analog outputs, named AI1 to AI6. The inputs, as well as the whole block, can be tag-named. These tags will be represented in SMT.
The outputs on SMMI are normally connected to the IEC61850 generic communication I/O functions (MVGGIO) function for further use of the mA signals.
4.11.3 Function block
IEC05000440-2-en.vsd
SMMI ^VIN1 ^VIN2 ^VIN3 ^VIN4 ^VIN5 ^VIN6
AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AI5 AI6
IEC05000440 V2 EN
Figure 37: SMMI function block
4.11.4 Input and output signals Table 42: SMMI Input signals
Name Type Default Description VIn1 REAL 0 SMT connected milliampere input
VIn2 REAL 0 SMT connected milliampere input
VIn3 REAL 0 SMT connected milliampere input
VIn4 REAL 0 SMT connected milliampere input
VIn5 REAL 0 SMT connected milliampere input
VIn6 REAL 0 SMT connected milliampere input
Table 43: SMMI Output signals
Name Type Description AI1 REAL Analog milliampere input 1
AI2 REAL Analog milliampere input 2
AI3 REAL Analog milliampere input 3
Table continues on next page
Section 4 1MRK505222-UUS C Basic IED functions
108 Technical reference manual
Name Type Description AI4 REAL Analog milliampere input 4
AI5 REAL Analog milliampere input 5
AI6 REAL Analog milliampere input 6
4.12 Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI
4.12.1 Introduction Signal matrix for analog inputs function (SMAI), also known as the preprocessor function, processes the analog signals connected to it and gives information about all aspects of the analog signals connected, like the RMS value, phase angle, frequency, harmonic content, sequence components and so on. This information is then used by the respective functions in ACT (for example protection, measurement or monitoring).
The SMAI function is used within PCM600 in direct relation with the Signal Matrix tool or the Application Configuration tool.
4.12.2 Principle of operation Every Signal matrix for analog inputs function (SMAI) can receive four analog signals (three phases and one neutral value), either voltage or current, see figure 39 and figure 40. SMAI outputs give information about every aspect of the 3ph analog signals acquired (phase angle, RMS value, frequency and frequency derivates etc. 244 values in total). The BLOCK input will reset all outputs to 0.
The output signal AI1 to AI4 are direct output of the, in SMT, connected input to GRPx_A, GRPxB, GRPxC and GRPx_N, x=1-12. AIN is always the neutral current, calculated residual sum or the signal connected to GRPx_N. Note that function block will always calculate the residual sum of current/voltage if the input is not connected in SMT. Applications with a few exceptions shall always be connected to AI3P.
4.12.3 Frequency values The frequency functions includes a functionality based on level of positive sequence voltage, IntBlockLevel, to validate if the frequency measurement is valid or not. If positive sequence voltage is lower than IntBlockLevel the function is blocked. IntBlockLevel, is set in % of VBase/3
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 4 Basic IED functions
109 Technical reference manual
If SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-Ph at least two of the inputs GRPx_A, GRPx_B and GRPx_C must be connected in order to calculate positive sequence voltage. If SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-N, all three inputs GRPx_A, GRPx_B and GRPx_C must be connected in order to calculate positive sequence voltage.
If only one phase-phase voltage is available and SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph- Ph the user is advised to connect two (not three) of the inputs GRPx_A, GRPx_B and GRPx_C to the same voltage input as shown in figure 38 to make SMAI calculating a positive sequence voltage (that is input voltage/3).
IEC10000060-1-en.vsd
IEC10000060 V1 EN
Figure 38: Connection example
The above described scenario does not work if SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-N. If only one phase-ground voltage is available, the same type of connection can be used but the SMAI ConnectionType setting must still be Ph-Ph and this has to be accounted for when setting IntBlockLevel. If SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-N and the same voltage is connected to all three SMAI inputs, the positive sequence voltage will be zero and the frequency functions will not work properly.
The outputs from the above configured SMAI block shall only be used for Overfrequency protection (SAPTOF, 81), Underfrequency protection (SAPTUF, 81) and Rate-of-change frequency protection (SAPFRC, 81) due to that all other information except frequency and positive sequence voltage might be wrongly calculated.
Section 4 1MRK505222-UUS C Basic IED functions
110 Technical reference manual
4.12.4 Function block
ANSI05000705-1-en.vsd
SMAI1 BLOCK DFTSPFC ^GRP1_A ^GRP1_B ^GRP1_C ^GRP1_N TYPE
SPFCOUT AI3P
AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AIN
ANSI05000705 V1 EN
Figure 39: SMAI1 function block
ANSI07000130-1-en.vsd
SMAI2 BLOCK ^GRP2_A ^GRP2_B ^GRP2_C ^GRP2_N TYPE
AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AIN
ANSI07000130 V1 EN
Figure 40: SMAI2 function block
4.12.5 Input and output signals Table 44: SMAI1 Input signals
Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block group 1
DFTSPFC REAL 20.0 Number of samples per fundamental cycle used for DFT calculation
GRP1_A STRING — Sample input to be used for group 1 phase A calculations
GRP1_B STRING — Sample input to be used for group 1 phase B calculations
GRP1_C STRING — Sample input to be used for group 1 phase C calculations
GRP1_N STRING — Sample input to be used for group 1 residual calculations
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 4 Basic IED functions
111 Technical reference manual
Table 45: SMAI1 Output signals
Name Type Description SPFCOUT REAL Number of samples per fundamental cycle from
internal DFT reference function
AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Group 1 analog input 3-phase group
AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Group 1 analog input 1
AI2 GROUP SIGNAL Group 1 analog input 2
AI3 GROUP SIGNAL Group 1 analog input 3
AI4 GROUP SIGNAL Group 1 analog input 4
AIN GROUP SIGNAL Group 1 analog input residual for disturbance recorder
Table 46: SMAI2 Input signals
Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block group 2
GRP2_A STRING — Sample input to be used for group 2 phase A calculations
GRP2_B STRING — Sample input to be used for group 2 phase B calculations
GRP2_C STRING — Sample input to be used for group 2 phase C calculations
GRP2_N STRING — Sample input to be used for group 2 residual calculations
Table 47: SMAI2 Output signals
Name Type Description AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input 3-phase group
AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input 1
AI2 GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input 2
AI3 GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input 3
AI4 GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input 4
AIN GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input residual for disturbance recorder
4.12.6 Setting parameters
Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default value InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available. Internal nominal frequency DFT reference is then the reference.
Section 4 1MRK505222-UUS C Basic IED functions
112 Technical reference manual
Table 48: SMAI1 Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description DFTRefExtOut InternalDFTRef
AdDFTRefCh1 AdDFTRefCh2 AdDFTRefCh3 AdDFTRefCh4 AdDFTRefCh5 AdDFTRefCh6 AdDFTRefCh7 AdDFTRefCh8 AdDFTRefCh9 AdDFTRefCh10 AdDFTRefCh11 AdDFTRefCh12 External DFT ref
— — InternalDFTRef DFT reference for external output
DFTReference InternalDFTRef AdDFTRefCh1 AdDFTRefCh2 AdDFTRefCh3 AdDFTRefCh4 AdDFTRefCh5 AdDFTRefCh6 AdDFTRefCh7 AdDFTRefCh8 AdDFTRefCh9 AdDFTRefCh10 AdDFTRefCh11 AdDFTRefCh12 External DFT ref
— — InternalDFTRef DFT reference
ConnectionType Ph-N Ph-Ph
— — Ph-N Input connection type
TYPE 1 — 2 Ch 1 1 1=Voltage, 2=Current
Table 49: SMAI1 Non group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Negation Disabled
NegateN Negate3Ph Negate3Ph+N
— — Disabled Negation
MinValFreqMeas 5 — 200 % 1 10 Limit for frequency calculation in % of VBase
VBase 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Base voltage
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 4 Basic IED functions
113 Technical reference manual
Table 50: SMAI2 Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description DFTReference InternalDFTRef
AdDFTRefCh1 AdDFTRefCh2 AdDFTRefCh3 AdDFTRefCh4 AdDFTRefCh5 AdDFTRefCh6 AdDFTRefCh7 AdDFTRefCh8 AdDFTRefCh9 AdDFTRefCh10 AdDFTRefCh11 AdDFTRefCh12 External DFT ref
— — InternalDFTRef DFT reference
ConnectionType Ph-N Ph-Ph
— — Ph-N Input connection type
TYPE 1 — 2 Ch 1 1 1=Voltage, 2=Current
Table 51: SMAI2 Non group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Negation Disabled
NegateN Negate3Ph Negate3Ph+N
— — Disabled Negation
MinValFreqMeas 5 — 200 % 1 10 Limit for frequency calculation in % of VBase
VBase 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Base voltage
4.13 Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM
4.13.1 Introduction Summation block 3 phase function 3PHSUM is used to get the sum of two sets of three- phase analog signals (of the same type) for those IED functions that might need it.
4.13.2 Principle of operation Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM receives the three-phase signals from Signal matrix for analog inputs function (SMAI). In the same way, the BLOCK input will reset all the outputs of the function to 0.
Section 4 1MRK505222-UUS C Basic IED functions
114 Technical reference manual
4.13.3 Function block
IEC05000441-2-en.vsd
3PHSUM BLOCK DFTSPFC G1AI3P* G2AI3P*
AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4
IEC05000441 V2 EN
Figure 41: 3PHSUM function block
4.13.4 Input and output signals Table 52: 3PHSUM Input signals
Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block
DFTSPFC REAL 0 Number of samples per fundamental cycle used for DFT calculation
G1AI3P GROUP SIGNAL
— Group 1 analog input 3-phase group
G2AI3P GROUP SIGNAL
— Group 2 analog input 3-phase group
Table 53: 3PHSUM Output signals
Name Type Description AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Group analog input 3-phase group
AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Group 1 analog input
AI2 GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input
AI3 GROUP SIGNAL Group 3 analog input
AI4 GROUP SIGNAL Group 4 analog input
4.13.5 Setting parameters
Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default value InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 4 Basic IED functions
115 Technical reference manual
Table 54: 3PHSUM Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description SummationType Group1+Group2
Group1-Group2 Group2-Group1 -(Group1+Group2)
— — Group1+Group2 Summation type
DFTReference InternalDFTRef AdDFTRefCh1 External DFT ref
— — InternalDFTRef DFT reference
Table 55: 3PHSUM Non group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description FreqMeasMinVal 5 — 200 % 1 10 Magnitude limit for frequency calculation in %
of Vbase
VBase 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Base voltage
4.14 Authority status ATHSTAT
4.14.1 Introduction Authority status (ATHSTAT) function is an indication function block for user log-on activity.
4.14.2 Principle of operation Authority status (ATHSTAT) function informs about two events related to the IED and the user authorization:
the fact that at least one user has tried to log on wrongly into the IED and it was blocked (the output USRBLKED)
the fact that at least one user is logged on (the output LOGGEDON)
Whenever one of the two events occurs, the corresponding output (USRBLKED or LOGGEDON) is activated. The output can for example, be connected on Event (EVENT) function block for LON/SPA.The signals are also available on IEC 61850 station bus.
Section 4 1MRK505222-UUS C Basic IED functions
116 Technical reference manual
4.14.3 Function block
IEC06000503-2-en.vsd
ATHSTAT USRBLKED
LOGGEDON
IEC06000503 V2 EN
Figure 42: ATHSTAT function block
4.14.4 Output signals Table 56: ATHSTAT Output signals
Name Type Description USRBLKED BOOLEAN At least one user is blocked by invalid password
LOGGEDON BOOLEAN At least one user is logged on
4.14.5 Setting parameters The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.
4.15 Denial of service DOS
4.15.1 Introduction The Denial of service functions (DOSFRNT, DOSOEMAB and DOSOEMCD) are designed to limit overload on the IED produced by heavy Ethernet network traffic. The communication facilities must not be allowed to compromise the primary functionality of the device. All inbound network traffic will be quota controlled so that too heavy network loads can be controlled. Heavy network load might for instance be the result of malfunctioning equipment connected to the network.
4.15.2 Principle of operation The Denial of service functions (DOSFRNT, DOSOEMAB and DOSOEMCD) measures the IED load from communication and, if necessary, limit it for not jeopardizing the IEDs control and protection functionality due to high CPU load. The function has the following outputs:
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 4 Basic IED functions
117 Technical reference manual
LINKUP indicates the Ethernet link status WARNING indicates that communication (frame rate) is higher than normal ALARM indicates that the IED limits communication
4.15.3 Function blocks DOSFRNT
LINKUP WARNING
ALARM
IEC09000749-1-en.vsd IEC09000749 V1 EN
Figure 43: DOSFRNT function block
DOSOEMAB LINKUP
WARNING ALARM
IEC09000750-1-en.vsd IEC09000750 V1 EN
Figure 44: DOSOEMAB function block
DOSOEMCD LINKUP
WARNING ALARM
IEC09000751-1-en.vsd IEC09000751 V1 EN
Figure 45: DOSOEMCD function block
4.15.4 Signals Table 57: DOSFRNT Output signals
Name Type Description LINKUP BOOLEAN Ethernet link status
WARNING BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than normal state
ALARM BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than throttle state
Section 4 1MRK505222-UUS C Basic IED functions
118 Technical reference manual
Table 58: DOSOEMAB Output signals
Name Type Description LINKUP BOOLEAN Ethernet link status
WARNING BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than normal state
ALARM BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than throttle state
Table 59: DOSOEMCD Output signals
Name Type Description LINKUP BOOLEAN Ethernet link status
WARNING BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than normal state
ALARM BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than throttle state
4.15.5 Settings The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 4 Basic IED functions
119 Technical reference manual
Section 5 Differential protection
About this chapter This chapter describes the measuring principles, functions and parameters used in differential protection.
5.1 Line differential protection
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Line differential protection, 3 CT sets, 2-3 line ends L3CPDIF 3Id/I>
SYMBOL-HH V1 EN
87L
Line differential protection, 6 CT sets, 3-5 line ends L6CPDIF 3Id/I>
SYMBOL-HH V1 EN
87L
Line differential protection 3 CT sets, with in-zone transformers, 2-3 line ends LT3CPDIF 3Id/I>
SYMBOL-HH V1 EN
87LT
Line differential protection 6 CT sets, with in-zone transformers, 3-5 line ends LT6CPDIF 3Id/I>
SYMBOL-HH V1 EN
87LT
Line differential logic LDLPDIF — 87L
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 5 Differential protection
121 Technical reference manual
5.1.1 Introduction
5.1.1.1 Line differential protection, 3 or 6 CT sets L3CPDIF, L6CPDIF
Line differential protection applies the Kirchhoff’s law and compares the currents entering and leaving the protected multi-terminal circuit, consisting of overhead power lines, power transformers and cables. It offers phase-segregated true current differential protection with high sensitivity and provides phase selection information for single- pole tripping.
The three terminal version is used for conventional two-terminal lines with or without breaker-and-a-half circuit breaker arrangement in one end, as well as three terminal lines with single breaker arrangements at all terminals.
IED IED
Protected zone
Communication Channel
ANSI05000039_2_en.vsd ANSI05000039 V2 EN
Figure 46: Example of application on a conventional two-terminal line
The six terminal versions are used for conventional two-terminal lines with breaker-and- a-half circuit breaker arrangements in both ends, as well as multi terminal lines with up to five terminals.
Section 5 1MRK505222-UUS C Differential protection
122 Technical reference manual
IED IED
IED
Communication Channel
Communication Channel
Communication Channel
Protected zone
ANSI05000040_2_en.vsd
ANSI05000040 V2 EN
Figure 47: Example of application on a three-terminal line with breaker-and-a-half breaker arrangements
The current differential algorithm provides high sensitivity for internal faults, at the same time as it has excellent stability for external faults. Current samples from all CTs are exchanged between the IEDs in the line ends (master-master mode) or sent to one IED (master-slave mode) for evaluation.
A restrained dual biased slope evaluation is made where the bias current is the highest phase current in any line end giving a secure through fault stability even with heavily saturated CTs. In addition to the restrained evaluation, an unrestrained high differential current setting can be used for fast tripping of internal faults with very high currents.
A special feature with this function is that applications with small power transformers (rated current less than 50 % of the differential current setting) connected as line taps (that is, as «shunt» power transformers), without measurements of currents in the tap, can be handled. The normal load current is here considered to be negligible, and special measures need only to be taken in the event of a short circuit on the LV side of the transformer. In this application, the tripping of the differential protection can be time delayed for low differential currents to achieve coordination with down stream over current IEDs.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 5 Differential protection
123 Technical reference manual
A line charging current compensation provides increased sensitivity of Line differential protection.
5.1.1.2 Line differential protection 3 or 6 CT sets, with in-zone transformers LT3CPDIF, LT6CPDIF
Two two-winding power transformers, or one three-winding power transformer, can be included in the line differential protection zone. Both two- and three-winding transformers are correctly represented with phase shift compensations made in the algorithm. The function includes 2nd and 5th harmonic restraint and zero-sequence current elimination.
IED IED
Protected zone
Communication Channel
IED
Communication ChannelCommunication Channel
ANSI0500042_2_en.vsd ANSI05000042 V2 EN
Figure 48: Example of application on a three-terminal line with a power transformer in the protection zone
5.1.1.3 Analog signal transfer for line differential protection
The line differential communication can be arranged as a master-master system or a master-slave system alternatively. In the former, current samples are exchanged between all IEDs, and an evaluation is made in each IED. This means that a 64 kbit/s
Section 5 1MRK505222-UUS C Differential protection
124 Technical reference manual
communication channel is needed between every IED included in the same line differential protection zone. In the latter, current samples are sent from all slave IEDs to one master IED where the evaluation is made, and trip signals are sent to the remote ends when needed. In this system, a 64 kbit/s communication channel is only needed between the master, and each one of the slave IEDs.
It is recommended to use the same firmware version as well as hardware version for a specific RED670 scheme.
Protected zone
Communication Channel
IED
IED IED IED
ANSI05000043_2_en.vsd
IED
ANSI05000043 V2 EN
Figure 49: Five terminal lines with master-master system
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 5 Differential protection
125 Technical reference manual
Protected zone
Communication Channels
RED 670
RED 670
RED 670
RED 670
RED 670
en05000044_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000044 V1 EN
Figure 50: Five terminal line with master-slave system
Current samples from IEDs located geographically apart from each other, must be time coordinated so that the current differential algorithm can be executed correctly. In IED, it is possible to make this coordination in two different ways. The echo method of time synchronizing is normally used whereas for applications where transmit and receive times can differ, the optional built in GPS receivers can be used.
The communication link is continuously monitored, and an automatic switchover to a standby link is possible after a preset time.
5.1.2 Principle of operation
5.1.2.1 Algorithm and logic
In Line differential protection function, measured current values from local and remote line ends are evaluated in order to distinguish between internal or external faults, or undisturbed conditions.
The local currents are fed to the IED via the Analog Input Modules and thereafter they pass the Analog to Digital Converter, as shown in figure 51.
Section 5 1MRK505222-UUS C Differential protection
126 Technical reference manual
en05000294_ansi.vsd
Calculation of
instantaneous differential currents
(3x)
Calculation of fundamental frequency differential
currents (3x) & bias current
Magnitudes of differential currents
Bias current
[magnitude]
[samples]
Instantaneous differential currents
(samples)
Differential and bias currents
applied to operate / bias-, and unrestrained characteristics
Harmonic analysis
( 2nd and 5th)
Trip by unrestrained differential protection
Calculation of
negative- sequence differential current
(1x)
Two to six contributions to neg. seq. differential current as phasors
High sensitive internal/external fault
discriminator
Internal fault
External fault
Output logic:
— 2nd harmonic block — 5th harmonic block
— Cross block logic
— Enhanced trip for internal faults
— Decreased sensitivity for external faults
— Conditional trip for simultaneous external and internal faults
— Conditional extra time delay for trip signals
Start L1
Start L2
Start L3
2nd h. block
5th h. block
CH1IL1SM CH1IL2SM CH1IL3SM
CH2IL1SM
Curr. samples from all ends
CH1IL1RE CH1IL1IM
CH1IL2RE CH1IL2IM
Currents from all ends as phasors
CH1INSRE
CH1INSIM CH1INSRE
CH1INSIM
Neg. seq. currents from
all ends as phasors
Tr ip
c om
m an
ds
TRIP1
TRIPRES TRIPUNRE TRIPENHA
START STL1 STL2 STL3
BLK2H BLK2HL1 BLK2HL2 BLK2HL3
BLK5H BLK5HL1 BLK5HL2 BLK5HL3
INTFAULT EXTFAULT
In fo
rm at
io n
TRL1 TRL2 TRL3
Line Diffferential Function
Local end RED670
Remote end RED670
St L1 low sens
St L3 low sens St L2 low sens
Local end Remote end
LDCM
Current samples from remote end
Current samples from
local endA/D Converter
LDCM
Pre-processing Block
Analog Input Module
ANSI05000294 V1 EN
Figure 51: The principle for the line differential protection
The remote currents are received to the IED as samples via a communication link. When entering the IED, they are processed in the Line Differential Communication
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 5 Differential protection
127 Technical reference manual
Module (LDCM) where they are time coordinated with the local current samples, and interpolated in order to be comparable with the local samples.
In the Pre-Processing Block, the real and imaginary parts of the fundamental frequency phase currents and negative sequence currents are derived. Together with the current samples, they are then forwarded to the differential function block where three different analyses are carried out.
The first analysis is the classical differential and bias current evaluation with the characteristic as seen in figure 52. Line differential protection is phase segregated where the differential current is the vectorial sum of all measured currents taken separately for each phase. The bias current, on the other hand, is considered as the greatest phase current in any line end and it is common for all three phases. The two slopes (SlopeSection1, SlopeSection2) and breakpoints (EndSection1, EndSection2) can be set in PCM600 or via the local HMI.
Current values plotted above the characteristic formed by IdMin and the dual slope will give a pickup in that phase. The level IdMinHigh is a setting value that is used to temporarily decrease the sensitivity in situations when:
the line is energized when a fault is classified as external when a tap transformer is switched in
There is also an unrestrained high differential current setting that can be used for fast tripping of internal faults with very high currents.
Section 5 1MRK505222-UUS C Differential protection
128 Technical reference manual
Section 1
UnrestrainedLimit
Section 2 Section 3
Restrain
Operate unconditionally
5
4
3
2
1
0 0 1 2 3 4 5
IdMin
EndSection1
EndSection2 Restrain current [ in pu of IBase]
Operate current [ in pu of IBase]
SlopeSection2
SlopeSection3
en05000300.vsd
Operate conditionally
IdMinHigh
A
C
B
IEC05000300 V1 EN
Figure 52: Description of the restrained-, and the unrestrained operate characteristics
where:
100%Ioperateslope Irestrain D= D
EQUATION1246 V1 EN
and where the restrained characteristic is defined by the settings:
1. IdMin
2. EndSection1
3. EndSection2
4.
SlopeSection2
5. SlopeSection3
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 5 Differential protection
129 Technical reference manual
The second analysis is the 2nd and 5th harmonic analysis on the differential current. Occurrence of these harmonics over a level that is set separately for each one will block tripping action from the biased slope evaluation.
The third analysis is the negative sequence current analysis. Effectively this is a fault discriminator that distinguishes between internal and external faults. It works such that the phase angle of the negative sequence current from the local end is compared with the phase angle of the sum of the negative sequence currents from the remote ends. The characteristic for this fault discriminator is shown in figure 53, where the directional characteristic is defined by the two setting parameters IminNegSeq and NegSeqRoa.
0 deg180 deg
90 deg
270 deg
120 deg
IMinNegSeq
If one or the other of currents is too low, then no measurement is done, and 120 degrees is mapped
External fault region
Internal fault region
Internal/external fault boundary
NegSeqROA (Relay
Operate Angle)
en05000188-3-en.vsd IEC05000188 V3 EN
Figure 53: Operating characteristic of the internal/external fault discriminator
Reference direction of currents is considered to be towards the line. Thus, when both currents to be compared have this direction, the phase difference between them will ideally be zero. In the opposite case, when one current is entering and the other is leaving the protected object, the phase difference will ideally be 180 degree. In case either the local or the sum of the remote negative sequence currents or both is below the set level, the fault discriminator will not make any fault classification and the value 120 degree is set. This value is then an indication that negative sequence directional comparison has not been possible to make, and it does not mean classification as external fault.
Section 5 1MRK505222-UUS C Differential protection
130 Technical reference manual
When a fault is classified as internal by the negative sequence fault discriminator, a trip is issued under the condition that the dual slope restrained function has been picked up , while a classification as external fault results in an increase of the restrained characteristic trip values IdMinHigh.
For all differential functions it is the common trip that shall be used to initiate a trip of a breaker. The separate trip signals from the different parts lacks the safety against maloperation. This will in some cases result in a 6 ms time difference between, for example restrained trip is issued and common trip is issued. The separate trip signals shall only be used for information purpose of which part that has caused the trip.
With reference to figure 51, the outputs from the three analysis blocks are fed to the output logic. Figure 54 shows a simplified block diagram of this output logic where only trip commands and no alarm signals are shown for simplicity.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 5 Differential protection
131 Technical reference manual
Pickup A
Pickup C
Pickup B
PU_A IdMinHigh
PU_C IdMinHigh
PU_B IdMinHigh
Diff curr A 2nd harm
Diff curr C 2nd harm
Diff curr B 2nd harm
Diff curr C 5th harm
Diff curr B 5th harm
Diff curr A 5th harm
Line energizing
AND
AND
AND
CrossBlockEn
External fault
Internal fault
OR
tIdMinHigh t
OR
OR
OROR
OR
OR
Trip unrestrained C
Trip unrestrained A
Trip unrestrained B
OR
OR
OR
OR
OR
AND
AND
ANSI05000295-3.vsd
TRIP
TR_A
TR_B
TR_C
OR
OR
OR
OR
OR
OR
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
NegSeqDiffEn
ANSI05000295 V3 EN
Figure 54: Simplified block diagram
Remembering that current values plotted above the characteristic formed by IdMin and the dual slope in figure 53 are said to give a pickup, the output logic can be summarized as follows:
Section 5 1MRK505222-UUS C Differential protection
132 Technical reference manual
A pickup in one phase, gives a trip under the condition that the content of 2nd and 5th harmonic is below the set level for these harmonics. Otherwise it is blocked as long as the harmonic is above the set level. However, when a line is energized the current setting value IdMinHigh is used. Effectively this means that the line A-B-C in figure 52 forms the characteristic.
Current values above the unrestrained limit gives a trip irrespective of any presence of harmonics.
Classification of a fault as internal by the negative sequence fault discriminator, will give a trip under the condition that a pickup has occurred in that phase. This means that any harmonic blocking is then overridden. However, occurrence of harmonics at the same time as the differential current is below the level IdMinHigh, will block a trip even though the fault is classified as internal. This latter condition is to prevent unwanted trips when energizing a line tap transformer.
Classification of a fault as external by the negative sequence fault discriminator will cause IdMinHigh to be used as the lower limit for the restrained characteristic according to figure 52. Cross blocking will also be activated in this situation.
Compensation for charging currents can be selected active or not by setting ChargCurEnableYes or No. The compensation works such that the fundamental frequency differential current that is measured under steady state undisturbed conditions, is identified and then subtracted making the resulting differential current zero (or close to zero). This action is made separately for each phase. The magnitude of the subtracted pre-fault currents in Amperes can be read at any time as the service value ICHARGE.
Values of the pre-fault differential currents are not updated under disturbance conditions. The updating process is resumed 50 ms after normal conditions have been restored. Normal conditions are only considered if there are no pickup signals, neither internal nor external fault is declared, the power system is symmetrical and so on.
It is thus obvious that the change in charging current that the fault causes by decreasing the system voltage is not considered in the algorithm, a matter that is further discussed in the application manual.
Note that all small pre-fault differential currents are subtracted, no matter what their origin. Besides the true charging currents, the following currents are eliminated:
Small differential currents due to small errors (inequalities) of current transformers. Small differential currents because of off-nominal load tap changer positions when
a power transformer is included in the protected zone. Load currents of tap loads included in the protected zone.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 5 Differential protection
133 Technical reference manual
5.1.2.2 Time synchronization
In a numerical line differential protection, current samples from protections located geographically apart from each other, must be time coordinated so that the currents from the different line ends can be compared without introducing irrelevant errors. Accuracy requirements on this time coordination are extremely high.
As an example, an inaccuracy of 0.1 ms in a 50 Hz system gives a maximum magnitude error approximately around 3% whilst an inaccuracy of 1 ms gives a maximum magnitude error of approximately 31%. The corresponding figures for a 60 Hz system are 4% and 38% respectively.
In Line differential protection, the time coordination is made with the so-called echo method, which can be complemented with GPS synchronization as an option.
Each IED has an accurate local clock with a very small time drift. This clock makes time tagging of telegrams, and the echo method is then used to find out the time difference between the clocks in two ends of a power line.
Referring to figure 55, it works such that the transmission time to send a message from station B to station A (T1 T2) and receive a message from A to B (T3 T4) is measured. The time instances T2 and T3 are taken with the local clock reference of station A, and the time instances T1 and T4 are taken with the local clock reference of station B.
T1
T2 T3
T4 B
A
en05000293.vsd IEC05000293 V1 EN
Figure 55: Measuring time differences
Calculation of the delay time one-way Td and the time difference t between the clocks in A and B is then possible to do with equation 2 and equation 3, which are only valid under the condition that the send and receive times are equal.
2 1 4 3( ) ( ) 2d
T T T TT — + — =
EQUATION1358 V1 EN (Equation 2)
Section 5 1MRK505222-UUS C Differential protection
134 Technical reference manual
1 4 2 3( ) ( ) 2
T T T Tt + — + D =
EQUATION1359 V1 EN (Equation 3)
t is calculated every time a telegram is received, and the time difference is then used to adjust and interpolate the current measurements from the remote end before the current differential algorithm is executed.
The echo method without GPS, can be used in telecommunications transmission networks with varying signal propagation delay as long as there is delay symmetry, that is, the send and receive delays are equal. The delay variation can depend on the signal going different routes in the network from time to other.
When the delay symmetry is lost, the expression for t given above is no longer valid, and GPS synchronization of the local IED clocks must be used.
Including the optional GPS, means that there will be one GPS receiver module in each IED, synchronizing its local IED clock. As GPS synchronization is very accurate, in the order of 1 s, all IEDs in the same line differential scheme will have the same clock reference. It is then possible to detect asymmetric transmission time delay and compensate for it.
When the IED is equipped with GPS, this hardware is integrated in the IED. Besides the GPS receiver itself, it also consists of filters and regulators for post processing of the GPS time synch pulse, which is necessary to achieve a reliable GPS synchronization. Especially short interruptions and spurious out of synch GPS signals are handled securely in this way.
When GPS synchronization is used, an interruption in the GPS signal leads to freewheeling during 8 seconds that is, during this time the synchronization benefits from the stability in the local clocks. If the interruption persists more than 8 seconds, either fall back to the echo synchronization method or blocking of Line differential protection function is made, as selected through setting parameter GPSSyncErr.
For a description of the time synchronization function, refer to section «Time synchronization».
5.1.2.3 Analog signal communication for line differential protection
Communication principle For a two-terminal line, the current from the local CT needs to be communicated over a 64 kbit/s channel to the remote line end, and the remote end current communicated back on the same channel. If there is, for example, a three terminal line another 64 kbit/ s channel will be needed to exchange the same local current with the third line end current.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 5 Differential protection
135 Technical reference manual
In breaker-and-a-half arrangements, there are two local currents meaning two 64 kbit/s channels to each remote substation. Alternatively, it is possible to add together the two local currents before sending them and in that way reduce the number of communication channels needed. This is achieved by selecting proper setting for parameter TransmCurr (CT-SUM, CT-DIFF1 or CT-DIFF2). However, information about bias currents is reduced if the alternative option is followed. For further information and discussions on this matter, refer to the Application manual.
The communication can be arranged as a master-master system or a master-slave system alternatively. Figure 56 shows a master-master system for a five-terminal line. Here current samples are exchanged between all IEDs, and an evaluation is made in each IED. This means that a 64 kbit/s communication channel is needed between every IED included in the same line differential protection zone.
ANSI05000292_2_en.vsd
IED IED
Protected zone
Comm. Channels
IED IED IED
ANSI05000292 V2 EN
Figure 56: 5terminal line with master-master system
In the master-slave system, current samples are sent from all slave IEDs to one master IED where the evaluation is made and trip signals are sent to the remote ends when needed. In this system, a 64 kbit/s communication channel is only needed between the master, and each one of the slave IEDs, as shown in figure 57.
IED
Protected zone
Comm. Channels
IED IED IED
ANSI05000291_2_en.vsd
IED
ANSI05000291 V2 EN
Figure 57: 5terminal line with master-slave system
Section 5 1MRK505222-UUS C Differential protection
136 Technical reference manual
The master-slave configuration is achieved by setting parameter Operation in the slaves to Disabled for Line differential protection function, and setting parameter ChannelMode to Enabled for the LDCMs in the slaves.
Test mode Line differential protection function in one IED can be set in test mode. This can block the trip outputs on that IED, and set the remote IEDs in a remote test mode, so that injected currents can be echoed back phase shifted and with a settable magnitude. The trip outputs in the remote IEDs can also be blocked automatically. For further information, refer to the installation and commissioning manual.
Communication of current sampled values The currents are sampled twenty times per power system cycle in the protection terminals, but the communication exchange is made only once every 5 ms. This means that at in each telegram sent, 5 consecutive current samples in a 50 Hz system and 6 consecutive current samples in a 60 Hz system (three phases each sampling instant) are included. Figure 58 shows the principle.
0 Time (ms)5 10 15 20 25 30 35
Current sample
telegram sent
Current sample
telegram sent
Current sample
telegram sent
Current sample
telegram sent
Current sample
telegram sent
Current sample
telegram sent
Current sample
telegram sent
Current sample
telegram sent
en05000290.vsd IEC05000290 V1 EN
Figure 58: Communication of current sampled values.
where:
x is the current sampling moment
Redundant communication channels With redundant communication channels, as shown in figure 59, both channels are in operation continuously but with one of them favoured as a primary channel.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 5 Differential protection
137 Technical reference manual
L DC ML DC M
Telecom. Network
Telecom. Network
Primary Channel
Hot Standby Channel
L DC ML DC M
en05000289_ansi.vsd
52 152
ANSI05000289 V1 EN
Figure 59: Direct fiber optical connection between two IEDs with LDOM over longer distances.
If communication is lost on the primary channel, switchover to the secondary channel is made after a settable time delay RedChSwTime. Return of the primary channel will cause a switchback after another settable time delay RedChRturnTime.
For a three-, four- or five-terminals line in a master-master configuration, a loss of one communication channel will not cause the line differential protection to be unserviceable. Instead it will automatically revert to a partial master-slave mode with the two IEDs that have an unserviceable communication link between them, will serve as slaves.
For more details about the remote communication see section «Remote communication» and the application manual.
5.1.2.4 Open CT detection feature
Line differential protection has a built-in, advanced open CT detection feature.
The open CT circuit condition creates unexpected operations for Line differential protection under the normal load conditions. It is also possible to damage secondary equipment due to high voltage produced from open CT circuit outputs. Therefore, it is always a requirement from security and reliability points of view to have open CT detection function to block Line differential protection function in case of open CT conditions and at the same time, produce the alarm signal to the operational personal to make quick remedy actions to correct the open CT condition.
The built-in open CT feature can be enabled or disabled by a setting parameter OpenCTEnable (Disabled/Enabled). When enabled, this feature prevents mal- operation when a loaded main CT connected to Line differential protection is by
Section 5 1MRK505222-UUS C Differential protection
138 Technical reference manual
mistake open circuited on the secondary side. Note that this feature can only detect interruption of one CT phase current at the time. If two or even all three-phase currents of one set of CT are accidentally interrupted at the same time this feature cannot operate and Line differential protection generates trip signal, if the false differential current is sufficiently high. To ensure blocking of the differential protection for open CT condition this algorithm must operate within 10 ms in order to be able to prevent unwanted operation of Line differential protection under all loading conditions.
The principle applied to detect an open CT is a simple pattern recognition method, similar to the waveform check which has been with advantage used by the Power Transformer Differential Protection in order to detect the magnetizing inrush condition. The open CT detection principle is based on the fact, that for an open CT, the current in the phase with the open CT suddenly drops (at least theoretically) to zero (that is, as seen by the protection), while the currents of the other two phases continue as before.
The open CT function is supposed to detect an open CT under normal conditions, that is, with the protected multi-terminal circuit under normal load. If the load currents are very low or zero, the open CT condition cannot be detected. The open CT algorithm only detects an open CT if the load on the power transformer is from 10% to 110% of the rated load. Outside this range an open CT condition is not even looked for. The search for an open CT starts after 60 seconds (50 seconds in 60 Hz systems) since the bias current enters the 10110% range. The Open CT detection feature can also be explicitly deactivated by setting: OpenCTEnable = 0 (Disabled).
If an open CT is detected and the output OPENCT set to 1, then all the differential functions are blocked, except of the unrestrained (instantaneous) differential. An alarm signal is also produced after a settable delay (tOCTAlarmDelay) to report to operational personal for quick remedy actions once the open CT is detected. When the open CT condition is removed (that is, the previously open CT reconnected), the functions remain blocked for a specified interval of time, which is also a setting (tOCTResetDelay). The task of this measure is to prevent an eventual mal-operation after the reconnection of the previously open CT secondary circuit.
The open CT feature works only during normal loading condition. Thus, the open CT feature must be automatically disabled for all external faults, big overloads and inrush conditions.
The open CT algorithm provides detailed information about the location of the defective CT secondary circuit. The algorithm clearly indicates IED side, CT input and phase in which open CT condition has been detected. These indications are provided via the following outputs from Line differential protection function:
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 5 Differential protection
139 Technical reference manual
1. Output OPENCT provides instant information to indicate that open CT circuit has been detected
2. Output OPENCTAL provides time delayed alarm that the open CT circuit has been detected. Time delay is defined by setting parameter tOCTAlarmDelay.
3. Integer output OPENCTIN provides information on the local HMI regarding which open CT circuit has been detected (1=CT input No 1; 2=CT input No 2)
4. Integer output OPENCTPH provides information on the local HMI regarding in which phase open CT circuit has been detected (1=Phase A; 2= Phase B; 3= Phase C)
Once the open CT condition is declared, the algorithm stops to search for further open CT circuits. It waits until the first open CT circuit has been corrected. Note that once the open CT condition has been detected, it can be automatically reset within the differential function. It is not possible to externally reset open CT condition. To reset the open CT circuit alarm automatically, the following conditions must be fulfilled:
Bias current is for at least one minute smaller than 110% Open CT condition in defective CT circuit has been rectified (for example, current
asymmetry disappears) Above two conditions are fulfilled for longer time than defined by the setting
parameter tOCTResetDelay
After the reset, the open CT detection algorithm starts again to search for any other open CT circuit within the protected zone.
5.1.2.5 Binary signal transfer
There is space for eight binary signals integrated in the telegram of the line differential analog communication. For further information, refer to section «Binary signal transfer».
5.1.2.6 Line differential coordination function LDLPDIF (87L)
Line differential coordination function (LDLPDIF, 87L) is a support function to Line differential protection functions L3CPDIF(87L), L6CPDIF (87L), LT3CPDIF (87LT) and LT6CPDIF(87LT) . The function gathers and coordinates local IED signals and the signals from remote IEDs between the Line differential protection functions and the LDCM communication module.
The function acts as the interface to and from Line differential protection.
Section 5 1MRK505222-UUS C Differential protection
140 Technical reference manual
5.1.3 Function block
ANSI05000667-1-en.vsd
L3CPDIF (87L) I3P1* I3P2* I3P3*
TRIP TR_A TR_B TR_C
TRIPRES TRIPUNRE TRIPENHA
PICKUP PU_A PU_B PU_C
BLK2H BLK2H_A BLK2H_B BLK2H_C
BLK5H BLK5H_A BLK5H_B BLK5H_C
ALARM OPENCT
OPENCTAL ID_A ID_B ID_C
IDMAG_A IDMAG_B IDMAG_C
IBIAS IDMAG_NS
ANSI05000667 V1 EN
Figure 60: L3CPDIF (87L) function block
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 5 Differential protection
141 Technical reference manual
ANSI05000666-1-en.vsd
L6CPDIF (87L) I3P1* I3P2* I3P3* I3P4* I3P5* I3P6*
TRIP TR_A TR_B TR_C
TRIPRES TRIPUNRE TRIPENHA
PICKUP PU_A PU_B PU_C
BLK2H BLK2H_A BLK2H_B BLK2H_C
BLK5H BLK5H_A BLK5H_B BLK5H_C
ALARM OPENCT
OPENCTAL ID_A ID_B ID_C
IDMAG_A IDMAG_B IDMAG_C
IBIAS IDMAG_NS
ANSI05000666 V1 EN
Figure 61: L6CPDIF (87L)function block
Section 5 1MRK505222-UUS C Differential protection
142 Technical reference manual
ANSI06000254-2-en.vsd
LT3CPDIF (87LT) I3P1* I3P2* I3P3*
TRIP TR_A TR_B TR_C
TRIPRES TRIPUNRE TRIPENHA
PICKUP PU_A PU_B PU_C
BLK2H BLK2H_A BLK2H_B BLK2H_C
BLK5H BLK5H_A BLK5H_B BLK5H_C
ALARM OPENCT
OPENCTAL ID_A ID_B ID_C
IDMAG_A IDMAG_B IDMAG_C
IBIAS IDMAG_NS
ANSI06000254 V2 EN
Figure 62: LT3CPDIF (87LT) function block
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 5 Differential protection
143 Technical reference manual
ANSI06000255-2-en.vsd
LT6CPDIF (87LT) I3P1* I3P2* I3P3* I3P4* I3P5* I3P6*
TRIP TR_A TR_B TR_C
TRIPRES TRIPUNRE TRIPENHA
PICKUP PU_A PU_B PU_C
BLK2H BLK2H_A BLK2H_B BLK2H_C
BLK5H BLK5H_A BLK5H_B BLK5H_C
ALARM OPENCT
OPENCTAL ID_A ID_B ID_C
IDMAG_A IDMAG_B IDMAG_C
IBIAS IDMAG_NS
ANSI06000255 V2 EN
Figure 63: LT6CPDIF (87LT) function block
ANSI05000394-2-en.vsd
LDLPDIF (87L) CTFAIL OUTSERV BLOCK
TRIP TR_A TR_B TR_C
TRLOCAL TRLOC_A TRLOC_B TRLOC_C
TRREMOTE DIFLBLKD
ANSI05000394 V2 EN
Figure 64: LDLPDIF (87L) function block
Section 5 1MRK505222-UUS C Differential protection
144 Technical reference manual
5.1.4 Input and output signals Table 60: L3CPDIF (87L) Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P1 GROUP
SIGNAL — Three phase current grp1 samples and DFT values
I3P2 GROUP SIGNAL
— Three phase current grp1 samples and DFT values
I3P3 GROUP SIGNAL
— Three phase current grp1 samples and DFT values
Table 61: L3CPDIF (87L) Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Main Trip Signal
TR_A BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase A
TR_B BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase B
TR_C BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase C
TRIPRES BOOLEAN Trip by restrained differential 87L
TRIPUNRE BOOLEAN Trip by unrestrained differential 87H
TRIPENHA BOOLEAN Trip by Enhanced restrainted differential 87LEnhanced
PICKUP BOOLEAN Main Pickup output signal
PU_A BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase A
PU_B BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase B
PU_C BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase C
BLK2H BOOLEAN Block signal due to second harmonic
BLK2H_A BOOLEAN Block signal due to second harmonic phase A
BLK2H_B BOOLEAN Block signal due to second harmonic phase B
BLK2H_C BOOLEAN Block signal due to second harmonic Phase C
BLK5H BOOLEAN Block signal due to fifth harmonic
BLK5H_A BOOLEAN Block signal due to fifth harmonic phase A
BLK5H_B BOOLEAN Block signal due to fifth harmonic phase B
BLK5H_C BOOLEAN Block signal due to fifth harmonic phase C
OPENCT BOOLEAN An open CT was detected
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm for sustained differential current
OPENCTAL BOOLEAN Open CT Alarm output signal. Issued after a delay …
ID_A REAL Instantaneous differential current, phase A
ID_B REAL Instantaneous differential current, phase B
ID_C REAL Instantaneous differential current, phase C
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 5 Differential protection
145 Technical reference manual
Name Type Description IDMAG_A REAL Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase A
IDMAG_B REAL Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase B
IDMAG_C REAL Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase C
IBIAS REAL Magnitude of the bias current, common for phase A,B.C
IDMAG_NS REAL Magnitude of the negative sequence differential current
Table 62: L6CPDIF (87L) Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P1 GROUP
SIGNAL — Three phase current grp1 samples and DFT values
I3P2 GROUP SIGNAL
— Three phase current grp1 samples and DFT values
I3P3 GROUP SIGNAL
— Three phase current grp1 samples and DFT values
I3P4 GROUP SIGNAL
— Three phase current grp1 samples and DFT values
I3P5 GROUP SIGNAL
— Three phase current grp1 samples and DFT values
I3P6 GROUP SIGNAL
— Three phase current grp1 samples and DFT values
Table 63: L6CPDIF (87L) Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Main Trip Signal
TR_A BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase A
TR_B BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase B
TR_C BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase C
TRIPRES BOOLEAN Trip by restrained differential 87L
TRIPUNRE BOOLEAN Trip by unrestrained differential 87H
TRIPENHA BOOLEAN Trip by Enhanced restrainted differential 87LEnhanced
PICKUP BOOLEAN Main Pickup output signal
PU_A BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase A
PU_B BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase B
PU_C BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase C
BLK2H BOOLEAN Block signal due to second harmonic
BLK2H_A BOOLEAN Block signal due to second harmonic phase A
BLK2H_B BOOLEAN Block signal due to second harmonic phase B
Table continues on next page
Section 5 1MRK505222-UUS C Differential protection
146 Technical reference manual
Name Type Description BLK2H_C BOOLEAN Block signal due to second harmonic Phase C
BLK5H BOOLEAN Block signal due to fifth harmonic
BLK5H_A BOOLEAN Block signal due to fifth harmonic phase A
BLK5H_B BOOLEAN Block signal due to fifth harmonic phase B
BLK5H_C BOOLEAN Block signal due to fifth harmonic phase C
OPENCT BOOLEAN An open CT was detected
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm for sustained differential current
OPENCTAL BOOLEAN Open CT Alarm output signal. Issued after a delay …
ID_A REAL Instantaneous differential current, phase A
ID_B REAL Instantaneous differential current, phase B
ID_C REAL Instantaneous differential current, phase C
IDMAG_A REAL Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase A
IDMAG_B REAL Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase B
IDMAG_C REAL Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase C
IBIAS REAL Magnitude of the bias current, common for phase A,B.C
IDMAG_NS REAL Magnitude of the negative sequence differential current
Table 64: LT3CPDIF (87LT) Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P1 GROUP
SIGNAL — Three phase current grp1 samples and DFT values
I3P2 GROUP SIGNAL
— Three phase current grp1 samples and DFT values
I3P3 GROUP SIGNAL
— Three phase current grp1 samples and DFT values
Table 65: LT3CPDIF (87LT) Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Main Trip Signal
TR_A BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase A
TR_B BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase B
TR_C BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase C
TRIPRES BOOLEAN Trip by restrained differential 87L
TRIPUNRE BOOLEAN Trip by unrestrained differential 87H
TRIPENHA BOOLEAN Trip by Enhanced restrainted differential 87LEnhanced
PICKUP BOOLEAN Main Pickup output signal
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 5 Differential protection
147 Technical reference manual
Name Type Description PU_A BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase A
PU_B BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase B
PU_C BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase C
BLK2H BOOLEAN Block signal due to second harmonic
BLK2H_A BOOLEAN Block signal due to second harmonic phase A
BLK2H_B BOOLEAN Block signal due to second harmonic phase B
BLK2H_C BOOLEAN Block signal due to second harmonic Phase C
BLK5H BOOLEAN Block signal due to fifth harmonic
BLK5H_A BOOLEAN Block signal due to fifth harmonic phase A
BLK5H_B BOOLEAN Block signal due to fifth harmonic phase B
BLK5H_C BOOLEAN Block signal due to fifth harmonic phase C
OPENCT BOOLEAN An open CT was detected
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm for sustained differential current
OPENCTAL BOOLEAN Open CT Alarm output signal. Issued after a delay …
ID_A REAL Instantaneous differential current, phase A
ID_B REAL Instantaneous differential current, phase B
ID_C REAL Instantaneous differential current, phase C
IDMAG_A REAL Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase A
IDMAG_B REAL Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase B
IDMAG_C REAL Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase C
IBIAS REAL Magnitude of the bias current, common for phase A,B.C
IDMAG_NS REAL Magnitude of the negative sequence differential current
Table 66: LT6CPDIF (87LT) Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P1 GROUP
SIGNAL — Three phase current grp1 samples and DFT values
I3P2 GROUP SIGNAL
— Three phase current grp2 samples and DFT values
I3P3 GROUP SIGNAL
— Three phase current grp3 samples and DFT values
I3P4 GROUP SIGNAL
— Three phase current grp4 samples and DFT values
I3P5 GROUP SIGNAL
— Three phase current grp5 samples and DFT values
I3P6 GROUP SIGNAL
— Three phase current grp6 samples and DFT values
Section 5 1MRK505222-UUS C Differential protection
148 Technical reference manual
Table 67: LT6CPDIF (87LT) Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Main Trip Signal
TR_A BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase A
TR_B BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase B
TR_C BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase C
TRIPRES BOOLEAN Trip by restrained differential 87L
TRIPUNRE BOOLEAN Trip by unrestrained differential 87H
TRIPENHA BOOLEAN Trip by Enhanced restrainted differential 87LEnhanced
PICKUP BOOLEAN Main Pickup output signal
PU_A BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase A
PU_B BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase B
PU_C BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase C
BLK2H BOOLEAN Block signal due to second harmonic
BLK2H_A BOOLEAN Block signal due to second harmonic phase A
BLK2H_B BOOLEAN Block signal due to second harmonic phase B
BLK2H_C BOOLEAN Block signal due to second harmonic Phase C
BLK5H BOOLEAN Block signal due to fifth harmonic
BLK5H_A BOOLEAN Block signal due to fifth harmonic phase A
BLK5H_B BOOLEAN Block signal due to fifth harmonic phase B
BLK5H_C BOOLEAN Block signal due to fifth harmonic phase C
OPENCT BOOLEAN An open CT was detected
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm for sustained differential current
OPENCTAL BOOLEAN Open CT Alarm output signal. Issued after a delay …
ID_A REAL Instantaneous differential current, phase A
ID_B REAL Instantaneous differential current, phase B
ID_C REAL Instantaneous differential current, phase C
IDMAG_A REAL Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase A
IDMAG_B REAL Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase B
IDMAG_C REAL Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase C
IBIAS REAL Magnitude of the bias current, common for phase A,B.C
IDMAG_NS REAL Magnitude of the negative sequence differential current
Table 68: LDLPDIF (87L) Input signals
Name Type Default Description CTFAIL BOOLEAN 0 CT failure indication from local CT supervision
OUTSERV BOOLEAN 0 Input for indicating that the IED is out of service
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 5 Differential protection
149 Technical reference manual
Table 69: LDLPDIF (87L) Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN General trip from differential protection system
TR_A BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase A
TR_B BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase B
TR_C BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase C
TRLOCAL BOOLEAN Trip from local differential function
TRLOC_A BOOLEAN Trip from local differential function in phase A
TRLOC_B BOOLEAN Trip from local differential function in phase B
TRLOC_C BOOLEAN Trip from local differential function in phase C
TRREMOTE BOOLEAN Trip from remote differential function
DIFLBLKD BOOLEAN Local line differential function blocked
5.1.5 Setting parameters Table 70: L3CPDIF (87L) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
IdMin 0.20 — 2.00 IB 0.01 0.30 Oper — restr charact., section 1 sensitivity, multiple IBase
IdMinHigh 0.20 — 10.00 IB 0.01 0.80 Initial lower sensitivity, as multiple of IBase
tIdMinHigh 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Time interval of initial lower sensitivity, in sec
IdUnre 1.00 — 50.00 IB 0.01 10.00 Unrestrained differential current limit, multiple of IBase
NegSeqDiffEn Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Off/On selection for internal / external fault discriminator
NegSeqROA 30.0 — 120.0 Deg 1.0 60.0 Internal/external fault discriminator Operate Angle, degrees
IMinNegSeq 0.01 — 0.20 IB 0.01 0.04 Min. value of neg. seq. curr. as multiple of IBase
CrossBlockEn No Yes
— — No Off/On selection of the cross -block logic
ChargCurEnable Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Off/On selection for compensation of charging currents
AddDelay Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Off/On selection for delayed diff. trip command
IMaxAddDelay 0.20 — 5.00 IB 0.01 1.00 Below limit, extra delay can be applied, multiple of IBase
tDefTime 0.000 — 6.000 s 0.001 0.000 Definite time additional delay in seconds
tMinInv 0.001 — 6.000 s 0.001 0.010 Inverse Delay Minimum Time. In seconds
Table continues on next page
Section 5 1MRK505222-UUS C Differential protection
150 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description CurveType ANSI Ext. inv.
ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Programmable RI type RD type
— — IEC Def. Time 19 curve types. Example: 15 for definite time delay.
TD 0.05 — 1.10 — 0.01 1.00 Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) for inverse delays
IdiffAlarm 0.05 — 1.00 IB 0.01 0.15 Sustained differential current alarm, factor of IBase
tAlarmdelay 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 10.000 Delay for alarm due to sustained differential current, in s
Table 71: L3CPDIF (87L) Group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description EndSection1 0.20 — 1.50 IB 0.01 1.25 End of section 1, as multiple of reference
current IBase
EndSection2 1.00 — 10.00 IB 0.01 3.00 End of section 2, as multiple of reference current IBase
SlopeSection2 10.0 — 50.0 % 0.1 40.0 Slope in section 2 of operate-restrain characteristic, in %
SlopeSection3 30.0 — 100.0 % 0.1 80.0 Slope in section 3 of operate- restrain characteristic, in %
I2/I1Ratio 5.0 — 100.0 % 1.0 10.0 Max. ratio of second harmonic to fundamental harm dif. curr. in %
I5/I1Ratio 5.0 — 100.0 % 1.0 25.0 Max. ratio of fifth harmonic to fundamental harm dif. curr. in %
p 0.01 — 1000.00 — 0.01 0.02 Settable curve parameter, user- programmable curve type.
a 0.01 — 1000.00 — 0.01 0.14 Settable curve parameter, user- programmable curve type.
b 0.01 — 1000.00 — 0.01 1.00 Settable curve parameter, user- programmable curve type.
c 0.01 — 1000.00 — 0.01 1.00 Settable curve parameter, user- programmable curve type.
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 5 Differential protection
151 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description OpenCTEnable Disabled
Enabled — — Enabled Open CTEnable Off/On
tOCTAlarmDelay 0.100 — 10.000 s 0.001 1.000 Open CT: time in s to alarm after an open CT is detected
tOCTResetDelay 0.100 — 10.000 s 0.001 0.250 Reset delay in s. After delay, diff. function is activated
Table 72: L3CPDIF (87L) Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description NoOfTerminals 2
3 — — 2 Number of current terminals of the protected
circuit
Chan2IsLocal No Yes
— — No 2-nd local current connected to input channel 2, Yes/ No
IBase 50.0 — 9999.9 A 0.1 3000.0 Base (reference) current of the differential protection
Table 73: L6CPDIF (87L) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
IdMin 0.20 — 2.00 IB 0.01 0.30 Oper — restr charact., section 1 sensitivity, multiple IBase
IdMinHigh 0.20 — 10.00 IB 0.01 0.80 Initial lower sensitivity, as multiple of IBase
tIdMinHigh 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Time interval of initial lower sensitivity, in sec
IdUnre 1.00 — 50.00 IB 0.01 10.00 Unrestrained differential current limit, multiple of IBase
NegSeqDiffEn Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Off/On selection for internal / external fault discriminator
NegSeqROA 30.0 — 120.0 Deg 1.0 60.0 Internal/external fault discriminator Operate Angle, degrees
IMinNegSeq 0.01 — 0.20 IB 0.01 0.04 Min. value of neg. seq. curr. as multiple of IBase
CrossBlockEn No Yes
— — No Off/On selection of the cross -block logic
I2/I1Ratio 5.0 — 100.0 % 1.0 10.0 Max. ratio of second harmonic to fundamental harm dif. curr. in %
I5/I1Ratio 5.0 — 100.0 % 1.0 25.0 Max. ratio of fifth harmonic to fundamental harm dif. curr. in %
ChargCurEnable Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Off/On selection for compensation of charging currents
AddDelay Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Off/On selection for delayed diff. trip command
Table continues on next page
Section 5 1MRK505222-UUS C Differential protection
152 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description IMaxAddDelay 0.20 — 5.00 IB 0.01 1.00 Below limit, extra delay can be applied,
multiple of IBase
tDefTime 0.000 — 6.000 s 0.001 0.000 Definite time additional delay in seconds
tMinInv 0.001 — 6.000 s 0.001 0.010 Inverse Delay Minimum Time. In seconds
CurveType ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Programmable RI type RD type
— — IEC Def. Time 19 curve types. Example: 15 for definite time delay.
TD 0.05 — 1.10 — 0.01 1.00 Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) for inverse delays
IdiffAlarm 0.05 — 1.00 IB 0.01 0.15 Sustained differential current alarm, factor of IBase
tAlarmdelay 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 10.000 Delay for alarm due to sustained differential current, in s
Table 74: L6CPDIF (87L) Group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description EndSection1 0.20 — 1.50 IB 0.01 1.25 End of section 1, as multiple of reference
current IBase
EndSection2 1.00 — 10.00 IB 0.01 3.00 End of section 2, as multiple of reference current IBase
SlopeSection2 10.0 — 50.0 % 0.1 40.0 Slope in section 2 of operate-restrain characteristic, in %
SlopeSection3 30.0 — 100.0 % 0.1 80.0 Slope in section 3 of operate- restrain characteristic, in %
p 0.01 — 1000.00 — 0.01 0.02 Settable curve parameter, user- programmable curve type.
a 0.01 — 1000.00 — 0.01 0.14 Settable curve parameter, user- programmable curve type.
b 0.01 — 1000.00 — 0.01 1.00 Settable curve parameter, user- programmable curve type.
c 0.01 — 1000.00 — 0.01 1.00 Settable curve parameter, user- programmable curve type.
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 5 Differential protection
153 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description OpenCTEnable Disabled
Enabled — — Enabled Open CT detection feature. Open CTEnable
Off/On
tOCTAlarmDelay 0.100 — 10.000 s 0.001 1.000 Open CT: time in s to alarm after an open CT is detected
tOCTResetDelay 0.100 — 10.000 s 0.001 0.250 Reset delay in s. After delay, diff. function is activated
Table 75: L6CPDIF (87L) Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description NoOfTerminals 2
3 4 5 6
— — 2 Number of current terminals of the protected circuit
Chan2IsLocal No Yes
— — No 2-nd local current connected to input channel 2, Yes/ No
IBase 50.0 — 9999.9 A 0.1 3000.0 Base (reference) current of the differential protection
Table 76: LT3CPDIF (87LT) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
IdMin 0.20 — 2.00 IB 0.01 0.30 Oper — restr charact., section 1 sensitivity, multiple IBase
IdMinHigh 0.20 — 10.00 IB 0.01 0.80 Initial lower sensitivity, as multiple of IBase
tIdMinHigh 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Time interval of initial lower sensitivity, in sec
IdUnre 1.00 — 50.00 IB 0.01 10.00 Unrestrained differential current limit, multiple of IBase
NegSeqDiffEn Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Off/On selection for internal / external fault discriminator
NegSeqROA 30.0 — 120.0 Deg 1.0 60.0 Internal/external fault discriminator Operate Angle, degrees
IMinNegSeq 0.01 — 0.20 IB 0.01 0.04 Min. value of neg. seq. curr. as multiple of IBase
CrossBlockEn No Yes
— — No Off/On selection of the cross -block logic
ChargCurEnable Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Off/On selection for compensation of charging currents
AddDelay Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Off/On selection for delayed diff. trip command
Table continues on next page
Section 5 1MRK505222-UUS C Differential protection
154 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description IMaxAddDelay 0.20 — 5.00 IB 0.01 1.00 Below limit, extra delay can be applied,
multiple of IBase
tDefTime 0.000 — 6.000 s 0.001 0.000 Definite time additional delay in seconds
tMinInv 0.001 — 6.000 s 0.001 0.010 Inverse Delay Minimum Time. In seconds
CurveType ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Programmable RI type RD type
— — IEC Def. Time 19 curve types. Example: 15 for definite time delay.
TD 0.05 — 1.10 — 0.01 1.00 Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) for inverse delays
IdiffAlarm 0.05 — 1.00 IB 0.01 0.15 Sustained differential current alarm, factor of IBase
tAlarmdelay 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 10.000 Delay for alarm due to sustained differential current, in s
Table 77: LT3CPDIF (87LT) Group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description EndSection1 0.20 — 1.50 IB 0.01 1.25 End of section 1, as multiple of reference
current IBase
EndSection2 1.00 — 10.00 IB 0.01 3.00 End of section 2, as multiple of reference current IBase
SlopeSection2 10.0 — 50.0 % 0.1 40.0 Slope in section 2 of operate-restrain characteristic, in %
SlopeSection3 30.0 — 100.0 % 0.1 80.0 Slope in section 3 of operate- restrain characteristic, in %
I2/I1Ratio 5.0 — 100.0 % 1.0 10.0 Max. ratio of second harmonic to fundamental harm dif. curr. in %
I5/I1Ratio 5.0 — 100.0 % 1.0 25.0 Max. ratio of fifth harmonic to fundamental harm dif. curr. in %
p 0.01 — 1000.00 — 0.01 0.02 Settable curve parameter, user- programmable curve type.
a 0.01 — 1000.00 — 0.01 0.14 Settable curve parameter, user- programmable curve type.
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 5 Differential protection
155 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description b 0.01 — 1000.00 — 0.01 1.00 Settable curve parameter, user-
programmable curve type.
c 0.01 — 1000.00 — 0.01 1.00 Settable curve parameter, user- programmable curve type.
OpenCTEnable Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Open CT detection feature. Open CTEnable Off/On
tOCTAlarmDelay 0.100 — 10.000 s 0.001 1.000 Open CT: time in s to alarm after an open CT is detected
tOCTResetDelay 0.100 — 10.000 s 0.001 0.250 Reset delay in s. After delay, diff. function is activated
Table 78: LT3CPDIF (87LT) Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description NoOfTerminals 2
3 — — 2 Number of current terminals of the protected
circuit
Chan2IsLocal No Yes
— — No 2-nd local current connected to input channel 2, Yes/ No
IBase 50.0 — 9999.9 A 0.1 3000.0 Base (reference) current of the differential protection
ZerSeqCurSubtr Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Off/On for elimination of zero seq. from diff. and bias curr
TraAOnInpCh No Transf A 1 2 3
— — No Transf A Power transformer A applied on input channel X
RatVoltW1TraA 1.0 — 9999.9 kV 0.1 130.0 Transformer A rated voltage (kV) on winding 1 (HV winding)
RatVoltW2TraA 1.0 — 9999.9 kV 0.1 130.0 Transformer A rated voltage (kV) on winding 2 (LV winding)
ClockNumTransA 0 [0 deg] 1 [30 deg lag] 2 [60 deg lag] 3 [90 deg lag] 4 [120 deg lag] 5 [150 deg lag] 6 [180 deg lag] 7 [210 deg lag] 8 [240 deg lag] 9 [270 deg lag] 10 [300 deg lag] 11 [330 deg lag]
— — 0 [0 deg] Transf. A phase shift in multiples of 30 deg, 5 for 150 deg
ZerSeqPassTraA No Yes
— — No Yes/No for capability of transf A to transform zero seq curr
TraBOnInpCh No Transf B 1 2 3
— — No Transf B Power transformer B applied on input channel X
Table continues on next page
Section 5 1MRK505222-UUS C Differential protection
156 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description RatVoltW1TraB 1.0 — 9999.9 kV 0.1 130.0 Transformer B rated voltage (kV) on winding
1 (HV winding)
RatVoltW2TraB 1.0 — 9999.9 kV 0.1 130.0 Transformer B rated voltage (kV) on winding 2 (LV winding)
ClockNumTransB 0 [0 deg] 1 [30 deg lag] 2 [60 deg lag] 3 [90 deg lag] 4 [120 deg lag] 5 [150 deg lag] 6 [180 deg lag] 7 [210 deg lag] 8 [240 deg lag] 9 [270 deg lag] 10 [300 deg lag] 11 [330 deg lag]
— — 0 [0 deg] Transf. B phase shift in multiples of 30 deg, 2 for 60 deg
ZerSeqPassTraB No Yes
— — No Yes/No for capability of transf B to transform zero seq curr
Table 79: LT6CPDIF (87LT) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
IdMin 0.20 — 2.00 IB 0.01 0.30 Oper — restr charact., section 1 sensitivity, multiple IBase
IdMinHigh 0.20 — 10.00 IB 0.01 0.80 Initial lower sensitivity, as multiple of IBase
tIdMinHigh 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Time interval of initial lower sensitivity, in sec
IdUnre 1.00 — 50.00 IB 0.01 10.00 Unrestrained differential current limit, multiple of IBase
NegSeqDiffEn Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Off/On selection for internal / external fault discriminator
NegSeqROA 30.0 — 120.0 Deg 1.0 60.0 Internal/external fault discriminator Operate Angle, degrees
IMinNegSeq 0.01 — 0.20 IB 0.01 0.04 Min. value of neg. seq. curr. as multiple of IBase
CrossBlockEn No Yes
— — No Off/On selection of the cross -block logic
I2/I1Ratio 5.0 — 100.0 % 1.0 10.0 Max. ratio of second harmonic to fundamental harm dif. curr. in %
I5/I1Ratio 5.0 — 100.0 % 1.0 25.0 Max. ratio of fifth harmonic to fundamental harm dif. curr. in %
ChargCurEnable Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Off/On selection for compensation of charging currents
AddDelay Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled On/Off selection for delayed diff. trip command
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 5 Differential protection
157 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description IMaxAddDelay 0.20 — 5.00 IB 0.01 1.00 Below limit, extra delay can be applied,
multiple of IBase
tDefTime 0.000 — 6.000 s 0.001 0.000 Definite time additional delay in seconds
tMinInv 0.001 — 6.000 s 0.001 0.010 Inverse Delay Minimum Time. In seconds
CurveType ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Programmable RI type RD type
— — IEC Def. Time 19 curve types. Example: 15 for definite time delay.
TD 0.05 — 1.10 — 0.01 1.00 Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) for inverse delays
IdiffAlarm 0.05 — 1.00 IB 0.01 0.15 Sustained differential current alarm, factor of IBase
tAlarmdelay 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 10.000 Delay for alarm due to sustained differential current, in s
Table 80: LT6CPDIF (87LT) Group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description EndSection1 0.20 — 1.50 IB 0.01 1.25 End of section 1, as multiple of reference
current IBase
EndSection2 1.00 — 10.00 IB 0.01 3.00 End of section 2, as multiple of reference current IBase
SlopeSection2 10.0 — 50.0 % 0.1 40.0 Slope in section 2 of operate-restrain characteristic, in %
SlopeSection3 30.0 — 100.0 % 0.1 80.0 Slope in section 3 of operate- restrain characteristic, in %
p 0.01 — 1000.00 — 0.01 0.02 Settable curve parameter, user- programmable curve type.
a 0.01 — 1000.00 — 0.01 0.14 Settable curve parameter, user- programmable curve type.
b 0.01 — 1000.00 — 0.01 1.00 Settable curve parameter, user- programmable curve type.
c 0.01 — 1000.00 — 0.01 1.00 Settable curve parameter, user- programmable curve type.
Table continues on next page
Section 5 1MRK505222-UUS C Differential protection
158 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description OpenCTEnable Disabled
Enabled — — Enabled Open CTEnable Off/On
tOCTAlarmDelay 0.100 — 10.000 s 0.001 1.000 Open CT: time in s to alarm after an open CT is detected
tOCTResetDelay 0.100 — 10.000 s 0.001 0.250 Reset delay in s. After delay, diff. function is activated
Table 81: LT6CPDIF (87LT) Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description NoOfTerminals 2
3 4 5 6
— — 2 Number of current terminals of the protected circuit
Chan2IsLocal No Yes
— — No 2-nd local current connected to input channel 2, Yes/ No
IBase 50.0 — 9999.9 A 0.1 3000.0 Base (reference) current of the differential protection
ZerSeqCurSubtr Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Off/On for elimination of zero seq. from diff. and bias curr
TraAOnInpCh No Transf A 1 2 3 4 5 6
— — No Transf A Power transformer A applied on input channel X
RatVoltW1TraA 1.0 — 9999.9 kV 0.1 130.0 Transformer A rated voltage (kV) on winding 1 (HV winding)
RatVoltW2TraA 1.0 — 9999.9 kV 0.1 130.0 Transformer A rated voltage (kV) on winding 2 (LV winding)
ClockNumTransA 0 [0 deg] 1 [30 deg lag] 2 [60 deg lag] 3 [90 deg lag] 4 [120 deg lag] 5 [150 deg lag] 6 [180 deg lag] 7 [210 deg lag] 8 [240 deg lag] 9 [270 deg lag] 10 [300 deg lag] 11 [330 deg lag]
— — 0 [0 deg] Transf. A phase shift in multiples of 30 deg, 5 for 150 deg
ZerSeqPassTraA No Yes
— — No Yes/No for capability of transf A to transform zero seq curr
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 5 Differential protection
159 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description TraBOnInpCh No Transf B
1 2 3 4 5 6
— — No Transf B Power transformer B applied on input channel X
RatVoltW1TraB 1.0 — 9999.9 kV 0.1 130.0 Transformer B rated voltage (kV) on winding 1 (HV winding)
RatVoltW2TraB 1.0 — 9999.9 kV 0.1 130.0 Transformer B rated voltage (kV) on winding 2 (LV winding)
ClockNumTransB 0 [0 deg] 1 [30 deg lag] 2 [60 deg lag] 3 [90 deg lag] 4 [120 deg lag] 5 [150 deg lag] 6 [180 deg lag] 7 [210 deg lag] 8 [240 deg lag] 9 [270 deg lag] 10 [300 deg lag] 11 [330 deg lag]
— — 0 [0 deg] Transf. B phase shift in multiples of 30 deg, 2 for 60 deg
ZerSeqPassTraB No Yes
— — No Yes/No for capability of transf B to transform zero seq curr
Table 82: LDLPDIF (87L) Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Enabled Disable/Enable Operation
testModeSet Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Test mode On/Off
ReleaseLocal Block all Release local
— — Block all Release of local terminal for trip under test mode
5.1.6 Technical data Table 83: L3CPDIF, L6CPDIF, LT3CPDIF, LT6CPDIF (87L, 87LT) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Minimum operate current (20-200)% of IBase 1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I >I n
SlopeSection2 (10.0-50.0)% —
SlopeSection3 (30.0-100.0)% —
EndSection 1 (20150)% of IBase —
Table continues on next page
Section 5 1MRK505222-UUS C Differential protection
160 Technical reference manual
Function Range or value Accuracy EndSection 2 (1001000)% of IBase —
Unrestrained limit function (1005000)% of IBase 1.0% of In at I In 1.0% of I at I > In
Second harmonic blocking (5.0100.0)% of fundamental 2.0% of In
Fifth harmonic blocking (5.0100.0)% of fundamental 6.0% of In
Inverse characteristics, see table 728, 729 and table 730
19 curve types See table 728 and table 729
Operate time 25 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Id —
Reset time 15 ms typically at 10 to 0 x Id —
Critical impulse time 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Id —
Charging current compensation On/Off —
5.2 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF (87)
5.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF Id
SYMBOL-CC V2 EN
87
5.2.2 Introduction The 1Ph High impedance differential protection (HZPDIF, 87) function can be used when the involved CTs have the same turns ratio and similar magnetizing characteristics. It utilizes an external CT current summation by wiring, a series resistor, and a voltage dependent resistor which are mounted externally connected to the IED.
HZPDIF (87) can be used to protect tee-feeders or busbars. Six single phase function blocks are available to allow application for two three-phase zones busbar protection.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 5 Differential protection
161 Technical reference manual
5.2.3 Principle of operation The 1Ph High impedance differential protection (HZPDIF, 87) function is based on one current input with external stabilizing resistor and voltage dependent resistor. Three functions can be used to provide a three phase differential protection function. The stabilizing resistor value is calculated from the IED function operating value V TripPickup calculated to achieve through fault stability. The supplied stabilizing resistor has a link to allow setting of the correct resistance value .
See the application manual for operating voltage and sensitivity calculation.
5.2.3.1 Logic diagram
The logic diagram shows the operation principles for the 1Ph High impedance differential protection function HZPDIF (87), see figure 65. It is a simple one step IED function with an additional lower alarm level. By activating inputs, the HZPDIF (87) function can either be blocked completely, or only the trip output.
AlarmPickup
AlarmPickup
0-tAlarm 0
0.03s 0
en05000301_ansi.vsd ANSI05000301 V1 EN
Figure 65: Logic diagram for 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF (87)
Section 5 1MRK505222-UUS C Differential protection
162 Technical reference manual
5.2.4 Function block
ANSI05000363-2-en.vsd
HZPDIF (87) ISI* BLOCK BLKTR
TRIP ALARM
MEASVOLT
ANSI05000363 V2 EN
Figure 66: HZPDIF (87) function block
5.2.5 Input and output signals Table 84: HZPDIF (87) Input signals
Name Type Default Description ISI GROUP
SIGNAL — Group signal for current input
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip
Table 85: HZPDIF (87) Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm signal
MEASVOLT REAL Measured RMS voltage on CT secondary side
5.2.6 Setting parameters Table 86: HZPDIF (87) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
AlarmPickup 2 — 500 V 1 10 Alarm voltage level on CT secondary
tAlarm 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Time delay to activate alarm
TripPickup 5 — 900 V 1 100 Pickup voltage level in volts on CT secondary side
R series 10 — 20000 ohm 1 250 Value of series resistor in Ohms
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 5 Differential protection
163 Technical reference manual
5.2.7 Technical data Table 87: HZPDIF (87)technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Operate voltage (20-400) V
I=V/R 1.0% of In
Reset ratio >95% —
Maximum continuous power
V>Pickup2/SeriesResistor 200 W —
Operate time 10 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Vd —
Reset time 105 ms typically at 10 to 0 x Vd —
Critical impulse time 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Vd —
5.3 Additional security logic for differential protection STSGGIO (11)
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Additional security logic for differential protection
STSGGIO — 11
5.3.1 Introduction Additional security logic for differential protection (STSGGIO , 11) can help the security of the protection especially when the communication system is in abnormal status or for example when there is unspecified asymmetry in the communication link. It helps to reduce the probability for mal-operation of the protection. STSGGIO (11) is more sensitive than the main protection logic to always release operation for all faults detected by the differential function. STSGGIO (11) consists of four sub functions:
Phase-to-phase current variation Zero sequence current criterion Low voltage criterion Low current criterion
Phase-to-phase current variation takes the current samples as input and it calculates the variation using the sampling value based algorithm. Phase-to-phase current variation function is major one to fulfill the objectives of the startup element.
Section 5 1MRK505222-UUS C Differential protection
164 Technical reference manual
Zero sequence criterions takes the zero sequence current as input. It increases the security of protection during the high impedance fault conditions.
Low voltage criterion takes the phase voltages and phase-to-phase voltages as inputs. It increases the security of protection when the three-phase fault occurred on the weak end side.
Low current criterion takes the phase currents as inputs and it increases the dependability during the switch onto fault case of unloaded line.
The differential function can be allowed to trip as no load is fed through the line and protection is not working correctly.
Features:
Startup element is sensitive enough to detect the abnormal status of the protected system
Startup element does not influence the operation speed of main protection Startup element would detect the evolving faults, high impedance faults and three
phase fault on weak side It is possible to block the each sub function of startup element Startup signal has a settable pulse time
5.3.2 Principle of operation Additional security logic for differential protection (STSGGIO, 11) takes the current samples, current RMS values, phase voltage values, phase-to-phase voltage values, zero sequence current and remote side startup signals as inputs.
Startup signal becomes activated when any one of the current variation startup signal, zero sequence current startup signal, voltage startup signal, and current startup signal is activated.
Phase-to-phase current variation takes current samples and generates the startup signal by comparing with the pickup value.
If the zero sequence current value is greater than the pickup value of zero sequence current then the zero sequence current startup signal will be activated.
Voltage startup signal becomes activated when the any of phase voltage and line voltage is less than the voltage pickup value and the remote startup signal has to be activated.
Current startup signal becomes activated when the current value in all phases is less than current pickup value.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 5 Differential protection
165 Technical reference manual
Phase-to-phase current variation
Phase-to-phase current variation one is main startup element. It covers most of the abnormal status of the system. The phase-to-phase current variation fails in high impedance faults, three-phase fault on weak side and switch onto fault on unloaded line because of low sensitivity in these cases.
Phase-to-phase current variation takes the current samples as input and the signal is evaluated using the sampling value based algorithm.
The phase-to-phase current variation criterion is shown below:
1.8 T ZDi I IFFD > D + D EQUATION2255 V1 EN
Where:
i sampling value of phase-to-phase current variation
IZD setting of fixed threshold, which corresponds to setting ICV>. The default value for the setting is 0.2IBase, where IBase is the base current.
IT float threshold
It is the full-circle integral of the phase-to-phase current variation
2 11 | ( ) | T
T n T
I i t n T
—
FF =
D = D — EQUATION2256 V1 EN
Where:
T count of sample values in one cycle
i is calculated using the below formula:
( ) [ ( ) ( )] [ ( ) ( 2 )] ( ) 2 ( ) ( 2 )
i k i k i k N i k N i k N i k i k N i k N
D = — — — — — — = — — + —
EQUATION2257 V1 EN
N is the number of samples in one cycle.
Section 5 1MRK505222-UUS C Differential protection
166 Technical reference manual
Current variation subfunction
I3P
t
ANSI10000295-1-en.vsd
t
t Pick Up VAB
Pick Up VBC
Pick Up VCA
STCVOR
Time Delay CV
cont
cont
Time Delay CV
Time Delay CV i
ANSI10000295 V1 EN
Figure 67: Current variation logic diagram
Time Delay CV is the time setting for the change of current criterion. Phase current samples are included in input signal I3P.
Zero sequence current criterion
Zero sequence criterion is mainly for detection of remote IED high resistance faults or some gradual faults. The criterion takes the zero sequence current as input. Zero sequence current is compared with PU 3I0 for the t3I0 time to generate the zero sequence current startup signal.
a>b a
b ANDPU 3I0
BLK3I0 BLOCK
Pick Up 3I0
I3P
OR
t t3I0
ANSI09000778-2-en.vsd ANSI09000778 V2 EN
Figure 68: Zero sequence current criterion logic diagram
Here PU 3I0 is the setting of the maximum possible non-faulted zero sequence current for the protected line. The default value for this setting is 0.1 IBase where IBase is the rated current of the CT.
t3I0 is the time setting for the zero sequence current criterion.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 5 Differential protection
167 Technical reference manual
The zero sequence current criterion can be blocked by activating the BLK3I0 input signal.
Low voltage criterion
Low voltage criterion is mainly for detection of the three phase faults occurring on weak side with pre fault no load condition. The low voltage criterion takes the voltage phase values, voltage phase-to-phase values and remote startup signals as inputs. The logic for low voltage criterion is shown below:
AND
BLKUV
BLOCK
27 PU
V3P (UPhN)
V3P (UPhPh)
a
b
a
b
REMSTEP
OR
t tUV
OR
ANSI09000779-2-en.vsd
(Recived)
V_Ph-N
V_Ph-Ph<
ANSI09000779 V2 EN
Figure 69: Low voltage criterion logic diagram
Voltage phase value is compared with the pickup value of voltage phase and voltage phase-to-phase value is compared with the pickup value of voltage phase-to-phase. If any of the phase voltage and phase-to-phase voltages is below the set voltage levels for some time duration (tUV) then the low voltage PICKUP signal becomes activated after receiving the remote startup signal. Low voltage criterion can be blocked by activating BLKUV input signal.
If there are more than one remote IED, all the startup signals of the remote ends are logically OR to obtain the REMSTEP signal from the remote side as input.
Low current criterion
The current in each phase is compared to the set current level. If all currents are below setting PU_37, the STUC output is activated after the set delay tUC.
Section 5 1MRK505222-UUS C Differential protection
168 Technical reference manual
PU_37
BLUC BLOCK
PU_UC
I3P
OR
t tUC
AND a
a b
ANSI09000780-1-en.vsd ANSI09000780 V1 EN
Figure 70: Low current criterion logic diagram
Security logic for differential protection
The configuration for the additional security logic for differential protection is shown in fig 71. The function will release tripping of the line differential protection up to the end of timer tStUpReset.
Phase-phase current variation
STCV i
ULOW <
I0 >
27 PU
Pick Up 3IO
PU_UC
OR
Local side start-up Send signal to remote side
Zero sequence current criterion
Low voltage criterion
Low current criterion
ANSI10000296-1-en.vsd
I0 <
REMSTEP
t tStUpReset BFI_3P
ANSI10000296 V1 EN
Figure 71: Additional security logic for differential protection. Logic diagram for start up element.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 5 Differential protection
169 Technical reference manual
5.3.3 Function block STSGGIO (11REL)
I3P* V3P* BLOCK BLKCV BLUC BLK3I0 BLKUV REMSTEP
BFI_3P Pick Up VAB Pick Up VBC Pick Up VCA
PU_UC Pick Up 3I0
27 PU
ANSI09000781-1-en.vsd ANSI09000781 V1 EN
Figure 72: STSGGIO (11) function block
5.3.4 Input and output signals Table 88: STSGGIO (11REL) Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Group signal for current input
V3P GROUP SIGNAL
— Group signal for voltage input
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block
BLKCV BOOLEAN 0 Block of ph to ph current variation criterion
BLUC BOOLEAN 0 Block of the low current criterion
BLK3I0 BOOLEAN 0 Block of zero sequence current criterion
BLKUV BOOLEAN 0 Block of under voltage criterion
REMSTEP BOOLEAN 0 Startup signal of remote end
Table 89: STSGGIO (11REL) Output signals
Name Type Description BFI_3P BOOLEAN Pick Up
Pick Up VAB BOOLEAN Pickup for current variation criterion for phase AB
Pick Up VBC BOOLEAN Pickup for current variation criterion for phase BC
Pick Up VCA BOOLEAN Pickup for current variation criterion for phase CA
PU_UC BOOLEAN Pickup for low current criterion
Pick Up 3I0 BOOLEAN Pickup for zero sequence current criterion
27 PU BOOLEAN Pickup for under voltage criterion
Section 5 1MRK505222-UUS C Differential protection
170 Technical reference manual
5.3.5 Setting parameters Table 90: STSGGIO (11REL) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Operation Off/On
IBase 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Base setting for current in A
VBase 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400 Base setting for voltage in kV
tStUpReset 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 7.000 Reset delay for startup signal
Enable CV Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Disable/Enable current variation operation
Pick Up ICV 1 — 100 %IB 1 20 Fixed threshold for ph to ph current variation criterion
Operation37 Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Disable/Enable low current criterion
PU_37 0 — 100 %IB 1 5 Pickup for low current in % of IBase
Enable 3I0 Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Disable/Enable zero sequence current criterion
PU 3I0 1 — 100 %IB 1 10 Pickup zero sequence current criterion in % of IBase
OperationUV Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Disable/Enable under voltage criterion
V_Ph-N 1 — 100 %VB 1 60 Pickup phase voltage criterion in % of VBase
V_Ph-Ph 1 — 100 %VB 1 60 Pickup ph to ph voltage criterion in % of VBase
Table 91: STSGGIO (11REL) Group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Time Delay CV 0.000 — 0.005 s 0.001 0.002 Time delay for phase to phase current variation
tUC 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay for low current criterion
t3I0 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for zero sequence current criterion
tUV 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for low voltage criterion
HysAbsUV 0.0 — 100.0 %VB 0.1 0.5 Hysteresis absolute value for low voltage criterion in % of UBase
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 5 Differential protection
171 Technical reference manual
5.3.6 Technical data Table 92: STSGGIO (11) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Operate current, zero sequence (1-100)% of lBase 1,0% of In
Operate current, low operation (1-100)% of lBase 1,0% of In
Operate voltage, phase to neutral (1-100)% of VBase 0,5% of Vn
Operate voltage, phase to phase (1-100)% of VBase 0,5% of Vn
Timers, general (0.000-60.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0.5 to.2 x Iset —
Impulse margin time 20 ms typically —
Transient overreach < 2% at = 100 ms —
Section 5 1MRK505222-UUS C Differential protection
172 Technical reference manual
Section 6 Impedance protection
About this chapter This chapter describes distance protection and associated functions. It includes function blocks, logic diagrams and data tables with information about distance protection, automatic switch onto fault, weak end in-feed and other associated functions. Quadrilateral characteristics are also covered.
6.1 Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic ZMQPDIS (21), ZMQAPDIS (21), ZDRDIR (21D)
6.1.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850
identification IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic (zone 1)
ZMQPDIS
S00346 V1 EN
21
Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic (zone 2-5)
ZMQAPDIS
S00346 V1 EN
21
Directional impedance quadrilateral ZDRDIR
Z<->
IEC09000167 V1 EN
21D
6.1.2 Introduction(21) The line distance protection is a, up to five zone full scheme protection with three fault loops for phase-to-phase faults and three fault loops for phase-to-ground faults for each of the independent zones. Individual settings for each zone in resistive and reactive reach gives flexibility for use as back-up protection for transformer connected to overhead lines and cables of different types and lengths.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
173 Technical reference manual
ZMQPDIS (21) together with Phase selection with load encroachment FDPSPDIS (21) has functionality for load encroachment, which increases the possibility to detect high resistive faults on heavily loaded lines, as shown in figure73.
en05000034.vsd
R
X
Forward operation
Reverse operation
IEC05000034 V1 EN
Figure 73: Typical quadrilateral distance protection zone with Phase selection with load encroachment function FDPSPDIS (21) activated
The independent measurement of impedance for each fault loop together with a sensitive and reliable built-in phase selection makes the function suitable in applications with single-phase autoreclosing.
Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents overreaching of zone 1 at load exporting end at phase-to-ground faults on heavily loaded power lines.
The distance protection zones can operate independently of each other in directional (forward or reverse) or non-directional mode. This makes them suitable, together with different communication schemes, for the protection of power lines and cables in complex network configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal lines, and so on.
6.1.3 Principle of operation
6.1.3.1 Full scheme measurement
The execution of the different fault loops within the IED are of full scheme type, which means that each fault loop for phase-to-ground faults and phase-to-phase faults for forward and reverse faults are executed in parallel.
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
174 Technical reference manual
Figure 74 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for up to five, impedance- measuring zones. There are 3 to 5 zones depending on product type and variant.
A-G B-G C-G
A-G B-G C-G
A-G B-G C-G
A-G B-G C-G
A-B B-C C-A
A-B B-C C-A
A-B B-C -A
A-B B-C C-A
A-G B-G C-G A-B B-C C-A
Zone 1
Zone 2
Zone 3
Zone 4
Zone 5
C
Zone 6A-G B-G C-G A-B B-C C-A
ANSI05000458-2-en.vsd ANSI05000458 V2 EN
Figure 74: The different measuring loops at phase-to-ground fault and phase-to- phase fault.
The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compared to switched schemes which mostly uses a pickup of an overreaching element to select correct voltages and current depending on fault type. Each distance protection zone performs like one independent distance protection IED with six measuring elements.
6.1.3.2 Impedance characteristic
The distance measuring zone includes six impedance measuring loops; three intended for phase-to-ground faults, and three intended for phase-to-phase as well as, three- phase faults.
The distance measuring zone will essentially operate according to the non-directional impedance characteristics presented in figure 75 and figure 76. The phase-to-ground characteristic is illustrated with the full loop reach while the phase-to-phase characteristic presents the per phase reach.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
175 Technical reference manual
RFPG
X1+Xn
X1+Xn
RFPGR1+RnRFPG
RFPG
RFPG
RFPG
R
X
R1+Rn
(Ohm/loop)
ANSI05000661-3-en.vsd
R0-R1 Rn
3 =
X0-X1 Xn
3 =
j n j n
(Ohm/loop)
ANSI05000661 V3 EN
Figure 75: Characteristic for phase-to-ground measuring, ohm/loop domain
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
176 Technical reference manual
j
R1 RFPP
X1
X1
RFPPR1RFPP
RFPP
RFPP
RFPP
R
X (Ohm/phase)
(Ohm/phase)
IEC11000428-1-en.vsd
j
0 1 3
X PE X RVPEXNRV — =
0 1 3
X PE X FWPEXNFW — = 0 1
3 X PG X FWPG—
=
0 1 3
X PG X RVPGXNRV — =
0 1 3
X PE X RVPEXNRV — =
0 1 3
X PE X FWPEXNFW — =
2 2
2 2
2 2
IEC11000428 V1 EN
Figure 76: Characteristic for phase-to-phase measuring
The fault loop reach with respect to each fault type may also be presented as in figure 77. Note in particular the difference in definition regarding the (fault) resistive reach for phase-to-phase faults and three-phase faults.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
177 Technical reference manual
VA R1 + j X1Ip
RFPG Phase-to-ground fault in phase A
Phase-to-phase fault in phase A-B
Three-phase fault
(Arc + tower resistance)
0 (R0-R1)/3 + j (X0-X1)/3 )
IN
VA R1 + j X1IA
VB R1 + j X1
IB RFPP
VA R1 + j X1IA
VC R1 + j X1
IC
0.5RFPP
0.5RFPP
(Arc resistance)
Phase-to-ground element
Phase-to-phase element A-B
Phase-to-phase element A-C
ANSI05000181_2_en.vsd ANSI05000181 V2 EN
Figure 77: Fault loop model
The R1 and jX1 in figure 77 represents the positive sequence impedance from the measuring point to the fault location. The settings RFPG and RFPP are the eventual fault resistances in the faulty place.
Regarding the illustration of three-phase fault in figure 77, there is of course fault current flowing also in the third phase during a three-phase fault. The illustration merely reflects the loop measurement, which is made phase-to-phase.
The zone can be set to operate in Non-directional, Forward or Reverse direction through the setting OperationDir. The result from respective set value is illustrated in figure 78. The impedance reach is symmetric, in the sense that it conforms for forward
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
178 Technical reference manual
and reverse direction (there are different forward and reverse settings — Zx and ZxRev respectively, where x = 1 — 5). Therefore, all reach settings apply to both directions.
en05000182.vsd
R
X
R
X
R
X
Non-directional Forward Reverse
IEC05000182 V1 EN
Figure 78: Directional operating modes of the distance measuring zones
6.1.3.3 Minimum operating current
The operation of Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic (ZMQPDIS,21) is blocked if the magnitude of input currents fall below certain threshold values.
The phase-to-ground loop AG (BG or CG) is blocked if IA (IB or IC) < IMinPUPG.
For zone 1 with load compensation feature the additional criterion applies, that all phase- to-ground loops will be blocked when IN < IMinOpIR, regardless of the phase currents.
IA (IB or IC) is the RMS value of the current in phase IA (IB or IC). IN is the RMS value of the vector sum of the three-phase currents, that is, residual current 3I0.
The phase-to-phase loop AB (BC or CA) is blocked if IAB (BC or CA) < IMinPUPP.
All three current limits IMinPUPG, IMinOpIR and IMinPUPP are automatically reduced to 75% of regular set values if the zone is set to operate in reverse direction, that is, OperationDir = Reverse.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
179 Technical reference manual
6.1.3.4 Measuring principles
Fault loop equations use the complex values of voltage, current, and changes in the current. Apparent impedances are calculated and compared with the set limits. The apparent impedances at phase-to-phase faults follow equation 4 (example for a phase A to phase B fault).
= VA — VB
Zapp
IA — IB EQUATION1545 V1 EN (Equation 4)
Here V and I represent the corresponding voltage and current phasors in the respective phase Ln (n = 1, 2, 3)
The ground return compensation applies in a conventional manner to phase-to-ground faults (example for a phase A to ground fault) according to equation 5.
= +
app
N
V _ A Z
I _ A I KN
EQUATION1546 V1 EN (Equation 5)
Where:
V_A, I_A and IN are the phase voltage, phase current and residual current present to the IED
KN is defined as:
Z0 Z1KN 3 Z1
— =
EQUATION-2105 V1 EN
0 0 0Z R jX= + EQUATION2106 V1 EN
1 1 1Z R jX= + EQUATION2107 V1 EN
Where
R0 is setting of the resistive zero sequence reach
X0 is setting of the reactive zero sequence reach
R1 is setting of the resistive positive sequence reach
X1 is setting of the reactive positive sequence reach
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
180 Technical reference manual
Here IN is a phasor of the residual current in IED point. This results in the same reach along the line for all types of faults.
The apparent impedance is considered as an impedance loop with resistance R and reactance X.
The formula given in equation 5 is only valid for radial feeder application without load. When load is considered in the case of single phase-to-ground fault, conventional distance protection might overreach at exporting end and underreach at importing end. The IED has an adaptive load compensation which increases the security in such applications.
Measuring elements receive current and voltage information from the A/D converter. The check sums are calculated and compared, and the information is distributed into memory locations. For each of the six supervised fault loops, sampled values of voltage (V), current (I), and changes in current between samples (DI) are brought from the input memory and fed to a recursive Fourier filter.
The filter provides two orthogonal values for each input. These values are related to the loop impedance according to equation 6,
D = +
w D0
X i V R i
t EQUATION1547 V1 EN (Equation 6)
in complex notation, or:
0
Re( ) Re( ) Re ( )
X I V R I
t
D = +
w D
EQUATION1548 V1 EN (Equation 7)
0
Im( ) Im( ) Im( )
X I V R I
t
D = +
w D
EQUATION1549 V1 EN (Equation
with
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
181 Technical reference manual
w0 2 p f0 =
EQUATION356 V1 EN (Equation 9)
where:
Re designates the real component of current and voltage,
Im designates the imaginary component of current and voltage and
f0 designates the rated system frequency
The algorithm calculates Rmmeasured resistance from the equation for the real value of the voltage and substitutes it in the equation for the imaginary part. The equation for the Xm measured reactance can then be solved. The final result is equal to:
D — D =
D — D m
Im(V) Re(I) Re(V) lm(I) R
Re(I) lm(I) lm(I) Re (I) EQUATION1550 V1 EN (Equation 10)
— = w
D — D D m 0
Re(V) lm(I) lm(V) Re (I) X
Re (I) lm(I) lm(I) Re (I) t
EQUATION1551 V1 EN (Equation 11)
The calculated Rm and Xm values are updated each sample and compared with the set zone reach. The adaptive tripping counter counts the number of permissive tripping results. This effectively removes any influence of errors introduced by the capacitive voltage transformers or by other factors.
The directional evaluations are performed simultaneously in both forward and reverse directions, and in all six fault loops. Positive sequence voltage and a phase locked positive sequence memory voltage are used as a reference. This ensures unlimited directional sensitivity for faults close to the IED point.
6.1.3.5 Directional impedance element for quadrilateral characteristics
The evaluation of the directionality takes place in Directional impedance quadrilateral function ZDRDIR (21D). Equation 12 and equation 13 are used to classify that the fault is in forward direction for phase-to-ground fault and phase-to-phase fault.
1 1
1
0.8 1 0.2 1 arg ReL L M
L
V V ArgDir ArgNeg s
I
+ — < <
EQUATION1552 V2 EN (Equation 12)
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
182 Technical reference manual
For the AB element, the equation in forward direction is according to.
1 2 1 2
1 2
0.8 1 0.2 1 arg ReL L L L M
L L
V V ArgDir ArgNeg s
I
+ — < <
EQUATION1553 V2 EN (Equation 13)
where:
AngDir is the setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to 15 (= -15 degrees) and
AngNegRes is the setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to 115 degrees, see figure 79.
V1A is positive sequence phase voltage in phase A
V1AM is positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase A
IA is phase current in phase A
V1AB is voltage difference between phase A and B (B lagging A)
V1ABM is memorized voltage difference between phase A and B (B lagging A)
IAB is current difference between phase A and B (B lagging A)
The setting of AngDir and AngNegRes is by default set to 15 (= -15) and 115 degrees respectively (as shown in figure 79). It should not be changed unless system studies have shown the necessity.
ZDRDIR gives binary coded directional information per measuring loop on the output STDIRCND.
STDIR= FWD_A*1+FWD_B*2+FWD_C*4+FWD_AB*8+ +FWD_BC*16+FWD_CA*32+REV_A*64+REV_B*128+REV_C*256+ +REV_AB*512+REV_BC*1024+REV_CA*2048
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
183 Technical reference manual
R
X
AngDir
AngNegRes
en05000722_ansi.vsd ANSI05000722 V1 EN
Figure 79: Setting angles for discrimination of forward and reverse fault in Directional impedance quadrilateral function ZDRDIR (21D)
The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated by 180 degrees.
The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive sequence voltage exceeds 5% of the set base voltage VBase. So the directional element can use it for all unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults.
For close-in three-phase faults, the V1AM memory voltage, based on the same positive sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination.
The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is restored.
After 100ms the following occurs:
If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current (between 10 and 30% of the set IED rated current IBase), the condition seals in. If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures. If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element in
the reverse direction remains in operation. If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory resets
until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
184 Technical reference manual
6.1.3.6 Simplified logic diagrams
Distance protection zones The design of the distance protection zones are presented for all measuring loops: phase- to-ground as well as phase-to-phase.
Phase-to-ground related signals are designated by AG, BG and CG. The phase-to- phase signals are designated by AB, BC and CA.
Fulfillment of two different measuring conditions is necessary to obtain the one logical signal for each separate measuring loop:
Zone measuring condition, which follows the operating equations described above. Group functional input signal (PHSEL), as presented in figure 80.
Two types of function block, ZMQPDIS (21) and ZMQAPDIS (21), are used in the IED. ZMQPDIS (21) is used for zone 1 and ZMQAPDIS (21) for zone 2 — 5.
The PHSEL input signal represents a connection of six different integer values from Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic function FDPSPDIS (21) within the IED, which are converted within the zone measuring function into corresponding boolean expressions for each condition separately. Input signal PHSEL is connected to FDPSPDIS (21) function output PHSELZ.
The input signal DIRCND is used to give condition for directionality for the distance measuring zones. The signal contains binary coded information for both forward and reverse direction. The zone measurement function filters out the relevant signals depending on the setting of the parameter OperationDir. It must be configured to the STDIR output on ZDRDIR (21D) function.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
185 Technical reference manual
ANSI99000557-1-en.vsd
AB
BC
CA
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AG
BG
CG
PHSEL
NDIR_AB
NDIR_BC
NDIR_CA
NDIR_A
NDIR_B
NDIR_C
PUZMPP
STNDPE
AND BLOCK
LOVBZ PHPUND
BLK
OR
OR
OR
OR
BLOCFUNC
ANSI99000557 V2 EN
Figure 80: Conditioning by a group functional input signal PHSEL, external start condition
Composition of the phase pickup signals for a case, when the zone operates in a non- directional mode, is presented in figure 81.
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
186 Technical reference manual
ANSI09000889-1-en.vsd
NDIR_A
NDIR_B
NIDR_C
NDIR_AB
NDIR_BC
NDIR_CA
OR
OR
OR
OR
AND
AND
AND
AND
BLK
PICKUP
PU_C
PU_B
PU_A 15ms
0
15ms 0
15ms 0
15ms 0
ANSI09000889 V1 EN
Figure 81: Composition of pickup signals in non-directional operating mode
Results of the directional measurement enter the logic circuits, when the zone operates in directional (forward or reverse) mode, as shown in figure 82.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
187 Technical reference manual
NDIR_A DIR_A
NDIR_B DIR_B
NDIR_C DIR_C
NDIR_AB DIR_AB
NDIR_BC DIR_BC
NDIR_CA DIR_CA
AND
AND
AND
AND
BLK
15 ms 0
15 ms 0
PU_ZMPG
PU_A
PU_B
PU_C
PICKUP
PU_ZMPP
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
OR
OR
OR
OR
OR
OR
ANSI09000888-2-en.vsd
15 ms 0
15 ms 0
ANSI09000888 V2 EN
Figure 82: Composition of pickup signals in directional operating mode
Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolically presented in figure 83.
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
188 Technical reference manual
ANSI09000887-2-en.vsd
BLKTR
AND
AND
AND
PU_A
PU_B
PU_C
TRIP
TR_A
TR_B
TR_C
PUZMPP tPPAND
AND PUZMPG
Timer tPG=enable
Timer tPP=enable
tPG OR
AND
AND
AND
OR
ORBLK
BLKFUNC
0-tPP 0
0-tPG 0
0 15 ms
ANSI09000887 V2 EN
Figure 83: Tripping logic for the distance protection zone
6.1.4 Function block
ANSI06000256-2-en.vsd
ZMQPDIS (21) I3P* V3P* BLOCK LOVBZ BLKTR PHSEL DIRCND
TRIP TR_A TR_B TR_C
PICKUP PU_A PU_B PU_C
PHPUND
ANSI06000256 V2 EN
Figure 84: ZMQPDIS (21) function block
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
189 Technical reference manual
ANSI09000884-1-en.vsd
ZMQAPDIS (21) I3P* V3P* BLOCK LOVBZ BLKTR PHSEL DIRCND
TRIP TR_A TR_B TR_C
PICKUP PU_A PU_B PU_C
PHPUND
ANSI09000884 V1 EN
Figure 85: ZMQAPDIS (21) function block (zone 2 — 5)
ZDRDIR I3P* U3P*
STDIRCND
IEC10000007-1-en.vsd IEC10000007 V1 EN
Figure 86: ZDRDIR (21D) function block
6.1.5 Input and output signals Table 93: ZMQPDIS (21) Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Group signal for current input
V3P GROUP SIGNAL
— Group signal for voltage input
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
LOVBZ BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all output for LOV (or fuse failure) condition
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all trip outputs
PHSEL INTEGER 0 Faulted phase loop selection enable from phase selector
DIRCND INTEGER 0 External directional condition
Table 94: ZMQPDIS (21) Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN General Trip, issued from any phase or loop
TR_A BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase A
TR_B BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase B
TR_C BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase C
PICKUP BOOLEAN General Pickup, issued from any phase or loop
Table continues on next page
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
190 Technical reference manual
Name Type Description PU_A BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase A
PU_B BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase B
PU_C BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase C
PHPUND BOOLEAN Non-directional pickup, issued from any selected phase or loop
Table 95: ZMQAPDIS (21) Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Group signal for current input
V3P GROUP SIGNAL
— Group signal for voltage input
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
LOVBZ BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all output for LOV (or fuse failure) condition
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all trip outputs
PHSEL INTEGER 0 Faulted phase loop selection enable from phase selector
DIRCND INTEGER 0 External directional condition
Table 96: ZMQAPDIS (21) Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN General Trip, issued from any phase or loop
TR_A BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase A
TR_B BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase B
TR_C BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase C
PICKUP BOOLEAN General Pickup, issued from any phase or loop
PU_A BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase A
PU_B BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase B
PU_C BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase C
PHPUND BOOLEAN Non-directional pickup, issued from any selected phase or loop
Table 97: ZDRDIR (21D) Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP
SIGNAL — group connection for current abs 2
V3P GROUP SIGNAL
— group connection for voltage abs 2
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
191 Technical reference manual
Table 98: ZDRDIR (21D) Output signals
Name Type Description STDIRCND INTEGER Binary coded directional information per measuring loop
6.1.6 Setting parameters
Signals and settings for ZMQPDIS are valid for zone 1 while signals and settings for ZMQAPDIS are valid for zone 2 — 5
Table 99: ZMQPDIS (21) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Enabled Disable/Enable Operation
IBase 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Base current, i.e. rated current
VBase 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Base voltage, i.e. rated voltage
OperationDir Disabled Non-directional Forward Reverse
— — Forward Operation mode of directionality NonDir / Forw / Rev
X1 0.10 — 3000.00 ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach
R1 0.01 — 1000.00 ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistance for zone characteristic angle
X0 0.10 — 9000.00 ohm/p 0.01 100.00 Zero sequence reactance reach
R0 0.01 — 3000.00 ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero seq. resistance for zone characteristic angle
RFPP 0.10 — 3000.00 ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-Ph
RFPG 0.10 — 9000.00 ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-G
OperationPP Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Operation mode Disable/Enable of Phase- Phase loops
Timer tPP Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Operation mode Disable/Enable of Zone timer, Ph-Ph
tPP 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-Ph
OperationPG Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Operation mode Disable/Enable of Phase- Ground loops
Timer tPG Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Operation mode Disable/ Enable of Zone timer, Ph-G
tPG 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-G
Table continues on next page
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
192 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description IMinPUPP 10 — 1000 %IB 1 20 Minimum pickup delta current (2 x current of
lagging phase) for Phase-to-phase loops
IMinPUPG 10 — 1000 %IB 1 20 Minimum pickup phase current for Phase-to- ground loops
IMinOpIR 5 — 1000 %IB 1 5 Minimum operate residual current for Phase- Ground loops
Table 100: ZMQAPDIS (21) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Enabled Disable/Enable Operation
IBase 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Base current, i.e. rated current
Vbase 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Base voltage, i.e. rated voltage
OperationDir Disabled Non-directional Forward Reverse
— — Forward Operation mode of directionality NonDir / Forw / Rev
X1 0.10 — 3000.00 ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach
R1 0.01 — 1000.00 ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistance for zone characteristic angle
X0 0.10 — 9000.00 ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero sequence reactance reach
R0 0.01 — 3000.00 ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero seq. resistance for zone characteristic angle
RFPP 0.10 — 3000.00 ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-Ph
RFPG 0.10 — 9000.00 ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-G
OperationPP Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Operation mode Disable/Enable of Phase- Phase loops
Timer tPP Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Operation mode Disable/Enable of Zone timer, Ph-Ph
tPP 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-Ph
OperationPG Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Operation mode Disable/Enable of Phase- Ground loops
Timer tPG Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Operation mode Disable/ Enable of Zone timer, Ph-G
tPG 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-G
IMinPUPP 10 — 1000 %IB 1 20 Minimum pickup delta current (2 x current of lagging phase) for Phase-to-phase loops
IMinPUPG 10 — 1000 %IB 1 20 Minimum pickup phase current for Phase-to- ground loops
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
193 Technical reference manual
Table 101: ZDRDIR (21D) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description IBase 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Base setting for current level
VBase 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Base setting for voltage level
IMinPUPP 5 — 30 %IB 1 10 Minimum pickup delta current (2 x current of lagging phase) for Phase-to-phase loops
IMinPUPG 5 — 30 %IB 1 5 Minimum pickup phase current for Phase-to- ground loops
AngNegRes 90 — 175 Deg 1 115 Angle of blinder in second quadrant for forward direction
AngDir 5 — 45 Deg 1 15 Angle of blinder in fourth quadrant for forward direction
6.1.7 Technical data Table 102: ZMQPDIS (21) Technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Number of zones Max 5 with selectable
direction —
Minimum operate residual current, zone 1
(5-1000)% of IBase —
Minimum operate current, phase- to-phase and phase-to-ground
(10-1000)% of IBase —
Positive sequence reactance (0.10-3000.00) / phase
2.0% static accuracy 2.0 degrees static angular accuracy Conditions: Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Vn Current range: (0.5-30) x In Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees
Positive sequence resistance (0.01-1000.00) / phase
Zero sequence reactance (0.10-9000.00) / phase
Zero sequence resistance (0.01-3000.00) / phase
Fault resistance, phase-to- ground
(0.10-9000.00) /loop
Fault resistance, phase-to-phase (0.10-3000.00) /loop
Dynamic overreach <5% at 85 degrees measured with CVTs and 0.5 <30
—
Impedance zone timers (0.000-60.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
Operate time 24 ms typically —
Reset ratio 105% typically —
Reset time 30 ms typically —
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
194 Technical reference manual
6.2 Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines ZMCPDIS (21), ZMCAPDIS (21), ZDSRDIR (21D)
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines (zone 1)
ZMCPDIS
S00346 V1 EN
21
Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines (zone 2-5)
ZMCAPDIS
S00346 V1 EN
21
Directional impedance quadrilateral, including series compensation
ZDSRDIR
Z<->
IEC09000167 V1 EN
21D
6.2.1 Introduction The line distance protection is a, up to five zone full scheme protection with three fault loops for phase-to-phase faults and three fault loops for phase-to-ground fault for each of the independent zones. Individual settings for each zone resistive and reactive reach give flexibility for use on overhead lines and cables of different types and lengths.
Quadrilateral characteristic is available.
ZMCPDIS (21) function has functionality for load encroachment which increases the possibility to detect high resistive faults on heavily loaded lines.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
195 Technical reference manual
en05000034.vsd
R
X
Forward operation
Reverse operation
IEC05000034 V1 EN
Figure 87: Typical quadrilateral distance protection zone with load encroachment function activated
The independent measurement of impedance for each fault loop together with a sensitive and reliable built in phase selection makes the function suitable in applications with single phase auto-reclosing.
Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm for the quadrilateral function prevents overreaching of zone1 at load exporting end at phase to ground-faults on heavily loaded power lines.
The distance protection zones can operate, independent of each other, in directional (forward or reverse) or non-directional mode. This makes them suitable, together with different communication schemes, for the protection of power lines and cables in complex network configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal lines.
6.2.2 Principle of operation
6.2.2.1 Full scheme measurement
The execution of the different fault loops within the IED are of full scheme type, which means that ground fault loop for phase-to-ground faults and phase-to-phase faults for forward and reverse faults are executed in parallel.
Figure 88 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for the basic five, impedance-measuring zones.
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
196 Technical reference manual
A-G B-G C-G
A-G B-G C-G
A-G B-G C-G
A-G B-G C-G
A-B B-C C-A
A-B B-C C-A
A-B B-C -A
A-B B-C C-A
A-G B-G C-G A-B B-C C-A
Zone 1
Zone 2
Zone 3
Zone 4
Zone 5
C
Zone 6A-G B-G C-G A-B B-C C-A
ANSI05000458-2-en.vsd ANSI05000458 V2 EN
Figure 88: The different measuring loops at phase-to-ground fault and phase-to- phase fault
The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compared to switched schemes which mostly uses a pickup of an overreaching element to select correct voltages and current depending on fault type. Each distance protection zone performs like one independent distance protection IED with six measuring elements.
6.2.2.2 Impedance characteristic
Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines (ZMCPDIS, 21) include six impedance measuring loops; three intended for phase-to- ground faults, and three intended for phase-to-phase as well as, three-phase faults.
The distance measuring zone operates according to the non-directional impedance characteristics presented in figure 89 and figure 90. The phase-to-ground characteristic is illustrated with the full loop reach while the phase-to-phase characteristic presents the per-phase reach.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
197 Technical reference manual
R1PG+RNFw
RFFwPG
X1FwPG+XNFw
X1RvPG+XNRv
RFFwPGRFRvPG
RFFwPG
RFRvPG
RFRvPG
R
X (Ohm/loop)
(Ohm/loop)
ANSI09000625-1-en.vsd
j N
0 1 3
X PE X RVPEXNRV — =
0 1 3
X PE X FWPEXNFW — = 0 1
3 X PG X FWPG—
=
0 1 3
X PG X RVPGXNRV — =
j N
j N
0 1
3
X PG X FwPG XNFw
— =
1
1
X RvPG XNRv XNFw
X FwPG =
0 1
3
R PG R PG RNFw
— =
ANSI09000625 V1 EN
Figure 89: Characteristic for the phase-to-ground measuring loops, ohm/loop domain
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
198 Technical reference manual
j
R1PP RFFwPP
X1FwPP
X1RvPP
RFFwPPRFRvPP
RFFwPP
RFRvPP
RFRvPP
R
X (Ohm/phase)
(Ohm/phase)
IEC09000632-1-en.vsd
j
0 1 3
X PE X RVPEXNRV — =
0 1 3
X PE X FWPEXNFW — = 0 1
3 X PG X FWPG—
=
0 1 3
X PG X RVPGXNRV — =
0 1 3
X PE X RVPEXNRV — =
0 1 3
X PE X FWPEXNFW — =
2 2
2 2
2 2
j N
Nj
IEC09000632 V1 EN
Figure 90: Characteristic for the phase-to-phase measuring loops
The fault loop reach with respect to each fault type may also be presented as in figure 91. Note in particular the difference in definition regarding the (fault) resistive reach for phase-to-phase faults and three-phase faults.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
199 Technical reference manual
VA R1 + j X1Ip
RFPG Phase-to-ground fault in phase A
Phase-to-phase fault in phase A-B
Three-phase fault
(Arc + tower resistance)
0 (R0-R1)/3 + j (X0-X1)/3 )
IN
VA R1 + j X1IA
VB R1 + j X1
IB RFPP
VA R1 + j X1IA
VC R1 + j X1
IC
0.5RFPP
0.5RFPP
(Arc resistance)
Phase-to-ground element
Phase-to-phase element A-B
Phase-to-phase element A-C
ANSI05000181_2_en.vsd ANSI05000181 V2 EN
Figure 91: Fault loop model
The R1 and jX1 in figure 91 represents the positive sequence impedance from the measuring point to the fault location. The RFPG and RFPP is the eventual fault resistance in the fault place.
Regarding the illustration of three-phase fault in figure 91, there is of course fault current flowing also in the third phase during a three-phase fault. The illustration merely reflects the loop measurement, which is made phase-to-phase.
The zone may be set to operate in Non-directional, Forward or Reverse direction through the setting OperationDir. The result from respective set value is illustrated in figure 92. It may be convenient to once again mention that the impedance reach is symmetric, forward and reverse direction. Therefore, all reach settings apply to both directions.
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
200 Technical reference manual
en05000182.vsd
R
X
R
X
R
X
Non-directional Forward Reverse
IEC05000182 V1 EN
Figure 92: Directional operating modes of the distance measuring zone
6.2.2.3 Minimum operating current
The operation of Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines (ZMCPDIS,ZMCAPDIS, 21) is blocked if the magnitude of input currents fall below certain threshold values.
The phase-to-ground loop AG (BG or CG) is blocked if IA (IB or IC) < IMinPUPG.
For zone 1 with load compensation feature the additional criterion applies, that all phase- to-ground loops will be blocked when IN < IMinOpIR, regardless of the phase currents.
IA (IB or IC) is the RMS value of the current in phase IA (IB or IC). IN is the RMS value of the vector sum of the three phase currents, that is, residual current 3I0.
The phase-to-phase loop AB (BC or CA) is blocked if IAB (BC or CA)< IMinPUPP.
All three current limits IMinPUPG, IMinOpIR and IMinPUPP are automatically reduced to 75% of regular set values if the zone is set to operate in reverse direction, that is, OperationDir=Reverse.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
201 Technical reference manual
6.2.2.4 Measuring principles
Fault loop equations use the complex values of voltage, current, and changes in the current. Apparent impedances are calculated and compared with the set limits. The calculation of the apparent impedances at ph-ph faults follows equation 14 (example for a phase A to phase B fault).
= VA — VB
Zapp
IA — IB EQUATION1545 V1 EN (Equation 14)
Here V and I represent the corresponding voltage and current phasors in the respective phase.
The ground return compensation applies in a conventional manner to ph-g faults (example for a phase A to ground fault) according to equation 15.
= +
app
N
V _ A Z
I _ A I KN
EQUATION1546 V1 EN (Equation 15)
Where:
V_A, I_A and IN are the phase voltage, phase current and residual current present to the IED
KN is defined as:
Z0 Z1KN 3 Z1
— =
EQUATION-2105 V1 EN
0 0 0Z R jX= + EQUATION2106 V1 EN
1 1 1Z R jX= + EQUATION2107 V1 EN
Where
R0 is setting of the resistive zero sequence reach
X0 is setting of the reactive zero sequence reach
R1 is setting of the resistive positive sequence reach
X1 is setting of the reactive positive sequence reach
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
202 Technical reference manual
Here IN is a phasor of the residual current at the IED point. This results in the same reach along the line for all types of faults.
The apparent impedance is considered as an impedance loop with resistance R and reactance X.
The formula given in equation 15 is only valid for no loaded radial feeder applications. When load is considered in the case of single phase-to-ground fault, conventional distance protection might overreach at exporting end and underreach at importing end. IED has an adaptive load compensation which increases the security in such applications.
Measuring elements receive current and voltage information from the A/D converter. The check sums are calculated and compared, and the information is distributed into memory locations. For each of the six supervised fault loops, sampled values of voltage (V), current (I), and changes in current between samples (DI) are brought from the input memory and fed to a recursive Fourier filter.
The filter provides two orthogonal values for each input. These values are related to the loop impedance according to equation 16,
D = +
w D0
X i V R i
t EQUATION1547 V1 EN (Equation 16)
in complex notation, or:
0
Re( ) Re( ) Re ( )
X I V R I
t
D = +
w D
EQUATION1548 V1 EN (Equation 17)
0
Im( ) Im( ) Im( )
X I V R I
t
D = +
w D
EQUATION1549 V1 EN (Equation 18)
with
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
203 Technical reference manual
w0 2 p f0 =
EQUATION356 V1 EN (Equation 19)
where:
Re designates the real component of current and voltage,
Im designates the imaginary component of current and voltage and
f0 designates the rated system frequency
The algorithm calculates Rm measured resistance from the equation for the real value of the voltage and substitute it in the equation for the imaginary part. The equation for the Xm measured reactance can then be solved. The final result is equal to:
D — D =
D — D m
Im(V) Re(I) Re(V) lm(I) R
Re(I) lm(I) lm(I) Re (I) EQUATION1550 V1 EN (Equation 20)
— = w
D — D D m 0
Re(V) lm(I) lm(V) Re (I) X
Re (I) lm(I) lm(I) Re (I) t
EQUATION1551 V1 EN (Equation 21)
The calculated Rm and Xm values are updated each sample and compared with the set zone reach. The adaptive tripping counter counts the number of permissive tripping results. This effectively removes any influence of errors introduced by the capacitive voltage transformers or by other factors.
The directional evaluations are performed simultaneously in both forward and reverse directions, and in all six fault loops. Positive sequence voltage and a phase locked positive sequence memory voltage are used as a reference. This ensures unlimited directional sensitivity for faults close to the IED point.
6.2.2.5 Directionality for series compensation
In the basic distance protection function, the control of the memory for polarizing voltage is performed by an under voltage control. In case of series compensated line, a voltage reversal can occur with a relatively high voltage also when the memory must be locked. Thus, a simple undervoltage type of voltage memory control can not be used in case of voltage reversal. In the option for series compensated network the polarizing quantity and memory are controlled by an impedance measurement criterion.
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
204 Technical reference manual
The polarizing voltage is a memorized positive sequence voltage. The memory is continuously synchronized via a positive sequence filter. The memory is starting to run freely instantaneously when a voltage change is detected in any phase. A non- directional impedance measurement is used to detect a fault and identify the faulty phase or phases.
At a three phase fault when no positive sequence voltage remains (all three phases are disconnected) the memory is used for direction polarization during 100 ms.
The memory predicts the phase of the positive sequence voltage with the pre-fault frequency. This extrapolation is made with a high accuracy and it is not the accuracy of the memory that limits the time the memory can be used. The network is at a three phase fault under way to a new equilibrium and the post-fault condition can only be predicted accurately for a limited time from the pre-fault condition.
In case of a three phase fault after 100 ms the phase of the memorized voltage can not be relied upon and the directional measurement has to be blocked. The achieved direction criteria are sealed-in when the directional measurement is blocked and kept until the impedance fault criteria is reset (the direction is stored until the fault is cleared).
This memory control allows in the time domain unlimited correct directional measurement for all unsymmetrical faults also at voltage reversal. Only at three phase fault within the range of the set impedance reach of the criteria for control of the polarization voltage the memory has to be used and the measurement is limited to 100 ms and thereafter the direction is sealed-in. The special impedance measurement to control the polarization voltage is set separately and has only to cover (with some margin) the impedance to fault that can cause the voltage reversal.
The evaluation of the directionality takes place in Directional impedance quadrilateral, including series compensation (ZDSRDIR,21D) function. Equation 22 and equation 23 are used to classify that the fault is in forward direction for phase-to-ground fault and phase-to-phase fault.
1a g ReAM
A
VAngDir n AngNeg s I
— < <
EQUATION2005 V2 EN (Equation 22)
For the AB element, the equation in forward direction is according to:
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
205 Technical reference manual
1a g ReABM
AB
VAngDir n AngNeg s I
— < <
EQUATION2007 V2 EN (Equation 23)
where:
AngDir is the setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to 15 (= -15 degrees) and
AngNegRes is the setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to 115 degrees, see figure 93.
V1AM is positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase A
IA is phase current in phase A
V1ABM is memorized voltage difference between phase A and B (B lagging A)
IAB is current difference between phase A and B (B lagging A)
The setting of AngDir and AngNegRes is by default set to 15 (= -15) and 115 degrees respectively, see figure 93, and it should not be changed unless system studies have shown the necessity.
ZDSRDIR (21D) generates a binary coded signal on the output STDIR depending on the evaluation where FWD_A=1 adds 1, REV_A=1 adds 2, FWD_B=1 adds 4.
R
X
AngDir
AngNegRes
en05000722_ansi.vsd ANSI05000722 V1 EN
Figure 93: Setting angles for discrimination of forward and reverse fault
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
206 Technical reference manual
The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated by 180 degrees.
6.2.2.6 Simplified logic diagrams
Distance protection zones The design of distance protection zones are presented for all measuring loops: phase-to- ground as well as phase-to-phase.
Phase-to-ground related signals are designated by AG, BG and CG. The phase-to- phase signals are designated by AB, BC and CA.
Fulfillment of two different measuring conditions is necessary to obtain the one logical signal for each separate measuring loop:
Zone measuring condition, which follows the operating equations described above. Group functional input signal (PHSEL), as presented in figure 94.
Two types of function block, ZMCPDIS (21) and ZMCAPDIS (21), are used in the IED. ZMCPDIS (21) is used for zone 1 and ZMCAPDIS (21) for zone 2 — 5.
The PHSEL input signal represents a connection of six different integer values from the phase selection function within the IED, which are converted within the zone measuring function into corresponding boolean expressions for each condition separately. It is connected to Phase selection with load enchroachment, quadrilateral characteristic (FDPSPDIS, 21) function output PHSELZ.
The internal input signal DIRCND is used to give condition for directionality for the distance measuring zones. The signal contains binary coded information for both forward and reverse direction. The zone measurement function filter out the relevant signals on the STDIR input depending on the setting of OperationDir. It must be configured to the STDIR output on Directional impedance quadrilateral, including series compensation (ZDSRDIR, 21D) function.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
207 Technical reference manual
ANSI99000557-1-en.vsd
AB
BC
CA
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AG
BG
CG
PHSEL
NDIR_AB
NDIR_BC
NDIR_CA
NDIR_A
NDIR_B
NDIR_C
PUZMPP
STNDPE
AND BLOCK
LOVBZ PHPUND
BLK
OR
OR
OR
OR
BLOCFUNC
ANSI99000557 V2 EN
Figure 94: Conditioning by a group functional input signal PHSEL
Composition of the phase pickup signals for a case, when the zone operates in a non- directional mode, is presented in figure 95.
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
208 Technical reference manual
en00000488-1_ansi.vsd
NDIR_A
NDIR_B
NIDR_C
NDIR_AB
NDIR_BC
NDIR_CA
OR
OR
OR
OR
AND
AND
AND
AND
BLK
PICKUP
PU_C
PU_B
PU_A
ANSI00000488 V2 EN
Figure 95: Composition of pickup signals in non-directional operating mode
Results of the directional measurement enter the logic circuits, when the zone operates in directional (forward or reverse) mode, as shown in figure 96.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
209 Technical reference manual
NDIR_A DIR_A
NDIR_B DIR_B
NDIR_C DIR_C
NDIR_AB DIR_AB
NDIR_BC DIR_BC
NDIR_CA DIR_CA
AND
AND
AND
AND
BLK
15 ms 0
15 ms 0
PU_ZMPG
PU_A
PU_B
PU_C
PICKUP
PU_ZMPP
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
OR
OR
OR
OR
OR
OR
ANSI09000888-2-en.vsd
15 ms 0
15 ms 0
ANSI09000888 V2 EN
Figure 96: Composition of pickup signals in directional operating mode
Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolically presented in figure 97.
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
210 Technical reference manual
ANSI09000887-2-en.vsd
BLKTR
AND
AND
AND
PU_A
PU_B
PU_C
TRIP
TR_A
TR_B
TR_C
PUZMPP tPPAND
AND PUZMPG
Timer tPG=enable
Timer tPP=enable
tPG OR
AND
AND
AND
OR
ORBLK
BLKFUNC
0-tPP 0
0-tPG 0
0 15 ms
ANSI09000887 V2 EN
Figure 97: Tripping logic for the distance protection zone one
6.2.3 Function block
ANSI07000036-2-en.vsd
ZMCPDIS (21) I3P* V3P* BLOCK LOVBZ BLKTR PHSEL DIRCND
TRIP TR_A TR_B TR_C
PICKUP PU_A PU_B PU_C
PHPUND
ANSI07000036 V2 EN
Figure 98: ZMCPDIS (21) function block
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
211 Technical reference manual
ANSI09000890-1-en.vsd
ZMCAPDIS (21) I3P* V3P* BLOCK LOVBZ BLKTR PHSEL DIRCND
TRIP TR_A TR_B TR_C
PICKUP PU_A PU_B PU_C
PHPUND
ANSI09000890 V1 EN
Figure 99: ZMCAPDIS (21) function block
ANSI07000035-2-en.vsd
ZDSRDIR (21D) I3P* V3P*
PUFW PUREV
STDIRCND
ANSI07000035 V2 EN
Figure 100: ZDSRDIR (21D) function block
6.2.4 Input and output signals
Input and output signals is shown for zone 1, zone 2 — 5 are equal.
Table 103: ZMCPDIS (21) Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Group signal for current input
V3P GROUP SIGNAL
— Group signal for voltage input
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
LOVBZ BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all output for LOV (or fuse failure) condition
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all trip outputs
PHSEL INTEGER 0 Faulted phase loop selection enable from phase selector
DIRCND INTEGER 0 External directional condition
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
212 Technical reference manual
Table 104: ZMCPDIS (21) Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN General Trip, issued from any phase or loop
TR_A BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase A
TR_B BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase B
TR_C BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase C
PICKUP BOOLEAN General Pickup, issued from any phase or loop
PU_A BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase A
PU_B BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase B
PU_C BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase C
PHPUND BOOLEAN Non-directional pickup, issued from any selected phase or loop
Table 105: ZMCAPDIS (21) Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Group signal for current input
V3P GROUP SIGNAL
— Group signal for voltage input
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
LOVBZ BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all output for LOV (or fuse failure) condition
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all trip outputs
PHSEL INTEGER 0 Faulted phase loop selection enable from phase selector
DIRCND INTEGER 0 External directional condition
Table 106: ZMCAPDIS (21) Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN General Trip, issued from any phase or loop
TR_A BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase A
TR_B BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase B
TR_C BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase C
PICKUP BOOLEAN General Pickup, issued from any phase or loop
PU_A BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase A
PU_B BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase B
PU_C BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase C
PHPUND BOOLEAN Non-directional pickup, issued from any selected phase or loop
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
213 Technical reference manual
Table 107: ZDSRDIR (21D) Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Group connection for current
V3P GROUP SIGNAL
— Group connection for voltage
Table 108: ZDSRDIR (21D) Output signals
Name Type Description PUFW BOOLEAN Pickup in forward direction
PUREV BOOLEAN Pickup in reverse direction
STDIRCND INTEGER Binary coded directional information per measuring loop
6.2.5 Setting parameters
Settings for ZMCPDIS (21) are valid for zone 1, while settings for ZMCAPDIS (21) are valid for zone 2 — 5
Table 109: ZMCPDIS (21) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Enabled Disable/Enable Operation
IBase 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Base current, i.e. rated current
VBase 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Base voltage, i.e. rated voltage
OperationDir Disabled Non-directional Forward Reverse
— — Forward Operation mode of directionality NonDir / Forw / Rev
OperationPP Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Operation mode Disable/Enable of Phase- Phase loops
X1FwPP 0.10 — 3000.00 ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-Ph, forward
R1PP 0.01 — 1000.00 ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistance for characteristic angle, Ph-Ph
RFltFwdPP 0.10 — 3000.00 ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, forward
X1RvPP 0.10 — 3000.00 ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-Ph, reverse
RFltRevPP 0.10 — 3000.00 ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, reverse
Timer tPP Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Operation mode Disable/Enable of Zone timer, Ph-Ph
Table continues on next page
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
214 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description tPP 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-Ph
OperationPG Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Operation mode Disable/Enable of Phase- Ground loops
X1FwPG 0.10 — 3000.00 ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-G, forward
R1PG 0.01 — 1000.00 ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistance for characteristic angle, Ph-G
X0PG 0.10 — 9000.00 ohm/p 0.01 100.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-G
R0PG 0.01 — 3000.00 ohm/p 0.01 47.00 Zero seq. resistance for zone characteristic angle, Ph-G
RFltFwdPG 0.10 — 9000.00 ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-G, forward
X1RvPG 0.10 — 3000.00 ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-G, reverse
RFltRevPG 0.10 — 9000.00 ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-G, reverse
Timer tPG Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Operation mode Disable/ Enable of Zone timer, Ph-G
tPG 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-G
IMinPUPP 10 — 1000 %IB 1 20 Minimum pickup delta current (2 x current of lagging phase) for Phase-to-phase loops
IMinPUPG 10 — 1000 %IB 1 20 Minimum pickup phase current for Phase-to- ground loops
IMinOpIR 5 — 1000 %IB 1 5 Minimum operate residual current for Phase- Ground loops
Table 110: ZMCAPDIS (21) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Enabled Disable/Enable Operation
IBase 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Base current, i.e. rated current
VBase 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Base voltage, i.e. rated voltage
OperationDir Disabled Non-directional Forward Reverse
— — Forward Operation mode of directionality NonDir / Forw / Rev
OperationPP Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Operation mode Disable/Enable of Phase- Phase loops
X1FwPP 0.10 — 3000.00 ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-Ph, forward
R1PP 0.01 — 1000.00 ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistance for characteristic angle, Ph-Ph
RFltFwdPP 0.10 — 3000.00 ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, forward
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
215 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description X1RvPP 0.10 — 3000.00 ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-Ph,
reverse
RFltRevPP 0.10 — 3000.00 ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, reverse
Timer tPP Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Operation mode Disable/Enable of Zone timer, Ph-Ph
tPP 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-Ph
OperationPG Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Operation mode Disable/Enable of Phase- Ground loops
X1FwPG 0.10 — 3000.00 ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-G, forward
R1PG 0.01 — 1000.00 ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistance for characteristic angle, Ph-G
X0PG 0.10 — 9000.00 ohm/p 0.01 100.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-G
R0PG 0.01 — 3000.00 ohm/p 0.01 47.00 Zero seq. resistance for zone characteristic angle, Ph-G
RFltFwdPG 0.10 — 9000.00 ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-G, forward
X1RvPG 0.10 — 3000.00 ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-G, reverse
RFltRevPG 0.10 — 9000.00 ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-G, reverse
Timer tPG Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Operation mode Disable/ Enable of Zone timer, Ph-G
tPG 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-G
IMinPUPP 10 — 1000 %IB 1 20 Minimum pickup delta current (2 x current of lagging phase) for Phase-to-phase loops
IMinPUPG 10 — 1000 %IB 1 20 Minimum pickup phase current for Phase-to- ground loops
Table 111: ZDSRDIR (21D) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description OperationSC NoSeriesComp
SeriesComp — — SeriesComp Special directional criteria for voltage reversal
IBase 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Base setting for current level
VBase 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Base setting for voltage level
IMinPUPG 5 — 30 %IB 1 5 Minimum pickup phase current for Phase-to- ground loops
IMinPUPP 5 — 30 %IB 1 10 Minimum pickup delta current (2 x current of lagging phase) for Phase-to-phase loops
AngNegRes 90 — 175 Deg 1 130 Angle of blinder in second quadrant for forward direction
AngDir 5 — 45 Deg 1 15 Angle of blinder in fourth quadrant for forward direction
Table continues on next page
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
216 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description 3I0Enable_PG 10 — 100 %IPh 1 20 3I0 pickup for releasing phase-to-ground
measuring loops
3I0BLK_PP 10 — 100 %IPh 1 40 3I0 limit for disabling phase-to-phase measuring loops
OperationLdCh Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Operation of load discrimination characteristic
RLdFwd 1.00 — 3000.00 ohm/p 0.01 80.00 Forward resistive reach for the load impedance area
RldRev 1.00 — 3000.00 ohm/p 0.01 80.00 Reverse resistive reach for the load impedance area
LdAngle 5 — 70 Deg 1 30 Load angle determining the load impedance area
X1FwPP 0.50 — 3000.00 ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-Ph, forward
R1PP 0.10 — 1000.00 ohm/p 0.01 7.00 Positive seq. resistance for characteristic angle, Ph-Ph
RFltFwdPP 0.50 — 3000.00 ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, forward
X1RvPP 0.50 — 3000.00 ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-Ph, reverse
RFltRevPP 0.50 — 3000.00 ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, reverse
X1FwPG 0.50 — 3000.00 ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-G, forward
R1PG 0.10 — 1000.00 ohm/p 0.01 7.00 Positive seq. resistance for characteristic angle, Ph-G
X0FwPG 0.50 — 9000.00 ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-G, forward
R0PG 0.50 — 3000.00 ohm/p 0.01 20.00 Zero seq. resistance for zone characteristic angle, Ph-G
RFltFwdPG 1.00 — 9000.00 ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-G, forward
X1RvPG 0.50 — 3000.00 ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-G, reverse
X0RvPG 0.50 — 9000.00 ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-G, reverse
RFltRevPG 1.00 — 9000.00 ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-G, reverse
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
217 Technical reference manual
6.2.6 Technical data Table 112: ZMCPDIS, ZMCAPDIS (21)Technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Number of zones Max 5 with selectable direction —
Minimum operate residual current, zone 1
(5-1000)% of IBase —
Minimum operate current, phase- phase and phase-ground
(10-1000)% of IBase —
Positive sequence reactance (0.10-3000.00) /phase 2.0% static accuracy 2.0 degrees static angular accuracy Conditions: Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Vn Current range: (0.5-30) x In Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees
Positive sequence resistance (0.10-1000.00) /phase
Zero sequence reactance (0.01-9000.00) /phase
Zero sequence resistance (0.01-3000.00) /phase
Fault resistance, phase-ground (0.10-9000.00) /loop
Fault resistance, phase-phase (0.10-3000.00) /loop
Dynamic overreach <5% at 85 degrees measured with CCVTs and 0.5 <30
—
Impedance zone timers (0.000-60.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
Operate time 24 ms typically —
Reset ratio 105% typically —
Reset time 30 ms typically —
6.3 Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with fixed angle FDPSPDIS (21)
6.3.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850
identification IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic
FDPSPDIS
Z
SYMBOL-DD V1 EN
21
6.3.2 Introduction The operation of transmission networks today is in many cases close to the stability limit. Due to environmental considerations, the rate of expansion and reinforcement of
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
218 Technical reference manual
the power system is reduced, for example, difficulties to get permission to build new power lines. The ability to accurately and reliably classify the different types of fault, so that single pole tripping and autoreclosing can be used plays an important role in this matter.Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with fixed angle FDPSPDIS is designed to accurately select the proper fault loop in the distance function dependent on the fault type.
The heavy load transfer that is common in many transmission networks may make fault resistance coverage difficult to achieve. Therefore, FDPSPDIS (21) has a built-in algorithm for load encroachment, which gives the possibility to enlarge the resistive setting of both the phase selection and the measuring zones without interfering with the load.
The extensive output signals from the phase selection gives also important information about faulty phase(s), which can be used for fault analysis.
A current-based phase selection is also included. The measuring elements continuously measure three phase currents and the residual current and, compare them with the set values.
6.3.3 Principle of operation The basic impedance algorithm for the operation of the phase selection measuring elements is the same as for the distance zone measuring function. Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic FDPSPDIS (21) includes six impedance measuring loops; three intended for phase-to-ground faults, and three intended for phase- to-phase faults as well as for three-phase faults.
The difference, compared to the distance zone measuring function, is in the combination of the measuring quantities (currents and voltages) for different types of faults.
A current-based phase selection is also included. The measuring elements continuously measure three phase currents and the residual current, and compare them with the set values. The current signals are filtered by Fourier’s recursive filter, and separate trip counter prevents too high overreaching of the measuring elements.
The characteristic is basically non-directional, but FDPSPDIS (21) uses information from the directional function to discriminate whether the fault is in forward or reverse direction.
The pickup condition PHSELZ is essentially based on the following criteria:
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
219 Technical reference manual
1. Residual current criteria, that is, separation of faults with and without ground connection
2. Regular quadrilateral impedance characteristic 3. Load encroachment characteristics is always active but can be switched off by
selecting a high setting.
The current pickup condition DLECND is based on the following criteria:
1. Residual current criteria 2. No quadrilateral impedance characteristic. The impedance reach outside the load
area is theoretically infinite. The practical reach, however, will be determined by the minimum operating current limits.
3. Load encroachment characteristic is always active, but can be switched off by selecting a high setting.
The DLECND output is non-directional. The directionality is determined by the distance zones directional function. There are outputs from FDPSPDIS (21) that indicate whether a pickup is in forward or reverse direction or non-directional, for example FWD_A, REV_A and NDIR_A.
These directional indications are based on the sector boundaries of the directional function and the impedance setting of FDPSPDIS (21) function. Their operating characteristics are illustrated in figure 101.
en05000668_ansi.vsd
R
X
R
X
R
X
Non-directional (ND) Forward (FWD) Reverse (REV)
60
60 60
60
ANSI05000668 V1 EN
Figure 101: Characteristics for non-directional, forward and reverse operation of Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic FDPSPDIS (21)
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
220 Technical reference manual
The setting of the load encroachment function may influence the total operating characteristic, (for more information, refer to section «Load encroachment»).
The input DIRCND contains binary coded information about the directional coming from the directional function . It shall be connected to the STDIR output on ZDRDIR, directional measuring block. This information is also transferred to the input DIRCND on the distance measuring zones, that is, the ZMQPDIS, distance measuring block.
The code built up for the directionality is as follows:
STDIR= FWD_A*1+FWD_B*2+FWD_C*4+FWD_AB*8+ +FWD_BC*16+FWD_CA*32+REV_A*64+REV_B*128+REV_C*256+ +REV_AB*512+REV_BC*1024+REV_CA*2048
If the binary information is 1 then it will be considered that we have pickup in forward direction in phase A. If the binary code is 3 then we have pickup in forward direction in phase A and B, binary code 192 means pickup in reverse direction in phase L1 and L2A and B etc.
The PHSELZ or DLECND output contains, in a similar way as DIRCND, binary coded information, in this case information about the condition for opening correct fault loop in the distance measuring element. It shall be connected to the PHSEL input on the ZMQPDIS, distance measuring block.
The code built up for release of the measuring fault loops is as follows:
PHSEL = AG*1+BG*2+CG*4+AB*8+BC*16+CA*32
6.3.3.1 Phase-to-ground fault
Index PHS in images and equations reference settings for Phase selection with load encroachment function FDPSPDIS (21).
( , ) ( , )
PHSn VA B C IA B C
Z =
EQUATION1554 V1 EN (Equation 24)
where:
n corresponds to the particular phase (n=1, 2 or 3)
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
221 Technical reference manual
The characteristic for FDPSPDIS (21) function at phase-to-ground fault is according to figure 102. The characteristic has a fixed angle for the resistive boundary in the first quadrant of 60.
The resistance RN and reactance XN are the impedance in the ground-return path defined according to equation 25 and equation 26.
0 1 3
R RRN — =
EQUATION1256 V1 EN (Equation 25)
0 1 3
X XXN — =
EQUATION1257 V1 EN (Equation 26)
en06000396_ansi.vsd
RFItFwdPG
X1+XN
R (Ohm/loop)
X (ohm/loop)
RFItRevPG
RFItRevPG
RFItFwdPG
Kr(X1+XN)
RFItRevPG
Kr(X1+XN)
X1+XN
RFItFwdPG
60 deg
60 deg
= 1
Kr tan(60 deg)
ANSI06000396 V1 EN
Figure 102: Characteristic of FDPSPDIS (21) for phase-to-ground fault (setting parameters in italic), ohm/loop domain (directional lines are drawn as «line-dot-dot-line»)
Besides this, the 3I0 residual current must fulfil the conditions according to equation 27 and equation 28.
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
222 Technical reference manual
03 I 0.5 IMinPUPG EQUATION2108-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 27)
0 0
3 _ 3 max
100
I Enable PG I Iph
EQUATION1812-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 28)
where:
IMinPUPG is the minimum operation current for forward zones
3I0Enable_PG is the setting for the minimum residual current needed to enable operation in the phase-to- ground fault loops (in %).
Iphmax is the maximum phase current in any of three phases.
6.3.3.2 Phase-to-phase fault
For a phase-to-phase fault, the measured impedance by FDPSPDIS (21) will be according to equation 29.
2 Vm Vn
ZPHS In
— =
— EQUATION1813-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 29)
Vm is the leading phase voltage, Vn the lagging phase voltage and In the phase current in the lagging phase n.
The operation characteristic is shown in figure 103.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
223 Technical reference manual
ANSI05000670-2-en.vsd
X1
R
X
0.5RFltFwdPP
KrX1
KrX1
X1
60 deg
60 deg
0.5RFltFwdPP0.5RFltRevPP
0.5RFltRevPP
0.5RFltRevPP
1 Kr
tan(60 deg) =
0.5RFltFwdPP
)/( phaseW
)/( phaseW
ANSI05000670 V2 EN
Figure 103: The operation characteristics for FDPSPDIS (21) at phase-to-phase fault (setting parameters in italic, directional lines drawn as «line-dot-dot- line»), ohm/phase domain
In the same way as the condition for phase-to-ground fault, there are current conditions that have to be fulfilled in order to release the phase-to-phase loop. Those are according to equation 30 or equation 31.
03I IMinPUPG<
EQUATION2109-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 30)
0 max 100
3 INBlockPP IphI <
EQUATION2110-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 31)
where:
IMinPUPG is the minimum operation current for ground measuring loops,
3I0BLK_PP is 3I0 limit for blocking phase-to-phase measuring loop and
Iphmax is maximal magnitude of the phase currents.
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
224 Technical reference manual
6.3.3.3 Three-phase faults
The operation conditions for three-phase faults are the same as for phase-to-phase fault, that is equation 29, equation 30 and equation 31 are used to release the operation of the function.
However, the reach is expanded by a factor 2/3 (approximately 1.1547) in all directions. At the same time the characteristic is rotated 30 degrees, counter-clockwise. The characteristic is shown in figure 104.
0.5RFltFwdPPK3
X1K3
90 deg
0.5RFltRevPPK3
30 deg
R (ohm/phase)
X (ohm/phase)
4 X1 3
2 RFltFwdPP 3
ANSI05000671-4-en.vsd
2 K3
3 =
ANSI05000671 V4 EN
Figure 104: The characteristic of FDPSPDIS (21) for three-phase fault (setting parameters in italic)
6.3.3.4 Load encroachment
Each of the six measuring loops has its own load encroachment characteristic based on the corresponding loop impedance. The load encroachment functionality is always active, but can be switched off by selecting a high setting.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
225 Technical reference manual
The outline of the characteristic is presented in figure 105. As illustrated, the resistive blinders are set individually in forward and reverse direction while the angle of the sector is the same in all four quadrants.
R
X
RLdFwd
RLdRev LdAngle
LdAngleLdAngle
LdAngle
en05000196_ansi.vsd ANSI05000196 V1 EN
Figure 105: Characteristic of load encroachment function
The influence of load encroachment function on the operation characteristic is dependent on the chosen operation mode of FDPSPDIS (21) function. When output signal PHSELZ is selected, the characteristic for FDPSPDIS (21) (and also zone measurement depending on settings) will be reduced by the load encroachment characteristic (see figure 106, left illustration).
When output signal DLECND is selected, the operation characteristic will be as the right illustration in figure 106. The reach will in this case be limit by the minimum operation current and the distance measuring zones.
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
226 Technical reference manual
R
X
PHSELZ DLECND
R
X
ANSI10000099-1-en.vsd ANSI10000099 V1 EN
Figure 106: Difference in operating characteristic depending on operation mode when load encroachment is activated
When FDPSPDIS (21) is set to operate together with a distance measuring zone the resultant operate characteristic could look like in figure 107. The figure shows a distance measuring zone operating in forward direction. Thus, the operating area is highlighted in black.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
227 Technical reference manual
R
X
Distance measuring zone
Directional line
Load encroachment characteristic
«Phase selection» «quadrilateral» zone
en05000673.vsd IEC05000673 V1 EN
Figure 107: Operating characteristic in forward direction when load encroachment is activated
Figure 107 is valid for phase-to-ground. During a three-phase fault, or load, when the quadrilateral phase-to-phase characteristic is subject to enlargement and rotation the operate area is transformed according to figure 108. Notice in particular what happens with the resistive blinders of the «phase selection» «quadrilateral» zone. Due to the 30- degree rotation, the angle of the blinder in quadrant one is now 90 degrees instead of the original 60 degrees. The blinder that is nominally located to quadrant four will at the same time tilt outwards and increase the resistive reach around the R-axis. Consequently, it will be more or less necessary to use the load encroachment characteristic in order to secure a margin to the load impedance.
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
228 Technical reference manual
R
X
Distance measuring zone
Phase selection Quadrilateral zone
IEC09000049-1-en.vsd
)/( phaseW
)/( phaseW
IEC09000049 V1 EN
Figure 108: Operating characteristic for FDPSPDIS (21) in forward direction for three-phase fault, ohm/phase domain
The result from rotation of the load characteristic at a fault between two phases is presented in fig 109. Since the load characteristic is based on the same measurement as the quadrilateral characteristic, it will rotate with the quadrilateral characteristic clockwise by 30 degrees when subject to a pure phase-to-phase fault. At the same time the characteristic will «shrink» by 2/3, from the full RLdFw and RLdRv reach, which is valid at load or three-phase fault.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
229 Technical reference manual
R
X
IEC08000437.vsd
IEC08000437 V1 EN
Figure 109: Rotation of load characteristic for a fault between two phases
There is a gain in selectivity by using the same measurement as for the quadrilateral characteristic since not all phase-to-phase loops will be fully affected by a fault between two phases. It should also provide better fault resistive coverage in quadrant one. The relative loss of fault resistive coverage in quadrant four should not be a problem even for applications on series compensated lines.
6.3.3.5 Minimum operate currents
The operation of the Phase selection with load encroachment function (FDPSPDIS, 21) is blocked if the magnitude of input currents falls below certain threshold values.
The phase-to-ground loop n is blocked if In<IMinPUPG, where In is the RMS value of the current in phase n (A or B or C).
The phase-to-phase loop mn is blocked if (2In<IMinPUPP).
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
230 Technical reference manual
6.3.3.6 Simplified logic diagrams
Figure 110 presents schematically the creation of the phase-to-phase and phase-to- ground operating conditions. Consider only the corresponding part of measuring and logic circuits, when only a phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase measurement is available within the IED.
ANSI09000149-2-en.vsd
AND
AND
AND
Bool to integer
DLECND
STPG
STPP
IRELPG
IRELPP
BLOCK AND
Load encroachment block
0 20ms0
10ms
0 15ms
0 15ms
03I IMinPUPG<
0 max 3 0 _
3 100
I BLK PP I Iph<
03 0.5I IMinPUPG
0 3 0 _
3 100
max I Enable PG
I Iph
ANSI09000149 V2 EN
Figure 110: Phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground operating conditions (residual current criteria)
A special attention is paid to correct phase selection at evolving faults. A DLECND output signal is created as a combination of the load encroachment characteristic and current criteria, refer to figure 110. This signal can be configured to STCND functional input signals of the distance protection zone and this way influence the operation of the phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground zone measuring elements and their phase related pickup and tripping signals.
Figure 111 presents schematically the composition of non-directional phase selective signals NDIR_A (B or C). Internal signals ZMn and ZMmn (m and n change between A, B and C according to the phase) represent the fulfilled operating criteria for each separate loop measuring element, that is, within the characteristic.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
231 Technical reference manual
ANSI00000545-3-en.vsd
ZMA
ZMB
AND
AND
ANDZMC
IRELPG
AND
AND
AND
ZMAB
ZMBC3
ZMCA
IRELPP
INDIR_A INDIR_B INDIR_3
OR
OR
OR
OR
INDIR_CA
INDIR_BC
INDIR_AB
PHSEL_G
PHSEL_A
PHSEL_B
PHSEL_C
OR PHSEL_PP
15 ms 0
15 ms 0
15 ms 0
15 ms 0
15 ms 0
ANSI00000545 V3 EN
Figure 111: Composition on non-directional phase selection signals
Composition of the directional (forward and reverse) phase selective signals is presented schematically in figure 113 and figure 112. The directional criteria appears as a condition for the correct phase selection in order to secure a high phase selectivity for simultaneous and evolving faults on lines within the complex network configurations. Internal signals DFWn and DFWnm present the corresponding directional signals for measuring loops with phases Ln and Lm. Designation FW (figure 113) represents the forward direction as well as the designation RV (figure 112) represents the reverse direction. All directional signals are derived within the corresponding digital signal processor.
Figure 112 presents additionally a composition of a PHSELZ output signal, which is created on the basis of impedance measuring conditions. This signal can be configured to PHSEL functional input signals of the distance protection zone and this way influence the operation of the phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground zone measuring elements and their phase related pickup and tripping signals.
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
232 Technical reference manual
ANSI00000546-2-en.vsd
INDIR_A
DRV_A AND
AND INDIR_AB
DRV_AB
AND INDIR_CA
DRV_CA
AND INDIR_B
DRV_B
AND INDIR_AB
DRV_BC AND INDIR_BC
AND INDIR_C
DRV_C
AND INDIR_BC
AND INDIR_CA
OR
OR
OR
OR
t 15 ms
t 15 ms
t 15 ms
t
15 ms
REV_A
REV_G
REV_B
REV_C
INDIR_A INDIR_B INDIR_C INDIR_AB INDIR_BC INDIR_CA
Bool to integer
PHSELZ
OR t
15 ms REV_PP
ANSI00000546 V2 EN
Figure 112: Composition of phase selection signals for reverse direction
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
233 Technical reference manual
ANSI05000201-3-en.vsd
INDIR_A
DFW_A AND
AND INDIR_AB
DFW_AB
AND INDIR_CA
DFW_CA
AND INDIR_B
DFW_B
AND INDIR_AB
DFW_BC AND INDIR_BC
AND INDIR_C
DFW_C
AND INDIR_BC
AND INDIR_CA
OR
OR
OR
OR
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
OR
OR
FWD_IPH
FWD_A
FWD_G
FWD_B
FWD_2PH
FWD_C
FWD_3PH
OR FWD_PP
15 ms 0
15 ms 0
15 ms 0
15 ms 0
15 ms 0
15 ms 0
15 ms 0
15 ms 0
0 15 ms
0 15 ms
ANSI05000201 V3 EN
Figure 113: Composition of phase selection signals for forward direction
Figure 114 presents the composition of output signals TRIP and PICKUP, where internal signals NDIR_PP, FWD_PP and REV_PP are the equivalent to internal signals NDIR_G, FWD_G and REV_G, but for the phase-to-phase loops.
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
234 Technical reference manual
ANSI08000441-2-en.vsd
AND
AND
OR t tPP
t tPG
TRIP
TimerPP=Enable AND
TimerPG=Enable AND
OR
FWD_G
REV_G
NDIR_G
FWD_PP
REV_PP
NDIR_PP
OR
OR
OR RI
ANSI08000441 V2 EN
Figure 114: TRIP and PICKUP signal logic
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
235 Technical reference manual
6.3.4 Function block FDPSPDIS (21)
I3P* V3P* BLOCK DIRCND
TRIP BFI
FWD_A FWD_B FWD_C FWD_G REV_A REV_B REV_C REV_G NDIR_A NDIR_B NDIR_C NDIR_G
FWD_1PH FWD_2PH FWD_3PH PHG_FLT
PHPH_FLT PHSELZ DLECND
ANSI10000047-1-en.vsd ANSI10000047 V1 EN
Figure 115: FDPSPDIS (21) function block
6.3.5 Input and output signals Table 113: FDPSPDIS (21) Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Group signal for current input
V3P GROUP SIGNAL
— Group signal for voltage input
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
DIRCND INTEGER 0 External directional condition
Table 114: FDPSPDIS (21) Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip by pilot communication scheme logic
BFI BOOLEAN Start in any phase or loop
FWD_A BOOLEAN Fault detected in phaseA — forward direction
FWD_B BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase B — forward direction
FWD_C BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase C — forward direction
FWD_G BOOLEAN Ground fault detected in forward direction
REV_A BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase A- reverse direction
Table continues on next page
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
236 Technical reference manual
Name Type Description REV_B BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase B — reverse direction
REV_C BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase C — reverse direction
REV_G BOOLEAN Ground fault detected in reverse direction
NDIR_A BOOLEAN Non directional fault detected in Phase A
NDIR_B BOOLEAN Non directional fault detected in Phase B
NDIR_C BOOLEAN Non directional fault detected in Phase C
NDIR_G BOOLEAN Non directional phase-to-ground fault detected
FWD_1PH BOOLEAN Single phase-to-ground fault in forward direction
FWD_2PH BOOLEAN Phase-to-phase fault in forward direction
FWD_3PH BOOLEAN Three phase fault in forward direction
PHG_FLT BOOLEAN Release condition to enable phase-ground measuring elements
PHPH_FLT BOOLEAN Release condition to enable phase-phase measuring elements
PHSELZ INTEGER Start condition (Z< with LE and 3I0 E/F detection)
DLECND INTEGER Start condition (only LE and 3I0 E/F detection)
6.3.6 Setting parameters Table 115: FDPSPDIS (21) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description IBase 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Base current, i.e. rated current
VBase 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.01 400.00 Base voltage, i.e. rated voltage
3I0BLK_PP 10 — 100 %IPh 1 40 3I0 limit for disabling phase-to-phase measuring loops
3I0Enable_PG 10 — 100 %IPh 1 20 3I0 pickup for releasing phase-to-ground measuring loops
RLdFwd 1.00 — 3000.00 ohm/p 0.01 80.00 Forward resistive reach for the load impedance area
RldRev 1.00 — 3000.00 ohm/p 0.01 80.00 Reverse resistive reach for the load impedance area
LdAngle 5 — 70 Deg 1 30 Load angle determining the load impedance area
X1 0.50 — 3000.00 ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach
X0 0.50 — 9000.00 ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero sequence reactance reach
RFltFwdPP 0.50 — 3000.00 ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, forward
RFltRevPP 0.50 — 3000.00 ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, reverse
RFltFwdPG 1.00 — 9000.00 ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-G, forward
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
237 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description RFltRevPG 1.00 — 9000.00 ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-G, reverse
IMinPUPP 5 — 500 %IB 1 10 Minimum pickup delta current (2 x current of lagging phase) for Phase-to-phase loops
IMinPUPG 5 — 500 %IB 1 5 Minimum pickup phase current for Phase-to- ground loops
Table 116: FDPSPDIS (21) Group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description OperationZ< Disabled
Enabled — — Enabled Operation of impedance based measurement
OperationI> Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Operation of current based measurement
IPh> 10 — 2500 %IB 1 120 Start value for phase over-current element
Pickup_N 10 — 2500 %IB 1 20 Start value for trip from 3I0 over-current element
TimerPP Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Operation mode Disable/Enable of Zone timer, Ph-Ph
tPP 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 3.000 Time delay to trip, Ph-Ph
TimerPE Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Operation mode Disable/ Enable of Zone timer, Ph-G
tPG 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 3.000 Time delay to trip, Ph-E
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
238 Technical reference manual
6.3.7 Technical data Table 117: FDPSPDIS (21) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Minimum operate current (5-500)% of IBase —
Reactive reach, positive sequence
(0.503000.00) /phase 2.0% static accuracy 2.0 degrees static angular accuracy Conditions: Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Vn Current range: (0.5-30) x In Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees
Resistive reach, positive sequence
(0.101000.00) /phase
Reactive reach, zero sequence (0.509000.00) /phase
Resistive reach, zero sequence (0.503000.00) /phase
Fault resistance, phase-to- ground faults, forward and reverse
(1.009000.00) /loop
Fault resistance, phase-to- phase faults, forward and reverse
(0.503000.00) /loop
Load encroachment criteria: Load resistance, forward and reverse Safety load impedance angle
(1.003000.00) /phase (5-70) degrees
Reset ratio 105% typically —
6.4 Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic ZMHPDIS (21)
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Full-scheme distance protection, mho characteristic
ZMHPDIS
S00346 V1 EN
21
6.4.1 Introduction The numerical mho line distance protection is a, up to five zone full scheme protection for back-up detection of short circuit and ground faults. The full scheme technique provides back-up protection of power lines with high sensitivity and low requirement on remote end communication. The five zones have fully independent measuring and settings, which gives high flexibility for all types of lines.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
239 Technical reference manual
The IED can be used up to the highest voltage levels. It is suitable for the protection of heavily loaded lines and multi-terminal lines where the requirement for tripping is one-, two- and/or three-pole.
The independent measurement of impedance for each fault loop together with a sensitive and reliable built in phase selection makes the function suitable in applications with single phase autoreclosing.
Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents overreaching at phase-to- ground faults on heavily loaded power lines, see figure 116.
en07000117.vsd
jX
Operation area Operation area
R
Operation area
No operation area No operation area
IEC07000117 V1 EN
Figure 116: Load encroachment influence on the offset mho characteristic
The distance protection zones can operate, independent of each other, in directional (forward or reverse) or non-directional mode (offset). This makes them suitable, together with different communication schemes, for the protection of power lines and cables in complex network configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal lines and so on.
The possibility to use the phase-to-ground quadrilateral impedance characteristic together with the mho characteristic increases the possibility to overcome eventual lack of sensitivity of the mho element due to the shaping of the curve at remote end faults.
The integrated control and monitoring functions offer effective solutions for operating and monitoring all types of transmission and sub-transmission lines.
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
240 Technical reference manual
6.4.2 Principle of operation
6.4.2.1 Full scheme measurement
The execution of the different fault loops within the IED are of full scheme type, which means that each fault loop for phase-to-ground faults and phase-to-phase faults are executed in parallel.
The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compared to switched schemes which mostly uses a phase selector element to select correct voltages and current depending on fault type. So each distance protection zone performs like one independent distance protection function with six measuring elements.
6.4.2.2 Impedance characteristic
The distance function consists of five instances. Each instance can be selected to be either forward or reverse with positive sequence polarized mho characteristic alternatively self polarized offset mho characteristics with reverse offset. The operating characteristic is in accordance to figure 117 where zone 5 is selected offset mho.
Zs=0
R
jx
Mho, zone4
Mho, zone3
Mho, zone2
Mho, zone1
Offset mho, zone5
IEC09000143_2_en.vsd
X
R
Zs=Z1
Zs=2Z1
IEC09000143 V2 EN
Figure 117: Mho, offset mho characteristic and the source impedance influence on the mho characteristic
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
241 Technical reference manual
The mho characteristic has a dynamic expansion due to the source impedance. Instead of crossing the origin as for the mho to the left of figure 117, which is only valid where the source impedance is zero, the crossing point is moved to the coordinates of the negative source impedance given an expansion of the circle shown to the right of figure 117.
The polarization quantities used for the mho circle are 100% memorized positive sequence voltages. This will give a somewhat less dynamic expansion of the mho circle during faults. However, if the source impedance is high, the dynamic expansion of the mho circle might lower the security of the function too much with high loading and mild power swing conditions.
The mho distance element has a load encroachment function which cuts off a section of the characteristic when enabled. The function is enabled by setting the setting parameter LoadEnchMode to Enabled. Enabling of the load encroachment function increases the possibility to detect high resistive faults without interfering with the load impedance. The algorithm for the load encroachment is located in the Faulty phase identification with load encroachment for mho function FMPSPDIS (21), where also the relevant settings can be found. Information about the load encroachment from FMPSPDIS (21) to the zone measurement is given in binary format to the input signal LDCND.
6.4.2.3 Basic operation characteristics
Each impedance zone can be switched OnEnabled and OffDisabled by the setting parameter Operation.
Each zone can also be set to Non-directional, Forward or Reverse by setting the parameter DirModeSel.
The operation for phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase fault can be individually switched Enabled and Disabled by the setting parameter OpModePG and OpModePP.
For critical applications such as for lines with high SIRs as well as CVTs, it is possible to improve the security by setting the parameter ReachMode to Underreach. In this mode the reach for faults close to the zone reach is reduced by 20% and the filtering is also introduced to increase the accuracy in the measuring. If the ReachMode is set to Overreach no reduction of the reach is introduced and no extra filtering introduced. The latter setting is recommended for overreaching pilot zone, zone 2 or zone 3 elements and reverse zone where overreaching on transients is not a major issue either because of less likelihood of overreach with higher settings or the fact that these elements do not initiate tripping unconditionally.
The offset Mho characteristic can be set in Non-directional, Forward or Reverse by the setting parameter OffsetMhoDir. When Forward or Reverse is selected a directional
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
242 Technical reference manual
line is introduced. Information about the directional line is given from the directional element and given to the measuring element as binary coded signal to the input DIRCND.
The zone reach for phase-to-ground fault and phase-to-phase fault is set individually in polar coordinates.
The impedance is set by the parameters ZPG and ZPP and the corresponding angles by the parameters ZAngPG and ZAngPP.
Compensation for ground-return path for faults involving ground is done by setting the parameter KNMag and KNAng where KNMag is the magnitude of the ground-return path and KNAng is the difference of angles between KNMag and ZPG.
Z0-Z1 3 Z1
KNMag =
EQUATION1579 V1 EN (Equation 32)
( )0 1
3 1
Z Z KNAng ang
Z
— =
EQUATION1807-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 33)
where
Z0 is the complex zero sequence impedance of the line in /phase
Z1 is the complex positive sequence impedance of the line in /phase
The phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase measuring loops can be time delayed individually by setting the parameter tPG and tPP respectively. To release the time delay, the operation mode for the timers, OpModetPG and OpModetPP, has to be set to On. This is also the case for instantaneous operation.
The operate timers triggering input can be selected by setting the parameter ZnTimerSel. The parameter ZnTimerSel can be set to:
Timers seperated: Phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase timers are triggered by the respective measuring loop start signals.
Timers linked: Start of any of the phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase loops will trigger both the phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase timers.
Internal start: Phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase timers are triggered by the INTRNST input.
Start from PhSel: The phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase timers are triggered by the DIRCND, STCND, LDCND inputs. Each of the three inputs consist binary
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
243 Technical reference manual
status information related to the six measuring loops. Hence if any of the measuring loop status is High, then the timers will be triggered.
External start: Phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase timers are triggered by the EXTNST input.
The function can be blocked in the following ways:
activating of input BLOCK blocks the whole function activating of the input BLKZ (fuse failure) blocks all output signals activating of the input BLKZMTD blocks the delta based algorithm activating of the input BLKHSIR blocks the high speed part of the algorithm for
high SIR values activating of the input BLKTRIP blocks all output signals activating the input BLKPG blocks the phase-to-ground fault loop outputs activating the input BLKPP blocks the phase-to-phase fault loop outputs
The activation of input signal BLKZ can be made by external fuse failure function or from the loss of voltage check in the Mho supervision logic (ZSMGAPC). In both cases the output BLKZ in the Mho supervision logic shall be connected to the input BLKZ in the Mho distance function block (ZMHPDIS, 21)
The input signal BLKZMTD is activated during some ms after fault has been detected by ZSMGAPC to avoid unwanted operations due to transients. It shall be connected to the BLKZMTD output signal of ZSMGAPC function.
At SIR values >10, the use of electronic CVT might cause overreach due to the built-in resonance circuit in the CVT, which reduce the secondary voltage for a while. The input BLKHSIR shall be connected to the output signal HSIR on ZSMGAPC for increasing of the filtering and high SIR values. This is valid only when permissive underreach scheme is selected by setting ReachMode=Underreach.
6.4.2.4 Theory of operation
The mho algorithm is based on the phase comparison of a operating phasor and a polarizing phasor. When the operating phasor leads the reference polarizing phasor by more than 90 degrees, the function operates and gives a trip output.
Phase-to-phase fault
Mho The plain mho circle has the characteristic as in figure 118. The condition for deriving the angle is according to equation 34.
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
244 Technical reference manual
( ) ( )AB AB polang V I ZPP ang Vb = — —
EQUATION1789-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 34)
where
ABV EQUATION1790-ANSI V1 EN
is the voltage vector difference between phases A and B
ABI EQUATION1791-ANSI V1 EN
is the current vector difference between phases A and B
ZPP is the positive sequence impedance setting for phase-to-phase fault
Vpol is the polarizing voltage
The polarized voltage consists of 100% memorized positive sequence voltage (VAB for phase A to B fault). The memorized voltage will prevent collapse of the mho circle for close in faults.
Operation occurs if 90270
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
245 Technical reference manual
IABX
IABR
—
en07000109_ansi.vsd
comp ABV =V ABI ZPP
polV ABV
ABI ZPP
ANSI07000109 V1 EN
Figure 118: Simplified mho characteristic and vector diagram for phase A-to-B fault
Offset Mho The characteristic for offset mho is a circle where two points on the circle are the setting parameters ZPP and ZRevPP. The vector ZPP in the impedance plane has the settable angle AngZPP and the angle for ZRevPP is AngZPP+180.
The condition for operation at phase-to-phase fault is that the angle between the two compensated voltages Vcomp1 and Vcomp2 is greater than or equal to 90 (figure 119). The angle will be 90 for fault location on the boundary of the circle.
The angle for A-to-B fault can be defined according to equation 35.
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
246 Technical reference manual
AB
AB
-I ZPP arg
-(-I ZRevPP) V
V
b =
EQUATION1792-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 35)
where
V EQUATION1801 V1 EN
is the VAB voltage
ZRevPP is the positive sequence impedance setting for phase-to-phase fault in reverse direction
ZPPIAB ABcomp1 V=V
IABjX
IABR
— ZPPIAB
vPPReZABI
V
VVcomp2 =
—
=IFZF =VAB
en07000110_ansi.vsd ANSI07000110 V1 EN
Figure 119: Simplified offset mho characteristic and voltage vectors for phase A-to- B fault.
Operation occurs if 90270.
Offset mho, forward direction When forward direction has been selected for the offset mho, an extra criteria beside the one for offset mho (90<<270) is introduced, that is the angle between the voltage and the current must lie between the blinders in second quadrant and fourth quadrant. See figure 120. Operation occurs if 90270 and ArgDirArgNegRes.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
247 Technical reference manual
where
ArgDir is the setting parameter for directional line in fourth quadrant in the directional element, ZDMRDIR (21D).
ArgNegRes is the setting parameter for directional line in second quadrant in the directional element, ZDMRDIR (21D).
is calculated according to equation 35
The directional information is brought to the mho distance measurement from the mho directional element as binary coded information to the input DIRCND. See Directional impedance element for mho characteristic (ZDMRDIR ,21D) for information about the mho directional element.
IABjX
VAB
f
ArgDir
IAB
ArgNegRes
ZPP
en07000111_ansi
ANSI07000111 V1 EN
Figure 120: Simplified offset mho characteristic in forward direction for phase A-to- B fault
Offset mho, reverse direction The operation area for offset mho in reverse direction is according to figure 121. The operation area in second quadrant is ArgNegRes+180.
Operation occurs if 90270 and 180 — ArgDir ArgNegRes + 180
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
248 Technical reference manual
The is derived according to equation 35 for the mho circle and is the angle between the voltage and current.
X
RArgDir
ArgNegRes
ZPP
ZRevPP
VAB
IAB
en06000469_ansi.ep
ANSI06000469 V1 EN
Figure 121: Operation characteristic for reverse phase A-to-B fault
Phase-to-ground fault
Mho The measuring of ground faults uses ground-return compensation applied in a conventional way. The compensation voltage is derived by considering the influence from the ground-return path.
For a ground fault in phase A, the compensation voltage Vcomp can be derived, as shown in figure 122.
A looppolVcomp V I Z= — EQUATION1793-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 36)
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
249 Technical reference manual
where
Vpol is the polarizing voltage (memorized VA for Phase A-to- ground fault)
Zloop is the loop impedance, which in general terms can be expressed as
( )1 1Z +ZN 1Z KN= +
EQUATION1799 V1 EN (Equation 37)
where
Z1 is the positive sequence impedance of the line (Ohm/phase)
KN is the zero-sequence compensator factor
The angle between the Vcomp and the polarize voltage Vpol for a A-to-ground fault is
( )AAarg V I IN KN ZPE arg(Vpol)b = — + — EQUATION1592 V1 EN (Equation 38)
where
VA is the phase voltage in faulty phase A
IA is the phase current in faulty phase A
IA is the phase current in faulty phase A
IN is the zero-sequence current in faulty phase A (3I0)
KN EQUATION1593 V1 EN
Z0-Z1 3 Z1
EQUATION1594 V1 EN
the setting parameter for the zero sequence compensation consisting of the magnitude KN and the angle KNAng.
Vpol is the 100% of positive sequence memorized voltage VA
Vpol is the 100% of positive sequence memorized voltage VA
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
250 Technical reference manual
compV
IAX
IAR
IAZPE
IAZN
loopA ZI
f
Vpol
IA (Ref)
en06000472_ansi.vsd ANSI06000472 V1 EN
Figure 122: Simplified offset mho characteristic and vector diagram for phase A-to- ground fault
Operation occurs if 90270.
Offset mho The characteristic for offset mho at ground fault is a circle containing the two vectors from the origin ZPE and ZRevPE where ZPE and ZrevPE are the setting reach for the positive sequence impedance in forward respective reverse direction. The vector ZPE in the impedance plane has the settable angle AngZPE and the angle for ZRevPP is AngZPE+180.
The condition for operation at phase-to-ground fault is that the angle between the two compensated voltages Vcomp1 and Vcomp2 is greater or equal to 90 see figure 123. The angle will be 90 for fault location on the boundary of the circle.
The angle for A-to-ground fault can be defined as
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
251 Technical reference manual
ZPEIA ZPEAI-V=V Acomp1
IAB jX
IAB R
vPeReZI- A
VA
)A= ZRevPE(-I-A2comp VV
en 06000465_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000465 V1 EN
Figure 123: Simplified offset mho characteristic and voltage vector for phase A-to- ground fault
Operation occurs if 90270.
Offset mho, forward direction In the same way as for phase-to-phase fault, selection of forward direction of offset mho will introduce an extra criterion for operation. Beside the basic criteria for offset mho according to equation 41 and 90270, also the criteria that the angle between the voltage and the current must lie between the blinders in second and fourth quadrant. See figure 124. Operation occurs if 90270 and ArgDirArgNegRes.
where
ArgDir is the setting parameter for directional line in fourth quadrant in the directional element, ZDMRDIR (21D).
ArgNegRes is the setting parameter for directional line in second quadrant in the directional element, ZDMRDIR (21D).
is calculated according to equation 41
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
252 Technical reference manual
IAjX
VA
f
ArgDir
IA
ArgNegRes
IAR
en 06000466_ansi.vsd ANSI06000466 V1 EN
Figure 124: Simplified characteristic for offset mho in forward direction for A-to- ground fault
Offset mho, reverse direction In the same way as for offset in forward direction, the selection of offset mho in reverse direction will introduce an extra criterion for operation compare to the normal offset mho. The extra is that the angle between the fault voltage and the fault current shall lie between the blinders in second and fourth quadrant. The operation area in second quadrant is limited by the blinder defined as 180 —ArgDir and in fourth quadrant ArgNegRes+180, see figure 125.
The conditions for operation of offset mho in reverse direction for A-to-ground fault is 90270 and 180-ArgdirArgNegRes+180.
The is derived according to equation 41 for the offset mho circle and is the angle between the voltage and current.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
253 Technical reference manual
X
RArgDir
ArgNegRes
ZPE
ZRevPE
VA
IA
en06000470_ansi.ep
ANSI06000470 V1 EN
Figure 125: Simplified characteristic for offset mho in reverse direction for A-to- ground fault
6.4.2.5 Simplified logic diagrams
Distance protection zones The design of the distance protection zones are presented for all measuring loops: phase- to-ground as well as phase-to-phase.
Phase-to-ground related signals are designated by AG, BG and CG. The phase-to- phase signals are designated by AB, BC and CA.
Fulfillment of two different measuring conditions is necessary to obtain the one logical signal for each separate measuring loop:
Zone measuring condition, which follows the operating equations described above. Group functional input signal (PHSEL), as presented in figure 126.
One type of function block, ZMHPDIS (21) are used in the IED for zone 1 — 5.
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
254 Technical reference manual
The PHSEL input signal represents a connection of six different integer values from Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic function FMPSPDIS (21) within the IED, which are converted within the zone measuring function into corresponding boolean expressions for each condition separately. Input signal PHSEL is connected to FMPSPDIS (21) function output signal PHSCND.
The input signal DIRCND is used to give condition for directionality for the distance measuring zones. The signal contains binary coded information for both forward and reverse direction. The zone measurement function filters out the relevant signals depending on the setting of the parameter DirMode. Input signal DIRCND must be configured to the STDIRCND output signal on ZDMRDIR (21D) function.
OffsetMhoDir= Non-directional
DirMode=Offset
OR
LDCND
LoadEnchMode= On/Off
AND
PHSEL
ANSI11000216-1-en.vsd
DIRCND
OffsetMhoDir= Forward/Reverse DirMode= Forward/Reverse
T F
BLKZ
BLOCK
Release
ANDAND
AND
AND
AND
T FTrue
ANSI11000216 V1 EN
Figure 126: Simplified logic for release start signal
When load encroachment mode is switched on (LoadEnchMode=On) then start signal PHSEL is also checked against LDCND signal.
Results of the directional measurement enter the logic circuits, when the zone operates in directional (forward or reverse) mode, as shown in figure 126.
Composition of the phase pickup signals is presented in figure 81.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
255 Technical reference manual
ANSI11000217-1-en.vsd
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
PHG_FLT
OR
Release OR
OR
OR
OR
PU_A
PU_B
PU_C
PHPH_FLT
PICKUPOR
PU_AG
PU_BG
PU_CG
PU_AB
PU_BC
PU_CA
ANSI11000217 V1 EN
Figure 127: Composition of pickup signals
Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolically presented in figure 83.
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
256 Technical reference manual
ANSI11000218-1-en.vsd
15ms
OR
t tPP
BLKTRIP t
AND
AND
AND
PU_A
PU_B
PU_C
TRIP
TR_A
TR_B
TR_C
AND
Timer tPP=On
PHPH_FLT AND
Timer tPG=On
PHG_FLT AND t
tPG
ANSI11000218 V1 EN
Figure 128: Tripping logic for the distance protection zone
6.4.3 Function block ZMHPDIS (21)
I3P* V3P* CURR_INP* VOLT_INP* POL_VOLT* BLOCK BLKZ BLKZMTD BLKHSIR BLKTRIP BLKPG BLKPP EXTNST INTRNST DIRCND PHSEL* LDCND
TRIP TR_A TR_B TR_C TRPG TRPP
PICKUP PU_A PU_B PU_C
PHG_FLT PHPH_FLT PU_TIMER
ANSI06000423-2-en.vsd ANSI06000423 V2 EN
Figure 129: ZMHPDIS (21) function block
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
257 Technical reference manual
6.4.4 Input and output signals Table 118: ZMHPDIS (21) Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Connection for current sample signals
V3P GROUP SIGNAL
— Connection for voltage sample signals
CURR_INP GROUP SIGNAL
— Connection for current signals
VOLT_INP GROUP SIGNAL
— Connection for voltage signals
POL_VOLT GROUP SIGNAL
— Connection for polarizing voltage
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKZ BOOLEAN 0 Block due to fuse failure
BLKZMTD BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for blocking of time domaine function
BLKHSIR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks time domain function at high SIR
BLKTRIP BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all operate output signals
BLKPG BOOLEAN 0 Blocks phase-to-ground operation
BLKPP BOOLEAN 0 Blocks phase-to-phase operation
DIRCND INTEGER 0 External directional condition
PHSEL INTEGER 0 Faulted phase loop selection enable from phase selector
LDCND INTEGER 0 External load condition (loop enabler)
Table 119: ZMHPDIS (21) Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip General
TR_A BOOLEAN Trip phase A
TR_B BOOLEAN Trip phase B
TR_C BOOLEAN Trip phase C
TRPG BOOLEAN Trip phase-to-ground
TRPP BOOLEAN Trip phase-to-phase
PICKUP BOOLEAN Pickup General
PU_A BOOLEAN Pickup phase A
PU_B BOOLEAN Pickup phase B
PU_C BOOLEAN Pickup phase C
PHG_FLT BOOLEAN Pickup phase-to-ground
PHPH_FLT BOOLEAN Pickup phase-to-phase
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
258 Technical reference manual
6.4.5 Setting parameters Table 120: ZMHPDIS (21) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Enabled Operation Enable/Disable
IBase 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Base current
VBase 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Base voltage
DirMode Disabled Offset Forward Reverse
— — Forward Direction mode
LoadEncMode Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Load encroachment mode Off/On
ReachMode Overreach Underreach
— — Overreach Reach mode Over/Underreach
OpModePG Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Operation mode Disable/Enable of Phase- Ground loops
ZPG 0.005 — 3000.000 ohm/p 0.001 30.000 Positive sequence impedance setting for Phase-Ground loop
ZAngPG 10 — 90 Deg 1 80 Angle for positive sequence line impedance for Phase-Ground loop
KN 0.00 — 3.00 — 0.01 0.80 Magnitud of ground return compensation factor KN
KNAng -180 — 180 Deg 1 -15 Angle for ground return compensation factor KN
ZRevPG 0.005 — 3000.000 ohm/p 0.001 30.000 Reverse reach of the phase to ground loop(magnitude)
tPG 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Delay time for operation of phase to ground elements
IMinPUPG 10 — 30 %IB 1 20 Minimum operation phase to ground current
OpModePP Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Operation mode Disable/Enable of Phase- Phase loops
ZPP 0.005 — 3000.000 ohm/p 0.001 30.000 Impedance setting reach for phase to phase elements
ZAngPP 10 — 90 Deg 1 85 Angle for positive sequence line impedance for Phase-Phase elements
ZRevPP 0.005 — 3000.000 ohm/p 0.001 30.000 Reverse reach of the phase to phase loop(magnitude)
tPP 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Delay time for operation of phase to phase
IMinPUPP 10 — 30 %IB 1 20 Minimum operation phase to phase current
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
259 Technical reference manual
Table 121: ZMHPDIS (21) Group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description OffsetMhoDir Non-directional
Forward Reverse
— — Non-directional Direction mode for offset mho
OpModetPG Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Operation mode Disable/ Enable of Zone timer, Ph-G
OpModetPP Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer, Ph-ph
6.4.6 Technical data Table 122: ZMHPDIS (21) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Number of zones with selectable directions
Max 5 with selectable direction —
Minimum operate current (1030)% of IBase —
Positive sequence impedance, phase-to-ground loop
(0.0053000.000) W/phase 2.0% static accuracy Conditions: Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Vn Current range: (0.5-30) x In Angle: 85 degrees
Positive sequence impedance angle, phase-to-ground loop
(1090) degrees
Reverse reach, phase-to-ground loop (Magnitude)
(0.0053000.000) /phase
Magnitude of ground return compensation factor KN
(0.003.00)
Angle for ground compensation factor KN
(-180180) degrees
Dynamic overreach <5% at 85 degrees measured with CVTs and 0.5 <30
—
Timers (0.000-60.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
Operate time 20 ms typically (with static outputs)
—
Reset ratio 105% typically —
Reset time 30 ms typically —
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
260 Technical reference manual
6.5 Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for earth faults ZMMPDIS (21), ZMMAPDIS (21)
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Fullscheme distance protection, quadrilateral for earth faults (zone 1)
ZMMPDIS
S00346 V1 EN
21
Fullscheme distance protection, quadrilateral for earth faults (zone 2-5)
ZMMAPDIS
S00346 V1 EN
21
6.5.1 Introduction The line distance protection is a , up to five zone protection with three fault loops for phase-to-ground fault for each of the independent zones. Individual settings for each zone resistive and reactive reach give flexibility for use on overhead lines and cables of different types and lengths.
The Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for earth faults functions ZMMDPIS (21) and ZMMAPDIS (21) have functionality for load encroachment, which increases the possibility to detect high resistive faults on heavily loaded lines , see figure 73.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
261 Technical reference manual
en05000034.vsd
R
X
Forward operation
Reverse operation
IEC05000034 V1 EN
Figure 130: Typical quadrilateral distance protection zone with Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle function FRPSPDIS (21) activated
The independent measurement of impedance for each fault loop together with a sensitive and reliable built in phase selection makes the function suitable in applications with single phase auto-reclosing.
Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents overreaching of zone1 at load exporting end at phase to ground faults on heavily loaded power lines.
The distance protection zones can operate, independent of each other, in directional (forward or reverse) or non-directional mode. This makes them suitable, together with different communication schemes, for the protection of power lines and cables in complex network configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal lines.
6.5.2 Principle of operation
6.5.2.1 Full scheme measurement
The different fault loops within the IED are operating in parallel in the same principle as a full scheme measurement.
Figure 131 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for the basic five, impedance-measuring zones l.
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
262 Technical reference manual
en07000080_ansi.vsd
A-G B-G C-G
A-G B-G C-G
A-G B-G C-G
A-G B-G C-G
A-G B-G C-G
Zone 1
Zone 2
Zone 3
Zone 4
Zone 5
ANSI07000080 V1 EN
Figure 131: The different measuring loops at line-ground fault and phase-phase fault.
6.5.2.2 Impedance characteristic
The distance measuring zone include three impedance measuring loops; one fault loop for each phase.
The distance measuring zone will essentially operate according to the non-directional impedance characteristics presented in figure 132. The characteristic is illustrated with the full loop reach.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
263 Technical reference manual
RFPG
X1+Xn
X1+Xn
RFPGR1+RnRFPG
RFPG
RFPG
RFPG
R
X
R1+Rn
(Ohm/loop)
ANSI05000661-3-en.vsd
R0-R1 Rn
3 =
X0-X1 Xn
3 =
j n j n
(Ohm/loop)
ANSI05000661 V3 EN
Figure 132: Characteristic for the phase-to-ground measuring loops, ohm/loop domain.
The fault loop reach may also be presented as in figure 133.
VA R1 + j X1IA
RFPG Phase-to-ground fault in phase A
(Arc + tower resistance)
0 (R0-R1)/3 + j (X0-X1)/3 )
IN
Phase-to-ground element
en06000412_ansi.vsd ANSI06000412 V1 EN
Figure 133: Fault loop model
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
264 Technical reference manual
The R1 and jX1 in figure 133 represents the positive sequence impedance from the measuring point to the fault location. The RFPG is presented in order to convey the fault resistance reach.
The zone may be set to operate in , , Disabled or direction through the setting OperationDir. The result from respective set value is illustrated in figure 134. It may be convenient to once again mention that the impedance reach is symmetric, in the sense that it is conform for forward and reverse direction. Therefore, all reach settings apply to both directions.
en05000182.vsd
R
X
R
X
R
X
Non-directional Forward Reverse
IEC05000182 V1 EN
Figure 134: Directional operating modes of the distance measuring zone
6.5.2.3 Minimum operating current
The operation of the distance measuring zone is blocked if the magnitude of input currents fall below certain threshold values.
The phase-to-ground loop AG (BG or CG) is blocked if IA (IB or IC) < IMinPUPG.
For zone 1 with load compensation feature the additional criterion applies, that all phase- to-ground loops will be blocked when IN < IMinOpIR, regardless of the phase currents.
IA (IB or IC) is the RMS value of the current in phase IA (IB or IC). IN is the RMS value of the vector sum of the three phase currents, that is, residual current 3I0.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
265 Technical reference manual
Both current limits IMinPUPG and IMinOpIR are automatically reduced to 75% of regular set values if the zone is set to operate in reverse direction, that is, =.
6.5.2.4 Measuring principles
Fault loop equations use the complex values of voltage, current, and changes in the current. Apparent impedances are calculated and compared with the set limits.
Here V and I represent the corresponding voltage and current phasors in the respective phase A, B or C.
The calculation of the apparant impedances at phase-to-ground fault follow equation 42
The ground return compensation applies in a conventional manner.
app
N
VA Z
IA I KN =
+
EQUATION1811-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 42)
Where:
VA, IA and IN are the phase voltage, phase current and residual current present to the IED
KN is defined as:
Z0 Z1KN 3 Z1
— =
EQUATION-2105 V1 EN
0 0 0Z R jX= + EQUATION2106 V1 EN
1 1 1Z R jX= + EQUATION2107 V1 EN
Where
R0 is setting of the resistive zero sequence reach
X0 is setting of the reactive zero sequence reach
R1 is setting of the resistive positive sequence reach
X1 is setting of the reactive positive sequence reach
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
266 Technical reference manual
Here IN is a phasor of the residual current in IED point. This results in the same reach along the line for all types of faults.
The apparent impedance is considered as an impedance loop with resistance R and reactance X.
The formula given in equation 42 is only valid for no loaded radial feeder applications. When load is considered in the case of single line-to-ground fault, conventional distance protection might overreach at exporting end and underreach at importing end. IED has an adaptive load compensation which increases the security in such applications.
Measuring elements receive current and voltage information from the A/D converter. The check sums are calculated and compared, and the information is distributed into memory locations. For each of the six supervised fault loops, sampled values of voltage (V), current (I), and changes in current between samples (DI) are brought from the input memory and fed to a recursive Fourier filter.
The filter provides two orthogonal values for each input. These values are related to the loop impedance according to equation 43,
D = +
w D0
X i V R i
t EQUATION1547 V1 EN (Equation 43)
in complex notation, or:
0
Re( ) Re( ) Re ( )
X I V R I
t
D = +
w D
EQUATION1548 V1 EN (Equation 44)
0
Im( ) Im( ) Im( )
X I V R I
t
D = +
w D
EQUATION1549 V1 EN (Equation 45)
with
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
267 Technical reference manual
w0 2 p f0 =
EQUATION356 V1 EN (Equation 46)
where:
Re designates the real component of current and voltage,
Im designates the imaginary component of current and voltage and
f0 designates the rated system frequency
The algorithm calculates Rm measured resistance from the equation for the real value of the voltage and substitute it in the equation for the imaginary part. The equation for the Xm measured reactance can then be solved. The final result is equal to:
D — D =
D — D m
Im(V) Re(I) Re(V) lm(I) R
Re(I) lm(I) lm(I) Re (I) EQUATION1550 V1 EN (Equation 47)
— = w
D — D D m 0
Re(V) lm(I) lm(V) Re (I) X
Re (I) lm(I) lm(I) Re (I) t
EQUATION1551 V1 EN (Equation 48)
The calculated Rm and Xm values are updated each sample and compared with the set zone reach. The adaptive tripping counter counts the number of permissive tripping results. This effectively removes any influence of errors introduced by the capacitive voltage transformers or by other factors.
The directional evaluations are performed simultaneously in both forward and reverse directions, and in all six fault loops. Positive sequence voltage and a phase locked positive sequence memory voltage are used as a reference. This ensures unlimited directional sensitivity for faults close to the IED point.
6.5.2.5 Directional lines
The evaluation of the directionality takes place in the Directional impedance element for mho characteristic ZDMRDIR (21D) function. Equation 49 is used to classify that the fault is in forward direction for line-to-ground fault.
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
268 Technical reference manual
0.85 1 0.15 1 Re
V A V AM AngDir Ang AngNeg s
IA +
— < <
EQUATION1618 V1 EN (Equation 49)
where:
AngDir is the setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to 15 (= -15 degrees) and
AngNegRes is the setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to 115 degrees, see figure 135.
V1A is positive sequence phase voltage in phase A
V1AM is positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase A
IA is phase current in phase A
The setting of AngDir and AngNegRes is by default set to 15 (= -15) and 115 degrees respectively (see figure 135) and it should not be changed unless system studies have shown the necessity.
ZDMRDIR (21D) gives a binary coded signal on the output STDIRCND depending on the evaluation where FWD_A=1 adds 1, REV_A=1 adds 2, FWD_B=1 adds 4 etc.
R
X
AngDir
AngNegRes
en05000722_ansi.vsd ANSI05000722 V1 EN
Figure 135: Setting angles for discrimination of forward and reverse fault
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
269 Technical reference manual
The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated by 180 degrees.
The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive-sequence voltage exceeds 5% of the set base voltage VBase. So the directional element can use it for all unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults.
For close-in three-phase faults, the V1AM memory voltage, based on the same positive sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination.
The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is restored.
After 100 ms, the following occurs:
If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current (between 10 and 30% of the set IED rated current IBase), the condition seals in. If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures. If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element in
the reverse direction remains in operation. If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory resets
until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.
6.5.2.6 Simplified logic diagrams
Distance protection zones The design of distance protection zone 1 is presented for all measuring: phase-to- ground loops.
Phase-to-ground related signals are designated by AG, BG and CG.
Fulfillment of two different measuring conditions is necessary to obtain the one logical signal for each separate measuring loop:
Zone measuring condition, which follows the operating equations described above. Group functional input signal (PHSEL), as presented in figure 136.
The PHSEL input signal represents a connection of six different integer values from the phase selection function within the IED, which are converted within the zone measuring function into corresponding boolean expressions for each condition separately. It is connected to the Phase selection with load enchroachment, quadrilateral characteristic (FDPSPDIS,21) function output STCNDZ.
The input signal DIRCND is used to give condition for directionality for the distance measuring zones. The signal contains binary coded information for both forward and
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
270 Technical reference manual
reverse direction. The zone measurement function filter out the relevant signals on the DIRCND input depending on the setting of the parameter OperationDir. It shall be configured to the DIRCND output on the Directional impedance element for mho characteristic (ZDMRDIR,21D) function.
en06000408_ansi.vsd
AND
AND
AND
AG
BG
CG
PHSEL
NDIR_A
NDIR_B
NDIR_C
NDIR_G
AND BLOCK
LOVBZ PHPUND
BLK
OR
OR
OR
ANSI06000408 V1 EN
Figure 136: Conditioning by a group functional input signal PHSEL
Composition of the phase pickup signals for a case, when the zone operates in a non- directional mode, is presented in figure 137.
en06000409_ansi.vsd
NDIR_A
NDIR_B
NDIR_C
OR
AND
AND
AND
AND
BLK
PICKUP
PU_C
PU_B
PU_A 15 ms
0
15 ms 0
15 ms 0
15 ms 0
ANSI06000409 V1 EN
Figure 137: Composition of pickup signals in non-directional operating mode
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
271 Technical reference manual
Results of the directional measurement enter the logic circuits, when the zone operates in directional (forward or reverse) mode, see figure 138.
NDIR_A DIR_A
NDIR_B DIR_B
NDIR_C DIR_C
&
&
&
&
&
BLK
PU_2MPG
PU_A
PU_B
PU_C
PICKUP
AND
AND
AND
OR
OR
en07000081_ansi.vsd
15 ms 0
15 ms 0
15 ms 0
15 ms 0
ANSI07000081 V1 EN
Figure 138: Composition of pickup signals in directional operating mode
Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolically presented in figure 139.
en07000082_ansi.vsd
Timer tPG=Enable
PUZMPG AND
BLKTR
AND
AND
AND
PU_A
PU_B
PU_C
TRIP
TR_A
TR_B
TR_C
AND
0-tPG 0
0 15 ms
ANSI07000082 V1 EN
Figure 139: Tripping logic for the distance protection zone one
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
272 Technical reference manual
6.5.3 Function block
ANSI06000454-2-en.vsd
ZMMPDIS (21) I3P* V3P* BLOCK BLKZ BLKTR PHSEL DIRCND
TRIP TR_A TR_B TR_C
PICKUP PU_A PU_B PU_C
PHPUND
ANSI06000454 V2 EN
Figure 140: ZMMPDIS (21) function block
ANSI09000947-1-en.vsd
ZMMAPDIS (21) I3P* V3P* BLOCK BLKZ BLKTR PHSEL DIRCND
TRIP TR_A TR_B TR_C
PICKUP PU_A PU_B PU_C
PHPUND
ANSI09000947 V1 EN
Figure 141: ZMMAPDIS (21) function block
6.5.4 Input and output signals Table 123: ZMMPDIS (21) Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Group signal for current input
V3P GROUP SIGNAL
— Group signal for voltage input
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKZ BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all output for LOV (or fuse failure) condition
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all trip outputs
PHSEL INTEGER 0 Faulted phase loop selection enable from phase selector
DIRCND INTEGER 0 External directional condition
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
273 Technical reference manual
Table 124: ZMMPDIS (21) Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN General Trip, issued from any phase or loop
TR_A BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase A
TR_B BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase B
TR_C BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase C
PICKUP BOOLEAN General Pickup, issued from any phase or loop
PU_A BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase A
PU_B BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase B
PU_C BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase C
PHPUND BOOLEAN Non-directional pickup, issued from any selected phase or loop
Table 125: ZMMAPDIS (21) Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Group signal for current input
V3P GROUP SIGNAL
— Group signal for voltage input
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKZ BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all output for LOV (or fuse failure) condition
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all trip outputs
PHSEL INTEGER 0 Faulted phase loop selection enable from phase selector
DIRCND INTEGER 0 External directional condition
Table 126: ZMMAPDIS (21) Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN General Trip, issued from any phase or loop
TR_A BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase A
TR_B BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase B
TR_C BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase C
PICKUP BOOLEAN General Pickup, issued from any phase or loop
PU_A BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase A
PU_B BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase B
PU_C BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase C
PHPUND BOOLEAN Non-directional pickup, issued from any selected phase or loop
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
274 Technical reference manual
6.5.5 Setting parameters Table 127: ZMMPDIS (21) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Enabled Disable/Enable Operation
IBase 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Base current, i.e. rated current
Vbase 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Base voltage, i.e. rated voltage
OperationDir Disabled Non-directional Forward Reverse
— — Forward Operation mode of directionality NonDir / Forw / Rev
X1 0.50 — 3000.00 ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach
R1 0.10 — 1000.00 ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistance for zone characteristic angle
X0 0.50 — 9000.00 ohm/p 0.01 100.00 Zero sequence reactance reach
R0 0.50 — 3000.00 ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero seq. resistance for zone characteristic angle
RFPG 1.00 — 9000.00 ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-G
Timer tPG Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Operation mode Disable/ Enable of Zone timer, Ph-G
tPG 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-G
IMinPUPG 10 — 30 %IB 1 20 Minimum pickup phase current for Phase-to- ground loops
IMinOpIR 5 — 30 %IB 1 5 Minimum operate residual current for Phase- Ground loops
Table 128: ZMMAPDIS (21) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Enabled Disable/Enable Operation
IBase 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Base current, i.e. rated current
Vbase 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Base voltage, i.e. rated voltage
OperationDir Disabled Non-directional Forward Reverse
— — Forward Operation mode of directionality NonDir / Forw / Rev
X1 0.50 — 3000.00 ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach
R1 0.10 — 1000.00 ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistance for zone characteristic angle
X0 0.50 — 9000.00 ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero sequence reactance reach
R0 0.50 — 3000.00 ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero seq. resistance for zone characteristic angle
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
275 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description RFPG 1.00 — 9000.00 ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-G
Timer tPG Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Operation mode Disable/ Enable of Zone timer, Ph-G
tPG 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-G
IMinPUPG 10 — 30 %IB 1 20 Minimum pickup phase current for Phase-to- ground loops
6.5.6 Technical data Table 129: ZMMPDIS (21) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Number of zones Max 5 with selectable direction —
Minimum operate current (10-30)% of IBase —
Positive sequence reactance (0.50-3000.00) W/phase 2.0% static accuracy 2.0 degrees static angular accuracy Conditions: Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Vn Current range: (0.5-30) x In Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees
Positive sequence resistance (0.10-1000.00) /phase
Zero sequence reactance (0.50-9000.00) /phase
Zero sequence resistance (0.50-3000.00) /phase
Fault resistance, phase-ground (1.00-9000.00) W/loop
Dynamic overreach <5% at 85 degrees measured with CCVTs and 0.5 <30
—
Impedance zone timers (0.000-60.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
Operate time 24 ms typically —
Reset ratio 105% typically —
Reset time 30 ms typically —
6.6 Directional impedance element for mho characteristic and additional distance protection directional function for earth faults ZDMRDIR (21D), ZDARDIR
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Directional impedance element for mho characteristic
ZDMRDIR
S00346 V1 EN
21D
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
276 Technical reference manual
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Additional distance protection directional function for earth faults
ZDARDIR
S00346 V1 EN
—
6.6.1 Introduction The phase-to-ground impedance elements can be optionally supervised by a phase unselective directional function based on symmetrical components.
6.6.2 Principle of operation
6.6.2.1 Directional impedance element for mho characteristic ZDMRDIR (21D)
The evaluation of the directionality takes place in Directional impedance element for mho characteristic (ZDMRDIR ,21D). Equation 50 and equation 51 are used to classify that the fault is in the forward direction for phase-to-ground fault and phase-to-phase fault respectively.
0.85 1 0.15 1 Re
V A V AM AngDir Ang AngNeg s
IA +
— < <
EQUATION1618 V1 EN (Equation 50)
0.85 1 0.15 1 Re
V AB V ABM AngDir Ang AngNeg s
IAB +
— < <
EQUATION1620 V1 EN (Equation 51)
Where:
AngDir Setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to 15 (= -15 degrees)
AngNegRes Setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to 115 degrees, see figure 142 for mho characteristics.
V1A Positive sequence phase voltage in phase A
V1AM Positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase A
IA Phase current in phase A
V1AB Voltage difference between phase A and B (B lagging A)
V1ABM Memorized voltage difference between phase A and B (B lagging A)
IAB Current difference between phase A and B (B lagging A)
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
277 Technical reference manual
The default settings for AngDir and AngNegRes are 15 (= -15) and 115 degrees respectively (see figure 142) and they should not be changed unless system studies show the necessity.
If one sets DirEvalType to Comparator (which is recommended when using the mho characteristic) then the directional lines are computed by means of a comparator-type calculation, meaning that the directional lines are based on mho-circles (of infinite radius). The default setting value Impedance otherwise means that the directional lines are implemented based on an impedance calculation equivalent to the one used for the quadrilateral impedance characteristics.
When Directional impedance element for mho characteristic (ZDMRDIR) is used together with Fullscheme distance protection, mho characteristic (ZMHPDIS) the following settings for parameter DirEvalType is vital:
alternative Comparator is strongly recommended alternative Imp/Comp should generally not be used alternative Impedance should not be used. This altenative is
intended for use together with Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic (ZMQPDIS)
X
R-AngDir
AngNegRes
Zset reach point
-Zs en06000416_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000416 V1 EN
Figure 142: Setting angles for discrimination of forward fault
The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated by 180 degrees.
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
278 Technical reference manual
The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive-sequence voltage exceeds 5% of the set base voltage VBase. So the directional element can use it for all unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults.
For close-in three-phase faults, the V1AM memory voltage, based on the same positive sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination.
The memory voltage is used for 100ms or until the positive sequence voltage is restored. After 100ms, the following occurs:
If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current the condition seals in. If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures. If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element in
the reverse direction remains in operation. If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, no directional
indications will be given until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.
The Directional impedance element for mho characteristic (ZDMRDIR ,21D) function has the following output signals:
The STDIRCND output provides an integer signal that depends on the evaluation and is derived from a binary coded signal as follows:
bit 11 (2048)
bit 10 (1024)
bit 9 (512)
bit 8 (256)
bit 7 (128)
bit 6 (64)
REV_CA1=1 REV_BC=1 REV_AB=1 REV_C=1 REV_B=1 REV_A=1
bit 5 (32)
bit 4 (16)
bit 3 (8)
bit 2 (4)
bit 1 (2)
bit 0 (1)
FWD_CA=1 FWD_BC=1 FWD_AB=1 FWD_C=1 FWD_B=1 FWD_A=1
The PUFW output is a logical signal with value 1 or 0. It is made up as an OR-function of all the forward starting conditions, that is, FWD_A, FWD_B, FWD_C, FWD_AB, FWD_BC and RWD_CA. The PUREV output is similar to the PUFW output, the only difference being that it is made up as an OR-function of all the reverse starting conditions, that is, REV_A, REV_B, REV_C. REV_AB, REV_BC and REV_CA.
Values for the following parameters are calculated, and may be viewed as service values:
resistance phase A reactance phase A resistance phase B reactance phase B resistance phase C
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
279 Technical reference manual
reactance phase C direction phase A direction phase B direction phase C
6.6.2.2 Additional distance protection directional function for ground faults ZDARDIR
A Mho element needs a polarizing voltage for its operation. The positive-sequence memory-polarized elements are generally preferred. The benefits include:
The greatest amount of expansion for improved resistive coverage. These elements always expand back to the source.
Memory action for all fault types. This is very important for close-in three-phase faults.
A common polarizing reference for all six distance-measuring loops. This is important for single-pole tripping, during a pole-open period.
There are however some situations that can cause security problems like reverse phase to phase faults and double phase-to-ground faults during high load periods. To solve these, additional directional element is used.
For phase-to-ground faults, directional elements using sequence components are very reliable for directional discrimination. The directional element can be based on one of following types of polarization:
Zero-sequence voltage Negative-sequence voltage Zero-sequence current
These additional directional criteria are evaluated in the Additional distance protection directional function for ground faults (ZDARDIR).
Zero-sequence voltage polarization is utilizing the phase relation between the zero- sequence voltage and the zero-sequence current at the location of the protection. The measurement principle is illustrated in figure 143.
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
280 Technical reference manual
— 3V 0
3I0
AngleRCA AngleOp
en06000417_ansi.vsd ANSI06000417 V1 EN
Figure 143: Principle for zero-sequence voltage polarized additional directional element
Negative-sequence voltage polarization is utilizing the phase relation between the negative-sequence voltage and the negative-sequence current at the location of the protection.
Zero-sequence current polarization is utilizing the phase relation between the zero- sequence current at the location of the protection and some reference zero-sequence current, for example, the current in the neutral of a power transformer.
The principle of zero-sequence voltage polarization with zero-sequence current compensation is described in figure 144. The same also applies for the negative- sequence function.
Z0 SA Z0SBZ0Line
V0
I0
IF
I0
V0 K*I0
V0 + K*I0
Characteristic angle
en06000418_ansi.vsd ANSI06000418 V1 EN
Figure 144: Principle for zero sequence compensation
Note that the sequence based additional directional element cannot give per phase information about direction to fault. This is why it is an AND-function with the normal
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
281 Technical reference manual
directional element that works on a per phase base. The release signals are per phase and to have a release of a measuring element in a specific phase both the additional directional element, and the normal directional element, for that phase must indicate correct direction.
en06000419_ansi.vsd
Normal directional element A, B, C
Additional directional element
Release of distance measuring element
A, B, C
AND per phase
AND
ANSI06000419 V1 EN
Figure 145: Ground distance element directional supervision
6.6.3 Function block
ANSI06000422-2-en.vsd
ZDMRDIR (21D) I3P* V3P*
DIR_CURR DIR_VOLT
DIR_POL PUFW
PUREV STDIRCND
ANSI06000422 V2 EN
Figure 146: ZDMRDIR (21D) function block
ANSI06000425-2-en.vsd
ZDARDIR I3P* V3P* I3PPOL* DIRCND
FWD_G REV_G
DIREFCND
ANSI06000425 V2 EN
Figure 147: ZDARDIR function block
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
282 Technical reference manual
6.6.4 Input and output signals Table 130: ZDMRDIR (21D) Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP
SIGNAL — group connection for current abs 1
V3P GROUP SIGNAL
— group connection for voltage abs 1
Table 131: ZDMRDIR (21D) Output signals
Name Type Description DIR_CURR GROUP SIGNAL Group connection
DIR_VOLT GROUP SIGNAL Group connection
DIR_POL GROUP SIGNAL Group connection
PUFW BOOLEAN Pickup in forward direction
PUREV BOOLEAN Pickup in reverse direction
STDIRCND INTEGER Binary coded directional information per measuring loop
Table 132: ZDARDIR Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Current signals
V3P GROUP SIGNAL
— Voltage signals
I3PPOL GROUP SIGNAL
— Polarisation current signals
DIRCND INTEGER 0 Binary coded directional signal
Table 133: ZDARDIR Output signals
Name Type Description FWD_G BOOLEAN Forward start signal from phase-to-ground directional
element
REV_G BOOLEAN Reverse start signal from phase-to-ground directional element
DIREFCND INTEGER Pickuo direction Binary coded
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
283 Technical reference manual
6.6.5 Setting parameters Table 134: ZDMRDIR (21D) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description IBase 1 — 99999 — 1 3000 Base setting for current level
VBase 0.05 — 2000.00 — 0.05 400.00 Base setting for voltage level
DirEvalType Impedance Comparator Imp/Comp
— — Comparator Directional evaluation mode Impedance / Comparator
AngNegRes 90 — 175 Deg 1 115 Angle of blinder in second quadrant for forward direction
AngDir 5 — 45 Deg 1 15 Angle of blinder in fourth quadrant for forward direction
IMinPUPG 5 — 30 %IB 1 5 Minimum pickup phase current for Phase-to- ground loops
IMinPUPP 5 — 30 %IB 1 10 Minimum pickup delta current (2 x current of lagging phase) for Phase-to-phase loops
Table 135: ZDARDIR Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description IBase 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Base setting for current values
VBase 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Base setting for voltage level in kV
PolMode -3U0 -V2 IPol Dual -3U0Comp -V2comp
— — -3U0 Polarization quantity for opt dir function for P- G faults
AngleRCA -90 — 90 Deg 1 75 Characteristic relay angle (= MTA or base angle)
IPickup 1 — 200 %IB 1 5 Minimum operation current in % of IBase
VPolPU 1 — 100 %VB 1 1 Minimum polarizing voltage in % of VBase
IPolPU 5 — 100 %IB 1 10 Minimum polarizing current in % of IBase
Table 136: ZDARDIR Group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description AngleOp 90 — 180 Deg 1 160 Operation sector angle
Kmag 0.50 — 3000.00 ohm 0.01 40.00 Boost-factor in -V0comp and -V2comp polarization
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
284 Technical reference manual
6.7 Mho impedance supervision logic ZSMGAPC
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Mho Impedance supervision logic ZSMGAPC — —
6.7.1 Introduction The Mho impedance supervision logic (ZSMGAPC) includes features for fault inception detection and high SIR detection. It also includes the functionality for loss of potential logic as well as for the pilot channel blocking scheme.
ZSMGAPC can mainly be decomposed in two different parts:
1. A fault inception detection logic 2. High SIR detection logic
6.7.2 Principle of operation
6.7.2.1 Fault inception detection
The aim for the fault inception detector is to detect quickly that a fault has occurred on the system.
The fault inception detection detects instantaneous changes in any phase currents or zero sequence current in combination with a change in the corresponding phase voltage or zero sequence voltage. If the change of any phase current and corresponding phase voltage or 3V0 and 3I0 exceeds the settings and DeltaV respectively. Delta3V0 and and the input signal BLOCK is not activated, the output signal FLTDET is activated indicating that a system fault has occurred.
If the setting is set to Enabled in blocking scheme and the fault inception function has detected a system fault, a block signal BLKCHST will be issued and send to remote end in order to block the overreaching zones. Different criteria has to be fulfilled for sending the BLKCHST signal:
1. The setting has to be set to Enabled 2. The breaker has to be closed, that is, the input signal CBOPEN has to be deactivated 3. A reverse fault should have been detected while the carrier send signal is not
blocked, that is, input signal REVSTART is activated and input signal BLOCKCS is not activated
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
285 Technical reference manual
Or
A fault inception is detected
If it is later detected that it was an internal fault that made the function issue the BLKCHST signal, the function will issue a CHSTOP signal to unblock the remote end. The criteria that have to be fulfilled for this are:
1. The function has to be in pilot mode, that is, the setting has to be set to Enabled 2. The carrier send signal should be blocked, that is, input signal BLOCKCS is On and, 3. A reverse fault should not have been detected while the carrier send signal was not
blocked, that is, input signals REVSTART and BLOCKCS is not activated.
ZSMGAPC function has a built in loss of voltage detection based on the evaluation of the change in phase voltage or the change in zero sequence voltage (3V0). It operates if the change in phase voltages exceeds the setting or 3V0 exceeds the setting Delta3V0.
If loss of voltage is detected, but not a fault inception, the distance protection function will be blocked. This is also the case if a fuse failure is detected by the external fuse failure function and activate the input FUSEFAIL. Those blocks are generated by activating the output BLKZ, which shall be connected to the input BLKZ on the distance Mho function block.
During fault inception a lot of transients will be developed which in turn might cause the distance function to overreach. The Mho supervision logic (ZSMGAPC) will increase the filtering during the most transient period of the fault. This is done by activating the output BLKZMD, which shall be connected to the input BLKZMTD on mho distance function block.
High SIR detection High SIR values increases the likelihood that CVT will introduce a prolonged and distorted transient, increasing the risk for overreach of the distance function.
The SIR function calculates the SIR value as the source impedance divided by the setting Zreach and activates the output signal HSIR if the calculated value for any of the six basic shunt faults exceed the setting . The HSIR signal is intended to block the delta based mho impedance function.
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
286 Technical reference manual
6.7.3 Function block
IEC06000426-2-en.vsd
ZSMGAPC I3P* U3P* BLOCK REVSTART BLOCKCS CBOPEN
BLKZMTD BLKCHST CHSTOP
HSIR
IEC06000426 V2 EN
Figure 148: ZSMGAPC function block
6.7.4 Input and output signals Table 137: ZSMGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Three phase current samples and DFT magnitude
V3P GROUP SIGNAL
— Three phase phase-neutral voltage samples and DFT magnitude
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of the function
REVSTART BOOLEAN 0 Indication of reverse start
BLOCKCS BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the blocking carrier signal to remote end
CBOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Indicates that the breaker is open
Table 138: ZSMGAPC Output signals
Name Type Description BLKZMTD BOOLEAN Block signal for blocking of time domain high speed mho
BLKCHST BOOLEAN Blocking signal to remote end to block overreaching zone
CHSTOP BOOLEAN Stops the blocking signal to remote end
HSIR BOOLEAN Indication of source impedance ratio above set limit
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
287 Technical reference manual
6.7.5 Setting parameters Table 139: ZSMGAPC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description IBase 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Base value for current measurement
VBase 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Base value for voltage measurement
PilotMode Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Pilot mode Disable / Enable
Zreach 0.1 — 3000.0 ohm 0.1 38.0 Line impedance
IMinOp 10 — 30 %IB 1 20 Minimum operating current for SIR measurement
Table 140: ZSMGAPC Group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description DeltaI 0 — 200 %IB 1 10 Current change level in %IB for fault inception
detection
Delta3I0 0 — 200 %IB 1 10 Zero seq current change level in % of IB
DeltaV 0 — 100 %VB 1 5 Voltage change level in %VB for fault inception detection
Delta3V0 0 — 100 %VB 1 5 Zero seq voltage change level in % of VB
SIRLevel 5 — 15 — 1 10 Settable level for source impedance ratio
6.8 Faulty phase identification with load encroachment FMPSPDIS (21)
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Faulty phase identification with load encroachment for mho
FMPSPDIS
S00346 V1 EN
21
6.8.1 Introduction The operation of transmission networks today is in many cases close to the stability limit. Due to environmental considerations the rate of expansion and reinforcement of the power system is reduced, for example difficulties to get permission to build new power lines. The ability to accurate and reliable classifying the different types of fault
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
288 Technical reference manual
so that single phase tripping and autoreclosing can be used plays an important roll in this matter.
The phase selection function is design to accurately select the proper fault loop(s) in the distance function dependent on the fault type.
The heavy load transfer that is common in many transmission networks may in some cases interfere with the distance protection zone reach and cause unwanted operation. Therefore the function has a built in algorithm for load encroachment, which gives the possibility to enlarge the resistive setting of the measuring zones without interfering with the load.
The output signals from the phase selection function produce important information about faulty phase(s), which can be used for fault analysis as well.
6.8.2 Principle of operation
6.8.2.1 The phase selection function
Faulty phase identification with load encroachment for mho (FMPSPDIS, 21) function can be decomposed into six different parts:
1. A high speed delta based current phase selector 2. A high speed delta based voltage phase selector 3. A symmetrical components based phase selector 4. Fault evaluation and selection logic 5. A load encroachment logic 6. A blinder logic
The total function can be blocked by activating the input BLOCK.
Delta based current and voltages The delta based fault detection function uses adaptive technique and is based on patent US4409636.
The aim of the delta based phase selector is to provide very fast and reliable phase selection for releasing of tripping from the high speed Mho measuring element and is essential to Directional Comparison Blocking scheme (DCB), which uses Power Line Carrier (PLC) communication system across the protected line.
The current and voltage samples for each phase passes through a notch filter that filters out the fundamental components. Under steady state load conditions or when no fault is present, the output of the filter is zero or close to zero. When a fault occurs, currents and voltages change resulting in sudden changes in the currents and voltages resulting in non-fundamental waveforms being introduced on the line. At this point the notch
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
289 Technical reference manual
filter produces significant non-zero output. The filter output is processed by the delta function. The algorithm uses an adaptive relationship between phases to determine if a fault has occurred, and determines the faulty phases.
The current and voltage delta based phase selector gives a real output signal if the following criterion is fulfilled (only phase A shown):
Max(VA,VB,VC)>DeltaVMinOp
Max(IA,IB,IC)>DeltaIMinOp
where:
VA, VB and VC are the voltage change between sample t and sample t-1
DeltaVMinOp and DeltaIMinOp are the minimum harmonic level settings for the voltage and current filters to decide that a fault has occurred. A slow evolving fault may not produce sufficient harmonics to detect the fault; however, in such a case speed is no longer the issue and the sequence components phase selector will operate.
The delta voltages VA(B,C) and delta current IA(B,C) are the voltage and current between sample t and sample t-1.
The delta phase selector employs adaptive techniques to determine the fault type. The logic determines the fault type by summing up all phase values and dividing by the largest value. Both voltages and currents are filtered out and evaluated. The condition for fault type classification for the voltages and currents can be expressed as:
( , , ) ( , , ) VA VB VC
FaultType Max IA IB IC D D D
= D D D
EQUATION1808-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 52)
( , , ) ( , , ) IA IB IC
FaultType Max IA IB IC
D D D =
D D D EQUATION1809-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 53)
The value of FaultType for different shunt faults are as follows:
Under ideal conditions: (Patent pending)
Single phase-to-ground; FaultType=1
Phase-to-phase fault FaultType=2
Three-phase fault; FaultType=3
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
290 Technical reference manual
The output signal is 1 for single phase-to-ground fault, 2 for phase-to-phase fault and 3 for three-phase fault. At this point the filter does not know if ground was involved or not.
Typically there are induced harmonics in the non-faulted lines that will affect the result. This method allows for a significant tolerance in the evaluation of FaultType over its entire range.
When a single phase-to-ground fault has been detected, the logic determines the largest quantity, and asserts that phase. If phase-to-phase fault is detected, the two largest phase quantities will be detected and asserted as outputs.
The faults detected by the delta based phase selector are coordinated in a separate block. Different phases of faults may be detected at slightly different times due to differences in the angles of incidence of fault on the wave shape. Therefore the output is forced to wait a certain time by means of a timer. If the timer expires, and a fault is detected in one phase only, the fault is deemed as phase-to-ground. This way a premature single phase-to-ground fault detection is not released for a phase-to-phase fault. If, however, ground current is detected before the timer expires, the phase-to- ground fault is released sooner.
If another phase picks up during the time delay, the wait time is reduced by a certain amount. Each detection of either ground-to-phase or additional phases further reduce the initial time delay and allow the delta phase selector output to be faster. There is no time delay, if for example, all three phases are faulty.
The delta function is released if the input DELTAREL is activated at the same time as input DELTABLK is not activated. Activating the DELTABLK input will block the delta function. The release signal has an internal pulse timer of 100 ms. When the DELTAREL signal has disappeared the delta logic is reset. In order not to get too abrupt change, the reset is decayed in pre-defined steps.
Symmetrical component based phase selector The symmetrical component phase selector uses preprocessed calculated sequence voltages and currents as inputs. It also uses sampled values of the phase currents. All the symmetrical quantities mentioned further in this section are with reference to phase A.
The function is made up of four main parts:
A Detection of the presence of ground fault
B A phase-to-phase logic block based on V2/V1 angle relationship
C A phase-to-ground component based on patent US5390067 where the angle relationships between V2/I0 and V2/V1 is evaluated to determine ground fault or phase- to-phase to ground fault
D Logic for detection of three-phase fault
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
291 Technical reference manual
Presence of ground-fault detection This detection of ground fault is performed in two levels, first by evaluation of the magnitude of zero sequence current, and secondly by the evaluation of the zero and negative sequence voltage. It is a complement to the ground-fault signal built-in in the Symmetrical component based phase selector.
The complementary based zero-sequence current function evaluates the presence of ground fault by calculating the 3I0 and comparing the result with the setting parameter INRelPE. The output signal is used to release the ground-fault loop. It is a complement to the ground-fault signal built-in in the sequence based phase selector. The condition for releasing the phase-to-ground loop is as follows:
The output from this detection is used to release the ground-fault loop.
|3I0|>maxIph: INRelPE
where:
|3I0| is the magnitude of the zero sequence current 3I0
maxIph is the maximum magnitude of the phase currents
INRelPE is a setting parameter for the relation between the magnitude of 3I0 and the maximum phase current
The ground-fault loop is also released if the evaluation of the zero sequence current by the main sequence function meets the following conditions:
|3I0|>IBase 0.5
|3I0|>maxIph INRelPG
where:
maxIph is the maximal current magnitude found in any of the three phases
INRelPG is the setting of 3I0 limit for release of phase-to-ground measuring loop in % of IBase
IBase is the global setting of the base current (A)
In systems where the source impedance for zero sequence is high the change of zero sequence current may not be significant and the above detection may fail. In those cases the detection enters the second level, with evaluation of zero and negative sequence voltage. The release of the ground-fault loops can then be achieved if all of the following conditions are fulfilled:
|3V0|>|V2| 0.5
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
292 Technical reference manual
|3V0|>V1| 0.2
|V1|> VBase 0.2/(3)
and
3I0<0.1 IBase
or
3I0 INRelPG
where:
3V0 is the magnitude of the zero sequence voltage
V2 is the magnitude of the negative sequence voltage at the relay measuring point of phase A
k5 is design parameter
ILmax is the maximal phase current
IMinOp is the setting of minimum operate phase current in % of IBase
Phase-to-phase fault detection The detection of phase-to-phase fault is performed by evaluation of the angle difference between the sequence voltages V2 and V1.
0
300
180
A-B sector
B-C sector
C-A sector
60
ANSI06000383-2-en.vsd
VC
VA
VB VA (Ref)
ANSI06000383 V2 EN
Figure 149: Definition of fault sectors for phase-to-phase fault
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
293 Technical reference manual
The phase-to-phase loop for the faulty phases will be determined if the angle between the sequence voltages V2 and V1 lies within the sector defined according to figure 149 and the following conditions are fulfilled:
|V1|>V1MinOP
|V2|>V2MinOp
where:
V1MinOP and V2MinOp are the setting parameters for positive sequence and negative sequence minimum operate voltages
The positive sequence voltage V1A in figure 149 above is reference.
If there is a three-phase fault, there will not be any release of the individual phase signals, even if the general conditions for V2 and V1 are fulfilled.
Phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase-to-ground-fault detection The detection of phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase-to-ground fault (US patent 5390067) is based on two conditions:
1. Angle relationship between V2 and I0
2. Angle relationship between V2 and V1
The condition 1 determines faulty phase at single phase-to-ground fault by determine the angle between V2 and I0.
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
294 Technical reference manual
320
200
80
AG sector
CG sectorBG sector V2A (Ref)
en06000384_ansi.vsd ANSI06000384 V1 EN
Figure 150: Condition 1: Definition of faulty phase sector as angle between V2 and I0
The angle is calculated in a directional function block and gives the angle in radians as input to the V2 and I0 function block. The input angle is released only if the fault is in forward direction. This is done by the directional element. The fault is classified as forward direction if the angle between V0 and I0 lies between 20 to 200 degrees, see figure 151.
200 Reverse
Forward 20
en06000385.vsd
IEC06000385 V1 EN
Figure 151: Directional element used to release the measured angle between Vo and I0
The input radians are summarized with an offset angle and the result evaluated. If the angle is within the boundaries for a specific sector, the phase indication for that sector
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
295 Technical reference manual
will be active see figure 150. Only one sector signal is allowed to be activated at the same time.
The sector function for condition 1 has an internal release signal which is active if the main sequence function has classified the angle between V0 and I0 as valid. The following conditions must be fulfilled for activating the release signals:
|V2|>V2MinOp
|3I0|> 0.05 IBase
|3I0|>maxIph INRelPG
where:
V2 and IN are the magnitude of the negative sequence voltage and zero- sequence current (3I0)
V2MinOp is the setting parameter for minimum operating negative sequence voltage
maxIph is the maximum phase current
The angle difference is phase shifted by 180 degrees if the fault is in reverse direction.
The condition 2 looks at the angle relationship between the negative sequence voltage V2 and the positive sequence voltage V1. Since this is a phase-to-phase voltage relationship, there is no need for shifting phases if the fault is in reverse direction. A phase shift is introduced so that the fault sectors will have the same angle boarders as for condition 1. If the calculated angle between V2 and V1 lies within one sector, the corresponding phase for that sector will be activated. The condition 2 is released if both the following conditions are fulfilled:
|V2|>V2MinOp
|V1|>V1MinOp
where:
|V1| and |V2| are the magnitude of the positive and negative sequence voltages.
V1MinOP and V2MinOP are the setting parameters for positive sequence and negative sequence minimum operating voltages.
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
296 Technical reference manual
20
140
260
AG sector
CG sector
BG sector
V1A (Ref)
en06000413_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000413 V1 EN
Figure 152: Condition 2: V2 and V1 angle relationship
If both conditions are true and there is sector match, the fault is deemed as single phase- to-ground. If the sectors, however, do not match the fault is determined to be the complement of the second condition, that is, a phase-to-phase-to- ground fault.
Condition 1 and Condition 2 Fault type
CG CG CG
BG AG BCG
The sequence phase selector is blocked when ground is not involved or if a three-phase fault is detected.
Three-phase fault detection Unless it has been categorized as a single or two-phase fault, the function classifies it as a three-phase fault if the following conditions are fulfilled:
|V1|V1Level
and
|I1|>I1LowLevel
or
|I1|>IMaxLoad
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
297 Technical reference manual
where:
V1| and |I1| are the positive sequence voltage and current magnitude
V1Level , I1LowLevel
are the setting of limits for positive sequence voltage and current
IMaxLoad is the setting of the maximum load current
The output signal for detection of three-phase fault is only released if not ground fault and phase-to-phase fault in the main sequence function is detected.
The conditions for not detecting ground fault are the inverse of equation 5 to 10.
The condition for not detecting phase-to-phase faults is determined by three conditions. Each of them gives condition for not detecting phase-to-phase fault. Those are:
1:
ground fault is detected
or
|3I0IN|> 0.05 IBase
and
|3I0IN|>maxIph INRelPG
2:
phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase faults are not fulfilled
and
maxIph<0.1 IBase
and
|I2|<0.1 maxIph
3:
|3I0IN|>maxIph 3I0BLK_PP
or
|I2|
where:
maxIph is the maximum of the phase currents IA, IB and IC
INRelPG is the setting parameter for 3I0 limit for release of phase-to-ground fault loops
|I2| is the magnitude of the negative sequence current
I2ILmax is the setting parameter for the relation between negative sequence current to the maximum phase current in percent of IBase
3I0BLK_PP is the setting parameter for 3I0 limit for blocking phase to phase measuring loops
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
298 Technical reference manual
Fault evaluation and selection logic The phase selection logic has an evaluation procedure that can be simplified according to figure 153. Only phase A is shown in the figure. If the internal signal 3 Phase fault is activated, all four outputs PICKUP, PU_A, PU_B and PU_C gets activated.
a b
a>b then c=a else c=a
cDeltaIA
DeltaVA
FaultPriority Adaptive release
dependent on result from Delta logic
a b
a
c ORAB fault
AG fault
Sequence based function
OR
3 Phase fault
IA Valid &
BLOCK
PU_A
en06000386_ansi.vsd ANSI06000386 V1 EN
Figure 153: Simplified diagram for fault evaluation, phase A
Load encroachment logic Each of the six measuring loops has its own load (encroachment) characteristic based on the corresponding loop impedance. The load encroachment functionality is always activated in faulty phase identification with load encroachment for mho (FMPSPDIS, 21) function but the influence on the zone measurement can be switched Enabled/ Disabledin the respective impedance measuring function.
The outline of the characteristic is presented in figure 154. As illustrated, the resistive reach in forward and reverse direction and the angle of the sector is the same in all four quadrants. The reach for the phase selector will be reduced by the load encroachment function, as shown in figure 154.
Blinder Blinder provides a mean to discriminate high load from a fault. The operating characteristic is illustrated in figure 154. There are six individual measuring loops with the blinder functionality. Three phase-to-ground loops which estimate the impedance according to
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
299 Technical reference manual
Zn = Vph / Iph
and three phase-to-phase loops according to
Zph-ph = Vph-ph / Iph-ph
The start operations from respective loop are binary coded into one word and provides an output signal PLECND.
RLd
RLd
LdAngle
LdAngle
LdAngle
LdAngle
R
X jX
Operation area Operation area
R
Operation area
No operation area No operation area
en06000414_ansi.vsd ANSI06000414 V1 EN
Figure 154: Influence on the characteristic by load encroachment logic
Outputs The output of the sequence components based phase selector and the delta logic phase selector activates the output signals PU_A, PU_B and PU_C. If a ground fault is detected the signal PHG_FLT gets activated.
The phase selector also gives binary coded signals that are connected to the zone measuring element for opening the correct measuring loop(s). This is done by the signal PHSCND. If only one phase is started (A, B or C), the corresponding phase-to- ground element is enabled. PHG_FLT is expected to be made available for two-phase and three-phase faults for the correct output to be selected. The fault loop is indicated by one of the decimal numbers below.
The output PHSCND provides release information from the phase selection part only. DLECND provides release information from the load encroachment part only. PLECND provides release information from the phase selection part and the load encroachment part combined, that is, both parts have to issue a release at the same time (this signal is normally not used in the zone measuring element). In these signals, each
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
300 Technical reference manual
fault type has an associated value, which represents the corresponding zone measuring loop to be released. The values are presented in table 140.
0= no faulted phases
1= AG
2= BG
3= CG
4= -ABG
5= -BCG
6= -CAG
7= -ABCG
8= -AB
9= -BC
10= -CA
11= ABC
An additional logic is applied to handle the cases when phase-to-ground outputs are to be asserted when the ground input G is not asserted.
The output signal PLECND is activated when the load encroachment is operating.
PLECNDis connected to the input STCND for selected quadrilateral impedance measuring zones to be blocked. The signal must be connected to the input LDCND for selected mho impedance measuring zones .
The load encroachment at the measuring zone must be activated to release the blocking from the load encroachment function.
6.8.3 Function block
ANSI06000429-2-en.vsd
FMPSPDIS I3P* V3P* BLOCK ZSTART TR3PH 1POLEAR
PU_A PU_B PU_C
PHG_FLT PHSCND PLECND DLECND PICKUP
ANSI06000429 V2 EN
Figure 155: FMPSPDIS (21) function block
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
301 Technical reference manual
6.8.4 Input and output signals Table 141: FMPSPDIS Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Group signal for current
V3P GROUP SIGNAL
— Group signal for voltage
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
ZSTART BOOLEAN 0 Start from underimpdeance function
TR3PH BOOLEAN 0 Three phase tripping initiated
1POLEAR BOOLEAN 0 Single pole autoreclosing in progress
Table 142: FMPSPDIS Output signals
Name Type Description PU_A BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase A
PU_B BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase B
PU_C BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase C
PHG_FLT BOOLEAN Ground fault detected
PHSCND INTEGER Binary coded starts from phase selection
PLECND INTEGER Binary coded starts from ph sel with load encroachment
DLECND INTEGER Binary coded starts from load encroachment only
PICKUP BOOLEAN Indicates that something has picked up
6.8.5 Setting parameters Table 143: FMPSPDIS Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description IBase 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Base current
VBase 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Base voltage
IMaxLoad 10 — 5000 %IB 1 200 Maximum load for identification of three phase fault in % of IBase
RLd 1.00 — 3000.00 ohm/p 0.01 80.00 Load encroachment resistive reach in ohm/ phase
LdAngle 5 — 70 Deg 1 20 Load encroachment inclination of load angular sector
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
302 Technical reference manual
Table 144: FMPSPDIS Group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description DeltaIMinOp 5 — 100 %IB 1 10 Delta current level in % of IBase
DeltaVMinOp 5 — 100 %VB 1 20 Delta voltage level in % of Vbase
V1Level 5 — 100 %VB 1 80 Pos seq voltage limit for identification of 3-ph fault
I1LowLevel 5 — 200 %IB 1 10 Pos seq current level for identification of 3-ph fault in % of IBase
V1MinOp 5 — 100 %VB 1 20 Minimum operate positive sequence voltage for ph sel
V2MinOp 1 — 100 %VB 1 5 Minimum operate negative sequence voltage for ph sel
INRelPG 10 — 100 %IB 1 20 3I0 limit for release ph-g measuring loops in % of max phase current
3I0BLK_PP 10 — 100 %IB 1 40 3I0 limit for blocking phase-to-phase measuring loops in % of max phase current
6.8.6 Technical data Table 145: FMPSPDIS (21) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Minimum operate current (5-30)% of IBase 1.0% of In
Load encroachment criteria: Load resistance, forward and reverse
(0.53000) W/phase (570) degrees
2.0% static accuracy Conditions: Voltage range: (0.11.1) x Vn Current range: (0.530) x In Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees
6.9 Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic, separate settings ZMRPDIS (21), ZMRAPDIS (21) and ZDRDIR (21D)
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
303 Technical reference manual
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic, separate settings (zone 1)
ZMRPDIS
S00346 V1 EN
21
Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic, separate settings (zone 2-5)
ZMRAPDIS
S00346 V1 EN
21
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Directional impedance quadrilateral ZDRDIR Z<-> 21D
6.9.1 Introduction The line distance protection is up to five zone full scheme protection with three fault loops for phase-to-phase faults and three fault loops for phase-to-ground fault for each of the independent zones. Individual settings for each zone in resistive and reactive reach gives flexibility for use as back-up protection for transformer connected to overhead lines and cables of different types and lengths.
Mho alternative quadrilateral characteristic is available.
ZMRPDIS (21) together with Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle FRPSPDIS (21) has functionality for load encroachment, which increases the possibility to detect high resistive faults on heavily loaded lines, as shown in figure 73.
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
304 Technical reference manual
en05000034.vsd
R
X
Forward operation
Reverse operation
IEC05000034 V1 EN
Figure 156: Typical quadrilateral distance protection zone with Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle function FRPSPDIS (21) activated
The independent measurement of impedance for each fault loop together with a sensitive and reliable built-in phase selection makes the function suitable in applications with single pole tripping and autoreclosing.
Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents overreaching of zone 1 at load exporting end at phase-to-ground faults on heavily loaded power lines.
The distance protection zones can operate, independent of each other, in directional (forward or reverse) or non-directional mode. This makes them suitable, together with different communication schemes, for the protection of power lines and cables in complex network configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal lines and so on.
6.9.2 Principle of operation
6.9.2.1 Full scheme measurement
The execution of the different fault loops within the IED are of full scheme type, which means that each fault loop for phase-to-ground faults and phase-to-phase faults for forward and reverse faults are executed in parallel.
Figure 74 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for up to five, impedance- measuring zones. There are 3 to 5 zones depending on product type and variant.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
305 Technical reference manual
A-G B-G C-G
A-G B-G C-G
A-G B-G C-G
A-G B-G C-G
A-B B-C C-A
A-B B-C C-A
A-B B-C -A
A-B B-C C-A
A-G B-G C-G A-B B-C C-A
Zone 1
Zone 2
Zone 3
Zone 4
Zone 5
C
Zone 6A-G B-G C-G A-B B-C C-A
ANSI05000458-2-en.vsd ANSI05000458 V2 EN
Figure 157: The different measuring loops at phase-to-ground fault and phase-to- phase fault.
The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compared to switched schemes which mostly uses a pickup of an overreaching element to select correct voltages and current depending on fault type. Each distance protection zone performs like one independent distance protection IED with six measuring elements.
6.9.2.2 Impedance characteristic
The distance measuring zone includes six impedance measuring loops; three intended for phase-to-ground faults, and three intended for phase-to-phase as well as, three- phase faults.
The distance measuring zone will essentially operate according to the non-directional impedance characteristics presented in figure 75 and figure 76. The phase-to-ground characteristic is illustrated with the full loop reach while the phase-to-phase characteristic presents the per phase reach.
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
306 Technical reference manual
RFPG
X1+Xn
X1+Xn
RFPGR1+RnRFPG
RFPG
RFPG
RFPG
R
X
R1+Rn
(Ohm/loop)
ANSI05000661-3-en.vsd
R0-R1 Rn
3 =
X0-X1 Xn
3 =
j n j n
(Ohm/loop)
ANSI05000661 V3 EN
Figure 158: Characteristic for phase-to-ground measuring , ohm/loop domain
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
307 Technical reference manual
j
R1PP RFPP
X1PP
X1PP
RFPPR1PPRFPP
RFPP
RFPP
RFPP
R
X (Ohm/phase)
(Ohm/phase)
en07000062.vsd
j
0 1 3
X PE X RVPEXNRV — =
0 1 3
X PE X FWPEXNFW — = 0 1
3 X PG X FWPG—
=
0 1 3
X PG X RVPGXNRV — =
0 1 3
X PE X RVPEXNRV — =
0 1 3
X PE X FWPEXNFW — =
2 2
2 2
2 2
IEC07000062 V2 EN
Figure 159: Characteristic for phase-to-phase measuring
The fault loop reach with respect to each fault type may also be presented as in figure 77. Note in particular the difference in definition regarding the (fault) resistive reach for phase-to-phase faults and three-phase faults.
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
308 Technical reference manual
VA R1 + j X1Ip
RFPG Phase-to-ground fault in phase A
Phase-to-phase fault in phase A-B
Three-phase fault
(Arc + tower resistance)
0 (R0-R1)/3 + j (X0-X1)/3 )
IN
VA R1 + j X1IA
VB R1 + j X1
IB RFPP
VA R1 + j X1IA
VC R1 + j X1
IC
0.5RFPP
0.5RFPP
(Arc resistance)
Phase-to-ground element
Phase-to-phase element A-B
Phase-to-phase element A-C
ANSI05000181_2_en.vsd ANSI05000181 V2 EN
Figure 160: Fault loop model
The R1 and jX1 in figure 77 represents the positive sequence impedance from the measuring point to the fault location. The settings RFPG and RFPP are the eventual fault resistances in the faulty place.
Regarding the illustration of three-phase fault in figure 77, there is of course fault current flowing also in the third phase during a three-phase fault. The illustration merely reflects the loop measurement, which is made phase-to-phase.
The zone can be set to operate in Non-directional, Forward or Reverse direction through the setting OperationDir. The result from respective set value is illustrated in figure 78. The impedance reach is symmetric, in the sense that it conforms for forward and reverse direction. Therefore, all reach settings apply to both directions.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
309 Technical reference manual
en05000182.vsd
R
X
R
X
R
X
Non-directional Forward Reverse
IEC05000182 V1 EN
Figure 161: Directional operating modes of the distance measuring zones
6.9.2.3 Minimum operating current
The operation of Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic (ZMRPDIS, 21) is blocked if the magnitude of input currents fall below certain threshold values.
The phase-to-ground loop AG (BG or CG) is blocked if IA (IB or IC) < IMinPUPG.
For zone 1 with load compensation feature the additional criterion applies, that all phase- to-ground loops can be blocked when IN < IMinOpIR, regardless of the phase currents.
IA (IB or IC) is the RMS value of the current in phase IA (IB or IC). IN is the RMS value of the vector sum of the three-phase currents, that is residual current 3I0.
The phase-to-phase loop AB (BC or CA) is blocked if IAB (BC or CA)< IMinPUPP.
All three current limits IMinPUPG, IMinOpIR and IMinPUPP are automatically reduced to 75% of regular set values if the zone is set to operate in reverse direction, that is OperationDir=Reverse
6.9.2.4 Measuring principles
Fault loop equations use the complex values of voltage, current, and changes in the current. Apparent impedances are calculated and compared with the set limits. The
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
310 Technical reference manual
apparent impedances at phase-to-phase faults follow equation 4 (example for a phase A to phase B fault).
= VA — VB
Zapp
IA — IB EQUATION1545 V1 EN (Equation 54)
Here V and I represent the corresponding voltage and current phasors in the respective phase Ln (n = 1, 2, 3)
The ground return compensation applies in a conventional manner to phase-to-ground faults (example for a phase A to ground fault) according to equation 5.
= +
app
N
V _ A Z
I _ A I KN
EQUATION1546 V1 EN (Equation 55)
Where:
V_A, I_A and IN are the phase voltage, phase current and residual current present to the IED
KN is defined as:
Z0 Z1KN 3 Z1
— =
EQUATION-2105 V1 EN
0 0 0Z R jX= + EQUATION2106 V1 EN
1 1 1Z R jX= + EQUATION2107 V1 EN
Where
R0 is setting of the resistive zero sequence reach
X0 is setting of the reactive zero sequence reach
R1 is setting of the resistive positive sequence reach
X1 is setting of the reactive positive sequence reach
Here IN is a phasor of the residual current in IED point. This results in the same reach along the line for all types of faults.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
311 Technical reference manual
The apparent impedance is considered as an impedance loop with resistance R and reactance X.
The formula given in equation 5 is only valid for radial feeder application without load. When load is considered in the case of single phase-to-ground fault, conventional distance protection might overreach at exporting end and underreach at importing end. The IED has an adaptive load compensation which increases the security in such applications.
Measuring elements receive current and voltage information from the A/D converter. The check sums are calculated and compared, and the information is distributed into memory locations. For each of the six supervised fault loops, sampled values of voltage (V), current (I), and changes in current between samples (DI) are brought from the input memory and fed to a recursive Fourier filter.
The filter provides two orthogonal values for each input. These values are related to the loop impedance according to equation 6,
D = +
w D0
X i V R i
t EQUATION1547 V1 EN (Equation 56)
in complex notation, or:
0
Re( ) Re( ) Re ( )
X I V R I
t
D = +
w D
EQUATION1548 V1 EN (Equation 57)
0
Im( ) Im( ) Im( )
X I V R I
t
D = +
w D
EQUATION1549 V1 EN (Equation 58)
with
w0 2 p f0 =
EQUATION356 V1 EN (Equation 59)
where:
Re designates the real component of current and voltage,
Im designates the imaginary component of current and voltage and
f0 designates the rated system frequency
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
312 Technical reference manual
The algorithm calculates Rmmeasured resistance from the equation for the real value of the voltage and substitutes it in the equation for the imaginary part. The equation for the Xm measured reactance can then be solved. The final result is equal to:
D — D =
D — D m
Im(V) Re(I) Re(V) lm(I) R
Re(I) lm(I) lm(I) Re (I) EQUATION1550 V1 EN (Equation 60)
— = w
D — D D m 0
Re(V) lm(I) lm(V) Re (I) X
Re (I) lm(I) lm(I) Re (I) t
EQUATION1551 V1 EN (Equation 61)
The calculated Rm and Xm values are updated each sample and compared with the set zone reach. The adaptive tripping counter counts the number of permissive tripping results. This effectively removes any influence of errors introduced by the capacitive voltage transformers or by other factors.
The directional evaluations are performed simultaneously in both forward and reverse directions, and in all six fault loops. Positive sequence voltage and a phase locked positive sequence memory voltage are used as a reference. This ensures unlimited directional sensitivity for faults close to the IED point.
6.9.2.5 Directional impedance element for quadrilateral characteristics
The evaluation of the directionality takes place in Directional impedance quadrilateral function ZDRDIR (21D). Equation 12 and equation 13 are used to classify that the fault is in forward direction for phase-to-ground fault and phase-to-phase fault.
1 1
1
0.8 1 0.2 1 arg ReL L M
L
V V ArgDir ArgNeg s
I
+ — < <
EQUATION1552 V2 EN (Equation 62)
For the AB element, the equation in forward direction is according to.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
313 Technical reference manual
1 2 1 2
1 2
0.8 1 0.2 1 arg ReL L L L M
L L
V V ArgDir ArgNeg s
I
+ — < <
EQUATION1553 V2 EN (Equation 63)
where:
AngDir is the setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to 15 (= -15 degrees) and
AngNegRes is the setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to 115 degrees, see figure 79.
V1A is positive sequence phase voltage in phase A
V1AM is positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase A
IA is phase current in phase A
V1AB is voltage difference between phase A and B (B lagging A)
V1ABM is memorized voltage difference between phase A and B (B lagging A)
IAB is current difference between phase A and B (B lagging A)
The setting of AngDir and AngNegRes is by default set to 15 (= -15) and 115 degrees respectively (as shown in figure 79). It should not be changed unless system studies have shown the necessity.
ZDRDIR gives binary coded directional information per measuring loop on the output STDIRCND.
STDIR= FWD_A*1+FWD_B*2+FWD_C*4+FWD_AB*8+ +FWD_BC*16+FWD_CA*32+REV_A*64+REV_B*128+REV_C*256+ +REV_AB*512+REV_BC*1024+REV_CA*2048
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
314 Technical reference manual
R
X
AngDir
AngNegRes
en05000722_ansi.vsd ANSI05000722 V1 EN
Figure 162: Setting angles for discrimination of forward and reverse fault in Directional impedance quadrilateral function ZDRDIR (21D)
The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated by 180 degrees.
The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive sequence voltage exceeds 5% of the set base voltage VBase. So the directional element can use it for all unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults.
For close-in three-phase faults, the V1AM memory voltage, based on the same positive sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination.
The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is restored.
After 100ms the following occurs:
If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current (between 10 and 30% of the set IED rated current IBase), the condition seals in. If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures. If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element in
the reverse direction remains in operation. If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory resets
until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
315 Technical reference manual
6.9.2.6 Simplified logic diagrams
Distance protection zones The design of the distance protection zones are presented for all measuring loops: phase- to-ground as well as phase-to-phase.
Phase-to-ground related signals are designated by AG, BG and CG.. The phase-to- phase signals are designated by AB, BC and CA.
Fulfillment of two different measuring conditions is necessary to obtain the one logical signal for each separate measuring loop:
Zone measuring condition, which follows the operating equations described above. Group functional input signal (PHSEL), as presented in figure 80.
The PHSEL input signal represents a connection of six different integer values from Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic function FRPSPDIS (21) within the IED, which are converted within the zone measuring function into corresponding boolean expressions for each condition separately. Input signal PHSEL is connected to FRPSPDIS (21) function output STCNDZ.
The input signal DIRCND is used to give condition for directionality for the distance measuring zones. The signal contains binary coded information for both forward and reverse direction. The zone measurement function filter out the relevant signals depending on the setting of the parameter OperationDir. It must be configured to the STDIRCND output on directional function ZDRDIR (21D) function.
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
316 Technical reference manual
ANSI99000557-1-en.vsd
AB
BC
CA
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AG
BG
CG
PHSEL
NDIR_AB
NDIR_BC
NDIR_CA
NDIR_A
NDIR_B
NDIR_C
PUZMPP
STNDPE
AND BLOCK
LOVBZ PHPUND
BLK
OR
OR
OR
OR
BLOCFUNC
ANSI99000557 V2 EN
Figure 163: Conditioning by a group functional input signal PHSEL, external start condition
Composition of the phase pickup signals for a case, when the zone operates in a non- directional mode, is presented in figure 81.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
317 Technical reference manual
ANSI09000889-1-en.vsd
NDIR_A
NDIR_B
NIDR_C
NDIR_AB
NDIR_BC
NDIR_CA
OR
OR
OR
OR
AND
AND
AND
AND
BLK
PICKUP
PU_C
PU_B
PU_A 15ms
0
15ms 0
15ms 0
15ms 0
ANSI09000889 V1 EN
Figure 164: Composition of pickup signals in non-directional operating mode
Results of the directional measurement enter the logic circuits, when the zone operates in directional (forward or reverse) mode, as shown in figure 82.
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
318 Technical reference manual
NDIR_A DIR_A
NDIR_B DIR_B
NDIR_C DIR_C
NDIR_AB DIR_AB
NDIR_BC DIR_BC
NDIR_CA DIR_CA
AND
AND
AND
AND
BLK
15 ms 0
15 ms 0
PU_ZMPG
PU_A
PU_B
PU_C
PICKUP
PU_ZMPP
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
OR
OR
OR
OR
OR
OR
ANSI09000888-2-en.vsd
15 ms 0
15 ms 0
ANSI09000888 V2 EN
Figure 165: Composition of pickup signals in directional operating mode
Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolically presented in figure 83.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
319 Technical reference manual
ANSI09000887-2-en.vsd
BLKTR
AND
AND
AND
PU_A
PU_B
PU_C
TRIP
TR_A
TR_B
TR_C
PUZMPP tPPAND
AND PUZMPG
Timer tPG=enable
Timer tPP=enable
tPG OR
AND
AND
AND
OR
ORBLK
BLKFUNC
0-tPP 0
0-tPG 0
0 15 ms
ANSI09000887 V2 EN
Figure 166: Tripping logic for the distance protection zone
6.9.3 Function block
ANSI08000248-1-en.vsd
ZMRPDIS (21) I3P* V3P* BLOCK BLKZ BLKTR PHSEL DIRCND
TRIP TR_A TR_B TR_C
RI BFI_A BFI_B PU_C
PHPUND
ANSI08000248 V1 EN
Figure 167: ZMRPDIS (21) function block
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
320 Technical reference manual
ANSI08000290_1_en.vsd
ZMRAPDIS (21) I3P* V3P* BLOCK BLKZ BLKTR PHSEL DIRCND
TRIP TR_A TR_B TR_C
BFI PU_A BFI_B PU_C
PHPUND
ANSI08000290 V1 EN
Figure 168: ZMRAPDIS (21) function block
ZDRDIR I3P* U3P*
STDIRCND
IEC09000639-1-en.vsd IEC09000639 V1 EN
6.9.4 Input and output signals Table 146: ZMRPDIS (21) Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Group signal for current input
V3P GROUP SIGNAL
— Group signal for voltage input
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKZ BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all output for LOV (or fuse failure) condition
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all trip outputs
PHSEL INTEGER 0 Faulted phase loop selection enable from phase selector
DIRCND INTEGER 0 External directional condition
Table 147: ZMRPDIS (21) Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN General Trip, issued from any phase or loop
TR_A BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase A
TR_B BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase B
TR_C BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase C
RI BOOLEAN General Pickup, issued from any phase or loop
BFI_A BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase A
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
321 Technical reference manual
Name Type Description BFI_B BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase B
PU_C BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase C
PHPUND BOOLEAN Non-directional pickup, issued from any selected phase or loop
Table 148: ZMRAPDIS (21) Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Group signal for current input
V3P GROUP SIGNAL
— Group signal for voltage input
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKZ BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all output for LOV (or fuse failure) condition
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all trip outputs
PHSEL INTEGER 0 Faulted phase loop selection enable from phase selector
DIRCND INTEGER 0 External directional condition
Table 149: ZMRAPDIS (21) Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN General Trip, issued from any phase or loop
TR_A BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase A
TR_B BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase B
TR_C BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase C
BFI BOOLEAN General Pickup, issued from any phase or loop
PU_A BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase A
BFI_B BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase B
PU_C BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase C
PHPUND BOOLEAN Non-directional pickup, issued from any selected phase or loop
Table 150: ZDRDIR (21D) Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP
SIGNAL — group connection for current abs 2
V3P GROUP SIGNAL
— group connection for voltage abs 2
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
322 Technical reference manual
Table 151: ZDRDIR (21D) Output signals
Name Type Description STDIRCND INTEGER Binary coded directional information per measuring loop
6.9.5 Setting parameters Table 152: ZMRPDIS (21) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Enabled Operation Disable / Enable
IBase 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Base current, i.e. rated current
VBase 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Base voltage, i.e. rated voltage
OperationDir Disabled Non-directional Forward Reverse
— — Forward Operation mode of directionality NonDir / Forw / Rev
X1PP 0.10 — 3000.00 ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach Ph-Ph
R1PP 0.01 — 1000.00 ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistance for characteristic angle, Ph-Ph
RFPP 0.10 — 3000.00 ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-Ph
X1PG 0.10 — 3000.00 ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach Ph-G
R1PG 0.01 — 1000.00 ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistance for characteristic angle, Ph-G
X0PG 0.10 — 9000.00 ohm/p 0.01 100.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-G
R0PG 0.01 — 3000.00 ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero seq. resistance for zone characteristic angle, Ph-G
RFPG 0.10 — 9000.00 ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-G
OperationPP Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Operation mode Disable/Enable of Phase- Phase loops
Timer tPP Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Operation mode Disable/Enable of Zone timer, Ph-Ph
tPP 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-Ph
OperationPG Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Operation mode Disable/Enable of Phase- Ground loops
Timer tPG Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Operation mode Disable/ Enable of Zone timer, Ph-G
tPG 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-G
IMinPUPP 10 — 1000 %IB 1 20 Minimum pickup delta current (2 x current of lagging phase) for Phase-to-phase loops
IMinPUPG 10 — 1000 %IB 1 20 Minimum pickup phase current for Phase-to- ground loops
IMinOpIR 5 — 1000 %IB 1 5 Minimum operate residual current for Phase- Ground loops
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
323 Technical reference manual
Table 153: ZMRAPDIS (21) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Enabled Operation Disable / Enable
IBase 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Base current, i.e. rated current
VBase 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Base voltage, i.e. rated voltage
OperationDir Disabled Non-directional Forward Reverse
— — Forward Operation mode of directionality NonDir / Forw / Rev
X1PP 0.10 — 3000.00 ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach Ph-Ph
R1PP 0.01 — 1000.00 ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistance for characteristic angle, Ph-Ph
RFPP 0.10 — 3000.00 ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-Ph
X1PG 0.10 — 3000.00 ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach Ph-G
R1PG 0.01 — 1000.00 ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistance for characteristic angle, Ph-G
X0PG 0.10 — 9000.00 ohm/p 0.01 100.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-G
R0PG 0.01 — 3000.00 ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero seq. resistance for zone characteristic angle, Ph-G
RFPG 0.10 — 9000.00 ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-G
OperationPP Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Operation mode Disable/Enable of Phase- Phase loops
Timer tPP Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Operation mode Disable/Enable of Zone timer, Ph-Ph
tPP 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-Ph
OperationPG Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Operation mode Disable/Enable of Phase- Ground loops
Timer tPG Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Operation mode Disable/ Enable of Zone timer, Ph-G
tPG 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-G
IMinPUPP 10 — 1000 %IB 1 20 Minimum pickup delta current (2 x current of lagging phase) for Phase-to-phase loops
IMinPUPG 10 — 1000 %IB 1 20 Minimum pickup phase current for Phase-to- ground loops
Table 154: ZDRDIR (21D) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description IBase 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Base setting for current level
VBase 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Base setting for voltage level
IMinPUPP 5 — 30 %IB 1 10 Minimum pickup delta current (2 x current of lagging phase) for Phase-to-phase loops
Table continues on next page
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
324 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description IMinPUPG 5 — 30 %IB 1 5 Minimum pickup phase current for Phase-to-
ground loops
AngNegRes 90 — 175 Deg 1 115 Angle of blinder in second quadrant for forward direction
AngDir 5 — 45 Deg 1 15 Angle of blinder in fourth quadrant for forward direction
6.9.6 Technical data Table 155: ZMRPDIS, ZMRAPDIS (21) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Number of zones Max 5 with selectable
direction —
Minimum operate residual current, zone 1
(5-1000)% of IBase —
Minimum operate current, phase- to-phase and phase-to-ground
(10-1000)% of IBase —
Positive sequence reactance (0.10-3000.00) / phase
2.0% static accuracy 2.0 degrees static angular accuracy Conditions: Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Vn Current range: (0.5-30) x In Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees
Positive sequence resistance (0.01-1000.00) / phase
Zero sequence reactance (0.10-9000.00) / phase
Zero sequence resistance (0.01-3000.00) / phase
Fault resistance, phase-to- ground
(0.10-9000.00) /loop
Fault resistance, phase-to-phase (0.10-3000.00) /loop
Dynamic overreach <5% at 85 degrees measured with CVTs and 0.5 <30
—
Impedance zone timers (0.000-60.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
Operate time 24 ms typically —
Reset ratio 105% typically —
Reset time 30 ms typically —
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
325 Technical reference manual
6.10 Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle FRPSPDIS (21)
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle
FRPSPDIS
Z
SYMBOL-DD V1 EN
21
6.10.1 Introduction The operation of transmission networks today is in many cases close to the stability limit. Due to environmental considerations, the rate of expansion and reinforcement of the power system is reduced, for example, difficulties to get permission to build new power lines. The ability to accurately and reliably classify the different types of fault, so that single pole tripping and autoreclosing can be used plays an important role in this matter. Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle FRPSPDIS (21) is designed to accurately select the proper fault loop in the distance function dependent on the fault type.
The heavy load transfer that is common in many transmission networks may make fault resistance coverage difficult to achieve. Therefore, FRPSPDIS (21) has a built-in algorithm for load encroachment, which gives the possibility to enlarge the resistive setting of both the phase selection and the measuring zones without interfering with the load.
The extensive output signals from the phase selection gives also important information about faulty phase(s) which can be used for fault analysis.
A current-based phase selection is also included. The measuring elements continuously measure three phase currents and the residual current and, compare them with the set values.
6.10.2 Principle of operation The basic impedance algorithm for the operation of the phase selection measuring elements is the same as for the distance zone measuring function. Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle (FRPSPDIS, 21) includes six impedance measuring loops; three intended for phase-to-ground faults, and three intended for phase- to-phase as well as for three-phase faults.
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
326 Technical reference manual
The difference, compared to the distance zone measuring function, is in the combination of the measuring quantities (currents and voltages) for different types of faults.
The characteristic is basically non-directional, but FRPSPDIS (21) uses information from the directional function ZDRDIR to discriminate whether the fault is in forward or reverse direction.
The pickup condition PHSELZ is essentially based on the following criteria:
Residual current criteria, that is, separation of faults with and without ground connection
Regular quadrilateral impedance characteristic Load encroachment characteristics is always active but can be switched off by
selecting a high setting.
The current pickup condition PHSELI is based on the following criteria:
Residual current criteria No quadrilateral impedance characteristic. The impedance reach outside the load
area is theoretically infinite. The practical reach, however, will be determined by the minimum operating current limits.
Load encroachment characteristic is always active, but can be switched off by selecting a high setting.
The PHSELI output is non-directional. The directionality is determined by the distance zones directional function ZDRDIR.
There are output from FRPSPDIS (21) that indicate whether a pickup is in forward or reverse direction or non-directional, for example FWD_A, REV_A and NDIR_A.
These directional indications are based on the sector boundaries of the directional function and the impedance setting of FRPSPDIS (21) function. Their operating characteristics are illustrated in figure 101.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
327 Technical reference manual
en05000668_ansi.vsd
R
X
R
X
R
X
Non-directional (ND) Forward (FWD) Reverse (REV)
60
60 60
60
ANSI05000668 V1 EN
Figure 169: Characteristics for non-directional, forward and reverse operation of Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle (FRPSPDIS, 21)
The setting of the load encroachment function may influence the total operating characteristic, for more information, refer to section «Load encroachment».
The input DIRCND contains binary coded information about the directional coming from the directional function ZDRDIR (21D). It shall be connected to the STDIR output on ZDRDIR (21D). This information is also transferred to the input DIRCND on the distance measuring zones, that is, the ZMRPDIS (21) block.
The code built up for the directionality is as follows:
STDIR= FWD_A*1+FWD_B*4+FWD_C*16+FWD_AB*64+ +FWD_BC*256+FWD_CA*1024+REV_A*2+REV_B*8+REV_C*32+ +REV_AB*128+REV_BC*512+REV_CA*2048
If the binary information is 1 then it will be considered that we have pickup in forward direction in phase A. If the binary code is 3 then we have pickup in forward direction in phase A and B etc.
The or PHSEL output contains, in a similar way as DIRCND, binary coded information, in this case information about the condition for opening correct fault loop in the distance measuring element. It shall be connected to the PHSEL input on the ZMRPDIS distance measuring zones (21) block.
The code built up for release of the measuring fault loops is as follows:
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
328 Technical reference manual
PHSEL = AG*1+BG*2+CG*4+AB*8+BC*16+CA*32
6.10.2.1 Phase-to-ground fault
Index PHS in images and equations reference settings for Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle (FRPSPDIS, 21).
( , ) ( , )
PHSn VA B C IA B C
Z =
EQUATION1554 V1 EN (Equation 64)
where:
n corresponds to the particular phase (n=1, 2 or 3)
The characteristic for FRPSPDIS (21) function at phase-to-ground fault is according to figure 102. The characteristic has a settable angle for the resistive boundary in the first quadrant of 70.
The resistance RN and reactance XN are the impedance in the ground-return path defined according to equation 27 and equation 28.
0 1
3
R PE R PE RN
— =
EQUATION-2125 V1 EN (Equation 65)
0 1 3
R RRN — =
EQUATION1256 V1 EN (Equation 65)
0 1 3
X XXN — =
EQUATION1257 V1 EN (Equation 66)
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
329 Technical reference manual
IEC09000633-1-en.vsd
RFFwPE
X1+XN
R (Ohm/loop)
X (ohm/loop)
RFRvPE
RFRvPE
RFFwPE
R1PE+RN
RFRvPE
R1PE+RN
X1+XN
RFFwPE
IEC09000633 V1 EN
Figure 170: Characteristic of FRPSPDIS (21) for phase to fault (directional lines are drawn as «line-dot-dot-line»)
Besides this, the 3I0 residual current must fulfil the conditions according to equation 27 and equation 28.
03 I 0.5 IMinOpPE EQUATION2108 V1 EN (Equation 67)
0 0
3 _ 3 max
100
I Enable PG I Iph
EQUATION1812-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 68)
where:
IMinOpPE is the minimum operation current for forward zones
3I0Enable_PG is the setting for the minimum residual current needed to enable operation in the phase-to- ground fault loops (in %).
Iphmax is the maximum phase current in any of three phases.
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
330 Technical reference manual
6.10.2.2 Phase-to-phase fault
For a phase-to-phase fault, the measured impedance by FRPSPDIS (21) is according to equation 29.
2 Vm Vn
ZPHS In
— =
— EQUATION1813-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 69)
Vm is the leading phase voltage, Vn the lagging phase voltage and In the phase current in the lagging phase n.
The operation characteristic is shown in figure 103.
IEC09000634-1-en.vsd
X1
R (ohm/phase)
X (ohm/phase)
0.5RFFwPP
R1PP
R1PP
X1
0.5RFFwPP 0.5FRvPP
0.5RFRvPP
0.5RFRvPP 0.5RFFwPP IEC09000634 V1 EN
Figure 171: The operation characteristic for FRPSPDIS (21) at phase-to-phase fault (directional lines are drawn as «line-dot-dot-line»)
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
331 Technical reference manual
In the same way as the condition for phase-to-ground fault, there are current conditions that have to be fulfilled in order to release the phase-to-phase loop. Those are according to equation 30 or equation 31.
3 0 3 0 _I I Enable PG<
EQUATION1814-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 70)
3 0 3 0 _I I BLK PP<
EQUATION1815-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 71)
where:
3I0Enable_PG is the minimum operation current for forward ground measuring loops,
3I0BLK_PP is 3I0 limit for blocking phase-to-phase measuring loop and
Iphmax is maximal magnitude of the phase currents.
6.10.2.3 Three-phase faults
The operation conditions for three-phase faults are the same as for phase-to-phase fault, that is equation 29, equation 30 and equation 31 are used to release the operation of the function.
However, the reach is expanded by a factor 2/3 (approximately 1.1547) in all directions. At the same time the characteristic is rotated 30 degrees, counter-clockwise. The characteristic is shown in figure 104.
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
332 Technical reference manual
0.5RFFwPPK3
K3 = 2 / sqrt(3)
X1K3
0.5RFRvPPK3
30 deg
R (ohm/phase)
X (ohm/phase)
4 X1PP 3
IEC09000635-1-en.vsd
30 deg 2 3
RFwPP
IEC09000635 V2 EN
Figure 172: The characteristic of FRPSPDIS (21) for three-phase fault (set angle 70)
6.10.2.4 Load encroachment
Each of the six measuring loops has its own load encroachment characteristic based on the corresponding loop impedance. The load encroachment functionality is always active, but can be switched off by selecting a high setting.
The outline of the characteristic is presented in figure 106. As illustrated, the resistive blinders are set individually in forward and reverse direction while the angle of the sector is the same in all four quadrants.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
333 Technical reference manual
R
X
RLdFwd
RLdRev LdAngle
LdAngleLdAngle
LdAngle
en05000196_ansi.vsd ANSI05000196 V1 EN
Figure 173: Characteristic of load encroachment function
The influence of load encroachment function on the operation characteristic is dependent on the chosen operation mode of FRPSPDIS (21) function. When output signal PHSELZ is selected, the characteristic for FRPSPDIS (21) (and also zone measurement depending on settings) will be reduced by the load encroachment characteristic, see figure 107.
When output signal PHSELI is selected, the operation characteristic will be as in figure 106. The reach will in this case be limit by the minimum operation current and the distance measuring zones.
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
334 Technical reference manual
R
X
PHSELZ DLECND
R
X
ANSI10000099-1-en.vsd ANSI10000099 V1 EN
Figure 174: Difference in operating characteristic depending on operation mode when load encroachment is activated
When FRPSPDIS (21) is set to operate together with a distance measuring zone the resultant operate characteristic could look like in figure 107. The figure shows a distance measuring zone operating in forward direction. Thus, the operating area of the zone together with the load encroachment is highlighted in black.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
335 Technical reference manual
R
X
Distance measuring zone
Directional line
Load encroachment characteristic
«Phase selection» «quadrilateral» zone
en05000673.vsd IEC05000673 V1 EN
Figure 175: Operating characteristic in forward direction when load encroachment is activated
Figure 107 is valid for phase-to-ground. During a three-phase fault, or load, when the quadrilateral phase-to-phase characteristic is subject to enlargement and rotation the operate area is transformed according to figure 108. Notice in particular what happens with the resistive blinders of the «phase selection» «quadrilateral» zone. Due to the 30- degree rotation, the angle of the blinder in quadrant one is now 100 degrees instead of the original 70 degrees (if the angle setting is 70 degrees). The blinder that is nominally located to quadrant four will at the same time tilt outwards and increase the resistive reach around the R-axis. Consequently, it will be more or less necessary to use the load encroachment characteristic in order to secure a margin to the load impedance.
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
336 Technical reference manual
R
X
Distance measuring zone
Phase selection Quadrilateral zone
IEC09000049-1-en.vsd
)/( phaseW
)/( phaseW
IEC09000049 V1 EN
Figure 176: Operating characteristic for FRPSPDIS (21) in forward direction for three-phase fault, ohm/phase domain
The result from rotation of the load characteristic at a fault between two phases is presented in fig 109. Since the load characteristic is based on the same measurement as the quadrilateral characteristic, it will rotate with the quadrilateral characteristic clockwise by 30 degrees when subject to a pure phase-to-phase fault. At the same time the characteristic will «shrink» by 2/3, from the full RLdFw and RLdRv reach, which is valid at load or three-phase fault.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
337 Technical reference manual
R
X
IEC08000437.vsd
IEC08000437 V1 EN
Figure 177: Rotation of load characteristic for a fault between two phases
There is a gain in selectivity by using the same measurement as for the quadrilateral characteristic since not all phase-to-phase loops will be fully affected by a fault between two phases. It should also provide better fault resistive coverage in quadrant one. The relative loss of fault resistive coverage in quadrant four should not be a problem even for applications on series compensated lines.
6.10.2.5 Minimum operate currents
The operation of Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle (FRPSPDIS, 21) is blocked if the magnitude of input currents falls below certain threshold values.
The phase-to-ground loop n is blocked if In<IMinPUPG, where In is the RMS value of the current in phase n (A or B or C).
The phase-to-phase loop mn is blocked if (2In<IMinOpPPIMinPUPP).
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
338 Technical reference manual
6.10.2.6 Simplified logic diagrams
Figure 110 presents schematically the creation of the phase-to-phase and phase-to- ground operating conditions. Consider only the corresponding part of measuring and logic circuits, when only a phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase measurement is available within the IED.
ANSI09000149-2-en.vsd
AND
AND
AND
Bool to integer
DLECND
STPG
STPP
IRELPG
IRELPP
BLOCK AND
Load encroachment block
0 20ms0
10ms
0 15ms
0 15ms
03I IMinPUPG<
0 max 3 0 _
3 100
I BLK PP I Iph<
03 0.5I IMinPUPG
0 3 0 _
3 100
max I Enable PG
I Iph
ANSI09000149 V2 EN
Figure 178: Phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground operating conditions (residual current criteria)
A special attention is paid to correct phase selection at evolving faults. A PHSEL output signal is created as a combination of the load encroachment characteristic and current criteria, refer to figure 110. This signal can be configured to STCND functional input signals of the distance protection zone and this way influence the operation of the phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground zone measuring elements and their phase related pickup and tripping signals.
Figure 111 presents schematically the composition of non-directional phase selective signals NDIR_A (B or C). Internal signals ZMn and ZMmn (m and n change between A, B and C according to the phase) represent the fulfilled operating criteria for each separate loop measuring element, that is within the characteristic.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
339 Technical reference manual
ANSI00000545-3-en.vsd
ZMA
ZMB
AND
AND
ANDZMC
IRELPG
AND
AND
AND
ZMAB
ZMBC3
ZMCA
IRELPP
INDIR_A INDIR_B INDIR_3
OR
OR
OR
OR
INDIR_CA
INDIR_BC
INDIR_AB
PHSEL_G
PHSEL_A
PHSEL_B
PHSEL_C
OR PHSEL_PP
15 ms 0
15 ms 0
15 ms 0
15 ms 0
15 ms 0
ANSI00000545 V3 EN
Figure 179: Composition on non-directional phase selection signals
Composition of the directional (forward and reverse) phase selective signals is presented schematically in figure 112 and figure 113. The directional criteria appears as a condition for the correct phase selection in order to secure a high phase selectivity for simultaneous and evolving faults on lines within the complex network configurations. Internal signals DFWLn and DFWLnLm present the corresponding directional signals for measuring loops with phases Ln and Lm. Designation FW (figure 113) represents the forward direction as well as the designation RV (figure 112) represents the reverse direction. All directional signals are derived within the corresponding digital signal processor.
Figure 112 presents additionally a composition of a PHSELZ output signal, which is created on the basis of impedance measuring conditions. This signal can be configured to PHSEL functional input signals of the distance protection zone and this way influence the operation of the phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground zone measuring elements and their phase related pickup and tripping signals.
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
340 Technical reference manual
ANSI00000546-2-en.vsd
INDIR_A
DRV_A AND
AND INDIR_AB
DRV_AB
AND INDIR_CA
DRV_CA
AND INDIR_B
DRV_B
AND INDIR_AB
DRV_BC AND INDIR_BC
AND INDIR_C
DRV_C
AND INDIR_BC
AND INDIR_CA
OR
OR
OR
OR
t 15 ms
t 15 ms
t 15 ms
t
15 ms
REV_A
REV_G
REV_B
REV_C
INDIR_A INDIR_B INDIR_C INDIR_AB INDIR_BC INDIR_CA
Bool to integer
PHSELZ
OR t
15 ms REV_PP
ANSI00000546 V2 EN
Figure 180: Composition of phase selection signals for reverse direction
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
341 Technical reference manual
ANSI05000201-3-en.vsd
INDIR_A
DFW_A AND
AND INDIR_AB
DFW_AB
AND INDIR_CA
DFW_CA
AND INDIR_B
DFW_B
AND INDIR_AB
DFW_BC AND INDIR_BC
AND INDIR_C
DFW_C
AND INDIR_BC
AND INDIR_CA
OR
OR
OR
OR
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
OR
OR
FWD_IPH
FWD_A
FWD_G
FWD_B
FWD_2PH
FWD_C
FWD_3PH
OR FWD_PP
15 ms 0
15 ms 0
15 ms 0
15 ms 0
15 ms 0
15 ms 0
15 ms 0
15 ms 0
0 15 ms
0 15 ms
ANSI05000201 V3 EN
Figure 181: Composition of phase selection signals for forward direction
Figure114 presents the composition of output signals TRIP and START, where internal signals STNDPP, STFWPP and STRVPP are the equivalent to internal signals STNDPE, STFWPE and STRVPE, but for the phase-to-phase loops.
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
342 Technical reference manual
ANSI08000441 1-1-en.vsd
AND
AND
OR t tPP
t tPE
TRIP
TimerPP=Disabled AND
TimerPE=Disabled AND
OR
STFWPE
STRVPE
STNDPE
STFWPP
STRVPP
STNDPP
OR
OR
OR RI
ANSI08000441-1 V1 EN
Figure 182: TRIP and START signal logic
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
343 Technical reference manual
6.10.3 Function block
ANSI08000430-2-en.vsd
FRPSPDIS (21) I3P* V3P* BLOCK DIRCND
TRIP BFI
FWD_A FWD_B FWD_C FWD_G REV_A REV_B REV_C REV_G NDIR_A NDIR_B NDIR_C NDIR_G
FWD_1PH FWD_2PH FWD_3PH PHG_FLT
PHPH_FLT PHSELZ DLECND
ANSI08000430 V2 EN
Figure 183: FRPSPDIS (21) function block
6.10.4 Input and output signals Table 156: FRPSPDIS (21) Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Group signal for current input
V3P GROUP SIGNAL
— Group signal for voltage input
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
DIRCND INTEGER 0 External directional condition
Table 157: FRPSPDIS (21) Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip by pilot communication scheme logic
BFI BOOLEAN Start in any phase or loop
FWD_A BOOLEAN Fault detected in phaseA — forward direction
FWD_B BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase B — forward direction
FWD_C BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase C — forward direction
FWD_G BOOLEAN Ground fault detected in forward direction
REV_A BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase A- reverse direction
Table continues on next page
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
344 Technical reference manual
Name Type Description REV_B BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase B — reverse direction
REV_C BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase C — reverse direction
REV_G BOOLEAN Ground fault detected in reverse direction
NDIR_A BOOLEAN Non directional fault detected in Phase A
NDIR_B BOOLEAN Non directional fault detected in Phase B
NDIR_C BOOLEAN Non directional fault detected in Phase C
NDIR_G BOOLEAN Non directional phase-to-ground fault detected
FWD_1PH BOOLEAN Single phase-to-ground fault in forward direction
FWD_2PH BOOLEAN Phase-to-phase fault in forward direction
FWD_3PH BOOLEAN Three phase fault in forward direction
PHG_FLT BOOLEAN Release condition to enable phase-ground measuring elements
PHPH_FLT BOOLEAN Release condition to enable phase-phase measuring elements
PHSELZ INTEGER 21 pickup with load encroachment and 3I0
DLECND INTEGER Pickup for load encroachment and 3I0
6.10.5 Setting parameters Table 158: FRPSPDIS (21) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description IBase 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Base current, i.e. rated current
VBase 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.01 400.00 Base voltage, i.e. rated voltage
3I0BLK_PP 10 — 100 %IPh 1 40 3I0 limit for disabling phase-to-phase measuring loops
3I0Enable_PG 10 — 100 %IPh 1 20 3I0 pickup for releasing phase-to-ground measuring loops
RLdFwd 1.00 — 3000.00 ohm/p 0.01 80.00 Forward resistive reach for the load impedance area
RldRev 1.00 — 3000.00 ohm/p 0.01 80.00 Reverse resistive reach for the load impedance area
LdAngle 5 — 70 Deg 1 30 Load angle determining the load impedance area
X1 0.50 — 3000.00 ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach
R1PP 0.10 — 1000.00 ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Positive seq. resistance for characteristic angle, Ph-Ph
X1FwPG 0.10 — 1000.00 ohm/p 0.01 1.50 Positive seq. resistance for characteristic angle, Ph-G
X0 0.50 — 9000.00 ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero sequence reactance reach
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
345 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description R0PG 0.50 — 3000.00 ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Zero seq. resistance for zone characteristic
angle, Ph-G
RFltFwdPP 0.50 — 3000.00 ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, forward
RFltRevPP 0.50 — 3000.00 ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, reverse
RFltFwdPG 1.00 — 9000.00 ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-G, forward
RFltRevPG 1.00 — 9000.00 ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-G, reverse
IMinPUPP 5 — 500 %IB 1 10 Minimum pickup delta current (2 x current of lagging phase) for Phase-to-phase loops
IMinPUPG 5 — 500 %IB 1 5 Minimum pickup phase current for Phase-to- ground loops
Table 159: FRPSPDIS (21) Group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description TimerPP Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Operation mode Disable/Enable of Zone
timer, Ph-Ph
tPP 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 3.000 Time delay to trip, Ph-Ph
TimerPE Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Operation mode Disable/ Enable of Zone timer, Ph-G
tPG 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 3.000 Time delay to trip, Ph-E
6.10.6 Technical data Table 160: FRPSPDIS (21) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Minimum operate current (5-500)% of IBase —
Reactive reach, positive sequence
(0.503000.00) /phase 2.0% static accuracy 2.0 degrees static angular accuracy Conditions: Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x In Current range: (0.5-30) x IBase Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees
Resistive reach, positive sequence
(0.101000.00) /phase
Reactive reach, zero sequence (0.509000.00) /phase
Resistive reach, zero sequence (0.503000.00) /phase
Fault resistance, phase-to- ground faults, forward and reverse
(1.009000.00) /loop
Fault resistance, phase-to- phase faults, forward and reverse
(0.503000.00) /loop
Load encroachment criteria: Load resistance, forward and reverse Safety load impedance angle
(1.003000.00) /phase (5-70) degrees
Reset ratio 105% typically —
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
346 Technical reference manual
6.11 Power swing detection ZMRPSB (68)
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Power swing detection ZMRPSB
Zpsb
SYMBOL-EE V1 EN
68
6.11.1 Introduction Power swings may occur after disconnection of heavy loads or trip of big generation plants.
Power swing detection function (ZMRPSB, 68) is used to detect power swings and initiate block of selected distance protection zones. Occurrence of ground-fault currents during a power swing inhibits the ZMRPSB (68) function to allow fault clearance.
6.11.2 Principle of operation Power swing detection (ZMRPSB ,68) function comprises an inner and an outer quadrilateral measurement characteristic with load encroachment, as shown in figure 184.
Its principle of operation is based on the measurement of the time it takes for a power swing transient impedance to pass through the impedance area between the outer and the inner characteristics. Power swings are identified by transition times longer than a transition time set on corresponding timers. The impedance measuring principle is the same as that used for the distance protection zones. The impedance and the characteristic passing times are measured in all three phases separately.
One-out-of-three or two-out-of-three operating modes can be selected according to the specific system operating conditions.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
347 Technical reference manual
R
jX
LdAngle
LdAngle
RLdOutFw
RLdInFw
R1FInFwR1FInRv
RLdInRv
RLdOutRv
X1InFw X1OutFw ZL R1LIn
X1InRv
X1OutRv
ANSI05000175-2-en.vsd
DFw
j
j
j
DRv
DRv
DRv
DRv
DRv
DFw
DFw
DFw
DFw
DFw
ANSI05000175 V2 EN
Figure 184: Operating characteristic for ZMRPSB (68) function (setting parameters in italic)
The impedance measurement within ZMRPSB (68) function is performed by solving equation 72 and equation 73 (Typical equations are for phase A, similar equations are applicable for phases B and C).
Re A
A
V Rset I
EQUATION1557 V1 EN (Equation 72)
Im A
A
V Xset I
EQUATION1558 V1 EN (Equation 73)
The Rset and Xset are R and X boundaries.
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
348 Technical reference manual
6.11.2.1 Resistive reach in forward direction
To avoid load encroachment, the resistive reach is limited in forward direction by setting the parameter RLdOutFw which is the outer resistive load boundary value while the inner resistive boundary is calculated according to equation 74.
RLdInFw = kLdRFwRLdOutFw EQUATION1185 V2 EN (Equation 74)
where:
kLdRFw is a settable multiplication factor less than 1
The slope of the load encroachment inner and outer boundary is defined by setting the parameter LdAngle.
The load encroachment in the fourth quadrant uses the same settings as in the first quadrant (same LdAngle and RLdOutFw and calculated value RLdInFw).
The quadrilateral characteristic in the first quadrant is tilted to get a better adaptation to the distance measuring zones. The angle is the same as the line angle and derived from the setting of the reactive reach inner boundary X1InFw and the line resistance for the inner boundary R1LIn. The fault resistance coverage for the inner boundary is set by the parameter R1FInFw.
From the setting parameter RLdOutFw and the calculated value RLdInFw a distance between the inner and outer boundary, DFw, is calculated. This value is valid for R direction in first and fourth quadrant and for X direction in first and second quadrant.
6.11.2.2 Resistive reach in reverse direction
To avoid load encroachment in reverse direction, the resistive reach is limited by setting the parameter RLdOutRv for the outer boundary of the load encroachment zone. The distance to the inner resistive load boundary RLdInRv is determined by using the setting parameter kLdRRv in equation 75.
RLdInRv = kLdRRvRLdOutRv EQUATION1187 V2 EN (Equation 75)
where:
kLdRRv is a settable multiplication factor less than 1
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
349 Technical reference manual
From the setting parameter RLdOutRv and the calculated value RLdInRv, a distance between the inner and outer boundary, DRv, is calculated. This value is valid for R direction in second and third quadrant and for X direction in third and fourth quadrant.
The inner resistive characteristic in the second quadrant outside the load encroachment part corresponds to the setting parameter R1FInRv for the inner boundary. The outer boundary is internally calculated as the sum of DRv+R1FInRv.
The inner resistive characteristic in the third quadrant outside the load encroachment zone consist of the sum of the settings R1FInRv and the line resistance R1LIn. The angle of the tilted lines outside the load encroachment is the same as the tilted lines in the first quadrant. The distance between the inner and outer boundary is the same as for the load encroachment in reverse direction, that is DRv.
6.11.2.3 Reactive reach in forward and reverse direction
The inner characteristic for the reactive reach in forward direction correspond to the setting parameter X1InFw and the outer boundary is defined as X1InFw + DFw,
where:
DFw = RLdOutFw — KLdRFw RLdOutFw
The inner characteristic for the reactive reach in reverse direction correspond to the setting parameter X1InRv for the inner boundary and the outer boundary is defined as X1InRv + DRv.
where:
DRv = RLdOutRv — KLdRRv RLdOutRv
6.11.2.4 Basic detection logic
The operation of the Power swing detection ZMRPSB (68) is only released if the magnitude of the current is above the setting of the min operating current, IMinPUPG.
ZMRPSB (68) function can operate in two operating modes:
The 1 out of 3 operating mode is based on detection of power swing in any of the three phases. Figure 185 presents a composition of an internal detection signal DET- A in this particular phase.
The 2 out of 3 operating mode is based on detection of power swing in at least two out of three phases. Figure 186 presents a composition of the detection signals DET1of3 and DET2of3.
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
350 Technical reference manual
Signals ZOUT_n (outer boundary) and ZIN_n (inner boundary) in figure 185 are related to the operation of the impedance measuring elements in each phase separately (n represents the corresponding A, B and C). They are internal signals, calculated by ZMRPSB (68) function.
The tP1 timer in figure 185 serve as detection of initial power swings, which are usually not as fast as the later swings are. The tP2 timer become activated for the detection of the consecutive swings, if the measured impedance exit the operate area and returns within the time delay, set on the tW waiting timer. The upper part of figure 185 (internal input signal ZOUT_A, ZIN_A, AND-gates and tP-timers) are duplicated for phase B and C. All tP1 and tP2 timers in the figure have the same settings.
ANSI05000113-2-en.vsd
AND ZINA
AND DET-A
OR
ANDAND
ZOUTA
-loop
ZOUTB ZOUTC
OR
detected
OR
-loop
0-tP1 0
0-tP2 0
0 0-tW
ANSI05000113 V2 EN
Figure 185: Detection of power swing in phase A
ANSI01000057-2-en.vsd
DET-A DET-B DET-C
DET1of3 — int.
DET2of3 — int.
AND
AND
AND
OR
OR
ANSI01000057 V2 EN
Figure 186: Detection of power swing for 1-of-3 and 2-of-3 operating mode
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
351 Technical reference manual
en05000114-1-ansi.vsd
TRSP
I0CHECK
AND BLK_I0
ANDBLK_SS
BLOCK
INHIBIT
ZOUT_C
ZOUT_B
ZOUT_A
DET1of3 — int. REL1PH BLK1PH
AND
DET2of3 — int. REL2PH BLK2PH
AND
EXT_PSD AND PICKUP
ZOUT
ZIN_A
ZIN_B
ZIN_C
ZIN
AND
OR
AND
AND
OR
OR
OR
OR
OR
-loop
-loop
0 0-tGF
10ms 0
0-tH 0
0 0-tR2
0-tR1 0
ANSI05000114 V2 EN
Figure 187: Simplified block diagram for ZMRPSB (68) function
6.11.2.5 Operating and inhibit conditions
Figure 187 presents a simplified logic diagram for the Power swing detection function ZMRPSB (68). The internal signals DET1of3 and DET2of3 relate to the detailed logic diagrams in figure 185 and figure 186 respectively.
Selection of the operating mode is possible by the proper configuration of the functional input signals REL1PH, BLK1PH, REL2PH, and BLK2PH.
The load encroachment characteristic can be switched off by setting the parameter OperationLdCh = Disabled, but notice that the DFw and DRv will still be calculated from RLdOutFw and RLdOutRv. The characteristic will in this case be only quadrilateral.
There are four different ways to form the internal INHIBIT signal:
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
352 Technical reference manual
Logical 1 on functional input BLOCK inhibits the output PICKUP signal instantaneously.
The INHIBIT internal signal is activated, if the power swing has been detected and the measured impedance remains within its operate characteristic for the time, which is longer than the time delay set on tR2 timer. It is possible to disable this condition by connecting the logical 1 signal to the BLK_SS functional input.
The INHIBIT internal signal is activated after the time delay, set on tR1 timer, if an ground-fault appears during the power swing (input IOCHECK is high) and the power swing has been detected before the ground-fault (activation of the signal I0CHECK). It is possible to disable this condition by connecting the logical 1 signal to the BLK_I0 functional input.
The INHIBIT logical signals becomes logical 1, if the functional input I0CHECK appears within the time delay, set on tGF timer and the impedance has been seen within the outer characteristic of ZMRPSB (68) operate characteristic in all three phases. This function prevents the operation of ZMRPSB (68) function in cases, when the circuit breaker closes onto persistent single-pole fault after single-pole autoreclosing dead time, if the initial single-pole fault and single-pole opening of the circuit breaker causes the power swing in the remaining two phases.
6.11.3 Function block
ANSI06000264-2-en.vsd
ZMRPSB (68) I3P* V3P* BLOCK BLK_SS BLK_I0 BLK1PH REL1PH BLK2PH REL2PH I0CHECK TRSP EXT_PSD
PICKUP ZOUT
ZIN
ANSI06000264 V2 EN
Figure 188: ZMRPSB (68) function block
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
353 Technical reference manual
6.11.4 Input and output signals Table 161: ZMRPSB (68) Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Group signal for current input
V3P GROUP SIGNAL
— Group signal for voltage input
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK_SS BOOLEAN 0 Block inhibit of start output for slow swing condition
BLK_I0 BOOLEAN 0 Block inhibit of start output for subsequent residual current detection
BLK1PH BOOLEAN 0 Block one-out-of-three-phase operating mode
REL1PH BOOLEAN 0 Release one-out-of-three-phase operating mode
BLK2PH BOOLEAN 0 Block two-out-of-three-phase operating mode
REL2PH BOOLEAN 0 Release two-out-of-three-phase operating mode
I0CHECK BOOLEAN 0 Residual current (3I0) detection used to inhibit power swing detection output
TRSP BOOLEAN 0 Single-pole tripping command issued by tripping function
EXT_PSD BOOLEAN 0 Input for external detection of power swing
Table 162: ZMRPSB (68) Output signals
Name Type Description PICKUP BOOLEAN Power swing detected
ZOUT BOOLEAN Measured impedance within outer impedance boundary
ZIN BOOLEAN Measured impedance within inner impedance boundary
6.11.5 Setting parameters Table 163: ZMRPSB (68) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Disbled/Enabled operation
X1InFw 0.10 — 3000.00 ohm 0.01 30.00 Inner reactive boundary, forward
R1LIn 0.10 — 1000.00 ohm 0.01 30.00 Line resistance for inner characteristic angle
R1FInFw 0.10 — 1000.00 ohm 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance coverage to inner resistive line, forward
X1InRv 0.10 — 3000.00 ohm 0.01 30.00 Inner reactive boundary, reverse
Table continues on next page
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
354 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description R1FInRv 0.10 — 1000.00 ohm 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance line to inner resistive
boundary, reverse
OperationLdCh Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Operation of load discrimination characteristic
RLdOutFw 0.10 — 3000.00 ohm 0.01 30.00 Outer resistive load boundary, forward
LdAngle 5 — 70 Deg 1 25 Load angle determining load impedance area
RLdOutRv 0.10 — 3000.00 ohm 0.01 30.00 Outer resistive load boundary, reverse
kLdRFw 0.50 — 0.90 Mult 0.01 0.75 Multiplication factor for inner resistive load boundary, forward
kLdRRv 0.50 — 0.90 Mult 0.01 0.75 Multiplication factor for inner resistive load boundary, reverse
tGF 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 3.000 Timer for overcoming single-pole reclosing dead time
IMinPUPG 5 — 30 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate current in % of IBase
IBase 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Base setting for current level settings
Table 164: ZMRPSB (68) Group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description tP1 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.045 Timer for detection of initial power swing
tP2 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.015 Timer for detection of subsequent power swings
tW 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.250 Waiting timer for activation of tP2 timer
tH 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.500 Timer for holding power swing PICKUP output
tR1 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.300 Timer giving delay to inhibit by the residual current
tR2 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Timer giving delay to inhibit at very slow swing
6.11.6 Technical data Table 165: ZMRPSB (68) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Reactive reach (0.10-3000.00) W/phase
2.0% static accuracy Conditions: Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Vn Current range: (0.5-30) x In Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees
Resistive reach (0.101000.00) W/loop
Timers (0.000-60.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
355 Technical reference manual
6.12 Power swing logic ZMRPSL
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Power swing logic ZMRPSL — —
6.12.1 Introduction Power Swing Logic (ZMRPSL) is a complementary function to Power Swing Detection (ZMRPSB,68) function. It provides possibility for selective tripping of faults on power lines during system oscillations (power swings or pole slips), when the distance protection function should normally be blocked. The complete logic consists of two different parts:
Communication and tripping part: provides selective tripping on the basis of special distance protection zones and a scheme communication logic, which are not blocked during the system oscillations.
Blocking part: blocks unwanted operation of instantaneous distance protection zone 1 for oscillations, which are initiated by faults and their clearing on the adjacent power lines and other primary elements.
6.12.2 Principle of operation
6.12.2.1 Communication and tripping logic
Communication and tripping logic as used by the power swing distance protection zones is schematically presented in figure 189.
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
356 Technical reference manual
PUDOG AR1P1 AND
PUPSD BLOCK AND 0-tCS AND
CSUR
CS
0-tBlkTr
AND
0-tTrip
CR PLTR_CRD OR
AND BLKZMUR
TRIP
en06000236_ansi.en
0
0
0
ANSI06000236 V1 EN
Figure 189: Simplified logic diagram power swing communication and tripping logic
The complete logic remains blocked as long as there is a logical one on the BLOCK functional input signal. Presence of the logical one on the PUDOG functional input signal also blocks the logic as long as this block is not released by the logical one on the AR1P1 functional input signal. The functional output signal BLKZMUR remains logical one as long as the function is not blocked externally (BLOCK is logical zero) and the ground-fault is detected on protected line (PUDOG is logical one), which is connected in three-phase mode (AR1P1 is logical zero). Timer tBlkTr prolongs the duration of this blocking condition, if the measured impedance remains within the operate area of the Power Swing Detection (ZMRPSB, 68) function (PUPSD input active). The BLKZMUR can be used to block the operation of the power-swing zones.
Logical one on functional input CSUR, which is normally connected to the TRIP functional output of a power swing carrier sending zone, activates functional output CS, if the function is not blocked by one of the above conditions. It also activates the TRIP functional output.
Initiation of the CS functional output is possible only, if the PUPSD input has been active longer than the time delay set on the security timer tCS.
Simultaneous presence of the functional input signals CACC and CR (local trip condition) also activates the TRIP functional output, if the function is not blocked by one of the above conditions and the PUPSD signal has been present longer then the time delay set on the trip timer tTrip.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
357 Technical reference manual
6.12.2.2 Blocking logic
Figure 190 presents the logical circuits, which control the operation of the underreaching zone (zone 1) at power swings, caused by the faults and their clearance on the remote power lines.
PUZMUR BLOCK
AND PUZMOR PUZMPSD PUPSD
0-tDZ
0-tZL
AND
OR
AND
AND
AND
-loop
OR PUZMURPS
BLKZMOR
AND
en06000237_ansi.vsd
0
0
ANSI06000237 V1 EN
Figure 190: Control of underreaching distance protection (Zone 1) at power swings caused by the faults and their clearance on adjacent lines and other system elements
The logic is disabled by a logical one on functional input BLOCK. It can start only if the following conditions are simultaneously fulfilled:
PUPSD functional input signal must be a logical zero. This means, that Power swing detection (ZMRPSB, 68) function must not detect power swinging over the protected power line.
PUZMPSD functional input must be a logical one. This means that the impedance must be detected within the external boundary of ZMRPSB (68) function.
PUZMOR functional input must be a logical one. This means that the fault must be detected by the overreaching distance protection zone, for example zone 2.
The PUZMURPS functional output, which can be used in complete terminal logic instead of a normal distance protection zone 1, becomes active under the following conditions:
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
358 Technical reference manual
If the PUZMUR signal appears at the same time as the PUZMOR or if it appears with a time delay, which is shorter than the time delay set on timer tDZ.
If the PUZMUR signal appears after the PUZMOR signal with a time delay longer than the delay set on the tDZ timer, and remains active longer than the time delay set on the tZL timer.
The functional output signal can be used to block the operation of the higher distance protection zone, if the fault has moved into the zone 1 operate area after tDZ time delay.
6.12.3 Function block
ANSI07000026-2-en.vsd
ZMRPSL BLOCK PUZMUR PUZMOR PUPSD PUDOG PUZMPSD PLTR_CRD AR1P1 CSUR CR
TRIP PUZMURPS
BLKZMUR BLKZMOR
CS
ANSI07000026 V2 EN
Figure 191: ZMRPSL function block
6.12.4 Input and output signals Table 166: ZMRPSL Input signals
Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PUZMUR BOOLEAN 0 Pickup of the underreaching zone
PUZMOR BOOLEAN 0 Pickup of the overreaching zone
PUPSD BOOLEAN 0 Power swing detected
PUDOG BOOLEAN 0 Pickup from ground Fault Protection in forward or reverse direction
PUZMPSD BOOLEAN 0 Operation of Power Swing Detection external characteristic
PLTR_CRD BOOLEAN 0 Overreaching ZM zone to be accelerated
AR1P1 BOOLEAN 0 Single pole auto-reclosing in progress
CSUR BOOLEAN 0 Carrier send by the underreaching power-swing zone
CR BOOLEAN 0 Carrier receive signal during power swing detection operation
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
359 Technical reference manual
Table 167: ZMRPSL Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip through Power Swing Logic
PUZMURPS BOOLEAN Pickup of Underreaching zone controlled by PSL to be used in configuration
BLKZMUR BOOLEAN Block trip of underreaching impedance zone
BLKZMOR BOOLEAN Block trip of overreaching distance protection zones
CS BOOLEAN Carrier send signal controlled by the power swing
6.12.5 Setting parameters Table 168: ZMRPSL Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
tDZ 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.050 Permitted max oper time diff between higher and lower zone
tDZMUR 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Delay for oper of underreach zone with detected diff in oper time
tCS 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Conditional timer for sending the CS at power swings
tTrip 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Conditional timer for tripping at power swings
tBlkTr 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.300 Timer for blocking the overreaching zones trip
6.13 Pole slip protection PSPPPAM (78)
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Pole slip protection PSPPPAM Ucos 78
6.13.1 Introduction Sudden events in an electrical power system such as large changes in load, fault occurrence or fault clearance, can cause power oscillations referred to as power swings. In a non-recoverable situation, the power swings become so severe that the synchronism is lost, a condition referred to as pole slipping. The main purpose of the pole slip protection (PSPPPAM ,78) is to detect, evaluate, and take the required action for pole slipping occurrences in the power system. The electrical system parts swinging
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
360 Technical reference manual
to each other can be separated with the line/s closest to the centre of the power swing allowing the two systems to be stable as separated islands.
6.13.2 Principle of operation If the generator is faster than the power system, the rotor movement in the impedance and voltage diagram is from right to left and generating is signalled. If the generator is slower than the power system, the rotor movement is from left to right and motoring is signalled (the power system drives the generator as if it were a motor).
The movements in the impedance plain can be seen in figure 192. The transient behaviour is described by the transient EMF’s EA and EB, and by X’d, XT and the transient system impedance ZS.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
361 Technical reference manual
IEC06000437_2_en.vsd
IEDB A
EB EAXd XT XS
Zone 1 Zone 2
jX
R
Xd
XT
XS
B
A
d Apparent generator impedance
Pole slip impedance movement
IEC06000437 V2 EN
Figure 192: Movements in the impedance plain
where:
X’d = transient reactance of the generator
XT = short-circuit reactance of the step-up transformer
ZS = impedance of the power system A
The detection of rotor angle is enabled when:
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
362 Technical reference manual
the minimum current exceeds 0.10 IN (IN is IBase parameter set under general setting).
the maximum voltage falls below 0.92 VBase the voltage Ucos (the voltage in phase with the generator current) has an angular
velocity of 0.2…8 Hz and the corresponding direction is not blocked.
en07000004.vsd
IEC07000004 V1 EN
Figure 193: Different generator quantities as function of the angle between the equivalent generators
An alarm is given when movement of the rotor is detected and the rotor angle exceeds the angle set for ‘WarnAngle’.
Slipping is detected when:
a change of rotor angle of min. 50 ms is recognized the slip line is crossed between ZA and ZB.
When the impedance crosses the slip line between ZB and ZC it counts as being in zone 1 and between ZC and ZA in zone 2. The entire distance ZA-ZB becomes zone 1 when signal EXTZONE1 is high (external device detects the direction of the centre of slipping).
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
363 Technical reference manual
After the first slip, the signals ZONE1 or ZONE2 and depending on the direction of slip — either GEN or MOTOR are issued.
Every time pole slipping is detected, the impedance of the point where the slip line is crossed and the instantaneous slip frequency are displayed as measurements.
Further slips are only detected, if they are in the same direction and if the rate of rotor movement has reduced in relation to the preceding slip or the slip line is crossed in the opposite direction outside ZA-ZB. A further slip in the opposite direction within ZA-ZB resets all the signals and is then signalled itself as a first slip.
The TRIP1 tripping command and signal are generated after N1 slips in zone 1, providing the rotor angle is less than TripAngle. The TRIP2 signal is generated after N2 slips in zone 2, providing the rotor angle is less than TripAngle.
All signals are reset if:
the direction of movement reverses the rotor angle detector resets without a slip being counted or no rotor relative movement was detected during the time ResetTime.
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
364 Technical reference manual
en07000005_ansi.vsd
Imin > 0.10 IBase
Vcosj < 0.92 VBase
0.2 Slip.Freq. 8 Hz
AND
d startAngle
AND PICKUP
Z cross line ZA — ZC
Z cross line ZC — ZB
AND
AND
ZONE1
ZONE2
Counter
N1Limit a b a b
d tripAngle
AND TRIP1
Counter
N2Limit a b a b
AND TRIP2
OR TRIP
ANSI07000005 V1 EN
Figure 194: Simplified logic diagram for pole slip protection PSPPPAM (78)
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
365 Technical reference manual
6.13.3 Function block
ANSI10000045-1-en.vsd
PSPPPAM (78) I3P* V3P* BLOCK BLKGEN BLKMOTOR EXTZONE1
TRIP TRIP1 TRIP2
PICKUP ZONE1 ZONE2
GEN MOTOR SFREQ
SLIPZOHM SLIPZPER
VCOS VCOSPER
ANSI10000045 V1 EN
Figure 195: PSPPPAM (78) function block
6.13.4 Input and output signals Table 169: PSPPPAM (78) Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Current group connection
V3P GROUP SIGNAL
— Voltage group connection
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKGEN BOOLEAN 0 Block operation in generating direction
BLKMOTOR BOOLEAN 0 Block operation in motor direction
EXTZONE1 BOOLEAN 0 Extension of zone1 with zone2 region
Table 170: PSPPPAM (78) Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
TRIP1 BOOLEAN Trip1 after the N1Limit slip in zone1
TRIP2 BOOLEAN Trip2 after the N2Limit slip in zone2
PICKUP BOOLEAN Common start signal
ZONE1 BOOLEAN First slip in zone1 region
ZONE2 BOOLEAN First slip in zone2 region
GEN BOOLEAN Generator is faster than the system
MOTOR BOOLEAN Generator is slower than the system
SFREQ REAL Slip frequency
Table continues on next page
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
366 Technical reference manual
Name Type Description SLIPZOHM REAL Slip impedance in ohms
SLIPZPER REAL Slip impedance in percent of ZBase
VCOS REAL UCosPhi voltage
VCOSPER REAL VCosPhi voltage in percent of VBase
6.13.5 Setting parameters Table 171: PSPPPAM (78) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Operation Enable / Disable
OperationZ1 Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Operation Enable/Disable zone Z1
OperationZ2 Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Operation Enable/Disable zone Z2
ImpedanceZA 0.00 — 1000.00 % 0.01 10.00 Forward impedance in % of Zbase
ImpedanceZB 0.00 — 1000.00 % 0.01 10.00 Reverse impedance in % of Zbase
ImpedanceZC 0.00 — 1000.00 % 0.01 10.00 Impedance of zone1 limit in % of Zbase
AnglePhi 72.00 — 90.00 Deg 0.01 85.00 Angle of the slip impedance line
StartAngle 0.0 — 180.0 Deg 0.1 110.0 Rotor angle for the pickup signal
TripAngle 0.0 — 180.0 Deg 0.1 90.0 Rotor angle for the trip1 and trip2 signals
N1Limit 1 — 20 — 1 1 Count limit for the trip1 signal
N2Limit 1 — 20 — 1 3 Count limit for the trip2 signal
Table 172: PSPPPAM (78) Group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description ResetTime 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Time without slip to reset all signals
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
367 Technical reference manual
Table 173: PSPPPAM (78) Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description IBase 0.1 — 99999.9 A 0.1 3000.0 Base Current (primary phase current in
Amperes)
Vbase 0.1 — 9999.9 kV 0.1 20.0 Base Voltage (primary phase-to-phase voltage in kV)
MeasureMode PosSeq AB BC CA
— — PosSeq Measuring mode (PosSeq, AB, BC, CA)
InvertCTcurr No Yes
— — No Invert current direction
6.13.6 Technical data Table 174: PSPPPAM (78) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Impedance reach (0.001000.00)% of Zbase 2.0% of Vn/In
Characteristic angle (72.0090.00) degrees 5.0 degrees
Start and trip angles (0.0180.0) degrees 5.0 degrees
Zone 1 and Zone 2 trip counters (1-20) —
6.14 Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage and current based ZCVPSOF
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage and current based
ZCVPSOF — —
6.14.1 Introduction Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage and current based (ZCVPSOF) is a function that gives an instantaneous trip at closing of breaker onto a fault. A dead line detection check is provided to activate the function when the line is dead.
Mho distance protections can not operate for switch onto fault condition when the phase voltages are close to zero. An additional logic based on VI Level is used for this purpose.
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
368 Technical reference manual
6.14.2 Principle of operation Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage and current based function (ZCVPSOF) can be activated externally by Breaker Closed Input or internally (automatically) by using VI Level Based Logic see figure 196.
The activation from the Dead line detection function is released if the internal signal deadLine from the VILevel function is activated at the same time as the input ZACC is not activated during at least for a duration tDLD and the setting parameter AutoInit is set to Enabled.
When the setting AutoInit is Disabled, the function is activated by an external binary input BC. To get a trip one of the following operation modes must also be selected by the parameter Mode:
Mode = Impedance; trip is released if the input ZACC is activated (normal connected to non directional distance protection zone).
Mode = VILevel; trip is released if VILevel detector is activated.
Mode = VILvl&Imp; trip is initiated based on impedance measured criteria or VILevel detection.
The internal signal deadLine from the VILevel detector is activated if all three phase currents and voltages are below the setting IPhPickup and UVPickup.
VI Level based measurement detects the switch onto fault condition even though the voltage is very low. The logic is based on current and voltage levels. The internal signal SOTF VILevel is activated if a phase voltage is below the setting UVPickup and corresponding phase current is above the setting IPhPickup longer than the time tDuration.
ZCVPSOF can be activated externally from input BC and thus setting AutoInit is bypassed.
The function is released during a settable time tSOTF.
The function can be blocked by activating the input BLOCK.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
369 Technical reference manual
AND
AND
BLOCK
AutiInit=On
ZACC OR
TRIP
en07000084_ansi.vsd
VILevel detector
IL1 IL2 IL3 VA VB VC
IphPickup
VphPickup
deadLine
AND
AND OR
AND OR
SOTFVILevel
BC
Mode = Impedance
Mode = UILevel
Mode = UILvl&Imp
0 15
200 0 1000
0
ANSI07000084 V1 EN
Figure 196: Simplified logic diagram for Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage and current based.
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
370 Technical reference manual
6.14.3 Function block
ANSI06000459-2-en.vsd
ZCVPSOF I3P* V3P* BLOCK BC ZACC
TRIP
ANSI06000459 V2 EN
Figure 197: ZCVPSOF function block
6.14.4 Input and output signals Table 175: ZCVPSOF Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Current DFT
V3P GROUP SIGNAL
— Voltage DFT
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BC BOOLEAN 0 External enabling of SOTF
ZACC BOOLEAN 0 Distance zone to be accelerated by SOTF
Table 176: ZCVPSOF Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip by pilot communication scheme logic
6.14.5 Setting parameters Table 177: ZCVPSOF Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Enabled Disable/Enable Operation
IBase 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Base current (A)
VBase 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Base voltage Ph-Ph (kV)
Mode Impedance VILevel VILvl&Imp
— — VILevel Mode of operation of SOTF Function
AutoInit Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Automatic switch onto fault initialization
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
371 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description IphPickup 1 — 100 %IB 1 20 Current level for detection of dead line in % of
IBase
UVPickup 1 — 100 %VB 1 70 Voltage level for detection of dead line in % of VBase
tDuration 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Time delay for VI detection (s)
tSOTF 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Drop off delay time of switch onto fault function
tDLD 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Delay time for activation of dead line detection
6.14.6 Technical data Table 178: ZCVPSOF technical data
Parameter Range or value Accuracy Operate voltage, detection of dead line (1100)% of
VBase 0.5% of Vn
Operate current, detection of dead line (1100)% of IBase
1.0% of In
Delay following dead line detection input before Automatic switch into fault logic function is automatically enabled
(0.00060.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
Time period after circuit breaker closure in which Automatic switch into fault logic function is active
(0.00060.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
6.15 Phase preference logic PPLPHIZ
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Phase preference logic PPLPHIZ — —
6.15.1 Introduction Phase preference logic function PPLPHIZ is intended to be used in isolated or high impedance grounded networks where there is a requirement to trip only one of the faulty lines at cross-country fault.
Phase preference logic inhibits tripping for single phase-to-ground faults in isolated and high impedance grounded networks, where such faults are not to be cleared by distance protection. For cross-country faults, the logic selects either the leading or the lagging phase-ground loop for measurement and initiates tripping of the preferred fault
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
372 Technical reference manual
based on the selected phase preference. A number of different phase preference combinations are available for selection.
6.15.2 Principle of operation Phase preference logic PPLPHIZ has 10 operation modes, which can be set by the parameter OperMode. The different modes and their explanation are shown in table 179 below. The difference between cyclic and acyclic operation can be explained by the following example. Assume a A fault on one line and a C fault on another line. For OperMode = 1231c the line with C fault will be tripped (C before A) while for OperMode = 123a the line with A 1 fault will be tripped (A before C).
Table 179: Operation modes for Phase preference logic
OperMode Description No filter No filter, phase-to-phase measuring loops are not blocked during single phase-to-
ground faults. Tripping is allowed without any particular phase preference at cross- country faults
No pref No preference, trip is blocked during single phase-to-ground faults, trip is allowed without any particular phase preference at cross-country fault
1231 c Cyclic 1231c; A before B before C before C
1321 c Cyclic 1321c; A before C before B before A
123 a Acyclic 123a; A before B beforeC
132 a Acyclic 132a;A before C beforeB
213 a Acyclic 213a; B before A before C
231 a Acyclic 231a; B before C beforeA
312 a Acyclic 312a; C before B beforeA
321 a Acyclic 321a; C before B before A
The function can be divided into two parts; one labeled voltage and current discrimination and the second one labeled phase preference evaluation, see figure 198.
The aim with the voltage and current discrimination part is to discriminate faulty phases and to determine if there is a cross-country fault. If cross-country fault is detected, an internal signal Detected cross-country fault is created and sent to the phase preference part to be used in the evaluation process for determining the condition for trip.
The voltage and current discrimination part gives phase segregated pickup signals if the respective measured phase voltage is below the setting parameter PU27PN at the same time as the zero sequence voltage is above the setting parameter 3V0Pickup. If there is a pickup in any phase the PICKUP output signal will be activated.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
373 Technical reference manual
The internal signal for detection of cross-country fault, DetectCrossCountry, that come from the voltage and current discrimination part of the function can be achieved in three different ways:
1. The magnitude of 3I0 has been above the setting parameter Pickup_N for a time longer than the setting of pick-up timer tIN.
2. The magnitude of 3I0 has been above the setting parameter Pickup_N at the same time as the magnitude of 3V0 has been above the setting parameter 3V0Pickup during a time longer than the setting of pick-up timer tVN.
3. The magnitude of 3I0 has been above the setting parameter Pickup_N at the same time as one of the following conditions are fulfilled: the measured phase-to-phase voltage in at least one of the phase
combinations has been below the setting parameter PU27PP for more than 20 ms.
At least two of the phase voltages are below the setting parameter PU27PN for more than 20 ms.
The second part, phase preference evaluation, uses the internal signal DetectCrossCountry from the voltage and current evaluation together with the input signal PHSEL together with phase selection pickup condition (from phase selection functions) connected to input PHSEL, and the information from the setting parameter OperMode are used to determine the condition for trip. To release the Phase preference logic, at least two out of three phases must be faulty. The fault classification whether it is a single phase-to-ground, two-phase or cross-country fault and which phase to be tripped at cross-country fault is converted into a binary coded signal and sent to the distance protection measuring zone to release the correct measuring zone according to the setting of OperMode. This is done by activating the output ZREL and it shall be connected to the input PHSEL on the distance zone measuring element.
The release signals from phase selection will only be gated with the cross-country check from IN and VN but without time delay. If no phase selection start has occurred, the release is based on current and voltage discriminating part only.
The input signal PHSEL consist of binary information of fault type and is connected to the output PHSEL on phase selection function. The fault must be activated in at least two phases to be classified as a cross-country fault in the phase preference part of the logic.
The input signals RELxxx are additional fault release signals that can be connected to external protection functions through binary input.
The output BFI_3P and trip signals can be blocked by activating the input BLOCK
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
374 Technical reference manual
VA VB VC
PU27PN
IN VN
VAVB VBVC VCVA
OperMode
RELAG
RELBG
RELCG
Phase Preference Evaluation
BFI_3P
Pickup_N
3VOPU
PU27PP
Voltage and Current
Discrimination
Detect Cross- Country fault
PHSEL
ANSI09000220-1-en.vsd
BLOCK
ZRELAND
AND
ANSI09000220 V1 EN
Figure 198: Simplified block diagram for Phase preference logic
6.15.3 Function block
ANSI07000029-2-en.vsd
PPLPHIZ I3P* V3P* BLOCK RELAG RELBG RELCG PHSEL
BFI_3P ZREL
ANSI07000029 V2 EN
Figure 199: PPLPHIZ function block
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
375 Technical reference manual
6.15.4 Input and output signals Table 180: PPLPHIZ Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Group signal for current input
V3P GROUP SIGNAL
— Group signal for voltage input
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
RELAG BOOLEAN 0 Release condition for the A to ground loop
RELBG BOOLEAN 0 Release condition for the B to ground loop
RELCG BOOLEAN 0 Release condition for the C to ground loop
PHSEL INTEGER 0 Integer coded external release signals
Table 181: PPLPHIZ Output signals
Name Type Description BFI_3P BOOLEAN Indicates start for ground fault(s), regardless of direction
ZREL INTEGER Integer coded output release signal
6.15.5 Setting parameters Table 182: PPLPHIZ Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description IBase 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Base current
VBase 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.01 400.00 Base voltage
OperMode No Filter NoPref 1231c 1321c 123a 132a 213a 231a 312a 321a
— — No Filter Operating mode (c=cyclic,a=acyclic)
PU27PN 10 — 100 %VB 1 70 Operate value of 27P in % of VBase/sqrt(3)
PU27PP 10 — 100 %VB 1 50 Pickup value of line to line undervoltage (% of VBase)
3V0PU 5 — 300 %VB 1 20 Operate value of residual voltage in % VBase/ sqrt(3)
Pickup_N 10 — 200 %IB 1 20 Pickup value of residual current (% of IBase)
Table continues on next page
Section 6 1MRK505222-UUS C Impedance protection
376 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description tVN 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Pickup-delay for residual voltage
tOffVN 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Dropoff-delay for residual voltage
tIN 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Pickup-delay for residual current
Table 183: PPLPHIZ technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Operate value, phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral undervoltage
(10.0 — 100.0)% of VBase 0,5% of Vn
Reset ratio, undervoltage < 105% —
Operate value, residual voltage (5.0 — 70.0)% of VBase 0,5% of Vn
Reset ratio, residual voltage > 95% —
Operate value, residual current (10 — 200)% of IBase 1,0% of In for I < In 1,0% of I for I > In
Reset ratio, residual current > 95% —
Timers (0.000 — 60.000) s 0,5% 10 ms
Operating mode No Filter, NoPref Cyclic: 1231c, 1321c Acyclic: 123a, 132a, 213a, 231a, 312a, 321a
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 6 Impedance protection
377 Technical reference manual
Section 7 Current protection
About this chapter This chapter describes current protection functions. These include functions like Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection, Four step phase overcurrent protection, Pole discrepancy protection and Residual overcurrent protection.
7.1 Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output PHPIOC (50)
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output
PHPIOC
3I>>
SYMBOL-Z V1 EN
50
7.1.1 Introduction The instantaneous three phase overcurrent function has a low transient overreach and short tripping time to allow use as a high set short-circuit protection function.
7.1.2 Principle of operation The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT) block. The RMS value of each phase current is derived from the fundamental frequency components, as well as sampled values of each phase current. These phase current values are fed to the instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output function PHPIOC (50). In a comparator the RMS values are compared to the set operation current value of the function Pickup. If a phase current is larger than the set operation current a signal from the comparator for this phase is set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate the output signal TR_x(x=A, B or C) for this phase and the TRIP signal that is common for all three phases.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
379 Technical reference manual
There is an operation mode (OpModeSel) setting: 1 out of 3 or 2 out of 3. If the parameter is set to 1 out of 3 any phase trip signal will be activated. If the parameter is set to 2 out of 3 at least two phase signals must be activated for trip.
There is also a possibility to activate a preset change of the set operation current (MultPU) via a binary input (MULTPU). In some applications the operation value needs to be changed, for example due to transformer inrush currents.
PHPIOC (50) can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK.
7.1.3 Function block
ANSI04000391-2-en.vsd
PHPIOC (50) I3P* BLOCK MULTPU
TRIP TR_A TR_B TR_C
ANSI04000391 V2 EN
Figure 200: PHPIOC (50) function block
7.1.4 Input and output signals Table 184: PHPIOC (50) Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Three phase current
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
MULTPU BOOLEAN 0 Enable current pickup value multiplier
Table 185: PHPIOC (50) Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal from any phase
TR_A BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase A
TR_B BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase B
TR_C BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase C
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
380 Technical reference manual
7.1.5 Setting parameters Table 186: PHPIOC (50) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
IBase 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Base current
OpModeSel 2 out of 3 1 out of 3
— — 1 out of 3 Select operation mode (2 of 3 / 1 of 3)
Pickup 1 — 2500 %IB 1 200 Phase current pickup in % of IBase
Table 187: PHPIOC (50) Group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description MultPU 0.5 — 5.0 — 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for operate current level
7.1.6 Technical data Table 188: PHPIOC (50) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Operate current (1-2500)% of lBase 1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
Reset ratio > 95% —
Operate time 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset —
Reset time 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset —
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset —
Operate time 10 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset —
Reset time 35 ms typically at 10 to 0 x Iset —
Critical impulse time 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset —
Dynamic overreach < 5% at t = 100 ms —
7.2 Four step phase overcurrent protection OC4PTOC (51/67)
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
381 Technical reference manual
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Four step phase overcurrent protection OC4PTOC
4 4 alt
3I>
TOC-REVA V1 EN
51/67
7.2.1 Introduction The four step phase overcurrent protection function OC4PTOC (51/67) has independent inverse time delay settings for step 1 and 4. Step 2 and 3 are always definite time delayed.
All IEC and ANSI inverse time characteristics are available together with an optional user defined time characteristic.
The directional function is voltage polarized with memory. The function can be set to be directional or non-directional independently for each of the steps.
Second harmonic blocking level can be set for the function and can be used to block each step individually
7.2.2 Principle of operation The Four step phase overcurrent protection OC4PTOC (51/67) is divided into four different sub-functions, one for each step. For each step x , where x is step 1, 2, 3 and 4, an operation mode is set by DirModeSelx: Disable/Non-directional/Forward/ Reverse.
The protection design can be decomposed in four parts:
The direction element The harmonic Restraint Blocking function The four step over current function The mode selection
If VT inputs are not available or not connected, setting parameter DirModeSelx shall be left to default value, Non-directional.
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
382 Technical reference manual
en05000740_ansi.vsd
Direction Element
4 step over current element
One element for each step
Harmonic Restraint
Mode Selection
dirPhAFlt
dirPhBFlt
dirPhCFlt
harmRestrBlock
enableDir
enableStep1-4
DirectionalMode1-4
faultState
Element
faultState
I3P
V3P
I3P
PICKUP
TRIP
ANSI05000740 V1 EN
Figure 201: Functional overview of OC4PTOC (51/67)
A common setting for all steps, NumPhSel, is used to specify the number of phase currents to be high to enable operation. The settings can be chosen: 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3.
The sampled analog phase currents are processed in a pre-processing function block. Using a parameter setting MeasType within the general settings for the four step phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output function OC4PTOC (51/67), it is possible to select the type of the measurement used for all overcurrent stages. It is possible to select either discrete Fourier filter (DFT) or true RMS filter (RMS).
If DFT option is selected then only the RMS value of the fundamental frequency components of each phase current is derived. Influence of DC current component and higher harmonic current components are almost completely suppressed. If RMS option is selected then the true RMS values is used. The true RMS value in addition to the fundamental frequency component includes the contribution from the current DC
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
383 Technical reference manual
component as well as from higher current harmonic. The selected current values are fed to OC4PTOC (51/67).
In a comparator, for each phase current, the DFT or RMS values are compared to the set operation current value of the function (Pickup1, Pickup2, Pickup3, Pickup4). If a phase current is larger than the set operation current, outputs PICKUP, PU_STx, PU_A, PU_B and PU_C are, without delay, activated. Output signals PU_A, PU_B and PU_C are common for all steps. This means that the lowest set step will initiate the activation. The PICKUP signal is common for all three phases and all steps. It shall be noted that the selection of measured value (DFT or RMS) do not influence the operation of directional part of OC4PTOC (51/67) .
Service value for individually measured phase currents are also available on the local HMI for OC4PTOC (51/67) function, which simplifies testing, commissioning and in service operational checking of the function.
A harmonic restrain of the function can be chosen. A set 2nd harmonic current in relation to the fundamental current is used. The 2nd harmonic current is taken from the pre-processing of the phase currents and the relation is compared to a set restrain current level.
The function can be directional. The direction of the fault current is given as current angle in relation to the voltage angle. The fault current and fault voltage for the directional function is dependent of the fault type. To enable directional measurement at close in faults, causing low measured voltage, the polarization voltage is a combination of the apparent voltage (85%) and a memory voltage (15%). The following combinations are used.
Phase-phase short circuit:
_ _ref AB A B dir AB A BV V V I I I= — = —
GUID-4F361BC7-6D91-47B5-8119-A27009C0AD6A V1 EN (Equation 76)
_ _ref BC B C dir BC B CV V V I I I= — = —
ANSIEQUATION1450 V1 EN (Equation 77)
_ _ref CA C A dir CA C AV V V I I I= — = —
ANSIEQUATION1451 V1 EN (Equation 78)
Phase-ground short circuit:
Table continues on next page
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
384 Technical reference manual
_ _ref A A dir A AV V I I= =
ANSIEQUATION1452 V1 EN (Equation 79)
_ _ref B B dir B BV V I I= =
ANSIEQUATION1453 V1 EN (Equation 80)
_ _ref C C dir C CV V I I= =
ANSIEQUATION1454 V1 EN (Equation 81)
The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive-sequence voltage exceeds 4% of the set base voltage VBase. So the directional element can use it for all unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults.
For close-in three-phase faults, the V1AM memory voltage, based on the same positive sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination.
The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is restored.
After 100 ms, the following occurs:
If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current (between 10 and 30% of the set terminal rated current IBase), the condition seals in. If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures. If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element in
the reverse direction remains in operation. If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory resets
until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.
The directional setting is given as a characteristic angle AngleRCA for the function and an angle window AngleROA.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
385 Technical reference manual
Vref
Idir
RCA ROA
Forward
Reverse
ROA
en05000745_ansi.vsd ANSI05000745 V1 EN
Figure 202: Directional characteristic of the phase overcurrent protection
The default value of AngleRCA is 65. The parameters AngleROA gives the angle sector from AngleRCA for directional borders.
A minimum current for directional phase pickup current signal can be set: PUMinOpPhSel.
If no blockings are given the pickup signals will start the timers of the step. The time characteristic for each step can be chosen as definite time delay or inverse time characteristic. A wide range of standardized inverse time characteristics is available. It is also possible to create a tailor made time characteristic. The possibilities for inverse time characteristics are described in section «Inverse characteristics».
All four steps in OC4PTOC (51/67) can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The binary input BLKx (x=1, 2, 3 or 4) blocks the operation of respective step.
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
386 Technical reference manual
a
b a>b OR
|IOP|
STx
TRx
AND
Pickupx
BLKSTx
BLOCK
Characteristx=DefTime
DirModeSelx=Disabled
DirModeSelx=Non-directional
DirModeSelx=Forward
DirModeSelx=Reverse AND
AND
FORWARD_Int
REVERSE_Int
OR
OR STAGEx_DIR_Int
ANSI12000008-1-en.vsd
AND
AND
Characteristx=Inverse
Inverse
ANSI12000008-1-en.vsd
0 0-tx
0 0-txMin
ANSI12000008 V1 EN
Figure 203: Simplified logic diagram for OC4PTOC
Different types of reset time can be selected as described in section «Inverse characteristics».
There is also a possibility to activate a preset change (MultiPUx, x= 1, 2, 3 or 4) of the set operation current via a binary input (enable multiplier). In some applications the operation value needs to be changed, for example due to changed network switching state. The function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The pickup signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLK. The trip signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTR.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
387 Technical reference manual
7.2.3 Function block
ANSI06000187-2-en.vsd
OC4PTOC (51_67) I3P* V3P* BLOCK BLKTR BLK1 BLK2 BLK3 BLK4 MULTPU1 MULTPU2 MULTPU3 MULTPU4
TRIP TRST1 TRST2 TRST3 TRST4
TR_A TR_B TR_C
TRST1_A TRST1_B TRST1_C TRST2_A TRST2_B TRST2_C TRST3_A TRST3_B TRST3_C TRST4_A TRST4_B TRST4_C
PICKUP PU_ST1 PU_ST2 PU_ST3 PU_ST4
PU_A PU_B PU_C
PU_ST1_A PU_ST1_B PU_ST1_C PU_ST2_A PU_ST2_B PU_ST2_C PU_ST3_A PU_ST3_B PU_ST3_C PU_ST4_A PU_ST4_B PU_ST4_C 2NDHARM
DIR_A DIR_B DIR_C
ANSI06000187 V2 EN
Figure 204: OC4PTOC (51/67) function block
7.2.4 Input and output signals Table 189: OC4PTOC (51_67) Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Group signal for current input
V3P GROUP SIGNAL
— Group signal for voltage input
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
Table continues on next page
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
388 Technical reference manual
Name Type Default Description BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip
BLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of Step1
BLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of Step2
BLK3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of Step3
BLK4 BOOLEAN 0 Block of Step4
MULTPU1 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the pickup multiplier is in use for step1
MULTPU2 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the pickup multiplier is in use for step2
MULTPU3 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the pickup multiplier is in use for step3
MULTPU4 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the pickup multiplier is in use for step4
Table 190: OC4PTOC (51_67) Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
TRST1 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step1
TRST2 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step2
TRST3 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step3
TRST4 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step4
TR_A BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase A
TR_B BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase B
TR_C BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase C
TRST1_A BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase A
TRST1_B BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase B
TRST1_C BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase C
TRST2_A BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase A
TRST2_B BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase B
TRST2_C BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase C
TRST3_A BOOLEAN Trip signal from step3 phase A
TRST3_B BOOLEAN Trip signal from step3 phase B
TRST3_C BOOLEAN Trip signal from step3 phase C
TRST4_A BOOLEAN Trip signal from step4 phase A
TRST4_B BOOLEAN Trip signal from step4 phase B
TRST4_C BOOLEAN Trip signal from step4 phase C
PICKUP BOOLEAN General pickup signal
PU_ST1 BOOLEAN Common pickup signal from step1
PU_ST2 BOOLEAN Common pickup signal from step2
PU_ST3 BOOLEAN Common pickup signal from step3
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
389 Technical reference manual
Name Type Description PU_ST4 BOOLEAN Common pickup signal from step4
PU_A BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase A
PU_B BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase B
PU_C BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase C
PU_ST1_A BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step1 phase A
PU_ST1_B BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step1 phase B
PU_ST1_C BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step1 phase C
PU_ST2_A BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step2 phase A
PU_ST2_B BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step2 phase B
PU_ST2_C BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step2 phase C
PU_ST3_A BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step3 phase A
PU_ST3_B BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step3 phase B
PU_ST3_C BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step3 phase C
PU_ST4_A BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step4 phase A
PU_ST4_B BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step4 phase B
PU_ST4_C BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step4 phase C
2NDHARM BOOLEAN Block from second harmonic detection
DIR_A INTEGER Direction for phase A
DIR_B INTEGER Direction for phase B
DIR_C INTEGER Direction for phase C
7.2.5 Setting parameters Table 191: OC4PTOC (51_67) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
IBase 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Base current
Vbase 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Base voltage
AngleRCA 40 — 65 Deg 1 55 Relay characteristic angle (RCA)
AngleROA 40 — 89 Deg 1 80 Relay operation angle (ROA)
NumPhSel 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3
— — 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for phase selection (1 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3)
DirModeSel1 Disabled Non-directional Forward Reverse
— — Non-directional Directional mode of step 1 (Disabled, Nondir, Forward, Reverse)
Table continues on next page
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
390 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Characterist1 ANSI Ext. inv.
ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type
— — ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for step 1
Pickup1 1 — 2500 %IB 1 1000 Phase current operate level for step1 in % of IBase
t1 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Definitive time delay of step 1
TD1 0.05 — 999.00 — 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 1
IMin1 1 — 10000 %IB 1 100 Minimum operate current for step1in% of IBase
t1Min 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 1
MultPU1 1.0 — 10.0 — 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for current operate level for step 1
DirModeSel2 Disabled Non-directional Forward Reverse
— — Non-directional Directional mode of step 2 (Disabled, Nondir, Forward, Reverse)
Characterist2 ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type
— — ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for step 2
Pickup2 1 — 2500 %IB 1 500 Phase current operate level for step2 in % of IBase
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
391 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description t2 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Definitive time delay of step 2
TD2 0.05 — 999.00 — 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 2
IMin2 1 — 10000 %IB 1 50 Minimum operate current for step2 in % of IBase
t2Min 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 2
MultPU2 1.0 — 10.0 — 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for current operate level for step 2
DirModeSel3 Disabled Non-directional Forward Reverse
— — Non-directional Directional mode of step 3 (Disabled, Nondir, Forward, Reverse)
Characterist3 ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type
— — ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for step 3
Pickup3 1 — 2500 %IB 1 250 Phase current operate level for step3 in % of IBase
t3 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.800 Definitive time delay of step 3
TD3 0.05 — 999.00 — 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 3
IMin3 1 — 10000 %IB 1 33 Minimum operate current for step3 in % of IBase
t3Min 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 3
MultPU3 1.0 — 10.0 — 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for current operate level for step 3
DirModeSel4 Disabled Non-directional Forward Reverse
— — Non-directional Directional mode of step 4 (Disabled, Nondir, Forward, Reverse)
Table continues on next page
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
392 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Characterist4 ANSI Ext. inv.
ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type
— — ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for step 4
Pickup4 1 — 2500 %IB 1 175 Phase current operate level for step4 in % of IBase
t4 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Definitive time delay of step 4
TD4 0.05 — 999.00 — 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 4
IMin4 1 — 10000 %IB 1 17 Minimum operate current for step4 in % of IBase
t4Min 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 4
MultPU4 1.0 — 10.0 — 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for current operate level for step 4
Table 192: OC4PTOC (51_67) Group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description PUMinOpPhSel 1 — 100 %IB 1 7 Minimum current for phase selection in % of
IBase
2ndHarmStab 5 — 100 %IB 1 20 Pickup of second harm restraint in % of Fundamental
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset
— — Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for step 1
tReset1 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 1
tPCrv1 0.005 — 3.000 — 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 1
tACrv1 0.005 — 200.000 — 0.001 13.500 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 1
tBCrv1 0.00 — 20.00 — 0.01 0.00 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 1
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
393 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description tCCrv1 0.1 — 10.0 — 0.1 1.0 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve for step 1
tPRCrv1 0.005 — 3.000 — 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 1
tTRCrv1 0.005 — 100.000 — 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 1
tCRCrv1 0.1 — 10.0 — 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 1
HarmRestrain1 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Enable block of step 1 from harmonic restrain
ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset
— — Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for step 2
tReset2 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 2
tPCrv2 0.005 — 3.000 — 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 2
tACrv2 0.005 — 200.000 — 0.001 13.500 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 2
tBCrv2 0.00 — 20.00 — 0.01 0.00 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 2
tCCrv2 0.1 — 10.0 — 0.1 1.0 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 2
tPRCrv2 0.005 — 3.000 — 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 2
tTRCrv2 0.005 — 100.000 — 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 2
tCRCrv2 0.1 — 10.0 — 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 2
HarmRestrain2 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Enable block of step 2 from harmonic restrain
ResetTypeCrv3 Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset
— — Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for step 3
tReset3 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 3
tPCrv3 0.005 — 3.000 — 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 3
tACrv3 0.005 — 200.000 — 0.001 13.500 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 3
tBCrv3 0.00 — 20.00 — 0.01 0.00 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 3
tCCrv3 0.1 — 10.0 — 0.1 1.0 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 3
tPRCrv3 0.005 — 3.000 — 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 3
Table continues on next page
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
394 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description tTRCrv3 0.005 — 100.000 — 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer programmable
curve for step 3
tCRCrv3 0.1 — 10.0 — 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 3
HarmRestrain3 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Enable block of step3 from harmonic restrain
ResetTypeCrv4 Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset
— — Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for step 4
tReset4 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 4
tPCrv4 0.005 — 3.000 — 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 4
tACrv4 0.005 — 200.000 — 0.001 13.500 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 4
tBCrv4 0.00 — 20.00 — 0.01 0.00 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 4
tCCrv4 0.1 — 10.0 — 0.1 1.0 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 4
tPRCrv4 0.005 — 3.000 — 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 4
tTRCrv4 0.005 — 100.000 — 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 4
tCRCrv4 0.1 — 10.0 — 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 4
HarmRestrain4 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Enable block of step 4 from harmonic restrain
Table 193: OC4PTOC (51_67) Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description MeasType DFT
RMS — — DFT Selection between DFT and RMS
measurement
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
395 Technical reference manual
7.2.6 Technical data Table 194: OC4PTOC (51/67)
Function Setting range Accuracy Trip current (5-2500)% of lBase 1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
Reset ratio > 95% at (502500)% of lBase
—
Min. operating current (1-10000)% of lBase 1.0% of In at I In 1.0% of I at I > In
Relay characteristic angle (RCA) (40.065.0) degrees 2.0 degrees
Relay operating angle (ROA) (40.089.0) degrees 2.0 degrees
2nd harmonic blocking (5100)% of fundamental 2.0% of In
Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x Iset
(0.000-60.000) s 0.2 % or 35 ms whichever is greater
Minimum trip time (0.000-60.000) s 2.0 % or 40 ms whichever is greater
Inverse characteristics, see table 728, table 729 and table 730
16 curve types See table 728, table 729 and table 730
Trip time, pickup non-directional at 0 to 2 x Iset
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time, pickup non-directional at 2 to 0 x Iset
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset —
Impulse margin time 15 ms typically —
7.3 Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC (50N)
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection
EFPIOC
IN>>
IEF V1 EN
50N
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
396 Technical reference manual
7.3.1 Introduction The Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC (50N) has a low transient overreach and short tripping times to allow the use for instantaneous ground-fault protection, with the reach limited to less than the typical eighty percent of the line at minimum source impedance. EFPIOC (50N) can be configured to measure the residual current from the three-phase current inputs or the current from a separate current input. EFPIOC (50N) can be blocked by activating the input BLOCK.
7.3.2 Principle of operation The sampled analog residual currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of the residual current, as well as from the sample values the equivalent RMS value is derived. This current value is fed to the Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection (EFPIOC,50N). In a comparator the RMS value is compared to the set operation current value of the function (Pickup). If the residual current is larger than the set operation current a signal from the comparator is set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate the output signal TRIP.
There is also a possibility to activate a preset change of the set operation current via a binary input (enable multiplier MULTPU). In some applications the operation value needs to be changed, for example due to transformer inrush currents.
EFPIOC (50N) function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The trip signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKAR, that can be activated during single pole trip and autoreclosing sequences.
7.3.3 Function block
ANSI06000269-2-en.vsd
EFPIOC (50N) I3P* BLOCK BLKAR MULTPU
TRIP
ANSI06000269 V2 EN
Figure 205: EFPIOC (50N) function block
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
397 Technical reference manual
7.3.4 Input and output signals Table 195: EFPIOC (50N) Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Three phase currents
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKAR BOOLEAN 0 Block from auto recloser
MULTPU BOOLEAN 0 Enable current multiplier
Table 196: EFPIOC (50N) Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal
7.3.5 Setting parameters Table 197: EFPIOC (50N) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
IBase 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Base current
Pickup 1 — 2500 %IB 1 200 Operate residual current level in % of IBase
Table 198: EFPIOC (50N) Group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description MultPU 0.5 — 5.0 — 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for operate current level
7.3.6 Technical data Table 199: EFPIOC (50N) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Operate current (1-2500)% of lBase 1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
Reset ratio > 95% —
Operate time 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset —
Reset time 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset —
Table continues on next page
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
398 Technical reference manual
Function Range or value Accuracy Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset —
Operate time 10 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset —
Reset time 35 ms typically at 10 to 0 x Iset —
Critical impulse time 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset —
Dynamic overreach < 5% at t = 100 ms —
7.4 Four step residual overcurrent protection, zero, negative sequence direction EF4PTOC (51N/67N)
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Four step residual overcurrent protection
EF4PTOC
4 4 alt
IN
TEF-REVA V1 EN
51N/67N
7.4.1 Introduction The four step residual overcurrent protection EF4PTOC (51N/67N) has an inverse or definite time delay independent for each step separately.
All IEC and ANSI time-delayed characteristics are available together with an optional user defined characteristic.
EF4PTOC (51N/67N) can be set directional or non-directional independently for each of the steps.
IDir, VPol and IPol can be independently selected to be either zero sequence or negative sequence.
Second harmonic blocking can be set individually for each step.
EF4PTOC (51N/67N) can be used as main protection for phase-to-ground faults.
EF4PTOC (51N/67N) can also be used to provide a system back-up for example, in the case of the primary protection being out of service due to communication or voltage transformer circuit failure.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
399 Technical reference manual
Directional operation can be combined together with corresponding communication logic in permissive or blocking teleprotection scheme. Current reversal and weak-end infeed functionality are available as well.
EF4PTOC (51N/67N) can be configured to measure the residual current from the three- phase current inputs or the current from a separate current input.
7.4.2 Principle of operation This function has the following three Analog Inputs on its function block in the configuration tool:
1. I3P, input used for Operating Quantity. 2. V3P, input used for Voltage Polarizing Quantity. 3. I3PPOL, input used for Current Polarizing Quantity.
These inputs are connected from the corresponding pre-processing function blocks in the Configuration Tool within PCM600.
7.4.2.1 Operating quantity within the function
The function always uses Residual Current (3I0) for its operating quantity. The residual current can be:
1. directly measured (when a dedicated CT input of the IED is connected in PCM600 to the fourth analog input of the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC (51N/ 67N) function input I3P). This dedicated IED CT input can be for example, connected to: parallel connection of current instrument transformers in all three phases
(Holm-Green connection). one single core balance, current instrument transformer (cable CT). one single current instrument transformer located between power system
WYE point and ground (that is, current transformer located in the neutral grounding of a WYE connected transformer winding).
one single current instrument transformer located between two parts of a protected object (that is, current transformer located between two WYE points of double WYE shunt capacitor bank).
2. calculated from three-phase current input within the IED (when the fourth analog input into the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC (51N/67N) function Analog Input I3P is not connected to a dedicated CT input of the IED in PCM600). In such case the pre-processing block will calculate 3I0 from the first three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula (will
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
400 Technical reference manual
take I2 from same SMAI AI3P connected to I3PDIR input (same SMAI AI3P connected to I3P input)):
If zero sequence current is selected,
opI 3 Io IA IB IC= = + +
EQUATION2011-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 82)
where:
IA, IB, IC are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.
The residual current is pre-processed by a discrete Fourier filter. Thus the phasor of the fundamental frequency component of the residual current is derived. The phasor magnitude is used within the EF4PTOC (51N/67N) protection to compare it with the set operation current value of the four steps (Pickup1, Pickup2, Pickup3 or Pickup4). If the residual current is larger than the set operation current and the step is used in non- directional mode a signal from the comparator for this step is set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate the output signal PUSTx (x=step 1-4) for this step and a common PICKUP signal.
7.4.2.2 Internal polarizing
A polarizing quantity is used within the protection in order to determine the direction to the ground fault (Forward/Reverse).
The function can be set to use voltage polarizing, current polarizing or dual polarizing.
Voltage polarizing When voltage polarizing is selected the protection will use either the residual voltage -3V0 or the negative sequence voltage -3V2 as polarizing quantity V3P.
This voltage can be:
1. directly measured (when a dedicated VT input of the IED is connected in PCM600 to the fourth analog input of the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC (51N/ 67N) function input V3P). This dedicated IED VT input shall be then connected to open delta winding of a three phase main VT.
2. calculated from three phase voltage input within the IED (when the fourth analog input into the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC (51N/67N) analog function input V3P is NOT connected to a dedicated VT input of the IED in PCM600). In such case the pre-processing block will calculate -3V2 from the first three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula:
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
401 Technical reference manual
VPol=3V0=(VA +VB +VC) EQUATION2012 V1 EN (Equation 84)
where:
VA, VB, VC are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase voltages.
In order to use this, all three phase-to-ground voltages must be connected to three IED VT inputs.
The residual voltage is pre-processed by a discrete fourier filter. Thus, the phasor of the fundamental frequency component of the residual voltage is derived.
This phasor is used together with the phasor of the operating directional current, in order to determine the direction to the ground fault (Forward/Reverse). In order to enable voltage polarizing the magnitude of polarizing voltage shall be bigger than a minimum level defined by setting parameter VpolMin.
It shall be noted that residual voltage (-3V0) or negative sequence voltage (-3V2) is used to determine the location of the ground fault. This insures the required inversion of the polarizing voltage within the ground-fault function.
Current polarizing When current polarizing is selected the function will use an external residual current (3I0) as polarizing quantity IPol. This current can be:
1. directly measured (when a dedicated CT input of the IED is connected in PCM600 to the fourth analog input of the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC (51N/ 67N) function input I3PPOL). This dedicated IED CT input is then typically connected to one single current transformer located between power system WYE point and ground (current transformer located in the WYE point of a WYE connected transformer winding). For some special line protection applications this dedicated IED CT input
can be connected to parallel connection of current transformers in all three phases (Holm-Green connection).
2. calculated from three phase current input within the IED (when the fourth analog input into the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC (51N/67N) function analog input I3PPOL is NOT connected to a dedicated CT input of the IED in PCM600). In such case the pre-processing block will calculate 3I0 from the first three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula:
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
402 Technical reference manual
3= = + +PolI Io IA IB IC
EQUATION2019-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 86)
where:
IA, IB and IC are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.
The residual current is pre-processed by a discrete fourier filter. Thus the phasor of the fundamental frequency component of the polarizing current is derived. This phasor is then multiplied with pre-set equivalent zero-sequence source Impedance in order to calculate equivalent polarizing voltage VIPol in accordance with the following formula:
( )IPol S Pol PolV Zo I RNPol j XNPOL I= = +
EQUATION2013-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 87)
which will be then used, together with the phasor of the operating current, in order to determine the direction to the ground fault (Forward/Reverse).
In order to enable current polarizing the magnitude of polarizing current shall be bigger than a minimum level defined by setting parameter IPolMin.
Dual polarizing When dual polarizing is selected the function will use the vectorial sum of the voltage based and current based polarizing in accordance with the following formula:
( )0 0 03 3sVTotPol VVPol VIPol V Z IPol V RNPol jXNPol IPol= + = — + = — + +
ANSIEQUATION1878 V1 EN (Equation 88)
Vpol and Ipol can be either zero sequence component or negative sequence component depending upon the user selection.
Then the phasor of the total polarizing voltage VTotPol will be used, together with the phasor of the operating current, to determine the direction of the ground fault (Forward/ Reverse).
7.4.2.3 External polarizing for ground-fault function
The individual steps within the protection can be set as non-directional. When this setting is selected it is then possible via function binary input BLKx to provide external directional control (that is, torque control) by for example using one of the following functions if available in the IED:
1. Distance protection directional function. 2. Negative sequence polarized General current and voltage multi purpose protection
function.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
403 Technical reference manual
7.4.2.4 Base quantities within the protection
The base quantities shall be entered as setting parameters for everyground-fault function. Base current (IBase) shall be entered as rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes. Base voltage (VBase) shall be entered as rated phase-to- phase voltage of the protected object in primary kV.
7.4.2.5 Internal ground-fault protection structure
The protection is internally divided into the following parts:
1. Four residual overcurrent steps. 2. Directional supervision element for residual overcurrent steps with integrated
directional comparison step for communication based ground-fault protection schemes (permissive or blocking).
3. Second harmonic blocking element with additional feature for sealed-in blocking during switching of parallel transformers.
4. Switch on to fault feature with integrated Under-Time logic for detection of breaker problems during breaker opening or closing sequence.
Each part is described separately in the following sections.
7.4.2.6 Four residual overcurrent steps
Each overcurrent step uses operating quantity Iop (residual current) as measuring quantity. Each of the four residual overcurrent steps has the following built-in facilities:
Directional mode can be set to Disabled/Non-directional/Forward/Reverse. By this parameter setting the directional mode of the step is selected. It shall be noted that the directional decision (Forward/Reverse) is not made within the residual overcurrent step itself. The direction of the fault is determined in common directional supervision element.
Residual current pickup value. Type of operating characteristic (inverse or definite time). By this parameter
setting it is possible to select inverse or definite time delay for the ground-fault protection. Most of the standard IEC and ANSI inverse characteristics are available. For the complete list of available inverse curves please refer to section «Inverse characteristics».
Type of reset characteristic (Instantaneous / IEC Reset / ANSI Reset). By this parameter setting it is possible to select the reset characteristic of the step. For the complete list of available reset curves please refer to section «Inverse time characteristics».
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
404 Technical reference manual
Time delay related settings. By these parameter settings the properties like definite time delay, minimum operating time for inverse curves, reset time delay and parameters to define user programmable inverse curve are defined.
Supervision by second harmonic blocking feature (Enabled/Disabled). By this parameter setting it is possible to prevent operation of the step if the second harmonic content in the residual current exceeds the preset level.
Multiplier for scaling of the set residual current pickup value by external binary signal. By this parameter setting it is possible to increase residual current pickup value when function binary input MULTPUx has logical value 1.
Simplified logic diagram for one residual overcurrent step is shown in figure 206.
X
Inverse
tx OR
|IOP|
PUSTx
TRSTx
AND T F
HarmRestrainx=Disabled
Pickupx
BLKx
BLOCK
OR 2ndHarm_BLOCK_Int
MultPUx
Characteristx=Inverse
Characteristx=DefTime
DirModex=Off
DirModex=Non-directional
DirModex=Forward
DirModex=Reverse AND
AND
FORWARD_Int
REVERSE_Int
OR
OR STEPx_DIR_Int
ANSI10000008-1-en.vsd
X T F
a
b a>b
b
a a>b
IMinx
AND tMin
BLKTR
AND
ANSI10000008 V1 EN
Figure 206: Simplified logic diagram for residual overcurrent step x, where x = step 1, 2, 3 or 4
The protection can be completely blocked from the binary input BLOCK. Output signals for respective step, and PUSTx and TRSTx, can be blocked from the binary input BLKx. The trip signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTR.
7.4.2.7 Directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison function
It shall be noted that at least one of the four residual overcurrent steps shall be set as directional in order to enable execution of the directional supervision element and the integrated directional comparison function.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
405 Technical reference manual
The protection has integrated directional feature. As the operating quantity current lop is always used. The polarizinwcg method is determined by the parameter setting polMethod. The polarizing quantity will be selected by the function in one of the following three ways:
1. When polMethod = Voltage, VPol will be used as polarizing quantity. 2. When polMethod = Current, IPol will be used as polarizing quantity. 3. WhenpolMethod = Dual, VPol + IPol ZNPol will be used as polarizing quantity.
The operating and polarizing quantity are then used inside the directional element, as shown in figure 207, in order to determine the direction of the ground fault.
PUREV 0.6 * INDirPU
PUFW
-RCA -85 deg
40% of
INDirPU
INDirPU
RCA
65 VPol = -3V0
I = 3Iop 0
RCA +85 deg
RCA -85 deg
Characteristic
for PUREV
Characteristic
for PUFW
Characteristic for reverse
release of measuring steps
Characteristic for forward
release of measuring steps
-RCA +85 deg
ANSI11000243-1-en.ai
Operating area
Operating area
ANSI11000243 V1 EN
Figure 207: Operating characteristic for ground-fault directional element using the zero sequence components
Two relevant setting parameters for directional supervision element are:
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
406 Technical reference manual
Directional element will be internally enabled to operate as soon as Iop is bigger than 40% of IDirPU and directional condition is fulfilled in set direction.
Relay characteristic angle AngleRCA, which defines the position of forward and reverse areas in the operating characteristic.
Directional comparison step, built-in within directional supervision element, will set EF4PTOC (51N/67N) function output binary signals:
1. PUFW=1 when operating quantity magnitude Iop x cos( — AngleRCA) is bigger than setting parameter IDirPU and directional supervision element detects fault in forward direction.
2. PUREV=1 when operating quantity magnitude Iop x cos( — AngleRCA) is bigger than 60% of setting parameter IDirPU and directional supervision element detects fault in reverse direction.
These signals shall be used for communication based ground-fault teleprotection communication schemes (permissive or blocking).
Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison step is shown in figure 208:
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
407 Technical reference manual
X a
a>b bIDirPU
polMethod=Voltage
polMethod=Dual
OR
FORWARD_Int
REVERSE_Int
BLOCK
STAGE1_DIR_Int
0.6
X0.4
AND
STAGE3_DIR_Int STAGE4_DIR_Int
STAGE2_DIR_Int OR
PUREV
VPolMin
IPolMin
AngleRCA
T F0.0
X T F
RNPol
XNPol 0.0
D ire
ct io
na l
C ha
ra ct
er is
tic
FWD
RVS AND
AND
AND PUFW FORWARD_Int
REVERSE_Int
AND
ANSI07000067-4-en.vsd
| |
VPol
VIPol
I3PDIR
VTPol
IopDir
Complex Number
a a>b
b
IPol T F0.0
polMethod=Current OR
ANSI07000067 V4 EN
Figure 208: Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison step
7.4.2.8 Second harmonic blocking element
A harmonic restrain of four step residual overcurrent protection function EF4PTOC can be chosen for each step by a parameter setting HarmRestrainx. If the ratio of the 2nd harmonic component in relation to the fundamental frequency component in the residual current exceeds the preset level (defined by parameter 2ndHarmStab) then 2NDHARMD function output signal is set to logical value one and harmonic restraining feature to the function block will be applicable.
Blocking from 2nd harmonic element activates if all three criteria are satisfied:
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
408 Technical reference manual
1. Current fundamental frequency component > IMinOpHarmBlk 2. Current second harmonic component > IMinOpHarmBlk 3. Ratio of the 2nd harmoinc component in relation to the fundamental frequency
component in the residual current exceeds the preset level defined parameter 2ndHarmStab setting
If all the above three conditions are fulfilled then 2NDHARMD function output signal is set to logical value one and harmonic restraining feature to the function block is applicable.
In addition to the basic functionality explained above the 2nd harmonic blocking can be set in such way to seal-in until residual current disappears. This feature might be required to stabilize EF4PTOC (51N67N) during switching of parallel transformers in the station. In case of parallel transformers there is a risk of sympathetic inrush current. If one of the transformers is in operation, and the parallel transformer is switched in, the asymmetric inrush current of the switched in transformer will cause partial saturation of the transformer already in service. This is called transferred saturation. The 2nd harmonic of the inrush currents of the two transformers is in phase opposition. The summation of the two currents thus gives a small 2nd harmonic current. The residual fundamental current is however significant. The inrush current of the transformer in service before the parallel transformer energizing, is a little delayed compared to the first transformer. Therefore we have high 2nd harmonic current component initially. After a short period this current is however small and the normal 2nd harmonic blocking resets. If the BlkParTransf function is activated the 2nd
harmonic restrain signal is latched as long as the residual current measured by the relay is larger than a selected step current level by using setting UseStartValue.
This feature has been called Block for Parallel Transformers. This 2nd harmonic seal-in feature is activated when all of the following three conditions are simultaneously fulfilled:
1. Feature is enabled by entering setting parameter BlkParTransf = On. 2. Basic 2nd harmonic restraint feature has been active for at least 70ms. 3. Residual current magnitude is higher than the set pickup value for one of the four
residual overcurrent stages. By a parameter setting Use_PUValue it is possible to select which one of the four pickup values that will be used (Pickup1 or Pickup2 or Pickup3 or Pickup4).
Once Block for Parallel Transformers is activated the basic 2nd harmonic blocking signal is sealed-in until the residual current magnitude falls below a value defined by parameter setting Use_PUValue (see condition 3 above).
Simplified logic diagram for 2nd harmonic blocking feature is shown in figure 209.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
409 Technical reference manual
a
b a>b
BLOCK
ANDIOP Extract second
harmonic current component
Extract fundamental
current component X 2ndHarmStab
a
b a>b
a
b a>b
0.07*IBase
ANSI13000015-1-en.vsd
2NDHARMD
Use_PUValue
Pickup1> Pickup2> Pickup3> Pickup4>
a
b a>b
|IOP|
OR AND
BlkParTransf=On
q-1
OR 2ndH_BLOCK_Int 0-70ms
0
ANSI13000015 V1 EN
Figure 209: Simplified logic diagram for 2nd harmonic blocking feature and Block for Parallel Transformers feature
7.4.2.9 Switch on to fault feature
Integrated in the four step residual overcurrent protection are Switch on to fault logic (SOTF) and Under-Time logic. The setting parameter SOTF is set to activate either SOTF or Under-Time logic or both. When the circuit breaker is closing there is a risk to close it onto a permanent fault, for example during an autoreclosing sequence. The SOTF logic will enable fast fault clearance during such situations. The time during which SOTF and Under-Time logics will be active after activation is defined by the setting parameter t4U.
The SOTF logic uses the pickup signal from step 2 or step 3 for its operation, selected by setting parameter StepForSOTF. The SOTF logic can be activated either from
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
410 Technical reference manual
change in circuit breaker position or from circuit breaker close command pulse. The setting parameter SOTFSel can be set for activation of CB position open change, CB position closed change or CB close command. In case of a residual current pickup from step 2 or 3 (dependent on setting) the function will give a trip after a set delay tSOTF. This delay is normally set to a short time (default 200 ms).
The Under-Time logic always uses the pickup signal from the step 4. The Under-Time logic will normally be set to operate for a lower current level than the SOTF function. The Under-Time logic can also be blocked by the 2nd harmonic restraint feature. This enables high sensitivity even if power transformer inrush currents can occur at breaker closing. This logic is typically used to detect asymmetry of CB poles immediately after switching of the circuit breaker. The Under-Time logic is activated either from change in circuit breaker position or from circuit breaker close and open command pulses. This selection is done by setting parameter ActUnderTime. In case of a pickup from step 4 this logic will give a trip after a set delay tUnderTime. This delay is normally set to a relatively short time (default 300 ms). Practically the Under-Time logic acts as circuit breaker pole-discrepancy protection, but it is only active immediately after breaker switching. The Under-Time logic can only be used in solidly or low impedance grounded systems.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
411 Technical reference manual
UNDERTIME
EnHarmRestSOTF
ActUndrTimeSel
t4U
AND t
tUnderTime
OR
Open
Closed
Close command SOTFSel
t4U
StepForSOTF
PUST2
PUST3
AND t
tSOTF
AND
BLOCK
2nd Harmonic
AND
Open
Close
Close command
PUST4
SOTF
Undertime
TRIP
Disabled
OR
Undertime SOTF
OperationMode
ANSI06000643-3.vsd
ANSI06000643 V3 EN
Figure 210: Simplified logic diagram for SOTF and Under-Time features
EF4PTOC (51N/67N) Logic Diagram Simplified logic diagram for the complete EF4PTOC (51N/67N) function is shown in figure 211:
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
412 Technical reference manual
en 06000376_ansi.vsd
Direction Element
4 step over current element
One element for each step
Harmonic Restraint
Mode Selection
ground FaultDirection
harmRestrBlock
enableDir
enableStep1-4
DirectionalMode1-4
TRIP
Element
enableDir
angleValid
Directional Check
operatingCurrent
SwitchOnToFault
pickup step 2 , 3 and 4
signal to communication
scheme
TRIP
3V0
3I0
Blocking at parallel transformers
or
CB pos
or cmd
Element
3I0
DirModeSel
DirModeSel
INPol
ANSI06000376 V1 EN
Figure 211: Functional overview of EF4PTOC (51N/67N)
7.4.3 Function block
ANSI06000424-2-en.vsd
EF4PTOC (51N67N) I3P* V3P* I3PPOL* BLOCK BLKTR BLK1 BLK2 BLK3 BLK4 MULTPU1 MULTPU2 MULTPU3 MULTPU4 52A CLOSECMD OPENCMD
TRIP TRST1 TRST2 TRST3 TRST4
TRSOTF PICKUP PUST1 PUST2 PUST3 PUST4
PUSOTF PUFW
PUREV 2NDHARMD
ANSI06000424 V2 EN
Figure 212: EF4PTOC (51N/67N) function block
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
413 Technical reference manual
7.4.4 Input and output signals Table 200: EF4PTOC (51N67N) Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Three Phase Current Group Connection
V3P GROUP SIGNAL
— Three Phase Voltage Group Connection
I3PPOL GROUP SIGNAL
— Three Phase Polarisation Current
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 General block
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip
BLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1 (Pickup and trip)
BLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2 (Pickup and trip)
BLK3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 3 (Pickup and trip)
BLK4 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 4 (Pickup and trip)
MULTPU1 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the pickup multiplier is in use for step1
MULTPU2 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the pickup multiplier is in use for step2
MULTPU3 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the pickup multiplier is in use for step3
MULTPU4 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the pickup multiplier is in use for step4
52a BOOLEAN 0 Breaker position
CLOSECMD BOOLEAN 0 Breaker close command
OPENCMD BOOLEAN 0 Breaker open command
Table 201: EF4PTOC (51N67N) Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
TRST1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 1
TRST2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 2
TRST3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 3
TRST4 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 4
TRSOTF BOOLEAN Trip signal from switch onto fault function
PICKUP BOOLEAN General pickup signal
PUST1 BOOLEAN Pickup signal step 1
PUST2 BOOLEAN Pickup signal step 2
PUST3 BOOLEAN Pickup signal step 3
PUST4 BOOLEAN Pickup signal step 4
PUSOTF BOOLEAN Pickup signal from switch onto fault function
Table continues on next page
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
414 Technical reference manual
Name Type Description PUFW BOOLEAN Forward directional pickup signal
PUREV BOOLEAN Reverse directional pickup signal
2NDHARMD BOOLEAN 2nd harmonic block signal
7.4.5 Setting parameters Table 202: EF4PTOC (51N67N) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
IBase 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Base value for current settings
VBase 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400 Base value for voltage settings
AngleRCA -180 — 180 Deg 1 65 Relay characteristic angle (RCA)
polMethod Voltage Current Dual
— — Voltage Type of polarization
VPolMin 1 — 100 %VB 1 1 Minimum voltage level for polarization in % of VBase
IPolMin 2 — 100 %IB 1 5 Minimum current level for polarization in % of IBase
RNPol 0.50 — 1000.00 ohm 0.01 5.00 Real part of source Z to be used for current polarisation
XNPol 0.50 — 3000.00 ohm 0.01 40.00 Imaginary part of source Z to be used for current polarisation
INDirPU 1 — 100 %IB 1 10 Residual current level for directional element in % of IBase
2ndHarmStab 5 — 100 % 1 20 Second harmonic restrain operation in % of IN magnitude
BlkParTransf Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Enable blocking at parallel transformers
Use_PUValue ST1 ST2 ST3 ST4
— — ST4 Current pickup blocking at parallel transf (step1, 2, 3 or 4)
SOTF Disabled SOTF UnderTime SOTF&UnderTime
— — Disabled SOTF operation mode (Off/SOTF/Undertime/ SOTF&Undertime)
SOTFSel Open Closed CloseCommand
— — Open Select signal that shall activate SOTF
StepForSOTF Step 2 Step 3
— — Step 2 Selection of step used for SOTF
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
415 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description EnHarmRestSOTF Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Enable harmonic restrain function in SOTF
tSOTF 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay for SOTF
t4U 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Switch-onto-fault active time
ActUndrTimeSel CB position CB command
— — CB position Select signal to activate under time (CB Pos/ CBCommand)
tUnderTime 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.300 Time delay for under time
DirModeSel1 Disabled Non-directional Forward Reverse
— — Non-directional Directional mode of step 1 (Disabled, Nondir, Forward, Reverse)
Characterist1 ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type
— — ANSI Def. Time Time delay curve type for step 1
Pickup1 1 — 2500 %IB 1 100 Residual current pickup for step 1 in % of IBase
t1 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Independent (defenite) time delay of step 1
TD1 0.05 — 999.00 — 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 1
IMin1 1.00 — 10000.00 %IB 1.00 100.00 Minimum current for step 1
t1Min 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 1
MultPU1 1.0 — 10.0 — 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 1
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset
— — Instantaneous Reset curve type for step 1
tReset1 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 1
HarmRestrain1 Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Enable block of step 1 from harmonic restrain
tPCrv1 0.005 — 3.000 — 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 1
Table continues on next page
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
416 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description tACrv1 0.005 — 200.000 — 0.001 13.500 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 1
tBCrv1 0.00 — 20.00 — 0.01 0.00 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 1
tCCrv1 0.1 — 10.0 — 0.1 1.0 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 1
tPRCrv1 0.005 — 3.000 — 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 1
tTRCrv1 0.005 — 100.000 — 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 1
tCRCrv1 0.1 — 10.0 — 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 1
DirModeSel2 Disabled Non-directional Forward Reverse
— — Non-directional Directional mode of step 2 (Disabled, Nondir, Forward, Reverse)
Characterist2 ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type
— — ANSI Def. Time Time delay curve type for step 2
Pickup2 1 — 2500 %IB 1 50 Residual current pickup for step 2 in % of IBase
t2 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Independent (definitive) time delay of step 2
TD2 0.05 — 999.00 — 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 2
IMin2 1.00 — 10000.00 %IB 1.00 50 Minimum current for step 2
t2Min 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves step 2
MultPU2 1.0 — 10.0 — 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 2
ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset
— — Instantaneous Reset curve type for step 2
tReset2 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 2
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
417 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description HarmRestrain2 Disabled
Enabled — — Enabled Enable block of step 2 from harmonic restrain
tPCrv2 0.005 — 3.000 — 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 2
tACrv2 0.005 — 200.000 — 0.001 13.500 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 2
tBCrv2 0.00 — 20.00 — 0.01 0.00 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 2
tCCrv2 0.1 — 10.0 — 0.1 1.0 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 2
tPRCrv2 0.005 — 3.000 — 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 2
tTRCrv2 0.005 — 100.000 — 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 2
tCRCrv2 0.1 — 10.0 — 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 2
DirModeSel3 Disabled Non-directional Forward Reverse
— — Non-directional Directional mode of step 3 (Disabled, Nondir, Forward, Reverse)
Characterist3 ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type
— — ANSI Def. Time Time delay curve type for step 3
Pickup3 1 — 2500 %IB 1 33 Residual current pickup for step 3 in % of IBase
t3 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.800 Independent time delay of step 3
TD3 0.05 — 999.00 — 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 3
IMin3 1.00 — 10000.00 %IB 1.00 33 Minimum current for step 3
t3Min 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 3
MultPU3 1.0 — 10.0 — 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 3
Table continues on next page
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
418 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description ResetTypeCrv3 Instantaneous
IEC Reset ANSI reset
— — Instantaneous Reset curve type for step 3
tReset3 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 3
HarmRestrain3 Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Enable block of step 3 from harmonic restrain
tPCrv3 0.005 — 3.000 — 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 3
tACrv3 0.005 — 200.000 — 0.001 13.500 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 3
tBCrv3 0.00 — 20.00 — 0.01 0.00 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 3
tCCrv3 0.1 — 10.0 — 0.1 1.0 Parameter C for customer programmable curve step 3
tPRCrv3 0.005 — 3.000 — 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve step 3
tTRCrv3 0.005 — 100.000 — 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve step 3
tCRCrv3 0.1 — 10.0 — 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 3
DirModeSel4 Disabled Non-directional Forward Reverse
— — Non-directional Directional mode of step 4 (Disabled, Nondir, Forward, Reverse)
Characterist4 ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type
— — ANSI Def. Time Time delay curve type for step 4
Pickup4 1 — 2500 %IB 1 17 Residual current pickup for step 4 in % of IBase
t4 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 1.200 Independent (definitive) time delay of step 4
TD4 0.05 — 999.00 — 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 4
IMin4 1.00 — 10000.00 %IB 1.00 17 Minimum current for step 4
t4Min 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time in inverse curves step 4
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
419 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description MultPU4 1.0 — 10.0 — 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value
for step 4
ResetTypeCrv4 Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset
— — Instantaneous Reset curve type for step 4
tReset4 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 4
HarmRestrain4 Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Enable block of step 4 from harmonic restrain
tPCrv4 0.005 — 3.000 — 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 4
tACrv4 0.005 — 200.000 — 0.001 13.500 Parameter A for customer programmable curve step 4
tBCrv4 0.00 — 20.00 — 0.01 0.00 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 4
tCCrv4 0.1 — 10.0 — 0.1 1.0 Parameter C for customer programmable curve step 4
tPRCrv4 0.005 — 3.000 — 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve step 4
tTRCrv4 0.005 — 100.000 — 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve step 4
tCRCrv4 0.1 — 10.0 — 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve step 4
7.4.6 Technical data Table 203: EF4PTOC (51N/67N) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Operate current (1-2500)% of lBase 1.0% of In at I < In
1.0% of I at I > In
Reset ratio > 95% —
Operate current for directional comparison
(1100)% of lBase 1.0% of In
Timers (0.000-60.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
Inverse characteristics, see table 728, table 729 and table 730
18 curve types See table 728, table 729 and table 730
Second harmonic restrain operation
(5100)% of fundamental 2.0% of In
Relay characteristic angle (-180 to 180) degrees 2.0 degrees
Minimum polarizing voltage (1100)% of VBase 0.5% of Vn
Minimum polarizing current (1-30)% of IBase 0.25 % of In
Real part of source Z used for current polarization
(0.50-1000.00) W/phase —
Table continues on next page
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
420 Technical reference manual
Function Range or value Accuracy Imaginary part of source Z used for current polarization
(0.503000.00) W/phase —
Operate time, pickup function 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset —
Reset time, pickup function 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset —
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset —
Impulse margin time 15 ms typically —
7.5 Four step directional negative phase sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC (46I2)
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection
NS4PTOC I2 4
4 alt
IEC10000053 V1 EN
46I2
7.5.1 Introduction Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection (NS4PTOC, (4612) ) has an inverse or definite time delay independent for each step separately.
All IEC and ANSI time delayed characteristics are available together with an optional user defined characteristic.
The directional function is voltage polarized or dual polarized.
NS4PTOC (4612) can be set directional or non-directional independently for each of the steps.
NS4PTOC (4612) can be used as main protection for unsymmetrical fault; phase-phase short circuits, phase-phase-ground short circuits and single phase ground faults.
NS4PTOC (4612) can also be used to provide a system back-up for example, in the case of the primary protection being out of service due to communication or voltage transformer circuit failure.
Directional operation can be combined together with corresponding communication logic in permissive or blocking teleprotection scheme. The same logic as for
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
421 Technical reference manual
directional zero sequence current can be used. Current reversal and weak-end infeed functionality are available.
7.5.2 Principle of operation Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC (4612) function has the following three Analog Inputs on its function block in the configuration tool:
1. I3P, input used for Operating Quantity. 2. V3P, input used for Voltage Polarizing Quantity. 3. I3PPOL, input used for Polarizing Quantity.
These inputs are connected from the corresponding pre-processing function blocks in the Configuration Tool within PCM600.
7.5.2.1 Operating quantity within the function
Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC (46I2) function always uses negative sequence current (I2) for its operating quantity. The negative sequence current is calculated from three-phase current input within the IED. The pre-processing block calculates I2 from the first three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula:
( )21 2
3 I IA a IB a IC= + +
ANSIEQUATION2266 V1 EN (Equation 89)
where:
IA, IB, IC are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.
a is so called operator which gives a phase shift of 120 deg, that is, a = 1120 deg
a2 similarly gives a phase shift of 240 deg, that is, a2 = 1240 deg
The negative sequence current is pre-processed by a discrete Fourier filter. Thus, the phasor of the fundamental frequency component of the negative sequence current is derived. The phasor magnitude is used within the NS4PTOC (4612) protection to compare it with the set operation current value of the four steps (Pickup1, Pickup2, Pickup3 or Pickup4). If the negative sequence current is larger than the set operation current and the step is used in non-directional mode a signal from the comparator for this step is set to true. This signal, without delay, activates the output signal PU_STx (x=1 — 4) for this step and a common PICKUP signal.
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
422 Technical reference manual
7.5.2.2 Internal polarizing facility of the function
A polarizing quantity is used within the protection to determine the direction to the fault (Forward/Reverse).
Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC (4612) function can be set to use voltage polarizing or dual polarizing.
Voltage polarizing When voltage polarizing is selected, NS4PTOC (4612) uses the negative sequence voltage -V2 as polarizing quantity V3P. This voltage is calculated from three phase voltage input within the IED. The pre-processing block calculates -V2 from the first three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula:
( )2 1
2 3
V VA a VB a VC= + +
ANSIEQUATION00024 V1 EN
where:
VA, VB, VC are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase voltages.
To use this all three phase-to-ground voltages must be connected to three IED VT inputs.
The negative sequence voltage is pre-processed by a discrete fourier filter. Thus, the phasor of the fundamental frequency component of the negative sequence voltage is derived. This phasor is used together with the phasor of the operating current, in order to determine the direction to the fault (Forward/Reverse).To enable voltage polarizing the magnitude of polarizing voltage must be bigger than a minimum level defined by setting VpolMin.
Note that V2 is used to determine the location of the fault. This ensures the required inversion of the polarizing voltage within the function.
Dual polarizing When dual polarizing is selected, the function uses the vectorial sum of the voltage based and current based polarizing in accordance with the following formula:
( )2 2TotPol VPol IPol Pol Pol Pol Pol PolV V V V Z I V R jX I= + = — + = — + +
ANSIEQUATION2315 V1 EN (Equation 90)
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
423 Technical reference manual
Then the phasor of the total polarizing voltage VTotPol is used, together with the phasor of the operating current, to determine the direction to the fault (Forward/Reverse).
7.5.2.3 External polarizing for negative sequence function
The individual steps within the protection can be set as non-directional. When this setting is selected it is then possible via function binary input BLKx (where x indicates the relevant step within the protection) to provide external directional control (that is, torque control) by for example using one of the following functions if available in the IED:
Distance protection directional function Negative sequence polarized general current and voltage multi purpose protection
function
7.5.2.4 Base quantities within the function
The base quantities must be entered as setting parameters for every function. Base current (IBase) must be entered as rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes. In line protections the primary rated current of the CT is chosen. Base voltage VBase must be entered as rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object in primary kV. In line protections the primary rated voltage of the VT is chosen.
7.5.2.5 Internal negative sequence protection structure
The protection is internally divided into the following parts:
Four negative sequence overcurrent steps Directional supervision element for negative sequence overcurrent steps with
integrated directional comparison step for communication based negative sequence protection schemes (permissive or blocking)
Each part is described separately in the following sections.
7.5.2.6 Four negative sequence overcurrent stages
Each overcurrent stage uses Operating Quantity I2 (negative sequence current) as measuring quantity. Every of the four overcurrent stage has the following built-in facilities:
Operating mode (Disabled/ Non-directional /Forward / Reverse). By this parameter setting the operating mode of the stage is selected. Note that the directional decision (Forward/Reverse) is not made within the overcurrent stage
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
424 Technical reference manual
itself. The direction of the fault is determined in common Directional Supervision Element described in the next paragraph.
Negative sequence current pickup value. Type of operating characteristic (Inverse or Definite Time). By this parameter
setting it is possible to select Inverse or definite time delay for negative sequence overcurrent function. Most of the standard IEC and ANSI inverse characteristics are available. For the complete list of available inverse curves, refer to Chapter «Inverse time characteristics»
Type of reset characteristic (Instantaneous / IEC Reset /ANSI reset).By this parameter setting it is possible to select the reset characteristic of the stage. For the complete list of available reset curves, refer to Chapter «Inverse time characteristics»
Time delay related settings. By these parameter settings the properties like definite time delay, minimum operating time for inverse curves, reset time delay and parameters to define user programmable inverse curve are defined.
Multiplier for scaling of the set negative sequence current pickup value by external binary signal. By this parameter setting it is possible to increase negative sequence current pickup value when function binary input MULTPUx has logical value 1.
Simplified logic diagram for one negative sequence overcurrent stage is shown in the following figure:
ANSI09000684 V1 EN
Figure 213: Simplified logic diagram for negative sequence overcurrent stage x , where x=1, 2, 3 or 4
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
425 Technical reference manual
NS4PTOC (4612) can be completely blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The pickup signals from NS4PTOC (4612) for each stage can be blocked from the binary input BLKx. The trip signals from NS4PTOC (4612) can be blocked from the binary input BLKTR.
7.5.2.7 Directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison function
At least one of the four negative sequence overcurrent steps must be set as directional in order to enable execution of the directional supervision element and the integrated directional comparison function.
NS4PTOC (4612) has integrated directional feature. As the operating quantity current Iop is always used. The polarizing method is determined by the setting polMethod. The polarizing quantity can be selected by NS4PTOC (4612) in one of the following two ways:
When polMethod=Voltage, VVPol is used as polarizing quantity When polMethod=Dual, VTotPol is used as polarizing quantity
The operating and polarizing quantity are then used inside the directional element, as shown in figure 207, to determine the direction of the fault.
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
426 Technical reference manual
AngleRCA
Forward Area
Iop = I2
Vpol=-V2
Reverse Area
ANSI10000031-1-en.vsd ANSI10000031 V1 EN
Figure 214: Operating characteristic for fault directional element
Two relevant setting parameters for directional supervision element are:
Directional element is internally enable to operate as soon as IOp is bigger than 40% of INDirPU and the directional condition is fulfilled in set direction.
Relay characteristic angle AngleRCA which defines the position of forward and reverse areas in the operating characteristic.
Directional comparison step, built-in within directional supervision element, set NS4PTOC (4612) output binary signals:
1. PUFW=1 when tip of I2 phasor (operating quantity magnitude) is in forward area, see fig 207 (Operating quantity magnitude is bigger than setting INDirPU)
2. PUREV=1 when tip of I2 phasor (operating quantity magnitude) is in the reverse area, see fig 207. (Operating quantity magnitude is bigger than 60% of setting INDirPU)
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
427 Technical reference manual
These signals must be used for communication based fault teleprotection communication schemes (permissive or blocking).
Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison step is shown in figure 208:
X a
a>b bIDirPU
polMethod=Voltage
polMethod=Dual
OR
FORWARD_Int
REVERSE_Int
BLOCK
STAGE1_DIR_Int
0.6
X0.4
AND
STAGE3_DIR_Int STAGE4_DIR_Int
STAGE2_DIR_Int OR
PUREV
VPolMin
IPolMin
AngleRCA
T F0.0
X T F
RNPol
XNPol 0.0
D ire
ct io
na l
C ha
ra ct
er is
tic
FWD
RVS AND
AND
AND PUFW FORWARD_Int
REVERSE_Int
AND
ANSI07000067-4-en.vsd
| |
VPol
VIPol
I3PDIR
VTPol
IopDir
Complex Number
a a>b
b
IPol T F0.0
polMethod=Current OR
ANSI07000067 V4 EN
Figure 215: Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison step
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
428 Technical reference manual
7.5.3 Function block
ANSI09000685-1-en.vsd
NS4PTOC (46I2) I3P* V3P* I3PPOL* BLOCK BLKTR BLK1 BLK2 BLK3 BLK4 MULTPU1 MULTPU2 MULTPU3 MULTPU4
TRIP TRST1 TRST2 TRST3 TRST4
PICKUP PU_ST1 PU_ST2 PU_ST3 PU_ST4
PUFW PUREV
ANSI09000685 V1 EN
Figure 216: NS4PTOC (4612) function block
7.5.4 Input and output signals Table 204: NS4PTOC (46I2) Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Negative Sequence 3 phase current
V3P GROUP SIGNAL
— Negative Sequence 3 phase voltage
I3PPOL GROUP SIGNAL
— Negative Sequence 3 phase polarisation current
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 General block
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip
BLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1 (Pickup and trip)
BLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2 (Pickup and trip)
BLK3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 3 (Pickup and trip)
BLK4 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 4 (Pickup and trip)
MULTPU1 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the pickup multiplier is in use for step1
MULTPU2 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the pickup multiplier is in use for step2
MULTPU3 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the pickup multiplier is in use for step3
MULTPU4 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the pickup multiplier is in use for step4
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
429 Technical reference manual
Table 205: NS4PTOC (46I2) Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
TRST1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 1
TRST2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 2
TRST3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 3
TRST4 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 4
PICKUP BOOLEAN General pickup signal
PU_ST1 BOOLEAN Pickup signal step 1
PU_ST2 BOOLEAN Pickup signal step 2
PU_ST3 BOOLEAN Pickup signal step 3
PU_ST4 BOOLEAN Pickup signal step 4
PUFW BOOLEAN Forward directional pickup signal
PUREV BOOLEAN Reverse directional pickup signal
7.5.5 Setting parameters Table 206: NS4PTOC (46I2) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
IBase 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Base value for current settings
VBase 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400 Base value for voltage settings
AngleRCA -180 — 180 Deg 1 65 Relay characteristic angle (RCA)
polMethod Voltage Dual
— — Voltage Type of polarization
VPolMin 1 — 100 %VB 1 5 Minimum voltage level for polarization in % of VBase
IPolMin 2 — 100 %IB 1 5 Minimum current level for polarization in % of IBase
RPol 0.50 — 1000.00 ohm 0.01 5.00 Real part of neg. seq. source imp. to be used for current polarisation
XPol 0.50 — 3000.00 ohm 0.01 40.00 Imaginary part of neg. seq. source imp. to be used for current polarisation
I>Dir 1 — 100 %IB 1 10 Neg. seq. curr. I2 level for Direction release in % of IBase
DirModeSel1 Disabled Non-directional Forward Reverse
— — Non-directional Directional mode of step 1 (Disabled, Nondir, Forward, Reverse)
Table continues on next page
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
430 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Characterist1 ANSI Ext. inv.
ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type
— — ANSI Def. Time Time delay curve type for step 1
Pickup1 1 — 2500 %IB 1 100 Operate neg. seq. curr. I2 level for step 1 in % of IBase
t1 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Independent (defenite) time delay of step 1
TD1 0.05 — 999.00 — 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 1
IMin1 1.00 — 10000.00 %IB 1.00 100.00 Minimum current for step 1
t1Min 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 1
MultPU1 1.0 — 10.0 — 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 1
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset
— — Instantaneous Reset curve type for step 1
tReset1 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 1
tPCrv1 0.005 — 3.000 — 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 1
tACrv1 0.005 — 200.000 — 0.001 13.500 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 1
tBCrv1 0.00 — 20.00 — 0.01 0.00 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 1
tCCrv1 0.1 — 10.0 — 0.1 1.0 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 1
tPRCrv1 0.005 — 3.000 — 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 1
tTRCrv1 0.005 — 100.000 — 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 1
tCRCrv1 0.1 — 10.0 — 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 1
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
431 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description DirModeSel2 Disabled
Non-directional Forward Reverse
— — Non-directional Directional mode of step 2 (Disabled, Nondir, Forward, Reverse)
Characterist2 ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type
— — ANSI Def. Time Time delay curve type for step 2
Pickup2 1 — 2500 %IB 1 50 Operate neg. seq. curr. I2 level for step 2 in % of IBase
t2 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Independent (definitive) time delay of step 2
TD2 0.05 — 999.00 — 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 2
IMin2 1.00 — 10000.00 %IB 1.00 50 Minimum current for step 2
t2Min 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves step 2
MultPU2 1.0 — 10.0 — 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 2
ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset
— — Instantaneous Reset curve type for step 2
tReset2 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 2
tPCrv2 0.005 — 3.000 — 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 2
tACrv2 0.005 — 200.000 — 0.001 13.500 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 2
tBCrv2 0.00 — 20.00 — 0.01 0.00 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 2
tCCrv2 0.1 — 10.0 — 0.1 1.0 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 2
tPRCrv2 0.005 — 3.000 — 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 2
tTRCrv2 0.005 — 100.000 — 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 2
Table continues on next page
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
432 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description tCRCrv2 0.1 — 10.0 — 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer programmable
curve for step 2
DirModeSel3 Disabled Non-directional Forward Reverse
— — Non-directional Directional mode of step 3 (Disabled, Nondir, Forward, Reverse)
Characterist3 ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type
— — ANSI Def. Time Time delay curve type for step 3
Pickup3 1 — 2500 %IB 1 33 Operate neg. seq. curr. I2 level for step 3 in % of IBase
t3 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.800 Independent time delay of step 3
TD3 0.05 — 999.00 — 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 3
IMin3 1.00 — 10000.00 %IB 1.00 33 Minimum current for step 3
t3Min 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 3
MultPU3 1.0 — 10.0 — 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 3
ResetTypeCrv3 Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset
— — Instantaneous Reset curve type for step 3
tReset3 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 3
tPCrv3 0.005 — 3.000 — 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 3
tACrv3 0.005 — 200.000 — 0.001 13.500 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 3
tBCrv3 0.00 — 20.00 — 0.01 0.00 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 3
tCCrv3 0.1 — 10.0 — 0.1 1.0 Parameter C for customer programmable curve step 3
tPRCrv3 0.005 — 3.000 — 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve step 3
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
433 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description tTRCrv3 0.005 — 100.000 — 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer programmable
curve step 3
tCRCrv3 0.1 — 10.0 — 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 3
DirModeSel4 Disabled Non-directional Forward Reverse
— — Non-directional Directional mode of step 4 (Disabled, Nondir, Forward, Reverse)
Characterist4 ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type
— — ANSI Def. Time Time delay curve type for step 4
Pickup4 1 — 2500 %IB 1 17 Operate neg. seq. curr. I2 level for step 4 in % of IBase
t4 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 1.200 Independent (definitive) time delay of step 4
TD4 0.05 — 999.00 — 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 4
IMin4 1.00 — 10000.00 %IB 1.00 17 Minimum current for step 4
t4Min 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time in inverse curves step 4
MultPU4 1.0 — 10.0 — 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 4
ResetTypeCrv4 Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset
— — Instantaneous Reset curve type for step 4
tReset4 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 4
tPCrv4 0.005 — 3.000 — 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 4
tACrv4 0.005 — 200.000 — 0.001 13.500 Parameter A for customer programmable curve step 4
tBCrv4 0.00 — 20.00 — 0.01 0.00 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 4
tCCrv4 0.1 — 10.0 — 0.1 1.0 Parameter C for customer programmable curve step 4
Table continues on next page
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
434 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description tPRCrv4 0.005 — 3.000 — 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer programmable
curve step 4
tTRCrv4 0.005 — 100.000 — 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve step 4
tCRCrv4 0.1 — 10.0 — 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve step 4
7.5.6 Technical data Table 207: NS4PTOC (46I2) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Operate value, negative sequence current, step 1-4
(1-2500)% of lBase 1.0% of In at I In 1.0% of I at I > In
Reset ratio > 95% —
Timers (0.000-60.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
Inverse characteristics, see table 728, table 729 and table 730
18 curve types See table 728, table 729 and table 730
Minimum operate current for step 1 — 4
(1.00 — 10000.00)% of IBase 1.0% of In at I < In 1.0% of I at I > In
Operate value, negative current for directional release
(1100)% of IBase 1.0% of In
Relay characteristic angle (-180 to 180) degrees 2.0 degrees
Minimum polarizing voltage (1100)% of VBase 0.5% of Vn
Minimum polarizing current (2-100)% of IBase 1.0% of In
Real part of negative sequence source impedance used for current polarization
(0.50-1000.00) W/phase —
Imaginary part of negative sequence source impedance used for current polarization
(0.503000.00) W/phase —
Operate time, pickup function 25 ms typically at 0.5 to 2 x Iset —
Reset time, pickup function 25 ms typically at 2 to 0.5 x Iset —
Critical impulse time, pickup function
10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset —
Impulse margin time, pickup function
15 ms typically —
Transient overreach <10% at = 100 ms —
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
435 Technical reference manual
7.6 Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection SDEPSDE (67N)
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Sensitive directional residual over current and power protection
SDEPSDE — 67N
7.6.1 Introduction In networks with high impedance grounding, the phase-to-ground fault current is significantly smaller than the short circuit currents. Another difficulty for ground-fault protection is that the magnitude of the phase-to-ground fault current is almost independent of the fault location in the network.
Directional residual current can be used to detect and give selective trip of phase-to- ground faults in high impedance grounded networks. The protection uses the residual current component 3I0 cos , where is the angle between the residual current and the residual voltage (-3V0), compensated with a characteristic angle. Alternatively, the function can be set to strict 3I0 level with a check of angle 3I0 and cos .
Directional residual power can also be used to detect and give selective trip of phase-to- ground faults in high impedance grounded networks. The protection uses the residual power component 3I0 3V0 cos , where is the angle between the residual current and the reference residual voltage, compensated with a characteristic angle.
A normal non-directional residual current function can also be used with definite or inverse time delay.
A back-up neutral point voltage function is also available for non-directional sensitive back-up protection.
In an isolated network, that is, the network is only coupled to ground via the capacitances between the phase conductors and ground, the residual current always has -90 phase shift compared to the reference residual voltage. The characteristic angle is chosen to -90 in such a network.
In resistance grounded networks or in Petersen coil grounded, with a parallel resistor, the active residual current component (in phase with the residual voltage) should be used for the ground-fault detection. In such networks the characteristic angle is chosen to 0.
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
436 Technical reference manual
As the magnitude of the residual current is independent of the fault location the selectivity of the ground-fault protection is achieved by time selectivity.
When should the sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection be used and when should the sensitive directional residual power protection be used? Consider the following facts:
Sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection gives possibility for better sensitivity. The setting possibilities of this function are down to 0.25 % of IBase, 1 A or 5 A. This sensitivity is in most cases sufficient in high impedance network applications, if the measuring CT ratio is not too high.
Sensitive directional residual power protection gives possibility to use inverse time characteristics. This is applicable in large high impedance grounded networks, with large capacitive ground-fault current
In some power systems a medium size neutral point resistor is used, for example, in low impedance grounded system. Such a resistor will give a resistive ground- fault current component of about 200 — 400 A at a zero resistive phase-to-ground fault. In such a system the directional residual power protection gives better possibilities for selectivity enabled by inverse time power characteristics.
Phase currents
Phase- ground
voltages
IN
UN
IEC13000013-1-en.vsd IEC13000013 V1 EN
Figure 217: Connection of SDEPSDE to analog preprocessing function block
Over current functionality uses true 3I0, i.e. sum of GRPxL1, GRPxL2 and GRPxL3. For 3I0 to be calculated, connection is needed to all three phase inputs.
Directional and power functionality uses IN and UN. If a connection is made to GRPxN this signal is used, else if connection is made to all inputs GRPxL1, GRPxL2 and GRPxL3 the sum of these inputs (3I0 and 3U0) will be used.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
437 Technical reference manual
7.6.2 Principle of operation
7.6.2.1 Function inputs
The function is using phasors of the residual current and voltage. Group signals I3P and V3P containing phasors of residual current and voltage is taken from pre-processor blocks.
The sensitive directional ground fault protection has the following sub-functions included:
Directional residual current protection measuring 3I0cos is defined as the angle between the residual current 3I0 and the reference voltage. Vref = -3V0 ejRCADir, that is -3V0 rotated by the set characteristic angle RCADir (=ang(3I0)-ang(Vref) ). RCADir is normally set equal to 0 in a high impedance grounded network with a neutral point resistor as the active current component is appearing out on the faulted feeder only. RCADir is set equal to -90 in an isolated network as all currents are mainly capacitive. The function operates when 3I0cos gets larger than the set value.
-3V0=Vref
3I0
RCA = 0, ROA = 90
= ang(3I0) — ang(3Vref)
3I0 cos
en06000648_ansi.vsd
Vref
ANSI06000648 V1 EN
Figure 218: RCADir set to 0
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
438 Technical reference manual
-3V0
3I0
RCA = -90, ROA = 90
= ang(3I0) ang(Vref)
3I0 cos
Vref
en06000649_ansi.vsd ANSI06000649 V1 EN
Figure 219: RCADir set to -90
For trip, both the residual current 3I0cos and the release voltage 3V0, must be larger than the set levels: INCosPhiPU and VNRelPU.
Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR.
When the function is activated binary output signals PICKUP and PUDIRIN are activated. If the output signals are active after the set delay tDef the binary output signals TRIP and TRDIRIN are activated. The trip from this sub-function has definite time delay.
There is a possibility to increase the operate level for currents where the angle is larger than a set value as shown in figure 220. This is equivalent to blocking of the function if > ROADir. This option is used to handle angle error for the instrument transformers.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
439 Technical reference manual
-3V0=Vref
3I0
RCA = 0 3I0 cos
Operate area
ROA
en06000650_ansi.vsd ANSI06000650-2-
vsd
Vref -3Vo
ANSI06000650 V2 EN
Figure 220: Characteristic with ROADir restriction
The function indicates forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is defined as 3I0cos ( + 180) the set value.
It is also possible to tilt the characteristic to compensate for current transformer angle error with a setting RCAComp as shown in the figure 221:
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
440 Technical reference manual
-3V0=Vref RCA = 0
Operate area
Instrument transformer angle error
3I0 (prim) 3I0 (to prot)
a
Characteristic after angle compensation
RCAcomp
en06000651_ansi.vsd ANSI06000651 V1 EN
Figure 221: Explanation of RCAComp
Directional residual power protection measuring 3I0 3V0 cos is defined as the angle between the residual current 3I0 and the reference voltage compensated with the set characteristic angle RCADir (=ang(3I0)ang(Vref) ). Vref = -3V0 e-jRCA. The function operates when 3I0 3V0 cos gets larger than the set value.
For trip, both the residual power 3I0 3V0 cos , the residual current 3I0 and the release voltage 3V0, shall be larger than the set levels (SN_PU, INRelPU and VNRelPU).
Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR.
When the function is activated binary output signals PICKUP and PUDIRIN are activated. If the output signals are active after the set delay tDef or after the inverse time delay (setting TDSN) the binary output signals TRIP and TRDIRIN are activated.
The function shall indicate forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is defined as 3I0 3V0cos ( + 180) the set value.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
441 Technical reference manual
This variant has the possibility of choice between definite time delay and inverse time delay.
The inverse time delay is defined as:
t TDSN I V reference
I V measured inv =
( cos ( ))
cos ( )
3 3
3 3
0 0
0 0
EQUATION2032-ANSI V2 EN (Equation 91)
Directional residual current protection measuring 3I0 and The function will operate if the residual current is larger that the set value and the angle = ang(3I0)-ang(Vref) is within the sector RCADir ROADir
Vref=-3V0
Operate area
3I0
RCA = 0
ROA = 80
ANSI06000652-2-en.vsd ANSI06000652 V2 EN
Figure 222: Example of characteristic
For trip, both the residual current 3I0 and the release voltage 3V0, shall be larger than the set levels INDirPU and VNRelPU and the angle shall be in the set sector ROADir and RCADir.
Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR.
When the function is activated binary output signals PICKUP and PUDIRIN are activated. If the output signals are active after the set delay tDef the binary output signals TRIP and TRDIRIN are activated.
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
442 Technical reference manual
The function indicate forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is defined as is within the angle sector: RCADir + 180 ROADir
This variant has definite time delay.
Directional functions For all the directional functions there are directional pickup signals PUFW: fault in the forward direction, and PUREV: Pickup in the reverse direction. Even if the directional function is set to operate for faults in the forward direction a fault in the reverse direction will give the pickup signal PUREV. Also if the directional function is set to operate for faults in the reverse direction a fault in the forward direction will give the pickup signal PUFW.
Non-directional ground fault current protection This function will measure the residual current without checking the phase angle. The function will be used to detect cross-country faults. This function can serve as alternative or back-up to distance protection with phase preference logic. To assure selectivity the distance protection can block the non-directional ground fault current function via the input BLKNDN.
The non-directional function is using the calculated residual current, derived as sum of the phase currents. This will give a better ability to detect cross-country faults with high residual current, also when dedicated core balance CT for the sensitive ground fault protection will saturate.
This variant has the possibility of choice between definite time delay and inverse time delay. The inverse time delay shall be according to IEC 60255-3.
For trip, the residual current 3I0 shall be larger than the set level (INNonDirPU).
Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKNDN.
When the function is activated binary output signal PUNDIN is activated. If the output signal is active after the set delay tINNonDir or after the inverse time delay the binary output signals TRIP and TRNDIN are activated.
Residual overvoltage release and protection The directional function shall be released when the residual voltage gets higher than a set level.
There shall also be a separate trip, with its own definite time delay, from this level set voltage level.
For trip, the residual voltage 3V0 shall be larger than the set level (UN_PU).
Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKVN.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
443 Technical reference manual
When the function is activated binary output signal PUVN is activated. If the output signals are active after the set delay tVNNonDir TRIP and TRUN are activated. A simplified logical diagram of the total function is shown in figure 223.
en06000653_ansi.vsd
INNonDirPU
UN_PU
OpMODE=INcosPhi
Pickup_N
INCosPhiPU
OpMODE=INVNCosPhi
INVNCosPhiPU
Phi in RCA +- ROA
OpMODE=IN and Phi
DirMode = Forw
Forw
DirMode = Rev
Rev
PUNDIN
TRNDIN
PUVN
TRVN
AND
AND
AND
OR AND
AND
AND OR
PUDIRIN
PUFW
PUREV
0 — t
0 — t 0
0
TimeChar = DefTime
TRDIRINANDSN
t
TimeChar = InvTime
AND
ANSI06000653 V1 EN
Figure 223: Simplified logical diagram of the sensitive ground-fault current protection
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
444 Technical reference manual
7.6.3 Function block
ANSI07000032-2-en.vsd
SDEPSDE (67N) I3P* V3P* BLOCK BLKTR BLKTRDIR BLKNDN BLKVN
TRIP TRDIRIN TRNDIN
TRVN PICKUP
PUDIRIN PUNDIN
PUVN PUFW
PUREV CND
VNREL
ANSI07000032 V2 EN
Figure 224: SDEPSDE (67N) function block
7.6.4 Input and output signals Table 208: SDEPSDE (67N) Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Group signal for current
V3P GROUP SIGNAL
— Group signal for voltage
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all the outputs of the function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the operate outputs of the function
BLKTRDIR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the directional operate outputs of the function
BLKNDN BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the Non directional current residual outputs
BLKVN BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the Non directional voltage residual outputs
Table 209: SDEPSDE (67N) Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN General trip of the function
TRDIRIN BOOLEAN Trip of the directional residual over current function
TRNDIN BOOLEAN Trip of non directional residual over current
TRVN BOOLEAN Trip of non directional residual over voltage
PICKUP BOOLEAN General pickup of the function
PUDIRIN BOOLEAN Pickup of the directional residual over current function
PUNDIN BOOLEAN Pickup of non directional residual over current
PUVN BOOLEAN Pickup of non directional residual over voltage
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
445 Technical reference manual
Name Type Description PUFW BOOLEAN Pickup of directional function for a fault in forward
direction
PUREV BOOLEAN Pickup of directional function for a fault in reverse direction
CND INTEGER Direction of fault. A general signal common to all three mode of residual over current protection
VNREL BOOLEAN Residual voltage release of operation of all directional modes
7.6.5 Setting parameters Table 210: SDEPSDE (67N) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Operation Disable / Enable
OpModeSel 3I0Cosfi 3I03V0Cosfi 3I0 and fi
— — 3I0Cosfi Selection of operation mode for protection
DirMode Forward Reverse
— — Forward Direction of operation forward or reverse
RCADir -179 — 180 Deg 1 -90 Relay characteristic angle RCA, in deg
RCAComp -10.0 — 10.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Relay characteristic angle compensation
ROADir 0 — 90 Deg 1 90 Relay open angle ROA used as release in phase mode, in deg
INCosPhiPU 0.25 — 200.00 %IB 0.01 1.00 Set level for 3I0cosFi, directional res over current, in %Ib
SN_PU 0.25 — 200.00 %SB 0.01 10.00 Set level for 3I03V0cosFi, pickup inv time count, in %Sb
INDirPU 0.25 — 200.00 %IB 0.01 5.00 Set level for directional residual over current prot, in %Ib
tDef 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Definite time delay directional residual overcurrent, in sec
SRef 0.03 — 200.00 %SB 0.01 10.00 Reference value of res power for inverse time count, in %Sb
TDSN 0.00 — 2.00 — 0.01 0.10 Time multiplier setting for directional residual power mode
OpINNonDir Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Operation of non-directional residual overcurrent protection
INNonDirPU 1.00 — 400.00 %IB 0.01 10.00 Set level for non directional residual over current, in %Ib
tINNonDir 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Time delay for non-directional residual over current, in sec
Table continues on next page
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
446 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description TimeChar ANSI Ext. inv.
ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type
— — IEC Norm. inv. Operation curve selection for IDMT operation
t_MinTripDelay 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.040 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves, in sec
TDIN 0.00 — 2.00 — 0.01 1.00 IDMT time mult for non-dir res over current protection
OpVN Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Operation of non-directional residual overvoltage protection
VN_PU 1.00 — 200.00 %VB 0.01 20.00 Set level for non-directional residual over voltage, in %Vb
tVN 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay for non-directional residual over voltage, in sec
INRelPU 0.25 — 200.00 %IB 0.01 1.00 Residual release current for all directional modes, in %Ib
VNRelPU 0.01 — 200.00 %VB 0.01 3.00 Residual release voltage for all direction modes, in %Vb
Table 211: SDEPSDE (67N) Group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description tReset 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.040 Time delay used for reset of definite timers, in
sec
tPCrv 0.005 — 3.000 — 0.001 1.000 Setting P for customer programmable curve
tACrv 0.005 — 200.000 — 0.001 13.500 Setting A for customer programmable curve
tBCrv 0.00 — 20.00 — 0.01 0.00 Setting B for customer programmable curve
tCCrv 0.1 — 10.0 — 0.1 1.0 Setting C for customer programmable curve
ResetTypeCrv Immediate IEC Reset ANSI reset
— — IEC Reset Reset mode when current drops off.
tPRCrv 0.005 — 3.000 — 0.001 0.500 Setting PR for customer programmable curve
tTRCrv 0.005 — 100.000 — 0.001 13.500 Setting TR for customer programmable curve
tCRCrv 0.1 — 10.0 — 0.1 1.0 Setting CR for customer programmable curve
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
447 Technical reference manual
Table 212: SDEPSDE (67N) Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description IBase 1 — 99999 A 1 100 Base Current, in A
VBase 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 63.50 Base Voltage, in kV Phase to Neutral
SBase 0.05 — 200000000.00
kVA 0.05 6350.00 Base Power, in kVA. IBase*Ubase
Table 213: SDEPSDE (67N) Non group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description RotResV 0 deg
180 deg — — 180 deg Setting for rotating polarizing quantity if
necessary
7.6.6 Technical data Table 214: SDEPSDE (67N) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Operate level for 3I0cosj directional residual overcurrent
(0.25-200.00)% of lBase 1.0% of In at I In 1.0% of I at I > In At low setting: (0.25-1.00)% of In: 0.05% of In (1.00-5.00)% of In: 0.1% of In
Operate level for 3I03V0 cosj directional residual power
(0.25-200.00)% of SBase 1.0% of Sn at S Sn 1.0% of S at S > Sn At low setting: (0.25-5.00)% of SBase 10% of set value
Operate level for 3I0 and j residual overcurrent
(0.25-200.00)% of lBase 1.0% of In at In 1.0% of I at I > In At low setting: (0.25-1.00)% of In: 0.05% of In (1.00-5.00)% of In: 0.1% of In
Operate level for non- directional overcurrent
(1.00-400.00)% of lBase 1.0% of In at I In 1.0% of I at I > In At low setting <5% of In: 0.1% of In
Operate level for non- directional residual overvoltage
(1.00-200.00)% of VBase 0.5% of Vn at VVn 0.5% of V at V > Vn
Table continues on next page
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
448 Technical reference manual
Function Range or value Accuracy Residual release current for all directional modes
(0.25-200.00)% of lBase 1.0% of In at I In 1.0% of I at I > In At low setting: (0.25-1.00)% of In: 0.05% of In (1.00-5.00)% of In: 0.1% of In
Residual release voltage for all directional modes
(0.01-200.00)% of VBase 0.5% of Vn at VVn 0.5% of V at V > Vn
Reset ratio > 95% —
Timers (0.000-60.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
Inverse characteristics, see table 728, table 729 and table 730
19 curve types See table 728, table 729 and table 730
Relay characteristic angle RCA
(-179 to 180) degrees 2.0 degrees
Relay open angle ROA (0-90) degrees 2.0 degrees
Operate time, non-directional residual over current
60 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset —
Reset time, non-directional residual over current
60 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset —
Operate time, pickup function 150 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset —
Reset time, pickup function 50 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset —
7.7 Thermal overload protection, one time constant LPTTR
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Thermal overload protection, one time constant
LPTTR
SYMBOL-A V1 EN
26
7.7.1 Introduction The increasing utilizing of the power system closer to the thermal limits has generated a need of a thermal overload protection also for power lines.
A thermal overload will often not be detected by other protection functions and the introduction of the thermal overload protection can allow the protected circuit to operate closer to the thermal limits.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
449 Technical reference manual
The three-phase current measuring protection has an I2t characteristic with settable time constant and a thermal memory..
An alarm pickup gives early warning to allow operators to take action well before the line is tripped.
7.7.2 Principle of operation The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed and for each phase current the RMS value is derived. These phase current values are fed to the thermal overload protection, one time constant function LPTTR. (26).
From the largest of the three-phase currents a final temperature is calculated according to the expression:
2
final ref ref
I T I
Q =
EQUATION1167 V1 EN (Equation 92)
where:
I is the largest phase current,
Iref is a given reference current and
Tref is steady state temperature rise corresponding to Iref
The ambient temperature is added to the calculated final temperature. If this temperature is larger than the set operate temperature level, TripTemp, a PICKUP output signal is activated.
The actual temperature at the actual execution cycle is calculated as:
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
450 Technical reference manual
( )1 1 1 t
n n final n e t D
—
— —
Q = Q + Q — Q —
EQUATION1168 V1 EN (Equation 93)
where:
Qn is the calculated present temperature,
Qn-1 is the calculated temperature at the previous time step,
Qfinal is the calculated final temperature with the actual current,
Dt is the time step between calculation of the actual temperature and
t is the set thermal time constant for the protected device (line or cable)
The actual temperature of the protected component (line or cable) is calculated by adding the ambient temperature to the calculated temperature, as shown above. The ambient temperature can be taken from a separate sensor or can be given a constant value. The calculated component temperature is available as a real figure signal, TEMP.
When the component temperature reaches the set alarm level AlarmTemp the output signal ALARM is set. When the component temperature reaches the set trip level TripTemp the output signal TRIP is set.
There is also a calculation of the present time to operate with the present current. This calculation is only performed if the final temperature is calculated to be above the operation temperature:
ln final operate operate
final n
t t Q — Q
= — Q — Q EQUATION1169 V1 EN (Equation 94)
The calculated time to trip is available as a real figure signal, TTRIP.
After a trip, caused by the thermal overload protection, there can be a lockout to reconnect the tripped circuit. The output lockout signal LOCKOUT is activated when the device temperature is above the set lockout release temperature setting ReclTemp.
The time to lockout release is calculated that is, a calculation of the cooling time to a set value. The thermal content of the function can be reset with input RESET.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
451 Technical reference manual
_ _ ln final lockout release
lockout release final n
t t Q — Q
= — Q — Q EQUATION1170 V1 EN (Equation 95)
Here the final temperature is equal to the set or measured ambient temperature. The calculated time to reset of lockout is available as a real figure signal, TENRECL.
In some applications the measured current can involve a number of parallel lines. This is often used for cable lines where one bay connects several parallel cables. By setting the parameter IMult to the number of parallel lines (cables) the actual current on one line is used in the protection algorithm. To activate this option the input MULTPU must be activated.
The protection has a reset input: RESET. By activating this input the calculated temperature is reset to its default initial value. This is useful during testing when secondary injected current has given a calculated false temperature level.
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
452 Technical reference manual
Calculation of final
temperature
IA, IB, IC
Calculation of actual
temperature
Final Temp > TripTemp
actual temperature
PICKUP
Actual Temp > AlarmTemp
Actual Temp > TripTemp
ALARM
TRIP
Actual Temp < Recl Temp
Calculation of time to
trip
Calculation of time to reset of lockout
TTRIP
TENRECL
ANSI09000637-2-en.vsd
Lock- out
logic
LOCKOUT
ANSI09000637 V2 EN
Figure 225: Functional overview of LPTTR
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
453 Technical reference manual
7.7.3 Function block LPTTR (26)
I3P* BLOCK BLKTR MULTPU AMBTEMP SENSFLT RESET
TRIP PICKUP ALARM
LOCKOUT
ANSI04000396-2-en.vsd ANSI04000396 V2 EN
Figure 226: LPTTR (26) function block
7.7.4 Input and output signals Table 215: LPTTR (26) Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Group connection
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip
MULTPU BOOLEAN 0 Current multiplyer used when THOL is for two or more lines
AMBTEMP REAL 0 Ambient temperature from external temperature sensor
SENSFLT BOOLEAN 0 Validity status of ambient temperature sensor
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of internal thermal load counter
Table 216: LPTTR (26) Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
PICKUP BOOLEAN Pickup Signal
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm signal
LOCKOUT BOOLEAN Lockout signal
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
454 Technical reference manual
7.7.5 Setting parameters Table 217: LPTTR (26) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
IBase 0 — 99999 A 1 3000 Base current in A
TRef 0 — 600 Deg 1 90 End temperature rise above ambient of the line when loaded with IRef
IRef 0 — 400 %IB 1 100 The load current (in % of IBase) leading to TRef temperature
IMult 1 — 5 — 1 1 Current multiplier when function is used for two or more lines
Tau 0 — 1000 Min 1 45 Time constant of the line in minutes.
AlarmTemp 0 — 200 Deg 1 80 Temperature level for pickup (alarm)
TripTemp 0 — 600 Deg 1 90 Temperature level for trip
ReclTemp 0 — 600 Deg 1 75 Temperature for reset of lockout after trip
tPulse 0.05 — 0.30 s 0.01 0.1 Operate pulse length. Minimum one execution cycle
AmbiSens Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled External temperature sensor availiable
DefaultAmbTemp -50 — 250 Deg 1 20 Ambient temperature used when AmbiSens is set to Off.
DefaultTemp -50 — 600 Deg 1 50 Temperature raise above ambient temperature at startup
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
455 Technical reference manual
7.7.6 Technical data Table 218: LFPTTR/LCPTTR (26) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Reference current (0-400)% of IBase 1.0% of In
Reference temperature (0-400)C, (0 — 600)F 2F, 2F
Trip time:
2 2
2 2 2
ln p
Trip Amb
p ref
ref
I I t
T T I I I
T
t —
= —
— —
EQUATION13000039 V2 EN (Equation 96)
TTrip= set trip temperature TAmb = ambient temperature Tref = temperature rise above ambient at Iref Iref = reference load current I = actual measured current Ip = load current before overload occurs
Time constant t = (11000) minutes IEC 60255-8, 5.0% or 200 ms whichever is greater
Alarm temperature (0-400)F, (0-200)C 2.0% of heat content trip
Trip temperature (0-400)C, (0-600)F 2.0% of heat content trip
Reset level temperature (0-400)C, (0-600)F 2.0% of heat content trip
7.8 Breaker failure protection CCRBRF (50BF)
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Breaker failure protection CCRBRF
3I>BF
SYMBOL-U V1 EN
50BF
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
456 Technical reference manual
7.8.1 Introduction Breaker failure protection (CCRBRF) ensures fast back-up tripping of surrounding breakers in case the own breaker fails to open. CCRBRF (50BF) can be current based, contact based, or an adaptive combination of these two conditions.
Current check with extremely short reset time is used as check criterion to achieve high security against inadvertent operation.
Contact check criteria can be used where the fault current through the breaker is small.
CCRBRF (50BF) can be single- or three-phase initiated to allow use with single pole tripping applications. For the three-phase version of CCRBRF (50BF) the current criteria can be set to operate only if two out of four for example, two phases or one phase plus the residual current pickups. This gives a higher security to the back-up trip command.
CCRBRF (50BF) function can be programmed to give a single- or three-phase re-trip of the own breaker to avoid unnecessary tripping of surrounding breakers at an incorrect initiation due to mistakes during testing.
7.8.2 Operation principle Breaker failure protection CCRBRF (50BF) is initiated from protection trip command, either from protection functions within the IED or from external protection devices.
The initiate signal can be phase selective or general (for all three phases). Phase selective initiate signals enable single pole re-trip function. This means that a second attempt to open the breaker is done. The re-trip attempt can be made after a set time delay. For transmission lines single pole trip and autoreclosing is often used. The re- trip function can be phase selective if it is initiated from phase selective line protection. The re-trip function can be done with or without current check. With the current check the re-trip is only performed if the current through the circuit breaker is larger than the operate current level.
The initiate signal can be an internal or external protection trip signal. This signal will initiate the back-up trip timer. If the opening of the breaker is successful this is detected by the function, by detection of either low current through RMS evaluation and a special adapted current algorithm or by open contact indication. The special algorithm enables a very fast detection of successful breaker opening, that is, fast resetting of the current measurement. If the current and/or contact detection has not detected breaker opening before the back-up timer has run its time a back-up trip is initiated.
Further the following possibilities are available:
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
457 Technical reference manual
The minimum length of the re-trip pulse, the back-up trip pulse and the back-up trip pulse 2 are settable. The re-trip pulse, the back-up trip pulse and the back-up trip pulse 2 will however sustain as long as there is an indication of closed breaker.
In the current detection it is possible to use three different options: 1 out of 3 where it is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole, 1 out of 4 where it is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole or high residual current and 2 out of 4 where at least two current (phase current and/or residual current) shall be high for breaker failure detection.
The current detection level for the residual current can be set different from the setting of phase current detection.
It is possible to have different back-up time delays for single-phase faults and for multi-phase faults.
The back-up trip can be made without current check. It is possible to have this option activated for small load currents only.
It is possible to have instantaneous back-up trip function if a signal is high if the circuit breaker is insufficient to clear faults, for example at low gas pressure.
S R
SR Q
OR
AND AND
30 msBFI_3P BFI_A OR
ORBackupTrip A
BFP Started A
Time out A
Reset A BLOCK
Retrip Time Out A
ANSI09000976-2-en.vsd
0
150ms
ANSI09000976 V2 EN
Figure 227: Simplified logic scheme of the CCRBRF (50BF) starting logic
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND OR
OR
OR
a b
a>b
AND
a b
a>b AND
Time out A
BFP Started A
Reset A
52a_A
I_A
Current High A
Contact Closed A
ANSI09000977-1-en.vsd
FunctionMode OR
OR
Current
Contact
Current and Contact
1
CB Closed A
Pickup_PH
Pickup_BlkCont
ANSI09000977 V1 EN
Figure 228: Simplified logic scheme of the CCRBRF (50BF), CB position evaluation
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
458 Technical reference manual
tPulse
AND
AND OR
OR
OR
TRRET_C
TRRET_BBFP Started A Retrip Time Out A
CB Closed A
TRRET
TRRET_A
52FAIL
CB Pos Check
No CBPos Check
AND
OR
From other phases
ANSI09000978-4-en.vsd
RetripMode
1
0 t1
ANSI09000978 V4 EN
Figure 229: Simplified logic scheme of the retrip logic function
ANSI09000979-4-en.vsd
BFP Started A
AND
2 of 3BFP Started B BFP Started C
From other phases
OR OR
AND
52FAIL AND
AND
a b
a>b IN
1 out of 4
OR1 out of 3 Current High B Current High C
From other phases
ANDCurrent High A
OR
Contact Closed A
OR
Backup Trip A
tPulse Backup Trip B
OR
From other phases Backup Trip C
TRBUOR
S R SRQ
AND
tPulse
TRBU2OR
2 out of 4BUTripMode
1
Pickup_N
AND
BFP Started A ANDBFP Started B
BFP Started C
0
t2
0
t2MPh
0
t3
ANSI09000979 V4 EN
Figure 230: Simplified logic scheme of the back-up trip logic function
Internal logical signals PU_A, PU_B, PU_C have logical value 1 when current in respective phase has magnitude larger than setting parameter Pickup_PH.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
459 Technical reference manual
7.8.3 Function block CCRBRF (50BF)
I3P* BLOCK BFI_3P BFI_A BFI_B BFI_C 52A_A 52A_B 52A_C 52FAIL
TRBU TRBU2 TRRET
TRRET_A TRRET_B TRRET_C CBALARM
ANSI06000188-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000188 V2 EN
Figure 231: CCRBRF (50BF) function block
7.8.4 Input and output signals Table 219: CCRBRF (50BF) Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Three phase group signal for current inputs
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BFI_3P BOOLEAN 0 Three phase breaker failure initiation
BFI_A BOOLEAN 0 Phase A breaker failure initiation
BFI_B BOOLEAN 0 Phase B breaker failure initiation
BFI_C BOOLEAN 0 Phase C breaker failure initiation
52a_A BOOLEAN 1 Circuit breaker closed in phase A
52a_B BOOLEAN 1 Circuit breaker closed in phase B
52a_C BOOLEAN 1 Circuit breaker closed in phase C
52FAIL BOOLEAN 0 CB faulty, unable to trip. Back-up trip instantaneously
Table 220: CCRBRF (50BF) Output signals
Name Type Description TRBU BOOLEAN Back-up trip by breaker failure protection function
TRBU2 BOOLEAN Second back-up trip by breaker failure protection function
TRRET BOOLEAN Retrip by breaker failure protection function
TRRET_A BOOLEAN Retrip by breaker failure protection function phase A
TRRET_B BOOLEAN Retrip by breaker failure protection function phase B
TRRET_C BOOLEAN Retrip by breaker failure protection function phase C
CBALARM BOOLEAN Alarm for faulty circuit breaker
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
460 Technical reference manual
7.8.5 Setting parameters Table 221: CCRBRF (50BF) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
IBase 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Base current
FunctionMode Current Contact Current&Contact
— — Current Detection principle for back-up trip
BuTripMode 2 out of 4 1 out of 3 1 out of 4
— — 1 out of 3 Back-up trip mode
RetripMode Retrip Off CB Pos Check No CBPos Check
— — Retrip Off Operation mode of re-trip logic
Pickup_PH 5 — 200 %IB 1 10 Phase current pickup in % of IBase
Pickup_N 2 — 200 %IB 1 10 Operate residual current level in % of IBase
t1 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of re-trip
t2 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Time delay of back-up trip
t2MPh 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Time delay of back-up trip at multi-phase pickup
tPulse 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Trip pulse duration
Table 222: CCRBRF (50BF) Group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Pickup_BlkCont 5 — 200 %IB 1 20 Current for blocking of CB contact operation
in % of IBase
t3 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.030 Additional time delay to 27P2TDLY for a second back-up trip
tCBAlarm 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Time delay for CB faulty signal
7.8.6 Technical data Table 223: CCRBRF (50BF) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Operate phase current (5-200)% of lBase 1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
Reset ratio, phase current > 95% —
Operate residual current (2-200)% of lBase 1.0% of In at I In 1.0% of I at I > In
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
461 Technical reference manual
Function Range or value Accuracy Reset ratio, residual current
> 95% —
Phase current pickup for blocking of contact function
(5-200)% of lBase 1.0% of In at I In 1.0% of I at I > In
Reset ratio > 95% —
Timers (0.000-60.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
Operate time for current detection
10 ms typically —
Reset time for current detection
15 ms maximum —
7.9 Stub protection STBPTOC (50STB)
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Stub protection STBPTOC
3I>STUB
SYMBOL-T V1 EN
50STB
7.9.1 Introduction When a power line is taken out of service for maintenance and the line disconnector is opened in multi-breaker arrangements the voltage transformers will mostly be outside on the disconnected part. The primary line distance protection will thus not be able to operate and must be blocked.
The stub protection STBPTOC (50STB) covers the zone between the current transformers and the open disconnector. The three-phase instantaneous overcurrent function is released from a normally open, 89b auxiliary contact on the line disconnector.
7.9.2 Principle of operation The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of each phase current the RMS value of each phase current is derived. These phase current values are fed to a comparator in the stub protection function STBPTOC (50STB). In a comparator the RMS values are compared to the set operating current value of the function IPickup.
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
462 Technical reference manual
If a phase current is larger than the set operating current the signal from the comparator for this phase is activated. This signal will, in combination with the release signal from line disconnection (RELEASE input), activate the timer for the TRIP signal. If the fault current remains during the timer delay t, the TRIP output signal is activated. The function can be blocked by activation of the BLOCK input.
BLOCK
TRIP
STUB PROTECTION FUNCTION
PU_A
PU_B
PU_C
OR
AND
ENABLE
en05000731_ansi.vsd ANSI05000731 V1 EN
Figure 232: Simplified logic diagram for Stub protection (50STB)
7.9.3 Function block
ANSI05000678-2-en.vsd
STBPTOC (50STB) I3P* BLOCK BLKTR ENABLE
TRIP PICKUP
ANSI05000678 V2 EN
Figure 233: STBPTOC (50STB) function block
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
463 Technical reference manual
7.9.4 Input and output signals Table 224: STBPTOC (50STB) Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Three phase currents
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip
ENABLE BOOLEAN 0 Enable stub protection usually with open disconnect switch (89b)
Table 225: STBPTOC (50STB) Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
PICKUP BOOLEAN Pickup
7.9.5 Setting parameters Table 226: STBPTOC (50STB) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
IBase 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Base current
EnableMode Release Continuous
— — Release Enable stub protection usually with open disconnect switch (89b)
IPickup 1 — 2500 %IB 1 200 Pickup current level in % of IBase
Table 227: STBPTOC (50STB) Group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description t 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
464 Technical reference manual
7.9.6 Technical data Table 228: STBPTOC (50STB) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Operating current (1-2500)% of IBase 1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
Reset ratio > 95% —
Definite time (0.000-60.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
Operate time, pickup function
20 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset —
Reset time, pickupfunction
25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset —
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset —
Impulse margin time 15 ms typically —
7.10 Pole discrepancy protection CCRPLD (52PD)
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Pole discrepancy protection CCRPLD
PD
SYMBOL-S V1 EN
52PD
7.10.1 Introduction An open phase can cause negative and zero sequence currents which cause thermal stress on rotating machines and can cause unwanted operation of zero sequence or negative sequence current functions.
Normally the own breaker is tripped to correct such a situation. If the situation warrants the surrounding breakers should be tripped to clear the unsymmetrical load situation.
The Polediscrepancy protection function CCRPLD (52PD) operates based on information from auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker for the three phases with additional criteria from unsymmetrical phase currents when required.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
465 Technical reference manual
7.10.2 Principle of operation The detection of pole discrepancy can be made in two different ways. If the contact based function is used an external logic can be made by connecting the auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker so that a pole discrepancy is indicated, see figure 234.
ANSI_en05000287.vsd
poleDiscrepancy Signal from C.B.
+
C.B.
52b
52b
52b
52a
52a
52a
ANSI05000287 V1 EN
Figure 234: Pole discrepancy external detection logic
This binary signal is connected to a binary input of the IED. The appearance of this signal will start a timer that will give a trip signal after the set time delay.
There is also a possibility to connect all phase selective auxiliary contacts (phase contact open and phase contact closed) to binary inputs of the IED, see figure 235.
poleTwoOpened from C.B.
+
C.B.
poleOneOpened from C.B.
poleThreeClosed from C.B.
poleTwoClosed from C.B.
poleOneClosed from C.B.
poleThreeOpened from C.B.
en05000288_ansi.vsd
52b
52b
52b
52a
52a
52a
ANSI05000288 V1 EN
Figure 235: Pole discrepancy signals for internal logic
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
466 Technical reference manual
In this case the logic is realized within the function. If the inputs are indicating pole discrepancy the trip timer is started. This timer will give a trip signal after the set delay.
Pole discrepancy can also be detected by means of phase selective current measurement. The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of each phase current the RMS value of each phase current is derived. The smallest and the largest phase current are derived. If the smallest phase current is lower than the setting CurrUnsymPU times the largest phase current the settable trip timer (tTrip) is started. The tTrip timer gives a trip signal after the set delay. The TRIP signal is a pulse 150 ms long. The current based pole discrepancy function can be set to be active either continuously or only directly in connection to breaker open or close command.
The function also has a binary input that can be configured from the autoreclosing function, so that the pole discrepancy function can be blocked during sequences with a single pole open if single pole autoreclosing is used.
en 05000747_ansi.vsd
OR
BLOCK
BLKDBYAR
52b_A 52a_A 52b_B 52a_B 52b_C 52a_C
Pole Disc repancy
detection
PolPosAuxCont
AND
PD signal from CB ANDEXTPDIND
Unsymmetry current detection
OR
CLOSECMD
OPENCMD
t+ 200 ms
AND
OR AND TRIP0 — t
0
150 ms
ANSI05000747 V1 EN
Figure 236: Simplified block diagram of pole discrepancy function CCRPLD (52PD) — contact and current based
CCRPLD (52PD) is disabled if:
The IED is in TEST mode and CCRPLD (52PD) has been blocked from the local HMI
The input signal BLOCK is high The input signal BLKDBYAR is high
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
467 Technical reference manual
The BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the pole discrepancy protection. It can be connected to a binary input in the IED in order to receive a block command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal functions in the IED itself in order to receive a block command from internal functions. Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and internal function outputs.
The BLKDBYAR signal blocks the pole discrepancy operation when a single phase autoreclosing cycle is in progress. It can be connected to the output signal 1PT1 on SMBRREC (79) function block. If the autoreclosing function is an external device, then BLKDBYAR has to be connected to a binary input in the IED and this binary input is connected to a signalization 1phase autoreclosing in progress from the external autoreclosing device.
If the pole discrepancy protection is enabled, then two different criteria can generate a trip signal TRIP:
Pole discrepancy signaling from the circuit breaker. Unsymmetrical current detection.
7.10.2.1 Pole discrepancy signaling from circuit breaker
If one or two poles of the circuit breaker have failed to open or to close the pole discrepancy status, then the function input EXTPDIND is activated from the pole discrepancy signal derived from the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts (one NO contact for each phase connected in parallel, and in series with one NC contact for each phase connected in parallel) and, after a settable time interval tTrip (0-60 s), a 150 ms trip pulse command TRIP is generated by the Polediscrepancy function (52PD).
7.10.2.2 Unsymmetrical current detection
Unsymmetrical current indicated if:
any phase current is lower than CurrUnsymPU of the highest current in the three phases.
the highest phase current is greater than CurrRelPU of IBase.
If these conditions are true, an unsymmetrical condition is detected and the internal signal INPS is turned high. This detection is enabled to generate a trip after a set time delay tTrip if the detection occurs in the next 200 ms after the circuit breaker has received a command to open trip or close and if the unbalance persists. The 200 ms limitation is for avoiding unwanted operation during unsymmetrical load conditions.
The pole discrepancy protection is informed that a trip or close command has been given to the circuit breaker through the inputs CLOSECMD (for closing command
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
468 Technical reference manual
information) and OPENCMD (for opening command information). These inputs can be connected to terminal binary inputs if the information are generated from the field (that is from auxiliary contacts of the close and open push buttons) or may be software connected to the outputs of other integrated functions (that is close command from a control function or a general trip from integrated protections).
7.10.3 Function block
ANSI06000275-2-en.vsd
CCRPLD (52PD) I3P* BLOCK BLKDBYAR CLOSECMD OPENCMD EXTPDIND 52B_A 52A_A 52B_B 52A_B 52B_C 52A_C
TRIP PICKUP
ANSI06000275 V2 EN
Figure 237: CCRPLD (52PD) function block
7.10.4 Input and output signals Table 229: CCRPLD (52PD) Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Three phase currents
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKDBYAR BOOLEAN 0 Block of function at CB single phase auto re-closing cycle
CLOSECMD BOOLEAN 0 Close command to CB
OPENCMD BOOLEAN 0 Open command to CB
EXTPDIND BOOLEAN 0 Pole discrepancy signal from CB logic
52b_A BOOLEAN 1 Phase A Pole opened indication from CB
52a_A BOOLEAN 0 Phase A Pole closed indication from CB
52b_B BOOLEAN 1 Phase B Pole opened indication from CB
52a_B BOOLEAN 0 Phase B Pole closed indication from CB
52b_C BOOLEAN 1 Phase C Pole opened indication from CB
52a_C BOOLEAN 0 Phase C Pole closed indication from CB
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
469 Technical reference manual
Table 230: CCRPLD (52PD) Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal to CB
PICKUP BOOLEAN Trip condition TRUE, waiting for time delay
7.10.5 Setting parameters Table 231: CCRPLD (52PD) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
IBase 1 — 99999 — 1 3000 Base current
tTrip 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.300 Time delay between trip condition and trip signal
ContactSel Disabled PD signal from CB Pole pos aux cont.
— — Disabled Contact function selection
CurrentSel Disabled CB oper monitor Continuous monitor
— — Disabled Current function selection
CurrUnsymPU 0 — 100 % 1 80 Unsym magn of lowest phase current compared to the highest.
CurrRelPU 0 — 100 %IB 1 10 Current magnitude for release of the function in % of IBase
7.10.6 Technical data Table 232: CCRPLD (52PD) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Operate current (0100)% of IBase 1.0% of In
Time delay (0.000-60.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
7.11 Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP (37)
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP P <
SYMBOL-LL V1 EN
37
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
470 Technical reference manual
7.11.1 Introduction The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available as a torque on a rotating shaft to electric energy.
Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that it does not cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous generator becomes a synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the rest of the power system. This operating state, where individual synchronous machines operate as motors, implies no risk for the machine itself. If the generator under consideration is very large and if it consumes lots of electric power, it may be desirable to disconnect it to ease the task for the rest of the power system.
Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous state. The task of the reverse power protection is to protect the turbine and not to protect the generator itself.
Figure 238 illustrates the low forward power and reverse power protection with underpower and overpower functions respectively. The underpower IED gives a higher margin and should provide better dependability. On the other hand, the risk for unwanted operation immediately after synchronization may be higher. One should set the underpower IED to trip if the active power from the generator is less than about 2%. One should set the overpower IED to trip if the power flow from the network to the generator is higher than 1% depending on the type of turbine.
When IED with a metering class input CTs is used pickup can be set to more sensitive value (e.g.0,5% or even to 0,2%).
Underpower IED Overpower IED
Q Q
P P
Operating point without turbine torque
Margin Margin
Operate Line
Operate Line
Operating point without turbine torque
IEC06000315-2-en.vsd IEC06000315 V2 EN
Figure 238: Protection with underpower IED and overpower IED
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
471 Technical reference manual
7.11.2 Principle of operation A simplified scheme showing the principle of the power protection function is shown in figure 239. The function has two stages with individual settings.
Chosen current phasors
Chosen voltage phasors
Complex power
calculation
P
Derivation of S( composant) in Char angle
S( angle) S( angle) < Power1
t TRIP 1
PICKUP1 Q
P = POWRE
Q = POWIM
S( angle) < Power2
TRIP2
PICKUP2
0
t 0
ANSI06000438-2-en.vsd ANSI06000438 V2 EN
Figure 239: Simplified logic diagram of the power protection function
The function will use voltage and current phasors calculated in the pre-processing blocks. The apparent complex power is calculated according to chosen formula as shown in table 233.
Table 233: Complex power calculation
Set value: Mode Formula used for complex power calculation A, B, C * * *
A A B B C CS V I V I V I= + +
EQUATION2055-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 97)
Arone * * AB A BC CS V I V I= —
EQUATION2056-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 98)
PosSeq *3 PosSeq PosSeqS V I=
EQUATION2057-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 99)
AB * *( )AB A BS V I I= —
EQUATION2058-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 100)
Table continues on next page
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
472 Technical reference manual
Set value: Mode Formula used for complex power calculation BC * *( )BC B CS V I I= —
EQUATION2059-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 101)
CA * *( )CA C AS V I I= —
EQUATION2060-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 102)
A *3 A AS V I=
EQUATION2061-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 103)
B *3 B BS V I=
EQUATION2062-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 104)
C *3 C CS V I=
EQUATION2063-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 105)
The active and reactive power is available from the function and can be used for monitoring and fault recording.
The component of the complex power S = P + jQ in the direction Angle1(2) is calculated. If this angle is 0 the active power component P is calculated. If this angle is 90 the reactive power component Q is calculated.
The calculated power component is compared to the power pick up setting Power1(2). For directional underpower protection, a pickup signal PICKUP1(2) is activated if the calculated power component is smaller than the pick up value. For directional overpower protection, a pickup signal PICKUP1(2) is activated if the calculated power component is larger than the pick up value. After a set time delay TripDelay1(2) a trip TRIP1(2) signal is activated if the pickup signal is still active. At activation of any of the two stages a common signal PICKUP will be activated. At trip from any of the two stages also a common signal TRIP will be activated.
To avoid instability there is a settable hysteresis in the power function. The absolute hysteresis of the stage1(2) is Hysteresis1(2) = abs (Power1(2) + drop-power1(2)). For generator low forward power protection the power setting is very low, normally down to 0.02 p.u. of rated generator power. The hysteresis should therefore be set to a smaller value. The drop-power value of stage1 can be calculated with the Power1(2), Hysteresis1(2): drop-power1(2) = Power1(2) + Hysteresis1(2)
For small power1 values the hysteresis1 may not be too big, because the drop- power1(2) would be too small. In such cases, the hysteresis1 greater than (0.5 Power1(2)) is corrected to the minimal value.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
473 Technical reference manual
If the measured power drops under the drop-power1(2) value, the function will reset after a set time DropDelay1(2). The reset means that the pickup signal will drop out and that the timer of the stage will reset.
7.11.2.1 Low pass filtering
In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possible to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for S (P, Q). This will make slower measurement response to the step changes in the measured quantity. Filtering is performed in accordance with the following recursive formula:
S TD S TD S Old Calculated
= + ( ) 1
EQUATION1959-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 106)
Where
S is a new measured value to be used for the protection function
Sold is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle
SCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle
TD is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties
Default value for parameter TD is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is immediately given out without any filtering (that is without any additional delay). When TD is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. A typical value for TD=0.92 in case of slow operating functions.
7.11.2.2 Calibration of analog inputs
Measured currents and voltages used in the Power function can be calibrated to get class 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see example in figure 240.
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
474 Technical reference manual
100305
IMagComp5
IMagComp30
IMagComp100
-10
+10
Magnitude compensation% of In
Measured current
% of In
0-5%: Constant 5-30-100%: Linear >100%: Constant
100305
IAngComp5 IAngComp30
IAngComp100
-10
+10
Angle compensation
Degrees
Measured current
% of In
ANSI05000652_3_en.vsd ANSI05000652 V3 EN
Figure 240: Calibration curves
The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and the amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.
Analog outputs (Monitored data) from the function can be used for service values or in the disturbance report. The active power is provided as MW value: P, or in percent of base power: PPERCENT. The reactive power is provided as Mvar value: Q, or in percent of base power: QPERCENT.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
475 Technical reference manual
7.11.3 Function block
ANSI07000027-2-en.vsd
GUPPDUP (37) I3P* V3P* BLOCK BLOCK1 BLOCK2
TRIP TRIP1 TRIP2
PICKUP PICKUP1 PICKUP2
P PPERCENT
Q QPERCENT
ANSI07000027 V2 EN
Figure 241: GUPPDUP (37) function block
7.11.4 Input and output signals Table 234: GUPPDUP (37) Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Current group connection
V3P GROUP SIGNAL
— Voltage group connection
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLOCK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of stage 1
BLOCK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of stage 2
Table 235: GUPPDUP (37) Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
TRIP1 BOOLEAN Trip of stage 1
TRIP2 BOOLEAN Trip of stage 2
PICKUP BOOLEAN Common pickup
PICKUP1 BOOLEAN Pickup of stage 1
PICKUP2 BOOLEAN Pickup of stage 2
P REAL Active Power in MW
PPERCENT REAL Active power in % of SBASE
Q REAL Reactive power in Mvar
QPERCENT REAL Reactive power in % of SBASE
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
476 Technical reference manual
7.11.5 Setting parameters Table 236: GUPPDUP (37) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Operation Disable / Enable
OpMode1 Disabled UnderPower
— — UnderPower Operation mode 1
Power1 0.0 — 500.0 %SB 0.1 1.0 Power setting for stage 1 in % of Sbase
Angle1 -180.0 — 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Angle for stage 1
TripDelay1 0.010 — 6000.000 s 0.001 1.000 Trip delay for stage 1
DropDelay1 0.010 — 6000.000 s 0.001 0.060 Drop delay for stage 1
OpMode2 Disabled UnderPower
— — UnderPower Operation mode 2
Power2 0.0 — 500.0 %SB 0.1 1.0 Power setting for stage 2 in % of Sbase
Angle2 -180.0 — 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Angle for stage 2
TripDelay2 0.010 — 6000.000 s 0.001 1.000 Trip delay for stage 2
DropDelay2 0.010 — 6000.000 s 0.001 0.060 Drop delay for stage 2
Table 237: GUPPDUP (37) Group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description TD 0.000 — 0.999 — 0.001 0.000 Low pass filter coefficient for power
measurement, P and Q
Hysteresis1 0.2 — 5.0 pu 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis of stage 1 in % Sbase
Hysteresis2 0.2 — 5.0 pu 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis of stage 2 in % Sbase
IMagComp5 -10.000 — 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 5% of In
IMagComp30 -10.000 — 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 30% of In
IMagComp100 -10.000 — 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 100% of In
VMagComp5 -10.000 — 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Magnitude factor to calibrate voltage at 5% of Vn
VMagComp30 -10.000 — 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Magnitude factor to calibrate voltage at 30% of Vn
VMagComp100 -10.000 — 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Magnitude factor to calibrate voltage at 100% of Vn
IAngComp5 -10.000 — 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 5% of In
IAngComp30 -10.000 — 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 30% of In
IAngComp100 -10.000 — 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 100% of In
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
477 Technical reference manual
Table 238: GUPPDUP (37) Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description IBase 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Base setting for current level
VBase 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Base setting for voltage level
Mode A, B, C Arone Pos Seq AB BC CA A B C
— — Pos Seq Selection of measured current and voltage
7.11.6 Technical data Table 239: GUPPDUP (37) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Power level (0.0500.0)% of SBase
At low setting: (0.5-2.0)% of SBase (2.0-10)% of SBase
1.0% of Sr at S < Sr 1.0% of S at S > Sr < 50% of set value < 20% of set value
Characteristic angle (-180.0180.0) degrees 2 degrees
Timers (0.00-6000.00) s 0.5% 10 ms
7.12 Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP (32)
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP P >
DOCUMENT172362-IMG158942 V1 EN
32
7.12.1 Introduction The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available as a torque on a rotating shaft to electric energy.
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
478 Technical reference manual
Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that it does not cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous generator becomes a synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the rest of the power system. This operating state, where individual synchronous machines operate as motors, implies no risk for the machine itself. If the generator under consideration is very large and if it consumes lots of electric power, it may be desirable to disconnect it to ease the task for the rest of the power system.
Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous state. The task of the reverse power protection is to protect the turbine and not to protect the generator itself.
Figure 242 illustrates the low forward power and reverse power protection with underpower and overpower functions respectively. The underpower IED gives a higher margin and should provide better dependability. On the other hand, the risk for unwanted operation immediately after synchronization may be higher. One should set the underpower IED to trip if the active power from the generator is less than about 2%. One should set the overpower IED to trip if the power flow from the network to the generator is higher than 1%.
When IED with a metering class input CTs is used pickup can be set to more sensitive value (e.g.0,5% or even to 0,2%).
Underpower IED Overpower IED
Q Q
P P
Operating point without turbine torque
Margin Margin
Operate Line
Operate Line
Operating point without turbine torque
IEC06000315-2-en.vsd IEC06000315 V2 EN
Figure 242: Reverse power protection with underpower IED and overpower IED
7.12.2 Principle of operation A simplified scheme showing the principle of the power protection function is shown in figure 243. The function has two stages with individual settings.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
479 Technical reference manual
ANSI06000567-2-en.vsd
Chosen current phasors
Chosen voltage phasors
Complex power
calculation
P
Derivation of S(composant) in Char angle
S(angle) S(angle) > Power1
t TRIP1
PICKUP1 Q
P = POWRE
Q = POWIM
S(angle) > Power2
t TRIP2
PICKUP2
ANSI06000567 V2 EN
Figure 243: Simplified logic diagram of the power protection function
The function will use voltage and current phasors calculated in the pre-processing blocks. The apparent complex power is calculated according to chosen formula as shown in table 240.
Table 240: Complex power calculation
Set value: Mode Formula used for complex power calculation A,B,C * * *
A B CA B CS V I V I V I= + + EQUATION2038 V1 EN (Equation 107)
Arone * * A CAB BCS V I V I= —
EQUATION2039 V1 EN (Equation 108)
PosSeq * PosSeqPosSeqS 3 V I=
EQUATION2040 V1 EN (Equation 109)
A,B * A BAB
* S V (I I )= —
EQUATION2041 V1 EN (Equation 110)
B,C * B CBC
* S V (I I )= —
EQUATION2042 V1 EN (Equation 111)
Table continues on next page
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
480 Technical reference manual
Set value: Mode Formula used for complex power calculation C,A *
C ACA *
S V (I I )= — EQUATION2043 V1 EN (Equation 112)
A * AAS 3 V I=
EQUATION2044 V1 EN (Equation 113)
B * BBS 3 V I=
EQUATION2045 V1 EN (Equation 114)
C * CCS 3 V I=
EQUATION2046 V1 EN (Equation 115)
The active and reactive power is available from the function and can be used for monitoring and fault recording.
The component of the complex power S = P + jQ in the direction Angle1(2) is calculated. If this angle is 0 the active power component P is calculated. If this angle is 90 the reactive power component Q is calculated.
The calculated power component is compared to the power pick up setting Power1(2). A pickup signal PICKUP1(2) is activated if the calculated power component is larger than the pick up value. After a set time delay TripDelay1(2) a trip TRIP1(2) signal is activated if the pickup signal is still active. At activation of any of the two stages a common signal PICKUP will be activated. At trip from any of the two stages also a common signal TRIP will be activated.
To avoid instability there is a settable hysteresis in the power function. The absolute hysteresis of the stage1(2) is Hysteresis1(2) = abs (Power1(2) drop-power1(2)). For generator reverse power protection the power setting is very low, normally down to 0.02 p.u. of rated generator power. The hysteresis should therefore be set to a smaller value. The drop-power value of stage1 can be calculated with the Power1(2), Hysteresis1(2): drop-power1(2) = Power1(2) Hysteresis1(2)
For small power1 values the hysteresis1 may not be too big, because the drop- power1(2) would be too small. In such cases, the hysteresis1 greater than (0.5 Power1(2)) is corrected to the minimal value.
If the measured power drops under the drop-power1(2) value the function will reset after a set time DropDelay1(2). The reset means that the pickup signal will drop out ant that the timer of the stage will reset.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
481 Technical reference manual
7.12.2.1 Low pass filtering
In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possible to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for S (P, Q). This will make slower measurement response to the step changes in the measured quantity. Filtering is performed in accordance with the following recursive formula:
( )Old CalculatedS k S 1 k S= + —
EQUATION1959 V1 EN (Equation 116)
Where
S is a new measured value to be used for the protection function
Sold is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle
SCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle
k is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties
Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is immediately given out without any filtering (that is, without any additional delay). When k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. A typical value for k = 0.92 in case of slow operating functions.
7.12.2.2 Calibration of analog inputs
Measured currents and voltages used in the Power function can be calibrated to get class 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see example in figure 244.
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
482 Technical reference manual
100305
IMagComp5
IMagComp30
IMagComp100
-10
+10
Magnitude compensation% of In
Measured current
% of In
0-5%: Constant 5-30-100%: Linear >100%: Constant
100305
IAngComp5 IAngComp30
IAngComp100
-10
+10
Angle compensation
Degrees
Measured current
% of In
ANSI05000652_3_en.vsd ANSI05000652 V3 EN
Figure 244: Calibration curves
The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and the amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.
Analog outputs from the function can be used for service values or in the disturbance report. The active power is provided as MW value: P, or in percent of base power: PPERCENT. The reactive power is provided as Mvar value: Q, or in percent of base power: QPERCENT.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
483 Technical reference manual
7.12.3 Function block
ANSI07000028-2-en.vsd
GOPPDOP (32) I3P* V3P* BLOCK BLOCK1 BLOCK2
TRIP TRIP1 TRIP2
PICKUP PICKUP1 PICKUP2
P PPERCENT
Q QPERCENT
ANSI07000028 V2 EN
Figure 245: GOPPDOP (32) function block
7.12.4 Input and output signals Table 241: GOPPDOP (32) Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Current group connection
V3P GROUP SIGNAL
— Voltage group connection
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLOCK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of stage 1
BLOCK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of stage 2
Table 242: GOPPDOP (32) Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
TRIP1 BOOLEAN Trip of stage 1
TRIP2 BOOLEAN Trip of stage 2
PICKUP BOOLEAN Common pickup
PICKUP1 BOOLEAN Pickup of stage 1
PICKUP2 BOOLEAN Pickup of stage 2
P REAL Active Power in MW
PPERCENT REAL Active power in % of SBASE
Q REAL Reactive power in Mvar
QPERCENT REAL Reactive power in % of SBASE
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
484 Technical reference manual
7.12.5 Setting parameters Table 243: GOPPDOP (32) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Operation Disable / Enable
OpMode1 Disabled OverPower
— — OverPower Operation mode 1
Power1 0.0 — 500.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 Power setting for stage 1 in % of Sbase
Angle1 -180.0 — 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Angle for stage 1
TripDelay1 0.010 — 6000.000 s 0.001 1.000 Trip delay for stage 1
DropDelay1 0.010 — 6000.000 s 0.001 0.060 Drop delay for stage 1
OpMode2 Disabled OverPower
— — OverPower Operation mode 2
Power2 0.0 — 500.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 Power setting for stage 2 in % of Sbase
Angle2 -180.0 — 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Angle for stage 2
TripDelay2 0.010 — 6000.000 s 0.001 1.000 Trip delay for stage 2
DropDelay2 0.010 — 6000.000 s 0.001 0.060 Drop delay for stage 2
Table 244: GOPPDOP (32) Group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description k 0.000 — 0.999 — 0.001 0.000 Low pass filter coefficient for power
measurement, P and Q
Hysteresis1 0.2 — 5.0 pu 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis of stage 1 in % of Sbase
Hysteresis2 0.2 — 5.0 pu 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis of stage 2 in % of Sbase
IMagComp5 -10.000 — 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 5% of In
IMagComp30 -10.000 — 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 30% of In
IMagComp100 -10.000 — 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 100% of In
VMagComp5 -10.000 — 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Magnitude factor to calibrate voltage at 5% of Vn
VMagComp30 -10.000 — 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Magnitude factor to calibrate voltage at 30% of Vn
VMagComp100 -10.000 — 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Magnitude factor to calibrate voltage at 100% of Vn
IAngComp5 -10.000 — 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 5% of In
IAngComp30 -10.000 — 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 30% of In
IAngComp100 -10.000 — 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 100% of In
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
485 Technical reference manual
Table 245: GOPPDOP (32) Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description IBase 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Base setting for current level
VBase 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Base setting for voltage level
Mode A, B, C Arone Pos Seq AB BC CA A B C
— — Pos Seq Selection of measured current and voltage
7.12.6 Technical data Table 246: GOPPDOP (32) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Power level (0.0500.0)% of Sbase
At low setting: (0.5-2.0)% of Sbase (2.0-10)% of Sbase
1.0% of Sr at S < Sr 1.0% of S at S > Sr < 50% of set value < 20% of set value
Characteristic angle (-180.0180.0) degrees 2 degrees
Timers (0.00-6000.00) s 0.5% 10 ms
7.13 Broken conductor check BRCPTOC (46)
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Broken conductor check BRCPTOC — 46
7.13.1 Introduction Conventional protection functions can not detect the broken conductor condition. Broken conductor check (BRCPTOC, 46) function, consisting of continuous current unsymmetrical check on the line where the IED is connected will give alarm or trip at detecting broken conductors.
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
486 Technical reference manual
7.13.2 Principle of operation Broken conductor check (BRCPTOC, 46) detects a broken conductor condition by detecting the asymmetry between currents in the three phases. The current-measuring elements continuously measure the three-phase currents.
The current asymmetry signal output PICKUP is set on if:
The difference in currents between the phase with the lowest current and the phase with the highest current is greater than set percentage Pickup_ub of the highest phase current
The lowest phase current is below 50% of the minimum setting value Pickup_PH
The third condition is included to avoid problems in systems involving parallel lines. If a conductor breaks in one phase on one line, the parallel line will experience an increase in current in the same phase. This might result in the first two conditions being satisfied. If the unsymmetrical detection lasts for a period longer than the set time tOper the TRIP output is activated.
The simplified logic diagram of the broken conductor check function is shown in figure 246
BRCPTOC (46) is disabled (blocked) if:
The IED is in TEST status and the function has been blocked from the local HMI test menu (BlockBRC=Yes).
The input signal BLOCK is high.
The BLOCK input can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to receive a block command from external devices, or can be software connected to other internal functions of the IED itself to receive a block command from internal functions.
The output trip signal TRIP is a three-phase trip. It can be used to command a trip to the circuit breaker or for alarm purpose only.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
487 Technical reference manual
BRC—BLOCK BRC—TRIP
Function Enable
TEST-ACTIVE AND
TEST
BlockBRC = Yes
PU_ub
Unsymmetrical Current Detection
AND
OR
BRC—START
en07000123.vsd
IA<50%Pickup_PN
0-t 0
IB<50%Pickup_PN
IC<50%Pickup_PN
OR
IEC07000123 V1 EN
Figure 246: Simplified logic diagram for Broken conductor check BRCPTOC (46)
7.13.3 Function block
ANSI07000034-2-en.vsd
BRCPTOC (46) I3P* BLOCK BLKTR
TRIP PICKUP
ANSI07000034 V2 EN
Figure 247: BRCPTOC (46) function block
7.13.4 Input and output signals Table 247: BRCPTOC (46) Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Group signal for current input
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the operate output
Section 7 1MRK505222-UUS C Current protection
488 Technical reference manual
Table 248: BRCPTOC (46) Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Operate signal of the protection logic
PICKUP BOOLEAN Pickup signal of the protection logic
7.13.5 Setting parameters Table 249: BRCPTOC (46) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Operation Disable / Enable
IBase 0 — 99999 A 1 3000 IBase
Pickup_ub 50 — 90 %IM 1 50 Unbalance current operation value in percent of max current
Pickup_PH 5 — 100 %IB 1 20 Minimum phase current for operation of pickup_ub> in % of Ibase
tOper 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Operate time delay
Table 250: BRCPTOC (46) Group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description tReset 0.010 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay in reset
7.13.6 Technical data Table 251: BRCPTOC (46) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Minimum phase current for operation (5100)% of IBase 0.1% of In
Unbalance current operation (0100)% of maximum current 0.1% of In
Timer (0.00-6000.00) s 0.5% 10 ms
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 7 Current protection
489 Technical reference manual
Section 8 Voltage protection
About this chapter This chapter describes voltage related protection functions. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are included for each function.
8.1 Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV (27)
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV
3U<
SYMBOL-R-2U-GREATER-THAN V2 EN
27
8.1.1 Introduction Undervoltages can occur in the power system during faults or abnormal conditions. Two step undervoltage protection (UV2PTUV, 27) function can be used to open circuit breakers to prepare for system restoration at power outages or as long-time delayed back- up to primary protection.
UV2PTUV (27) has two voltage steps, each with inverse or definite time delay.
8.1.2 Principle of operation Two-step undervoltage protection (UV2PTUV ,27) is used to detect low power system voltage. UV2PTUV (27) has two voltage measuring steps with separate time delays. If one, two or three phase voltages decrease below the set value, a corresponding PICKUP signal is generated. UV2PTUV (27) can be set to PICKUP/TRIP based on 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 of the measured voltages, being below the set point. If the voltage remains below the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted trip due to disconnection of the related high voltage equipment, a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available, that is, if the voltage is lower than the set blocking level the
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 8 Voltage protection
491 Technical reference manual
function is blocked and no PICKUP or TRIP signal is generated.The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for each step and can be either definite time delay or inverse time delay.
UV2PTUV (27) can be set to measure phase-to-ground fundamental value, phase-to- phase fundamental value, phase-to-ground true RMS value or phase-to-phase true RMS value. The choice of the measuring is done by the parameter ConnType. The voltage related settings are made in percent of base voltage which is set in kV phase-to- phase voltage. This means operation for phase-to-ground voltage under:
(%) ( ) 3
Vpickup VBase kV<
EQUATION1606 V1 EN (Equation 117)
and operation for phase-to-phase voltage under:
Vpickup (%) VBase(kV)< EQUATION1991-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 118)
When phase-to-ground voltage measurement is selected the function automatically introduces division of the base value by the square root of three.
8.1.2.1 Measurement principle
Depending on the set ConnType value, UV2PTUV (27) measures phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase voltages and compare against set values, Pickup1 and Pickup2. The parameters OpMode1 and OpMode2 influence the requirements to activate the PICKUP outputs. Either 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3, or 3 out of 3 measured voltages have to be lower than the corresponding set point to issue the corresponding PICKUP signal.
To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal, a hysteresis has been included.
8.1.2.2 Time delay
The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time undervoltage (TUV). For the inverse time delay three different modes are available:
inverse curve A inverse curve B customer programmable inverse curve
Section 8 1MRK505222-UUS C Voltage protection
492 Technical reference manual
The type A curve is described as:
TD t
Vpickup V
Vpickup
= < —
< ANSIEQUATION1431 V1 EN (Equation 119)
where:
Vpickup <
Set value for step 1 and step 2
V Measured voltage
The type B curve is described as:
2.0
480 0.055
Vpickup < -V 32 0.5
Vpickup
TD t
= +
— <
EQUATION1608 V1 EN (Equation 120)
The customer programmable curve can be created as:
P
TD A t D
Vpickup V B C
Vpickup
= +
< — —
EQUATION1609 V1 EN (Equation 121)
When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity. There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval Vpickup< down to Vpickup< (1.0 CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: Vpickup< (1.0 CrvSatn/ 100). If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:
0 100
CrvSatnB C — >
EQUATION1435 V1 EN (Equation 122)
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 8 Voltage protection
493 Technical reference manual
The lowest voltage is always used for the inverse time delay integration. The details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in section 22.3 «Inverse characteristics».
Figure 248: Voltage used for the inverse time characteristic integration
Voltage
IDMT Voltage
Time
VL1 VL2 VL3
ANSI12000186-1-en.vsd
Trip signal issuing requires that the undervoltage condition continues for at least the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time mode (DT) and by some special voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time mode (TUV). If the pickup condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2pickup for the inverse time) the corresponding pickup output is reset. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the pickup condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area. Note that for the undervoltage function the TUV reset time is constant and does not depend on the voltage fluctuations during the drop-off period. However, there are three ways to reset the timer, either the timer is reset instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during the reset time, or the timer value is linearly decreased during the reset time. See figure 249 and figure 250.
Section 8 1MRK505222-UUS C Voltage protection
494 Technical reference manual
Voltage
Time
HystAbs1 PICKUP
TRIP
PICKUP1
PICKUP
TRIP
t
tIReset1
Time
Time Integrator
t
Frozen Timer
Linearly decreased
Instantaneous
Measured Voltage
tIReset1
ANSI05000010-3-en.vsd
ANSI05000010 V3 EN
Figure 249: Voltage profile not causing a reset of the pickup signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at different reset types
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 8 Voltage protection
495 Technical reference manual
Voltage
Time
HystAbs1 PICKUP
TRIP
PICKUP
PICKUP 1
PICKUP
TRIP
t
tIReset1
Time
Time Integrator
t
Frozen Timer
Linearly decreasedInstantaneous
Measured Voltage
tIReset1
ANSI05000011-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000011 V2 EN
Figure 250: Voltage profile causing a reset of the pickup signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at different reset types
Definite timer delay
Section 8 1MRK505222-UUS C Voltage protection
496 Technical reference manual
When definite time delay is selected the function will operate as shown in figure 251. Detailed information about individual stage reset/operation behavior is shown in figure 252 and figure 253 respectively. Note that by setting tResetn = 0.0s, instantaneous reset of the definite time delayed stage is ensured.
a
a
b Pickup1
V
TRST1
PU_ST1
AND
0
t1
tReset1
0
R
ANSI09000785-3-en.vsd ANSI09000785 V3 EN
Figure 251: Detailed logic diagram for step 1, DT operation
Pickup1
PU_ST1
TRST1
tReset1
t1
ANSI10000039-3-en.vsd ANSI10000039 V3 EN
Figure 252: Example for Definite Time Delay stage1 reset
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 8 Voltage protection
497 Technical reference manual
Pickup1
PU_ST1
TRST1
tReset1
t1
ANSI10000040-3-en.vsd ANSI10000040 V3 EN
Figure 253: Example for Definite Time Delay stage1 operation
8.1.2.3 Blocking
It is possible to block Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV (27) partially or completely, by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:
BLOCK: blocks all outputs
BLKTR1: blocks all trip outputs of step 1
BLK1: blocks all pickup and trip outputs related to step 1
BLKTR2: blocks all trip outputs of step 2
BLK2: blocks all pickup and trip outputs related to step 2
If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlkStVal1, either the trip output of step 1, or both the trip and the PICKUP outputs of step 1, are blocked. The characteristic of the blocking is set by the IntBlkSel1 parameter. This internal blocking can also be set to Disabled resulting in no voltage based blocking. Corresponding settings and functionality are valid also for step 2.
In case of disconnection of the high voltage component the measured voltage will get very low. The event will PICKUP both the under voltage function and the blocking function, as seen in figure 254. The delay of the blocking function must be set less than the time delay of under voltage function.
Section 8 1MRK505222-UUS C Voltage protection
498 Technical reference manual
Time
V
Normal voltage
Pickup1
Pickup2
IntBlkStVal1
IntBlkStVal2
Disconnection
tBlkUV1 < t1,t1Min
tBlkUV2 < t2,t2Min
Block step 1
Block step 2 en05000466_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000466 V1 EN
Figure 254: Blocking function
8.1.2.4 Design
The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-neutral voltages or the three phase-to-phase voltages. Recursive fourier filters or true RMS filters of input voltage signals are used. The voltages are individually compared to the set value, and the lowest voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic integration. A special logic is included to achieve the 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 and 3 out of 3 criteria to fulfill the PICKUP condition. The design of Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV (27) is schematically shown in Figure 255.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 8 Voltage protection
499 Technical reference manual
PICKUP
ST1L1
ST1L2
ST1L3
TR1L1
TR1L2
TR1L3
ST1
TR1
PICKUP
ST2L1
ST2L2
ST2L3
TR2L1
TR2L2
TR2L3
ST2
TR2
TRIP
Comparator VL1 < V1<
Comparator VL2 < V1<
Comparator VL3 < V1<
MinVoltSelector
Comparator VL1 < V2<
Comparator VL2 < V2<
Comparator VL3 < V2<
MinVoltSelector
Pickup
& Trip
Output Logic
Step 1
Pickup
& Trip
Output Logic
Step 2
Phase 3
Phase 2
Phase 1
Phase 3
Phase 2
Phase 1
Time integrator tIReset2
ResetTypeCrv2
Voltage Phase Selector
OpMode2 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3
Time integrator tIReset1
ResetTypeCrv1
Voltage Phase Selector
OpMode1 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3
VL1
VL2
VL3
TRIP
TRIP
OR
OR
OR
OR
OR
OR
PICKUP
IntBlkStVal1
t1 t1Reset
IntBlkStVal2 t2Reset
t2
ANSI05000012-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000012 V2 EN
Figure 255: Schematic design of Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV (27)
Section 8 1MRK505222-UUS C Voltage protection
500 Technical reference manual
8.1.3 Function block
ANSI06000276-2-en.vsd
UV2PTUV (27) V3P* BLOCK BLKTR1 BLK1 BLKTR2 BLK2
TRIP TRST1
TRST1_A TRST1_B TRST1_C
TRST2 TRST2_A TRST2_B TRST2_C
PICKUP PU_ST1
PU_ST1_A PU_ST1_B PU_ST1_C
PU_ST2 PU_ST2_A PU_ST2_B PU_ST2_C
ANSI06000276 V2 EN
Figure 256: UV2PTUV (27) function block
8.1.4 Input and output signals Table 252: UV2PTUV (27) Input signals
Name Type Default Description V3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Three phase voltages
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip signal, step 1
BLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1
BLKTR2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip signal, step 2
BLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2
Table 253: UV2PTUV (27) Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
TRST1 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step1
TRST1_A BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase A
TRST1_B BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase B
TRST1_C BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase C
TRST2 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step2
TRST2_A BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase A
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 8 Voltage protection
501 Technical reference manual
Name Type Description TRST2_B BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase B
TRST2_C BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase C
PICKUP BOOLEAN General pickup signal
PU_ST1 BOOLEAN Common pickup signal from step1
PU_ST1_A BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step1 phase A
PU_ST1_B BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step1 phase B
PU_ST1_C BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step1 phase C
PU_ST2 BOOLEAN Common pickup signal from step2
PU_ST2_A BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step2 phase A
PU_ST2_B BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step2 phase B
PU_ST2_C BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step2 phase C
8.1.5 Setting parameters Table 254: UV2PTUV (27) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
VBase 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Base voltage
OperationStep1 Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Enable execution of step 1
Characterist1 Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Prog. inv. curve
— — Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for step 1
OpMode1 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3
— — 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for op (1 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 1
Pickup1 1 — 100 %VB 1 70 Voltage pickup value (Definite-Time & Inverse- Time curve) in % of VBase, step 1
t1 0.00 — 6000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Definitive time delay of step 1
t1Min 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 1
TD1 0.05 — 1.10 — 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 1
IntBlkSel1 Disabled Block of trip Block all
— — Disabled Internal (low level) blocking mode, step 1
IntBlkStVal1 1 — 100 %VB 1 20 Voltage setting for internal blocking in % of VBase, step 1
Table continues on next page
Section 8 1MRK505222-UUS C Voltage protection
502 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description tBlkUV1 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of internal (low level) blocking for
step 1
HystAbs1 0.0 — 100.0 %VB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis in % of VBase, step 1
OperationStep2 Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Enable execution of step 2
Characterist2 Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Prog. inv. curve
— — Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for step 2
OpMode2 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3
— — 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for op (1 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 2
Pickup2 1 — 100 %VB 1 50 Voltage pickup value (Definite-Time & Inverse- Time curve) in % of VBase, step 2
t2 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Definitive time delay of step 2
t2Min 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 2
TD2 0.05 — 1.10 — 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 2
IntBlkSel2 Disabled Block of trip Block all
— — Disabled Internal (low level) blocking mode, step 2
IntBlkStVal2 1 — 100 %VB 1 20 Voltage setting for internal blocking in % of VBase, step 2
tBlkUV2 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of internal (low level) blocking for step 2
HystAbs2 0.0 — 100.0 %VB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis in % of VBase, step 2
Table 255: UV2PTUV (27) Group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description tReset1 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time
curve step 1
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased
— — Instantaneous Selection of used IDMT reset curve type for step 1
tIReset1 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in Inverse-Time reset (s), step 1
ACrv1 0.005 — 200.000 — 0.001 1.000 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 1
BCrv1 0.50 — 100.00 — 0.01 1.00 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 1
CCrv1 0.0 — 1.0 — 0.1 0.0 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 1
DCrv1 0.000 — 60.000 — 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for step 1
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 8 Voltage protection
503 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description PCrv1 0.000 — 3.000 — 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 1
CrvSat1 0 — 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for prog. under voltage Inverse- Time curve, step 1
tReset2 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 2
ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased
— — Instantaneous Selection of Time Delay reset curve for step 2
tIReset2 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in Inverse-Time reset (s), step 2
ACrv2 0.005 — 200.000 — 0.001 1.000 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 2
BCrv2 0.50 — 100.00 — 0.01 1.00 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 2
CCrv2 0.0 — 1.0 — 0.1 0.0 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 2
DCrv2 0.000 — 60.000 — 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for step 2
PCrv2 0.000 — 3.000 — 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 2
CrvSat2 0 — 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for prog. under voltage Inverse- Time curve, step 2
Table 256: UV2PTUV (27) Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description ConnType PhN DFT
PhPh RMS PhN RMS PhPh DFT
— — PhN DFT Group selector for connection type
8.1.6 Technical data Table 257: UV2PTUV (27) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Operate voltage, low and high step
(1100)% of VBase 0.5% of Vn
Absolute hysteresis (0100)% of VBase 0.5% of Vn
Internal blocking level, step 1 and step 2
(1100)% of VBase 0.5% of Vn
Inverse time characteristics for step 1 and step 2, see table 732
— See table 732
Table continues on next page
Section 8 1MRK505222-UUS C Voltage protection
504 Technical reference manual
Function Range or value Accuracy Definite time delay, step 1 (0.00 — 6000.00) s 0.5% 10 ms
Definite time delays (0.000-60.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
Minimum operate time, inverse characteristics
(0.00060.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
Operate time, pickup function
25 ms typically at 2 x Vset to 0 0 —
Reset time, pickup function
—
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 2 x Vset to 0 —
Impulse margin time 15 ms typically —
8.2 Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV (59)
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV
3U>
SYMBOL-C-2U-SMALLER-THAN V2 EN
59
8.2.1 Introduction Overvoltages may occur in the power system during abnormal conditions such as sudden power loss, tap changer regulating failures, open line ends on long lines etc.
Two step overvoltage protection (OV2PTOV, 59) function can be used to detect open line ends, normally then combined with a directional reactive over-power function to supervise the system voltage. When triggered, the function will cause an alarm, switch in reactors, or switch out capacitor banks.
OV2PTOV (59) has two voltage steps, each of them with inverse or definite time delayed.
OV2PTOV (59) has an extremely high reset ratio to allow settings close to system service voltage.
8.2.2 Principle of operation Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV (59) is used to detect high power system voltage. OV2PTOV (59) has two steps with separate time delays. If one-, two- or three-
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 8 Voltage protection
505 Technical reference manual
phase voltages increase above the set value, a corresponding PICKUP signal is issued. OV2PTOV (59) can be set to PICKUP/TRIP, based on 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 of the measured voltages, being above the set point. If the voltage remains above the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued.
The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for the two steps and can be either, definite time delay or inverse time delay.
The voltage related settings are made in percent of the global set base voltage VBase, which is set in kV, phase-to-phase.
OV2PTOV (59) can be set to measure phase-to-ground fundamental value, phase-to- phase fundamental value, phase-to-ground RMS value or phase-to-phase RMS value. The choice of measuring is done by the parameter ConnType.
The setting of the analog inputs are given as primary phase-to-ground or phase-to- phase voltage. OV2PTOV (59) will operate if the voltage gets higher than the set percentage of the set base voltage VBase. This means operation for phase-to-ground voltage over:
Vpickup VBase kV> (%) ( ) / 3
EQUATION1610 V2 EN (Equation 123)
and operation for phase-to-phase voltage over:
Vpickup (%) VBase(kV)> EQUATION1992 V1 EN (Equation 124)
When phase-to-ground voltage measurement is selected the function automatically introduces division of the base value by the square root of three.
8.2.2.1 Measurement principle
All the three voltages are measured continuously, and compared with the set values, Pickup1 and Pickup2. The parameters OpMode1 and OpMode2 influence the requirements to activate the PICKUP outputs. Either 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 measured voltages have to be higher than the corresponding set point to issue the corresponding PICKUP signal.
To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal, a hysteresis has been included.
Section 8 1MRK505222-UUS C Voltage protection
506 Technical reference manual
8.2.2.2 Time delay
The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time delay (TOV). For the inverse time delay four different modes are available:
inverse curve A inverse curve B inverse curve C customer programmable inverse curve
The type A curve is described as:
t TD
V Vpickup
Vpickup
= >
>
EQUATION1625 V2 EN (Equation 125)
The type B curve is described as:
t TD
V Vpickup
Vpickup
=
>
>
480
32 0 5
0 035
.
.
ANSIEQUATION2287 V2 EN (Equation 126)
The type C curve is described as:
t TD
V Vpickup
Vpickup
=
>
>
+ 480
32 0 5
0 035
.
.
ANSIEQUATION2288 V2 EN (Equation 127)
The customer programmable curve can be created as:
P
TD A t D
V Vpickup B C
Vpickup
= +
— —
EQUATION1616 V1 EN (Equation 128)
When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity. There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore, a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval Vpickup down to Vpickup (1.0 CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: Vpickup (1.0 CrvSatn/100). If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 8 Voltage protection
507 Technical reference manual
0 100
CrvSatnB C — >
EQUATION1435 V1 EN (Equation 129)
The highest phase (or phase-to-phase) voltage is always used for the inverse time delay integration, see figure 257. The details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in section «Inverse characteristics»
ANSI05000016-2-en.vsd
Voltage IDMT Voltage
Time
VA VB VC
ANSI05000016 V2 EN
Figure 257: Voltage used for the inverse time characteristic integration
Trip signal issuing requires that the overvoltage condition continues for at least the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time mode (DT) and by selected voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time mode (TOV). If the PICKUP condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2 for the inverse time) the corresponding PICKUP output is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the PICKUP condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area. The hysteresis value for each step is settable (HystAbs2) to allow an high and accurate reset of the function. It should be noted that for Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV (59) the TOV reset time is constant and does not depend on the voltage fluctuations during the drop-off period. However, there are three
Section 8 1MRK505222-UUS C Voltage protection
508 Technical reference manual
ways to reset the timer, either the timer is reset instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during the reset time, or the timer value is linearly decreased during the reset time..
ANSI05000019-3-en.vsd
Voltage
Time
HystAbs1
PICKUP TRIP
PU_Overvolt1
PICKUP
TRIP
t
tIReset1
Time
Time Integrator
t
Frozen Timer
Linearly decreased
Instantaneous
Measured Voltage
tIReset1
ANSI05000019 V3 EN
Figure 258: Voltage profile not causing a reset of the PICKUP signal for step 1, and inverse time delay
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 8 Voltage protection
509 Technical reference manual
Voltage
Time
HystAbs1 PICKUP TRIPPICKUP
Pickup1
PICKUP
TRIP
t
tIReset1
Time
Time Integrator
t
Frozen Timer
Linearly decreasedInstantaneous
Measured Voltage
tIReset1
ANSI05000020-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000020 V2 EN
Figure 259: Voltage profile causing a reset of the PICKUP signal for step 1, and inverse time delay
Definite time delay
When definite time delay is selected the function will operate as shown in figure 260. Detailed information about individual stage reset/operation behavior is shown in figure 252 and figure 253 receptively. Note that by setting tResetn = 0.0s instantaneous reset of the definite time delayed stage is ensured
Section 8 1MRK505222-UUS C Voltage protection
510 Technical reference manual
a>b
a
bVpickup>
V
t
tReset1
t
t1
AND TRST1
PU_ST1
OFF Delay
ON Delay
ANSI10000100-2-en.vsd ANSI10000100 V2 EN
Figure 260: Detailed logic diagram for step 1, DT operation
Pickup1
PICKUP
TRIP
tReset1
t1
ANSI10000037-2-en.vsd ANSI10000037 V2 EN
Figure 261: Example for Definite Time Delay stage rest
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 8 Voltage protection
511 Technical reference manual
Pickup1
PICKUP
TRIP
tReset1
t1
ANSI10000038-2-en.vsd
ANSI10000038 V2 EN
Figure 262: Example for Definite Time Delay stage operation
8.2.2.3 Blocking
It is possible to block Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV, (59) partially or completely, by binary input signals where:
BLOCK: blocks all outputs
BLKTR1: blocks all trip outputs of step 1
BLK1: blocks all pickup and trip outputs related to step 1
BLKTR2: blocks all trip outputs of step 2
BLK2: blocks all pickup and trip outputs related to step 2
8.2.2.4 Design
The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-ground voltages or the three phase-to-phase voltages. Recursive Fourier filters filter the input voltage signals. The phase voltages are individually compared to the set value, and the highest voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic integration. A special logic is included to achieve the 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 criteria to fulfill the PICKUP condition. The design of Two step overvoltage protection (OV2PTOV, 59) is schematically described in figure 263.
Section 8 1MRK505222-UUS C Voltage protection
512 Technical reference manual
PICKUP
PU_ST1_A
PU_ST1_B
PU_ST1_C
TRST1-A
TRST1_B
TRST1_C
PU_ST1
TRST1
PICKUP
PU_ST2_A
PU_ST2_B
PU_ST2_C
TRST2-A
TRST2-C
PU_ST2
TRST2
TRIP
_ .
Comparator VA >
Pickup 1
Comparator VB >
Comparator VC >
MaxVoltSelect
Comparator VA >
Comparator VB >
Comparator VC >
MaxVoltSelect
Pickup
& Trip
Output Logic
Step1
Pickup
& Trip
Output Logic
Step 2
Phase C
Phase B
Phase A
Phase C
Phase A
Time integrator tIReset2
ResetTypeCrv2
Voltage Phase Selector
OpMode2 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3
Time integrator tIReset1
ResetTypeCrv1
Voltage Phase Selector
OpMode1 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3
VA
VB
VC
TRIP
TRIP
OR
OR
OR
OR
OR
OR
PICKUP
TRST2-B
Pickup 1
Pickup 1
Pickup 2
Pickup 2
Pickup 2
Phase B
Phase C t1 t1Reset
t2 t2Reset
ANSI05000013-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000013 V2 EN
Figure 263: Schematic design of Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV (59)
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 8 Voltage protection
513 Technical reference manual
8.2.3 Function block
ANSI06000277-2-en.vsd
OV2PTOV (59) V3P* BLOCK BLKTR1 BLK1 BLKTR2 BLK2
TRIP TRST1
TRST1_A TRST1_B TRST1_C
TRST2 TRST2_A TRST2_B TRST2_C
PICKUP PU_ST1
PU_ST1_A PU_ST1_B PU_ST1_C
PU_ST2 PU_ST2_A PU_ST2_B PU_ST2_C
ANSI06000277 V2 EN
Figure 264: OV2PTOV (59) function block
8.2.4 Input and output signals Table 258: OV2PTOV (59) Input signals
Name Type Default Description V3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Group signal for three phase voltage input
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip signal, step 1
BLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1
BLKTR2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip signal, step 2
BLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2
Table 259: OV2PTOV (59) Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
TRST1 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step1
TRST1_A BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase A
TRST1_B BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase B
TRST1_C BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase C
TRST2 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step2
TRST2_A BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase A
Table continues on next page
Section 8 1MRK505222-UUS C Voltage protection
514 Technical reference manual
Name Type Description TRST2_B BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase B
TRST2_C BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase C
PICKUP BOOLEAN General pickup signal
PU_ST1 BOOLEAN Common pickup signal from step1
PU_ST1_A BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step1 phase A
PU_ST1_B BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step1 phase B
PU_ST1_C BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step1 phase C
PU_ST2 BOOLEAN Common pickup signal from step2
PU_ST2_A BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step2 phase A
PU_ST2_B BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step2 phase B
PU_ST2_C BOOLEAN Pickup signal from step2 phase C
8.2.5 Setting parameters Table 260: OV2PTOV (59) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
VBase 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Base voltage
OperationStep1 Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Enable execution of step 1
Characterist1 Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog. inv. curve
— — Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for step 1
OpMode1 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3
— — 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for op (1 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 1
Pickup1 1 — 200 %VB 1 120 Voltage pickup value (Definite-Time & Inverse- Time curve) in % of VBase, step 1
t1 0.00 — 6000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Definitive time delay of step 1
t1Min 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 1
TD1 0.05 — 1.10 — 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 1
HystAbs1 0.0 — 100.0 %VB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis in % of VBase, step 1
OperationStep2 Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Enable execution of step 2
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 8 Voltage protection
515 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Characterist2 Definite time
Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog. inv. curve
— — Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for step 2
OpMode2 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3
— — 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for op (1 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 2
Pickup2 1 — 200 %VB 1 150 Voltage pickup value (Definite-Time & Inverse- Time curve) in % of VBase, step 2
t2 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Definitive time delay of step 2
t2Min 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 2
TD2 0.05 — 1.10 — 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 2
HystAbs2 0.0 — 100.0 %VB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis in % of VBase, step 2
Table 261: OV2PTOV (59) Group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description tReset1 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time
curve step 1
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased
— — Instantaneous Selection of used IDMT reset curve type for step 1
tIReset1 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in Inverse-Time reset (s), step 1
ACrv1 0.005 — 200.000 — 0.001 1.000 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 1
BCrv1 0.50 — 100.00 — 0.01 1.00 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 1
CCrv1 0.0 — 1.0 — 0.1 0.0 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 1
DCrv1 0.000 — 60.000 — 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for step 1
PCrv1 0.000 — 3.000 — 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 1
CrvSat1 0 — 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for programmable over voltage TOV curve, step 1
tReset2 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 2
ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased
— — Instantaneous Selection of Time Delay reset curve for step 2
tIReset2 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in Inverse-Time reset (s), step 2
Table continues on next page
Section 8 1MRK505222-UUS C Voltage protection
516 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description ACrv2 0.005 — 200.000 — 0.001 1.000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 2
BCrv2 0.50 — 100.00 — 0.01 1.00 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 2
CCrv2 0.0 — 1.0 — 0.1 0.0 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 2
DCrv2 0.000 — 60.000 — 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for step 2
PCrv2 0.000 — 3.000 — 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 2
CrvSat2 0 — 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for programmable over voltage TOV curve, step 2
Table 262: OV2PTOV (59) Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description ConnType PhN DFT
PhPh DFT PhN RMS PhPh RMS
— — PhN DFT Group selector for connection type
8.2.6 Technical data Table 263: OV2PTOV (59) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Operate voltage, step 1 and 2
(1-200)% of VBase 0.5% of Vn at V < Vn 0.5% of V at V > Vn
Absolute hysteresis (0100)% of VBase 0.5% of Vn at V < Vn 0.5% of V at V > Vn
Inverse time characteristics for steps 1 and 2, see table 731
— See table 731
Definite time delay, step 1 (0.00 — 6000.00) s 0.5% 10 ms
Definite time delays (0.000-60.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
Minimum operate time, Inverse characteristics
(0.000-60.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
Operate time, pickup function
25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Vset —
Reset time, pickup function
25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Vset —
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Vset —
Impulse margin time 15 ms typically —
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 8 Voltage protection
517 Technical reference manual
8.3 Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV (59N)
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Two step residual overvoltage protection
ROV2PTOV
3U0 TRV V1 EN
59N
8.3.1 Introduction Residual voltages may occur in the power system during ground faults.
Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV (59N) function calculates the residual voltage from the three-phase voltage input transformers or measures it from a single voltage input transformer fed from a broken delta or neutral point voltage transformer.
ROV2PTOV (59N) has two voltage steps, each with inverse or definite time delay.
Reset delay ensures operation for intermittent ground faults.
8.3.2 Principle of operation Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV (59N) is used to detect high single- phase voltage, such as high residual voltage, also called 3V0. The residual voltage can be measured directly from a voltage transformer in the neutral of a power transformer or from a three-phase voltage transformer, where the secondary windings are connected in an open delta. Another possibility is to measure the three-phase voltages and internally in the IED calculate the corresponding residual voltage and connect this calculated residual voltage to ROV2PTOV (59N). ROV2PTOV (59N) has two steps with separate time delays. If the single-phase (residual) voltage remains above the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding TRIP signal is issued.
The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for the two steps and can be either, definite time delay or inverse time delay.
The voltage related settings are made in percent of the base voltage, which is set in kV, phase-phase.
Section 8 1MRK505222-UUS C Voltage protection
518 Technical reference manual
8.3.2.1 Measurement principle
The residual voltage is measured continuously, and compared with the set values, Pickup1 and Pickup2.
To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal, a hysteresis has been included.
8.3.2.2 Time delay
The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time delay (TOV). For the inverse time delay four different modes are available:
inverse curve A inverse curve B inverse curve C customer programmable inverse curve
The type A curve is described as:
TDt V Vpickup
Vpickup
= — > >
ANSIEQUATION2422 V1 EN (Equation 130)
where:
Un> Set value for step 1 and step 2
U Measured voltage
The type B curve is described as:
2.0 480 0.035
32 0.5
TDt V Vpickup
Vpickup
= —
— > — >
ANSIEQUATION2423 V1 EN (Equation 131)
The type C curve is described as:
3.0 480 0.035
32 0.5
TDt V Vpickup
Vpickup
= +
— > — >
ANSIEQUATION2421 V1 EN (Equation 132)
The customer programmable curve can be created as:
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 8 Voltage protection
519 Technical reference manual
P
TD A t D
V Vpickup B C
Vpickup
= +
— —
EQUATION1616 V1 EN (Equation 133)
When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity. There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval Vpickup up to Vpickup (1.0 + CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: Vpickup (1.0 + CrvSatn/100). If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:
0 100
CrvSatnB C — >
EQUATION1440 V1 EN (Equation 134)
The details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in section «Inverse characteristics».
TRIP signal issuing requires that the residual overvoltage condition continues for at least the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time mode (DT) and by some special voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time mode (TOV).
If the PICKUP condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2 for the inverse time) the corresponding PICKUP output is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed.
Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the PICKUP condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area. Also notice that for the overvoltage function TOV reset time is constant and does not depend on the voltage fluctuations during the drop-off period. However, there are three ways to reset the timer, either the timer is reset instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during the reset time, or the timer value is linearly decreased during the reset time. See figure 258 and figure 259.
Section 8 1MRK505222-UUS C Voltage protection
520 Technical reference manual
ANSI05000019-3-en.vsd
Voltage
Time
HystAbs1
PICKUP TRIP
PU_Overvolt1
PICKUP
TRIP
t
tIReset1
Time
Time Integrator
t
Frozen Timer
Linearly decreased
Instantaneous
Measured Voltage
tIReset1
ANSI05000019 V3 EN
Figure 265: Voltage profile not causing a reset of the PICKUP signal for step 1, and inverse time delay
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 8 Voltage protection
521 Technical reference manual
Voltage
Time
HystAbs1 PICKUP TRIPPICKUP
Pickup1
PICKUP
TRIP
t
tIReset1
Time
Time Integrator
t
Frozen Timer
Linearly decreasedInstantaneous
Measured Voltage
tIReset1
ANSI05000020-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000020 V2 EN
Figure 266: Voltage profile causing a reset of the PICKUP signal for step 1, and inverse time delay
Definite timer delay
When definite time delay is selected, the function will operate as shown in figure 267. Detailed information about individual stage reset/operation behavior is shown in figure 252 and figure 253 respectively. Note that by setting tResetn = 0.0s, instantaneous reset of the definite time delayed stage is ensured.
Section 8 1MRK505222-UUS C Voltage protection
522 Technical reference manual
a>b
a
bVpickup>
V
t
tReset1
t
t1
AND TRST1
PU_ST1
OFF Delay
ON Delay
ANSI10000100-2-en.vsd ANSI10000100 V2 EN
Figure 267: Detailed logic diagram for step 1, Definite time delay, DT operation
Pickup1
PICKUP
TRIP
tReset1
t1
ANSI10000037-2-en.vsd ANSI10000037 V2 EN
Figure 268: Example for Definite Time Delay stage 1 reset
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 8 Voltage protection
523 Technical reference manual
Pickup1
PICKUP
TRIP
tReset1
t1
ANSI10000038-2-en.vsd
ANSI10000038 V2 EN
Figure 269: Example for Definite Time Delay stage 1 operation
8.3.2.3 Blocking
It is possible to block Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV (59N) partially or completely, by binary input signals where:
BLOCK: blocks all outputs
BLKTR1: blocks all trip outputs of step 1
BLK1: blocks all pickup and trip outputs related to step 1
BLKTR2: blocks all trip outputs of step 2
BLK2: blocks all PICKUP and trip inputs related to step 2
8.3.2.4 Design
The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the residual voltage. Recursive Fourier filters filter the input voltage signal. The single input voltage is compared to the set value, and is also used for the inverse time characteristic integration. The design of Two step residual overvoltage protection (ROV2PTOV, 59N) is schematically described in figure 270.
Section 8 1MRK505222-UUS C Voltage protection
524 Technical reference manual
VN PU_ST1
TRST1
PU_ST2
TRST2
PICKUP
TRIP
Comparator
Pickup 1
Pickup
& Trip
Output Logic
Step 2
Time integrator tIReset2
ResetTypeCrv2
PICKUP Pickup
& Trip
Output Logic
Step 1
Time integrator tIReset1
ResetTypeCrv1
PICKUP
TRIP
OR
OR
Comparator VN >
Pickup2
Phase 1
TRIP
Phase 1
t1 tReset1
t2 tReset2
VN >
ANSI05000748-2-en.vsd ANSI05000748 V2 EN
Figure 270: Schematic design of Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV (59N)
8.3.3 Function block
ANSI06000278-2-en.vsd
ROV2PTOV (59N) V3P* BLOCK BLKTR1 BLK1 BLKTR2 BLK2
TRIP TRST1 TRST2
PICKUP PU_ST1 PU_ST2
ANSI06000278 V2 EN
Figure 271: ROV2PTOV (59N) function block
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 8 Voltage protection
525 Technical reference manual
8.3.4 Input and output signals Table 264: ROV2PTOV (59N) Input signals
Name Type Default Description V3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Three phase voltages
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip signal, step 1
BLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1
BLKTR2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip signal, step 2
BLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2
Table 265: ROV2PTOV (59N) Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
TRST1 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step1
TRST2 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step2
PICKUP BOOLEAN General pickup signal
PU_ST1 BOOLEAN Common pickup signal from step1
PU_ST2 BOOLEAN Common pickup signal from step2
8.3.5 Setting parameters Table 266: ROV2PTOV (59N) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
VBase 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Base voltage
OperationStep1 Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Enable execution of step 1
Characterist1 Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog. inv. curve
— — Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for step 1
Pickup1 1 — 200 %VB 1 30 Voltage setting/pickup value (DT & TOV), step 1 in % of VBase
t1 0.00 — 6000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Definitive time delay of step 1
t1Min 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 1
Table continues on next page
Section 8 1MRK505222-UUS C Voltage protection
526 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description TD1 0.05 — 1.10 — 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for
step 1
HystAbs1 0.0 — 100.0 %VB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis in % of VBase, step 1
OperationStep2 Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Enable execution of step 2
Characterist2 Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog. inv. curve
— — Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for step 2
Pickup2 1 — 100 %VB 1 45 Voltage setting/pickup value (DT & TOV), step 2 in % of VBase
t2 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Definitive time delay of step 2
t2Min 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 2
TD2 0.05 — 1.10 — 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 2
HystAbs2 0.0 — 100.0 %VB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis in % of VBase, step 2
Table 267: ROV2PTOV (59N) Group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description tReset1 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time
curve step 1
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased
— — Instantaneous Selection of used IDMT reset curve type for step 1
tIReset1 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in Inverse-Time reset (s), step 1
ACrv1 0.005 — 200.000 — 0.001 1.000 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 1
BCrv1 0.50 — 100.00 — 0.01 1.00 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 1
CCrv1 0.0 — 1.0 — 0.1 0.0 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 1
DCrv1 0.000 — 60.000 — 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for step 1
PCrv1 0.000 — 3.000 — 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 1
CrvSat1 0 — 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for programmable over voltage TOV curve, step 1
tReset2 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in Definite-Time reset (s), step 2
ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased
— — Instantaneous Selection of Time Delay reset curve for step 2
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 8 Voltage protection
527 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description tIReset2 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in Inverse-Time reset (s), step 2
ACrv2 0.005 — 200.000 — 0.001 1.000 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 2
BCrv2 0.50 — 100.00 — 0.01 1.00 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 2
CCrv2 0.0 — 1.0 — 0.1 0.0 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 2
DCrv2 0.000 — 60.000 — 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for step 2
PCrv2 0.000 — 3.000 — 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 2
CrvSat2 0 — 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for programmable over voltage TOV curve, step 2
8.3.6 Technical data Table 268: ROV2PTOV (59N) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Operate voltage, step 1 and step 2
(1-200)% of VBase 0.5% of Vn at V < Vn 1.0% of V at V > Vn
Absolute hysteresis (0100)% of VBase 0.5% of Vn at V < Vn 1.0% of V at V > Vn
Inverse time characteristics for low and high step, see table 733
— See table 733
Definite time setting, step 1
(0.006000.00) s 0.5% 10 ms
Definite time setting (0.00060.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
Minimum operate time (0.000-60.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
Operate time, pickup function
25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Vset —
Reset time, pickup function
25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Vset —
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Vset —
Impulse margin time 15 ms typically —
Section 8 1MRK505222-UUS C Voltage protection
528 Technical reference manual
8.4 Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH (24)
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH
U/f >
SYMBOL-Q V1 EN
24
8.4.1 Introduction When the laminated core of a power transformer or generator is subjected to a magnetic flux density beyond its design limits, stray flux will flow into non-laminated components not designed to carry flux and cause eddy currents to flow. The eddy currents can cause excessive heating and severe damage to insulation and adjacent parts in a relatively short time. The function has settable inverse operating curves and independent alarm stages.
8.4.2 Principle of operation The importance of Overexcitation protection (OEXPVPH, 24) function is growing as the power transformers as well as other power system elements today operate most of the time near their designated limits.
Modern design transformers are more sensitive to overexcitation than earlier types. This is a result of the more efficient designs and designs which rely on the improvement in the uniformity of the excitation level of modern systems. Thus, if emergency that causes overexcitation does occur, transformers may be damaged unless corrective action is promptly taken. Transformer manufacturers recommend an overexcitation protection as a part of the transformer protection system.
Overexcitation results from excessive applied voltage, possibly in combination with below-normal frequency. Such condition may occur when a transformer unit is on load, but are more likely to arise when it is on open circuit, or at a loss of load occurrence. Transformers directly connected to generators are in particular danger to experience overexcitation condition. It follows from the fundamental transformer equation, see equation 135, that peak flux density Bmax is directly proportional to induced voltage E, and inversely proportional to frequency f, and turns n.
E . f n Bmax A4 44= EQUATION898 V2 EN (Equation 135)
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 8 Voltage protection
529 Technical reference manual
The relative excitation M is therefore according to equation 136.
( ) ( ) ( )
E f M p.u. =
Vr fn ANSIEQUATION2296 V1 EN (Equation 136)
Disproportional variations in quantities E and f may give rise to core overfluxing. If the core flux density Bmax increases to a point above saturation level (typically 1.9 Tesla), the flux will no longer be contained within the core, but will extend into other (non- laminated) parts of the power transformer and give rise to eddy current circulations.
Overexcitation will result in:
overheating of the non-laminated metal parts a large increase in magnetizing currents an increase in core and winding temperature an increase in transformer vibration and noise
Protection against overexcitation is based on calculation of the relative volt per hertz (V/ Hz) ratio. Protection initiates a reduction of excitation, and if this fails, or if this is not possible, the TRIP signal will disconnect the transformer from the source after a delay ranging from seconds to minutes, typically 5-10 seconds.
Overexcitation protection may be of particular concern on directly connected generator unit transformers. Directly connected generator-transformers are subjected to a wide range of frequencies during the acceleration and deceleration of the turbine. In such cases, OEXPVPH (24) may trip the field breaker during a start-up of a machine, by means of the overexcitation ALARM signal. If this is not possible, the power transformer can be disconnected from the source, after a delay, by the TRIP signal.
The IEC 60076 — 1 standard requires that transformers operate continuously at not more than 10% above rated voltage at no load, and rated frequency. At no load, the ratio of the actual generator terminal voltage to the actual frequency should not exceed 1.1 times the ratio of transformer rated voltage to the rated frequency on a sustained basis, see equation 137.
E Vn 1.1
f fn
EQUATION1630 V1 EN (Equation 137)
or equivalently, with 1.1 Vn = Pickup1 according to equation 138.
Section 8 1MRK505222-UUS C Voltage protection
530 Technical reference manual
E
f fn
Pickup1
ANSIEQUATION2297 V2 EN (Equation 138)
where:
Pickup1 is the maximum continuously allowed voltage at no load, and rated frequency.
Pickup1 is a setting parameter. The setting range is 100% to 180%. If the user does not know exactly what to set, then the default value for Pickup1 = 110 % given by the IEC 60076-1 standard shall be used.
In OEXPVPH (24), the relative excitation M is expressed according to equation 139.
( ) E f M p.u. =
Vn fn ANSIEQUATION2299 V1 EN (Equation 139)
It is clear from the above formula that, for an unloaded power transformer, M = 1 for any E and f, where the ratio E/f is equal to Vn/fn. A power transformer is not overexcited as long as the relative excitation is M Pickup1, Pickup1 expressed in % of Vn/fn.
The overexcitation protection algorithm is fed with an input voltage V which is in general not the induced voltage E from the fundamental transformer equation. For no load condition, these two voltages are the same, but for a loaded power transformer the internally induced voltage E may be lower or higher than the voltage V which is measured and fed to OEXPVPH (24), depending on the direction of the power flow through the power transformer, the power transformer side where OEXPVPH (24) is applied, and the power transformer leakage reactance of the winding. It is important to specify in the application configuration on which side of the power transformer OEXPVPH (24) is placed.
As an example, at a transformer with a 15% short circuit impedance Xsc, the full load, 0.8 power factor, 105% voltage on the load side, the actual flux level in the transformer core, will not be significantly different from that at the 110% voltage, no load, rated frequency, provided that the short circuit impedance X can be equally divided between the primary and the secondary winding: XLeakage = XLeakage1 = XLeakage2 = Xsc / 2 = 0.075 pu.
OEXPVPH (24) calculates the internal induced voltage E if XLeakage (meaning the leakage reactance of the winding where OEXPVPH (24) is connected) is known to the user. The assumption taken for two-winding power transformers that XLeakage = Xsc /
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 8 Voltage protection
531 Technical reference manual
2 is unfortunately most often not true. For a two-winding power transformer the leakage reactances of the two windings depend on how the windings are located on the core with respect to each other. In the case of three-winding power transformers the situation is still more complex. If a user has the knowledge on the leakage reactance, then it should applied. If a user has no idea about it, XLeakage can be set to Xc/2. OEXPVPH (24) protection will then take the given measured voltage V, as the induced voltage E.
It is assumed that overexcitation is a symmetrical phenomenon, caused by events such as loss-of-load, etc. It will be observed that a high phase-to-ground voltage does not mean overexcitation. For example, in an ungrounded power system, a single phase-to- ground fault means high voltages of the healthy two phases-to-ground, but no overexcitation on any winding. The phase-to-phase voltages will remain essentially unchanged. The important voltage is the voltage between the two ends of each winding.
8.4.2.1 Measured voltage
If one phase-to-phase voltage is available from the side where overexcitation protection is applied, then Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH (24) shall be set to measure this voltage, MeasuredV. The particular voltage which is used determines the two currents that must be used. This must be chosen with the setting MeasuredI.
It is extremely important that MeasuredV and MeasuredI are set to same value.
If, for example, voltage Vab is fed to OEXPVPH(24), then currents Ia, and Ib must be applied. From these two input currents, current Iab = Ia — Ib is calculated internally by the OEXPVPH (24) algorithm. The phase-to-phase voltage must be higher than 70% of the rated value, otherwise the protection algorithm exits without calculating the excitation. ERROR output is set to 1, and the displayed value of relative excitation V/ Hz shows 0.000.
If three phase-to-ground voltages are available from the side where overexcitation is connected, then OEXPVPH (24) shall be set to measure positive sequence voltage and current. In this case the positive sequence voltage and the positive sequence current are used by OEXPVPH (24). A check is made if the positive sequence voltage is higher than 70% of rated phase-to-ground voltage, when below this value, OEXPVPH (24) exits immediately, and no excitation is calculated. ERROR output is set to 1, and the displayed value of relative excitation V/Hz shows 0.000.
The frequency value is received from the pre-processing block. The function operates for frequencies within the range of 33-60 Hz and of 42-75 Hz for 50 Hz and 60 Hz respectively.
Section 8 1MRK505222-UUS C Voltage protection
532 Technical reference manual
OEXPVPH (24) can be connected to any power transformer side, independent from the power flow.
The side with a possible load tap changer must not be used.
8.4.2.2 Operate time of the overexcitation protection
The operate time of OEXPVPH (24) is a function of the relative overexcitation.
Basically there are two different delay laws available to choose between:
the so called IEEE law, and a tailor-made law.
The so called IEEE law approximates a square law and has been chosen based on analysis of the various transformers overexcitation capability characteristics. They can match the transformer core capability well.
The square law is according to equation 140.
op 2 2
0.18 0.18 t
M 1
PUV Hz
TD TD
overexcitation
=
—
=
ANSIEQUATION2298 V2 EN (Equation 140)
where:
M the relative excitation
Pickup1 is maximum continuously allowed voltage at no load, and rated frequency, in pu and
TD is time multiplier for inverse time functions, see figure 273. Parameter TD (time delay multiplier setting) selects one delay curve from the family of curves.
The relative excitation M is calculated using equation141
measured
measured ratedmeasured
measured
rated
M
V V ff
VBase VBase f f
= =
ANSIEQUATION2404 V1 EN (Equation 141)
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 8 Voltage protection
533 Technical reference manual
An analog overexcitation relay would have to evaluate the following integral expression, which means to look for the instant of time t = top according to equation 142.
( )( ) opt
2
0
M t Pickup1 0.18dt TD— ANSIEQUATION2300 V1 EN (Equation 142)
A digital, numerical relay will instead look for the lowest j (that is, j = n) where it becomes true that:
( ) n
2
j k
t M( j) PUV / Hz 0.18 TD =
D — EQUATION1636 V1 EN (Equation 143)
where:
Dt is the time interval between two successive executions of OEXPVPH (24) and
M(j) — Pickup1 is the relative excitation at (time j) in excess of the normal (rated) excitation which is given as Vn/fn.
As long as M > Pickup1 (that is, overexcitation condition), the above sum can only be larger with time, and if the overexcitation persists, the protected transformer will be tripped at j = n.
Inverse delays as per figure 273, can be modified (limited) by two special definite delay settings, namely t_MaxTripDelay and t_MinTripDelay, see figure 272.
Section 8 1MRK505222-UUS C Voltage protection
534 Technical reference manual
0 Mmax Pickup1
Mmax
t_MinTripDelay
Pickup1 Emax E (only if f = fn = const)
t_MaxTrip Delay
inverse delay law
overexcitation
under — excitation
delay in s
ANSI99001067-2- en.vsd
Overexcitation M-Pickup1
Excitation MM=Pickup1
ANSI99001067 V2 EN
Figure 272: Restrictions imposed on inverse delays by t_MaxTripDelay and t_MinTripDelay
A definite maximum time, t_MaxTripDelay, can be used to limit the operate time at low degrees of overexcitation. Inverse delays longer than t_MaxTripDelay will not be allowed. In case the inverse delay is longer than t_MaxTripDelay, OEXPVPH (24) trips after t_MaxTripDelay seconds.
A definite minimum time, t_MinTripDelay, can be used to limit the operate time at high degrees of overexcitation. In case the inverse delay is shorter than t_MinTripDelay, OEXPVPH (24) function trips after t_MinTripDelay seconds. The inverse delay law is not valid for values exceeding Mmax. The delay will be tMin, irrespective of the overexcitation level, when values exceed Mmax (that is, M>Pickup1).
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 8 Voltage protection
535 Technical reference manual
1 10 1
10
100
1000
2 403 4 5 20 30
TD = 2
TD = 3
TD = 4
TD = 5 TD = 6 TD = 7 TD = 8 TD = 9 TD = 10
TD = 1
OVEREXCITATION IN %
Time (s) IEEE OVEREXCITATION CURVES
en01000373_ansi.vsd
(M-Emaxcont)*100)
TD = 60
TD = 20
ANSI01000373 V1 EN
Figure 273: Delays inversely proportional to the square of the overexcitation
The critical value of excitation M is determined indirectly via OEXPVPH (24) setting Pickup2. Pickup2 can be thought of as a no-load voltage at rated frequency, where the inverse law should be replaced by a short definite delay, t_MinTripDelay. If, for example, Pickup2 = 140 %, then M is according to equation 144.
( )Pickup2 f M 1.40
Vn/fn = =
ANSIEQUATION2286 V1 EN (Equation 144)
The Tailor-Made law allows a user to design an arbitrary delay characteristic. In this case the interval between M = Pickup1, and M = Mmax is automatically divided into
Section 8 1MRK505222-UUS C Voltage protection
536 Technical reference manual
five equal subintervals, with six delays. (settings t1, t2, t3, t4, t5 and t6) as shown in figure 274. These times should be set so that t1 => t2 => t3 => t4 => t5 => t6.
0
Emaxcont
Mmax — Emaxcont
Mmax
t_MinTripDelay
t_MaxTripDelay
delay in s
Overexcitation M-Emaxcont
Excitation M
under- excitation
99001068_ansi.vsd
ANSI99001068 V1 EN
Figure 274: An example of a Tailor-Made delay characteristic
Delays between two consecutive points, for example t3 and t4, are obtained by linear interpolation.
Should it happen that t_MaxTripDelay be lower than, for example, delays t1, and t2, the actual delay would be t_MaxTripDelay. Above Mmax, the delay can only be t_MinTripDelay.
8.4.2.3 Cooling
Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH (24) is basically a thermal protection; therefore a cooling process has been introduced. Exponential cooling process is applied. Parameter Setting tool is an OEXPVPH (24) setting, with a default time constant t_CoolingK of 20 minutes. This means that if the voltage and frequency return to their previous normal values (no more overexcitation), the normal temperature is assumed to be reached not before approximately 5 times t_CoolingK minutes. If an overexcitation condition would return before that, the time to trip will be shorter than it would be otherwise.
8.4.2.4 Overexcitation protection function measurands
A monitored data value, TMTOTRIP, is available on the local HMI and in PCM600. This value is an estimation of the remaining time to trip (in seconds), if the overexcitation remained on the level it had when the estimation was done. This information can be useful during small or moderate overexcitations.
If the overexcitation is so low that the valid delay is t_MaxTripDelay, then the estimation of the remaining time to trip is done against t_MaxTripDelay.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 8 Voltage protection
537 Technical reference manual
The relative excitation M, shown on the local HMI and in PCM600 has a monitored data value VPERHZ, is calculated from the expression:
( ) E f M p.u. =
Vn fn ANSIEQUATION2299 V1 EN (Equation 145)
If VPERHZ value is less than setting Pickup1 (in %), the power transformer is underexcited. If VPERHZ is equal to Pickup1 (in %), the excitation is exactly equal to the power transformer continuous capability. If VPERHZ is higher than Pickup1, the protected power transformer is overexcited. For example, if VPERHZ = 1.100, while Pickup1 = 110 %, then the power transformer is exactly on its maximum continuous excitation limit.
Monitored data value THERMSTA shows the thermal status of the protected power transformer iron core. THERMSTA gives the thermal status in % of the trip value which corresponds to 100%. THERMSTA should reach 100% at the same time, as TMTOTRIP reaches 0 seconds. If the protected power transformer is then for some reason not switched off, THERMSTA shall go over 100%.
If the delay as per IEEE law, or Tailor-made Law, is limited by t_MaxTripDelay, and/ or t_MinTripDelay, then the Thermal status will generally not reach 100% at the same time, when tTRIP reaches 0 seconds. For example, if, at low degrees of overexcitation, the very long delay is limited by t_MaxTripDelay, then the OEXPVPH (24) TRIP output signal will be set to 1 before the Thermal status reaches 100%.
8.4.2.5 Overexcitation alarm
A separate step, AlarmPickup, is provided for alarming purpose. It is normally set 2% lower than (Pickup1) and has a definite time delay, tAlarm. This will give the operator an early abnormal voltages warning.
Section 8 1MRK505222-UUS C Voltage protection
538 Technical reference manual
8.4.2.6 Logic diagram
ANSI05000162-2-en.vsd
OR
&
&
BLOCK
Xleakage
Ei M=
(Ei / f) (Vn / fn)
M = relative Pickup as service value
Pickup2
M>Pickup2
Pickup1
M>Pickup1
IEEE law
Tailor-made law
Calculation of internal induced voltage Ei
TD M
M
M
ALARM
TRIP
AlarmPickup
0
0 0-tMax
0 0-tMax
0-tMax t>tAlarm
t>tMin
t_MaxTripDelay
t_MinTripDelay
tAlarm
V3P
I3P
ANSI05000162 V2 EN
Figure 275: A simplified logic diagram of the Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH (24)
Simplification of the diagram is in the way the IEEE and Tailor-made delays are calculated. The cooling process is not shown. It is not shown that voltage and frequency are separately checked against their respective limit values.
8.4.3 Function block
ANSI05000329-2-en.vsd
OEXPVPH (24) I3P* V3P* BLOCK RESET
TRIP PICKUP ALARM
ANSI05000329 V2 EN
Figure 276: OEXPVPH (24) function block
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 8 Voltage protection
539 Technical reference manual
8.4.4 Input and output signals Table 269: OEXPVPH (24) Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Current connection
V3P GROUP SIGNAL
— Voltage connection
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset operation
Table 270: OEXPVPH (24) Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip from overexcitation function
PICKUP BOOLEAN Overexcitation above set trip pickup (instantaneous)
ALARM BOOLEAN Overexcitation above set alarm pickup (delayed)
8.4.5 Setting parameters Table 271: OEXPVPH (24) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
IBase 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Base current (rated phase current) in A
VBase 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Base voltage (main voltage) in kV
Pickup1 100.0 — 180.0 %VB/f 0.1 110.0 Operate level of V/Hz at no load and rated freq in % of (Vbase/frated)
Pickup2 100.0 — 200.0 %VB/f 0.1 140.0 High level of V/Hz above which tMin is used, in % of (Vbase/fn)
XLeakage 0.000 — 200.000 ohm 0.001 0.000 Winding leakage reactance in primary ohms
t_TripPulse 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Length of the pulse for trip signal (in sec)
t_MinTripDelay 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 7.000 Minimum trip delay for V/Hz inverse curve, in sec
t_MaxTripDelay 0.00 — 9000.00 s 0.01 1800.00 Maximum trip delay for V/Hz inverse curve, in sec
t_CoolingK 0.10 — 9000.00 s 0.01 1200.00 Transformer magnetic core cooling time constant, in sec
CurveType IEEE Tailor made
— — IEEE Inverse time curve selection, IEEE/Tailor made
Table continues on next page
Section 8 1MRK505222-UUS C Voltage protection
540 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description TDForIEEECurve 1 — 60 — 1 1 Time multiplier for IEEE inverse type curve
AlarmPickup 50.0 — 120.0 % 0.1 100.0 Alarm pickup level as % of Step1 trip pickup level
tAlarm 0.00 — 9000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Alarm time delay, in sec
Table 272: OEXPVPH (24) Group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description t1_UserCurve 0.00 — 9000.00 s 0.01 7200.00 Time delay t1 (longest) for tailor made curve,
in sec
t2_UserCurve 0.00 — 9000.00 s 0.01 3600.00 Time delay t2 for tailor made curve, in sec
t3_UserCurve 0.00 — 9000.00 s 0.01 1800.00 Time delay t3 for tailor made curve, in sec
t4_UserCurve 0.00 — 9000.00 s 0.01 900.00 Time delay t4 for tailor made curve, in sec
t5_UserCurve 0.00 — 9000.00 s 0.01 450.00 Time delay t5 for tailor made curve, in sec
t6_UserCurve 0.00 — 9000.00 s 0.01 225.00 Time delay t6 (shortest) for tailor made curve, in sec
Table 273: OEXPVPH (24) Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description MeasuredV PosSeq
AB BC CA
— — AB Selection of measured voltage
MeasuredI AB BC CA PosSeq
— — AB Selection of measured current
8.4.6 Technical data Table 274: OEXPVPH (24) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Pickup value, pickup (100180)% of (VBase/fn) 0.5% of V
Pickup value, alarm (50120)% of pickup level 0.5% of Vn at V Vn 0.5% of V at V > Vn
Pickup value, high level (100200)% of (VBase/fn) 0.5% of V
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 8 Voltage protection
541 Technical reference manual
Function Range or value Accuracy Curve type IEEE or customer defined
2
(0.18 ) :
( 1)
= —
TD IEEE t
M
EQUATION1645 V1 EN (Equation 146)
where M = (E/f)/(Vn/fn)
5% + 40 ms
Minimum time delay for inverse function
(0.00060.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
Maximum time delay for inverse function
(0.009000.00) s 0.5% 10 ms
Alarm time delay (0.009000.00) 0.5% 10 ms
8.5 Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV (60)
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV — 60
8.5.1 Introduction A voltage differential monitoring function is available. It compares the voltages from two three phase sets of voltage transformers and has one sensitive alarm step and one trip step.
8.5.2 Principle of operation The Voltage differential protection function VDCPTOV (60) is based on comparison of the magnitudes of the two voltages connected in each phase. Possible differences between the ratios of the two Voltage/Capacitive voltage transformers can be compensated for with a ratio correction factors RF_X. The voltage difference is evaluated and if it exceeds the alarm level VDAlarm or trip level VDTrip signals for alarm (ALARM output) or trip (TRIP output) is given after definite time delay tAlarm respectively tTrip. The two three phase voltage supplies are also supervised with undervoltage settings V1Low and V2Low. The outputs for loss of voltage V1LOW resp V2LOW will be activated. The V1 voltage is supervised for loss of individual phases whereas the V2 voltage is supervised for loss of all three phases.
Loss of all U1or all U2 voltages will block the differential measurement. This blocking can be switched off with setting BlkDiffAtULow = No.
Section 8 1MRK505222-UUS C Voltage protection
542 Technical reference manual
VDCPTOV (60) function can be blocked from an external condition with the binary BLOCK input. It can for example, be activated from Fuse failure supervision function SDDRFUF.
To allow easy commissioning the measured differential voltage is available as service value. This allows simple setting of the ratio correction factor to achieve full balance in normal service.
The principle logic diagram is shown in figure 277.
VDTrip_A
V1Low_A
AND
O R
VDAlarm_A
VDTrip_B
VDAlarm_B
VDTrip_C
VDAlarm_C
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
O R
TRIP
PICKUP
ALARM
V1Low_B
V1Low_C
V2Low_A
V2Low_B
V2Low_C
AND
AND
0-tAlarm
OR
AND
AND
AND
BLOCK
AND
AND
V1LOW
V2LOW
en06000382_2_ansi.vsd
0
0-t1 0
0-tAlarm 0
0-tTrip 00-tReset
0
BlkDiffAtULow
AND
ANSI06000382 V3 EN
Figure 277: Principle logic for Voltage differential function VDCPTOV (60)
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 8 Voltage protection
543 Technical reference manual
8.5.3 Function block
ANSI06000528-2-en.vsd
VDCPTOV (60) V3P1* V3P2* BLOCK
TRIP PICKUP ALARM V1LOW V2LOW
VDIFF_A VDIFF_B VDIFF_C
ANSI06000528 V2 EN
Figure 278: VDCPTOV (60) function block
8.5.4 Input and output signals Table 275: VDCPTOV (60) Input signals
Name Type Default Description V3P1 GROUP
SIGNAL — Bus voltage
V3P2 GROUP SIGNAL
— Capacitor voltage
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
Table 276: VDCPTOV (60) Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Voltage differential protection operated
PICKUP BOOLEAN Pickup of voltage differential protection
ALARM BOOLEAN Voltage differential protection alarm
V1LOW BOOLEAN Loss of V1 voltage
V2LOW BOOLEAN Loss of V2 voltage
VDIFF_A REAL Differential Voltage phase A
VDIFF_B REAL Differential Voltage phase B
VDIFF_C REAL Differential Voltage phase C
Section 8 1MRK505222-UUS C Voltage protection
544 Technical reference manual
8.5.5 Setting parameters Table 277: VDCPTOV (60) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Operation Enable/Disable
VBase 0.50 — 2000.00 kV 0.01 400.00 Base Voltage
BlkDiffAtVLow No Yes
— — Yes Block operation at low voltage
VDTrip 0.0 — 100.0 %VB 0.1 5.0 Operate level, in % of VBase
tTrip 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Time delay for voltage differential operate, in milliseconds
tReset 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for voltage differential reset, in seconds
V1Low 0.0 — 100.0 %VB 0.1 70.0 Input 1 undervoltage level, in % of VBase
V2Low 0.0 — 100.0 %VB 0.1 70.0 Input 2 undervoltage level, in % of VBase
tBlock 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time for undervoltage block
VDAlarm 0.0 — 100.0 %VB 0.1 2.0 Alarm level, in % of VBase
tAlarm 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Time delay for voltage differential alarm, in seconds
Table 278: VDCPTOV (60) Group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description RF_A 0.000 — 3.000 — 0.001 1.000 Ratio compensation factor phase L1
U2L1*RFL1=U1L1
RF_B 0.000 — 3.000 — 0.001 1.000 Ratio compensation factor phase L2 U2L2*RFL2=U1L2
RF_C 0.000 — 3.000 — 0.001 1.000 Ratio compensation factor phase L3 U2L3*RFL3=U1L3
8.5.6 Technical data Table 279: VDCPTOV (60) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Voltage difference for alarm and trip
(0.0100.0) % of VBase 0.5 % of Vn
Under voltage level (0.0100.0) % of VBase 0.5% of Vn
Timers (0.00060.000)s 0.5% 10 ms
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 8 Voltage protection
545 Technical reference manual
8.6 Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV (27)
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV — 27
8.6.1 Introduction Loss of voltage check (LOVPTUV, 27) is suitable for use in networks with an automatic system restoration function. LOVPTUV (27) issues a three-pole trip command to the circuit breaker, if all three phase voltages fall below the set value for a time longer than the set time and the circuit breaker remains closed.
8.6.2 Principle of operation The operation of Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV (27) is based on line voltage measurement. LOVPTUV (27) is provided with a logic, which automatically recognizes if the line was restored for at least tRestore before starting the tTrip timer. All three phases are required to be low before the output TRIP is activated. The PICKUP output signal indicates pickup.
Additionally, LOVPTUV (27) is automatically blocked if only one or two phase voltages have been detected low for more than tBlock.
LOVPTUV (27) operates again only if the line has been restored to full voltage for at least tRestore. Operation of the function is also inhibited by fuse failure and open circuit breaker information signals, by their connection to dedicated inputs of the function block.
Due to undervoltage conditions being continuous the trip pulse is limited to a length set by setting tPulse.
The operation of LOVPTUV (27) is supervised by the fuse-failure function (BLKV input) and the information about the open position (CBOPEN) of the associated circuit breaker.
The BLOCK input can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to receive a block command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal functions of the IED itself in order to receive a block command from internal functions. LOVPTUV (27) is also blocked when the IED is in TEST status and the function has been blocked from the HMI test menu. (Blocked=Yes).
Section 8 1MRK505222-UUS C Voltage protection
546 Technical reference manual
Function Enable
TEST-ACTIVE AND
TEST
OR
PU_V_A
PU_V_B
PU_V_C
tPulse
AND
AND
OR
AND
only 1 or 2 phases are low for at least 10 s (not three)
OR AND
OR
Reset Enable
Set Enable OR
Line restored for at least 3 s
Latched Enable
ANSI07000089_2_en.vsd
PICKUP
TRIP 0-tTrip
0
0-tBlock 0
0-tRestore 0
CBOPEN
VTSU
BLOCK
Blocked = Yes
ANSI07000089 V2 EN
Figure 279: Simplified diagram of Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV (27)
8.6.3 Function block
ANSI07000039-2-en.vsd
LOVPTUV (27) V3P* BLOCK CBOPEN VTSU
TRIP PICKUP
ANSI07000039 V2 EN
Figure 280: LOVPTUV (27) function block
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 8 Voltage protection
547 Technical reference manual
8.6.4 Input and output signals Table 280: LOVPTUV (27) Input signals
Name Type Default Description V3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Voltage connection
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block the all outputs
CBOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker open
VTSU BOOLEAN 0 Block from voltage circuit supervision
Table 281: LOVPTUV (27) Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal
PICKUP BOOLEAN Pickup signal
8.6.5 Setting parameters Table 282: LOVPTUV (27) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Operation Enable/Disable
VBase 0.1 — 9999.9 kV 0.1 400.0 Base voltage
VPG 1 — 100 %VB 1 70 Pickup voltage in % of base voltage Vbase
tTrip 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 7.000 Operate time delay
Table 283: LOVPTUV (27) Group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description tPulse 0.050 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Duration of TRIP pulse
tBlock 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Time delay to block when all 3ph voltages are not low
tRestore 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 3.000 Time delay for enable the function after restoration
Section 8 1MRK505222-UUS C Voltage protection
548 Technical reference manual
8.6.6 Technical data Table 284: LOVPTUV (27) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Operate voltage (0100)% of VBase 0.5% of Vn
Pulse timer (0.05060.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
Timers (0.00060.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 8 Voltage protection
549 Technical reference manual
Section 9 Frequency protection
About this chapter This chapter describes the frequency protection functions. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are included for each function.
9.1 Underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81)
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Underfrequency protection SAPTUF
f <
SYMBOL-P V1 EN
81
9.1.1 Introduction Underfrequency occurs as a result of a lack of generation in the network.
Underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81) is used for load shedding systems, remedial action schemes, gas turbine startup and so on.
SAPTUF (81) is also provided with undervoltage blocking.
The operation is based on positive sequence voltage measurement and requires two phase- phase or three phase-neutral voltages to be connected. For information about how to connect analog inputs, refer to Application manual/IED application/Analog inputs/ Setting guidelines
9.1.2 Principle of operation Underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81) is used to detect low power system frequency. SAPTUF (81) can either have a definite time delay or a voltage magnitude dependent time delay. If the voltage magnitude dependent time delay is applied, the time delay will be longer if the voltage is higher, and the delay will be shorter if the
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 9 Frequency protection
551 Technical reference manual
voltage is lower. If the frequency remains below the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted trip due to uncertain frequency measurement at low voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available, that is, if the voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage IntBlockLevel the function is blocked and no PICKUP or TRIP signal is issued.
9.1.2.1 Measurement principle
The fundamental frequency of the measured input voltage is measured continuously, and compared with the set value, PUFrequency. The frequency function is dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the voltage magnitude decreases the setting IntBlockLevel, SAPTUF (81) gets blocked, and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. All voltage settings are made in percent of the setting VBase, which should be set as a phase-phase voltage in kV.
To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal, a hysteresis has been included.
9.1.2.2 Time delay
The time delay for underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81) can be either a settable definite time delay or a voltage magnitude dependent time delay, where the time delay depends on the voltage level; a high voltage level gives a longer time delay and a low voltage level causes a short time delay. For the definite time delay, the setting TimeDlyOperate sets the time delay.
For the voltage dependent time delay the measured voltage level and the settings VNom, VMin, Exponent, t_MaxTripDelay and t_MinTripDelay set the time delay according to figure 281 and equation 147. The setting TimerOperation is used to decide what type of time delay to apply.
Trip signal issuing requires that the underfrequency condition continues for at least the user set time delay TimeDlyOperate. If the PICKUP condition, with respect to the measured frequency ceases during this user set delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time, TimeDlyReset, the PICKUP output is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the PICKUP condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area.
On the output of SAPTUF (81) a 100ms pulse is issued, after a time delay corresponding to the setting of TimeDlyRestore, when the measured frequency returns to the level corresponding to the setting RestoreFreq.
Section 9 1MRK505222-UUS C Frequency protection
552 Technical reference manual
9.1.2.3 Voltage dependent time delay
Since the fundamental frequency in a power system is the same all over the system, except some deviations during power oscillations, another criterion is needed to decide, where to take actions, based on low frequency. In many applications the voltage level is very suitable, and in most cases is load shedding preferable in areas with low voltage. Therefore, a voltage dependent time delay has been introduced, to make sure that load shedding, or other actions, take place at the right location. At constant voltage, V, the voltage dependent time delay is calculated according to equation 147. At non-constant voltage, the actual time delay is integrated in a similar way as for the inverse time characteristic for the undervoltage and overvoltage functions.
( )_ _ _ ExponentV VMin
t t MaxTripDelay t MinTripDelay t MinTripDelay VNom VMin
— = — +
—
EQUATION1559 V1 EN (Equation 147)
where:
t is the voltage dependent time delay (at constant voltage),
V is the measured voltage
Exponent is a setting,
VMin, VNom are voltage settings corresponding to
t_MaxTripDelay, t_MinTripDelay are time settings.
The inverse time characteristics are shown in figure 281, for:
VMin = 90%
= 100%
t_MaxTrip Delay
= 1.0 s
t_MinTripD elay
= 0.0 s
Exponent = 0, 1, 2, 3 and 4
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 9 Frequency protection
553 Technical reference manual
90 95 100 0
0.5
1
en05000075_ansi.vsd
Ti m
eD ly
O pe
ra te
[s ]
V [% of VBase]
Exponenent
0
1 2
3 4
ANSI05000075 V1 EN
Figure 281: Voltage dependent inverse time characteristics for underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81). The time delay to operate is plotted as a function of the measured voltage, for the Exponent = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 respectively.
9.1.2.4 Blocking
It is possible to block underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81) partially or completely, by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:
BLOCK: blocks all outputs
BLKTRIP: blocks the TRIP output
BLKREST: blocks the RESTORE output
If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlockLevel, both the PICKUP and the TRIP outputs, are blocked.
9.1.2.5 Design
The frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the positive sequence voltage and compares it to the setting PUFrequency. The frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to switchings and faults. The time integrator can operate either due to a definite delay time or to the special voltage dependent delay time. When the frequency has returned back to the setting of RestoreFreq, the RESTORE output is issued after the time delay TimeDlyRestore. The design of underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81) is schematically described in figure 282.
Section 9 1MRK505222-UUS C Frequency protection
554 Technical reference manual
Frequency Comparator f < PuFrequency
Voltage
PICKUP PICKUP
TRIP
Comparator V < IntBlockLevel
BLOCK
Comparator f > RestoreFreq
Block
OR
Time integrator
TimerOperation Mode Selector
TimeDlyOperate
TimeDlyReset
TimeDlyRestore RESTORE
100 ms
Pickup &
Trip Output Logic
en05000726_ansi.vsd
TRIP
BLKDMAGN
ANSI05000726 V1 EN
Figure 282: Simplified logic diagram for SAPTUF (81)
9.1.3 Function block
ANSI06000279-2-en.vsd
SAPTUF (81) V3P* BLOCK BLKTRIP BLKREST
TRIP PICKUP
RESTORE BLKDMAGN
FREQ
ANSI06000279 V2 EN
Figure 283: SAPTUF (81) function block
9.1.4 Input and output signals Table 285: SAPTUF (81) Input signals
Name Type Default Description V3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Voltage connection
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTRIP BOOLEAN 0 Blocking operate output.
BLKREST BOOLEAN 0 Blocking restore output.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 9 Frequency protection
555 Technical reference manual
Table 286: SAPTUF (81) Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Operate/trip signal for frequency.
PICKUP BOOLEAN Start/pick-up signal for frequency.
RESTORE BOOLEAN Restore signal for load restoring purposes.
BLKDMAGN BOOLEAN Blocking indication due to low magnitude.
FREQ REAL Measured frequency
9.1.5 Setting parameters Table 287: SAPTUF (81) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
Vbase 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Base voltage
PUFrequency 35.00 — 75.00 Hz 0.01 48.80 Frequency setting pickup value.
IntBlockLevel 0 — 100 %VB 1 50 Internal blocking level in % of VBase.
TimeDlyOperate 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Operate time delay in over/under-frequency mode.
TimeDlyReset 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for reset.
TimeDlyRestore 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Restore time delay.
RestoreFreq 45.00 — 65.00 Hz 0.01 50.10 Restore frequency if frequency is above frequency value.
TimerOperation Definite timer Volt based timer
— — Definite timer Setting for choosing timer mode.
VNom 50 — 150 %VB 1 100 Nominal voltage in % of VBase for voltage based timer.
VMin 50 — 150 %VB 1 90 Lower operation limit in % of VBase for voltage based timer.
Exponent 0.0 — 5.0 — 0.1 1.0 For calculation of the curve form for voltage based timer.
t_MaxTripDelay 0.010 — 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Maximum time operation limit for voltage based timer.
t_MinTripDelay 0.010 — 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Minimum time operation limit for voltage based timer.
Section 9 1MRK505222-UUS C Frequency protection
556 Technical reference manual
9.1.6 Technical data Table 288: SAPTUF (81) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Operate value, pickup function (35.00-75.00) Hz 2.0 mHz
Operate time, pickup function 100 ms typically —
Reset time, pickup function 100 ms typically —
Operate time, definite time function (0.000-60.000)s 0.5% 10 ms
Reset time, definite time function (0.000-60.000)s 0.5% 10 ms
Voltage dependent time delay
( )
_ _
_ Ex
po ne
nt V
VM in
t t
M ax
Tr ip
D el
ay t
M in
Tr ip
D el
ay t
M in
Tr ip
D el
ay VN
om VM
in —
=
— +
—
EQUATION1559 V1 EN (Equation 148)
V=Vmeasured
Settings: VNom=(50-150)% of Vbase VMin=(50-150)% of Vbase Exponent=0.0-5.0 t_MaxTripDelay=(0.000-60.000 )s t_MinTripDelay=(0.000-60.000) s
5% + 200 ms
9.2 Overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81)
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Overfrequency protection SAPTOF
f >
SYMBOL-O V1 EN
81
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 9 Frequency protection
557 Technical reference manual
9.2.1 Introduction Overfrequency protection function SAPTOF (81) is applicable in all situations, where reliable detection of high fundamental power system frequency is needed.
Overfrequency occurs because of sudden load drops or shunt faults in the power network. Close to the generating plant, generator governor problems can also cause over frequency.
SAPTOF (81) is used mainly for generation shedding and remedial action schemes. It is also used as a frequency stage initiating load restoring.
SAPTOF (81) is provided with an undervoltage blocking.
The operation is based on positive sequence voltage measurement and requires two phase- phase or three phase-neutral voltages to be connected. For information about how to connect analog inputs, refer to Application manual/IED application/Analog inputs/ Setting guidelines
9.2.2 Principle of operation Overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81) is used to detect high power system frequency. SAPTOF (81) has a settable definite time delay. If the frequency remains above the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding TRIP signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted TRIP due to uncertain frequency measurement at low voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available from the preprocessing function, that is, if the voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage in the preprocessing function, the function is blocked and no PICKUP or TRIP signal is issued.
9.2.2.1 Measurement principle
The fundamental frequency of the positive sequence voltage is measured continuously, and compared with the set value, PUFrequency. Overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81) is dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the voltage magnitude decreases below the setting IntBlockLevel, SAPTOF (81) is blocked, and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. All voltage settings are made in percent of the VBase, which should be set as a phase-phase voltage in kV. To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal, a hysteresis has been included.
9.2.2.2 Time delay
The time delay for Overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81) is a settable definite time delay, specified by the setting TimeDlyOperate.
Section 9 1MRK505222-UUS C Frequency protection
558 Technical reference manual
TRIP signal issuing requires that the overfrequency condition continues for at least the user set time delay, TimeDlyReset. If the PICKUP condition, with respect to the measured frequency ceases during this user set delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time, TimeDlyReset, the PICKUP output is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed. It is to be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the PICKUP condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area.
9.2.2.3 Blocking
It is possible to block overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81) partially or completely, by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:
BLOCK: blocks all outputs
BLKTRIP: blocks the TRIP output
If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlockLevel, both the PICKUP and the TRIP outputs, are blocked.
9.2.2.4 Design
The frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the positive sequence voltage and compares it to the setting PUFrequency. The frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to switchings and faults in the power system. The time integrator operates due to a definite delay time. The design of overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81) is schematically described in figure 284.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 9 Frequency protection
559 Technical reference manual
Voltage
PICKUP PICKUP
TRIP
Pickup &
Trip Output Logic
Time integrator
Definite Time Delay
TimeDlyOperate
TimeDlyReset
Comparator V < IntBlockLevel
BLOCK
en05000735_ansi.vsd
Frequency Comparator f > PuFrequency
TRIP
BLKDMAGN
BLOCK
OR BLKTRIP
ANSI05000735 V1 EN
Figure 284: Schematic design of overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81)
9.2.3 Function block
ANSI06000280-2-en.vsd
SAPTOF (81) V3P* BLOCK BLKTRIP
TRIP PICKUP
BLKDMAGN FREQ
ANSI06000280 V2 EN
Figure 285: SAPTOF (81) function block
9.2.4 Input and output signals Table 289: SAPTOF (81) Input signals
Name Type Default Description V3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Voltage connection
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTRIP BOOLEAN 0 Blocking operate output.
Section 9 1MRK505222-UUS C Frequency protection
560 Technical reference manual
Table 290: SAPTOF (81) Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Operate/trip signal for frequency.
PICKUP BOOLEAN Start/pick-up signal for frequency.
BLKDMAGN BOOLEAN Blocking indication due to low magnitude.
FREQ REAL Measured frequency
9.2.5 Setting parameters Table 291: SAPTOF (81) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
VBase 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Base voltage
PUFrequency 35.00 — 75.00 Hz 0.01 51.20 Frequency setting pickup value.
IntBlockLevel 0 — 100 %VB 1 50 Internal blocking level in % of VBase.
TimeDlyOperate 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Operate time delay in over/under-frequency mode.
TimeDlyReset 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for reset.
9.2.6 Technical data Table 292: SAPTOF (81) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Operate value, pickup function (35.00-75.00) Hz 2.0 mHz at
symmetrical three- phase voltage
Operate time, pickup function 100 ms typically at fset -0.5 Hz to fset +0.5 Hz —
Reset time, pickup function 100 ms typically —
Operate time, definite time function
(0.000-60.000)s 0.5% 10 ms
Reset time, definite time function (0.000-60.000)s 0.5% 10 ms
9.3 Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC (81)
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 9 Frequency protection
561 Technical reference manual
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC
df/dt ><
SYMBOL-N V1 EN
81
9.3.1 Introduction Rate-of-change frequency protection function (SAPFRC,81) gives an early indication of a main disturbance in the system. SAPFRC (81) can be used for generation shedding, load shedding and remedial action schemes. SAPFRC (81) can discriminate between positive or negative change of frequency.
SAPFRC (81) is provided with an undervoltage blocking. The operation is based on positive sequence voltage measurement and requires two phase-phase or three phase- neutral voltages to be connected. For information about how to connect analog inputs, refer to Application manual/IED application/Analog inputs/Setting guidelines.
9.3.2 Principle of operation Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC (81) is used to detect fast power system frequency changes, increase as well as, decrease at an early stage. SAPFRC (81) has a settable definite time delay. If the rate-of-change of frequency remains below the set value, for negative rate-of-change, for a time period equal to the chosen time delay, the TRIP signal is issued. If the rate-of-change of frequency remains above the set value, for positive rate-of-change, for a time period equal to the chosen time delay, the TRIP signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted TRIP due to uncertain frequency measurement at low voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available, that is if the voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage IntBlockLevel, the function is blocked and no PICKUP or TRIP signal is issued. If the frequency recovers, after a frequency decrease, a restore signal is issued.
9.3.2.1 Measurement principle
The rate-of-change of the fundamental frequency of the selected voltage is measured continuously, and compared with the set value, PUFreqGrad. Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC (81) is also dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the voltage magnitude decreases below the setting IntBlockLevel, SAPFRC (81) is blocked, and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. The sign of the setting PUFreqGrad, controls if SAPFRC (81) reacts on a positive or on a negative change in frequency. If SAPFRC (81) is used for decreasing frequency that is, the setting PUFreqGrad has been given a negative value, and a trip signal has been issued, then a 100 ms pulse is
Section 9 1MRK505222-UUS C Frequency protection
562 Technical reference manual
issued on the RESTORE output, when the frequency recovers to a value higher than the setting RestoreFreq. A positive setting of PUFreqGrad, sets SAPFRC (81) to PICKUP and TRIP for frequency increases.
To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal, a hysteresis has been included.
9.3.2.2 Time delay
Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC (81) has a settable definite time delay, tTrip. .
Trip signal issuing requires that the rate-of-change of frequency condition continues for at least the user set time delay, tTrip. If the PICKUP condition, with respect to the measured frequency ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time, tReset, the PICKUP output is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the PICKUP condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back into the hysteresis area.
The RESTORE output of SAPFRC (81) is set, after a time delay equal to the setting of tRestore, when the measured frequency has returned to the level corresponding to RestoreFreq, after an issue of the TRIP output signal. If tRestore is set to 0.000 s the restore functionality is disabled, and no output will be given. The restore functionality is only active for lowering frequency conditions and the restore sequence is disabled if a new negative frequency gradient is detected during the restore period, defined by the settings RestoreFreq and tRestore.
9.3.2.3 Blocking
Rate-of-change frequency protection (SAPFRC, 81) can be partially or totally blocked, by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:
BLOCK: blocks all outputs
BLKTRIP: blocks the TRIP output
BLKREST: blocks the RESTORE output
If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlockLevel, both the PICKUP and the TRIP outputs, are blocked.
9.3.2.4 Design
Rate-of-change frequency protection (SAPFRC, 81) measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the selected voltage and compares it to the setting
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 9 Frequency protection
563 Technical reference manual
PUFreqGrad. The frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to power system switchings and faults. The time integrator operates with a definite delay time. When the frequency has returned back to the setting of RestoreFreq, the RESTORE output is issued after the time delay tRestore, if the TRIP signal has earlier been issued. The sign of the setting PUFreqGrad is essential, and controls if the function is used for raising or lowering frequency conditions. The design of SAPFRC (81) is schematically described in figure 286.
en05000835_ansi.vsd
RESTORE
Voltage
PICKUP PICKUP
TRIP
Pickup &
Trip Output Logic
BLOCK
Frequency
100 ms
Comparator If
[PickupFreqGrad<0 AND
df/dt < PickupFreqGrad] OR
[PickupFreqGrad>0 AND
df/dt > PickupFreqGrad] Then
PICKUP
Comparator V < IntBlockLevel
Comparator f > RestoreFreq
OR
Time integrator
Definite Time Delay
TimeDlyOperate
TimeDlyReset
TimeDlyRestore
BLKDMAGN
Rate-of-Change of Frequency
BLOCK
BLKTRIP
BLKRESET
ANSI05000835 V1 EN
Figure 286: Schematic design of Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC (81)
Section 9 1MRK505222-UUS C Frequency protection
564 Technical reference manual
9.3.3 Function block
ANSI06000281-2-en.vsd
SAPFRC (81) V3P* BLOCK BLKTRIP BLKREST
TRIP PICKUP
RESTORE BLKDMAGN
ANSI06000281 V2 EN
Figure 287: SAPFRC (81) function block
9.3.4 Input and output signals Table 293: SAPFRC (81) Input signals
Name Type Default Description V3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Group signal for voltage input
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTRIP BOOLEAN 0 Blocking operate output.
BLKREST BOOLEAN 0 Blocking restore output.
Table 294: SAPFRC (81) Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Operate/trip signal for frequencyGradient
PICKUP BOOLEAN Start/pick-up signal for frequencyGradient
RESTORE BOOLEAN Restore signal for load restoring purposes.
BLKDMAGN BOOLEAN Blocking indication due to low magnitude.
9.3.5 Setting parameters Table 295: SAPFRC (81) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
VBase 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Base setting for the phase-phase voltage in kV
PUFreqGrad -10.00 — 10.00 Hz/s 0.01 0.50 Frequency gradient start value. Sign defines direction.
IntBlockLevel 0 — 100 %VB 1 50 Internal blocking level in % of VBase.
tTrip 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Operate time delay in pos./neg. frequency gradient mode.
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 9 Frequency protection
565 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description RestoreFreq 45.00 — 65.00 Hz 0.01 49.90 Restore frequency if frequency is above
frequency value (Hz)
tRestore 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Restore time delay.
tReset 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for reset.
9.3.6 Technical data Table 296: SAPFRC (81) Technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Operate value, pickup function (-10.00-10.00) Hz/s 10.0 mHz/s
Operate value, internal blocking level
(0-100)% of VBase 0.5% of Vn
Operate time, pickup function 100 ms typically —
Section 9 1MRK505222-UUS C Frequency protection
566 Technical reference manual
Section 10 Multipurpose protection
About this chapter This chapter describes Multipurpose protection and includes the General current and voltage function. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are included for each function.
10.1 General current and voltage protection CVGAPC
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
General current and voltage protection CVGAPC — —
10.1.1 Introduction The General current and voltage protection (CVGAPC) can be utilized as a negative sequence current protection detecting unsymmetrical conditions such as open phase or unsymmetrical faults.
CVGAPC can also be used to improve phase selection for high resistive ground faults, outside the distance protection reach, for the transmission line. Three functions are used, which measures the neutral current and each of the three phase voltages. This will give an independence from load currents and this phase selection will be used in conjunction with the detection of the ground fault from the directional ground fault protection function.
10.1.2 Principle of operation
10.1.2.1 Measured quantities within CVGAPC
General current and voltage protection (CVGAPC) function is always connected to three- phase current and three-phase voltage input in the configuration tool, but it will always measure only one current and one voltage quantity selected by the end user in the setting tool.
The user can select to measure one of the current quantities shown in table 297.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 10 Multipurpose protection
567 Technical reference manual
Table 297: Current selection for CVGAPC function
Set value for the parameter CurrentInput
Comment
1 PhaseA CVGAPC function will measure the phase A current phasor
2 PhaseB CVGAPC function will measure the phase B current phasor
3 PhaseC CVGAPC function will measure the phase C current phasor
4 PosSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated positive sequence current phasor
5 NegSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated negative sequence current phasor
6 3ZeroSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated zero sequence current phasor multiplied by factor 3
7 MaxPh CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude
8 MinPh CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude
9 UnbalancePh CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance current, which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the current phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude and current phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0 all the time
10 PhaseA-PhaseB CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally calculated as the vector difference between the phase A current phasor and phase B current phasor (IA-IB)
11 PhaseB-PhaseC CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally calculated as the vector difference between the phase B current phasor and phase C current phasor (IB-IC)
12 PhaseC-PhaseA CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally calculated as the vector difference between the phase C current phasor and phase L1 current phasor ( IC-IA)
13 MaxPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the maximum magnitude
14 MinPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the minimum magnitude
15 UnbalancePh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance current, which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the ph- ph current phasor with maximum magnitude and ph-ph current phasor with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0 all the time
The user can select to measure one of the voltage quantities shown in table 298:
Section 10 1MRK505222-UUS C Multipurpose protection
568 Technical reference manual
Table 298: Voltage selection for CVGAPC function
Set value for the parameter VoltageInput
Comment
1 PhaseA CVGAPC function will measure the phase A voltage phasor
2 PhaseB CVGAPC function will measure the phase B voltage phasor
3 PhaseC CVGAPC function will measure the phase C voltage phasor
4 PosSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated positive sequence voltage phasor
5 -NegSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated negative sequence voltage phasor. This voltage phasor will be intentionally rotated for 180 in order to enable easier settings for the directional feature when used.
6 -3ZeroSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated zero sequence voltage phasor multiplied by factor 3. This voltage phasor will be intentionally rotated for 180 in order to enable easier settings for the directional feature when used.
7 MaxPh CVGAPC function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude
8 MinPh CVGAPC function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude
9 UnbalancePh CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance voltage, which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the voltage phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude and voltage phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0 all the time
10 PhaseA-PhaseB CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally calculated as the vector difference between the phase A voltage phasor and phase B voltage phasor (VA-VB)
11 PhaseB-PhaseC CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally calculated as the vector difference between the phase B voltage phasor and phase C voltage phasor (VB-VC)
12 PhaseC-PhaseA CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally calculated as the vector difference between the phase C voltage phasor and phase A voltage phasor ( VC-VA)
13 MaxPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the maximum magnitude
14 MinPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the minimum magnitude
15 UnbalancePh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance voltage, which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the ph- ph voltage phasor with maximum magnitude and ph-ph voltage phasor with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0 all the time
It is important to notice that the voltage selection from table 298 is always applicable regardless the actual external VT connections. The three-phase VT inputs can be connected to IED as either three phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB & VC or three phase- to-phase voltages VAB, VBC & VCA). This information about actual VT connection is
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 10 Multipurpose protection
569 Technical reference manual
entered as a setting parameter for the pre-processing block, which will then take automatic care about it.
The user can select one of the current quantities shown in table 299 for built-in current restraint feature:
Table 299: Restraint current selection for CVGAPC function
Set value for the parameter RestrCurr
Comment
1 PosSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated positive sequence current phasor
2 NegSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated negative sequence current phasor
3 3ZeroSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated zero sequence current phasor multiplied by factor 3
4 MaxPh CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude
10.1.2.2 Base quantities for CVGAPC function
The parameter settings for the base quantities, which represent the base (100%) for pickup levels of all measuring stages, shall be entered as setting parameters for every CVGAPC function.
Base current shall be entered as:
1. rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes, when the measured Current Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 297.
2. rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes multiplied by 3 (1.732 Iphase), when the measured Current Quantity is selected from 10 to 15, as shown in table 297.
Base voltage shall be entered as:
1. rated phase-to-ground voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 298.
2. rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 10 to 15, as shown in table 298.
10.1.2.3 Built-in overcurrent protection steps
Two overcurrent protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and therefore only one will be explained here.
Section 10 1MRK505222-UUS C Multipurpose protection
570 Technical reference manual
Overcurrent step simply compares the magnitude of the measured current quantity (see table 297) with the set pickup level. Non-directional overcurrent step will pickup if the magnitude of the measured current quantity is bigger than this set level. Reset ratio is settable, with default value of 0.96. However depending on other enabled built-in features this overcurrent pickup might not cause the overcurrent step pickup signal. Pickup signal will only come if all of the enabled built-in features in the overcurrent step are fulfilled at the same time.
Second harmonic feature The overcurrent protection step can be restrained by a second harmonic component in the measured current quantity (see table 297). However it shall be noted that this feature is not applicable when one of the following measured currents is selected:
PosSeq (positive sequence current) NegSeq (negative sequence current) UnbalancePh (unbalance phase current) UnbalancePh-Ph (unbalance ph-ph current)
This feature will simple prevent overcurrent step pickup if the second-to-first harmonic ratio in the measured current exceeds the set level.
Directional feature The overcurrent protection step operation can be can be made dependent on the relevant phase angle between measured current phasor (see table 297) and measured voltage phasor (see table 298). In protection terminology it means that the General currrent and voltage protection (CVGAPC) function can be made directional by enabling this built-in feature. In that case overcurrent protection step will only operate if the current flow is in accordance with the set direction (Forward, which means towards the protected object, or Reverse, which means from the protected object). For this feature it is of the outmost importance to understand that the measured voltage phasor (see table 298) and measured current phasor (see table 297) will be used for directional decision. Therefore it is the sole responsibility of the end user to select the appropriate current and voltage signals in order to get a proper directional decision. CVGAPC function will NOT do this automatically. It will just simply use the current and voltage phasors selected by the end user to check for the directional criteria.
Table 300 gives an overview of the typical choices (but not the only possible ones) for these two quantities for traditional directional relays.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 10 Multipurpose protection
571 Technical reference manual
Table 300: Typical current and voltage choices for directional feature
Set value for the parameter CurrentInput
Set value for the parameter VoltageInput
Comment
PosSeq PosSeq Directional positive sequence overcurrent function is obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from -45 to -90 depending on the power
NegSeq -NegSeq Directional negative sequence overcurrent function is obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from -45 to -90 depending on the power system voltage level (X/R ratio)
3ZeroSeq -3ZeroSeq Directional zero sequence overcurrent function is obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from 0 to -90 depending on the power system grounding (that is, solidly grounding, grounding via resistor)
Phase1 Phase2-Phase3 Directional overcurrent function for the first phase is obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30 or +45
Phase2 Phase3-Phase1 Directional overcurrent function for the second phase is obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30 or +45
Phase3 Phase1-Phase2 Directional overcurrent function for the third phase is obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30 or +45
Unbalance current or voltage measurement shall not be used when the directional feature is enabled.
Two types of directional measurement principles are available, I & V and IcosPhi&V. The first principle, referred to as «I & V» in the parameter setting tool, checks that:
the magnitude of the measured current is bigger than the set pick-up level the phasor of the measured current is within the operating region (defined by the
relay operate angle, ROADir parameter setting; see figure 288).
Section 10 1MRK505222-UUS C Multipurpose protection
572 Technical reference manual
V=-3V0
Ipickup
Operate region
I=3Io
mta line
RCADir
ROADir
en05000252_anis.vsd IEC05000252-ANIS V1 EN
Figure 288: I & V directional operating principle for CVGAPC function
where:
RCADir is -75
ROADir is 50
The second principle, referred to as «IcosPhi&V» in the parameter setting tool, checks that:
that the product Icos() is bigger than the set pick-up level, where is angle between the current phasor and the mta line
that the phasor of the measured current is within the operating region (defined by the Icos() straight line and the relay operate angle, ROADir parameter setting; see figure 288).
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 10 Multipurpose protection
573 Technical reference manual
V=-3V0
Operate region
RCADir
ROADirIpickup I=3Io
mta line
F
en05000253_ansi.vsd ANSI05000253 V1 EN
Figure 289: CVGAPC, IcosPhi&V directional operating principle
where:
RCADir is -75
ROADir is 50
Note that it is possible to decide by a parameter setting how the directional feature shall behave when the magnitude of the measured voltage phasor falls below the pre- set value. User can select one of the following three options:
Non-directional (operation allowed for low magnitude of the reference voltage) Block (operation prevented for low magnitude of the reference voltage) Memory (memory voltage shall be used to determine direction of the current)
It shall also be noted that the memory duration is limited in the algorithm to 100 ms. After that time the current direction will be locked to the one determined during memory time and it will re-set only if the current fails below set pickup level or voltage goes above set voltage memory limit.
Voltage restraint/control feature The overcurrent protection step operation can be can be made dependent of a measured voltage quantity (see table 298). Practically then the pickup level of the overcurrent step is not constant but instead decreases with the decrease in the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity. Two different types of dependencies are available:
Voltage restraint overcurrent (when setting parameter VDepMode_OC1=Slope)
Section 10 1MRK505222-UUS C Multipurpose protection
574 Technical reference manual
Selected Voltage Magnitude
OC1 Stage Pickup Level
PickupCurr_OC1
VDepFact_OC1 * PickupCurr_OC1
VHighLimit_OC1VLowLimit_OC1
en05000324_ansi.vsd ANSI05000324 V1 EN
Figure 290: Example for OC1 step current pickup level variation as function of measured voltage magnitude in Slope mode of operation
Voltage controlled overcurrent (when setting parameter VDepMode_OC1=Step)
Selected Voltage Magnitude
OC1 Stage Pickup Level
PickupCurr_OC1
VDepFact_OC1 * PickupCurr_OC1
VHighLimit_OC1
en05000323_ansi.vsd ANSI05000323 V1 EN
Figure 291: Example for OC1 step current pickup level variation as function of measured voltage magnitude in Step mode of operation
This feature will simply change the set overcurrent pickup level in accordance with magnitude variations of the measured voltage. It shall be noted that this feature will as well affect the pickup current value for calculation of operate times for IDMT curves (overcurrent with IDMT curve will operate faster during low voltage conditions).
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 10 Multipurpose protection
575 Technical reference manual
Current restraint feature The overcurrent protection step operation can be made dependent of a restraining current quantity (see table 299). Practically then the pickup level of the overcurrent step is not constant but instead increases with the increase in the magnitude of the restraining current.
IsetHigh
IsetLow
IMeasured
Restraint
atan(RestrCoeff)
en05000255.vsd
Operate area
I>RestrC oeff*I
restra in
IEC05000255 V1 EN
Figure 292: Current pickup variation with restraint current magnitude
This feature will simply prevent overcurrent step to pickup if the magnitude of the measured current quantity is smaller than the set percentage of the restrain current magnitude. However this feature will not affect the pickup current value for calculation of operate times for IDMT curves. This means that the IDMT curve operate time will not be influenced by the restrain current magnitude.
When set, the pickup signal will start definite time delay or inverse (IDMT) time delay in accordance with the end user setting. If the pickup signal has value one for longer time than the set time delay, the overcurrent step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the pickup and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the end user setting.
10.1.2.4 Built-in undercurrent protection steps
Two undercurrent protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and therefore only one will be explained here. Undercurrent step simply compares the magnitude of the measured current quantity (see table 297) with the set pickup level. The undercurrent step will pickup and set its pickup signal to one if the magnitude of the measured current quantity is smaller than this set level. The pickup signal will start definite time delay with set time delay. If the pickup signal has value one for longer
Section 10 1MRK505222-UUS C Multipurpose protection
576 Technical reference manual
time than the set time delay the undercurrent step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the pickup and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the setting.
10.1.2.5 Built-in overvoltage protection steps
Two overvoltage protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and therefore only one will be explained here.
Overvoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity (see table 298) with the set pickup level. The overvoltage step will pickup if the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity is bigger than this set level. Reset ratio is settable, with default value of 0.99.
The pickup signal will start definite time delay or inverse (IDMT) time delay in accordance with the end user setting. If the pickup signal has value one for longer time than the set time delay, the overvoltage step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the pickup and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the end user setting.
10.1.2.6 Built-in undervoltage protection steps
Two undervoltage protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and therefore only one will be explained here.
Undervoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity (see table 298) with the set pickup level. The undervoltage step will pickup if the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity is smaller than this set level. Reset ratio is settable, with default value of 1.01.
The pickup signal will start definite time delay or inverse (IDMT) time delay in accordance with the end user setting. If the pickup signal has value one for longer time than the set time delay, the undervoltage step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the pickup and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the end user setting.
10.1.2.7 Logic diagram
The simplified internal logics, for CVGAPC function are shown in the following figures.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 10 Multipurpose protection
577 Technical reference manual
ADM
A /D
c on
ve rs
io n
sc al
in g
w ith
C T
ra tio
A/ D
c on
ve rs
io n
sc al
in g
w ith
C T
ra tio
P ha
so r c
al cu
la tio
n of
in
di vi
du al
c ur
re nt
s P
ha so
r c al
cu la
tio n
of
in di
vi du
al v
ol ta
ge s
CVGAPC function
IED
P ha
so rs
&
sa m
pl es
P ha
so rs
&
sa m
pl es
Current and voltage selection settings
Selection of which current and voltage shall be given to
the built-in protection elements
Restraint current selection
Selection of restraint current
Selected current
Selected voltage
Selected restraint current
52
ANSI05000169_2_en.vsd
ANSI05000169 V2 EN
Figure 293: Treatment of measured currents within IED for CVGAPC function
Figure 293 shows how internal treatment of measured currents is done for multipurpose protection function
The following currents and voltages are inputs to the multipurpose protection function. They must all be expressed in true power system (primary) Amperes and kilovolts.
1. Instantaneous values (samples) of currents & voltages from one three-phase current and one three-phase voltage input.
2. Fundamental frequency phasors from one three-phase current and one three-phase voltage input calculated by the pre-processing modules.
3. Sequence currents & voltages from one three-phase current and one three-phase voltage input calculated by the pre-processing modules.
The multipurpose protection function:
Section 10 1MRK505222-UUS C Multipurpose protection
578 Technical reference manual
1. Selects one current from the three-phase input system (see table 297) for internally measured current.
2. Selects one voltage from the three-phase input system (see table 298) for internally measured voltage.
3. Selects one current from the three-phase input system (see table 299) for internally measured restraint current.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 10 Multipurpose protection
579 Technical reference manual
UC2
UC1
CURRENT
TRUC1
PU_UC2
TRUC2
PU_OC1
BLK2ND
PU_OC2 TROC2
OV1 PU_OV1
TROV1
OV2 PU_OV2
TROV2
UV1 PU_UV1
TRUV1
UV2 PU_UV2
TRUV2
Selected current
Selected restraint current
en05000170_ansi.vsd
Selected voltage
VDIRLOW
TROC1OC1
2nd Harmonic restraint
Current restraint Directionality
Voltage control / restraint
OC2
2nd Harmonic restraint
Current restraint Directionality
Voltage control / restraint
DIROC2
DIROC1
2nd Harmonic restraint
2nd Harmonic restraint
VOLTAGE
OR
OR
Section 10 1MRK505222-UUS C Multipurpose protection
580 Technical reference manual
ANSI05000170 V1 EN
Figure 294: CVGAPC function main logic diagram for built-in protection elements
Logic in figure 294 can be summarized as follows:
1. The selected currents and voltage are given to built-in protection elements. Each protection element and step makes independent decision about status of its PICKUP and TRIP output signals.
2. More detailed internal logic for every protection element is given in the following four figures
3. Common PICKUP and TRIP signals from all built-in protection elements & steps (internal OR logic) are available from multipurpose function as well.
Second harmonic check
Selected voltage
XPickupCurr_OC1
a
b a>b
Voltage control or restraint feature
OC1=On BLKOC1
Directionality check
Current Restraint Feature
Imeasured > k Irestraint
DIR_OK
Inverse
0-DEF DEF time selected
Inverse time
selected
OR
Enable second
harmonic
en05000831_ansi.vsd
Selected current
PU_OC1
TROC1AND BLKTROC1
Selected restrain current
AND
NOT
0
ANSI05000831 V1 EN
Figure 295: Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first overcurrent step that is, OC1 (step OC2 has the same internal logic)
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 10 Multipurpose protection
581 Technical reference manual
a
b b>a
Selected current
PickupCurr_UC1
Operation_UC1=On
Bin input: BLKUC1
PU_UC1
en05000750_ansi.vsd
TRUC1
Bin input: BLKUC1TR
0-DEF AND AND 0
ANSI05000750 V1 EN
Figure 296: Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first undercurrent step that is, UC1 (step UC2 has the same internal logic)
a
b a>b
Selected voltage
PickupVolt_OV1
Operation_OV1=On
BLKOV1 Inverse time
selected
en05000751_ansi.vsd
Inverse
0-DEF DEF time selected
PU_OV1
TROV1AND BLKTROV1
AND
OR0
ANSI05000751 V1 EN
Figure 297: Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first overvoltage step OV1 (step OV2 has the same internal logic)
Section 10 1MRK505222-UUS C Multipurpose protection
582 Technical reference manual
AND
a
b b>a
Selected voltage
PickupVolt_UV1
Operation_UV1=On
BLKUV1 Inverse time
selected
en05000752_ansi.vsd
Inverse
0-DEF DEF time selected
OR
PU_UV1
TRUV1AND BLKTRUV1
0
ANSI05000752 V1 EN
Figure 298: Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first undervoltage step UV1 (step UV2 has the same internal logic)
10.1.3 Function block
ANSI05000372-2-en.vsd
CVGAPC I3P* V3P* BLOCK BLKOC1 BLKOC1TR ENMLTOC1 BLKOC2 BLKOC2TR ENMLTOC2 BLKUC1 BLKUC1TR BLKUC2 BLKUC2TR BLKOV1 BLKOV1TR BLKOV2 BLKOV2TR BLKUV1 BLKUV1TR BLKUV2 BLKUV2TR
TRIP TROC1 TROC2 TRUC1 TRUC2 TROV1 TROV2 TRUV1 TRUV2
PICKUP PU_OC1 PU_OC2 PU_UC1 PU_UC2 PU_OV1 PU_OV2 PU_UV1 PU_UV2 BLK2ND DIROC1 DIROC2
VDIRLOW CURRENT
ICOSFI VOLTAGE VIANGLE
ANSI05000372 V2 EN
Figure 299: CVGAPC function block
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 10 Multipurpose protection
583 Technical reference manual
10.1.4 Input and output signals Table 301: CVGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Group signal for current input
V3P GROUP SIGNAL
— Group signal for voltage input
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKOC1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of over current function OC1
BLKOC1TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for over current function OC1
ENMLTOC1 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for OC1
BLKOC2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of over current function OC2
BLKOC2TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for over current function OC2
ENMLTOC2 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for OC2
BLKUC1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of under current function UC1
BLKUC1TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for under current function UC1
BLKUC2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of under current function UC2
BLKUC2TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for under current function UC2
BLKOV1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of over voltage function OV1
BLKOV1TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for over voltage function OV1
BLKOV2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of over voltage function OV2
BLKOV2TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for over voltage function OV2
BLKUV1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of under voltage function UV1
BLKUV1TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for under voltage function UV1
BLKUV2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of under voltage function UV2
BLKUV2TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for under voltage function UV2
Table 302: CVGAPC Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
TROC1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from overcurrent function OC1
TROC2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from overcurrent function OC2
TRUC1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from undercurrent function UC1
TRUC2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from undercurrent function UC2
TROV1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from overvoltage function OV1
TROV2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from overvoltage function OV2
Table continues on next page
Section 10 1MRK505222-UUS C Multipurpose protection
584 Technical reference manual
Name Type Description TRUV1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from undervoltage function UV1
TRUV2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from undervoltage function UV2
PICKUP BOOLEAN General pickup signal
PU_OC1 BOOLEAN Pickup signal from overcurrent function OC1
PU_OC2 BOOLEAN Pickup signal from overcurrent function OC2
PU_UC1 BOOLEAN Pickup signal from undercurrent function UC1
PU_UC2 BOOLEAN Pickup signal from undercurrent function UC2
PU_OV1 BOOLEAN Pickup signal from overvoltage function OV1
PU_OV2 BOOLEAN Pickup signal from overvoltage function OV2
PU_UV1 BOOLEAN Pickup signal from undervoltage function UV1
PU_UV2 BOOLEAN Pickup signal from undervoltage function UV2
BLK2ND BOOLEAN Second harmonic block signal
DIROC1 INTEGER Directional mode of OC1 (nondir, forward,reverse)
DIROC2 INTEGER Directional mode of OC2 (nondir, forward,reverse)
VDIRLOW BOOLEAN Low voltage for directional polarization
CURRENT REAL Measured current value
ICOSFI REAL Measured current multiplied with cos (Phi)
VOLTAGE REAL Measured voltage value
VIANGLE REAL Angle between voltage and current
10.1.5 Setting parameters Table 303: CVGAPC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
CurrentInput Phase A Phase B Phase C PosSeq NegSeq 3*ZeroSeq MaxPh MinPh UnbalancePh Phase AB Phase BC Phase CA MaxPh-Ph MinPh-Ph UnbalancePh-Ph
— — MaxPh Select current signal which will be measured inside function
IBase 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Base Current
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 10 Multipurpose protection
585 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description VoltageInput Phase A
Phase B Phase C PosSeq -NegSeq -3*ZeroSeq MaxPh MinPh UnbalancePh Phase AB Phase BC Phase CA MaxPh-Ph MinPh-Ph UnbalancePh-Ph
— — MaxPh Select voltage signal which will be measured inside function
VBase 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Base Voltage
OperHarmRestr Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Disable/Enable operation of 2nd harmonic restrain
l_2nd/l_fund 10.0 — 50.0 % 1.0 20.0 Ratio of second to fundamental current harmonic in %
EnRestrainCurr Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Disable/Enable current restrain function
RestrCurrInput PosSeq NegSeq 3*ZeroSeq Max
— — PosSeq Select current signal which will be used for current restrain
RestrCurrCoeff 0.00 — 5.00 — 0.01 0.00 Restraining current coefficient
RCADir -180 — 180 Deg 1 -75 Relay Characteristic Angle
ROADir 1 — 90 Deg 1 75 Relay Operate Angle
LowVolt_VM 0.0 — 5.0 %VB 0.1 0.5 Below this level in % of Vbase setting ActLowVolt takes over
Operation_OC1 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Disable/Enable Operation of OC1
PickupCurr_OC1 2.0 — 5000.0 %IB 1.0 120.0 Pickup current for OC1 in % of Ibase
Table continues on next page
Section 10 1MRK505222-UUS C Multipurpose protection
586 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description CurveType_OC1 ANSI Ext. inv.
ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Programmable RI type RD type
— — ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for OC1
tDef_OC1 0.00 — 6000.00 s 0.01 0.50 Independent (definitive) time delay of OC1
TD_OC1 0.05 — 999.00 — 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for OC1
IMin1 1 — 10000 %IB 1 100 Minimum operate current for step1in% of IBase
tMin_OC1 0.00 — 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves for OC1
VCntrlMode_OC1 Voltage control Input control Volt/Input control Disabled
— — Disabled Control mode for voltage controlled OC1 function
VDepMode_OC1 Step Slope
— — Step Voltage dependent mode OC1 (step, slope)
VDepFact_OC1 0.02 — 5.00 — 0.01 1.00 Multiplying factor for current pickup when OC1 is voltage dependent
VLowLimit_OC1 1.0 — 200.0 %VB 0.1 50.0 Voltage low limit setting OC1 in % of Vbase
VHighLimit_OC1 1.0 — 200.0 %VB 0.1 100.0 Voltage high limit setting OC1 in % of Vbase
HarmRestr_OC1 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Enable block of OC1 by 2nd harmonic restrain
DirMode_OC1 Non-directional Forward Reverse
— — Non-directional Directional mode of OC1 (nondir, forward,reverse)
DirPrinc_OC1 I&V IcosPhi&U
— — I&V Measuring on IandV or IcosPhiandV for OC1
ActLowVolt1_VM Non-directional Block Memory
— — Non-directional Low voltage level action for Dir_OC1 (Nodir, Blk, Mem)
Operation_OC2 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Disable/Enable Operation od OC2
PickupCurr_OC2 2.0 — 5000.0 %IB 1.0 120.0 Pickup current for OC2 in % of Ibase
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 10 Multipurpose protection
587 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description CurveType_OC2 ANSI Ext. inv.
ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Programmable RI type RD type
— — ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for OC2
tDef_OC2 0.00 — 6000.00 s 0.01 0.50 Independent (definitive) time delay of OC2
TD_OC2 0.05 — 999.00 — 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for OC2
IMin2 1 — 10000 %IB 1 50 Minimum operate current for step2 in % of IBase
tMin_OC2 0.00 — 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves for OC2
VCntrlMode_OC2 Voltage control Input control Volt/Input control Disabled
— — Disabled Control mode for voltage controlled OC2 function
VDepMode_OC2 Step Slope
— — Step Voltage dependent mode OC2 (step, slope)
VDepFact_OC2 0.02 — 5.00 — 0.01 1.00 Multiplying factor for current pickup when OC2 is voltage dependent
VLowLimit_OC2 1.0 — 200.0 %VB 0.1 50.0 Voltage low limit setting OC2 in % of Vbase
VHighLimit_OC2 1.0 — 200.0 %VB 0.1 100.0 Voltage high limit setting OC2 in % of Vbase
HarmRestr_OC2 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Enable block of OC2 by 2nd harmonic restrain
DirMode_OC2 Non-directional Forward Reverse
— — Non-directional Directional mode of OC2 (nondir, forward,reverse)
DirPrinc_OC2 I&V IcosPhi&U
— — I&V Measuring on IandV or IcosPhiandV for OC2
ActLowVolt2_VM Non-directional Block Memory
— — Non-directional Low voltage level action for Dir_OC2 (Nodir, Blk, Mem)
Operation_UC1 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Disable/Enable operation of UC1
EnBlkLowI_UC1 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Enable internal low current level blocking for UC1
Table continues on next page
Section 10 1MRK505222-UUS C Multipurpose protection
588 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description BlkLowCurr_UC1 0 — 150 %IB 1 20 Internal low current blocking level for UC1 in
% of Ibase
PickupCurr_UC1 2.0 — 150.0 %IB 1.0 70.0 Operate undercurrent level for UC1 in % of Ibase
tDef_UC1 0.00 — 6000.00 s 0.01 0.50 Independent (definitive) time delay of UC1
tResetDef_UC1 0.00 — 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve UC1
HarmRestr_UC1 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Enable block of UC1 by 2nd harmonic restrain
Operation_UC2 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Disable/Enable operation of UC2
EnBlkLowI_UC2 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Enable internal low current level blocking for UC2
BlkLowCurr_UC2 0 — 150 %IB 1 20 Internal low current blocking level for UC2 in % of Ibase
PickupCurr_UC2 2.0 — 150.0 %IB 1.0 70.0 Operate undercurrent level for UC2 in % of Ibase
tDef_UC2 0.00 — 6000.00 s 0.01 0.50 Independent (definitive) time delay of UC2
HarmRestr_UC2 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Enable block of UC2 by 2nd harmonic restrain
Operation_OV1 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Disable/Enable operation of OV1
PickupVolt_OV1 2.0 — 200.0 %VB 0.1 150.0 Operate voltage level for OV1 in % of Vbase
CurveType_OV1 Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog. inv. curve
— — Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for OV1
tDef_OV1 0.00 — 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Operate time delay in sec for definite time use of OV1
tMin_OV1 0.00 — 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for Inverse-Time curves for OV1
TD_OV1 0.05 — 999.00 — 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for OV1
Operation_OV2 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Disable/Enable operation of OV2
PickupVolt_OV2 2.0 — 200.0 %VB 0.1 150.0 Pickup voltage for OV2 in % of Vbase
CurveType_OV2 Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog. inv. curve
— — Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for OV2
tDef_OV2 0.00 — 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Operate time delay in sec for definite time use of OV2
tMin_OV2 0.00 — 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for Inverse-Time curves for OV2
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 10 Multipurpose protection
589 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description TD_OV2 0.05 — 999.00 — 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay
for OV2
Operation_UV1 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Disable/Enable operation of UV1
PickupVolt_UV1 2.0 — 150.0 %VB 0.1 50.0 Operate undervoltage level for UV1 in % of Vbase
CurveType_UV1 Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Prog. inv. curve
— — Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for UV1
tDef_UV1 0.00 — 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Operate time delay in sec for definite time use of UV1
tMin_UV1 0.00 — 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for Inverse-Time curves for UV1
TD_UV1 0.05 — 999.00 — 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for UV1
EnBlkLowV_UV1 Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Enable internal low voltage level blocking for UV1
BlkLowVolt_UV1 0.0 — 5.0 %VB 0.1 0.5 Internal low voltage blocking level for UV1 in % of Vbase
Operation_UV2 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Disable/Enable operation of UV2
PickupVolt_UV2 2.0 — 150.0 %VB 0.1 50.0 Pickup undervoltage for UV2 in % of Vbase
CurveType_UV2 Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Prog. inv. curve
— — Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for UV2
tDef_UV2 0.00 — 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Operate time delay in sec for definite time use of UV2
tMin_UV2 0.00 — 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for Inverse-Time curves for UV2
TD_UV2 0.05 — 999.00 — 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for UV2
EnBlkLowV_UV2 Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Enable internal low voltage level blocking for UV2
BlkLowVolt_UV2 0.0 — 5.0 %VB 0.1 0.5 Internal low voltage blocking level for UV2 in % of Vbase
Section 10 1MRK505222-UUS C Multipurpose protection
590 Technical reference manual
Table 304: CVGAPC Group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description MultPU_OC1 1.0 — 10.0 — 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value
for OC1
ResCrvType_OC1 Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset
— — Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for OC1
tResetDef_OC1 0.00 — 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve OC1
P_OC1 0.001 — 10.000 — 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for OC1
A_OC1 0.000 — 999.000 — 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for OC1
B_OC1 0.000 — 99.000 — 0.001 0.000 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for OC1
C_OC1 0.000 — 1.000 — 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for OC1
PR_OC1 0.005 — 3.000 — 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for OC1
TR_OC1 0.005 — 600.000 — 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for OC1
CR_OC1 0.1 — 10.0 — 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for OC1
MultPU_OC2 1.0 — 10.0 — 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for OC2
ResCrvType_OC2 Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset
— — Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for OC2
tResetDef_OC2 0.00 — 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve OC2
P_OC2 0.001 — 10.000 — 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for OC2
A_OC2 0.000 — 999.000 — 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for OC2
B_OC2 0.000 — 99.000 — 0.001 0.000 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for OC2
C_OC2 0.000 — 1.000 — 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for OC2
PR_OC2 0.005 — 3.000 — 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for OC2
TR_OC2 0.005 — 600.000 — 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for OC2
CR_OC2 0.1 — 10.0 — 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for OC2
tResetDef_UC2 0.00 — 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve UC2
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 10 Multipurpose protection
591 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description ResCrvType_OV1 Instantaneous
Frozen timer Linearly decreased
— — Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for OV1
tResetDef_OV1 0.00 — 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for definite time use of OV1
tResetIDMT_OV1 0.00 — 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for Inverse-Time curves for OV1
A_OV1 0.005 — 999.000 — 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for OV1
B_OV1 0.500 — 99.000 — 0.001 1.000 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for OV1
C_OV1 0.000 — 1.000 — 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for OV1
D_OV1 0.000 — 10.000 — 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for OV1
P_OV1 0.001 — 10.000 — 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for OV1
ResCrvType_OV2 Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased
— — Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for OV2
tResetDef_OV2 0.00 — 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for definite time use of OV2
tResetIDMT_OV2 0.00 — 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for Inverse-Time curves for OV2
A_OV2 0.005 — 999.000 — 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for OV2
B_OV2 0.500 — 99.000 — 0.001 1.000 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for OV2
C_OV2 0.000 — 1.000 — 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for OV2
D_OV2 0.000 — 10.000 — 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for OV2
P_OV2 0.001 — 10.000 — 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for OV2
ResCrvType_UV1 Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased
— — Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for UV1
tResetDef_UV1 0.00 — 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for definite time use of UV1
tResetIDMT_UV1 0.00 — 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for Inverse-Time curves for UV1
A_UV1 0.005 — 999.000 — 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for UV1
B_UV1 0.500 — 99.000 — 0.001 1.000 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for UV1
Table continues on next page
Section 10 1MRK505222-UUS C Multipurpose protection
592 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description C_UV1 0.000 — 1.000 — 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve for UV1
D_UV1 0.000 — 10.000 — 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for UV1
P_UV1 0.001 — 10.000 — 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for UV1
ResCrvType_UV2 Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased
— — Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for UV2
tResetDef_UV2 0.00 — 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for definite time use of UV2
tResetIDMT_UV2 0.00 — 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for Inverse-Time curves for UV2
A_UV2 0.005 — 999.000 — 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for UV2
B_UV2 0.500 — 99.000 — 0.001 1.000 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for UV2
C_UV2 0.000 — 1.000 — 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for UV2
D_UV2 0.000 — 10.000 — 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for UV2
P_UV2 0.001 — 10.000 — 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for UV2
10.1.6 Technical data Table 305: CVGAPC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Measuring current input Phase A, Phase B, Phase C, PosSeq,
NegSeq, 3*ZeroSeq, MaxPh, MinPh, UnbalancePh, Phase A-Phase B, Phase B-Phase C, Phase C-Phase A, MaxPh- Ph, MinPh-Ph, UnbalancePh-Ph
—
Base current (1 — 99999) A —
Measuring voltage input Phase A, Phase B, Phase C, PosSeq, — NegSeq, -3*ZeroSeq, MaxPh, MinPh, UnbalancePh, Phase A-Phase B, Phase B-Phase C, Phase C-Phase A, MaxPh- Ph, MinPh-Ph, UnbalancePh-Ph
—
Base voltage (0.05 — 2000.00) kV —
Pickup overcurrent, step 1 and 2
(2 — 5000)% of IBase 1.0% of In for I In
Pickup undercurrent, step 1 and 2
(2 — 150)% of IBase 1.0% of In for I In
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 10 Multipurpose protection
593 Technical reference manual
Function Range or value Accuracy Definite time delay (0.00 — 6000.00) s 0.5% 10 ms
Operate time pickup overcurrent
25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset —
Reset time pickup overcurrent
25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset —
Operate time pickup undercurrent
25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset —
Reset time pickup undercurrent
25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset —
See table 728 and table 729
Parameter ranges for customer defined characteristic no 17: TD: 0.05 — 999.00 A: 0.0000 — 999.0000 B: 0.0000 — 99.0000 C: 0.0000 — 1.0000 P: 0.0001 — 10.0000 PR: 0.005 — 3.000 TR: 0.005 — 600.000 CR: 0.1 — 10.0
See table 728 and table 729
Voltage level where voltage memory takes over
(0.0 — 5.0)% of VBase 0.5% of Vn
Pickup overvoltage, step 1 and 2
(2.0 — 200.0)% of VBase 0.5% of Vn for V Vn
Pickup undervoltage, step 1 and 2
(2.0 — 150.0)% of VBase 0.5% of Vn for V Vn
Operate time, pickup overvoltage
25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Vset —
Reset time, pickup overvoltage
25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Vset —
Operate time pickup undervoltage
25 ms typically 2 to 0 x Vset —
Reset time pickup undervoltage
25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Vset —
High and low voltage limit, voltage dependent operation
(1.0 — 200.0)% of VBase 1.0% of Vn for V Vn
Directional function Settable: NonDir, forward and reverse —
Relay characteristic angle (-180 to +180) degrees 2.0 degrees
Relay operate angle (1 to 90) degrees 2.0 degrees
Reset ratio, overcurrent > 95% —
Reset ratio, undercurrent < 105% —
Reset ratio, overvoltage > 95% —
Reset ratio, undervoltage < 105% —
Overcurrent:
Table continues on next page
Section 10 1MRK505222-UUS C Multipurpose protection
594 Technical reference manual
Function Range or value Accuracy Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset —
Impulse margin time 15 ms typically —
Undercurrent:
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset —
Impulse margin time 15 ms typically —
Overvoltage:
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Vset —
Impulse margin time 15 ms typically —
Undervoltage:
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Vset —
Impulse margin time 15 ms typically —
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 10 Multipurpose protection
595 Technical reference manual
Section 11 Secondary system supervision
About this chapter This chapter describes functions like Current circuit supervision and Fuse failure supervision. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are included for each function.
11.1 Current circuit supervision CCSRDIF (87)
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Current circuit supervision CCSRDIF — 87
11.1.1 Introduction Open or short circuited current transformer cores can cause unwanted operation of many protection functions such as differential, ground-fault current and negative- sequence current functions.
It must be remembered that a blocking of protection functions at an occurrence of open CT circuit will mean that the situation will remain and extremely high voltages will stress the secondary circuit.
Current circuit supervision (CCSRDIF, 87) compares the residual current from a three phase set of current transformer cores with the neutral point current on a separate input taken from another set of cores on the current transformer.
A detection of a difference indicates a fault in the circuit and is used as alarm or to block protection functions expected to give unwanted tripping.
11.1.2 Principle of operation Current circuit supervision CCSRDIF (87) compares the absolute value of the vectorial sum of the three phase currents |Iphase| and the numerical value of the residual current |Iref| from another current transformer set, see figure 300.
The FAIL output will be set to a logical one when the following criteria are fulfilled:
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 11 Secondary system supervision
597 Technical reference manual
The numerical value of the difference |Iphase| |Iref| is higher than 80% of the numerical value of the sum |Iphase| + |Iref|.
The numerical value of the current |Iphase| |Iref| is equal to or higher than the set operate value IMinOp.
No phase current has exceeded Pickup_Block during the last 10 ms. CCSRDIF (87) is enabled by setting Operation = Enabled.
The FAIL output remains activated 100 ms after the AND-gate resets when being activated for more than 20 ms. If the FAIL lasts for more than 150 ms an ALARM will be issued. In this case the FAIL and ALARM will remain activated 1 s after the AND- gate resets. This prevents unwanted resetting of the blocking function when phase current supervision element(s) operate, for example, during a fault.
IA
Iref
+ —
+ +
I>IMinOp
+ -x
0,8
AND
BLOCK
1,5 x Ir
OR 10 ms
OPERATION
100 ms
1 s150 ms
20 ms
I>Pickup_Block
en05000463_ansi.vsd
FAIL
ALARM
I ref
BLOCK
OR
IA IB IB IC IC
ANSI05000463 V1 EN
Figure 300: Simplified logic diagram for Current circuit supervision CCSRDIF (87)
The operate characteristic is percentage restrained, see figure 301.
Section 11 1MRK505222-UUS C Secondary system supervision
598 Technical reference manual
Slope = 0.8
Slope = 1
Operation area
IMinOp
99000068.vsd
phase ref| I | — | I |
phase ref| I | + | I |
IEC99000068 V1 EN
Figure 301: Operate characteristics
Due to the formulas for the axis compared, |SIphase | — |I ref | and |S I phase | + | I ref | respectively, the slope can not be above 2.
11.1.3 Function block
ANSI05000389-2-en.vsd
CCSRDIF (87) I3P* IREF* BLOCK
FAIL ALARM
ANSI05000389 V2 EN
Figure 302: CCSRDIF (87) function block
11.1.4 Input and output signals Table 306: CCSRDIF (87) Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Group signal for three phase current input
IREF GROUP SIGNAL
— Reference current signal input
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 11 Secondary system supervision
599 Technical reference manual
Table 307: CCSRDIF (87) Output signals
Name Type Description FAIL BOOLEAN Detection of current circuit failure
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm for current circuit failure
11.1.5 Setting parameters Table 308: CCSRDIF (87) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
IBase 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 IBase value for current pickup detectors
IMinOp 5 — 200 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate current differential pickup in % of IBase
Table 309: CCSRDIF (87) Group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Pickup_Block 5 — 500 %IB 1 150 Block of the function at high phase current, in
% of IBase
11.1.6 Technical data Table 310: CCSRDIF (87) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Operate current (5-200)% of In 10.0% of In at I In
10.0% of I at I > In
Block current (5-500)% of In 5.0% of In at I In 5.0% of I at I > In
11.2 Fuse failure supervision SDDRFUF
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Fuse failure supervision SDDRFUF — —
Section 11 1MRK505222-UUS C Secondary system supervision
600 Technical reference manual
11.2.1 Introduction The aim of the fuse failure supervision function (SDDRFUF) is to block voltage measuring functions at failures in the secondary circuits between the voltage transformer and the IED in order to avoid unwanted operations that otherwise might occur.
The fuse failure supervision function basically has three different algorithms, negative sequence and zero sequence based algorithms and an additional delta voltage and delta current algorithm.
The negative sequence detection algorithm is recommended for IEDs used in isolated or high-impedance grounded networks. It is based on the negative-sequence measuring quantities, a high value of voltage without the presence of the negative-sequence current 3I2.
The zero sequence detection algorithm is recommended for IEDs used in directly or low impedance grounded networks. It is based on the zero sequence measuring quantities, a high value of voltage 3V0 without the presence of the residual current 3I0.
For better adaptation to system requirements, an operation mode setting has been introduced which makes it possible to select the operating conditions for negative sequence and zero sequence based function. The selection of different operation modes makes it possible to choose different interaction possibilities between the negative sequence and zero sequence based algorithm.
A criterion based on delta current and delta voltage measurements can be added to the fuse failure supervision function in order to detect a three phase fuse failure, which in practice is more associated with voltage transformer switching during station operations.
11.2.2 Principle of operation
11.2.2.1 Zero and negative sequence detection
The zero and negative sequence function continuously measures the currents and voltages in all three phases and calculates, see figure 303:
the zero-sequence voltage 3V0 the zero-sequence current 3I0 the negative sequence current 3I2 the negative sequence voltage 3V2
The measured signals are compared with their respective set values 3V0PU and 3I0PU, 3V2PU and 3I2PU.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 11 Secondary system supervision
601 Technical reference manual
The function enable the internal signal FuseFailDetZeroSeq if the measured zero- sequence voltage is higher than the set value 3V0PU and the measured zero-sequence current is below the set value 3I0PU.
The function enable the internal signal FuseFailDetNegSeq if the measured negative sequence voltage is higher than the set value 3V2PU and the measured negative sequence current is below the set value 3I2PU.
A drop out delay of 100 ms for the measured zero-sequence and negative sequence current will prevent a false fuse failure detection at un-equal breaker opening at the two line ends.
IA
IB
IC
Zero sequence
filter
Negative sequence
filter
VA
VB
VC
Zero sequence
filter
Negative sequence
filter
CurrZeroSeq
CurrNegSeq
a b
a>b
a b
a>b
a b
a>b
a b
a>b
3I0PU
3I2PU
VoltZeroSeq
VoltNegSeq
AND
AND
FuseFailDetZeroSeq
FuseFailDetNegSeq
Sequence Detection
3V0PU
3V2PU
3I0
3I2
3V0
3V2
ANSI10000036-2-en.vsd
0 100 ms
0 100 ms
ANSI10000036 V2 EN
Figure 303: Simplified logic diagram for sequence detection part
The calculated values 3V0, 3I0, 3I2 and 3V2 are available as service values on local HMI and monitoring tool in PCM600.
Input and output signals The output signals 3PH, BLKV and BLKZ can be blocked in the following conditions:
Section 11 1MRK505222-UUS C Secondary system supervision
602 Technical reference manual
The input BLOCK is activated The input BLKTRIP is activated at the same time as the internal signal
fufailStarted is not present The operation mode selector OpModeSel is set to Disable. The IED is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been
blocked from the HMI (BlockFUSE=Yes)
The input BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the fuse failure supervision function. It can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to receive a block command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal functions of the IED itself in order to receive a block command from internal functions. Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and internal function outputs.
The input BLKSP is intended to be connected to the trip output at any of the protection functions included in the IED. When activated for more than 20 ms, the operation of the fuse failure is blocked during a fixed time of 100 ms. The aim is to increase the security against unwanted operations during the opening of the breaker, which might cause unbalance conditions for which the fuse failure might operate.
The output signal BLKZ will also be blocked if the internal dead line detection is activated. The block signal has a 200 ms drop-out time delay.
The input signal MCBOP is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit breaker protecting the VT secondary circuit. The MCBOP signal sets the output signals BLKU and BLKZ in order to block all the voltage related functions when the MCB is open independent of the setting of OpModeSel selector. The additional drop-out timer of 150 ms prolongs the presence of MCBOP signal to prevent the unwanted operation of voltage dependent function due to non simultaneous closing of the main contacts of the miniature circuit breaker.
The input signal 89b is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the line disconnector. The 89b signal sets the output signal BLKU in order to block the voltage related functions when the line disconnector is open. The impedance protection function is not affected by the position of the line disconnector since there will be no line currents that can cause malfunction of the distance protection. If DISCPOS=0 it signifies that the line is connected to the system and when the DISCPOS=1 it signifies that the line is disconnected from the system and the block signal BLKU is generated.
The output BLKU can be used for blocking the voltage related measuring functions (undervoltage protection, synchro-check and so on) except for the impedance protection.
The function output BLKZ shall be used for blocking the impedance protection function.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 11 Secondary system supervision
603 Technical reference manual
SealIn = On
All UL < USealIn<
Any UL < UsealIn<
t 5 s
AND 3PH
MCBOP
All UL > UsealIn< t 60 s
CBCLOSED
BLOCK
AND
TEST
TEST ACTIVE AND
BlocFuse = Yes
OpMode
AND
t 200 ms AND
OR
DISCPOS
BLKU
BLKZ
AND
AND
FuseFailDetZeroSeq
UZsIZs OR UNsINs
UZsIZs AND UNsINs
UZsIZs UNsINs
OptimZsNs
AND FuseFailDetNegSeq
OR AND
AND
CurrZeroSeq
CurrNegSeq a b
a>b
OR
AND
AND
AND
FuseFailDetDUDI AND
OpDUDI = On
DeadLineDet1Ph
OR
OR
OR
OR AND
VoltZeroSeq VoltNegSeq t
5 s
AllCurrLow
t 150 ms
intBlock
Fuse failure detection Main logic
BLKTRIP AND t
100 ms OR
t 20 ms
OR
IEC10000033-2-en.vsd
OR
FusefailStarted
IEC10000033 V2 EN
Section 11 1MRK505222-UUS C Secondary system supervision
604 Technical reference manual
Figure 304: Simplified logic diagram for main logic of Fuse failure function
11.2.2.2 Delta current and delta voltage detection
A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 305. The calculation of the change is based on vector change which means that it detects both amplitude and phase angle changes. The calculated delta quantities are compared with their respective set values DI< and DU> and the algorithm, detects a fuse failure if a sufficient change in voltage without a sufficient change in current is detected in each phase separately. The following quantities are calculated in all three phases:
The change in voltage DU The change in current DI
The internal FuseFailDetDUDI signal is activated if the following conditions are fulfilled for a phase:
The magnitude of the phase-ground voltage has been above UPh> for more than 1.5 cycle
The magnitude of DU is higher than the corresponding setting DU> The magnitude of DI is below the setting DI>
and at least one of the following conditions are fulfilled:
The magnitude of the phase current in the same phase is higher than the setting IPh> The circuit breaker is closed (CBCLOSED = True)
The first criterion means that detection of failure in one phase together with high current for the same phase will set the output. The measured phase current is used to reduce the risk of false fuse failure detection. If the current on the protected line is low, a voltage drop in the system (not caused by fuse failure) is not by certain followed by current change and a false fuse failure might occur
The second criterion requires that the delta condition shall be fulfilled in any phase at the same time as circuit breaker is closed. Opening circuit breaker at one end and energizing the line from other end onto a fault could lead to wrong start of the fuse failure function at the end with the open breaker. If this is considering to be an important disadvantage, connect the CBCLOSED input to FALSE. In this way only the first criterion can activate the delta function.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 11 Secondary system supervision
605 Technical reference manual
IL1
|DI| a b
a>b DI<
One cycle delay
UL1
a b
a>b
One cycle delay
DU>
|DU|
a b
a>b t 20 ms
t 1.5 cycle
AND
DUDI detection Phase 1
UPh>
DUDI detection Phase 2
Same logic as for phase 1
IL2
UL2
DUDI detection Phase 3
Same logic as for phase 1
IL3
UL3
a b
a
IL1 a b
a>b IPh> AND
ANDCBCLOSED OR
OR AND
a b
a
IL2 a b
a>b AND
AND OR OR
AND
a b
a
IL3 a b
a>b AND
AND OR OR
AND OR
FuseFailDetDUDI
DUDI Detection
IEC10000034-1-en.vsd
IEC10000034 V1 EN
Figure 305: Simplified logic diagram for DU/DI detection part
Section 11 1MRK505222-UUS C Secondary system supervision
606 Technical reference manual
11.2.2.3 Dead line detection
A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 306. A dead phase condition is indicated if both the voltage and the current in one phase is below their respective setting values VDLDPU and IDLDPU. If at least one phase is considered to be dead the output DLD1PH and the internal signal DeadLineDet1Ph is activated. If all three phases are considered to be dead the output DLD3PH is activated
IA
IB
IC
a b
a
a b
a
a b
a
IDLDPU
VA
VB
VC
a b
a
a b
a
a b
a
VDLDPU
OR
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND AND
AND
AllCurrLow
DeadLineDet1Ph
DLD3PH
DLD1PH
intBlock
Dead Line Detection
ANSI0000035-1-en.vsd ANSI0000035 V1 EN
Figure 306: Simplified logic diagram for Dead Line detection part
11.2.2.4 Main logic
A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 307. The fuse failure supervision function (SDDRFUF) can be switched on or off by the setting parameter Operation to Enabled or Disabled.
For increased flexibility and adaptation to system requirements an operation mode selector, OpModeSel, has been introduced to make it possible to select different operating modes for the negative and zero sequence based algorithms. The different operation modes are:
Disabled; The negative and zero sequence function is disabled V2I2; Negative sequence is selected V0I0; Zero sequence is selected
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 11 Secondary system supervision
607 Technical reference manual
V0I0 OR V2I2; Both negative and zero sequence is activated and working in parallel in an OR-condition
V0I0 AND V2I2; Both negative and zero sequence is activated and working in series (AND-condition for operation)
OptimZsNs; Optimum of negative and zero sequence (the function that has the highest magnitude of measured negative and zero sequence current will be activated)
The delta function can be activated by setting the parameter OpDVDI to Enabled. When selected it operates in parallel with the sequence based algorithms.
As soon as any fuse failure situation is detected, signals FuseFailDetZeroSeq, FuseFailDetNegSeq or FuseFailDetDVDI, and the specific functionality is released, the function will activate the output signal BLKV. The output signal BLKZ will be activated as well if not the internal dead phase detection, DeadLineDet1Ph, is not activated at the same time. The output BLKV can be used for blocking voltage related measuring functions (under voltage protection, synchro-check, and so on). For blocking of impedance protection functions output BLKZ shall be used.
If the fuse failure situation is present for more than 5 seconds and the setting parameter SealIn is set to Enabled it will be sealed in as long as at least one phase voltages is below the set value VSealInPU. This will keep the BLKV and BLKZ signals activated as long as any phase voltage is below the set value VSealInPU. If all three phase voltages drop below the set value VSealInPU and the setting parameter SealIn is set to Enabled the output signal 3PH will also be activated. The signals 3PH, BLKV and BLKZ signals will now be active as long as any phase voltage is below the set value VSealInPU.
If SealIn is set to Enabled the fuse failure condition is stored in the non volatile memory in the IED. At start-up of the IED (due to auxiliary power interruption or re- start due to configuration change) it checks the stored value in its non volatile memory and re-establishes the conditions that were present before the shut down. All phase voltages must be greater than VSealInPU before fuse failure is de-activated and removes the block of different protection functions.
The output signal BLKV will also be active if all phase voltages have been above the setting VSealInPU for more than 60 seconds, the zero or negative sequence voltage has been above the set value 3V0PU and 3V2PU for more than 5 seconds, all phase currents are below the setting IDLDPU (operate level for dead line detection) and the circuit breaker is closed (input 52a is activated).
If a MCB is used then the input signal MCBOP is to be connected via a terminal binary input to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit breaker protecting the VT secondary circuit. The MCBOP signal sets the output signals BLKV and BLKZ in order to block all the voltage related functions when the MCB is open independent of the setting of OpModeSel or OpDVDI. An additional drop-out timer of 150 ms
Section 11 1MRK505222-UUS C Secondary system supervision
608 Technical reference manual
prolongs the presence of MCBOP signal to prevent the unwanted operation of voltage dependent function due to non simultaneous closing of the main contacts of the miniature circuit breaker.
The input signal 89b is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the line disconnector. The 89b signal sets the output signal BLKV in order to block the voltage related functions when the line disconnector is open. The impedance protection function does not have to be affected since there will be no line currents that can cause malfunction of the distance protection.
The output signals 3PH, BLKV and BLKZ as well as the signals DLD1PH and DLD3PH from dead line detections are blocked if any of the following conditions occur:
The operation mode selector OpMode is set to Disabled The input BLOCK is activated The input BLKTRIP is activated at the same time as no fuse failure indication is
present The IED is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been
blocked from the HMI (BlockFUSE=Yes)
The input BLOCK is a general purpose blocking signal of the fuse failure supervision function. It can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to receive a block command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal functions of the IED. Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and internal function outputs.
The input BLKTRIP is intended to be connected to the trip output of any of the protection functions included in the IED and/or trip from external equipments via binary inputs. When activated for more than 20 ms without any fuse fail detected, the operation of the fuse failure is blocked during a fixed time of 100 ms. The aim is to increase the security against unwanted operations during the opening of the breaker, which might cause unbalance conditions for which the fuse failure might operate.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 11 Secondary system supervision
609 Technical reference manual
SealIn = Enabled
All VL < VSealInPU
Any VL < VSealInPU
t 5 s
AND 3PH
MCBOP
All VL > VSealInPU t 60 s
52a
BLOCK
AND
TEST
TEST ACTIVE AND
BlocFuse = Yes
OpModeSel
AND
t 200 ms AND
OR
89b
BLKV
BLKZ
AND
AND
FuseFailDetZeroSeq
UZsIZs OR UNsINs
UZsIZs AND UNsINs
UZsIZs UNsINs
OptimZsNs
AND FuseFailDetNegSeq
OR AND
AND
CurrZeroSeq
CurrNegSeq a b
a>b
OR
AND
AND
AND
FuseFailDetDUDI AND
OpDVDI = Enabled
DeadLineDet1Ph
OR
OR
OR
OR AND
VoltZeroSeq VoltNegSeq OR t
5 s
AllCurrLow
t 150 ms
intBlock
Fuse failure detection Main logic
BLKTRIP AND t
100 ms OR
t 20 ms
OR
ANSI10000033-2-en.vsd
FusefailStarted
ANSI10000033 V2 EN
Section 11 1MRK505222-UUS C Secondary system supervision
610 Technical reference manual
Figure 307: Simplified logic diagram for fuse failure supervision function, Main logic
11.2.3 Function block
ANSI05000700-2-en.vsd
SDDRFUF I3P* V3P* BLOCK 52A MCBOP 89B BLKTRIP
BLKZ BLKV
3PH DLD1PH DLD3PH
ANSI05000700 V2 EN
Figure 308: SDDRFUF function block
11.2.4 Input and output signals Table 311: SDDRFUF Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Current connection
V3P GROUP SIGNAL
— Voltage connection
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
52a BOOLEAN 0 Active when circuit breaker is closed
MCBOP BOOLEAN 0 Active when external Miniature Circuit Breaker opens protected voltage circuit
89b BOOLEAN 0 Active when line disconnect switch is open
BLKTRIP BOOLEAN 0 Blocks operation of function when active
Table 312: SDDRFUF Output signals
Name Type Description BLKZ BOOLEAN Start of current and voltage controlled function
BLKV BOOLEAN General pickup
3PH BOOLEAN Three-phase pickup
DLD1PH BOOLEAN Dead line condition in at least one phase
DLD3PH BOOLEAN Dead line condition in all three phases
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 11 Secondary system supervision
611 Technical reference manual
11.2.5 Setting parameters Table 313: SDDRFUF Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Enabled Disable/Enable Operation
IBase 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Base current
VBase 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Base voltage
OpModeSel Disabled V2I2 V0I0 V0I0 OR V2I2 V0I0 AND V2I2 OptimZsNs
— — V0I0 Operating mode selection
3V0PU 1 — 100 %VB 1 30 Pickup of residual overvoltage element in % of VBase
3I0PU 1 — 100 %IB 1 10 Pickup of residual undercurrent element in % of IBase
3V2PU 1 — 100 %VB 1 30 Pickup of negative sequence overvoltage element in % of VBase
3I2PU 1 — 100 %IB 1 10 Pickup of negative sequence undercurrent element in % of IBase
OpDVDI Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Operation of change based function Disable/ Enable
DVPU 1 — 100 %VB 1 60 Pickup of change in phase voltage in % of VBase
DIPU 1 — 100 %IB 1 15 Pickup of change in phase current in % of IBase
VPPU 1 — 100 %VB 1 70 Pickup of phase voltage in % of VBase
IPPU 1 — 100 %IB 1 10 Pickup of phase current in % of IBase
SealIn Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Seal in functionality Disable/Enable
VSealInPU 1 — 100 %VB 1 70 Pickup of seal-in phase voltage in % of VBase
IDLDPU 1 — 100 %IB 1 5 Pickup for phase current detection in % of IBase for dead line detection
VDLDPU 1 — 100 %VB 1 60 Pickup for phase voltage detection in % of VBase for dead line detection
Section 11 1MRK505222-UUS C Secondary system supervision
612 Technical reference manual
11.2.6 Technical data Table 314: SDDRFUF technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Operate voltage, zero sequence (1-100)% of VBase 1.0% of Vn
Operate current, zero sequence (1100)% of IBase 1.0% of In
Operate voltage, negative sequence (1100)% of VBase 0.5% of Vn
Operate current, negative sequence (1100)% of IBase 1.0% of In
Operate voltage change pickup (1100)% of VBase 5.0% of Vn
Operate current change pickup (1100)% of IBase 5.0% of In
Operate phase voltage (1-100)% of VBase 0.5% of Vn
Operate phase current (1-100)% of IBase 1.0% of In
Operate phase dead line voltage (1-100)% of VBase 0.5% of Vn
Operate phase dead line current (1-100)% of IBase 1.0% of In
Operate time, general pickup of function 25 ms typically at 1 to 0 of Vbase —
Reset time, general pickup of function 35 ms typically at 0 to 1 of Vbase —
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 11 Secondary system supervision
613 Technical reference manual
Section 12 Control
About this chapter This chapter describes the control functions. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are included for each function.
12.1 Synchronism check, energizing check, and synchronizing SESRSYN (25)
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing
SESRSYN
sc/vc
SYMBOL-M V1 EN
25
12.1.1 Introduction The Synchronizing function allows closing of asynchronous networks at the correct moment including the breaker closing time, which improves the network stability.
Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing (SESRSYN, 25) function checks that the voltages on both sides of the circuit breaker are in synchronism, or with at least one side dead to ensure that closing can be done safely.
SESRSYN (25) function includes a built-in voltage selection scheme for double bus and breaker-and-a-half or ring busbar arrangements.
Manual closing as well as automatic reclosing can be checked by the function and can have different settings.
For systems which are running asynchronous a synchronizing function is provided. The main purpose of the synchronizing function is to provide controlled closing of circuit breakers when two asynchronous systems are going to be connected. It is used
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
615 Technical reference manual
for slip frequencies that are larger than those for synchronism check and lower than a set maximum level for the synchronizing function.
12.1.2 Principle of operation
12.1.2.1 Basic functionality
The synchronism check function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker and compares them to set limits. The output is only given when all measured quantities are simultaneously within their set limits.
The energizing check function measures the bus and line voltages and compares them to both high and low threshold detectors. The output is given only when the actual measured quantities match the set conditions.
The synchronizing function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker, and also determines the angle change occurring during the closing delay of the circuit breaker, from the measured slip frequency. The output is given only when all measured conditions are simultaneously within their set limits. The issue of the output is timed to give closure at the optimal time including the time for the circuit breaker and the closing circuit.
For single circuit breaker and breaker-and-a-half circuit breaker arrangements, the SESRSYN (25) function blocks have the capability to make the necessary voltage selection. For single circuit breaker arrangements, selection of the correct voltage is made using auxiliary contacts of the bus disconnectors. For breaker-and-a-half circuit breaker arrangements, correct voltage selection is made using auxiliary contacts of the bus disconnectors as well as the circuit breakers.
The internal logic for each function block as well as, the input and outputs, and the setting parameters with default setting and setting ranges is described in this document. For application related information, please refer to the application manual.
12.1.2.2 Logic diagrams
Logic diagrams The logic diagrams that follow illustrate the main principles of the SESRSYN function components such as Synchrocheck, Synchronizing, Energizing check and Voltage selection, and are intended to simplify the understanding of the function.
Synchronism check The voltage difference, frequency difference and phase angle difference values are measured in the IED centrally and are available for the synchronism check function for evaluation. If the bus voltage is connected as phase-phase and the line voltage as phase-
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
616 Technical reference manual
neutral (or the opposite), this need to be compensated. This is done with a setting, which scales up the line voltage to a level equal to the bus voltage.
When the function is set to OperationSC = Enabled, the measuring will start.
The function will compare the bus and line voltage values with the set values for VHighBusSC and VHighLineSC.
If both sides are higher than the set values, the measured values are compared with the set values for acceptable frequency, phase angle and voltage difference: FreqDiffA, FreqDiffM, PhaseDiffA, PhaseDiffM and VDiffSC. If a compensation factor is set due to the use of different voltages on the bus and line, the factor is deducted from the line voltage before the comparison of the phase angle values.
The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The frequencies must not deviate from the rated frequency more than +/-5Hz. The frequency difference between the bus frequency and the line frequency is measured and may not exceed the set value.
Two sets of settings for frequency difference and phase angle difference are available and used for the manual closing and autoreclose functions respectively, as required.
The inputs BLOCK and BLKSC are available for total block of the complete SESRSYN (25) function and block of the Synchronism check function respectively. Input TSTSC will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are connected to a separate test output.
The outputs MANSYOK and AUTOSYOK are activated when the actual measured conditions match the set conditions for the respective output. The output signal can be delayed independently for MANSYOK and AUTOSYOK conditions.
A number of outputs are available as information about fulfilled checking conditions. VOKSC shows that the voltages are high, VDIFFSC, FRDIFFA, FRDIFFM, PHDIFFA, PHDIFFM shows when the voltage difference, frequency difference and phase angle difference conditions are out of limits.
Output INADVCLS, inadvertent circuit breaker closing, indicate that the circuit breaker has been closed by some other equipment or function than SESRSYN. The output is activated, if the voltage condition is fulfilled at the same time the phase angle difference between bus and line is suddenly changed from being larger than 60 degrees to smaller than 5 degrees.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
617 Technical reference manual
ANSI07000114-3-en.vsd
OperationSC = Enabled
TSTSC
BLKSC BLOCK
TSTAUTSY
AUTOSYOK
PHDIFFME
FRDIFFME
VDIFFME
PHDIFFA
FRDIFFA
VOKSC
VDIFFSC
OR
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND VHighLineSC
VHighBusSC
VDiffSC
phaseAngleDifferenceValue
frequencyDifferenceValue
voltageDifferenceValue
1
1
1
AND tSCA
PhaseDiffA
FreqDiffA
50 ms 0
0-60 ms 0
Note! Similar logic for Manual Synchronism check.
INADVCLSPhDiff > 60
PhDiff < 5
AND AND
100 ms
32 ms 0
ANSI07000114 V3 EN
Figure 309: Simplified logic diagram for the Auto Synchronism function
Synchronizing When the function is set to OperationSynch = Enabled the measuring will be performed.
The function will compare the values for the bus and line voltage with the set values for VHighBusSynch and VHighLineSynch, which is a supervision that the voltages are both live. Also the voltage difference is checked to be smaller than the set value for VDiffSynch, which is a p.u value of set voltage base values. If both sides are higher than the set values and the voltage difference between bus and line is acceptable, the measured values are compared with the set values for acceptable frequency
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
618 Technical reference manual
FreqDiffMax and FreqDiffMin, rate of change of frequency FreqRateChange, phase angle, which has to be smaller than the internally preset value of 15 degrees.
Measured frequencies between the settings for the maximum and minimum frequency will initiate the measuring and the evaluation of the angle change to allow operation to be sent in the right moment including the set tBreaker time. There is a phase angle release internally to block any incorrect closing pulses. At operation the SYNOK output will be activated with a pulse tClosePulse and the function resets. The function will also reset if the synchronizing conditions are not fulfilled within the set tMaxSynch time. This prevents that the function is, by mistake, maintained in operation for a long time, waiting for conditions to be fulfilled.
The inputs BLOCK and BLKSYNCH are available for total block of the complete SESRSYN function and block of the Synchronizing function respectively. TSTSYNCH will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are connected to a separate output.
OR
AND S R
VDiffSynch
VHighBusSynch
VHighLineSynch
FreqDiffMax
FreqDiffMin
FreqRateChange
AND t 50 ms
AND
AND
AND
AND
tClose Pulse
OR
AND
OR
SYN1
STARTSYN
BLKSYNCH
SYNPROGR
SYNOK
SYNFAIL
tMax Synch
TSTSYNOK
ANSI06000636-3-en.vsd
OPERATION SYNCH=ON
TEST MODE=ON
fBus&fLine 5Hz Phase Diff < 15 deg
PhaseDiff=closing angle
FreqDiff
tBreaker Close pulse in advance
ANSI06000636 V3 EN
Figure 310: Simplified logic diagram for the synchronizing function
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
619 Technical reference manual
Energizing check Voltage values are measured in the IED centrally and are available for evaluation by the Synchronism check function.
The function measures voltages on the busbar and the line to verify whether they are live or dead. This is done by comparing with the set values VHighBusEnerg and VLowBusEnerg for bus energizing and VHighLineEnerg and VLowLineEnerg for line energizing.
The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The frequencies must not deviate from the rated frequency more than +/-5Hz.
The Energizing direction can be selected individually for the Manual and the Automatic functions respectively. When the conditions are met the outputs AUTOENOK and MANENOK respectively will be activated if the fuse supervision conditions are fulfilled. The output signal can be delayed independently for MANENOK and AUTOENOK conditions. The Energizing direction can also be selected by an integer input AENMODE respective MENMODE, which for example, can be connected to a Binary to Integer function block (B16I). Integers supplied shall be 1=off, 2=DLLB, 3=DBLL and 4= Both. Not connected input with connection of INTZERO output from Fixed Signals (FIXDSIGN) function block will mean that the setting is done from Parameter Setting tool. The active position can be read on outputs MODEAEN resp MODEMEN. The modes are 0=OFF, 1=DLLB, 2=DBLL and 3=Both.
The inputs BLOCK and BLKENERG are available for total block of the complete SESRSYN (25) function respective block of the Energizing check function. TSTENERG will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are connected to a separate test output.
Voltage selection The voltage selection module including supervision of included voltage transformer fuses for the different arrangements is a basic part of the SESRSYN (25) function and determines the parameters fed to the Synchronizing, Synchrocheck and Energizing check functions. This includes the selection of the appropriate Line and Bus voltages and fuse supervision.
The voltage selection type to be used is set with the parameter CBConfig.
If No voltage sel. is set the default voltages used will be V-Line1 and V-Bus1. This is also the case when external voltage selection is provided. Fuse failure supervision for the used inputs must also be connected.
The voltage selection function, selected voltages, and fuse conditions are the Synchronism check and Energizing check inputs.
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
620 Technical reference manual
For the disconnector positions it is advisable to use (NO) a and (NC) b type contacts to supply Disconnector Open and Closed positions but, it is also possible to use an inverter for one of the positions.
Voltage selection for a single circuit breaker with double busbars This function uses the binary input from the disconnectors auxiliary contacts BUS1_OP- BUS1_CL for Bus 1, and BUS2_OP-BUS2_CL for Bus 2 to select between bus 1 and bus 2 voltages. If the disconnector connected to bus 1 is closed and the disconnector connected to bus 2 is opened the bus 1 voltage is used. All other combinations use the bus 2 voltage. The outputs B1SEL and B2SEL respectively indicate the selected Bus voltage.
The function checks the fuse-failure signals for bus 1, bus 2 and line voltage transformers. Inputs VB1OK-VB1FF supervise the fuse for Bus 1 and VB2OK-VB2FF supervises the fuse for Bus 2. VL1OK and VL1FF supervises the fuse for the Line voltage transformer. The inputs fail (FF) or healthy (OK) can alternatively be used dependent on the available signal. If a fuse-failure is detected in the selected voltage source an output signal VSELFAIL is set. This output signal is true if the selected bus or line voltages have a fuse failure. This output as well as the function can be blocked with the input signal BLOCK. The function logic diagram is shown in figure 311.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
621 Technical reference manual
AND
AND
AND
bus1Voltage
OR
OR
OR
VL1FF VL1OK
VB1FF VB1OK
VB2FF VB2OK
BUS2_CL BUS2_OP
BUS1_CL BUS1_OP
selectedFuseOK
BLOCK
bus2Voltage busVoltage
AND invalidSelection
B2SEL
B1SEL
AND
AND
AND VSELFAIL
en05000779_ansi.vsd
OR
NOT
ANSI05000779 V1 EN
Figure 311: Logic diagram for the voltage selection function of a single circuit breaker with double busbars
Voltage selection for a breaker-and-a-half circuit breaker arrangement Note that with breaker-and-a-half schemes two Synchronism check functions must be used in the IED (three for two IEDs in a complete bay). Below, the scheme for one Bus breaker and the Tie breaker is described.
This voltage selection function uses the binary inputs from the disconnectors and circuit breakers auxiliary contacts to select the right voltage for the SESRSYN (Synchronism and Energizing check) function. For the bus circuit breaker one side of the circuit breaker is connected to the busbar and the other side is connected either to line 1, line 2 or the other busbar depending on the arrangement.
Inputs LINE1_OP-LINE1_CL, BUS1_OP-BUS1_CL, BUS2_OP-BUS2_CL, LINE2_OP-LINE2_CL are inputs for the position of the Line disconnectors respectively the Bus and Tie breakers. The outputs L1SEL, L2SEL and B2SEL will give indication of the selected Line voltage as a reference to the fixed Bus 1 voltage, which indicates B1SEL.
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
622 Technical reference manual
The fuse supervision is connected to VLNOK-VLNFF and with alternative Healthy or Failing fuse signals depending on what is available from each fuse (MCB).
The tie circuit breaker is connected either to bus 1 or line 1 on one side and the other side is connected either to bus 2 or line 2. Four different output combinations are possible, bus to bus, bus to line, line to bus and line to line.
The line 1 voltage is selected if the line 1 disconnector is closed. The bus 1 voltage is selected if the line 1 disconnector is open and the bus 1 circuit
breaker is closed. The line 2 voltage is selected if the line 2 disconnector is closed. The bus 2 voltage is selected if the line 2 disconnector is open and the bus 2 circuit
breaker is closed.
The function also checks the fuse-failure signals for bus 1, bus 2, line 1 and line 2. If a fuse-failure is detected in the selected voltage an output signal VSELFAIL is set. This output signal is true if the selected bus or line voltages have a fuse failure. This output as well as the function can be blocked with the input signal BLOCK. The function block diagram for the voltage selection of a bus circuit breaker is shown in figure 312 and for the tie circuit breaker in figure 313.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
623 Technical reference manual
AND
AND
OR
OR
VL1FF VL1OK
VB1FF VB1OK
VB2FF VB2OK
BUS1_CL BUS1_OP
LINE1_CL LINE1_OP
selectedFuseOK
BLOCK
lineVoltage
invalidSelection
L1SEL
AND
AND VSELFAIL
VL2FF VL2OK
OR
AND
ANDBUS2_CL BUS2_OP
LINE2_CL LINE2_OP
AND
AND
L2SEL
OR
AND
B2SEL
AND
AND
AND
en05000780_ansi.vsd
OR
OR
line2Voltage
bus2Voltage
line1Voltage
ANSI05000780 V1 EN
Figure 312: Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for a bus circuit breaker in a breaker-and- a-half arrangement
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
624 Technical reference manual
AND
AND
OR
OR
VL1FF VL1OK
VB1FF VB1OK
VB2FF VB2OK
BUS1_CL BUS1_OP
LINE1_CL LINE1_OP
selectedFuseOK
BLOCK
line1Voltage
L1SEL
AND
AND VSELFAIL
VL2FF VL2OK
OR
AND
AND
AND
AND AND
B1SEL
bus1Voltage busVoltage
AND
AND
ANDBUS2_CL BUS2_OP
LINE2_CL LINE2_OP
bus2Voltage
L2SEL
AND AND
B2SEL
line2Voltage lineVoltage
invalidSelectionOR
en05000781_ansi.vsd
OR
OR
NOT
NOT
ANSI05000781 V1 EN
Figure 313: Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for the tie circuit breaker in breaker-and-a- half arrangement.
Fuse failure supervision External fuse failure signals or signals from a tripped fuse switch/MCB are connected to binary inputs that are configured to the inputs of SESRSYN (25) function in the IED. Alternatively, the internal signals from fuse failure supervision can be used when available. There are two alternative connection possibilities. Inputs labelled OK must be connected if the available contact indicates that the voltage circuit is healthy. Inputs
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
625 Technical reference manual
labelled FF must be connected if the available contact indicates that the voltage circuit is faulty.
The VB1OK/VB2OK and VB1FF/VB2FF inputs are related to the busbar voltage and the VLNOK and VLNFF inputs are related to the line voltage. Configure them to the binary input or function outputs that indicate the status of the external fuse failure of the busbar and line voltages. In the event of a fuse failure, the energizing check function is blocked. The synchronism check function requires full voltage on both sides and will be blocked automatically in the event of fuse failures.
12.1.3 Function block
ANSI10000046-1-en.vsd
SESRSYN (25) V3PB1* V3PB2* V3PL1* V3PL2* BLOCK BLKSYNCH BLKSC BLKENERG BUS1_OP BUS1_CL BUS2_OP BUS2_CL LINE1_OP LINE1_CL LINE2_OP LINE2_CL VB1OK VB1FF VB2OK VB2FF VL1OK VL1FF VL2OK VL2FF STARTSYN TSTSYNCH TSTSC TSTENERG AENMODE MENMODE
SYNOK AUTOSYOK AUTOENOK
MANSYOK MANENOK
TSTSYNOK TSTAUTSY TSTMANSY
TSTENOK VSELFAIL
B1SEL B2SEL L1SEL L2SEL
SYNPROGR SYNFAIL VOKSYN
VDIFFSYN FRDIFSYN FRDIFFOK FRDERIVA
VOKSC VDIFFSC FRDIFFA PHDIFFA FRDIFFM PHDIFFM
INADVCLS VDIFFME
FRDIFFME PHDIFFME
Vbus VLine
MODEAEN MODEMEN
ANSI10000046 V1 EN
Figure 314: SESRSYN (25) function block
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
626 Technical reference manual
12.1.4 Input and output signals Table 315: SESRSYN (25) Input signals
Name Type Default Description V3PB1 GROUP
SIGNAL — Group signal for phase to ground voltage input L1,
busbar 1
V3PB2 GROUP SIGNAL
— Group signal for phase to ground voltage input L1, busbar 2
V3PL1 GROUP SIGNAL
— Group signal for phase to ground voltage input L1, line 1
V3PL2 GROUP SIGNAL
— Group signal for phase to ground voltage input L1, line 2
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 General block
BLKSYNCH BOOLEAN 0 Block synchronizing
BLKSC BOOLEAN 0 Block synchro check
BLKENERG BOOLEAN 0 Block energizing check
BUS1_OP BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to bus1
BUS1_CL BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB and disconnector connected to bus1
BUS2_OP BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to bus2
BUS2_CL BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB and disconnector connected to bus2
LINE1_OP BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to line1
LINE1_CL BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB and disconnector connected to line1
LINE2_OP BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to line2
LINE2_CL BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB and disconnector connected to line2
VB1OK BOOLEAN 0 Bus1 voltage transformer OK
VB1FF BOOLEAN 0 Bus1 voltage transformer fuse failure
VB2OK BOOLEAN 0 Bus2 voltage transformer OK
VB2FF BOOLEAN 0 Bus2 voltage transformer fuse failure
VL1OK BOOLEAN 0 Line1 voltage transformer OK
VL1FF BOOLEAN 0 Line1 voltage transformer fuse failure
VL2OK BOOLEAN 0 Line2 voltage transformer OK
VL2FF BOOLEAN 0 Line2 voltage transformer fuse failure
STARTSYN BOOLEAN 0 Start synchronizing
TSTSYNCH BOOLEAN 0 Set synchronizing in test mode
TSTSC BOOLEAN 0 Set synchro check in test mode
TSTENERG BOOLEAN 0 Set energizing check in test mode
AENMODE INTEGER 0 Input for setting of automatic energizing mode
MENMODE INTEGER 0 Input for setting of manual energizing mode
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
627 Technical reference manual
Table 316: SESRSYN (25) Output signals
Name Type Description SYNOK BOOLEAN Synchronizing OK output
AUTOSYOK BOOLEAN Auto synchronism-check OK
AUTOENOK BOOLEAN Automatic energizing check OK
MANSYOK BOOLEAN Manual synchronism-check OK
MANENOK BOOLEAN Manual energizing check OK
TSTSYNOK BOOLEAN Synchronizing OK test output
TSTAUTSY BOOLEAN Auto synchronism-check OK test output
TSTMANSY BOOLEAN Manual synchronism-check OK test output
TSTENOK BOOLEAN Energizing check OK test output
VSELFAIL BOOLEAN Selected voltage transformer fuse failed
B1SEL BOOLEAN Bus1 selected
B2SEL BOOLEAN Bus2 selected
L1SEL BOOLEAN Line1 selected
L2SEL BOOLEAN Line2 selected
SYNPROGR BOOLEAN Synchronizing in progress
SYNFAIL BOOLEAN Synchronizing failed
VOKSYN BOOLEAN Voltage amplitudes for synchronizing above set limits
VDIFFSYN BOOLEAN Voltage difference out of limit for synchronizing
FRDIFSYN BOOLEAN Frequency difference out of limit for synchronizing
FRDIFFOK BOOLEAN Frequency difference in band for synchronizing
FRDERIVA BOOLEAN Frequency derivative out of limit for synchronizing
VOKSC BOOLEAN Voltage magnitudes above set limits
VDIFFSC BOOLEAN Voltage difference out of limit
FRDIFFA BOOLEAN Frequency difference out of limit for Auto operation
PHDIFFA BOOLEAN Phase angle difference out of limit for Auto operation
FRDIFFM BOOLEAN Frequency difference out of limit for Manual operation
PHDIFFM BOOLEAN Phase angle difference out of limit for Manual Operation
INADVCLS BOOLEAN Inadvertent circuit breaker closing
VDIFFME REAL Calculated difference of voltage in p.u
FRDIFFME REAL Calculated difference of frequency
PHDIFFME REAL Calculated difference of phase angle
Vbus REAL Bus voltage
VLine REAL Line voltage
MODEAEN INTEGER Selected mode for automatic energizing
MODEMEN INTEGER Selected mode for manual energizing
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
628 Technical reference manual
12.1.5 Setting parameters Table 317: SESRSYN (25) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
CBConfig No voltage sel. Double bus 1 1/2 bus CB 1 1/2 bus alt. CB Tie CB
— — No voltage sel. Select CB configuration
VBaseBus 0.001 — 9999.999 kV 0.001 400.000 Base value for busbar voltage settings
VBaseLine 0.001 — 9999.999 kV 0.001 400.000 Base value for line voltage settings
PhaseShift -180 — 180 Deg 5 0 Phase shift
VRatio 0.040 — 25.000 — 0.001 1.000 Voltage ratio
OperationSynch Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Operation for synchronizing function Off/On
VHighBusSynch 50.0 — 120.0 %VBB 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit bus for synchronizing in % of UBaseBus
VHighLineSynch 50.0 — 120.0 %VBL 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit line for synchrocheck in % of VBaseLine
VDiffSynch 0.02 — 0.50 pu 0.01 0.10 Voltage difference limit for synchronizing in p.u
FreqDiffMin 0.003 — 0.250 Hz 0.001 0.010 Minimum frequency difference limit for synchronizing
FreqDiffMax 0.050 — 0.250 Hz 0.001 0.200 Maximum frequency difference limit for synchronizing
FreqRateChange 0.000 — 0.500 Hz/s 0.001 0.300 Maximum allowed frequency rate of change
tBreaker 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.080 Closing time of the breaker
tClosePulse 0.050 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Breaker closing pulse duration
tMaxSynch 0.00 — 6000.00 s 0.01 600.00 Resets synch if no close has been made before set time
tMinSynch 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Minimum time to accept synchronizing conditions
OperationSC Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Operation for synchronism-check function Off/ On
VHighBusSC 50.0 — 120.0 %VBB 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit bus for synchrocheck in % of VBaseBus
VHighLineSC 50.0 — 120.0 %VBL 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit line for synchrocheck in % of UBaseLine
VDiffSC 0.02 — 0.50 pu 0.01 0.15 Voltage difference limit in p.u
FreqDiffA 0.003 — 1.000 Hz 0.001 0.010 Frequency difference limit between bus and line Auto
FreqDiffM 0.003 — 1.000 Hz 0.001 0.010 Frequency difference limit between bus and line Manual
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
629 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description PhaseDiffA 5.0 — 90.0 Deg 1.0 25.0 Phase angle difference limit between bus and
line Auto
PhaseDiffM 5.0 — 90.0 Deg 1.0 25.0 Phase angle difference limit between bus and line Manual
tSCA 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay output for synchrocheck Auto
tSCM 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay output for synchrocheck Manual
AutoEnerg Disabled DLLB DBLL Both
— — DBLL Automatic energizing check mode
ManEnerg Disabled DLLB DBLL Both
— — Both Manual energizing check mode
ManEnergDBDL Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Manual dead bus, dead line energizing
VLiveBusEnerg 50.0 — 120.0 %VBB 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit bus for energizing check in % of UBaseBus
VLiveLineEnerg 50.0 — 120.0 %VBL 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit line for energizing check in % of VBaseLine
VDeadBusEnerg 10.0 — 80.0 %VBB 1.0 40.0 Voltage low limit bus for energizing check in % of VBaseBus
VDeadLineEnerg 10.0 — 80.0 %VBL 1.0 40.0 Voltage low limit line for energizing check in % of VBaseLine
VMaxEnerg 50.0 — 180.0 %VB 1.0 115.0 Maximum voltage for energizing in % of VBase, Line and/or Bus
tAutoEnerg 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay for automatic energizing check
tManEnerg 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay for manual energizing check
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
630 Technical reference manual
Table 318: SESRSYN (25) Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description SelPhaseBus1 Phase L1 for
busbar1 Phase L2 for busbar1 Phase L3 for busbar1 Phase L1L2 for busbar1 Phase L2L3 for busbar1 Phase L3L1 for busbar1 Pos. sequence for busbar1
— — Phase L1 for busbar1
Select phase for busbar1
SelPhaseBus2 Phase L1 for busbar2 Phase L2 for busbar2 Phase L3 for busbar2 Phase L1L2 for busbar2 Phase L2L3 for busbar2 Phase L3L1 for busbar2 Pos. sequence for busbar2
— — Phase L1 for busbar2
Select phase for busbar2
SelPhaseLine1 Phase L1 for line1 Phase L2 for line1 Phase L3 for line1 Phase L1L2 for line1 Phase L2L3 for line1 Phase L3L1 for line1 Pos. sequence for line1
— — Phase L1 for line1 Select phase for line1
SelPhaseLine2 Phase L1 for line2 Phase L2 for line2 Phase L3 for line2 Phase L1L2 for line2 Phase L2L3 for line2 Phase L3L1 for line2 Pos. sequence for line2
— — Phase L1 for line2 Select phase for line2
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
631 Technical reference manual
12.1.6 Technical data Table 319: SESRSYN (25) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Phase shift, jline — jbus (-180 to 180) degrees —
Voltage ratio, Vbus/Vline 0.500 — 2.000 —
Voltage high limit for synchronism check
(50.0-120.0)% of VBaseBus and VBaseLine
0.5% of Vn at V Vn 0.5% of V at V > Vn
Reset ratio, synchronism check > 95% —
Frequency difference limit between bus and line for synchrocheck
(0.003-1.000) Hz 2.0 mHz
Phase angle difference limit between bus and line for synchrocheck
(5.0-90.0) degrees 2.0 degrees
Voltage difference limit between bus and line for synchronizing and synchrocheck
(0.02-0.5) p.u 0.5% of Vn
Time delay output for synchronism check
(0.000-60.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
Frequency difference minimum limit for synchronizing
(0.003-0.250) Hz 2.0 mHz
Frequency difference maximum limit for synchronizing
(0.050-0.500) Hz 2.0 mHz
Maximum allowed frequency rate of change
(0.000-0.500) Hz/s 10.0 mHz/s
Closing time of the breaker (0.000-60.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
Breaker closing pulse duration (0.000-60.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
tMaxSynch, which resets synchronizing function if no close has been made before set time
(0.000-60.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
Minimum time to accept synchronizing conditions
(0.000-60.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
Voltage high limit for energizing check
(50.0-120.0)% of VBaseBus and VBaseLine
0.5% of Vn at V Vn 0.5% of V at V > Vn
Reset ratio, voltage high limit > 95% —
Voltage low limit for energizing check
(10.0-80.0)% of VBaseBus and VBaseLine
0.5% of Vn
Reset ratio, voltage low limit < 105% —
Maximum voltage for energizing (50.0-180.0)% of VBaseBus and/ or VBaseLine
0.5% of Vn at V Vn 0.5% of V at V > Vn
Table continues on next page
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
632 Technical reference manual
Function Range or value Accuracy Time delay for energizing check (0.000-60.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
Operate time for synchronism check function
160 ms typically —
Operate time for energizing function
80 ms typically —
12.2 Autorecloser SMBRREC (79)
Function Description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Autorecloser SMBRREC
O->I
SYMBOL-L V1 EN
79
12.2.1 Introduction The autorecloser SMBRREC, 79 function provides high-speed and/or delayed auto- reclosing for single or multi-breaker applications.
Up to five three-phase reclosing attempts can be included by parameter setting. The first attempt can be single-, two and/or three pole for single pole or multi-pole faults respectively.
Multiple autoreclosing functions are provided for multi-breaker arrangements. A priority circuit allows one circuit breaker to close first and the second will only close if the fault proved to be transient.
Each autoreclosing function is configured to co-operate with the synchronism check function.
12.2.2 Principle of operation
12.2.2.1 Logic Diagrams
The logic diagrams below illustrate the principles applicable in the understanding of the functionality.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
633 Technical reference manual
12.2.2.2 Auto-reclosing operation Disabled and Enabled
Operation of the automatic reclosing can be set to Off or On via the setting parameters and through external control. With the setting Operation = Enabled, the function is activated while with the setting Operation = Disabled the function is deactivated. With the setting Operation = External ctrl, the activation/deactivation is made by input signal pulses, for example, from a control system.
When the function is set Enabled and is operative the output SETON is activated (high). Other input conditions such as 52a and CBREADY must also be fulfilled. At this point the automatic recloser is prepared to start the reclosing cycle and the output signal READY on the SMBRREC (79) function block is activated (high).
12.2.2.3 Auto-reclosing mode selection
The Auto-reclosing mode is selected with setting ARMode = 3phase(0), 1/2/3ph(1), 1/2ph(2), 1ph+1*2ph(3), 1/2ph+1*3ph(4), 1ph+1*2/3ph(5). The selected mode can be read as integer as per above list on output MODE.
As an alternative to setting the mode can be selected by connecting an integer, for example from function block B16I to input MODEINT.
Following integers shall be used: 1=3phase, 2=1/2/3ph, 3=1/2ph, 4=1ph+1*2ph, 5=1/2ph+1*3ph or 6=1ph+1*2/3ph.
When INTZERO from Fixed signal function block is connected to the input MODEINT the parameter setting selected will be valid.
12.2.2.4 Initiate auto-reclosing and conditions for initiation of a reclosing cycle
The usual way in which to initiate a reclosing cycle, or sequence, is to initiate it when a line protection tripping has occurred, by applying a signal to the RI input. It should be necessary to adjust three-phase auto-reclosing open time, (dead time) for different power system configurations or during tripping at different protection stages, the input RI_HS (reclose initiation of high-speed reclosing) can also be used.
For a new auto-reclosing cycle to be started, a number of conditions need to be met. They are linked to dedicated inputs. The inputs are:
CBREADY: CB ready for a reclosing cycle, for example, charged operating gear 52a: to ensure that the CB was closed when the line fault occurred and initiation
was applied No blocking or inhibit signal shall be present.
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
634 Technical reference manual
After the initiate has been accepted, it is latched in and an internal signal Started is set. It can be interrupted by certain events, like an inhibit signal.
To initiate auto-reclosing by CB position Open instead of from protection trip signals, one has to configure the CB Open position signal to inputs 52a and RI and set a parameter StartByCBOpen = Enabled and CBAuxContType = NormClosed (normally closed, 52b). One also has to configure and connect signals from manual trip commands to input INHIBIT.
The logic for switching the auto-recloser Enabled/Disabled and the starting of the reclosing is shown in figure 315. The following should be considered:
Setting Operation can be set to Disabled, External ctrl or Enabled. External ctrl offers the possibility of switching by external switches to inputs ON and OFF, communication commands to the same inputs, and so on.
SMBRREC (79) is normally started by tripping. It is either a Zone 1 and Communication aided trip or a general trip. If the general trip is used the function must be blocked from all back-up tripping connected to INHIBIT. In both alternatives the breaker failure function must be connected to inhibit the function. RI makes a first attempt with synchronism-check, RI_HS makes its first attempt without synchronism-check. TRSOTF starts shots 2-5.
Circuit breaker checks that the breaker was closed for a certain length of time before the starting occurred and that the CB has sufficient stored energy to perform an auto-reclosing sequence and is connected to inputs 52a and CBREADY.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
635 Technical reference manual
ANSI05000782_2_en.vsd
Operation:Enabled
AND
AND
AND S
R
AND
AND
AND
SETON
initiate
PICKUP
READY
52a
CBREADY
TRSOTF
RI
OFF
ON
Additional conditions
RI_HS
autoInitiate
0-tCBClosedMinCB Closed
AND S
Blocking conditions
Inhibit conditions
count 0
AND
OR
R
OR
0
0 0-t120
AND
Operation:Disabled
Operation:External Ctrl
OR
OR
OR
ANSI05000782 V2 EN
Figure 315: Auto-reclosing Disabled/Enabled and start
12.2.2.5 Control of the auto-reclosing open time for shot 1
It is possible to use up to four different time settings for the first shot, and one extension time. There are separate settings for single- , two- and three-phase auto- reclosing open times, t1 1Ph, t1 2Ph, t1 3Ph. If no particular input signal is applied, and an auto-reclosing program with single-phase reclosing is selected, the auto- reclosing open time t1 1Ph will be used. If one of the inputs TR2P or TR3P is activated in connection with the input START, the auto-reclosing open time for two-phase or three- phase reclosing is used. There is also a separate time setting facility for three-phase high- speed auto-reclosing, t1 3PhHS available for use when required. It is activated by input RI_HS.
An auto-reclosing open time extension delay, tExtended t1, can be added to the normal shot 1 delay. It is intended to come into use if the communication channel for permissive line protection is lost. In a case like this there can be a significant time difference in fault clearance at the two line ends. A longer auto-reclosing open time can then be useful. This extension time is controlled by setting parameter Extended t1 = Enabled and the input PLCLOST.
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
636 Technical reference manual
12.2.2.6 Long trip signal
In normal circumstances the trip command resets quickly due to fault clearing. The user can set a maximum trip pulse duration tTrip. When trip signals are longer, the auto- reclosing open time is extended by tExtended t1. If Extended t1 = Disabled, a long trip signal interrupts the reclosing sequence in the same way as a signal to input INHIBIT.
AND AND
AND
initiate PLCLOST
AND
Extend t1
long duration
ANSI05000783_2_en.vsd
pickup
Extended t1
AND
(block SMBRREC)
OR
0 0-tTrip
ANSI05000783 V2 EN
Figure 316: Control of extended auto-reclosing open time and long trip pulse detection
Reclosing checks and the reset timer When dead time has elapsed during the auto-reclosing procedure certain conditions must be fulfilled before the CB closing command is issued. To achieve this, signals are exchanged between program modules to check that these conditions are met. In three- phase reclosing a synchronizing and/or energizing check can be used. It is possible to use a synchronism check function in the same physical device or an external one. The release signal is configured by connecting to the auto-reclosing function input SYNC. If reclosing without checking is preferred the SYNC input can be set to TRUE (set high). Another possibility is to set the output of the synchronism check function to a permanently activated state. At confirmation from the synchronism check, or if the reclosing is of single-phase or two-phase type, the signal passes on. At single-phase, two- phase reclosing and at three-phase high-speed reclosing started by RI_HS, synchronization is not checked, and the state of the SYNC input is disregarded.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
637 Technical reference manual
By choosing CBReadyType = CO (CB ready for a Close-Open sequence) the readiness of the circuit breaker is also checked before issuing the CB closing command. If the CB has a readiness contact of type CBReadyType = OCO (CB ready for an Open-Close- Open sequence) this condition may not be complied with after the tripping and at the moment of reclosure. The Open-Close-Open condition was however checked at the start of the reclosing cycle and it is then likely that the CB is prepared for a Close- Open sequence.
The synchronism check or energizing check must be fulfilled within a set time interval, tSync. If it is not, or if other conditions are not met, the reclosing is interrupted and blocked.
The reset timer defines a time from the issue of the reclosing command, after which the reclosing function resets. Should a new trip occur during this time, it is treated as a continuation of the first fault. The reset timer is started when the CB closing command is given.
A number of outputs for Autoreclosing state control keeps track of the actual state in the reclosing sequence.
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
638 Technical reference manual
AND OR
OR
AND
From logic for reclosing programs
AND AND OR
AND
«SMBRREC Open time» timers
1P2PTO
3PHSTO
Pulse AR
Blocking out CBREADY
initiate
SYNC
3PT4TO 3PT3TO 3PT2TO 3PT1TO 3PHSTO
OR AND
1
OR
INPROGR
PERMIT1P
PREP3P
Inhibit (internal) Blocking out
INHIBIT
Pulse SMBRREC (above)
3PT1TO
OR
1P2PTO
3PT5TO
Reset Timer On
0CL
COUNTER
SMBRREC State Control
Shot 0
R
1 2 3 4 5
Shot 1 Shot 2 Shot 3 Shot 4 Shot 5
LOGIC reclosing programs 1PT1
2PT1
3PHS
3PT1
3PT2
3PT3
ORShot 0
PICKUP RI
TR3P TR2P
Shot 1 Shot 2 Shot 3 Shot 4 Shot 5 3PT4
3PT5
0 0-t1 1Ph
0 0-t1 2Ph
0 0-t1 3Ph HS
0 0-tSync
0 0-t1 3Ph
0 0-tReset
tInhibit 0
ANSI05000784_2_en.vsd
ANSI05000784 V2 EN
Figure 317: Reclosing Reset and Inhibit timers
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
639 Technical reference manual
Pulsing of the CB closing command The CB closing command, CLOSECMD is a pulse with a duration set by parameter tPulse. For circuit-breakers without anti-pumping function, the close pulse cutting described below can be used. This is done by selecting the parameter CutPulse=Enabled. In case of a new trip pulse, the closing command pulse is cut (interrupted). The minimum duration of the pulse is always 50 ms. See figure 318
When a reclosing command is issued, the appropriate reclosing operation counter is incremented. There is a counter for each type of reclosing and one for the total number of reclosing commands issued.
ANSI05000785_2_en.vsd
tPulse
AND
AND
pulse
50 ms
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
CLOSECMD
COUNT1P
COUNT2P
COUNT3P1
COUNT3P2
COUNT3P3
COUNT3P4
initiate
1PT1
2PT1
3PT1
3PT2
3PT3
3PT4
**) Only if «CutPulse» = Enabled
AND COUNT3P5
COUNTAR
3PT5
RSTCOUNT
counter
counter
counter
counter
counter
counter
counter
counter
OR**)
ANSI05000785 V2 EN
Figure 318: Pulsing of closing command and driving the operation counters
Transient fault After the reclosing command the reset timer tReset starts running for the set time. If no tripping occurs within this time, the auto-reclosing will reset.
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
640 Technical reference manual
Permanent fault and reclosing unsuccessful signal If a new trip occurs after the CB closing command, and a new input signal RI or TRSOTF appears, the output UNSUCCL (unsuccessful closing) is set high. The timers for the first shot can no longer be started. Depending on the setting for the number of reclosing shots, further shots may be made or the reclosing sequence will be ended. After the reset time has elapsed, the auto-reclosing function resets but the CB remains open. The CB closed data at the 52a input will be missing. Because of this, the reclosing function will not be ready for a new reclosing cycle.
Normally the signal UNSUCCL appears when a new trip and initiate is received after the last reclosing shot has been made and the auto-reclosing function is blocked. The signal resets once the reset time has elapsed. The unsuccessful signal can also be made to depend on CB position input. The parameter UnsucClByCBChk should then be set to CBCheck, and a timer tUnsucCl should also be set. If the CB does not respond to the closing command and does not close, but remains open, the output UNSUCCL is set high after time tUnsucCl.
AND OR
AND
SAND
0 0-tUnsucClAND
OR
en05000786_ansi.vsd
initiate block start
UnsucClByCBchk = CBcheck
UNSUCCL
shot 0
Pulse AR (Closing)
52a CBclosed
R
ANSI05000786 V1 EN
Figure 319: Issue of signal UNSUCCL, unsuccessful reclosing
Automatic continuation of the reclosing sequence The auto-reclosing function can be programmed to proceed to the following reclosing shots (if selected) even if the initiate signals are not received from the protection functions, but the breaker is still not closed. This is done by setting parameter AutoCont = Enabled and to the required delay for the function to proceed without a new initiate.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
641 Technical reference manual
AND
AND
AND
OR
ORRI
52a
initiate
en05000787_ansi.vsd
CLOSECMD S
R
Q
CBClosed
0 0-tAutoContWait
ANSI05000787 V1 EN
Figure 320: Automatic proceeding of shot 2 to 5
Initiation of reclosing from CB open information If a user wants to apply initiation of auto-reclosing from CB open position instead of from protection trip signals, the function offers such a possibility. This starting mode is selected by a setting parameter StartByCBOpen = Enabled. One needs then to block reclosing at all manual trip operations. Typically, one also set CBAuxContType = NormClosed and connect a CB auxiliary contact of type NC (normally closed, 52b) to inputs 52a and RI. When the signal changes from CB closed to CB open an auto- reclosing start pulse of limited length is generated and latched in the function, subject to the usual checks. Then the reclosing sequence continues as usual. One needs to connect signals from manual tripping and other functions, which shall prevent reclosing, to the input INHIBIT.
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
642 Technical reference manual
ANSI05000788_2_en.vsd
AND
AND
AND
AND
1100 ms
100 ms
StartByCBOpen= Enabled
RI
RI_HS PICKUP
NOT
ANSI05000788 V2 EN
Figure 321: Pulsing of the pickup inputs
12.2.2.7 Time sequence diagrams
Some examples of the timing of internal and external signals at typical transient and permanent faults are shown below in figures 322 to 325.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
643 Technical reference manual
CB READY
Fault
SUCCL
PREP3P
CLOSE CMD
ACTIVE
1PT1
INPROG
READY
SYNC RECL. INT.
CB POS Closed
(Trip)
Open Closed
tPulset1 1Ph
tReset
Time
en04000196-2_ansi.vsd ANSI04000196 V2 EN
Figure 322: Transient single-phase fault. Single -phase reclosing
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
644 Technical reference manual
CB READY
Fault
UNSUCCL
ACTIVE
3PT2
3PT1
INPROGR
READY
SYNC TR3P
RECL. INT.
CB POS Closed
(Trip)
Time
en04000197_ansi.vsd
PREP3P
CLOSE CMD
Open C Open C
t1 3Ph
tPulse
t2 3Ph
tPulse
tReset
ANSI04000197 V1 EN
Figure 323: Permanent fault. Three-pole trip. Two-shot reclosing
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
645 Technical reference manual
AR01-CBREADY(CO)
Fault
AR01-UNSUC
AR01-T2
AR01-T1
AR01-1PT1
AR01-INPROGR
AR01-READY
AR01-SYNC
AR01-TR3P
AR01-RI
AR01-CBCLOSED
en04000198_ansi.vsd
AR01-P3P
AR01-CLOSECMD t1s
tReset
ANSI04000198 V1 EN
Figure 324: Permanent single-phase fault. Program 1/2/3ph, single-phase single- shot reclosing
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
646 Technical reference manual
AR01-CBREADY(CO)
Fault
AR01-UNSUC
AR01-T2
AR01-T1
AR01-1PT1
AR01-INPROGR
AR01-READY
AR01-SYNC
AR01-TR3P
AR01-RI
AR01-CBCLOSED
en04000199_ansi.vsd
AR01-P3P
AR01-CLOSECMD t1s t2
tReset
ANSI04000199 V1 EN
Figure 325: Permanent single-phase fault. Program 1ph + 3ph or 1/2ph + 3ph, two- shot reclosing
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
647 Technical reference manual
12.2.3 Function block SMBRREC (79)
ON OFF BLKON BLKOFF RESET INHIBIT RI RI_HS TRSOTF SKIPHS ZONESTEP TR2P TR3P THOLHOLD CBREADY 52A PLCLOST SYNC WAIT RSTCOUNT MODEINT
BLOCKED SETON READY ACTIVE SUCCL
UNSUCCL INPROGR
1PT1 2PT1 3PT1 3PT2 3PT3 3PT4 3PT5
PERMIT1P PREP3P
CLOSECMD WFMASTER
COUNT1P COUNT2P
COUNT3P1 COUNT3P2 COUNT3P3 COUNT3P4 COUNT3P5 COUNTAR
MODE
ANSI06000189-2-en.vsd ANSI06000189 V2 EN
Figure 326: SMBRREC (79) function block
12.2.4 Input and output signals Table 320: SMBRREC (79) Input signals
Name Type Default Description ON BOOLEAN 0 Switches the AR On (at Operation = ExternalCtrl)
OFF BOOLEAN 0 Switches the AR Off (at Operation = ExternalCtrl)
BLKON BOOLEAN 0 Sets the AR in blocked state
BLKOFF BOOLEAN 0 Releases the AR from the blocked state
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Resets the AR to initial conditions
INHIBIT BOOLEAN 0 Interrupts and inhibits reclosing sequence
RI BOOLEAN 0 Reclosing sequence starts by a protection trip signal
RI_HS BOOLEAN 0 Start High Speed reclosing without Synchronism- Check: t13PhHS
TRSOTF BOOLEAN 0 Makes AR to continue to shots 2-5 at a trip from SOTF
SKIPHS BOOLEAN 0 Will skip the high speed shot and continue on delayed shots
ZONESTEP BOOLEAN 0 Coordination between local AR and down stream devices
Table continues on next page
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
648 Technical reference manual
Name Type Default Description TR2P BOOLEAN 0 Signal to the AR that a two-pole tripping occurred
TR3P BOOLEAN 0 Signal to the AR that a three-pole tripping occurred
THOLHOLD BOOLEAN 0 Holds the AR in wait state
CBREADY BOOLEAN 0 CB must be ready for CO/OCO operation to allow start / close
52a BOOLEAN 0 Status of the circuit breaker Closed/Open
PLCLOST BOOLEAN 0 Power line carrier or other form of permissive signal lost
SYNC BOOLEAN 0 Synchronism-check fulfilled (for 3Ph attempts)
WAIT BOOLEAN 0 Wait for master (in Multi-breaker arrangements)
RSTCOUNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets all counters
MODEINT INTEGER 0 Integer input used to set the reclosingMode, alternative to setting
Table 321: SMBRREC (79) Output signals
Name Type Description BLOCKED BOOLEAN The AR is in blocked state
SETON BOOLEAN The AR operation is switched on, operative
READY BOOLEAN Indicates that the AR function is ready for a new sequence
ACTIVE BOOLEAN Reclosing sequence in progress
SUCCL BOOLEAN Activated if CB closes during the time tUnsucCl
UNSUCCL BOOLEAN Reclosing unsuccessful, signal resets after the reclaim time
INPROGR BOOLEAN Reclosing shot in progress, activated during open reset
1PT1 BOOLEAN Single-phase reclosing is in progress, shot 1
2PT1 BOOLEAN Two-phase reclosing is in progress, shot 1
3PT1 BOOLEAN Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 1
3PT2 BOOLEAN Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 2
3PT3 BOOLEAN Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 3
3PT4 BOOLEAN Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 4
3PT5 BOOLEAN Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 5
PERMIT1P BOOLEAN Permit single-pole trip, inverse signal to PREP3P
PREP3P BOOLEAN Prepare three-pole trip, control of the next trip operation
CLOSECMD BOOLEAN Closing command for CB
WFMASTER BOOLEAN Signal to Slave issued by Master for sequential reclosing
COUNT1P INTEGER Counting the number of single-phase reclosing shots
COUNT2P INTEGER Counting the number of two-phase reclosing shots
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
649 Technical reference manual
Name Type Description COUNT3P1 INTEGER Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 1
COUNT3P2 INTEGER Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 2
COUNT3P3 INTEGER Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 3
COUNT3P4 INTEGER Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 4
COUNT3P5 INTEGER Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 5
COUNTAR INTEGER Counting total number of reclosing shots
MODE INTEGER Integer output for reclosing mode
12.2.5 Setting parameters Table 322: SMBRREC (79) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
External ctrl Enabled
— — External ctrl Off, ExternalCtrl, On
ARMode 3 phase 1/2/3ph 1/2ph 1ph+1*2ph 1/2ph+1*3ph 1ph+1*2/3ph
— — 1/2/3ph The AR mode selection e.g. 3ph, 1/3ph
t1 1Ph 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Open time for shot 1, single-phase
t1 3Ph 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 6.000 Open time for shot 1, delayed reclosing 3ph
t1 3PhHS 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Open time for shot 1, high speed reclosing 3ph
tReset 0.00 — 6000.00 s 0.01 60.00 Duration of the reset time
tSync 0.00 — 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Maximum wait time for synchronism-check OK
tTrip 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Maximum trip pulse duration
tPulse 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Duration of the circuit breaker closing pulse
tCBClosedMin 0.00 — 6000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Minimum time that CB must be closed before new sequence allows
tUnsucCl 0.00 — 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Wait time for CB before indicating Unsuccessful/Successful
Priority None Low High
— — None Priority selection between adjacent terminals None/Low/High
tWaitForMaster 0.00 — 6000.00 s 0.01 60.00 Maximum wait time for release from Master
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
650 Technical reference manual
Table 323: SMBRREC (79) Group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description NoOfShots 1
2 3 4 5
— — 1 Max number of reclosing shots 1-5
StartByCBOpen Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled To be set ON if AR is to be started by CB open position
CBAuxContType NormClosed NormOpen
— — NormOpen Select the CB aux contact type NC/NO for 52a input
CBReadyType CO OCO
— — CO Select type of circuit breaker ready signal CO/ OCO
t1 2Ph 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Open time for shot 1, two-phase
t2 3Ph 0.00 — 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Open time for shot 2, three-phase
t3 3Ph 0.00 — 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Open time for shot 3, three-phase
t4 3Ph 0.00 — 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Open time for shot 4, three-phase
t5 3Ph 0.00 — 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Open time for shot 5, three-phase
Extended t1 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Extended open time at loss of permissive channel Off/On
tExtended t1 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.500 3Ph Dead time is extended with this value at loss of perm ch
tInhibit 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Inhibit reclosing reset time
CutPulse Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Shorten closing pulse at a new trip Off/On
Follow CB Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Advance to next shot if CB has been closed during dead time
AutoCont Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Continue with next reclosing-shot if breaker did not close
tAutoContWait 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Wait time after close command before proceeding to next shot
UnsucClByCBChk NoCBCheck CB check
— — NoCBCheck Unsuccessful closing signal obtained by checking CB position
BlockByUnsucCl Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Block AR at unsuccessful reclosing
ZoneSeqCoord Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Coordination of down stream devices to local prot units AR
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
651 Technical reference manual
12.2.6 Technical data Table 324: SMBRREC (79) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Number of autoreclosing shots 1 — 5 —
Autoreclosing open time: shot 1 — t1 1Ph shot 1 — t1 2Ph shot 1 — t1 3PhHS shot 1 — t1 3PhDld
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
shot 2 — t2 shot 3 — t3 shot 4 — t4 shot 5 — t5
(0.00-6000.00) s
Extended autorecloser open time (0.000-60.000) s
Autorecloser maximum wait time for sync (0.00-6000.00) s
Maximum trip pulse duration (0.000-60.000) s
Inhibit reset time (0.000-60.000) s
Reset time (0.00-6000.00) s
Minimum time CB must be closed before AR becomes ready for autoreclosing cycle
(0.00-6000.00) s
Circuit breaker closing pulse length (0.000-60.000) s
CB check time before unsuccessful (0.00-6000.00) s
Wait for master release (0.00-6000.00) s
Wait time after close command before proceeding to next shot
(0.000-60.000) s
12.3 Apparatus control APC
12.3.1 Introduction The apparatus control functions are used for control and supervision of circuit breakers, disconnectors and grounding switches within a bay. Permission to operate is given after evaluation of conditions from other functions such as interlocking, synchronism check, operator place selection and external or internal blockings.
In normal security, the command is processed and the resulting position is not supervised. However with enhanced security, the command is processed and the resulting position is supervised.
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
652 Technical reference manual
12.3.2 Principle of operation A bay can handle, for example a power line, a transformer, a reactor, or a capacitor bank. The different primary apparatuses within the bay can be controlled via the apparatus control function directly by the operator or indirectly by automatic sequences.
Because a primary apparatus can be allocated to many functions within a Substation Automation system, the object-oriented approach with a function module that handles the interaction and status of each process object ensures consistency in the process information used by higher-level control functions.
Primary apparatuses such as breakers and disconnectors are controlled and supervised by one software module (SCSWI) each. Because the number and type of signals connected to a breaker and a disconnector are almost the same, the same software is used to handle these two types of apparatuses.
The software module is connected to the physical process in the switchyard via an interface module by means of a number of digital inputs and outputs. One type of interface module is intended for a circuit breaker (SXCBR) and another type is intended for a disconnector or grounding switch (SXSWI). Four types of function blocks are available to cover most of the control and supervision within the bay. These function blocks are interconnected to form a control function reflecting the switchyard configuration. The total number used depends on the switchyard configuration. These four types are:
Bay control QCBAY Switch controller SCSWI Circuit breaker SXCBR Circuit switch SXSWI
The three latter functions are logical nodes according to IEC 61850. The functions Local Remote (LOCREM) and Local Remote Control (LOCREMCTRL), to handle the local/remote switch, and the functions Bay reserve (QCRSV) and Reservation input (RESIN), for the reservation function, also belong to the apparatus control function. The principles of operation, function block, input and output signals and setting parameters for all these functions are described below.
12.3.3 Error handling Depending on the error that occurs during the command sequence the error signal will be set with a value. Table 325 describes vendor specific cause values in addition to these specified in IEC 61850-8-1 standard. The list of values of the cause are in order of priority. The values are available over the IEC 61850. An output L_CAUSE on the function block for Switch controller (SCSWI), Circuit breaker (SXCBR) and Circuit switch (SXSWI) indicates the latest value of the error during the command.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
653 Technical reference manual
Table 325: Values for «cause» signal in priority order
Attribute value Description Supported Defined in IEC 61850 0 no error X
1 serviceError-type
2 blocked-by-switching- hierarchy
X
3 select-failed X
4 invalid-position X
5 position-reached X
6 parameter-change-in- execution
X
7 step-limit X
8 blocked-by-mode X
9 blocked-by-process X
10 blocked-by-interlocking X
11 blocked-by-synchrocheck X
12 command-already-in- execution
X
13 blocked-by-health X
14 1-of-n-control X
15 abortion-by-cancel X
16 time-limit-over X
17 abortion-by-trip X
18 object-not-selected X
19 Not in use
Table continues on next page
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
654 Technical reference manual
Attribute value Description Supported Vendor specific -20 Not in use
-21 Not in use
-23 blocked-for-command X
-24 blocked-for-open- command
X
-25 blocked-for-close- command
X
-26 Not in use
-27 Not in use
-28 Not in use
-29 Not in use
-30 long-operation-time X
-31 switch-not-start-moving X
-32 persisting-intermediate- state
X
-33 switch-returned-to-initial- position
X
-34 switch-in-bad-state X
-35 not-expected-final-position X
12.3.4 Bay control QCBAY
12.3.4.1 Introduction
The Bay control QCBAY function is used together with Local remote and local remote control functions to handle the selection of the operator place per bay. QCBAY also provides blocking functions that can be distributed to different apparatuses within the bay.
12.3.4.2 Principle of operation
The functionality of the Bay control (QCBAY) function is not defined in the IEC 61850 81 standard, which means that the function is a vendor specific logical node.
The function sends information about the Permitted Source To Operate (PSTO) and blocking conditions to other functions within the bay for example, switch control functions, voltage control functions and measurement functions.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
655 Technical reference manual
Local panel switch The local panel switch is a switch that defines the operator place selection. The switch connected to this function can have three positions remote/local/off. The positions are here defined so that remote means that operation is allowed from station/remote level and local from the IED level. The local/remote switch is also on the control/protection IED itself, which means that the position of the switch and its validity information are connected internally, and not via I/O boards. When the switch is mounted separately from the IED the signals are connected to the function via I/O boards.
When the local panel switch (or LHMI selection, depending on the set source to select this) is in Off position, all commands from remote and local level will be ignored. If the position for the local/remote switch is not valid the PSTO output will always be set to faulty state (3), which means no possibility to operate.
To adapt the signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch, the function blocks LOCREM and LOCREMCTRL are needed and connected to QCBAY.
Permitted Source To Operate (PSTO) The actual state of the operator place is presented by the value of the Permitted Source To Operate, PSTO signal. The PSTO value is evaluated from the local/remote switch position according to table 326. In addition, there is one configuration parameter that affects the value of the PSTO signal. If the parameter AllPSTOValid is set and LR- switch position is in Local or Remote state, the PSTO value is set to 5 (all), that is, it is permitted to operate from both local and remote level without any priority. When the external panel switch is in Off position the PSTO value shows the actual state of switch that is, 0. In this case it is not possible to control anything.
Table 326: PSTO values for different Local panel switch positions
Local panel switch positions
PSTO value AllPSTOValid (configuration parameter)
Possible locations that shall be able to operate
0 = Off 0 — Not possible to operate
1 = Local 1 Priority Local Panel
1 = Local 5 No priority Local or Remote level without any priority
2 = Remote 2 Priority Remote level
2 = Remote 5 No priority Local or Remote level without any priority
3 = Faulty 3 — Not possible to operate
Blockings The blocking states for position indications and commands are intended to provide the possibility for the user to make common blockings for the functions configured within a complete bay.
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
656 Technical reference manual
The blocking facilities provided by the bay control function are the following:
Blocking of position indications, BL_UPD. This input will block all inputs related to apparatus positions for all configured functions within the bay.
Blocking of commands, BL_CMD. This input will block all commands for all configured functions within the bay.
Blocking of function, BLOCK, signal from DO (Data Object) Behavior (IEC 61850 81). If DO Behavior is set to «blocked» it means that the function is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and functional and configuration data is visible.
The switching of the Local/Remote switch requires at least system operator level. The password will be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have been defined in the IED. Otherwise the default authority level, SuperUser, can handle the control without LogOn. The users and passwords are defined in PCM600.
12.3.4.3 Function block
IEC10000048-1-en.vsd
QCBAY LR_OFF LR_LOC LR_REM LR_VALID BL_UPD BL_CMD
PSTO UPD_BLKD CMD_BLKD
LOC REM
IEC10000048 V1 EN
Figure 327: QCBAY function block
12.3.4.4 Input and output signals
Table 327: QCBAY Input signals
Name Type Default Description LR_OFF BOOLEAN 0 External Local/Remote switch is in Off position
LR_LOC BOOLEAN 0 External Local/Remote switch is in Local position
LR_REM BOOLEAN 0 External Local/Remote switch is in Remote position
LR_VALID BOOLEAN 0 Data representing the L/R switch position is valid
BL_UPD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal to block the position updates
BL_CMD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal to block the command
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
657 Technical reference manual
Table 328: QCBAY Output signals
Name Type Description PSTO INTEGER Value for the operator place allocation
UPD_BLKD BOOLEAN Update of position is blocked
CMD_BLKD BOOLEAN Function is blocked for commands
LOC BOOLEAN Local operation allowed
REM BOOLEAN Remote operation allowed
12.3.4.5 Setting parameters
Table 329: QCBAY Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description AllPSTOValid Priority
No priority — — Priority Priority of originators
12.3.5 Local/Remote switch LOCREM, LOCREMCTRL
12.3.5.1 Introduction
The signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch are applied via the function blocks LOCREM and LOCREMCTRL to the Bay control (QCBAY) function block. A parameter in function block LOCREM is set to choose if the switch signals are coming from the local HMI or from an external hardware switch connected via binary inputs.
12.3.5.2 Principle of operation
The function block Local remote (LOCREM) handles the signals coming from the local/ remote switch. The connections are seen in figure 328, where the inputs on function block LOCREM are connected to binary inputs if an external switch is used. When the local HMI is used, the inputs are not used and are set to FALSE in the configuration. The outputs from the LOCREM function block control the output PSTO (Permitted Source To Operate) on Bay control (QCBAY).
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
658 Technical reference manual
QCBAY LR_ OFF LR_ LOC LR_ REM LR_ VALID BL_ UPD BL_ CMD
PSTO UPD_ BLKD CMD_ BLKD
LOCREM CTRLOFF LOCCTRL REMCTRL LHMICTRL
OFF LOCAL
REMOTE VALID
LOCREMCTRL PSTO1 PSTO2 PSTO3 PSTO4 PSTO5 PSTO6 PSTO7 PSTO8 PSTO9 PSTO 10 PSTO 11 PSTO 12
HMICTR1 HMICTR2 HMICTR3 HMICTR4 HMICTR5 HMICTR6 HMICTR7 HMICTR8 HMICTR9
HMICTR 10 HMICTR 11 HMICTR 12
QCBAY LR_ OFF LR_ LOC LR_ REM LR_ VALID BL_ UPD BL_ CMD
PSTO UPD_ BLKD CMD_ BLKD
LOCREM CTRLOFF LOCCTRL REMCTRL LHMICTRL
OFF LOCAL
REMOTE VALID LOC
REM
LOC REM
IEC10000052-1-en.vsd IEC10000052 V1 EN
Figure 328: Configuration for the local/remote handling for a local HMI with two bays and two screen pages
If the IED contains control functions for several bays, the local/remote position can be different for the included bays. When the local HMI is used the position of the local/ remote switch can be different depending on which single line diagram screen page that is presented on the local HMI. The function block Local remote control (LOCREMCTRL) controls the presentation of the LEDs for the local/remote position to applicable bay and screen page.
The switching of the local/remote switch requires at least system operator level. The password will be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have been defined in the IED. Otherwise the default authority level, SuperUser, can handle the control without LogOn. The users and passwords are defined in PCM600.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
659 Technical reference manual
12.3.5.3 Function block
IEC05000360-2-en.vsd
LOCREM CTRLOFF LOCCTRL REMCTRL LHMICTRL
OFF LOCAL
REMOTE VALID
IEC05000360 V2 EN
Figure 329: LOCREM function block
IEC05000361-2-en.vsd
LOCREMCTRL PSTO1 PSTO2 PSTO3 PSTO4 PSTO5 PSTO6 PSTO7 PSTO8 PSTO9 PSTO10 PSTO11 PSTO12
HMICTR1 HMICTR2 HMICTR3 HMICTR4 HMICTR5 HMICTR6 HMICTR7 HMICTR8 HMICTR9
HMICTR10 HMICTR11 HMICTR12
IEC05000361 V2 EN
Figure 330: LOCREMCTRL function block
12.3.5.4 Input and output signals
Table 330: LOCREM Input signals
Name Type Default Description CTRLOFF BOOLEAN 0 Disable control
LOCCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Local in control
REMCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Remote in control
LHMICTRL INTEGER 0 LHMI control
Table 331: LOCREM Output signals
Name Type Description OFF BOOLEAN Control is disabled
LOCAL BOOLEAN Local control is activated
REMOTE BOOLEAN Remote control is activated
VALID BOOLEAN Outputs are valid
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
660 Technical reference manual
Table 332: LOCREMCTRL Input signals
Name Type Default Description PSTO1 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 1
PSTO2 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 2
PSTO3 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 3
PSTO4 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 4
PSTO5 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 5
PSTO6 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 6
PSTO7 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 7
PSTO8 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 8
PSTO9 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 9
PSTO10 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 10
PSTO11 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 11
PSTO12 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 12
Table 333: LOCREMCTRL Output signals
Name Type Description HMICTR1 INTEGER Bitmask output 1 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR2 INTEGER Bitmask output 2 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR3 INTEGER Bitmask output 3 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR4 INTEGER Bitmask output 4 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR5 INTEGER Bitmask output 5 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR6 INTEGER Bitmask output 6 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR7 INTEGER Bitmask output 7 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR8 INTEGER Bitmask output 8 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR9 INTEGER Bitmask output 9 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR10 INTEGER Bitmask output 10 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR11 INTEGER Bitmask output 11 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR12 INTEGER Bitmask output 12 to local remote LHMI input
12.3.5.5 Setting parameters
Table 334: LOCREM Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description ControlMode Internal LR-switch
External LR-switch — — Internal LR-switch Control mode for internal/external LR-switch
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
661 Technical reference manual
12.3.6 Switch controller SCSWI
12.3.6.1 Introduction
The Switch controller (SCSWI) initializes and supervises all functions to properly select and operate switching primary apparatuses. The Switch controller may handle and operate on one three-phase device.
12.3.6.2 Principle of operation
The Switch controller (SCSWI) is provided with verification checks for the select — execute sequence, that is, checks the conditions prior each step of the operation. The involved functions for these condition verifications are interlocking, reservation, blockings and synchronism-check.
Control handling .
Two types of control models can be used. The two control models are «direct with normal security» and «SBO (Select-Before-Operate) with enhanced security». The parameter CtlModel defines which one of the two control models is used. The control model «direct with normal security» does not require a select whereas, the «SBO with enhanced security» command model requires a select before execution.
Normal security means that only the command is evaluated and the resulting position is not supervised. Enhanced security means that the command sequence is supervised in three steps, the selection, command evaluation and the supervision of position. Each step ends up with a pulsed signal to indicate that the respective step in the command sequence is finished. If an error occurs in one of the steps in the command sequence, the sequence is terminated and the error is mapped into the enumerated variable «cause» attribute belonging to the pulsed response signal for the IEC 61850 communication. The last cause L_CAUSE can be read from the function block and used for example at commissioning.
There is no relation between the command direction and the actual position. For example, if the switch is in close position it is possible to execute a close command.
Before an execution command, an evaluation of the position is done. If the parameter PosDependent is true and the position is in intermediate state or in bad state no execution command is sent. If the parameter is false the execution command is sent independent of the position value.
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
662 Technical reference manual
Evaluation of position In the case when there are three one-phase switches connected to the switch control function, the switch control will «merge» the position of the three switches to the resulting three-phase position. In the case when the position differ between the one- phase switches, following principles will be applied:
The position output from switch (SXCBR or SXSWI) is connected to SCSWI. With the group signal connection the SCSWI obtains the position, time stamps and quality attributes of the position which is used for further evaluation.
All switches in open position: switch control position = open
All switches in close position: switch control position = close
One switch =open, two switches= close (or inversely):
switch control position = intermediate
Any switch in intermediate position: switch control position = intermediate
Any switch in bad state: switch control position = bad state
The time stamp of the output three-phase position from switch control will have the time stamp of the last changed phase when it goes to end position. When it goes to intermediate position or bad state, it will get the time stamp of the first changed phase.
In addition, there is also the possibility that one of the one-phase switches will change position at any time due to a trip. Such situation is here called pole discrepancy and is supervised by this function. In case of a pole discrepancy situation, that is, the position of the one-phase switches are not equal for a time longer than the setting tPoleDiscord, an error signal POLEDISC will be set.
In the supervision phase, the switch controller function evaluates the «cause» values from the switch modules Circuit breaker (SXCBR)/ Circuit switch (SXSWI). At error the «cause» value with highest priority is shown.
Blocking principles The blocking signals are normally coming from the bay control function (QCBAY) and via the IEC 61850 communication from the operator place.
The IEC 61850 communication has always priority over binary inputs, e.g. a block command on binary inputs will not prevent commands over IEC 61850.
The different blocking possibilities are:
Block/deblock of command. It is used to block command for operation of position. Blocking of function, BLOCK, signal from DO (Data Object) Behavior (IEC
61850). If DO Behavior is set to «blocked» it means that the function is active, but
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
663 Technical reference manual
no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and functional and configuration data is visible.
The different block conditions will only affect the operation of this function, that is, no blocking signals will be «forwarded» to other functions. The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.
Interaction with synchronism-check and synchronizing functions The Switch controller (SCSWI) works in conjunction with the synchronism-check and the synchronizing function (SESRSYN, 25). It is assumed that the synchronism-check function is continuously in operation and gives the result to SCSWI. The result from the synchronism-check function is evaluated during the close execution. If the operator performs an override of the synchronism-check, the evaluation of the synchronism- check state is omitted. When there is a positive confirmation from the synchronism- check function, SCSWI will send the close signal EXE_CL to the switch function Circuit breaker (SXCBR).
When there is no positive confirmation from the synchronism-check function, SCSWI will send a start signal START_SY to the synchronizing function, which will send the closing command to SXCBR when the synchronizing conditions are fulfilled, see figure 331. If no synchronizing function is included, the timer for supervision of the «synchronizing in progress signal» is set to 0, which means no start of the synchronizing function. SCSWI will then set the attribute «blocked-by-synchronism- check» in the «cause» signal. See also the time diagram in figure 335.
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
664 Technical reference manual
ANSI09000209-1-en.vsd
Synchro check
OR
SCSWI SXCBR
CLOSE
SYNC_OK
EXE_CL
Synchronizing function
SY_INPRO
START_SY
CLOSECMD
SESRSYN
ANSI09000209 V1 EN
Figure 331: Example of interaction between SCSWI, SESRSYN (25) (synchronism check and synchronizing function) and SXCBR function
Time diagrams The Switch controller (SCSWI) function has timers for evaluating different time supervision conditions. These timers are explained here.
The timer tSelect is used for supervising the time between the select and the execute command signal, that is, the time the operator has to perform the command execution after the selection of the object to operate.
select
tSelect timer
execute command
t1 t1>tSelect, then long- operation-time in ’cause’
is set
en05000092.vsd
IEC05000092 V1 EN
Figure 332: tSelect
The parameter tResResponse is used to set the maximum allowed time to make the reservation, that is, the time between reservation request and the feedback reservation granted from all bays involved in the reservation function.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
665 Technical reference manual
select
tResResponse timer
reservation granted RES_GRT
t1>tResResponse, then 1-of-n-control in ’cause’
is sett1
reservation request RES_RQ
command termination
en05000093.vsd
IEC05000093 V1 EN
Figure 333: tResResponse
The timer tExecutionFB supervises the time between the execute command and the command termination, see figure 334.
execute command
phase A
t1>tExecutionFB, then long-operation-time in
’cause’ is set
open
close
close
openphase C
close
openphase B
t1
tExecutionFB timer
command termination phase A command termination phase B command termination phase C
command termination
circuit breaker open
close
* The command termination will be delayed one execution sample.
*
en05000094_ansi.vsd ANSI05000094 V1 EN
Figure 334: tExecutionFB
The parameter tSynchrocheck is used to define the maximum allowed time between the execute command and the input SYNC_OK to become true. If SYNC_OK=true at the time the execute command signal is received, the timer «tSynchrocheck» will not start. The start signal for the synchronizing is obtained if the synchronism-check conditions are not fulfilled.
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
666 Technical reference manual
execute command
SY_INPRO
SYNC_OK
t2>tSynchronizing, then blocked-by-synchronism
check in ’cause’ is set
tSynchrocheck t1START_SY
tSynchronizing t2
en05000095_ansi.vsd ANSI05000095 V1 EN
Figure 335: tSynchroCheck and tSynchronizing
12.3.6.3 Function block
IEC05000337-2-en.vsd
SCSWI BLOCK PSTO L_SEL L_OPEN L_CLOSE AU_OPEN AU_CLOSE BL_CMD RES_GRT RES_EXT SY_INPRO SYNC_OK EN_OPEN EN_CLOSE XPOS1 XPOS2 XPOS3
EXE_OP EXE_CL
SELECTED RES_RQ
START_SY POSITION OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS POLEDISC CMD_BLK L_CAUSE
XOUT POS_INTR
IEC05000337 V2 EN
Figure 336: SCSWI function block
12.3.6.4 Input and output signals
Table 335: SCSWI Input signals
Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 2 Operator place selection
L_SEL BOOLEAN 0 Select signal from local panel
L_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open signal from local panel
L_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Close signal from local panel
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
667 Technical reference manual
Name Type Default Description AU_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Used for local automation function
AU_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Used for local automation function
BL_CMD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal for block of the command
RES_GRT BOOLEAN 0 Positive acknowledge that all reservations are made
RES_EXT BOOLEAN 0 Reservation is made externally
SY_INPRO BOOLEAN 0 Synchronizing function in progress
SYNC_OK BOOLEAN 0 Closing is permitted by the synchronism-check
EN_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Enables open operation
EN_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Enables close operation
XPOS1 GROUP SIGNAL
— Group signal from XCBR/XSWI per phase
XPOS2 GROUP SIGNAL
— Group signal from XCBR/XSWI per phase
XPOS3 GROUP SIGNAL
— Group signal from XCBR/XSWI per phase
Table 336: SCSWI Output signals
Name Type Description EXE_OP BOOLEAN Execute Open command
EXE_CL BOOLEAN Execute Close command
SELECTED BOOLEAN Select conditions are fulfilled
RES_RQ BOOLEAN Request signal to the reservation function
START_SY BOOLEAN Starts the synchronizing function
POSITION INTEGER Position indication
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Open position indication
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Closed position indication
POLEDISC BOOLEAN The positions for poles A, B and C are not equal after a set time
CMD_BLK BOOLEAN Commands are blocked
L_CAUSE INTEGER Latest value of the error indication during command
XOUT BOOLEAN Execution information to XCBR/XSWI
POS_INTR BOOLEAN Stopped in intermediate position
AU_OPEN and AU_CLOSE are used to issue automated commands as e.g. for load shedding for opening respectively closing to the SCSWI function. They work without regard to how the operator place selector, PSTO, is set. In order to have effect on the outputs EXE_OP and
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
668 Technical reference manual
EXE_CL, the corresponding enable input, EN_OPEN respectively EN_CLOSE must be set, and that no interlocking is active.
L_SEL, L_OPEN and L_CLOSE are used for local command sequence connected to binary inputs. In order to have effect, the operator place selector, PSTO, must be set to local or to remote with no priority. If the control model used is Select before operate, Also the corresponding enable input must be set, and no interlocking is active. The L_SEL input must be set before L_OPEN or L_CLOSE is operated, if the control model is Select before operate.
12.3.6.5 Setting parameters
Table 337: SCSWI Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description CtlModel Dir Norm
SBO Enh — — SBO Enh Specifies control model type
PosDependent Always permitted Not perm at 00/11
— — Always permitted Permission to operate depending on the position
tSelect 0.00 — 600.00 s 0.01 30.00 Maximum time between select and execute signals
tResResponse 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Allowed time from reservation request to reservation granted
tSynchrocheck 0.00 — 600.00 s 0.01 10.00 Allowed time for synchronism-check to fulfil close conditions
tSynchronizing 0.00 — 600.00 s 0.01 0.00 Supervision time to get the signal synchronizing in progress
tExecutionFB 0.00 — 600.00 s 0.01 30.00 Maximum time from command execution to termination
tPoleDiscord 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Allowed time to have discrepancy between the poles
12.3.7 Circuit breaker SXCBR
12.3.7.1 Introduction
The purpose of Circuit breaker (SXCBR) is to provide the actual status of positions and to perform the control operations, that is, pass all the commands to primary apparatuses in the form of circuit breakers via binary output boards and to supervise the switching operation and position.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
669 Technical reference manual
12.3.7.2 Principle of operation
The users of the Circuit breaker function (SXCBR) is other functions such as for example, switch controller, protection functions, autorecloser function or an IEC 61850 client residing in another IED or the operator place. This switch function executes commands, evaluates block conditions and evaluates different time supervision conditions. Only if all conditions indicate a switch operation to be allowed, the function performs the execution command. In case of erroneous conditions, the function indicates an appropriate «cause» value.
SXCBR has an operation counter for closing and opening commands. The counter value can be read remotely from the operator place. The value is reset from a binary input or remotely from the operator place by configuring a signal from the Single Point Generic Control 8 signals (SPC8GGIO) for example.
Local/Remote switch One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in SXCBR to indicate the local/remote switch position from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is set to TRUE it means that change of position is allowed only from switchyard level. If the signal is set to FALSE it means that command from IED or higher level is permitted. When the signal is set to TRUE all commands (for change of position) from internal IED clients are rejected, even trip commands from protection functions are rejected. The functionality of the local/remote switch is described in figure 337.
From I/O switchLR
TRUE
FALSE
Local= Operation at switch yard level
Remote= Operation at IED or higher level
en05000096.vsd
IEC05000096 V1 EN
Figure 337: Local/Remote switch
Blocking principles SXCBR includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking signals is that they will affect commands from all other clients for example, operators place, protection functions, autoreclosure and so on.
The IEC 61850 communication has always priority over binary inputs, e.g. a block command on binary inputs will not prevent commands over IEC 61850.
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
670 Technical reference manual
The blocking possibilities are:
Block/deblock for open command. It is used to block operation for open command. Note that this block signal also affects the input OPEN for immediate command.
Block/deblock for close command. It is used to block operation for close command. Note that this block signal also affects the input CLOSE for immediate command.
Update block/deblock of positions. It is used to block the updating of position values. Other signals related to the position will be reset.
Blocking of function, BLOCK, signal from DO (Data Object) Behavior (IEC 61850). If DO Behavior is set to «blocked» it means that the function is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and functional and configuration data is visible.
The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.
Substitution The substitution part in SXCBR is used for manual set of the position for the switch. The typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual value because that the real process value is erroneous for some reason. SXCBR will then use the manually entered value instead of the value for positions determined by the process.
It is always possible to make a substitution, independently of the position indication and the status information of the I/O board. When substitution is enabled, the position values are blocked for updating and other signals related to the position are reset. The substituted values are stored in a non-volatile memory.
Time diagrams There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and tIntermediate. tStartMove supervises that the primary device starts moving after the execute output pulse is sent. tIntermediate defines the maximum allowed time for intermediate position. Figure 338 explains these two timers during the execute phase.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
671 Technical reference manual
EXE_CL
tStartMove timer
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
tIntermediate timer
t1
t2
tStartMove
tIntermediate
if t1 > tStartMove then «switch-not-start-moving» attribute in ’cause’ is set
if t2 > tIntermediate then «persisting-intermediate-state»
attribute in ’cause’ is set
Close pulse duration AdaptivePulse = TRUE
en05000097.vsd
IEC05000097 V1 EN
Figure 338: The timers tStartMove and tIntermediate
The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the length of the execute output pulses to be sent to the primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close command can have different pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be adaptive with the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse. Figure 339 shows the principle of the execute output pulse. The AdaptivePulse parameter will have affect on both execute output pulses.
EXE_CL
CLOSEPOS
EXE_CL
OPENPOS
AdaptivePulse=FALSE
tClosePulse
tClosePulse
AdaptivePulse=TRUE
en05000098.vsd
IEC05000098 V1 EN
Figure 339: Execute output pulse
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
672 Technical reference manual
If the pulse is set to be adaptive, it is not possible for the pulse to exceed tOpenPulse or tClosePulse.
The execute output pulses are reset when:
the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to true
the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed an error occurs due to the switch does not start moving, that is, tStartMove has
elapsed.
There is one exception from the first item above. If the primary device is in open position and an open command is executed or if the primary device is in closed position and a close command is executed. In these cases, with the additional condition that the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is true, the execute output pulse is always activated and resets when tStartMove has elapsed. If the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to false the execution output remains active until the pulse duration timer has elapsed.
If the start position indicates bad state (OPENPOS=1 and CLOSEPOS =1) when a command is executed the execute output pulse resets only when timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed.
An example of when a primary device is open and an open command is executed is shown in figure 340 .
EXE_OP
CLOSEPOS
EXE_OP
OPENPOS
AdaptivePulse=FALSE
tOpenPulse
tOpenPulse
AdaptivePulse=TRUE
tStartMove timer
en05000099.vsd
IEC05000099 V1 EN
Figure 340: Open command with open position indication
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
673 Technical reference manual
12.3.7.3 Function block
IEC05000338-2-en.vsd
SXCBR BLOCK LR_SWI OPEN CLOSE BL_OPEN BL_CLOSE BL_UPD POSOPEN POSCLOSE TR_OPEN TR_CLOSE RS_CNT XIN
XPOS EXE_OP EXE_CL
SUBSTED OP_BLKD CL_BLKD
UPD_BLKD POSITION OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS TR_POS
CNT_VAL L_CAUSE
IEC05000338 V2 EN
Figure 341: SXCBR function block
12.3.7.4 Input and output signals
Table 338: SXCBR Input signals
Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
LR_SWI BOOLEAN 0 Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard
OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately open the switch
CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately close the switch
BL_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the open command
BL_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the close command
BL_UPD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal for block of the position updating
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O
TR_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of truck from I/O
TR_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of truck from I/O
RS_CNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets the operation counter
XIN BOOLEAN 0 Execution information from CSWI
Table 339: SXCBR Output signals
Name Type Description XPOS GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for XCBR output
EXE_OP BOOLEAN Executes the command for open direction
EXE_CL BOOLEAN Executes the command for close direction
Table continues on next page
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
674 Technical reference manual
Name Type Description SUBSTED BOOLEAN Indication that the position is substituted
OP_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for open commands
CL_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for close commands
UPD_BLKD BOOLEAN Update of position indication is blocked
POSITION INTEGER Apparatus position indication
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus open position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus closed position
TR_POS INTEGER Truck position indication
CNT_VAL INTEGER Operation counter value
L_CAUSE INTEGER Latest value of the error indication during command
12.3.7.5 Setting parameters
Table 340: SXCBR Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description tStartMove 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Supervision time for the apparatus to move
after a command
tIntermediate 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Allowed time for intermediate position
AdaptivePulse Not adaptive Adaptive
— — Not adaptive Output resets when a new correct end position is reached
tOpenPulse 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for open command
tClosePulse 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for close command
SuppressMidPos Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Mid-position is suppressed during the time tIntermediate
12.3.8 Circuit switch SXSWI
12.3.8.1 Introduction
The purpose of Circuit switch (SXSWI) function is to provide the actual status of positions and to perform the control operations, that is, pass all the commands to primary apparatuses in the form of disconnectors or grounding switches via binary output boards and to supervise the switching operation and position.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
675 Technical reference manual
12.3.8.2 Principle of operation
The users of the Circuit switch (SXSWI) is other functions such as for example, switch controller, protection functions, autorecloser function, or a 61850 client residing in another IED or the operator place. SXSWI executes commands, evaluates block conditions and evaluates different time supervision conditions. Only if all conditions indicate a switch operation to be allowed, SXSWI performs the execution command. In case of erroneous conditions, the function indicates an appropriate «cause» value.
SXSWI has an operation counter for closing and opening commands. The counter value can be read remotely from the operator place. The value is reset from a binary input or remotely from the operator place by configuring a signal from the Single Point Generic Control 8 signals (SPC8GGIO) for example.
Local/Remote switch One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in SXSWI to indicate the local/remote switch position from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is set to TRUE it means that change of position is allowed only from switchyard level. If the signal is set to FALSE it means that command from IED or higher level is permitted. When the signal is set to TRUE all commands (for change of position) from internal IED clients are rejected, even trip commands from protection functions are rejected. The functionality of the local/remote switch is described in figure 342.
From I/O switchLR
TRUE
FALSE
Local= Operation at switch yard level
Remote= Operation at IED or higher level
en05000096.vsd
IEC05000096 V1 EN
Figure 342: Local/Remote switch
Blocking principles SXSWI includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking signals is that they will affect commands from all other clients for example, operators place, protection functions, autorecloser and so on.
The blocking possibilities are:
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
676 Technical reference manual
Block/deblock for open command. It is used to block operation for open command. Note that this block signal also affects the input OPEN for immediate command.
Block/deblock for close command. It is used to block operation for close command. Note that this block signal also affects the input CLOSE for immediate command.
Update block/deblock of positions. It is used to block the updating of position values. Other signals related to the position will be reset.
Blocking of function, BLOCK, signal from DO (Data Object) Behavior (IEC 61850). If DO Behavior is set to «blocked» it means that the function is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and functional and configuration data is visible.
The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.
Substitution The substitution part in SXSWI is used for manual set of the position for the switch. The typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual value because the real process value is erroneous of some reason. SXSWI will then use the manually entered value instead of the value for positions determined by the process.
It is always possible to make a substitution, independently of the position indication and the status information of the I/O board. When substitution is enabled, the position values are blocked for updating and other signals related to the position are reset. The substituted values are stored in a non-volatile memory.
Time diagrams There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and tIntermediate. tStartMove supervises that the primary device starts moving after the execute output pulse is sent. tIntermediate defines the maximum allowed time for intermediate position. Figure 343 explains these two timers during the execute phase.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
677 Technical reference manual
EXE_CL
tStartMove timer
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
tIntermediate timer
t1
t2
tStartMove
tIntermediate
if t1 > tStartMove then «switch-not-start-moving» attribute in ’cause’ is set
if t2 > tIntermediate then «persisting-intermediate-state»
attribute in ’cause’ is set
Close pulse duration AdaptivePulse = TRUE
en05000097.vsd
IEC05000097 V1 EN
Figure 343: The timers tStartMove and tIntermediate
The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the length of the execute output pulses to be sent to the primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close command can have different pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be adaptive with the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse. Figure 344 shows the principle of the execute output pulse. The AdaptivePulse parameter will have affect on both execute output pulses.
EXE_CL
CLOSEPOS
EXE_CL
OPENPOS
AdaptivePulse=FALSE
tClosePulse
tClosePulse
AdaptivePulse=TRUE
en05000098.vsd
IEC05000098 V1 EN
Figure 344: Execute output pulse
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
678 Technical reference manual
If the pulse is set to be adaptive, it is not possible for the pulse to exceed tOpenPulse or tClosePulse.
The execute output pulses are reset when:
If the start position indicates bad state (OPENPOS=1 and CLOSEPOS =1) when a command is executed the execute output pulse resets only when timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed.
the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to true
the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed an error occurs due to the switch does not start moving, that is, tStartMove has
elapsed.
There is one exception from the first item above. If the primary device is in open position and an open command is executed or if the primary device is in close position and a close command is executed. In these cases, with the additional condition that the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is true, the execute output pulse is always activated and resets when tStartMove has elapsed. If the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to false the execution output remains active until the pulse duration timer has elapsed.
An example when a primary device is open and an open command is executed is shown in figure 345.
EXE_OP
CLOSEPOS
EXE_OP
OPENPOS
AdaptivePulse=FALSE
tOpenPulse
tOpenPulse
AdaptivePulse=TRUE
tStartMove timer
en05000099.vsd
IEC05000099 V1 EN
Figure 345: Open command with open position indication
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
679 Technical reference manual
12.3.8.3 Function block
IEC05000339-2-en.vsd
SXSWI BLOCK LR_SWI OPEN CLOSE BL_OPEN BL_CLOSE BL_UPD POSOPEN POSCLOSE RS_CNT XIN
XPOS EXE_OP EXE_CL
SUBSTED OP_BLKD CL_BLKD
UPD_BLKD POSITION OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS CNT_VAL L_CAUSE
IEC05000339 V2 EN
Figure 346: SXSWI function block
12.3.8.4 Input and output signals
Table 341: SXSWI Input signals
Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
LR_SWI BOOLEAN 0 Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard
OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately open the switch
CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately close the switch
BL_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the open command
BL_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the close command
BL_UPD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal for block of the position updating
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O
RS_CNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets the operation counter
XIN BOOLEAN 0 Execution information from CSWI
Table 342: SXSWI Output signals
Name Type Description XPOS GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for XSWI output
EXE_OP BOOLEAN Executes the command for open direction
EXE_CL BOOLEAN Executes the command for close direction
SUBSTED BOOLEAN Indication that the position is substituted
OP_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for open commands
Table continues on next page
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
680 Technical reference manual
Name Type Description CL_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for close
commands
UPD_BLKD BOOLEAN Update of position indication is blocked
POSITION INTEGER Apparatus position indication
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus open position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus closed position
CNT_VAL INTEGER Operation counter value
L_CAUSE INTEGER Latest value of the error indication during command
12.3.8.5 Setting parameters
Table 343: SXSWI Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description tStartMove 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 3.000 Supervision time for the apparatus to move
after a command
tIntermediate 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 15.000 Allowed time for intermediate position
AdaptivePulse Not adaptive Adaptive
— — Not adaptive Output resets when a new correct end position is reached
tOpenPulse 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for open command
tClosePulse 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for close command
SwitchType Load Break Disconnector Grounding Switch HS Groundg. Switch
— — Disconnector 1=LoadBreak,2=Disconnector,3=EarthSw, 4=HighSpeedEarthSw
SuppressMidPos Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Mid-position is suppressed during the time tIntermediate
12.3.9 Bay reserve QCRSV
12.3.9.1 Introduction
The purpose of the reservation function is primarily to transfer interlocking information between IEDs in a safe way and to prevent double operation in a bay, switchyard part, or complete substation.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
681 Technical reference manual
12.3.9.2 Principle of operation
The Bay reserve (QCRSV) function handles the reservation. QCRSV function starts to operate in two ways. It starts when there is a request for reservation of the own bay or if there is a request for reservation from another bay. It is only possible to reserve the function if it is not currently reserved. The signal that can reserve the own bay is the input signal RES_RQx (x=1-8) coming from switch controller (SCWI). The signals for request from another bay are the outputs RE_RQ_B and V_RE_RQ from function block RESIN. These signals are included in signal EXCH_OUT from RESIN and are connected to RES_DATA in QCRSV.
The parameters ParamRequestx (x=1-8) are chosen at reservation of the own bay only (TRUE) or other bays (FALSE). To reserve the own bay only means that no reservation request RES_BAYS is created.
Reservation request of own bay If the reservation request comes from the own bay, the function QCRSV has to know which apparatus the request comes from. This information is available with the input signal RES_RQx and parameter ParamRequestx (where x=1-8 is the number of the requesting apparatus). In order to decide if a reservation request of the current bay can be permitted QCRSV has to know whether the own bay already is reserved by itself or another bay. This information is available in the output signal RESERVED.
If the RESERVED output is not set, the selection is made with the output RES_GRTx (where x=1-8 is the number of the requesting apparatus), which is connected to switch controller SCSWI. If the bay already is reserved the command sequence will be reset and the SCSWI will set the attribute «1-of-n-control» in the «cause» signal.
Reservation of other bays When the function QCRSV receives a request from an apparatus in the own bay that requires other bays to be reserved as well, it checks if it already is reserved. If not, it will send a request to the other bays that are predefined (to be reserved) and wait for their response (acknowledge). The request of reserving other bays is done by activating the output RES_BAYS.
When it receives acknowledge from the bays via the input RES_DATA, it sets the output RES_GRTx (where x=1-8 is the number of the requesting apparatus). If not acknowledgement from all bays is received within a certain time defined in SCSWI (tResResponse), the SCSWI will reset the reservation and set the attribute «1-of-n- control» in the «cause» signal.
Reservation request from another bay When another bay requests for reservation, the input BAY_RES in corresponding function block RESIN is activated. The signal for reservation request is grouped into the output signal EXCH_OUT in RESIN, which is connected to input RES_DATA in
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
682 Technical reference manual
QCRSV. If the bay is not reserved, the bay will be reserved and the acknowledgment from output ACK_T_B is sent back to the requested bay. If the bay already is reserved the reservation is kept and no acknowledgment is sent.
Blocking and overriding of reservation If QCRSV function is blocked (input BLK_RES is set to true) the reservation is blocked. That is, no reservation can be made from the own bay or any other bay. This can be set, for example, via a binary input from an external device to prevent operations from another operator place at the same time.
The reservation function can also be overridden in the own bay with the OVERRIDE input signal, that is, reserving the own bay without waiting for the external acknowledge.
Bay with more than eight apparatuses If only one instance of QCRSV is used for a bay that is, use of up to eight apparatuses, the input EXCH_IN must be set to FALSE.
If there are more than eight apparatuses in the bay there has to be one additional QCRSV. The two QCRSV functions have to communicate and this is done through the input EXCH_IN and EXCH_OUT according to figure 347. If more then one QCRSV are used, the execution order is very important. The execution order must be in the way that the first QCRSV has a lower number than the next one.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
683 Technical reference manual
QCRSV EXCH_IN RES_RQ1 RES_RQ2 RES_RQ3 RES_RQ4 RES_RQ5 RES_RQ6 RES_RQ7 RES_RQ8 BLK_RES OVERRIDE RES_ DATA
RES_GRT1 RES_GRT2 RES_GRT3 RES_GRT4 RES_GRT5 RES_GRT6 RES_GRT7 RES_GRT8 RES_ BAYS ACK_TO_B RESERVED EXCH_OUT
QCRSV EXCH_IN RES_RQ1 RES_RQ2 RES_RQ3 RES_RQ4 RES_RQ5 RES_RQ6 RES_RQ7 RES_RQ8 BLK_RES OVERRIDE RES_ DATA
RES_GRT1 RES_GRT2 RES_GRT3 RES_GRT4 RES_GRT5 RES_GRT6 RES_GRT7 RES_GRT8 RES_ BAYS ACK_TO_B RESERVED EXCH_OUT
RESERVED
ACK_TO_B
RES_ BAYSOR
OR
OR
ANSI05000088_2_en.vsd ANSI05000088 V2 EN
Figure 347: Connection of two QCRSV function blocks
12.3.9.3 Function block
IEC05000340-2-en.vsd
QCRSV EXCH_IN RES_RQ1 RES_RQ2 RES_RQ3 RES_RQ4 RES_RQ5 RES_RQ6 RES_RQ7 RES_RQ8 BLK_RES OVERRIDE RES_DATA
RES_GRT1 RES_GRT2 RES_GRT3 RES_GRT4 RES_GRT5 RES_GRT6 RES_GRT7 RES_GRT8 RES_BAYS ACK_TO_B RESERVED EXCH_OUT
IEC05000340 V2 EN
Figure 348: QCRSV function block
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
684 Technical reference manual
12.3.9.4 Input and output signals
Table 344: QCRSV Input signals
Name Type Default Description EXCH_IN INTEGER 0 Used for exchange signals between different BayRes
blocks
RES_RQ1 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for apparatus 1 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ2 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for apparatus 2 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ3 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for apparatus 3 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ4 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for apparatus 4 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ5 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for apparatus 5 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ6 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for apparatus 6 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ7 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for apparatus 7 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ8 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for apparatus 8 that requests to do a reservation
BLK_RES BOOLEAN 0 Reservation is not possible and the output signals are reset
OVERRIDE BOOLEAN 0 Signal to override the reservation
RES_DATA INTEGER 0 Reservation data coming from function block ResIn
Table 345: QCRSV Output signals
Name Type Description RES_GRT1 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the apparatus 1 is allowed to
operate
RES_GRT2 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the apparatus 2 is allowed to operate
RES_GRT3 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the apparatus 3 is allowed to operate
RES_GRT4 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the apparatus 4 is allowed to operate
RES_GRT5 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the apparatus 5 is allowed to operate
RES_GRT6 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the apparatus 6 is allowed to operate
RES_GRT7 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the apparatus 7 is allowed to operate
RES_GRT8 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the apparatus 8 is allowed to operate
RES_BAYS BOOLEAN Request for reservation of other bays
ACK_TO_B BOOLEAN Acknowledge to other bays that this bay is reserved
RESERVED BOOLEAN Indicates that the bay is reserved
EXCH_OUT INTEGER Used for exchange signals between different BayRes blocks
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
685 Technical reference manual
12.3.9.5 Setting parameters
Table 346: QCRSV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description tCancelRes 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 10.000 Supervision time for canceling the reservation
ParamRequest1 Other bays res. Only own bay res.
— — Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 1
ParamRequest2 Other bays res. Only own bay res.
— — Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 2
ParamRequest3 Other bays res. Only own bay res.
— — Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 3
ParamRequest4 Other bays res. Only own bay res.
— — Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 4
ParamRequest5 Other bays res. Only own bay res.
— — Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 5
ParamRequest6 Other bays res. Only own bay res.
— — Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 6
ParamRequest7 Other bays res. Only own bay res.
— — Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 7
ParamRequest8 Other bays res. Only own bay res.
— — Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 8
12.3.10 Reservation input RESIN
12.3.10.1 Introduction
The Reservation input (RESIN) function receives the reservation information from other bays. The number of instances is the same as the number of involved bays (up to 60 instances are available).
12.3.10.2 Principle of operation
The reservation input (RESIN) function is based purely on Boolean logic conditions. The logic diagram in figure 349 shows how the output signals are created. The inputs of the function block are connected to a receive function block representing signals transferred over the station bus from another bay.
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
686 Technical reference manual
en05000089_ansi.vsd
FutureUse
ACK_F_B
ANY_ACK
VALID_TX
RE_RQ_B
V _RE_RQ
BAY_VAL
BAY_RES
EXCH_IN INT
BIN
BIN
INT EXCH_OUT
BAY_ACK
BIN..Binary INT..Integer
AND
OR
OR
AND
AND
OR
OR
OR
ANSI05000089 V1 EN
Figure 349: Logic diagram for RESIN
Figure 350 describes the principle of the data exchange between all RESIN modules in the current bay. There is one RESIN function block per «other bay» used in the reservation mechanism. The output signal EXCH_OUT in the last RESIN functions are connected to the module bay reserve (QCRSV) that handles the reservation function in the own bay. The value to the input EXCH_IN on the first RESIN module in the chain has the integer value 5. This is provided by the use of instance number one of the function block RESIN, where the input EXCH_IN is set to #5, but is hidden for the user.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
687 Technical reference manual
Bay 1
Bay 2
Bay n QCRSV
RES_DATA
RESIN EXCH_IN BAY_ACK BAY_VAL BAY_RES
ACK_F_B ANY_ACK VALID_TX RE_RQ_B V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT
RESIN BAY_ACK BAY_VAL BAY_RES
ACK_F_B ANY_ACK VALID_TX RE_RQ_B V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT
RESIN EXCH_IN BAY_ACK BAY_VAL BAY_RES
ACK_F_B ANY_ACK VALID_TX RE_RQ_B V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT
en05000090.vsd IEC05000090 V2 EN
Figure 350: Diagram of the chaining principle for RESIN
12.3.10.3 Function block
IEC05000341-2-en.vsd
RESIN1 BAY_ACK BAY_VAL BAY_RES
ACK_F_B ANY_ACK VALID_TX RE_RQ_B V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT
IEC05000341 V2 EN
Figure 351: RESIN1 function block
RESIN2 EXCH_IN BAY_ACK BAY_VAL BAY_RES
ACK_F_B ANY_ACK VALID_TX RE_RQ_B V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT
IEC09000807_1_en.vsd IEC09000807 V1 EN
Figure 352: RESIN2 function block
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
688 Technical reference manual
12.3.10.4 Input and output signals
Table 347: RESIN1 Input signals
Name Type Default Description BAY_ACK BOOLEAN 0 Another bay has acknowledged the reservation
request from this bay
BAY_VAL BOOLEAN 0 The reservervation and acknowledge signals from another bay are valid
BAY_RES BOOLEAN 0 Request from other bay to reserve this bay
Table 348: RESIN1 Output signals
Name Type Description ACK_F_B BOOLEAN All other bays have acknowledged the reservation
request from this bay
ANY_ACK BOOLEAN Any other bay has acknowledged the reservation request from this bay
VALID_TX BOOLEAN The reservation and acknowledge signals from other bays are valid
RE_RQ_B BOOLEAN Request from other bay to reserve this bay
V_RE_RQ BOOLEAN Check if the request of reserving this bay is valid
EXCH_OUT INTEGER Used for exchange signals between different ResIn blocks
Table 349: RESIN2 Input signals
Name Type Default Description EXCH_IN INTEGER 5 Used for exchange signals between different ResIn
blocks
BAY_ACK BOOLEAN 0 Another bay has acknowledged the reservation request from this bay
BAY_VAL BOOLEAN 0 The reservervation and acknowledge signals from another bay are valid
BAY_RES BOOLEAN 0 Request from other bay to reserve this bay
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
689 Technical reference manual
Table 350: RESIN2 Output signals
Name Type Description ACK_F_B BOOLEAN All other bays have acknowledged the reservation
request from this bay
ANY_ACK BOOLEAN Any other bay has acknowledged the reservation request from this bay
VALID_TX BOOLEAN The reservation and acknowledge signals from other bays are valid
RE_RQ_B BOOLEAN Request from other bay to reserve this bay
V_RE_RQ BOOLEAN Check if the request of reserving this bay is valid
EXCH_OUT INTEGER Used for exchange signals between different ResIn blocks
12.3.10.5 Setting parameters
Table 351: RESIN1 Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description FutureUse Bay in use
Bay future use — — Bay in use The bay for this ResIn block is for future use
Table 352: RESIN2 Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description FutureUse Bay in use
Bay future use — — Bay in use The bay for this ResIn block is for future use
12.4 Interlocking (3)
12.4.1 Introduction The interlocking functionality blocks the possibility to operate high-voltage switching devices, for instance when a disconnector is under load, in order to prevent material damage and/or accidental human injury.
Each control IED has interlocking functions for different switchyard arrangements, each handling the interlocking of one bay. The interlocking functionality in each IED is not dependent on any central function. For the station-wide interlocking, the IEDs communicate via the station bus or by using hard wired binary inputs/outputs.
The interlocking conditions depend on the circuit configuration and status of the system at any given time.
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
690 Technical reference manual
12.4.2 Principle of operation The interlocking function consists of software modules located in each control IED. The function is distributed and not dependent on any central function. Communication between modules in different bays is performed via the station bus.
The reservation function (see section «Introduction») is used to ensure that HV apparatuses that might affect the interlock are blocked during the time gap, which arises between position updates. This can be done by means of the communication system, reserving all HV apparatuses that might influence the interlocking condition of the intended operation. The reservation is maintained until the operation is performed.
After the selection and reservation of an apparatus, the function has complete data on the status of all apparatuses in the switchyard that are affected by the selection. Other operators cannot interfere with the reserved apparatus or the status of switching devices that may affect it.
The open or closed positions of the HV apparatuses are inputs to software modules distributed in the control IEDs. Each module contains the interlocking logic for a bay. The interlocking logic in a module is different, depending on the bay function and the switchyard arrangements, that is, double-breaker or breaker-and-a-half bays have different modules. Specific interlocking conditions and connections between standard interlocking modules are performed with an engineering tool. Bay-level interlocking signals can include the following kind of information:
Positions of HV apparatuses (sometimes per phase) Valid positions (if evaluated in the control module) External release (to add special conditions for release) Line voltage (to block operation of line grounding switch) Output signals to release the HV apparatus
The interlocking module is connected to the surrounding functions within a bay as shown in figure 353.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
691 Technical reference manual
Interlocking modules in other bays
Interlocking module
SCILO SCSWI
Apparatus control modules
SXCBR
SCILO SCSWI SXSWI
Apparatus control modules
SCILO SCSWI SXSWI
Apparatus control modules
en04000526_ansi.vsd
152
ANSI04000526 V1 EN
Figure 353: Interlocking module on bay level
Bays communicate via the station bus and can convey information regarding the following:
Ungrounded busbars Busbars connected together Other bays connected to a busbar Received data from other bays is valid
Figure 354 illustrates the data exchange principle.
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
692 Technical reference manual
WA1 not grounded WA2 not grounded WA1 and WA2 interconn
WA1 not grounded WA2 not grounded WA1 and WA2 interconn
. . . . .
Station bus
189
WA1
WA2
Bay 1 Bay n Bus coupler
WA1 ungrounded WA1 ungrounded
WA1 and WA2 interconn
WA1 and WA2 interconn in other bay
289
989
189 289
989
289189 189G 289G
en05000494_ansi.vsd
Disc 189 and 289 closed Disc 189 and 289 closed
152 152
152
ANSI05000494 V1 EN
Figure 354: Data exchange between interlocking modules
When invalid data such as intermediate position, loss of a control IED, or input board error are used as conditions for the interlocking condition in a bay, a release for execution of the function will not be given.
On the local HMI an override function exists, which can be used to bypass the interlocking function in cases where not all the data required for the condition is valid.
For all interlocking modules these general rules apply:
The interlocking conditions for opening or closing of disconnectors and grounding switches are always identical.
Grounding switches on the line feeder end, for example, rapid grounding switches, are normally interlocked only with reference to the conditions in the bay where they are located, not with reference to switches on the other side of the line. So a line voltage indication may be included into line interlocking modules. If there is no line voltage supervision within the bay, then the appropriate inputs must be set to no voltage, and the operator must consider this when operating.
Grounding switches can only be operated on isolated sections for example, without load/voltage. Circuit breaker contacts cannot be used to isolate a section, that is, the status of the circuit breaker is irrelevant as far as the grounding switch operation is concerned.
Disconnectors cannot break power current or connect different voltage systems. Disconnectors in series with a circuit breaker can only be operated if the circuit breaker is open, or if the disconnectors operate in parallel with other closed connections. Other disconnectors can be operated if one side is completely
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
693 Technical reference manual
isolated, or if the disconnectors operate in parallel to other closed connections, or if they are grounding on both sides.
Circuit breaker closing is only interlocked against running disconnectors in its bay or additionally in a transformer bay against the disconnectors and grounding switch on the other side of the transformer, if there is no disconnector between CB and transformer.
Circuit breaker opening is only interlocked in a bus-coupler bay, if a bus bar transfer is in progress.
To make the implementation of the interlocking function easier, a number of standardized and tested software interlocking modules containing logic for the interlocking conditions are available:
Line for double and transfer busbars, ABC_LINE (3) Bus for double and transfer busbars, ABC_BC (3) Transformer bay for double busbars, AB_TRAFO (3) Bus-section breaker for double busbars, A1A2_BS (3) Bus-section disconnector for double busbars, A1A2_DC (3) Busbar grounding switch, BB_ES (3) Double CB Bay, DB_BUS_A(3), DB_LINE(3), DB_BUS_B(3) Breaker-and-a-half diameter, BH_LINE_A, BH_CONN, BH_LINE_B (3)
The interlocking conditions can be altered, to meet the customer specific requirements, by adding configurable logic by means of the graphical configuration tool PCM600. The inputs Qx_EXy on the interlocking modules are used to add these specific conditions.
The input signals EXDU_xx shall be set to true if there is no transmission error at the transfer of information from other bays. Required signals with designations ending in TR are intended for transfer to other bays.
12.4.3 Logical node for interlocking SCILO (3)
12.4.3.1 Introduction
The Logical node for interlocking SCILO(3) function is used to enable a switching operation if the interlocking conditions permit. SCILO (3) function itself does not provide any interlocking functionality. The interlocking conditions are generated in separate function blocks containing the interlocking logic.
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
694 Technical reference manual
12.4.3.2 Logic diagram
The function contains logic to enable the open and close commands respectively if the interlocking conditions are fulfilled. That means also, if the switch has a defined end position for example, open, then the appropriate enable signal (in this case EN_OPEN) is false. The enable signals EN_OPEN and EN_CLOSE can be true at the same time only in the intermediate and bad position state and if they are enabled by the interlocking function. The position inputs come from the logical nodes Circuit breaker/ Circuit switch (SXCBR/SXSWI) and the enable signals come from the interlocking logic. The outputs are connected to the logical node Switch controller (SCSWI). One instance per switching device is needed.
OPEN_EN
POSOPEN POSCLOSE EN_OPEN
EN_CLOSECLOSE_EN
SCILO
en04000525_ansi.vsd
OR
OR
XOR AND
AND
AND
AND
NOT
ANSI04000525 V1 EN
Figure 355: SCILO (3) function logic diagram
12.4.3.3 Function block
ANSI05000359-1-en.vsd
SCILO (3) POSOPEN POSCLOSE OPEN_EN CLOSE_EN
EN_OPEN EN_CLOSE
ANSI05000359 V1 EN
Figure 356: SCILO (3) function block
12.4.3.4 Input and output signals
Table 353: SCILO (3) Input signals
Name Type Default Description POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open position of switch device
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Closed position of switch device
OPEN_EN BOOLEAN 0 Open operation from interlocking logic is enabled
CLOSE_EN BOOLEAN 0 Close operation from interlocking logic is enabled
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
695 Technical reference manual
Table 354: SCILO (3) Output signals
Name Type Description EN_OPEN BOOLEAN Open operation at closed or intermediate or bad
position is enabled
EN_CLOSE BOOLEAN Close operation at open or intermediate or bad position is enabled
12.4.4 Interlocking for busbar grounding switch BB_ES (3)
12.4.4.1 Introduction
The interlocking for busbar grounding switch (BB_ES, 3) function is used for one busbar grounding switch on any busbar parts according to figure 357.
89G
en04000504.vsd ANSI04000504 V1 EN
Figure 357: Switchyard layout BB_ES (3)
12.4.4.2 Function block
ANSI05000347-2-en.vsd
BB_ES (3) 89G_OP 89G_CL BB_DC_OP VP_BB_DC EXDU_BB
89GREL 89GITL
BBGSOPTR BBGSCLTR
ANSI05000347 V2 EN
Figure 358: BB_ES (3) function block
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
696 Technical reference manual
12.4.4.3 Logic diagram
EXDU_BB
en04000546_ansi.vsd
VP_BB_DC BB_DC_OP
89GREL 89GITL
BBGSOPTR BBGSCLTR
89G_OP 89G_CL
BB_ES
AND NOT
ANSI04000546 V1 EN
12.4.4.4 Input and output signals
Table 355: BB_ES (3) Input signals
Name Type Default Description QC_OP BOOLEAN 0 Busbar grounding switch 89G is in open position
QC_CL BOOLEAN 0 Busbar grounding switch 89G is in closed position
BB_DC_OP BOOLEAN 0 All disconnectors on this busbar part are open
VP_BB_DC BOOLEAN 0 Status for all disconnectors on this busbar part are valid
EXDU_BB BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bays with disc on this busbar part
Table 356: BB_ES (3) Output signals
Name Type Description QCREL BOOLEAN Switching of 89G is allowed
QCITL BOOLEAN Switching of 89G is not allowed
BBESOPTR BOOLEAN 89G on this busbar part is in open position
BBESCLTR BOOLEAN 89G on this busbar part is in closed position
12.4.5 Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS (3)
12.4.5.1 Introduction
The interlocking for bus-section breaker (A1A2_BS ,3) function is used for one bus- section circuit breaker between section 1 and 2 according to figure 359. The function can be used for different busbars, which includes a bus-section circuit breaker.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
697 Technical reference manual
WA1 (A1)
289
489G
189
389G
WA2 (A2)
en04000516_ansi.vsd
289G189G
A1A2_BS
152
ANSI04000516 V1 EN
Figure 359: Switchyard layout A1A2_BS (3)
12.4.5.2 Function block
ANSI05000348-2-en.vsd
A1A2_BS (3) 152_OP 152_CL 189_OP 189_CL 289_OP 289_CL 389G_OP 389G_CL 489G_OP 489G_CL S189G_OP S189G_CL S289G_OP S289G_CL BBTR_OP VP_BBTR EXDU_12 EXDU_89G 152O_EX1 152O_EX2 152O_EX3 189_EX1 189_EX2 289_EX1 289_EX2
152OPREL 152OPITL
152CLREL 152CLITL
189REL 189ITL
289REL 289ITL
389GREL 389GITL
489GREL 489GITL
S1S2OPTR S1S2CLTR
189OPTR 189CLTR 289OPTR 289CLTR
VPS1S2TR VP189TR VP289TR
ANSI05000348 V2 EN
Figure 360: A1A2_BS (3) function block
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
698 Technical reference manual
12.4.5.3 Logic diagram
152_OP
189_OP 152_CL
189_CL
289_CL 289_OP
389G_OP
489G_CL
S2289G_CL
489G_OP
S2289G_OP S1189G_CL S1189G_OP
152OPITL 152OPREL
en04000542_ansi.vsd
389G_CL
VPS2289G
VPS1189G
VP489G
VP389G
VP289
VP189
VP152
A1A2_BS
VP189 189_OP
152O_EX1 VP289 289_OP
152O_EX2 VP_BBTR BBTR_OP EXDU_12 152O_EX3
152CLITL 152CLRELVP189
VP289
189ITL 189REL
VP152 VP389G VP489G VPS1189G 152_OP 389G_OP 489G_OP S1189G_OP
VP389G VPS1189G 389G_CL S1189G_CL EXDU_89G
EXDU_89G 189_EX1
189_EX2
NOT
NOT
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
OR
NOT
OR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
ANSI04000542 V1 EN
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
699 Technical reference manual
VP152
VP489G VP389G
VPS2289G
389G_OP 152_OP
489G_OP
EXDU_89G
VPS2289G
S2289G_OP
289_EX1
VP489G
S2289G_CL 489G_CL
189_OP
289_OP 189_OP
152_OP
289_CL VP289
289_OP
VP189 189_CL 189_OP
VP289 VP189
VP152
289ITL 289REL
en04000543_ansi.vsd
EXDU_89G 289_EX2
VP189 VP289
389GREL 389GITL
289_OP
S1S2CLTR
289OPTR
489GREL 489GITL
189OPTR 189CLTR VP189TR
289CLTR VP289TR
S1S2OPTR
VPS1S2TR AND
OR NOT
NOT
NOT
NOT
AND
AND
AND OR
ANSI04000543 V1 EN
12.4.5.4 Input and output signals
Table 357: A1A2_BS (3) Input signals
Name Type Default Description QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 152 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 152 is in closed position
QB1_OP BOOLEAN 0 189 is in open position
QB1_CL BOOLEAN 0 189 is in closed position
QB2_OP BOOLEAN 0 289 is in open position
QB2_CL BOOLEAN 0 289 is in closed position
QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 389G is in open position
QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 389G is in closed position
QC4_OP BOOLEAN 0 489G is in open position
QC4_CL BOOLEAN 0 489G is in closed position
S1QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 S189G on bus section 1 is in open position
S1QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 S189G on bus section 1 is in closed position
S2QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 S289G on bus section 2 is in open position
Table continues on next page
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
700 Technical reference manual
Name Type Default Description S2QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 S289G on bus section 2 is in closed position
BBTR_OP BOOLEAN 0 No busbar transfer is in progress
VP_BBTR BOOLEAN 0 Status are valid for apparatuses involved in the busbar transfer
EXDU_12 BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from any bay connected to busbar 1 and 2
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bays containing ground sw. S189G or S289G
QA1O_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus 152
QA1O_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus 152
QA1O_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus 152
QB1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 189
QB1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 189
QB2_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 289
QB2_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 289
Table 358: A1A2_BS (3) Output signals
Name Type Description QA1OPREL BOOLEAN Opening of 152 is allowed
QA1OPITL BOOLEAN Opening of 152 is not allowed
QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is not allowed
QB1REL BOOLEAN Switching of 189 is allowed
QB1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 189 is not allowed
QB2REL BOOLEAN Switching of 289 is allowed
QB2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 289 is not allowed
QC3REL BOOLEAN Switching of 389G is allowed
QC3ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 389G is not allowed
QC4REL BOOLEAN Switching of 489G is allowed
QC4ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 489G is not allowed
S1S2OPTR BOOLEAN No bus section connection between bus section 1 and 2
S1S2CLTR BOOLEAN Bus coupler connection between bus section 1 and 2 exists
QB1OPTR BOOLEAN 189 is in open position
QB1CLTR BOOLEAN 189 is in closed position
QB2OPTR BOOLEAN 289 is in open position
QB2CLTR BOOLEAN 289 is in closed position
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
701 Technical reference manual
Name Type Description VPS1S2TR BOOLEAN Status of the apparatuses between bus section 1 and
2 are valid
VPQB1TR BOOLEAN Switch status of 189 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB2TR BOOLEAN Switch status of 289 is valid (open or closed)
12.4.6 Interlocking for bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC (3)
12.4.6.1 Introduction
The interlocking for bus-section disconnector (A1A2_DC, 3) function is used for one bus-section disconnector between section 1 and 2 according to figure 361. A1A2_DC (3) function can be used for different busbars, which includes a bus-section disconnector.
WA1 (A1) WA2 (A2)
189G 289G
A1A2_DC en04000492_ansi.vsd
52
ANSI04000492 V1 EN
Figure 361: Switchyard layout A1A2_DC (3)
12.4.6.2 Function block
ANSI05000349-2-en.vsd
A1A2_DC (3) 089_OP 089_CL S189G_OP S189G_CL S289G_OP S289G_CL S1DC_OP S2DC_OP VPS1_DC VPS2_DC EXDU_89G EXDU_BB 089C_EX1 089C_EX2 089O_EX1 089O_EX2 089O_EX3
089OPREL 089OPITL
089CLREL 089CLITL DCOPTR DCCLTR VPDCTR
ANSI05000349 V2 EN
Figure 362: A1A2_DC (3) function block
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
702 Technical reference manual
12.4.6.3 Logic diagram
89_OP 89_CL
S1189G_CL
en04000544_ansi.vsd
XOR
XOR
XOR
VPQB VPDCTR
DCOPTR DCCLTR
S1189G_OP
S2289G_OP S2289G_CL
VPS1189G
VPS2289G
89OPITL 89OPREL
VPS1189G VPS2289G
VPS1_DC S1189G_OP S2289G_OP
S1DC_OP EXDU_89G
EXDU_BB QBOP_EX1
VPS1189 VPS2289G
VPS2_DC S1189G_OP S2289G_OP
S2DC_OP EXDU_89G
EXDU_BB QBOP_EX2
VPS1189G VPS2289G S1189G_CL S2289G_CL EXDU_89G
QBOP_EX3
A1A2_DC
NOT
ORAND
AND
AND
ANSI04000544 V1 EN
IEC04000545 V1 EN
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
703 Technical reference manual
12.4.6.4 Input and output signals
Table 359: A1A2_DC (3) Input signals
Name Type Default Description QB_OP BOOLEAN 0 089 is in open position
QB_CL BOOLEAN 0 089 is in closed position
S1QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 S189G on bus section 1 is in open position
S1QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 S189G on bus section 1 is in closed position
S2QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 S289G on bus section 2 is in open position
S2QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 S289G on bus section 2 is in closed position
S1DC_OP BOOLEAN 0 All disconnectors on bus section 1 are in open position
S2DC_OP BOOLEAN 0 All disconnectors on bus section 2 are in open position
VPS1_DC BOOLEAN 0 Switch status of disconnectors on bus section 1 are valid
VPS2_DC BOOLEAN 0 Switch status of disconnectors on bus section 2 are valid
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bays containing ground sw. S189G or S289G
EXDU_BB BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bays with disc conn to section 1 and 2
QBCL_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External close condition for section disconnector 089
QBCL_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External close condition for section disconnector 089
QBOP_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for section disconnector 089
QBOP_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for section disconnector 089
QBOP_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for section disconnector 089
Table 360: A1A2_DC (3) Output signals
Name Type Description QBOPREL BOOLEAN Opening of 089 is allowed
QBOPITL BOOLEAN Opening of 089 is not allowed
QBCLREL BOOLEAN Closing of 089 is allowed
QBCLITL BOOLEAN Closing of 089 is not allowed
DCOPTR BOOLEAN The bus section disconnector is in open position
DCCLTR BOOLEAN The bus section disconnector is in closed position
VPDCTR BOOLEAN Switch status of 089 is valid (open or closed)
12.4.7 Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC (3)
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
704 Technical reference manual
12.4.7.1 Introduction
The interlocking for bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC, 3) function is used for a bus-coupler bay connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 363. The function can also be used for a single busbar arrangement with transfer busbar or double busbar arrangement without transfer busbar.
189 289 189G
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
WA7 (C)
7892089
289G
en04000514_ansi.vsd
152
ANSI04000514 V1 EN
Figure 363: Switchyard layout ABC_BC (3)
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
705 Technical reference manual
12.4.7.2 Function block
ANSI05000350-2-en.vsd
ABC_BC (3) 152_OP 152_CL 189_OP 189_CL 289_OP 289_CL 789_OP 789_CL 2089_OP 2089_CL 189G_OP 189G_CL 289G_OP 289G_CL 1189G_OP 1189G_CL 2189G_OP 2189G_CL 7189G_OP 7189G_CL BBTR_OP BC_12_CL VP_BBTR VP_BC_12 EXDU_89G EXDU_12 EXDU_BC 152O_EX1 152O_EX2 152O_EX3 189_EX1 189_EX2 189_EX3 289_EX1 289_EX2 289_EX3 2089_EX1 2089_EX2 789_EX1 789_EX2
152OPREL 152OPITL
152CLREL 152CLITL
189REL 189ITL
289REL 289ITL
789REL 789ITL
2089REL 2089ITL
189GREL 189GITL
289GREL 289GITL
189OPTR 189CLTR
22089OTR 22089CTR 789OPTR 789CLTR
1289OPTR 1289CLTR
BC12OPTR BC12CLTR BC17OPTR BC17CLTR BC27OPTR BC27CLTR
VP189TR V22089TR VP789TR
VP1289TR VPBC12TR VPBC17TR VPBC27TR
ANSI05000350 V2 EN
Figure 364: ABC_BC (3) function block
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
706 Technical reference manual
12.4.7.3 Logic diagram
152_OP
189_OP 152_CL
189_CL
2089_CL 2089_OP
789_OP
289_CL
1189G_OP 289G_CL
289_OP
289G_OP 189G_CL 189G_OP
1189G_CL
7189G_OP
VP189 7189G_CL
189_OP
2189G_CL 2189G_OP
152O_EX1
VP289 VP189
152O_EX3 EXDU_12 BBTR_OP VP_BBTR 152O_EX2
2089_OP VP2089
VP789 VP2089
152OPITL 152OPREL
152CLREL 152CLITL
en04000533_ansi.vsd
789_CL
VP7189G
VP2189G
VP1189G
VP289G
VP189G
VP289
VP789
VP2089
VP189
VP152
ABC_BC
NOT
NOT
AND
AND
AND OR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
AND
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
ANSI04000533 V1 EN
VP152
VP189G VP289
VP289G
152_OP VP1189G
289_OP
289G_OP
VP289
189_EX1
189G_OP
EXDU_89G 1189G_OP
VP_BC_12
EXDU_BC
VP189G
189_EX2
VP1189G
BC_12_CL 289_CL
189G_CL
189_EX3 EXDU_89G 1189G_CL
189ITL
en04000534_ansi.vsd
189REL
NOT
ORAND
AND
AND
ANSI04000534 V1 EN
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
707 Technical reference manual
VP152
VP189G VP189
VP289G
152_OP VP2189G
189_OP
289G_OP
VP189
289_EX1
189G_OP
EXDU_89G 2189G_OP
VP_BC_12
EXDU_BC
VP189G
289_EX2
VP2189G
BC_12_CL 189_CL
189G_CL
289_EX3 EXDU_89G 2189G_CL
289ITL
en04000535_ansi.vsd
289REL
NOT
AND OR
AND
AND
ANSI04000535 V1 EN
VP152
VP189G VP2089
VP289G
152_OP VP7189G
2089_OP
289G_OP
VP289G
789_EX1
189G_OP
EXDU_89G 7189G_OP
VP7189G
EXDU_89G
VP152
789_EX2
VP789
7189G_CL 289G_CL
VP189G
2089_EX1 EXDU_89G 2189G_OP 289G_OP 189G_OP 789_OP 152_OP VP2189G VP289G
VP289G VP2189G
EXDU_89G 2189G_CL 289G_CL
2089_EX2
2089REL 2089ITL
en04000536_ansi.vsd
789REL 789ITLNOT
NOT
AND
AND
AND
AND
OR
OR
ANSI04000536 V1 EN
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
708 Technical reference manual
VP189
VP789 VP2089
VP289
2089_OP 189_OP
789_OP
189_OP
289_OP
289_OP
VP189 189_CL
2089_OP
VP289 VP2089
VP189
VP152 789_OP
VP189
152_OP 189_OP
VP189 VP152 2089_OP 189_OP 152_OP
289_OP
VP789
VP152 789_OP
VP289
152_OP
VP789
189GITL 189GREL
289GREL 289GITL
BC27OPTR
en04000537_ansi.vsd
22089OTR 22089CTR
189OPTR 189CLTR VP189TR
V22089TR
789_OP 789_CL VP789
789OPTR 789CLTR VP789TR
189_OP 289_OP
1289OPTR 1289CLTR
VP289 VP1289TR
BC12CLTR BC12OPTR
VP2089
VPBC12TR
BC17CLTR BC17OPTR
VPBC17TR
BC27CLTR
VPBC27TR
NOT
NOT
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
OR
OR
OR
OR
NOT
NOT
NOT
NOT
NOT
ANSI04000537 V1 EN
12.4.7.4 Input and output signals
Table 361: ABC_BC (3) Input signals
Name Type Default Description QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 152 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 152 is in closed position
QB1_OP BOOLEAN 0 189 is in open position
QB1_CL BOOLEAN 0 189 is in closed position
QB2_OP BOOLEAN 0 289 is in open position
QB2_CL BOOLEAN 0 289 is in closed position
QB7_OP BOOLEAN 0 789 is in open position
QB7_CL BOOLEAN 0 789 is in closed position
QB20_OP BOOLEAN 0 2089 is in open position
QB20_CL BOOLEAN 0 2089 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 189G is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 189G is in closed position
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
709 Technical reference manual
Name Type Default Description QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 289G is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 289G is in closed position
QC11_OP BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 1189G on busbar WA1 is in open position
QC11_CL BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 1189G on busbar WA1 is in closed position
QC21_OP BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 2189G on busbar WA2 is in open position
QC21_CL BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 2189G on busbar WA2 is in closed position
QC71_OP BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 7189G on busbar WA7 is in open position
QC71_CL BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 7189G on busbar WA7 is in closed position
BBTR_OP BOOLEAN 0 No busbar transfer is in progress
BC_12_CL BOOLEAN 0 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA2
VP_BBTR BOOLEAN 0 Status are valid for apparatuses involved in the busbar transfer
VP_BC_12 BOOLEAN 0 Status of the bus coupler apparatuses between WA1 and WA2 are valid
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from any bay containing grounding switches
EXDU_12 BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from any bay connected to WA1/WA2 busbars
EXDU_BC BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from any other bus coupler bay
QA1O_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus 152
QA1O_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus 152
QA1O_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus 152
QB1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 189
QB1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 189
QB1_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 189
QB2_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 289
QB2_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 289
QB2_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 289
QB20_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 2089
QB20_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 2089
QB7_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 789
QB7_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 789
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
710 Technical reference manual
Table 362: ABC_BC (3) Output signals
Name Type Description QA1OPREL BOOLEAN Opening of 152 is allowed
QA1OPITL BOOLEAN Opening of 152 is not allowed
QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is not allowed
QB1REL BOOLEAN Switching of 189 is allowed
QB1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 189 is not allowed
QB2REL BOOLEAN Switching of 289 is allowed
QB2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 289 is not allowed
QB7REL BOOLEAN Switching of 789 is allowed
QB7ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 789 is not allowed
QB20REL BOOLEAN Switching of 2089 is allowed
QB20ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 2089 is not allowed
QC1REL BOOLEAN Switching of 189G is allowed
QC1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 189G is not allowed
QC2REL BOOLEAN Switching of 289G is allowed
QC2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 289G is not allowed
QB1OPTR BOOLEAN 189 is in open position
QB1CLTR BOOLEAN 189 is in closed position
QB220OTR BOOLEAN 289 and 2089 are in open position
QB220CTR BOOLEAN 289 or 2089 or both are not in open position
QB7OPTR BOOLEAN 789 is in open position
QB7CLTR BOOLEAN 789 is in closed position
QB12OPTR BOOLEAN 189 or 289 or both are in open position
QB12CLTR BOOLEAN 189 and 289 are not in open position
BC12OPTR BOOLEAN No connection via the own bus coupler between WA1 and WA2
BC12CLTR BOOLEAN Connection exists via the own bus coupler between WA1 and WA2
BC17OPTR BOOLEAN No connection via the own bus coupler between WA1 and WA7
BC17CLTR BOOLEAN Connection exists via the own bus coupler between WA1 and WA7
BC27OPTR BOOLEAN No connection via the own bus coupler between WA2 and WA7
BC27CLTR BOOLEAN Connection exists via the own bus coupler between WA2 and WA7
VPQB1TR BOOLEAN Switch status of 189 is valid (open or closed)
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
711 Technical reference manual
Name Type Description VQB220TR BOOLEAN Switch status of 289 and 2089 are valid (open or closed)
VPQB7TR BOOLEAN Switch status of 789 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB12TR BOOLEAN Switch status of 189 and 289 are valid (open or closed)
VPBC12TR BOOLEAN Status of the bus coupler apparatuses between WA1 and WA2 are valid
VPBC17TR BOOLEAN Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA7 are valid
VPBC27TR BOOLEAN Status of the bus coupler app. between WA2 and WA7 are valid
12.4.8 Interlocking for breaker-and-a-half diameter BH (3)
12.4.8.1 Introduction
The interlocking for breaker-and-a-half diameter (BH_CONN(3), BH_LINE_A(3), BH_LINE_B(3)) functions are used for lines connected to a breaker-and-a-half diameter according to figure 365.
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
712 Technical reference manual
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
189 189G
289G
989G
689
989
289 189G
289G
389G
689
389G
62896189
189G 289G 989G
989
BH_LINE_A BH_LINE_B
BH_CONN
en04000513_ansi.vsd
152152
152
ANSI04000513 V1 EN
Figure 365: Switchyard layout breaker-and-a-half
Three types of interlocking modules per diameter are defined. BH_LINE_A (3) and BH_LINE_B (3) are the connections from a line to a busbar. BH_CONN (3) is the connection between the two lines of the diameter in the breaker-and-a-half switchyard layout.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
713 Technical reference manual
12.4.8.2 Function blocks
ANSI05000352-2-en.vsd
BH_LINE_A (3) 152_OP 152_CL 689_OP 689_CL 189_OP 189_CL 189G_OP 189G_CL 289G_OP 289G_CL 389G_OP 389G_CL 989_OP 989_CL 989G_OP 989G_CL C152_OP C152_CL C6189_OP C6189_CL C189G_OP C189G_CL C289G_OP C289G_CL 1189G_OP 1189G_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON EXDU_89G 689_EX1 689_EX2 189_EX1 189_EX2 989_EX1 989_EX2 989_EX3 989_EX4 989_EX5 989_EX6 989_EX7
152CLREL 152CLITL
689REL 689ITL
189REL 189ITL
189GREL 189GITL
289GREL 289GITL
389GREL 389GITL 989REL 989ITL
989GREL 989GITL
189OPTR 189CLTR VP189TR
ANSI05000352 V2 EN
Figure 366: BH_LINE_A (3) function block
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
714 Technical reference manual
ANSI05000353-2-en.vsd
BH_LINE_B (3) 152_OP 152_CL 689_OP 689_CL 289_OP 289_CL 189G_OP 189G_CL 289G_OP 289G_CL 389G_OP 389G_CL 989_OP 989_CL 989G_OP 989G_CL C152_OP C152_CL C6289_OP C6289_CL C189G_OP C189G_CL C289G_OP C289G_CL 2189G_OP 2189G_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON EXDU_89G 689_EX1 689_EX2 289_EX1 289_EX2 989_EX1 989_EX2 989_EX3 989_EX4 989_EX5 989_EX6 989_EX7
152CLREL 152CLITL
689REL 689ITL
289REL 289ITL
189GREL 189GITL
289GREL 289GITL
389GREL 389GITL 989REL 989ITL
989GREL 989GITL
289OPTR 289CLTR VP289TR
ANSI05000353 V2 EN
Figure 367: BH_LINE_B (3) function block
ANSI05000351-2-en.vsd
BH_CONN (3) 152_OP 152_CL 6189_OP 6189_CL 6289_OP 6289_CL 189G_OP 189G_CL 289G_OP 289G_CL 1389G_OP 1389G_CL 2389G_OP 2389G_CL 6189_EX1 6189_EX2 6289_EX1 6289_EX2
152CLREL 152CLITL 6189REL 6189ITL
6289REL 6289ITL
189GREL 189GITL
289GREL 289GITL
ANSI05000351 V2 EN
Figure 368: BH_CONN (3) function block
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
715 Technical reference manual
12.4.8.3 Logic diagrams
152_OP
6189_OP 152_CL
6189_CL
6289_CL 6289_OP
189G_OP
289G_CL
2389G_CL
289G_OP
2389G_OP 1389G_CL 1389G_OP
en04000560_ansi.vsd
XOR
189G_CL
VP2389G
VP1389G
VP289G
VP189G
VP6289
VP6189
VP152
BH_CONN
VP6189 152CLITL
6289ITL 6289REL
VP152 VP189G VP289G VP2389G 152_OP 189G_OP 289G_OP 2389G_OP
289G_CL 2389G_CL
6289_EX2
6289_EX1 VP289G VP2389G
152CLREL
61891ITL 6189REL
VP152 VP189G VP289G VP1389G 152_OP 189G_OP 289G_OP 1389G_OP
189G_CL 1389G_CL
6189_EX2
6189_EX1 VP189G VP1389G
VP6289
189GITL 189GREL
289GITL 289GREL
VP6189 VP6289 6189_OP 6289_OP
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
AND
XOR
AND OR
NOT
NOT
AND
AND
OR NOT
AND
AND
NOT
NOT
ANSI04000560 V1 EN
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
716 Technical reference manual
152_OP
189_OP 152_CL
189_CL
689_CL 689_OP
989G_OP
989_CL
389G_OP 289G_CL
989_OP
289G_OP 189G_CL 189G_OP
389G_CL
C189G_OP C189G_CL
C152_CL C152_OP
689ITL 689REL
en04000554_ansi.vsd
989G_CL
VPC189G
VPC152
VP389G
VP289G
VP189G
VP989
VP989G
VP689
VP189
VP152
BH_LINE_A
C289G_OP C289G_CL C6189_OP
VPC289G
VPC6189
OR
VP152 VP189G VP289G VP389G 152_OP 189G_OP 289G_OP 389G_OP
689_EX1 VP289G VP389G 289G_CL 389G_CL
689_EX2
1189G_CL VOLT_OFF
VP1189G
VPVOLT
1189G_OP C6189_CL
VOLT_ON
152CLITL 152CLRELVP189
VP689 VP989
AND
NOT
NOT
AND
AND
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
ANSI04000554 V1 EN
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
717 Technical reference manual
VP152 VP689 VP989G
989_EX2 689_OP
989_EX1 VPC289G VPC189G VPC6189
VP389G VP289G VP189G
152_OP
989ITL 989REL
en04000555_ansi.vsd
VPC152
189ITL 189REL
189GITL 189GREL
289GITL 289GREL
389GITL 389GREL
189G_OP 289G_OP
989_EX3
VP152 VP189G VP289G VP1189G 152_OP 189G_OP 289G_OP 1189G_OP
EXDU_89G 189_EX1
VP189G VP1189G 189G_CL 1189G_CL EXDU_89G
189_EX2
VP189 VP689 189_OP 689_OP VP689 VP989 VPC6189 689_OP 989_OP C6189_OP
NOTAND OR
NOT
NOT
NOT
NOT
AND OR
AND
AND
AND
AND
OR
ANSI04000555 V1 EN
989_EX4 C6189_OP
C152_OP
en04000556_ansi.vsd
989GITL 989GREL
C189G_OP C289G_OP
989_EX5
VP989 VPVOLT 989_OP VOLT_OFF
989G_OP 389G_OP
989_EX6 VP989G VP389G 989G_CL 389G_CL
989_EX7
189OPTR 189CLTR VP189TR
189_OP 189_CL VP189
NOTAND
AND
AND
OR OR
AND
ANSI04000556 V1 EN
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
718 Technical reference manual
152_OP
289_OP 152_CL
289_CL
689_CL 689_OP
989G_OP
989_CL
389G_OP 289G_CL
989_OP
289G_OP 189G_CL 189G_OP
389G_CL
C189G_OP C189G_CL
C152_CL C152_OP
689ITL 689REL
en04000557_ansi.vsd
XOR
989G_CL
VPC189G
VPC152
VP389G
VP289G
VP189G
VP989
VP989G
VP689
VP289
VP152
BH_LINE_B
C289G_OP C289G_CL C6289_OP
VPC289G
VPC6289
VP152 VP189G VP289G VP389G 152_OP 189G_OP 289G_OP 389G_OP
689_EX1 VP289G VP389G 289G_CL 389G_CL
689_EX2
2189G_CL VOLT_OFF
VP2189G
VPVOLT
2189G_OP C6289_CL
VOLT_ON
152CLITL 152CLRELVP289
VP689 VP989
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
ORAND
AND NOT
NOT
AND
ANSI04000557 V1 EN
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
719 Technical reference manual
VP152 VP689 VP989G
989_EX2 689_OP
989_EX1 VPC289G VPC189G VPC6289
VP389G VP289G VP189G
152_OP
989ITL
989REL
en04000558_ansi.vsd
AND
VPC152
AND
AND
AND
289ITL 289REL
189GITL 189GREL
AND
289GITL 289GREL
AND
389GITL 389GREL
189G_OP 289G_OP
989_EX3
VP152 VP189G VP289G VP2189G 152_OP 189G_OP 289G_OP 2189G_OP
EXDU_89G 289_EX1
VP189G VP2189G 189G_CL 2189G_CL EXDU_89G
289_EX2
VP289 VP689 289_OP 689_OP VP689 VP989 VPC6289 689_OP 989_OP C6289_OP
OR
OR
OR
NOT
NOT
NOT
NOT
NOT
ANSI04000558 V1 EN
989_EX4 C6289_OP
C152_OP
en04000559_ansi.vsd
989GITL 989GREL
C189G_OP C289G_OP
989_EX5
VP989 VPVOLT 989_OP VOLT_OFF
989G_OP 389G_OP
989_EX6 VP989G VP389G 989G_CL 389G_CL
989_EX7
289OPTR 289CLTR VP289TR
289_OP 289_CL VP289
NOTAND
AND
OR ORAND
AND
ANSI04000559 V1 EN
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
720 Technical reference manual
12.4.8.4 Input and output signals
Table 363: BH_LINE_A (3) Input signals
Name Type Default Description QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 152 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 152 is in closed position
QB6_OP BOOLEAN 0 689 is in open position
QB6_CL BOOLEAN 0 689 is in closed position
QB1_OP BOOLEAN 0 189 is in open position
QB1_CL BOOLEAN 0 189 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 189G is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 189G is in closed position
QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 289G is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 289G is in closed position
QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 389G is in open position
QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 389G is in closed position
QB9_OP BOOLEAN 0 989 is in open position
QB9_CL BOOLEAN 0 989 is in closed position
QC9_OP BOOLEAN 0 989G is in open position
QC9_CL BOOLEAN 0 989G is in closed position
CQA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 152 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 152 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQB61_OP BOOLEAN 0 6189 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQB61_CL BOOLEAN 0 6189 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 189G in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 189G in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 289G in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 289G in module BH_CONN is in closed position
QC11_OP BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 1189G on busbar WA1 is in open position
QC11_CL BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 1189G on busbar WA1 is in closed position
VOLT_OFF BOOLEAN 0 There is no voltage on line and not VT (fuse) failure
VOLT_ON BOOLEAN 0 There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bay containing grounding switch 1189G
QB6_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for disconnector 689
QB6_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for disconnector 689
QB1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 189
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
721 Technical reference manual
Name Type Default Description QB1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 189
QB9_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
QB9_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
QB9_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
QB9_EX4 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
QB9_EX5 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
QB9_EX6 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
QB9_EX7 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
Table 364: BH_LINE_A (3) Output signals
Name Type Description QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is not allowed
QB6REL BOOLEAN Switching of 689 is allowed
QB6ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 689 is not allowed
QB1REL BOOLEAN Switching of 189 is allowed
QB1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 189 is not allowed
QC1REL BOOLEAN Switching of 189G is allowed
QC1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 189G is not allowed
QC2REL BOOLEAN Switching of 289G is allowed
QC2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 289G is not allowed
QC3REL BOOLEAN Switching of 389G is allowed
QC3ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 389G is not allowed
QB9REL BOOLEAN Switching of 989 is allowed
QB9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 989 is not allowed
QC9REL BOOLEAN Switching of 989G is allowed
QC9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 989G is not allowed
QB1OPTR BOOLEAN 189 is in open position
QB1CLTR BOOLEAN 189 is in closed position
VPQB1TR BOOLEAN Switch status of 189 is valid (open or closed)
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
722 Technical reference manual
Table 365: BH_LINE_B (3) Input signals
Name Type Default Description QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 152 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 152 is in closed position
QB6_OP BOOLEAN 0 689 is in open position
QB6_CL BOOLEAN 0 689 is in closed position
QB2_OP BOOLEAN 0 289 is in open position
QB2_CL BOOLEAN 0 289 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 189G is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 189G is in closed position
QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 289G is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 289G is in closed position
QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 389G is in open position
QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 389G is in closed position
QB9_OP BOOLEAN 0 989 is in open position
QB9_CL BOOLEAN 0 989 is in closed position
QC9_OP BOOLEAN 0 989G is in open position
QC9_CL BOOLEAN 0 989G is in closed position
CQA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 152 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 152 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQB62_OP BOOLEAN 0 6289 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQB62_CL BOOLEAN 0 6289 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 189G in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 189G in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 289G in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 289G in module BH_CONN is in closed position
QC21_OP BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 2189G on busbar WA2 is in open position
QC21_CL BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 2189G on busbar WA2 is in closed position
VOLT_OFF BOOLEAN 0 There is no voltage on line and not VT (fuse) failure
VOLT_ON BOOLEAN 0 There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bay containing grounding switch 2189G
QB6_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for disconnector 689
QB6_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for disconnector 689
QB2_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 289
QB2_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 289
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
723 Technical reference manual
Name Type Default Description QB9_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
QB9_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
QB9_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
QB9_EX4 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
QB9_EX5 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
QB9_EX6 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
QB9_EX7 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
Table 366: BH_LINE_B (3) Output signals
Name Type Description QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is not allowed
QB6REL BOOLEAN Switching of 689 is allowed
QB6ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 689 is not allowed
QB2REL BOOLEAN Switching of 289 is allowed
QB2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 289 is not allowed
QC1REL BOOLEAN Switching of 189G is allowed
QC1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 189G is not allowed
QC2REL BOOLEAN Switching of 289G is allowed
QC2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 289G is not allowed
QC3REL BOOLEAN Switching of 389G is allowed
QC3ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 389G is not allowed
QB9REL BOOLEAN Switching of 989 is allowed
QB9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 989 is not allowed
QC9REL BOOLEAN Switching of 989G is allowed
QC9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 989G is not allowed
QB2OPTR BOOLEAN 289 is in open position
QB2CLTR BOOLEAN 289 is in closed position
VPQB2TR BOOLEAN Switch status of 289 is valid (open or closed)
Table 367: BH_CONN (3) Input signals
Name Type Default Description QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 152 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 152 is in closed position
QB61_OP BOOLEAN 0 6189 is in open position
Table continues on next page
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
724 Technical reference manual
Name Type Default Description QB61_CL BOOLEAN 0 6189 is in closed position
QB62_OP BOOLEAN 0 6289 is in open position
QB62_CL BOOLEAN 0 6289 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 189G is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 189G is in closed position
QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 289G is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 289G is in closed position
1QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 1389G on line 1 is in open position
1QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 1389G on line 1 is in closed position
2QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 2389G on line 2 is in open position
2QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 2389G on line 2 is in closed position
QB61_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 6189
QB61_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 6189
QB62_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 6289
QB62_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 6289
Table 368: BH_CONN (3) Output signals
Name Type Description QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is not allowed
QB61REL BOOLEAN Switching of 6189 is allowed
QB61ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 6189 is not allowed
QB62REL BOOLEAN Switching of 6289 is allowed
QB62ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 6289 is not allowed
QC1REL BOOLEAN Switching of 189G is allowed
QC1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 189G is not allowed
QC2REL BOOLEAN Switching of 289G is allowed
QC2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 289G is not allowed
12.4.9 Interlocking for double CB bay DB (3)
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
725 Technical reference manual
12.4.9.1 Introduction
The interlocking for a double busbar double circuit breaker bay including DB_BUS_A (3), DB_BUS_B (3) and DB_LINE (3) functions are used for a line connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 369.
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
189 189G
289G
989G
6189
989
289 489G
589G
389G
6289
DB_BUS_B
DB_LINE
DB_BUS_A
en04000518_ansi.vsd
252152
ANSI04000518 V1 EN
Figure 369: Switchyard layout double circuit breaker
Three types of interlocking modules per double circuit breaker bay are defined. DB_LINE (3) is the connection from the line to the circuit breaker parts that are connected to the busbars. DB_BUS_A (3) and DB_BUS_B (3) are the connections from the line to the busbars.
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
726 Technical reference manual
12.4.9.2 Function block
ANSI05000354-2-en.vsd
DB_BUS_A (3) 152_OP 152_CL 189_OP 189_CL 6189_OP 6189_CL 189G_OP 189G_CL 289G_OP 289G_CL 389G_OP 389G_CL 1189G_OP 1189G_CL EXDU_89G 6189_EX1 6189_EX2 189_EX1 189_EX2
152CLREL 152CLITL 6189REL 6189ITL 189REL 189ITL
189GREL 189GITL
289GREL 289GITL
189OPTR 189CLTR VP189TR
ANSI05000354 V2 EN
Figure 370: DB_BUS_A (3) function block
ANSI05000356-2-en.vsd
DB_LINE (3) 152_OP 152_CL 252_OP 252_CL 6189_OP 6189_CL 189G_OP 189G_CL 289G_OP 289G_CL 6289_OP 6289_CL 489G_OP 489G_CL 589G_OP 589G_CL 989_OP 989_CL 389G_OP 389G_CL 989G_OP 989G_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON 989_EX1 989_EX2 989_EX3 989_EX4 989_EX5
989REL 989ITL
389GREL 389GITL
989GREL 989GITL
ANSI05000356 V2 EN
Figure 371: DB_LINE (3) function block
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
727 Technical reference manual
ANSI05000355-2-en.vsd
DB_BUS_B (3) 252_OP 252_CL 289_OP 289_CL 6289_OP 6289_CL 489G_OP 489G_CL 589G_OP 589G_CL 389G_OP 389G_CL 2189G_OP 2189G_CL EXDU_89G 6289_EX1 6289_EX2 289_EX1 289_EX2
252CLREL 252CLITL 6289REL 6289ITL 289REL 289ITL
489GREL 489GITL
589GREL 589GITL
289OPTR 289CLTR VP289TR
ANSI05000355 V2 EN
Figure 372: DB_BUS_B (3) function block
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
728 Technical reference manual
12.4.9.3 Logic diagrams
152_OP
6189_OP 152_CL
6189_CL
189_CL 189_OP
189G_OP
289G_CL
1189G_CL
289G_OP
1189G_OP 389G_CL 389G_OP
en04000547_ansi.vsd
XOR
189G_CL
VP1189G
VP389G
VP289G
VP189G
VP189
VP6189
VP152
DB_BUS_A
VP6189 152CLITL
189ITL 189REL
VP152 VP189G VP289G VP1189G 152_OP 189G_OP 289G_OP 1189G_OP
VP189G VP1189G 189G_CL 1189G_CL EXDU_89G
EXDU_89G 189_EX1
189_EX2
152CLREL
6189ITL 6189REL
VP152 VP189G VP289G VP389G 152_OP 189G_OP 289G_OP 389G_OP
289G_CL 389G_CL
6189_EX2
6189_EX1 VP289G VP389G
VP189
NOT
AND OR
AND
AND
AND
AND
OR NOT
NOT
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
ANSI04000547 V1 EN
6189_OP
en04000548_ansi.vsd
VP6189 VP189
189GREL 189GITL
189_OP 189_OP 189_CL
289GREL 289GITL
VP189
189OPTR 189CLTR VP189TR
AND NOT
NOT
ANSI04000548 V1 EN
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
729 Technical reference manual
252_OP
6289_OP 252_CL
6289_CL
289_CL 289_OP
489G_OP
589G_CL
2189G_CL
589G_OP
2189G_OP 389G_CL 389G_OP
en04000552_ansi.vsd
XOR
489G_CL
VP2189G
VP389G
VP589G
VP489G
VP289
VP6289
VP252
DB_BUS_B
VP6289 252CLITL
289ITL 289REL
VP252 VP489G VP589G VP2189G 252_OP 489G_OP 589G_OP 2189G_OP
VP489G VP2189G 489G_CL 2189G_CL EXDU_89G
EXDU_89G 289_EX1
289_EX2
252CLREL
6289ITL 6289REL
VP252 VP489G VP589G VP389G 252_OP 489G_OP 589G_OP 389G_OP
589G_CL 389G_CL
6289_EX2
6289_EX1 VP589G VP389G
VP289
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
NOT
NOT
NOT OR
OR
ANSI04000552 V1 EN
6289_OP
en04000553_ansi.vsd
VP6289 VP289
489GREL 489GITL
289_OP 289_OP 289_CL
589GREL 589GITL
VP289
289OPTR 289CLTR VP289TR
AND NOT
NOT
ANSI04000553 V1 EN
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
730 Technical reference manual
152_OP
252_OP 152_CL
252_CL
6189_CL 6189_OP
189G_OP
289G_CL
589G_OP 489G_CL
289G_OP
489G_OP 6289_CL 6289_OP
589G_CL
389G_OP 389G_CL
989_CL 989_OP
989ITL 989REL
en04000549_ansi.vsd
XOR
189G_CL
VP389G
VP989
VP589G
VP489G
VP6289
VP289G
VP189G
VP6189
VP252
VP152
DB_LINE
989G_OP 989G_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON
VP989G
VPVOLT VP152 VP252 VP189G VP289G VP389G VP489G VP589G VP989G 152_OP 252_OP 189G_OP 289G_OP 389G_OP 489G_OP 589G_OP 989G_OP
989_EX1
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
AND OR NOT
AND
ANSI04000549 V1 EN
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
731 Technical reference manual
en04000550_ansi.vsd
VP152 VP189G VP289G VP389G VP989G VP6289 152_OP 189G_OP 289G_OP 389G_OP 989G_OP 6289_OP
989_EX2 VP252 VP6189 VP389G VP489G VP589G VP989G 252_OP 6189_OP 389G_OP 489G_OP 589G_OP 989G_OP
989_EX3 VP389G VP989G VP6189 VP6289 389G_OP 989G_OP 6189_OP 6289_OP
989_EX4 VP389G VP989G 389G_CL 989G_CL
989_EX5
AND OR
AND
AND
AND
ANSI04000550 V1 EN
389GITL 389GREL
en04000551_ansi.vsd
VP6289 VP989 6189_OP 6289_OP 989_OP VP989 VPVOLT 989_OP VOLT_OFF
VP6189
989GITL 989GREL
AND
AND
NOT
NOT
ANSI04000551 V1 EN
12.4.9.4 Input and output signals
Table 369: DB_BUS_A (3) Input signals
Name Type Default Description QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 152 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 152 is in closed position
QB1_OP BOOLEAN 0 189 is in open position
QB1_CL BOOLEAN 0 189 is in closed position
Table continues on next page
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
732 Technical reference manual
Name Type Default Description QB61_OP BOOLEAN 0 6189 is in open position
QB61_CL BOOLEAN 0 6189 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 189G is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 189G is in closed position
QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 289G is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 289G is in closed position
QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 389G is in open position
QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 389G is in closed position
QC11_OP BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 1189G on busbar WA1 is in open position
QC11_CL BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 1189G on busbar WA1 is in closed position
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bay containing grounding switch 1189G
QB61_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 6189
QB61_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 6189
QB1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 189
QB1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 189
Table 370: DB_BUS_A (3) Output signals
Name Type Description QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is not allowed
QB61REL BOOLEAN Switching of 6189 is allowed
QB61ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 6189 is not allowed
QB1REL BOOLEAN Switching of 189 is allowed
QB1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 189 is not allowed
QC1REL BOOLEAN Switching of 189G is allowed
QC1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 189G is not allowed
QC2REL BOOLEAN Switching of 289G is allowed
QC2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 289G is not allowed
QB1OPTR BOOLEAN 189 is in open position
QB1CLTR BOOLEAN 189 is in closed position
VPQB1TR BOOLEAN Switch status of 189 is valid (open or closed)
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
733 Technical reference manual
Table 371: DB_LINE (3) Input signals
Name Type Default Description QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 152 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 152 is in closed position
QA2_OP BOOLEAN 0 252 is in open position
QA2_CL BOOLEAN 0 252 is in closed position
QB61_OP BOOLEAN 0 6189 is in open position
QB61_CL BOOLEAN 0 6189 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 189G is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 189G is in closed position
QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 289G is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 289G is in closed position
QB62_OP BOOLEAN 0 6289 is in open position
QB62_CL BOOLEAN 0 6289 is in closed position
QC4_OP BOOLEAN 0 489G is in open position
QC4_CL BOOLEAN 0 489G is in closed position
QC5_OP BOOLEAN 0 589G is in open position
QC5_CL BOOLEAN 0 589G is in closed position
QB9_OP BOOLEAN 0 989 is in open position
QB9_CL BOOLEAN 0 989 is in closed position
QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 389G is in open position
QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 389G is in closed position
QC9_OP BOOLEAN 0 989G is in open position
QC9_CL BOOLEAN 0 989G is in closed position
VOLT_OFF BOOLEAN 0 There is no voltage on the line and not VT (fuse) failure
VOLT_ON BOOLEAN 0 There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure
QB9_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
QB9_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
QB9_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
QB9_EX4 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
QB9_EX5 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
734 Technical reference manual
Table 372: DB_LINE (3) Output signals
Name Type Description QB9REL BOOLEAN Switching of 989 is allowed
QB9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 989 is not allowed
QC3REL BOOLEAN Switching of 389G is allowed
QC3ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 389G is not allowed
QC9REL BOOLEAN Switching of 989G is allowed
QC9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 989G is not allowed
Table 373: DB_BUS_B (3) Input signals
Name Type Default Description QA2_OP BOOLEAN 0 252 is in open position
QA2_CL BOOLEAN 0 252 is in closed position
QB2_OP BOOLEAN 0 289 is in open position
QB2_CL BOOLEAN 0 289 is in closed position
QB62_OP BOOLEAN 0 6289 is in open position
QB62_CL BOOLEAN 0 6289 is in closed position
QC4_OP BOOLEAN 0 489G is in open position
QC4_CL BOOLEAN 0 489G is in closed position
QC5_OP BOOLEAN 0 589G is in open position
QC5_CL BOOLEAN 0 589G is in closed position
QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 389G is in open position
QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 389G is in closed position
QC21_OP BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 2189G on busbar WA2 is in open position
QC21_CL BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 2189G on busbar WA2 is in closed position
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bay containing grounding switch 2189G
QB62_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 6289
QB62_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 6289
QB2_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 289
QB2_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 289
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
735 Technical reference manual
Table 374: DB_BUS_B (3) Output signals
Name Type Description QA2CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of 252 is allowed
QA2CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of 252 is not allowed
QB62REL BOOLEAN Switching of 6289 is allowed
QB62ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 6289 is not allowed
QB2REL BOOLEAN Switching of 289 is allowed
QB2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 289 is not allowed
QC4REL BOOLEAN Switching of 489G is allowed
QC4ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 489G is not allowed
QC5REL BOOLEAN Switching of 589G is allowed
QC5ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 589G is not allowed
QB2OPTR BOOLEAN 289 is in open position
QB2CLTR BOOLEAN 289 is in closed position
VPQB2TR BOOLEAN Switch status of 289 is valid (open or closed)
12.4.10 Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE (3)
12.4.10.1 Introduction
The interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE, 3) function is used for a line connected to a double busbar arrangement with a transfer busbar according to figure 373. The function can also be used for a double busbar arrangement without transfer busbar or a single busbar arrangement with/without transfer busbar.
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
736 Technical reference manual
189 289 189G
289G
989 989G
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
WA7 (C)
789
en04000478_ansi.vsd
152
ANSI04000478 V1 EN
Figure 373: Switchyard layout ABC_LINE (3)
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
737 Technical reference manual
12.4.10.2 Function block
ANSI05000357-2-en.vsd
ABC_LINE (3) 152_OP 152_CL 989_OP 989_CL 189_OP 189_CL 289_OP 289_CL 789_OP 789_CL 189G_OP 189G_CL 289G_OP 289G_CL 989G_OP 989G_CL 1189G_OP 1189G_CL 2189G_OP 2189G_CL 7189G_OP 7189G_CL BB7_D_OP BC_12_CL BC_17_OP BC_17_CL BC_27_OP BC_27_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON VP_BB7_D VP_BC_12 VP_BC_17 VP_BC_27 EXDU_89G EXDU_BPB EXDU_BC 989_EX1 989_EX2 189_EX1 189_EX2 189_EX3 289_EX1 289_EX2 289_EX3 789_EX1 789_EX2 789_EX3 789_EX4
152CLREL 152CLITL
989REL 989ITL
189REL 189ITL
289REL 289ITL
789REL 789ITL
189GREL 189GITL
289GREL 289GITL
989GREL 989GITL
189OPTR 189CLTR 289OPTR 289CLTR 789OPTR 789CLTR
1289OPTR 1289CLTR VP189TR VP289TR VP789TR
VP1289TR
ANSI05000357 V2 EN
Figure 374: ABC_LINE (3) function block
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
738 Technical reference manual
12.4.10.3 Logic diagram
152_OP
989_OP 152_CL
989_CL
189_CL 189_OP
289_OP
789_CL
989G_OP 289G_CL
789_OP
289G_OP 189G_CL 189G_OP
989G_CL
2189G_OP 2189G_CL
1189G_CL 1189G_OP
989ITL 989REL
en04000527_ansi.vsd
289_CL
VP2189G
VP1189G
VP989G
VP289G
VP189G
VP789
VP289
VP189
VP989
VP152
ABC_LINE
7189G_OP 7189G_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON
VP7189G
VPVOLT VP152 VP189G VP289G VP989G 152_OP 189G_OP 289G_OP 989G_OP
989_EX1 VP289G VP989G 289G_CL 989G_CL
989_EX2
152CLITL 152CLREL
XOR
AND
AND
OR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
NOT
AND NOT
ANSI04000527 V1 EN
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
739 Technical reference manual
189REL
189ITL
VP152 VP289 VP189G VP289G VP1189G 152_OP 289_OP 189G_OP 289G_OP 1189G_OP
EXDU_89G
189_EX1
VP289 VP_BC_12
289_CL BC_12_CL EXDU_BC
189_EX2
VP189G VP1189G 189G_CL 1189G_CL EXDU_89G
189EX3
en04000528_ansi.vsd
NOT
AND
AND OR
AND
ANSI04000528 V1 EN
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
740 Technical reference manual
289REL
289ITL
VP152 VP189 VP189G VP289G VP2189G 152_OP 189_OP 189G_OP 289G_OP 2189G_OP EXDU_89G
289_EX1
VP189 VP_BC_12 QB1_CL BC_12_CL EXDU_BC
289_EX2
VP189G VP2189G 189G_CL 2189G_CL EXDU_89G
289_EX3
en04000529_ansi.vsd
NOT
AND OR
AND
AND
ANSI04000529 V1 EN
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
741 Technical reference manual
VP989G VP7189G
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_17
VP_BC_27 989G_OP 7189G_OP EXDU_89G
BB7_D_OP EXDU_BPB
BC_17_OP BC_27_OP
EXDU_BC
789_EX1
VP152 VP189 VP989G VP989 VP7189G VP_BB7_D VP_BC_17 152_CL 189_CL 989G_OP 989_CL 7189G_OP EXDU_89G
BB7_D_OP EXDU_BPB
BC_17_CL
EXDU_BC
789_EX2
789REL
789ITL
en04000530_ansi.vsd
NOT
ORAND
AND
ANSI04000530 V1 EN
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
742 Technical reference manual
VP152
VP989G VP289
VP989
VP_BB7_D VP7189G
VP_BC_27
289_CL
EXDU_89G
152_CL
7189G_OP 989_CL 989G_OP
BB7_D_OP
BC_27_CL
789_EX3
EXDU_BC
VP989G
EXDU_BPB
VP7189G
289_OP 189_OP VP989 VP289 VP189
789_EX4 EXDU_89G 7189G_CL 989G_CL
989_OP VP789
989_OP 789_OP VPVOLT VP989
VOLT_OFF
189GITL 189GREL
289GREL 289GITL
989GREL 989GITL
en04000531_ansi.vsd
ORAND
AND
AND
AND
NOT
NOT
NOT
ANSI04000531 V1 EN
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
743 Technical reference manual
VP289 VP189 289_OP 189_OP
1289CLTR 1289OPTR
en04000532_ansi.vsd
VP1289TR
789OPTR 789CLTR VP789TR
789_OP 789_CL VP789
VP289 289_CL 289_OP 289OPTR
289CLTR VP289TR
189OPTR 189CLTR VP189TR
189_OP 189_CL VP189
NOT
AND
OR
ANSI04000532 V1 EN
12.4.10.4 Input and output signals
Table 375: ABC_LINE (3) Input signals
Name Type Default Description QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 152 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 152 is in closed position
QB9_OP BOOLEAN 0 989 is in open position
QB9_CL BOOLEAN 0 989 is in closed position
QB1_OP BOOLEAN 0 189 is in open position
QB1_CL BOOLEAN 0 189 is in closed position
QB2_OP BOOLEAN 0 289 is in open position
QB2_CL BOOLEAN 0 289 is in closed position
QB7_OP BOOLEAN 0 789 is in open position
QB7_CL BOOLEAN 0 789 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 189G is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 189G is in closed position
QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 289G is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 289G is in closed position
QC9_OP BOOLEAN 0 989G is in open position
QC9_CL BOOLEAN 0 989G is in closed position
Table continues on next page
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
744 Technical reference manual
Name Type Default Description QC11_OP BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 1189G on busbar WA1 is in open
position
QC11_CL BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 1189G on busbar WA1 is in closed position
QC21_OP BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 2189G on busbar WA2 is in open position
QC21_CL BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 2189G on busbar WA2 is in closed position
QC71_OP BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 7189G on busbar WA7 is in open position
QC71_CL BOOLEAN 0 Grounding switch 7189G on busbar WA7 is in closed position
BB7_D_OP BOOLEAN 0 Disconnectors on busbar WA7 except in the own bay are open
BC_12_CL BOOLEAN 0 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA2
BC_17_OP BOOLEAN 0 No bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA7
BC_17_CL BOOLEAN 0 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA7
BC_27_OP BOOLEAN 0 No bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA2 and WA7
BC_27_CL BOOLEAN 0 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA2 and WA7
VOLT_OFF BOOLEAN 0 There is no voltage on the line and not VT (fuse) failure
VOLT_ON BOOLEAN 0 There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure
VP_BB7_D BOOLEAN 0 Switch status of the disconnectors on busbar WA7 are valid
VP_BC_12 BOOLEAN 0 Status of the bus coupler apparatuses between WA1 and WA2 are valid
VP_BC_17 BOOLEAN 0 Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA7 are valid
VP_BC_27 BOOLEAN 0 Status of the bus coupler app. between WA2 and WA7 are valid
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from any bay containing grounding switches
EXDU_BPB BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from any bay with disconnectors on WA7
EXDU_BC BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from any bus coupler bay
QB9_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
QB9_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 989
QB1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 189
QB1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 189
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
745 Technical reference manual
Name Type Default Description QB1_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 189
QB2_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 289
QB2_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 289
QB2_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 289
QB7_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 789
QB7_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 789
QB7_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 789
QB7_EX4 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 789
Table 376: ABC_LINE (3) Output signals
Name Type Description QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is not allowed
QB9REL BOOLEAN Switching of 989 is allowed
QB9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 989 is not allowed
QB1REL BOOLEAN Switching of 189 is allowed
QB1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 189 is not allowed
QB2REL BOOLEAN Switching of 289 is allowed
QB2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 289 is not allowed
QB7REL BOOLEAN Switching of 789 is allowed
QB7ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 789 is not allowed
QC1REL BOOLEAN Switching of 189G is allowed
QC1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 189G is not allowed
QC2REL BOOLEAN Switching of 289G is allowed
QC2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 289G is not allowed
QC9REL BOOLEAN Switching of 989G is allowed
QC9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 989G is not allowed
QB1OPTR BOOLEAN 189 is in open position
QB1CLTR BOOLEAN 189 is in closed position
QB2OPTR BOOLEAN 289 is in open position
QB2CLTR BOOLEAN 289 is in closed position
QB7OPTR BOOLEAN 789 is in open position
QB7CLTR BOOLEAN 789 is in closed position
QB12OPTR BOOLEAN 189 or 289 or both are in open position
QB12CLTR BOOLEAN 189 and 289 are not in open position
VPQB1TR BOOLEAN Switch status of 189 is valid (open or closed)
Table continues on next page
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
746 Technical reference manual
Name Type Description VPQB2TR BOOLEAN Switch status of 289 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB7TR BOOLEAN Switch status of 789 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB12TR BOOLEAN Switch status of 189 and 289 are valid (open or closed)
12.4.11 Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO (3)
12.4.11.1 Introduction
The interlocking for transformer bay (AB_TRAFO, 3) function is used for a transformer bay connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 375. The function is used when there is no disconnector between circuit breaker and transformer. Otherwise, the interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE, 3) function can be used. This function can also be used in single busbar arrangements.
189 289 189G
289G
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
389G
489G
489389
252 and 489G are not used in this interlocking
AB_TRAFO
en04000515_ansi.vsd
252
152
ANSI04000515 V1 EN
Figure 375: Switchyard layout AB_TRAFO (3)
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
747 Technical reference manual
12.4.11.2 Function block
ANSI05000358-2-en.vsd
AB_TRAFO (3) 152_OP 152_CL 189_OP 189_CL 289_OP 289_CL 189G_OP 189G_CL 289G_OP 289G_CL 389_OP 389_CL 489_OP 489_CL 389G_OP 389G_CL 1189G_OP 1189G_CL 2189G_OP 2189G_CL BC_12_CL VP_BC_12 EXDU_89G EXDU_BC 152_EX1 152_EX2 152_EX3 189_EX1 189_EX2 189_EX3 289_EX1 289_EX2 289_EX3
152CLREL 152CLITL
189REL 189ITL
289REL 289ITL
189GREL 189GITL
289GREL 289GITL
189OPTR 189CLTR 289OPTR 289CLTR
1289OPTR 1289CLTR VP189TR VP289TR
VP1289TR
ANSI05000358 V2 EN
Figure 376: AB_TRAFO (3) function block
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
748 Technical reference manual
12.4.11.3 Logic diagram
152_OP
189_OP 152_CL
189_CL
289_CL 289_OP
189G_OP
289G_CL
389G_OP 489_CL
289G_OP
489_OP 389_CL 389_OP
389G_CL
2189G_OP
VP189 2189G_CL
VP289
1189G_CL 1189G_OP
VP189G
389G_CL 289G_CL 189G_CL
152_EX3 389G_OP
152_EX2
VP489 VP389 VP289G
152_EX1
152CLITL 152CLREL
en04000538_ansi.vsd
189G_CL
VP2189G
VP1189G
VP389G
VP489
VP389
VP289G
VP189G
VP289
VP189
VP152
AB_TRAFO
AND
VP389G
OR
AND NOT
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
ANSI04000538 V1 EN
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
749 Technical reference manual
VP152
VP189G VP289
VP289G
VP1189G VP389G
152_OP
189G_OP
EXDU_89G
289_OP
1189G_OP 389G_OP 289G_OP
189_EX1
VP_BC_12
BC_12_CL 389G_OP 289_CL
EXDU_BC
VP389G VP289
VP389G VP289G VP189G
189_EX2
189ITL
en04000539_ansi.vsd
189REL
VP1189G 189G_CL 289G_CL 389G_CL 1189G_CL EXDU_89G
189_EX3
NOT
AND OR
AND
AND
ANSI04000539 V1 EN
VP152
VP189G VP189
VP289G
VP2189G VP389G
152_OP
189G_OP
EXDU_89G
189_OP
2189G_OP 389G_OP 289G_OP
289_EX1
VP_BC_12
BC_12_CL 389G_OP 189_CL
EXDU_BC
VP389G VP189
VP389G VP289G VP189G
289_EX2
252ITL
en04000540_ansi.vsd
OR
AND
252REL
VP2189G 189G_CL 289G_CL 389G_CL 2189G_CL EXDU_89G
289_EX3
AND
AND NOT
ANSI04000540 V1 EN
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
750 Technical reference manual
AND VP389 VP289
VP489
289_OP 189_OP
389_OP
189_OP
489_OP
VP189 189_CL
289_OP
VP189
189GITL 189GREL
289GREL 289GITL
en04000541_ansi.vsd
189OPTR 189CLTR VP189TR
189_OP 289_OP
1289OPTR 1289CLTR
VP289 VP1289TR
289_CL VP289
289OPTR 289CLTR VP289TR
NOT
NOT
AND
OR NOT
VP189
ANSI04000541 V1 EN
12.4.11.4 Input and output signals
Table 377: AB_TRAFO (3) Input signals
Name Type Default Description QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 152 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 152 is in closed position
QB1_OP BOOLEAN 0 189 is in open position
QB1_CL BOOLEAN 0 189 is in closed position
QB2_OP BOOLEAN 0 289 is in open position
QB2_CL BOOLEAN 0 289 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 189G is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 189G is in closed position
QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 289G is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 289G is in closed position
QB3_OP BOOLEAN 0 389 is in open position
QB3_CL BOOLEAN 0 389 is in closed position
QB4_OP BOOLEAN 0 489 is in open position
QB4_CL BOOLEAN 0 489 is in closed position
QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 389G is in open position
QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 389G is in closed position
QC11_OP BOOLEAN 0 1189G on busbar WA1 is in open position
QC11_CL BOOLEAN 0 1189G on busbar WA1 is in closed position
QC21_OP BOOLEAN 0 2189G on busbar WA2 is in open position
QC21_CL BOOLEAN 0 2189G on busbar WA2 is in closed position
BC_12_CL BOOLEAN 0 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA2
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
751 Technical reference manual
Name Type Default Description VP_BC_12 BOOLEAN 0 Status of the bus coupler apparatuses between WA1
and WA2 are valid
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from any bay containing grounding switches
EXDU_BC BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from any bus coupler bay
QA1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for breaker 152
QA1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for breaker 152
QA1_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for breaker 152
QB1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 189
QB1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 189
QB1_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 189
QB2_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 289
QB2_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 289
QB2_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus 289
Table 378: AB_TRAFO (3) Output signals
Name Type Description QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of 152 is not allowed
QB1REL BOOLEAN Switching of 189 is allowed
QB1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 189 is not allowed
QB2REL BOOLEAN Switching of 289 is allowed
QB2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 289 is not allowed
QC1REL BOOLEAN Switching of 189G is allowed
QC1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 189G is not allowed
QC2REL BOOLEAN Switching of 289G is allowed
QC2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of 289G is not allowed
QB1OPTR BOOLEAN 189 is in open position
QB1CLTR BOOLEAN 189 is in closed position
QB2OPTR BOOLEAN 289 is in open position
QB2CLTR BOOLEAN 289 is in closed position
QB12OPTR BOOLEAN 189 or 289 or both are in open position
QB12CLTR BOOLEAN 189 and 289 are not in open position
VPQB1TR BOOLEAN Switch status of 189 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB2TR BOOLEAN Switch status of 289 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB12TR BOOLEAN Switch status of 189 and 289 are valid (open or closed)
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
752 Technical reference manual
12.4.12 Position evaluation POS_EVAL
12.4.12.1 Introduction
Position evaluation (POS_EVAL) function converts the input position data signal POSITION, consisting of value, time and signal status, to binary signals OPENPOS or CLOSEPOS.
The output signals are used by other functions in the interlocking scheme.
12.4.12.2 Logic diagram
POS_EVAL POSITION OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
IEC08000469-1-en.vsd
Position including quality Open/close position of switch device
IEC08000469-1-EN V1 EN
Only the value, open/close, and status is used in this function. Time information is not used.
Input position (Value) Signal quality Output OPENPOS Output CLOSEPOS 0 (Breaker intermediate) Good 0 0
1 (Breaker open) Good 1 0
2 (Breaker closed) Good 0 1
3 (Breaker faulty) Good 0 0
Any Invalid 0 0
Any Oscillatory 0 0
12.4.12.3 Function block POS_EVAL
POSITION OPENPOS CLOSEPOS
IEC09000079_1_en.vsd
IEC09000079 V1 EN
Figure 377: POS_EVAL function block
12.4.12.4 Input and output signals
Table 379: POS_EVAL Input signals
Name Type Default Description POSITION INTEGER 0 Position status including quality
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
753 Technical reference manual
Table 380: POS_EVAL Output signals
Name Type Description OPENPOS BOOLEAN Open position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Close position
12.5 Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation SLGGIO
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation
SLGGIO — —
12.5.1 Introduction The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (SLGGIO) (or the selector switch function block) is used to get a selector switch functionality similar to the one provided by a hardware selector switch. Hardware selector switches are used extensively by utilities, in order to have different functions operating on pre-set values. Hardware switches are however sources for maintenance issues, lower system reliability and an extended purchase portfolio. The logic selector switches eliminate all these problems.
12.5.2 Principle of operation The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (SLGGIO) function has two operating inputs UP and DOWN. When a signal is received on the UP input, the block will activate the output next to the present activated output, in ascending order (if the present activated output is 3 for example and one operates the UP input, then the output 4 will be activated). When a signal is received on the DOWN input, the block will activate the output next to the present activated output, in descending order (if the present activated output is 3 for example and one operates the DOWN input, then the output 2 will be activated). Depending on the output settings the output signals can be steady or pulsed. In case of steady signals, in case of UP or DOWN operation, the previously active output will be deactivated. Also, depending on the settings one can have a time delay between the UP or DOWN activation signal positive front and the output activation.
Besides the inputs visible in the application configuration in the Application Configuration tool, there are other possibilities that will allow an user to set the desired
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
754 Technical reference manual
position directly (without activating the intermediate positions), either locally or remotely, using a select before execute dialog. One can block the function operation, by activating the BLOCK input. In this case, the present position will be kept and further operation will be blocked. The operator place (local or remote) is specified through the PSTO input. If any operation is allowed the signal INTONE from the Fixed signal function block can be connected. SLGGIO function block has also an integer value output, that generates the actual position number. The positions and the block names are fully settable by the user. These names will appear in the menu, so the user can see the position names instead of a number.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
755 Technical reference manual
12.5.2.1 Functionality and behaviour
Ctrl/Com Single Command Selector Switch (GGIO)
../Ctrl/Com/Sel Sw SLGGIO1 SLGGIO2 .. .. SLGGIO15
Control Measurements Events Disturbance records Settings Diagnostics Test Reset Authorization Language
4
Control Single Line Diagram Commands
../Com/Sel Sw/ SLGGIO3 Damage ctrl
../Com/Sel Sw/ SLGGIO3 Damage ctrl 4
P:Disc All N: Disc Fe
OK Cancel
../Com/Sel Sw/ DmgCtrl Damage ctrl:
7 The dialog window that appears shows the present position (P:) and the new position (N:), both in clear names, given by the user (max. 13 characters).
E Modify the position with arrows. The pos will not be modified (outputs will not be activated) until you press the E-button for O.K. IEC06000420-2-en.vsd
1 2 3
4
5
IEC06000420 V2 EN
Figure 378: Example 1 on handling the switch from the local HMI. From the local HMI:
1 SLGGIO instances in the ACT application configuration
2 Switch name given by the user (max 13 characters)
3 Position number, up to 32 positions
4 Change position
5 New position
12.5.2.2 Graphical display
There are two possibilities for SLGGIO
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
756 Technical reference manual
if it is used just for the monitoring, the switches will be listed with their actual position names, as defined by the user (max. 13 characters).
if it is used for control, the switches will be listed with their actual positions, but only the first three letters of the name will be used.
In both cases, the switch full name will be shown, but the user has to redefine it when building the Graphical Display Editor, under the «Caption». If used for the control, the following sequence of commands will ensure:
ANSI06000421-2-en.vsd
../Control/SLD/Switch
SMBRREC control WFM
Pilot setup OFF
Damage control DAL
../Control/SLD/Switch
SMBRREC control WFM
Pilot setup OFF
P: Disc N: Disc Fe
OK Cancel
../Control/SLD/Switch
SMBRREC control WFM
Pilot setup OFF
Damage control DFW
Change to the «Switches» page of the SLD by left-right arrows. Select switch by up-down arrows
Control Single Line Diagram Commands
Control Measurements Events Disturbance records Settings Diagnostics Test Reset Authorization Language
Select switch. Press the Open or Close key. A dialog box appears.
E The pos will not be modified (outputs will not be activated) until you press the E-button for O.K.
Open Close
ANSI06000421 V2 EN
Figure 379: Example 2 on handling the switch from the local HMI. From the single line diagram on local HMI.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
757 Technical reference manual
12.5.3 Function block
ANSI05000658-2-en.vsd
SLGGIO BLOCK PSTO UP DOWN
^SWPOS01 ^SWPOS02 ^SWPOS03 ^SWPOS04 ^SWPOS05 ^SWPOS06 ^SWPOS07 ^SWPOS08 ^SWPOS09 ^SWPOS10 ^SWPOS11 ^SWPOS12 ^SWPOS13 ^SWPOS14 ^SWPOS15 ^SWPOS16 ^SWPOS17 ^SWPOS18 ^SWPOS19 ^SWPOS20 ^SWPOS21 ^SWPOS22 ^SWPOS23 ^SWPOS24 ^SWPOS25 ^SWPOS26 ^SWPOS27 ^SWPOS28 ^SWPOS29 ^SWPOS30 ^SWPOS31 ^SWPOS32
SWPOSN
ANSI05000658 V2 EN
Figure 380: SLGGIO function block
12.5.4 Input and output signals Table 381: SLGGIO Input signals
Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection
UP BOOLEAN 0 Binary «UP» command
DOWN BOOLEAN 0 Binary «DOWN» command
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
758 Technical reference manual
Table 382: SLGGIO Output signals
Name Type Description SWPOS01 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 1
SWPOS02 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 2
SWPOS03 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 3
SWPOS04 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 4
SWPOS05 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 5
SWPOS06 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 6
SWPOS07 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 7
SWPOS08 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 8
SWPOS09 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 9
SWPOS10 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 10
SWPOS11 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 11
SWPOS12 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 12
SWPOS13 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 13
SWPOS14 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 14
SWPOS15 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 15
SWPOS16 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 16
SWPOS17 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 17
SWPOS18 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 18
SWPOS19 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 19
SWPOS20 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 20
SWPOS21 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 21
SWPOS22 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 22
SWPOS23 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 23
SWPOS24 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 24
SWPOS25 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 25
SWPOS26 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 26
SWPOS27 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 27
SWPOS28 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 28
SWPOS29 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 29
SWPOS30 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 30
SWPOS31 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 31
SWPOS32 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 32
SWPOSN INTEGER Switch position (integer)
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
759 Technical reference manual
12.5.5 Setting parameters Table 383: SLGGIO Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Operation Enable/Disable
NrPos 2 — 32 — 1 32 Number of positions in the switch
OutType Pulsed Steady
— — Steady Output type, steady or pulse
tPulse 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Operate pulse duration, in [s]
tDelay 0.000 — 60000.000 s 0.010 0.000 Time delay on the output, in [s]
StopAtExtremes Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Stop when min or max position is reached
12.6 Selector mini switch VSGGIO
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Selector mini switch VSGGIO — —
12.6.1 Introduction The Selector mini switch VSGGIO function block is a multipurpose function used for a variety of applications, as a general purpose switch.
VSGGIO can be controlled from the menu or from a symbol on the single line diagram (SLD) on the local HMI.
12.6.2 Principle of operation Selector mini switch (VSGGIO) function can be used for double purpose, in the same way as switch controller (SCSWI) functions are used:
for indication on the single line diagram (SLD). Position is received through the IPOS1 and IPOS2 inputs and distributed in the configuration through the POS1 and POS2 outputs, or to IEC 61850 through reporting, or GOOSE.
for commands that are received via the local HMI or IEC 61850 and distributed in the configuration through outputs CMDPOS12 and CMDPOS21. The output CMDPOS12 is set when the function receives a CLOSE command from the local HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen.
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
760 Technical reference manual
The output CMDPOS21 is set when the function receives an OPEN command from the local HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen.
It is important for indication in the SLD that the a symbol is associated with a controllable object, otherwise the symbol won’t be displayed on the screen. A symbol is created and configured in GDE tool in PCM600.
The PSTO input is connected to the Local remote switch to have a selection of operators place, operation from local HMI (Local) or through IEC 61850 (Remote). An INTONE connection from Fixed signal function block (FXDSIGN) will allow operation from local HMI.
As it can be seen, both indications and commands are done in double-bit representation, where a combination of signals on both inputs/outputs generate the desired result.
The following table shows the relationship between IPOS1/IPOS2 inputs and the name of the string that is shown on the SLD. The value of the strings are set in PST.
IPOS1 IPOS2 Name of displayed string Default string value 0 0 PosUndefined P00
1 0 Position1 P01
0 1 Position2 P10
1 1 PosBadState P11
12.6.3 Function block
IEC06000508-2-en.vsd
VSGGIO BLOCK PSTO IPOS1 IPOS2
BLOCKED POSITION
POS1 POS2
CMDPOS12 CMDPOS21
IEC06000508 V3 EN
Figure 381: VSGGIO function block
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
761 Technical reference manual
12.6.4 Input and output signals Table 384: VSGGIO Input signals
Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection
IPOS1 BOOLEAN 0 Position 1 indicating input
IPOS2 BOOLEAN 0 Position 2 indicating input
Table 385: VSGGIO Output signals
Name Type Description BLOCKED BOOLEAN The function is active but the functionality is blocked
POSITION INTEGER Position indication, integer
POS1 BOOLEAN Position 1 indication, logical signal
POS2 BOOLEAN Position 2 indication, logical signal
CMDPOS12 BOOLEAN Execute command from position 1 to position 2
CMDPOS21 BOOLEAN Execute command from position 2 to position 1
12.6.5 Setting parameters Table 386: VSGGIO Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
CtlModel Dir Norm SBO Enh
— — Dir Norm Specifies the type for control model according to IEC 61850
Mode Steady Pulsed
— — Pulsed Operation mode
tSelect 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 30.000 Max time between select and execute signals
tPulse 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Command pulse lenght
12.7 IEC61850 generic communication I/O functions DPGGIO
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
762 Technical reference manual
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions
DPGGIO — —
12.7.1 Introduction The IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions (DPGGIO) function block is used to send double indications to other systems or equipment in the substation. It is especially used in the interlocking and reservation station-wide logics.
12.7.2 Principle of operation Upon receiving the input signals, the IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions (DPGGIO) function block will send the signals over IEC 61850-8-1 to the equipment or system that requests these signals. To be able to get the signals, other tools must be used, as described in the application manual, to PCM600 must be used to define which function block in which equipment or system should receive this information.
12.7.3 Function block
IEC07000200-2-en.vsd
DPGGIO OPEN CLOSE VALID
POSITION
IEC07000200 V2 EN
Figure 382: DPGGIO function block
12.7.4 Input and output signals Table 387: DPGGIO Input signals
Name Type Default Description OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open indication
CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Close indication
VALID BOOLEAN 0 Valid indication
Table 388: DPGGIO Output signals
Name Type Description POSITION INTEGER Double point indication
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
763 Technical reference manual
12.7.5 Settings The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.
12.8 Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GGIO
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GGIO — —
12.8.1 Introduction The Single point generic control 8 signals (SPC8GGIO) function block is a collection of 8 single point commands, designed to bring in commands from REMOTE (SCADA) to those parts of the logic configuration that do not need extensive command receiving functionality (for example, SCSWI). In this way, simple commands can be sent directly to the IED outputs, without confirmation. Confirmation (status) of the result of the commands is supposed to be achieved by other means, such as binary inputs and SPGGIO function blocks. The commands can be pulsed or steady.
12.8.2 Principle of operation The PSTO input selects the operator place (LOCAL, REMOTE or ALL). One of the eight outputs is activated based on the command sent from the operator place selected. The settings Latchedx and tPulsex (where x is the respective output) will determine if the signal will be pulsed (and how long the pulse is) or latched (steady). BLOCK will block the operation of the function in case a command is sent, no output will be activated.
PSTO is the universal operator place selector for all control functions. Although, PSTO can be configured to use LOCAL or ALL operator places only, REMOTE operator place is used in SPC8GGIO function.
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
764 Technical reference manual
12.8.3 Function block
IEC07000143-2-en.vsd
SPC8GGIO BLOCK PSTO
^OUT1 ^OUT2 ^OUT3 ^OUT4 ^OUT5 ^OUT6 ^OUT7 ^OUT8
IEC07000143 V2 EN
Figure 383: SPC8GGIO function block
12.8.4 Input and output signals Table 389: SPC8GGIO Input signals
Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the function operation
PSTO INTEGER 2 Operator place selection
Table 390: SPC8GGIO Output signals
Name Type Description OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1
OUT2 BOOLEAN Output2
OUT3 BOOLEAN Output3
OUT4 BOOLEAN Output4
OUT5 BOOLEAN Output5
OUT6 BOOLEAN Output6
OUT7 BOOLEAN Output7
OUT8 BOOLEAN Output8
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
765 Technical reference manual
12.8.5 Setting parameters Table 391: SPC8GGIO Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Latched1 Pulsed Latched
— — Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output 1
tPulse1 0.01 — 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Output1 Pulse Time
Latched2 Pulsed Latched
— — Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output 2
tPulse2 0.01 — 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Output2 Pulse Time
Latched3 Pulsed Latched
— — Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output 3
tPulse3 0.01 — 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Output3 Pulse Time
Latched4 Pulsed Latched
— — Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output 4
tPulse4 0.01 — 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Output4 Pulse Time
Latched5 Pulsed Latched
— — Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output 5
tPulse5 0.01 — 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Output5 Pulse Time
Latched6 Pulsed Latched
— — Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output 6
tPulse6 0.01 — 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Output6 Pulse Time
Latched7 Pulsed Latched
— — Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output 7
tPulse7 0.01 — 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Output7 Pulse Time
Latched8 Pulsed Latched
— — Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output 8
tPulse8 0.01 — 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Output8 pulse time
12.9 AutomationBits, command function for DNP3.0 AUTOBITS
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
AutomationBits, command function for DNP3 AUTOBITS — —
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
766 Technical reference manual
12.9.1 Introduction AutomationBits function for DNP3 (AUTOBITS) is used within PCM600 to get into the configuration of the commands coming through the DNP3 protocol. The AUTOBITS function plays the same role as functions GOOSEBINRCV (for IEC 61850) and MULTICMDRCV (for LON).
12.9.2 Principle of operation AutomationBits function (AUTOBITS) has 32 individual outputs which each can be mapped as a Binary Output point in DNP3. The output is operated by a «Object 12» in DNP3. This object contains parameters for control-code, count, on-time and off-time. To operate an AUTOBITS output point, send a control-code of latch-On, latch-Off, pulse- On, pulse-Off, Trip or Close. The remaining parameters will be regarded were appropriate. ex: pulse-On, on-time=100, off-time=300, count=5 would give 5 positive 100 ms pulses, 300 ms apart.
There is a BLOCK input signal, which will disable the operation of the function, in the same way the setting Operation: Enabled/Disabled does. That means that, upon activation of the BLOCK input, all 32 CMDBITxx outputs will be set to 0. The BLOCK acts like an overriding, the function still receives data from the DNP3 master. Upon deactivation of BLOCK, all the 32 CMDBITxx outputs will be set by the DNP3 master again, momentarily. For AUTOBITS , the PSTO input determines the operator place. The command can be written to the block while in Remote. If PSTO is in Local then no change is applied to the outputs.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
767 Technical reference manual
12.9.3 Function block
IEC09000925-1-en.vsd
AUTOBITS BLOCK PSTO
^CMDBIT1 ^CMDBIT2 ^CMDBIT3 ^CMDBIT4 ^CMDBIT5 ^CMDBIT6 ^CMDBIT7 ^CMDBIT8 ^CMDBIT9
^CMDBIT10 ^CMDBIT11 ^CMDBIT12 ^CMDBIT13 ^CMDBIT14 ^CMDBIT15 ^CMDBIT16 ^CMDBIT17 ^CMDBIT18 ^CMDBIT19 ^CMDBIT20 ^CMDBIT21 ^CMDBIT22 ^CMDBIT23 ^CMDBIT24 ^CMDBIT25 ^CMDBIT26 ^CMDBIT27 ^CMDBIT28 ^CMDBIT29 ^CMDBIT30 ^CMDBIT31 ^CMDBIT32
IEC09000925 V1 EN
Figure 384: AUTOBITS function block
12.9.4 Input and output signals Table 392: AUTOBITS Input signals
Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection
Table 393: AUTOBITS Output signals
Name Type Description CMDBIT1 BOOLEAN Command out bit 1
CMDBIT2 BOOLEAN Command out bit 2
CMDBIT3 BOOLEAN Command out bit 3
CMDBIT4 BOOLEAN Command out bit 4
CMDBIT5 BOOLEAN Command out bit 5
Table continues on next page
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
768 Technical reference manual
Name Type Description CMDBIT6 BOOLEAN Command out bit 6
CMDBIT7 BOOLEAN Command out bit 7
CMDBIT8 BOOLEAN Command out bit 8
CMDBIT9 BOOLEAN Command out bit 9
CMDBIT10 BOOLEAN Command out bit 10
CMDBIT11 BOOLEAN Command out bit 11
CMDBIT12 BOOLEAN Command out bit 12
CMDBIT13 BOOLEAN Command out bit 13
CMDBIT14 BOOLEAN Command out bit 14
CMDBIT15 BOOLEAN Command out bit 15
CMDBIT16 BOOLEAN Command out bit 16
CMDBIT17 BOOLEAN Command out bit 17
CMDBIT18 BOOLEAN Command out bit 18
CMDBIT19 BOOLEAN Command out bit 19
CMDBIT20 BOOLEAN Command out bit 20
CMDBIT21 BOOLEAN Command out bit 21
CMDBIT22 BOOLEAN Command out bit 22
CMDBIT23 BOOLEAN Command out bit 23
CMDBIT24 BOOLEAN Command out bit 24
CMDBIT25 BOOLEAN Command out bit 25
CMDBIT26 BOOLEAN Command out bit 26
CMDBIT27 BOOLEAN Command out bit 27
CMDBIT28 BOOLEAN Command out bit 28
CMDBIT29 BOOLEAN Command out bit 29
CMDBIT30 BOOLEAN Command out bit 30
CMDBIT31 BOOLEAN Command out bit 31
CMDBIT32 BOOLEAN Command out bit 32
12.9.5 Setting parameters Table 394: AUTOBITS Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
769 Technical reference manual
Table 395: DNPGEN Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
Table 396: CHSERRS485 Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Serial-Mode — — Disabled Operation mode
BaudRate 300 Bd 600 Bd 1200 Bd 2400 Bd 4800 Bd 9600 Bd 19200 Bd
— — 9600 Bd Baud-rate for serial port
WireMode Four-wire Two-wire
— — Two-wire RS485 wire mode
Table 397: CHSERRS485 Non group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description DLinkConfirm Never
Sometimes Always
— — Never Data-link confirm
tDLinkTimeout 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Data-link confirm timeout in s
DLinkRetries 0 — 255 — 1 3 Data-link maximum retries
tRxToTxMinDel 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Rx to Tx minimum delay in s
ApLayMaxRxSize 20 — 2048 — 1 2048 Application layer maximum Rx fragment size
ApLayMaxTxSize 20 — 2048 — 1 2048 Application layer maximum Tx fragment size
StopBits 1 — 2 — 1 1 Stop bits
Parity No Even Odd
— — Even Parity
tRTSWarmUp 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 RTS warm-up in s
tRTSWarmDown 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 RTS warm-down in s
tBackOffDelay 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.050 RS485 back-off delay in s
tMaxRndDelBkOf 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 RS485 maximum back-off random delay in s
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
770 Technical reference manual
Table 398: CH2TCP Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
TCP/IP UDP-Only
— — Disabled Operation mode
TCPIPLisPort 1 — 65535 — 1 20000 TCP/IP listen port
UDPPortAccData 1 — 65535 — 1 20000 UDP port to accept UDP datagrams from master
UDPPortInitNUL 1 — 65535 — 1 20000 UDP port for initial NULL response
UDPPortCliMast 0 — 65535 — 1 0 UDP port to remote client/master
Table 399: CH2TCP Non group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description ApLayMaxRxSize 20 — 2048 — 1 2048 Application layer maximum Rx fragment size
ApLayMaxTxSize 20 — 2048 — 1 2048 Application layer maximum Tx fragment size
Table 400: CH3TCP Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
TCP/IP UDP-Only
— — Disabled Operation mode
TCPIPLisPort 1 — 65535 — 1 20000 TCP/IP listen port
UDPPortAccData 1 — 65535 — 1 20000 UDP port to accept UDP datagrams from master
UDPPortInitNUL 1 — 65535 — 1 20000 UDP port for initial NULL response
UDPPortCliMast 0 — 65535 — 1 0 UDP port to remote client/master
Table 401: CH3TCP Non group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description ApLayMaxRxSize 20 — 2048 — 1 2048 Application layer maximum Rx fragment size
ApLayMaxTxSize 20 — 2048 — 1 2048 Application layer maximum Tx fragment size
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
771 Technical reference manual
Table 402: CH4TCP Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
TCP/IP UDP-Only
— — Disabled Operation mode
TCPIPLisPort 1 — 65535 — 1 20000 TCP/IP listen port
UDPPortAccData 1 — 65535 — 1 20000 UDP port to accept UDP datagrams from master
UDPPortInitNUL 1 — 65535 — 1 20000 UDP port for initial NULL response
UDPPortCliMast 0 — 65535 — 1 0 UDP port to remote client/master
Table 403: CH4TCP Non group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description ApLayMaxRxSize 20 — 2048 — 1 2048 Application layer maximum Rx fragment size
ApLayMaxTxSize 20 — 2048 — 1 2048 Application layer maximum Tx fragment size
Table 404: CH5TCP Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
TCP/IP UDP-Only
— — Disabled Operation mode
TCPIPLisPort 1 — 65535 — 1 20000 TCP/IP listen port
UDPPortAccData 1 — 65535 — 1 20000 UDP port to accept UDP datagrams from master
UDPPortInitNUL 1 — 65535 — 1 20000 UDP port for initial NULL response
UDPPortCliMast 0 — 65535 — 1 0 UDP port to remote client/master
Table 405: CH5TCP Non group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description ApLayMaxRxSize 20 — 2048 — 1 2048 Application layer maximum Rx fragment size
ApLayMaxTxSize 20 — 2048 — 1 2048 Application layer maximum Tx fragment size
Table 406: MSTRS485 Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
SlaveAddress 0 — 65519 — 1 1 Slave address
MasterAddres 0 — 65519 — 1 1 Master address
Table continues on next page
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
772 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Obj1DefVar 1:BISingleBit
2:BIWithStatus — — 1:BISingleBit Object 1, default variation
Obj2DefVar 1:BIChWithoutTim e 2:BIChWithTime 3:BIChWithRelTim e
— — 3:BIChWithRelTim e
Object 2, default variation
Obj4DefVar 1:DIChWithoutTim e 2:DIChWithTime 3:DIChWithRelTim e
— — 3:DIChWithRelTim e
Object 4, default variation
Obj10DefVar 1:BO 2:BOStatus
— — 2:BOStatus Object 10, default variation
Obj20DefVar 1:BinCnt32 2:BinCnt16 5:BinCnt32WoutF 6:BinCnt16WoutF
— — 5:BinCnt32WoutF Object 20, default variation
Obj22DefVar 1:BinCnt32EvWout T 2:BinCnt16EvWout T 5:BinCnt32EvWith T 6:BinCnt16EvWith T
— — 1:BinCnt32EvWou tT
Object 22, default variation
Obj30DefVar 1:AI32Int 2:AI16Int 3:AI32IntWithoutF 4:AI16IntWithoutF 5:AI32FltWithF 6:AI64FltWithF
— — 3:AI32IntWithoutF Object 30, default variation
Obj32DefVar 1:AI32IntEvWoutF 2:AI16IntEvWoutF 3:AI32IntEvWithFT 4:AI16IntEvWithFT 5:AI32FltEvWithF 6:AI64FltEvWithF 7:AI32FltEvWithFT 8:AI64FltEvWithFT
— — 1:AI32IntEvWoutF Object 32, default variation
Table 407: MSTRS485 Non group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description ValMasterAddr No
Yes — — Yes Validate source (master) address
AddrQueryEnbl No Yes
— — Yes Address query enable
tApplConfTout 0.00 — 300.00 s 0.01 10.00 Application layer confim timeout
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
773 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description ApplMultFrgRes No
Yes — — Yes Enable application for multiple fragment
response
ConfMultFrag No Yes
— — Yes Confirm each multiple fragment
UREnable No Yes
— — Yes Unsolicited response enabled
URSendOnline No Yes
— — No Unsolicited response sends when on-line
UREvClassMask Disabled Class 1 Class 2 Class 1 and 2 Class 3 Class 1 and 3 Class 2 and 3 Class 1, 2 and 3
— — Disabled Unsolicited response, event class mask
UROfflineRetry 0 — 10 — 1 5 Unsolicited response retries before off-line retry mode
tURRetryDelay 0.00 — 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response retry delay in s
tUROfflRtryDel 0.00 — 60.00 s 0.01 30.00 Unsolicited response off-line retry delay in s
UREvCntThold1 1 — 100 — 1 5 Unsolicited response class 1 event count report treshold
tUREvBufTout1 0.00 — 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 1 event buffer timeout
UREvCntThold2 1 — 100 — 1 5 Unsolicited response class 2 event count report treshold
tUREvBufTout2 0.00 — 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 2 event buffer timeout
UREvCntThold3 1 — 100 — 1 5 Unsolicited response class 3 event count report treshold
tUREvBufTout3 0.00 — 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 3 event buffer timeout
DelOldBufFull No Yes
— — No Delete oldest event when buffer is full
tSynchTimeout 30 — 3600 s 1 1800 Time synch timeout before error status is generated
TSyncReqAfTout No Yes
— — No Time synchronization request after timeout
DNPToSetTime No Yes
— — Yes Allow DNP to set time in IED
Averag3TimeReq No Yes
— — No Use average of 3 time requests
PairedPoint No Yes
— — Yes Enable paired point
tSelectTimeout 1.0 — 60.0 s 0.1 30.0 Select timeout
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
774 Technical reference manual
Table 408: MST1TCP Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Operation Disable / Enable
SlaveAddress 0 — 65519 — 1 1 Slave address
MasterAddres 0 — 65519 — 1 1 Master address
ValMasterAddr No Yes
— — Yes Validate source (master) address
MasterIP-Addr 0 — 18 IP Address
1 0.0.0.0 Master IP-address
MasterIPNetMsk 0 — 18 IP Address
1 255.255.255.255 Master IP net mask
Obj1DefVar 1:BISingleBit 2:BIWithStatus
— — 1:BISingleBit Object 1, default variation
Obj2DefVar 1:BIChWithoutTim e 2:BIChWithTime 3:BIChWithRelTim e
— — 3:BIChWithRelTim e
Object 2, default variation
Obj3DefVar 1:DIWithoutFlag 2:DIWithFlag
— — 1:DIWithoutFlag Object 3, default variation
Obj4DefVar 1:DIChWithoutTim e 2:DIChWithTime 3:DIChWithRelTim e
— — 3:DIChWithRelTim e
Object 4, default variation
Obj10DefVar 1:BO 2:BOStatus
— — 2:BOStatus Object 10, default variation
Obj20DefVar 1:BinCnt32 2:BinCnt16 5:BinCnt32WoutF 6:BinCnt16WoutF
— — 5:BinCnt32WoutF Object 20, default variation
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
775 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Obj22DefVar 1:BinCnt32EvWout
T 2:BinCnt16EvWout T 5:BinCnt32EvWith T 6:BinCnt16EvWith T
— — 1:BinCnt32EvWou tT
Object 22, default variation
Obj30DefVar 1:AI32Int 2:AI16Int 3:AI32IntWithoutF 4:AI16IntWithoutF 5:AI32FltWithF 6:AI64FltWithF
— — 3:AI32IntWithoutF Object 30, default variation
Obj32DefVar 1:AI32IntEvWoutF 2:AI16IntEvWoutF 3:AI32IntEvWithFT 4:AI16IntEvWithFT 5:AI32FltEvWithF 6:AI64FltEvWithF 7:AI32FltEvWithFT 8:AI64FltEvWithFT
— — 1:AI32IntEvWoutF Object 32, default variation
Table 409: MST1TCP Non group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description AddrQueryEnbl No
Yes — — Yes Address query enable
tApplConfTout 0.00 — 300.00 s 0.01 10.00 Application layer confim timeout
ApplMultFrgRes No Yes
— — Yes Enable application for multiple fragment response
ConfMultFrag No Yes
— — Yes Confirm each multiple fragment
UREnable No Yes
— — Yes Unsolicited response enabled
UREvClassMask Disabled Class 1 Class 2 Class 1 and 2 Class 3 Class 1 and 3 Class 2 and 3 Class 1, 2 and 3
— — Disabled Unsolicited response, event class mask
UROfflineRetry 0 — 10 — 1 5 Unsolicited response retries before off-line retry mode
tURRetryDelay 0.00 — 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response retry delay in s
tUROfflRtryDel 0.00 — 60.00 s 0.01 30.00 Unsolicited response off-line retry delay in s
UREvCntThold1 1 — 100 — 1 5 Unsolicited response class 1 event count report treshold
Table continues on next page
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
776 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description tUREvBufTout1 0.00 — 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 1 event buffer
timeout
UREvCntThold2 1 — 100 — 1 5 Unsolicited response class 2 event count report treshold
tUREvBufTout2 0.00 — 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 2 event buffer timeout
UREvCntThold3 1 — 100 — 1 5 Unsolicited response class 3 event count report treshold
tUREvBufTout3 0.00 — 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 3 event buffer timeout
DelOldBufFull No Yes
— — No Delete oldest event when buffer is full
ExtTimeFormat LocalTime UTC
— — UTC External time format
DNPToSetTime No Yes
— — No Allow DNP to set time in IED
tSynchTimeout 30 — 3600 s 1 1800 Time synch timeout before error status is generated
TSyncReqAfTout No Yes
— — No Time synchronization request after timeout
Averag3TimeReq No Yes
— — No Use average of 3 time requests
PairedPoint No Yes
— — Yes Enable paired point
tSelectTimeout 1.0 — 60.0 s 0.1 30.0 Select timeout
tBrokenConTout 0 — 3600 s 1 0 Broken connection timeout
tKeepAliveT 0 — 3600 s 1 10 Keep-Alive timer
Table 410: MST2TCP Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
SlaveAddress 0 — 65519 — 1 1 Slave address
MasterAddres 0 — 65519 — 1 1 Master address
ValMasterAddr No Yes
— — Yes Validate source (master) address
MasterIP-Addr 0 — 18 IP Address
1 0.0.0.0 Master IP-address
MasterIPNetMsk 0 — 18 IP Address
1 255.255.255.255 Master IP net mask
Obj1DefVar 1:BISingleBit 2:BIWithStatus
— — 1:BISingleBit Object 1, default variation
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
777 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Obj2DefVar 1:BIChWithoutTim
e 2:BIChWithTime 3:BIChWithRelTim e
— — 3:BIChWithRelTim e
Object 2, default variation
Obj3DefVar 1:DIWithoutFlag 2:DIWithFlag
— — 1:DIWithoutFlag Object 3, default variation
Obj4DefVar 1:DIChWithoutTim e 2:DIChWithTime 3:DIChWithRelTim e
— — 3:DIChWithRelTim e
Object 4, default variation
Obj10DefVar 1:BO 2:BOStatus
— — 2:BOStatus Object 10, default variation
Obj20DefVar 1:BinCnt32 2:BinCnt16 5:BinCnt32WoutF 6:BinCnt16WoutF
— — 5:BinCnt32WoutF Object 20, default variation
Obj22DefVar 1:BinCnt32EvWout T 2:BinCnt16EvWout T 5:BinCnt32EvWith T 6:BinCnt16EvWith T
— — 1:BinCnt32EvWou tT
Object 22, default variation
Obj30DefVar 1:AI32Int 2:AI16Int 3:AI32IntWithoutF 4:AI16IntWithoutF 5:AI32FltWithF 6:AI64FltWithF
— — 3:AI32IntWithoutF Object 30, default variation
Obj32DefVar 1:AI32IntEvWoutF 2:AI16IntEvWoutF 3:AI32IntEvWithFT 4:AI16IntEvWithFT 5:AI32FltEvWithF 6:AI64FltEvWithF 7:AI32FltEvWithFT 8:AI64FltEvWithFT
— — 1:AI32IntEvWoutF Object 32, default variation
Table 411: MST2TCP Non group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description AddrQueryEnbl No
Yes — — Yes Address query enable
tApplConfTout 0.00 — 300.00 s 0.01 10.00 Application layer confim timeout
ApplMultFrgRes No Yes
— — Yes Enable application for multiple fragment response
Table continues on next page
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
778 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description ConfMultFrag No
Yes — — Yes Confirm each multiple fragment
UREnable No Yes
— — Yes Unsolicited response enabled
UREvClassMask Disabled Class 1 Class 2 Class 1 and 2 Class 3 Class 1 and 3 Class 2 and 3 Class 1, 2 and 3
— — Disabled Unsolicited response, event class mask
UROfflineRetry 0 — 10 — 1 5 Unsolicited response retries before off-line retry mode
tURRetryDelay 0.00 — 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response retry delay in s
tUROfflRtryDel 0.00 — 60.00 s 0.01 30.00 Unsolicited response off-line retry delay in s
UREvCntThold1 1 — 100 — 1 5 Unsolicited response class 1 event count report treshold
tUREvBufTout1 0.00 — 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 1 event buffer timeout
UREvCntThold2 1 — 100 — 1 5 Unsolicited response class 2 event count report treshold
tUREvBufTout2 0.00 — 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 2 event buffer timeout
UREvCntThold3 1 — 100 — 1 5 Unsolicited response class 3 event count report treshold
tUREvBufTout3 0.00 — 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 3 event buffer timeout
DelOldBufFull No Yes
— — No Delete oldest event when buffer is full
ExtTimeFormat LocalTime UTC
— — UTC External time format
DNPToSetTime No Yes
— — No Allow DNP to set time in IED
tSynchTimeout 30 — 3600 s 1 1800 Time synch timeout before error status is generated
TSyncReqAfTout No Yes
— — No Time synchronization request after timeout
Averag3TimeReq No Yes
— — No Use average of 3 time requests
PairedPoint No Yes
— — Yes Enable paired point
tSelectTimeout 1.0 — 60.0 s 0.1 30.0 Select timeout
tBrokenConTout 0 — 3600 s 1 0 Broken connection timeout
tKeepAliveT 0 — 3600 s 1 10 Keep-Alive timer
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
779 Technical reference manual
Table 412: MST3TCP Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
SlaveAddress 0 — 65519 — 1 1 Slave address
MasterAddres 0 — 65519 — 1 1 Master address
ValMasterAddr No Yes
— — Yes Validate source (master) address
MasterIP-Addr 0 — 18 IP Address
1 0.0.0.0 Master IP-address
MasterIPNetMsk 0 — 18 IP Address
1 255.255.255.255 Master IP net mask
Obj1DefVar 1:BISingleBit 2:BIWithStatus
— — 1:BISingleBit Object 1, default variation
Obj2DefVar 1:BIChWithoutTim e 2:BIChWithTime 3:BIChWithRelTim e
— — 3:BIChWithRelTim e
Object 2, default variation
Obj3DefVar 1:DIWithoutFlag 2:DIWithFlag
— — 1:DIWithoutFlag Object 3, default variation
Obj4DefVar 1:DIChWithoutTim e 2:DIChWithTime 3:DIChWithRelTim e
— — 3:DIChWithRelTim e
Object 4, default variation
Obj10DefVar 1:BO 2:BOStatus
— — 2:BOStatus Object 10, default variation
Obj20DefVar 1:BinCnt32 2:BinCnt16 5:BinCnt32WoutF 6:BinCnt16WoutF
— — 5:BinCnt32WoutF Object 20, default variation
Table continues on next page
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
780 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Obj22DefVar 1:BinCnt32EvWout
T 2:BinCnt16EvWout T 5:BinCnt32EvWith T 6:BinCnt16EvWith T
— — 1:BinCnt32EvWou tT
Object 22, default variation
Obj30DefVar 1:AI32Int 2:AI16Int 3:AI32IntWithoutF 4:AI16IntWithoutF 5:AI32FltWithF 6:AI64FltWithF
— — 3:AI32IntWithoutF Object 30, default variation
Obj32DefVar 1:AI32IntEvWoutF 2:AI16IntEvWoutF 3:AI32IntEvWithFT 4:AI16IntEvWithFT 5:AI32FltEvWithF 6:AI64FltEvWithF 7:AI32FltEvWithFT 8:AI64FltEvWithFT
— — 1:AI32IntEvWoutF Object 32, default variation
Table 413: MST3TCP Non group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description AddrQueryEnbl No
Yes — — Yes Address query enable
tApplConfTout 0.00 — 300.00 s 0.01 10.00 Application layer confim timeout
ApplMultFrgRes No Yes
— — Yes Enable application for multiple fragment response
ConfMultFrag No Yes
— — Yes Confirm each multiple fragment
UREnable No Yes
— — Yes Unsolicited response enabled
UREvClassMask Disabled Class 1 Class 2 Class 1 and 2 Class 3 Class 1 and 3 Class 2 and 3 Class 1, 2 and 3
— — Disabled Unsolicited response, event class mask
UROfflineRetry 0 — 10 — 1 5 Unsolicited response retries before off-line retry mode
tURRetryDelay 0.00 — 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response retry delay in s
tUROfflRtryDel 0.00 — 60.00 s 0.01 30.00 Unsolicited response off-line retry delay in s
UREvCntThold1 1 — 100 — 1 5 Unsolicited response class 1 event count report treshold
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
781 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description tUREvBufTout1 0.00 — 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 1 event buffer
timeout
UREvCntThold2 1 — 100 — 1 5 Unsolicited response class 2 event count report treshold
tUREvBufTout2 0.00 — 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 2 event buffer timeout
UREvCntThold3 1 — 100 — 1 5 Unsolicited response class 3 event count report treshold
tUREvBufTout3 0.00 — 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 3 event buffer timeout
DelOldBufFull No Yes
— — No Delete oldest event when buffer is full
ExtTimeFormat LocalTime UTC
— — UTC External time format
DNPToSetTime No Yes
— — No Allow DNP to set time in IED
tSynchTimeout 30 — 3600 s 1 1800 Time synch timeout before error status is generated
TSyncReqAfTout No Yes
— — No Time synchronization request after timeout
Averag3TimeReq No Yes
— — No Use average of 3 time requests
PairedPoint No Yes
— — Yes Enable paired point
tSelectTimeout 1.0 — 60.0 s 0.1 30.0 Select timeout
tBrokenConTout 0 — 3600 s 1 0 Broken connection timeout
tKeepAliveT 0 — 3600 s 1 10 Keep-Alive timer
Table 414: MST4TCP Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
SlaveAddress 0 — 65519 — 1 1 Slave address
MasterAddres 0 — 65519 — 1 1 Master address
ValMasterAddr No Yes
— — Yes Validate source (master) address
MasterIP-Addr 0 — 18 IP Address
1 0.0.0.0 Master IP-address
MasterIPNetMsk 0 — 18 IP Address
1 255.255.255.255 Master IP net mask
Obj1DefVar 1:BISingleBit 2:BIWithStatus
— — 1:BISingleBit Object 1, default variation
Table continues on next page
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
782 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Obj2DefVar 1:BIChWithoutTim
e 2:BIChWithTime 3:BIChWithRelTim e
— — 3:BIChWithRelTim e
Object 2, default variation
Obj3DefVar 1:DIWithoutFlag 2:DIWithFlag
— — 1:DIWithoutFlag Object 3, default variation
Obj4DefVar 1:DIChWithoutTim e 2:DIChWithTime 3:DIChWithRelTim e
— — 3:DIChWithRelTim e
Object 4, default variation
Obj10DefVar 1:BO 2:BOStatus
— — 2:BOStatus Object 10, default variation
Obj20DefVar 1:BinCnt32 2:BinCnt16 5:BinCnt32WoutF 6:BinCnt16WoutF
— — 5:BinCnt32WoutF Object 20, default variation
Obj22DefVar 1:BinCnt32EvWout T 2:BinCnt16EvWout T 5:BinCnt32EvWith T 6:BinCnt16EvWith T
— — 1:BinCnt32EvWou tT
Object 22, default variation
Obj30DefVar 1:AI32Int 2:AI16Int 3:AI32IntWithoutF 4:AI16IntWithoutF 5:AI32FltWithF 6:AI64FltWithF
— — 3:AI32IntWithoutF Object 30, default variation
Obj32DefVar 1:AI32IntEvWoutF 2:AI16IntEvWoutF 3:AI32IntEvWithFT 4:AI16IntEvWithFT 5:AI32FltEvWithF 6:AI64FltEvWithF 7:AI32FltEvWithFT 8:AI64FltEvWithFT
— — 1:AI32IntEvWoutF Object 32, default variation
Table 415: MST4TCP Non group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description AddrQueryEnbl No
Yes — — Yes Address query enable
tApplConfTout 0.00 — 300.00 s 0.01 10.00 Application layer confim timeout
ApplMultFrgRes No Yes
— — Yes Enable application for multiple fragment response
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
783 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description ConfMultFrag No
Yes — — Yes Confirm each multiple fragment
UREnable No Yes
— — Yes Unsolicited response enabled
UREvClassMask Disabled Class 1 Class 2 Class 1 and 2 Class 3 Class 1 and 3 Class 2 and 3 Class 1, 2 and 3
— — Disabled Unsolicited response, event class mask
UROfflineRetry 0 — 10 — 1 5 Unsolicited response retries before off-line retry mode
tURRetryDelay 0.00 — 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response retry delay in s
tUROfflRtryDel 0.00 — 60.00 s 0.01 30.00 Unsolicited response off-line retry delay in s
UREvCntThold1 1 — 100 — 1 5 Unsolicited response class 1 event count report treshold
tUREvBufTout1 0.00 — 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 1 event buffer timeout
UREvCntThold2 1 — 100 — 1 5 Unsolicited response class 2 event count report treshold
tUREvBufTout2 0.00 — 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 2 event buffer timeout
UREvCntThold3 1 — 100 — 1 5 Unsolicited response class 3 event count report treshold
tUREvBufTout3 0.00 — 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 3 event buffer timeout
DelOldBufFull No Yes
— — No Delete oldest event when buffer is full
ExtTimeFormat LocalTime UTC
— — UTC External time format
DNPToSetTime No Yes
— — No Allow DNP to set time in IED
tSynchTimeout 30 — 3600 s 1 1800 Time synch timeout before error status is generated
TSyncReqAfTout No Yes
— — No Time synchronization request after timeout
Averag3TimeReq No Yes
— — No Use average of 3 time requests
PairedPoint No Yes
— — Yes Enable paired point
tSelectTimeout 1.0 — 60.0 s 0.1 30.0 Select timeout
tBrokenConTout 0 — 3600 s 1 0 Broken connection timeout
tKeepAliveT 0 — 3600 s 1 10 Keep-Alive timer
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
784 Technical reference manual
12.10 Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD — —
12.10.1 Introduction The IEDs can receive commands either from a substation automation system or from the local HMI. The command function block has outputs that can be used, for example, to control high voltage apparatuses or for other user defined functionality.
12.10.2 Principle of operation Single command, 16 signals (SINGLECMD) function has 16 binary output signals. The outputs can be individually controlled from a substation automation system or from the local HMI. Each output signal can be given a name with a maximum of 13 characters in PCM600.
The output signals can be of the types Disabled, Steady, or Pulse. This configuration setting is done via the local HMI or PCM600 and is common for the whole function block. The length of the output pulses are 100 ms. In steady mode, SINGLECMD function has a memory to remember the output values at power interruption of the IED. Also a BLOCK input is available used to block the updating of the outputs.
The output signals, OUT1 to OUT16, are available for configuration to built-in functions or via the configuration logic circuits to the binary outputs of the IED.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
785 Technical reference manual
12.10.3 Function block
IEC05000698-2-en.vsd
SINGLECMD BLOCK ^OUT1
^OUT2 ^OUT3 ^OUT4 ^OUT5 ^OUT6 ^OUT7 ^OUT8 ^OUT9
^OUT10 ^OUT11 ^OUT12 ^OUT13 ^OUT14 ^OUT15 ^OUT16
IEC05000698 V3 EN
Figure 385: SINGLECMD function block
12.10.4 Input and output signals Table 416: SINGLECMD Input signals
Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block single command function
Table 417: SINGLECMD Output signals
Name Type Description OUT1 BOOLEAN Single command output 1
OUT2 BOOLEAN Single command output 2
OUT3 BOOLEAN Single command output 3
OUT4 BOOLEAN Single command output 4
OUT5 BOOLEAN Single command output 5
OUT6 BOOLEAN Single command output 6
OUT7 BOOLEAN Single command output 7
OUT8 BOOLEAN Single command output 8
OUT9 BOOLEAN Single command output 9
OUT10 BOOLEAN Single command output 10
OUT11 BOOLEAN Single command output 11
OUT12 BOOLEAN Single command output 12
OUT13 BOOLEAN Single command output 13
Table continues on next page
Section 12 1MRK505222-UUS C Control
786 Technical reference manual
Name Type Description OUT14 BOOLEAN Single command output 14
OUT15 BOOLEAN Single command output 15
OUT16 BOOLEAN Single command output 16
12.10.5 Setting parameters Table 418: SINGLECMD Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Mode Disabled
Steady Pulsed
— — Disabled Operation mode
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 12 Control
787 Technical reference manual
Section 13 Scheme communication
About this chapter This chapter describes the scheme communication logic that is used in distance and ground fault protection function to obtain almost instantaneous fault clearance for faults on the protected line. The chapter considers scheme communication logic (ZCPSCH, 85), current reversal and weak-end in-feed logic (ZCRWPSCH, 85) for the distance protection function and scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection (ECPSCH, 85) and current reversal and weak-end in-feed logic (ECRWPSCH, 85) for the residual overcurrent function.
Also Local acceleration logic (ZCLCPLAL) is discussed which is a function that can generate instantaneous tripping as a result of remote end faults without any telecommunication.
The chapter contains a short description of the design, simplified logical block diagrams, figure of the function block, input and output signals and setting parameters.
13.1 Scheme communication logic for distance or overcurrent protection ZCPSCH(85)
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Scheme communication logic for distance or overcurrent protection
ZCPSCH — 85
13.1.1 Introduction To achieve instantaneous fault clearance for all line faults, scheme communication logic is provided. All types of communication schemes for example, permissive underreaching, permissive overreaching, blocking, unblocking, intertrip are available.
The built-in communication module (LDCM) can be used for scheme communication signaling when included.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 13 Scheme communication
789 Technical reference manual
Phase segregated communication is also available for correct operation at simultaneous faults when three distance protection communication channels are available between the line ends.
13.1.2 Principle of operation Depending on whether a reverse or forward directed impedance zone is used to issue the send signal, the communication schemes are divided into Blocking and Permissive schemes, respectively.
A permissive scheme is inherently faster and has better security against false tripping than a blocking scheme. On the other hand, a permissive scheme depends on a received signal for a fast trip, so its dependability is lower than that of a blocking scheme.
13.1.2.1 Blocking scheme
The principle of operation for a blocking scheme is that an overreaching zone is allowed to trip instantaneously after the settable co-ordination time tCoord has elapsed, when no signal is received from the remote IED.
The received signal, which shall be connected to CR, is used to not release the zone to be accelerated to clear the fault instantaneously (after time tCoord). The forward overreaching zone to be accelerated is connected to the input PLTR_CRD, see figure 386.
In case of external faults, the blocking signal (CR) must be received before the settable timer tCoord elapses, to prevent a false trip, see figure 386.
The function can be totally blocked by activating the input BLOCK, block of trip by activating the input BLKTR, Block of signal send by activating the input BLKCS.
PLTR-CRD CR
TRIPAND
en05000512_ansi.vsd
0 0-tCoord
ANSI05000512 V1 EN
Figure 386: Basic logic for trip signal in blocking scheme
Channels for communication in each direction must be available.
13.1.2.2 Permissive underreaching scheme
In a permissive underreaching scheme, a forward directed underreach measuring element (normally zone1) sends a permissive signal CS to the remote end if a fault is detected.in forward direction. The received signal CR is used to allow an overreaching
Section 13 1MRK505222-UUS C Scheme communication
790 Technical reference manual
zone to trip after the tCoord timer has elapsed. The tCoord in permissive underreaching schemes is normally set to zero.
The logic for trip signal in permissive scheme is shown in figure 387.
PLTR-CRD CR
TRIPAND
en05000513_ansi.vsd
0-tCoord 0
ANSI05000513 V1 EN
Figure 387: Logic for trip signal in permissive scheme
The permissive underreaching scheme has the same blocking possibilities as mentioned for blocking scheme.
13.1.2.3 Permissive overreaching scheme
In a permissive overreaching scheme, a forward directed overreach measuring element (normally zone2) sends a permissive signal CS to the remote end if a fault is detected in forward direction. The received signal CR is used to allow an overreaching zone to trip after the settable tCoord timer has elapsed. The tCoord in permissive overreaching schemes is normally set to zero.
The logic for trip signal is the same as for permissive underreaching, as in figure 387.
The permissive overreaching scheme has the same blocking possibilities as mentioned for blocking scheme.
13.1.2.4 Unblocking scheme
In unblocking scheme, the lower dependability in permissive scheme is overcome by using the loss of guard signal from the communication equipment to locally create a receive signal. It is common or suitable to use the function when older, less reliable, power-line carrier (PLC) communication is used.
The unblocking function uses a guard signal CR_GUARD, which must always be present, even when no CR signal is received. The absence of the CR_GUARD signal for a time longer than the setting tSecurity time is used as a CR signal, see figure 388. This also enables a permissive scheme to operate when the line fault blocks the signal transmission.
The received signal created by the unblocking function is reset 150 ms after the security timer has elapsed. When that occurs an output signal LCG is activated for signalling purpose. The unblocking function is reset 200 ms after that the guard signal is present again.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 13 Scheme communication
791 Technical reference manual
CR_GUARD
0-tSecurity
0 150 ms
CR CRL
LCG AND OR AND
en05000746_ansi.vsd
0
0 200 ms
NOT OR
ANSI05000746 V1 EN
Figure 388: Guard signal logic with unblocking schemeGuard singal logic with unblocking scheme and with setting Unblock = Restart
The unblocking function can be set in three operation modes (setting Unblock):
Disabled The unblocking function is out of operation
No restart Communication failure shorter than tSecurity will be ignored
If CR_GUARD disappears a CRL signal will be transferred to the trip logic
There will not be any information in case of communication failure (LCG)
Restart Communication failure shorter than tSecurity will be ignored
It sends a defined (150 ms) CRL after the disappearance of the CR_GUARD signal
The function will activate LCG output in case of communication failure
If the communication failure comes and goes (<200 ms) there will not be recurrent signalling
13.1.2.5 Intertrip scheme
In the direct intertrip scheme, the send signal CS is sent from an underreaching zone that is tripping the line.
The received signal CR is directly transferred to a TRIP for tripping without local criteria. The signal is further processed in the tripping logic.
In case of single-pole tripping in multi-phase systems, a phase selection is performed.
13.1.2.6 Simplified logic diagram
The simplified logic diagram for the complete logic is shown in figure 389.
Section 13 1MRK505222-UUS C Scheme communication
792 Technical reference manual
en05000515_ansi.vsd
CR_GUARD
CR
CRL CRL
NOT
150ms LCG
Unblock = Restart
Unblock = NoRestart
Unblock = Off
CSUR
BLOCK CS_STOP CRL
BLKCS
CSOR
PLTR_CRD
CS
TRIP
tSendMin
tSendMin
SchemeType = Blocking
Schemetype = Permissive OR
Schemetype = Permissive UR
SchemeType = Intertrip
OR
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
OR
ORAND
AND
OR
OR
OR
OR
OR 200ms
0
0 0-tSecurity
0
0 0-tCoord 0
25ms
ANSI05000515 V1 EN
Figure 389: Scheme communication logic for distance or overcurrent protection, simplified logic diagram
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 13 Scheme communication
793 Technical reference manual
13.1.3 Function block
ANSI06000286-2-en.vsd
ZCPSCH (85) BLOCK BLKTR BLKCS CS_STOP PLTR_CRD CSOR CSUR CR CR_GUARD
TRIP CS
CRL LCG
ANSI06000286 V2 EN
Figure 390: ZCPSCH (85) function block
13.1.4 Input and output signals Table 419: ZCPSCH (85) Input signals
Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block pilot (communication assisted) trip
BLKCS BOOLEAN 0 Block pilot channel start
CSBLK BOOLEAN 0 Block of channel start (CS) due to reverse fault detection
CACC BOOLEAN 0 Signal to be used for coordinating local pilot tripping with the channel receive (CR) signal
CSOR BOOLEAN 0 Signal to be used for channel start with overreaching pilot schemes
CSUR BOOLEAN 0 Signal to be used for channel start with underreaching pilot schemes
CR BOOLEAN 0 Channel receive input signal from communications apparatus/module for pilot communication scheme logic
CRG BOOLEAN 0 Carrier channel guard input signal
Table 420: ZCPSCH (85) Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip by pilot communication scheme logic
CS BOOLEAN Pilot channel start signal
CRL BOOLEAN Channel receive signal output from communication scheme logic
LCG BOOLEAN Loss of channel guard signal output from communication scheme logic
Section 13 1MRK505222-UUS C Scheme communication
794 Technical reference manual
13.1.5 Setting parameters Table 421: ZCPSCH (85) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
SchemeType Disabled Intertrip Permissive UR Permissive OR Blocking
— — Permissive UR Scheme type
tCoord 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.035 Communication scheme channel coordination time
tSendMin 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Minimum duration of a carrier send signal (carrier continuation)
Table 422: ZCPSCH (85) Group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Unblock Disabled
NoRestart Restart
— — Disabled Operation mode of unblocking logic
tSecurity 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.035 Security timer for loss of carrier guard detection
13.1.6 Technical data Table 423: ZCPSCH (85) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Scheme type Intertrip
Permissive Underreach Permissive Overreach Blocking
—
Co-ordination time for blocking communication scheme
(0.000-60.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
Minimum duration of a send signal (0.000-60.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
Security timer for loss of guard signal detection
(0.000-60.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
Operation mode of unblocking logic Disabled NoRestart Restart
—
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 13 Scheme communication
795 Technical reference manual
13.2 Phase segregated scheme communication logic for distance protection ZC1PPSCH (85)
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Phase segregated Scheme communication logic for distance protection
ZC1PPSCH — 85
13.2.1 Introduction Communication between line ends is used to achieve fault clearance for all faults on a power line. All possible types of communication schemes for example, permissive underreach, permissive overreach and blocking schemes are available. To manage problems with simultaneous faults on parallel power lines phase segregated communication is needed. This will then replace the standard Scheme communication logic for distance or Overcurrent protection (ZCPSCH, 85) on important lines where three communication channels (in each subsystem) are available for the distance protection communication.
The main purpose of the Phase segregated scheme communication logic for distance protection (ZC1PPSCH, 85) function is to supplement the distance protection function such that:
fast clearance of faults is also achieved at the line end for which the faults are on the part of the line not covered by its underreaching zone.
correct phase selection can be maintained to support single-pole tripping for faults occurring anywhere on the entire length of a double circuit line.
To accomplish this, three separate communication channels, that is, one per phase, each capable of transmitting a signal in each direction is required.
ZC1PPSCH (85) can be completed with the current reversal and WEI logic for phase segregated communication, when found necessary in Blocking and Permissive overreaching schemes.
13.2.2 Principle of operation Depending on whether a reverse or forward directed impedance zone is used to issue the send signal, the communication schemes are divided into Blocking and Permissive schemes, respectively.
Section 13 1MRK505222-UUS C Scheme communication
796 Technical reference manual
A permissive scheme is inherently faster and has better security against false tripping than a blocking scheme. On the other hand, a permissive scheme depends on a received signal for a fast trip, so its dependability is lower than that of a blocking scheme.
The Phase segregated scheme communication logic for distance protection (ZC1PPSCH ,85) function is a logical function built-up from logical elements. It is a supplementary function to the distance protection, requiring for its operation inputs from the distance protection and the communication equipment.
The type of communication-aided scheme to be used can be selected by way of the settings.
The ability to select which distance protection zone is assigned to which input of ZC1PPSCH (85) makes this logic able to support practically any scheme communication requirements regardless of their basic operating principle. The outputs to initiate tripping and sending of the teleprotection signal are given in accordance with the type of communication-aided scheme selected and the zone(s) and phase(s) of the distance protection which have operated.
When power line carrier communication channels are used for permissive schemes communication, unblocking logic which uses the loss of guard signal as a receive criteria is provided. This logic compensates for the lack of dependability due to the transmission of the command signal over the faulted line.
13.2.2.1 Blocking scheme
The principle of operation for a blocking scheme is that an overreaching zone is allowed to trip instantaneously after the settable co-ordination time tCoord has elapsed, when no signal is received from the remote IED. The received signal (sent by a reverse looking element in the remote IED), which shall be connected to CRLx, is used to not release the zone to be accelerated to clear the fault instantaneously (after time tCoord). The overreaching zone to be accelerated is connected to the input CACCLx, see figure 391. In case of external faults, the blocking signal (CRLx) must be received before the settable timer tCoord elapses, to prevent an unneccesary trip, see figure 391.
ZC1PPSCH (85) can be totally blocked by activating the input BLOCK, block of trip is achieved by activating the input BLKTRLx, Block of carrier send is done by activating the input BLKCSLx.
CACCLx CRLx AND
ANSI06000310_2_en.vsd
TRLx 0
0 25 ms
0 — tCoord
ANSI06000310 V2 EN
Figure 391: Basic logic for trip carrier in one phase of a blocking scheme
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 13 Scheme communication
797 Technical reference manual
13.2.2.2 Permissive underreach scheme
In a permissive underreach scheme, a forward directed underreach measuring element (normally zone1) sends a permissive signal CSLx to the remote end if a fault is detected in forward direction. The received signal CRLx is used to allow an overreaching zone (connected to CACCLx) to trip after the tCoord timer has elapsed. The tCoord is in permissive underreach schemes normally set to zero. The logic for trip carrier in permissive scheme is shown in figure 392. Three channels for communication in each direction must be available.
CACCLx CRLx AND
ANSI07000088_2_en.vsd
TRLx 0
0 25 ms
0-tCoord
ANSI07000088 V2 EN
Figure 392: Basic logic for trip carrier in one phase of a permissive underreach scheme
13.2.2.3 Permissive overreach scheme
In a permissive overreach scheme, a forward directed overreach measuring element (normally zone2) sends a permissive signal CSLx to the remote end if a fault is detected in forward direction. The received signal CRLx is used to allow an overreaching zone to trip after the settable tCoord timer has elapsed. The tCoord is in permissive overreach schemes normally set to zero. The logic for trip carrier is the same as for permissive underreach, see figure 391.
The permissive overreach scheme has the same blocking possibilities as mentioned for blocking scheme above. The blocking inputs are activated from the current reversal logic when this function is included.
Three channels for communication in each direction must be available.
13.2.2.4 Unblocking scheme
In an unblocking scheme, the lower dependability in permissive scheme is overcome by using the loss of guard signal from the communication equipment to locally create a carrier receive signal. It is common or suitable to use the function when older, less reliable, power-line carrier (PLC) communication is used. As phase segregated communication schemes uses phases individually and the PLC is typically connected single-phase or phase-to-phase it is not possible to evaluate which of the phases to release and the unblocking scheme has thus not been supported.
Section 13 1MRK505222-UUS C Scheme communication
798 Technical reference manual
13.2.2.5 Intertrip scheme
In the direct intertrip scheme, the carrier send signal CS is sent from an underreaching zone that is tripping the line.
The received signal per phase is directly transferred to the trip function block for tripping without local criteria. The signal is not further processed in the phase segregated communication logic. In case of single-pole tripping the phase selection and logic for tripping the three phases is performed in the trip function block.
13.2.2.6 Simplified logic diagram
The simplified logic diagram for one phase is shown in figure 393.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 13 Scheme communication
799 Technical reference manual
ANSI06000311_2_en.vsd
CSURLx
BLOCK CSBLKLx CRLx
BLKCSx
CSORLx
CACCLx
CSLx
TRLx
tSendMin
tSendMin
Scheme Type = Blocking
Scheme Type = Permissive OR
Scheme Type = Permissive UR
SchemeType = Intertrip
OR
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
OR
OR
OR
OR
OR
CSL1 CSL2
CSL2 CSL3
CSL3 CSL1
AND
AND
AND
OR CSMPH
OR
CSL1
CSL2
CSL3
GENERAL
25 0-tCoord
ANSI06000311 V2 EN
Figure 393: Simplified logic diagram for one phase
Section 13 1MRK505222-UUS C Scheme communication
800 Technical reference manual
13.2.3 Function block
ANSI06000427-2-en.vsd
ZC1PPSCH (85) BLOCK BLKTR BLKTRL1 BLKTRL2 BLKTRL3 CACCL1 CACCL2 CACCL3 CSURL1 CSURL2 CSURL3 CSORL1 CSORL2 CSORL3 CSBLKL1 CSBLKL2 CSBLKL3 BLKCSL1 BLKCSL2 BLKCSL3 CRL1 CRL2 CRL3 CRMPH
TRIP TR_A TR_B TR_C CS_A CS_B CS_C
CSMPH CRL_A CRL_B CRL_C
ANSI06000427 V2 EN
Figure 394: ZC1PPSCH (85) function block
13.2.4 Input and output signals Table 424: ZC1PPSCH (85) Input signals
Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Common signal for block of trip output from communication logic in all phases
BLKTRL1 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for block of trip output from communication logic in Phase L1
BLKTRL2 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for block of trip output from communication logic in Phase L2
BLKTRL3 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for block of trip output from communication logic in Phase L3
CACCL1 BOOLEAN 0 Accelerated Distance protection zone start in Phase L1
CACCL2 BOOLEAN 0 Accelerated Distance protection zone signal in Phase L2
CACCL3 BOOLEAN 0 Accelerated Distance protection zone signal in Phase L3
CSURL1 BOOLEAN 0 Underreaching distance protection zone signal in Phase L1
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 13 Scheme communication
801 Technical reference manual
Name Type Default Description CSURL2 BOOLEAN 0 Underreaching distance protection zone signal in
Phase L2
CSURL3 BOOLEAN 0 Underreaching distance protection zone signal in Phase L3
CSORL1 BOOLEAN 0 Overreaching distance protection zone signal in Phase L1
CSORL2 BOOLEAN 0 Overreaching distance protection zone signal in Phase L2
CSORL3 BOOLEAN 0 Overreaching distance protection zone signal in Phase L3
CSBLKL1 BOOLEAN 0 Reverse directed distance protection zone signal in Phase L1
CSBLKL2 BOOLEAN 0 Reverse directed distance protection zone signal in Phase L2
CSBLKL3 BOOLEAN 0 Reverse directed distance protection zone signal in Phase L3
BLKCSL1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of carrier send in POR and Blocking schemes in Phase L1
BLKCSL2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of carrier send in POR and Blocking schemes in Phase L2
BLKCSL3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of carrier send in POR and Blocking schemes in Phase L3
CRL1 BOOLEAN 0 Carrier signal received in Phase A
CRL2 BOOLEAN 0 Carrier signal received in Phase B
CRL3 BOOLEAN 0 Carrier signal received in Phase C
CRMPH BOOLEAN 0 Carrier Signal received for multiphase fault
Table 425: ZC1PPSCH (85) Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip output in any of the phase
TR_A BOOLEAN Trip output in Phase A
TR_B BOOLEAN Trip output in Phase B
TR_C BOOLEAN Trip output in Phase C
CS_A BOOLEAN Carrier Send in phase A
CS_B BOOLEAN Carrier Send in phase B
CS_C BOOLEAN Carrier Send in phase C
CSMPH BOOLEAN carrier Send for multi phase fault
CRL_A BOOLEAN Carrier signal received in Phase A
CRL_B BOOLEAN Carrier signal received in Phase B
CRL_C BOOLEAN Carrier signal received in Phase C
Section 13 1MRK505222-UUS C Scheme communication
802 Technical reference manual
13.2.5 Setting parameters Table 426: ZC1PPSCH (85) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Operation Enable / Disable
Scheme Type Disabled Intertrip Permissive UR Permissive OR Blocking
— — Permissive UR Scheme type
tCoord 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Trip coordinate time
tSendMin 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Minimum duration of Carrier Send signal
13.2.6 Technical data Table 427: ZC1PPSCH (85) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Scheme type Intertrip
Permissive UR Permissive OR Blocking
—
Co-ordination time for blocking communication scheme
(0.000-60.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
Minimum duration of a carrier send signal
(0.000-60.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
Security timer for loss of carrier guard detection
(0.000-60.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
Operation mode of unblocking logic Off NoRestart Restart
—
13.3 Current reversal and WEI logic for distance protection 3-phase ZCRWPSCH (85)
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for distance protection
ZCRWPSCH — 85
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 13 Scheme communication
803 Technical reference manual
13.3.1 Introduction The current reversal function is used to prevent unwanted operations due to current reversal when using permissive overreach protection schemes in application with parallel lines when the overreach from the two ends overlap on the parallel line.
The weak-end infeed logic is used in cases where the apparent power behind the protection can be too low to activate the distance protection function. When activated, received carrier signal together with local undervoltage criteria and no reverse zone operation gives an instantaneous trip. The received signal is also echoed back during 200 ms to accelerate the sending end.
Three phase or phase segregated scheme logic is available.
13.3.2 Principle of operation
13.3.2.1 Current reversal logic
The current reversal logic uses a reverse zone connected to the input IREV to recognize the fault on the parallel line in any of the phases. When the reverse zone has been activated for a certain settable time tPickUpRev it prevents sending of a communication signal and activation of trip signal for a predefined time tDelayRev. This makes it possible for the receive signal to reset before the trip signal is activated due to the current reversal by the forward directed zone, see figure 395.
ANSI05000122-2-en.vsd
IREV
IFWD IRVLAND
0 10ms0-tPickUpRev
0
0-tDelayRev 0
0-tPickUpRev 0
ANSI05000122 V2 EN
Figure 395: Current reversal logic
The preventing of sending the send signal CS and activating of the TRIP in the scheme communication block ZCPSCH (85) is carried out by connecting the IRVL signal to input BLOCK in the ZCPSCH (85) function.
The function has an internal 10 ms drop-off timer which secure that the current reversal logic will be activated for short input signals even if the pick-up timer is set to zero.
Section 13 1MRK505222-UUS C Scheme communication
804 Technical reference manual
13.3.2.2 Weak-end infeed logic
The weak-end infeed logic (WEI) function sends back (echoes) the received signal under the condition that no fault has been detected on the weak-end by different fault detection elements (distance protection in forward and reverse direction).
The WEI function returns the received signal, see figure 396, when:
No active signal present on the input BLOCK. The functional input CRL is active. This input is usually connected to the CRL
output on the scheme communication logic ZCPSCH (85). The WEI function is not blocked by the active signal connected to the WEIBLK1
functional input or to theLOVBZ functional input. The later is usually configured to the BLOCK functional output of the fuse-failure function.
No active signal has been present for at least 200 ms on the WEIBLK2 functional input. An OR combination of all fault detection functions (not undervoltage) as present within the IED is usually used for this purpose.
WEIBLK1
CRL
WEIBLKn
ECHO
ECHO — cont.
OR
AND AND
BLOCK
WTSZ
200ms 0
0 0-tWEI
0 200ms
50 ms 0
en06000324_ansi.vsd ANSI06000324 V1 EN
Figure 396: Echo of a received signal by the WEI function
When an echo function is used in both IEDs (should generally be avoided), a spurious signal can be looped round by the echo logics. To avoid a continuous lock-up of the system, the duration of the echoed signal is limited to 200 ms.
An undervoltage criteria is used as an additional tripping criteria, when the tripping of the local breaker is selected, setting WEI = Echo&Trip, together with the WEI function and ECHO signal has been issued by the echo logic, see figure 397.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 13 Scheme communication
805 Technical reference manual
IEC00000551-TIFF V1 EN
Figure 397: Tripping part of the WEI logic, simplified diagram
13.3.3 Function block
ANSI06000287-2-en.vsd
ZCRWPSCH (85) V3P* BLOCK IFWD IREV WEIBLK1 WEIBLK2 LOVBZ CBOPEN CRL
IRVL TRWEI
TRWEI_A TRWEI_B TRWEI_C
ECHO
ANSI06000287 V2 EN
Figure 398: ZCRWPSCH (85) function block
13.3.4 Input and output signals Table 428: ZCRWPSCH (85) Input signals
Name Type Default Description V3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Group signal for voltage input
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IFWD BOOLEAN 0 A signal that indicates a forward fault has been detected and will block tripping if there was a pre- existing reverse fault condition (IREV)
Table continues on next page
Section 13 1MRK505222-UUS C Scheme communication
806 Technical reference manual
Name Type Default Description IREV BOOLEAN 0 A signal that indicates a reverse fault has been
detected and activates current reverasl logic
WEIBLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic
WEIBLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic due to operation of other protections that would effect a pilot trip or the detection of reverse faults that will be tripped by an external device
LOVBZ BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip from WEI logic through the loss of voltage (fuse-failure) function
CBOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip from WEI logic by an open breaker
CRL BOOLEAN 0 POTT or Unblock carrier receive for WEI logic
Table 429: ZCRWPSCH (85) Output signals
Name Type Description IRVL BOOLEAN Operation of current reversal logic
TRWEI BOOLEAN Trip of WEI logic
TRWEI_A BOOLEAN Trip of WEI logic in phase A
TRWEI_B BOOLEAN Trip of WEI logic in phase B
TRWEI_C BOOLEAN Trip of WEI logic in phase C
ECHO BOOLEAN A signal that indicates channel start (CS) by WEI logic
13.3.5 Setting parameters Table 430: ZCRWPSCH (85) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description CurrRev Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Operating mode of Current Reversal Logic
tPickUpRev 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Pickup time for current reversal logic
tDelayRev 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.060 Time Delay to prevent Carrier send and local trip
WEI Disabled Echo Echo & Trip
— — Disabled Operating mode of WEI logic
tPickUpWEI 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.010 Coordination time for the WEI logic
VBase 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Base setting for voltage level
PU27PP 10 — 90 %VB 1 70 Phase to Phase voltage for detection of fault condition
PU27PN 10 — 90 %VB 1 70 Phase to Neutral voltage for detection of fault condition
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 13 Scheme communication
807 Technical reference manual
13.3.6 Technical data Table 431: ZCRWPSCH (85) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Detection pickupphase-to- neutral voltage
(10-90)% of VBase 0.5% of Vn
Detection pickup phase-to- phase voltage
(10-90)% of VBase 0.5% of Vn
Reset ratio <105% —
Operate time for current reversal logic
(0.000-60.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
Delay time for current reversal (0.000-60.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
Coordination time for weak-end infeed logic
(0.000-60.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
13.4 Local acceleration logic ZCLCPLAL
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Local acceleration logic ZCLCPLAL — —
13.4.1 Introduction To achieve fast clearing of faults on the whole line, when no communication channel is available, local acceleration logic (ZCLCPLAL) can be used. This logic enables fast fault clearing during certain conditions, but naturally, it can not fully replace a communication channel.
The logic can be controlled either by the autorecloser (zone extension) or by the loss-of- load current (loss-of-load acceleration).
13.4.2 Principle of operation
13.4.2.1 Zone extension
The overreaching zone is connected to the input EXACC. For this reason, configure the ARREADY functional input to a READY functional output of a used autoreclosing function or via the selected binary input to an external autoreclosing device, see figure 399.
This will allow the overreaching zone to trip instantaneously.
Section 13 1MRK505222-UUS C Scheme communication
808 Technical reference manual
IEC05000157 V1 EN
Figure 399: Simplified logic diagram for local acceleration logic
After the autorecloser initiates the close command and remains in the reclaim state, there will be no ARREADY signal, and the protection will trip normally with step distance time functions.
In case of a fault on the adjacent line within the overreaching zone range, an unwanted autoreclosing cycle will occur. The step distance function at the reclosing attempt will prevent an unwanted retrip when the breaker is reclosed.
On the other hand, at a persistent line fault on line section not covered by instantaneous zone (normally zone 1) only the first trip will be «instantaneous».
The function will be blocked if the input BLOCK is activated (common with loss-of- load acceleration).
13.4.2.2 Loss-of-Load acceleration
When the «acceleration» is controlled by a loss-of-load, the overreaching zone used for «acceleration» connected to input LLACC is not allowed to trip «instantaneously» during normal non-fault system conditions. When all three-phase currents have been above the set value MinCurr for more than setting tLowCurr, an overreaching zone will be allowed to trip «instantaneously» during a fault condition when one or two of the phase currents will become low due to a three-phase trip at the opposite IED, see figure 400. The current measurement is performed internally and the internal STILL signal becomes logical one under the described conditions. The load current in a healthy phase is in this way used to indicate the tripping at the opposite IED. Note that this function will not operate in case of three-phase faults, because none of the phase currents will be low when the opposite IED is tripped.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 13 Scheme communication
809 Technical reference manual
BLOCK
BC
LLACC
STILL TRLL
ANSI05000158-1-en.vsd
AND
OR
0 0-tLoadOn
ANSI05000158 V1 EN
Figure 400: Loss-of-load acceleration — simplified logic diagram
Breaker closing signals can if decided be connected to block the function during normal closing.
13.4.3 Function block
IEC05000333-2-en.vsd
ZCLCPLAL I3P* BLOCK ARREADY NDST EXACC BC LLACC
TRZE TRLL
IEC05000333 V2 EN
Figure 401: ZCLCPLAL function block
13.4.4 Input and output signals Table 432: ZCLCPLAL Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Group signal for current input
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
ARREADY BOOLEAN 0 Autoreclosure ready, releases function used for fast trip
NDST BOOLEAN 0 Non directional criteria used to prevent instantaneous trip
EXACC BOOLEAN 0 Connected to function used for tripping at zone extension
BC BOOLEAN 0 Breaker Close
LLACC BOOLEAN 0 Connected to function used for tripping at loss of load
Section 13 1MRK505222-UUS C Scheme communication
810 Technical reference manual
Table 433: ZCLCPLAL Output signals
Name Type Description TRZE BOOLEAN Trip by zone extension
TRLL BOOLEAN Trip by loss of load
13.4.5 Setting parameters Table 434: ZCLCPLAL Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
IBase 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Base setting for current values
LoadCurr 1 — 100 %IB 1 10 Load current before disturbance in % of IBase
LossOfLoad Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Enable/Disable operation of Loss of load.
ZoneExtension Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Enable/Disable operation of Zone extension
MinCurr 1 — 100 %IB 1 5 Lev taken as curr loss due to remote CB trip in % of IBase
tLowCurr 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay on pick-up for MINCURR value
tLoadOn 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay on pick-up for load current release
tLoadOff 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.300 Time delay on drop off for load current release
13.5 Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection ECPSCH (85)
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection
ECPSCH — 85
13.5.1 Introduction To achieve fast fault clearance of ground faults on the part of the line not covered by the instantaneous step of the residual overcurrent protection, the directional residual overcurrent protection can be supported with a logic that uses communication channels.
In the directional scheme, information of the fault current direction must be transmitted to the other line end. With directional comparison, a short operate time of the
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 13 Scheme communication
811 Technical reference manual
protection including a channel transmission time, can be achieved. This short operate time enables rapid autoreclosing function after the fault clearance.
The communication logic module for directional residual current protection enables blocking as well as permissive under/overreaching schemes. The logic can also be supported by additional logic for weak-end infeed and current reversal, included in Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection (ECRWPSCH, 85) function.
13.5.2 Principle of operation The four step directional residual overcurrent protection EF4PTOC (51N/67N) is configured to give input information, that is directional fault detection signals, to the ECPSCH (85) logic:
Input signal PLTR_CRD is used for tripping of the communication scheme, normally the pickup signal of a forward overreaching step of STFW.
Input signal CS_STOP is used for sending block signal in the blocking communication scheme, normally thepickup signal of a reverse overreaching step of STRV.
Input signal CSUR is used for sending permissive signal in the underreaching permissive communication scheme, normally the pickup signal of a forward underreaching step of STINn, where n corresponds to the underreaching step.
Input signal CSOR is used for sending permissive signal in the overreaching permissive communication scheme, normally the pickup signal of a forward overreaching step of STINn, where n corresponds to the overreaching step.
In addition to this a signal from the autoreclosing function should be configured to the BLKCS input for blocking of the function at a single phase reclosing cycle.
13.5.2.1 Blocking scheme
In the blocking scheme a signal is sent to the other line end if the directional element detects a ground fault in the reverse direction. When the forward directional element operates, it trips after a short time delay if no blocking signal is received from the opposite line end. The time delay, normally 30 40 ms, depends on the communication transmission time and a chosen safety margin.
One advantage of the blocking scheme is that only one channel (carrier frequency) is needed if the ratio of source impedances at both end is approximately equal for zero and positive sequence source impedances, the channel can be shared with the impedance measuring system, if that system also works in the blocking mode. The communication signal is transmitted on a healthy line and no signal attenuation will occur due to the fault.
Section 13 1MRK505222-UUS C Scheme communication
812 Technical reference manual
Blocking schemes are particular favorable for three-terminal applications if there is no zero-sequence outfeed from the tapping. The blocking scheme is immune to current reversals because the received signal is maintained long enough to avoid unwanted operation due to current reversal. There is never any need for weak-end infeed logic, because the strong end trips for an internal fault when no blocking signal is received from the weak end. The fault clearing time is however generally longer for a blocking scheme than for a permissive scheme.
If the fault is on the line, the forward direction measuring element operates. If no blocking signal comes from the other line end via the CR binary input (received signal) the TRIP output is activated after the tCoord set time delay.
CR
CS_STOP
BLOCK
PLTR_CRD
CS
TRIP
CRL
ANSI05000448-1-en.vsd
AND
AND
AND
0 25ms
0-tCoord 0
0 50ms
ANSI05000448 V1 EN
Figure 402: Simplified logic diagram for blocking scheme
13.5.2.2 Permissive under/overreaching scheme
In the permissive scheme the forward directed ground-fault measuring element sends a permissive signal to the other end, if a ground fault is detected in the forward direction. The directional element at the other line end must wait for a permissive signal before activating a trip signal. Independent channels must be available for the communication in each direction.
An impedance measuring IED, which works in the same type of permissive mode, with one channel in each direction, can share the channels with the communication scheme for residual overcurrent protection. If the impedance measuring IED works in the permissive overreaching mode, common channels can be used in single line applications. In case of double lines connected to a common bus at both ends, use common channels only if the ratio Z1S/Z0S (positive through zero-sequence source impedance) is about equal at both ends. If the ratio is different, the impedance
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 13 Scheme communication
813 Technical reference manual
measuring and the directional ground-fault current system of the healthy line may detect a fault in different directions, which could result in unwanted tripping.
Common channels cannot be used when the weak-end infeed function is used in the distance or ground-fault protection.
In case of an internal ground-fault, the forward directed measuring element operates and sends a permissive signal to the remote end via the CS output (sent signal). Local tripping is permitted when the forward direction measuring element operates and a permissive signal is received via the CR binary input (received signal).
The permissive scheme can be of either underreaching or overreaching type. In the underreaching alternative, an underreaching directional residual overcurrent measurement element will be used as sending criterion of the permissive input signal CSUR.
In the overreaching alternative, an overreaching directional residual overcurrent measurement element will be used as sending criterion of the permissive input signal CSOR. Also the underreaching input signal CSUR can initiate sending.
BLOCK CR
PLTR_CRD
BLKCS
CRL
Overreach CSOR
CSUR
TRIP
CS
en05000280_3_ansi.vsd
AND
AND AND
AND
AND
AND
OR
OR
0 25ms0-tCoord
0
0 50ms
0 50ms
ANSI05000280 V1 EN
Section 13 1MRK505222-UUS C Scheme communication
814 Technical reference manual
13.5.2.3 Unblocking scheme
In unblocking scheme, the lower dependability in permissive scheme is overcome by using the loss of guard signal from the communication equipment to locally create a receive signal. It is common or suitable to use the function when older, less reliable, power line carrier (PLC) communication is used.
The unblocking function uses a guard signal CR_GUARD, which must always be present, even when no CR signal is received. The absence of the CR_GUARD signal for a time longer than the setting tSecurity time is used as a CR signal, see figure 403. This also enables a permissive scheme to operate when the line fault blocks the signal transmission.
The received signal created by the unblocking function is reset 150 ms after the security timer has elapsed. When that occurs an output signal LCG is activated for signaling purpose. The unblocking function is reset 200 ms after that the guard signal is present again.
CR_GUARD
0-tSecurity
0 150 ms
CR CRL
LCG AND OR AND
en05000746_ansi.vsd
0
0 200 ms
NOT OR
ANSI05000746 V1 EN
Figure 403: Guard signal logic with unblocking scheme
The unblocking function can be set in three operation modes (setting Unblock):
Disabled: The unblocking function is out of operation
No restart: Communication failure shorter than tSecurity will be ignored
If CR_GUARD disappears, a CRL signal will be transferred to the trip logic
There will not be any information in case of communication failure (LCG)
Restart Communication failure shorter than tSecurity will be ignored
It sends a defined (150 ms) CRL after the disappearance of the CR_GUARD signal
The function will activate LCG output in case of communication failure
If the communication failure comes and goes (<200 ms) there will not be recurrent signaling
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 13 Scheme communication
815 Technical reference manual
13.5.3 Function block
ANSI06000288-1-en.vsd
ECPSCH (85) BLOCK BLKTR BLKCS CS_STOP PLTR_CRD CSOR CSUR CR CR_GUARD
TRIP CS
CRL LCG
ANSI06000288 V1 EN
Figure 404: ECPSCH (85) function block
13.5.4 Input and output signals Table 435: ECPSCH (85) Input signals
Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block pilot (communication assisted) trip
BLKCS BOOLEAN 0 Block pilot channel start
CSBLK BOOLEAN 0 Block of channel start (CS) due to reverse fault detection
CACC BOOLEAN 0 Signal to be used for coordinating local pilot tripping with the channel receive (CR) signal
CSOR BOOLEAN 0 Signal to be used for channel start with overreaching pilot schemes
CSUR BOOLEAN 0 Signal to be used for channel start with underreaching pilot schemes
CR BOOLEAN 0 Channel receive input signal from communications apparatus/module for pilot communication scheme logic
CRG BOOLEAN 0 Carrier channel guard input signal
Table 436: ECPSCH (85) Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip by pilot communication scheme logic
CS BOOLEAN Pilot channel start signal
CRL BOOLEAN Channel receive signal output from communication scheme logic
LCG BOOLEAN Loss of channel guard signal output from communication scheme logic
Section 13 1MRK505222-UUS C Scheme communication
816 Technical reference manual
13.5.5 Setting parameters Table 437: ECPSCH (85) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
SchemeType Disabled Intertrip Permissive UR Permissive OR Blocking
— — Permissive UR Scheme type, Mode of Operation
tCoord 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.035 Communication scheme channel coordination time
tSendMin 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Minimum duration of a carrier send signal (carrier continuation)
Table 438: ECPSCH (85) Group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Unblock Disabled
NoRestart Restart
— — Disabled Operation mode of unblocking logic
tSecurity 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.035 Security timer for loss of carrier guard detection
13.5.6 Technical data Table 439: ECPSCH (85) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Scheme type Permissive Underreaching
Permissive Overreaching Blocking
—
Communication scheme coordination time
(0.000-60.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
13.6 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection ECRWPSCH (85)
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection
ECRWPSCH — 85
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 13 Scheme communication
817 Technical reference manual
13.6.1 Introduction The Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection ECRWPSCH (85) is a supplement to Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection ECPSCH (85).
To achieve fast fault clearing for all ground faults on the line, the directional ground- fault protection function can be supported with logic that uses communication channels.
The 670 series IEDs have for this reason available additions to scheme communication logic.
If parallel lines are connected to common busbars at both terminals, overreaching permissive communication schemes can trip unselectively due to fault current reversal. This unwanted tripping affects the healthy line when a fault is cleared on the other line. This lack of security can result in a total loss of interconnection between the two buses. To avoid this type of disturbance, a fault current reversal logic (transient blocking logic) can be used.
Permissive communication schemes for residual overcurrent protection can basically operate only when the protection in the remote IED can detect the fault. The detection requires a sufficient minimum residual fault current, out from this IED. The fault current can be too low due to an opened breaker or high-positive and/or zero-sequence source impedance behind this IED. To overcome these conditions, weak-end infeed (WEI) echo logic is used.
13.6.2 Principle of operation
13.6.2.1 Directional comparison logic function
The directional comparison function contains logic for blocking overreaching and permissive overreaching schemes.
The circuits for the permissive overreaching scheme contain logic for current reversal and weak-end infeed functions. These functions are not required for the blocking overreaching scheme.
Use the independent or inverse time functions in the directional ground-fault protection module to get back-up tripping in case the communication equipment malfunctions and prevents operation of the directional comparison logic.
Figure 405 and figure 406 show the logic circuits.
Section 13 1MRK505222-UUS C Scheme communication
818 Technical reference manual
Connect the necessary signal from the autorecloser for blocking of the directional comparison scheme, during a single-phase autoreclosing cycle, to the BLOCK input of the directional comparison module.
13.6.2.2 Fault current reversal logic
The fault current reversal logic uses a reverse directed element, connected to the input signal IREV, which recognizes that the fault is in reverse direction. When the reverse direction element is activated the output signal IRVL is activated which is shown in Figure 405. The logic is now ready to handle a current reversal without tripping. The output signal IRVL will be connected to the block input on the permissive overreaching scheme.
When the fault current is reversed on the healthy line, IRV is deactivated and IRVBLK is activated. The tDelayRev timer delays the reset of the output signal. The signal blocks operation of the overreach permissive scheme for residual current and thus prevents unwanted operation caused by fault current reversal.
tPickUpRev AND tDelayRev
BLOCK
IREV
IFWD
IRVL tPickUpRev
Drawing2.vsd
0 0 10ms
0 0
ANSI09000031 V1 EN
Figure 405: Simplified logic diagram for current reversal
13.6.2.3 Weak-end infeed logic
The weak-end infeed function can be set to send only an echo signal (WEI=Echo) or an echo signal and a trip signal (WEI=Echo & Trip). The corresponding logic diagrams are depicted in Figure 406 and Figure 407.
The weak-end infeed logic uses normally a reverse and a forward direction element, connected to WEIBLK2 via an OR-gate. If neither the forward nor the reverse directional measuring element is activated during the last 200 ms, the weak-end infeed logic echoes back the received permissive signal as shown in Figure 406 and Figure 407. The weak-end infeed logic also echoes the received permissive signal when CBOPEN is high (local breaker opens) prior to faults appeared at the end of line.
If the forward or the reverse directional measuring element is activated during the last 200 ms, the fault current is sufficient for the IED to detect the fault with the ground fault function that is in operation.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 13 Scheme communication
819 Technical reference manual
AND& CRL
WEIBLK1
BLOCK
ECHO
WEI = Echo
ANSI09000032-2-en.vsd
0 200 ms
50 ms 0
0 200 ms
0 tPickUpWEI
ANSI09000032 V2 EN
Figure 406: Simplified logic diagram for weak-end infeed logic — Echo
With the WEI= Echo & Trip setting, the logic sends an echo according to the diagram above. Further, it activates the TRWEI signal to trip the breaker if the echo conditions are fulfilled and the neutral point voltage is above the set operate value for 3V0PU.
The voltage signal that is used to calculate the zero sequence voltage is set in the ground fault function which is in operation.
CRL
BLOCK
WEIBLK1
TRWEI
CBOPEN
AND AND
ECHO
WEI = Echo&Trip AND
3V0PU AND
ANSI09000020-2-en.vsd
200 ms 0
0 200 ms
50 ms 0
100 ms
ANSI09000020 V2 EN
Figure 407: Simplified logic diagram for weak-end infeed logic — Echo & Trip
The weak-end infeed echo sent to the strong line end has a maximum duration of 200 ms. When this time period has elapsed, the conditions that enable the echo signal to be sent are set to zero for a time period of 50 ms. This avoids ringing action if the weak- end echo is selected for both line ends.
Section 13 1MRK505222-UUS C Scheme communication
820 Technical reference manual
13.6.3 Function block
ANSI06000289-1-en.vsd
ECRWPSCH (85) V3P* BLOCK IFWD IREV WEIBLK1 WEIBLK2 LOVBZ CBOPEN CRL
IRVL TRWEI ECHO
CR
ANSI06000289 V1 EN
Figure 408: ECRWPSCH (85) function block
13.6.4 Input and output signals Table 440: ECRWPSCH (85) Input signals
Name Type Default Description V3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Group signal for voltage input
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IFWD BOOLEAN 0 A signal that indicates a forward fault has been detected and will block tripping if there was a pre- existing reverse fault condition (IREV)
IREV BOOLEAN 0 A signal that indicates a reverse fault has been detected and activates current reverasl logic
WEIBLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI Logic
WEIBLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic due to operation of other protections that would effect a pilot trip or the detection of reverse faults that will be tripped by an external device
LOVBZ BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip from WEI logic through the loss of voltage (fuse-failure) function
CBOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip from WEI logic by an open breaker
CRL BOOLEAN 0 POTT or Unblock carrier receive for WEI logic
Table 441: ECRWPSCH (85) Output signals
Name Type Description IRVL BOOLEAN Operation of current reversal logic
TRWEI BOOLEAN Trip of WEI logic
ECHO BOOLEAN A signal that indicates channel start (CS) by WEI logic
CR BOOLEAN POR Carrier signal received from remote end
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 13 Scheme communication
821 Technical reference manual
13.6.5 Setting parameters Table 442: ECRWPSCH (85) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description CurrRev Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Operating mode of Current Reversal Logic
tPickUpRev 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Pickup time for current reversal logic
tDelayRev 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.060 Time Delay to prevent Carrier send and local trip
WEI Disabled Echo Echo & Trip
— — Disabled Operating mode of WEI logic
tPickUpWEI 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Coordination time for the WEI logic
VBase 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Base setting for voltage level
3V0PU 5 — 70 %VB 1 25 Neutral voltage setting for fault conditions measurement
13.6.6 Technical data Table 443: ECRWPSCH (85) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Operating mode of WEI logic Disabled
Echo Echo & Trip
—
Operate voltage 3Vo for WEI trip (5-70)% of VBase 0.5% of Vn
Reset ratio >95% —
Operate time for current reversal logic
(0.000-60.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
Delay time for current reversal (0.000-60.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
Coordination time for weak-end infeed logic
(0.00060.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
13.7 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase segregated communication ZC1WPSCH (85)
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase segregated communication
ZC1WPSCH — 85
Section 13 1MRK505222-UUS C Scheme communication
822 Technical reference manual
13.7.1 Introduction Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase segregated communication (ZC1WPSCH, 85) function is used to prevent unwanted operations due to current reversal when using permissive overreach protection schemes in application with parallel lines when the overreach from the two ends overlaps on the parallel line.
The weak-end infeed logic is used in cases where the apparent power behind the protection can be too low to activate the distance protection function. When activated, received carrier signal together with local under voltage criteria and no reverse zone operation gives an instantaneous trip. The received signal is also echoed back to accelerate the sending end.
13.7.2 Principle of operation
13.7.2.1 Current reversal logic
The current reversal logic uses a reverse zone connected to the input IRVLx to recognize the fault on the parallel line in phase Lx. When the reverse zone has been activated for a certain settable time tPickUpRev it prevents sending of a communication signal and activation of trip signal for a predefined time tDelayRev. This makes it possible for the carrier receive signal to reset before the carrier aided trip signal is activated due to the current reversal by the forward directed zone, see figure 409.
IRVLn
IRVBLKLn IRVOPLnt tDelayRev
&
t tPickUpRev
t 10 ms
t tPickUpRev
IEC06000474_2_en.vsd IEC06000474 V2 EN
Figure 409: Current reversal logic
The preventing of sending carrier send signal CSLn and activating of the TRIPLn in the Scheme communication logic for distance or Overcurrent protection (ZCPSCH ,85) is carried out by connecting the IRVOPLn signal to input BLOCKLn in ZCPSCH (85) function.
The Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase segregated communication (ZC1WPSCH ,85) function has an internal 10 ms drop-off timer which secure that the current reversal logic will be activated for short input signals even if the pick-up timer is set to zero.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 13 Scheme communication
823 Technical reference manual
Weak-end infeed logic
The WEI function sends back (echoes) the received carrier signal under the condition that no fault has been detected at the weak end by different fault detection elements (distance protection in forward and reverse direction).
BLOCK
CRLLn
WEIBLK1
ECHOLn
ECHOLn — cont.
en07000085_ansi.vsd
VTSZ OR
AND AND
WEIBLK2 200ms
0
200ms 0
0-tWEI 0 50ms
0 0
200ms
ANSI07000085 V1 EN
Figure 410: Weak-end infeed logic
The WEI function returns the received carrier signal, see figure 410, when:
The input CRLx is active. This input is usually connected to the CRLx output on the scheme communication logic for distance or Overcurrent protection (ZCPSCH , 85).
The WEI function is not blocked by the active signal connected to the WEIBLKLx input or to the VTSZ input. The later is usually configured to the STGEN output of the fuse-failure function.
No active signal has been present for at least 200 ms on the WEIBLK2 input. An OR combination of all fault detection functions (not undervoltage) as present within the IED is usually used for this purpose.
When an echo function is used in both IEDs (should generally be avoided), a spurious signal can be looped round by the echo logics. To avoid a continuous lock-up of the system, the duration of the echoed signal is limited to 200 ms. An undervoltage criteria is used as an additional tripping criteria, when the tripping of the local breaker is selected, setting WEI = Echo &Trip, together with the WEI function and ECHO signal has been issued by the echo logic, see figure 411.
Section 13 1MRK505222-UUS C Scheme communication
824 Technical reference manual
CBOPEN
STUL1N
STUL2N
STUL3N
100ms
AND
ECHOLn — cont.
TRWEI
TRWEIL1
TRWEIL2
TRWEIL3
en00000551_ansi.vsd
WEI = Echo&Trip
AND
AND
OR ORAND 0
0 15ms
0 15ms
0 15ms
ANSI00000551 V1 EN
Figure 411: Tripping part of the WEI logic, simplified diagram
13.7.3 Function block
ANSI06000477-2-en.vsd
ZC1WPSCH (85) V3P* BLOCK BLKZ CBOPEN CRL1 CRL2 CRL3 IRVL1 IRVL2 IRVL3 IRVBLKL1 IRVBLKL2 IRVBLKL3 WEIBLK WEIBLKL1 WEIBLKL2 WEIBLKL3 WEIBLKOP WEIBLKO1 WEIBLKO2 WEIBLKO3
TRPWEI TRPWEI_A TRPWEI_B TRPWEI_C
IRVOP IRVOP_A IRVOP_B IRVOP_C
ECHO ECHO_A ECHO_B ECHO_C
ANSI06000477 V2 EN
Figure 412: ZC1WPSCH (85) function block
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 13 Scheme communication
825 Technical reference manual
13.7.4 Input and output signals Table 444: ZC1WPSCH (85) Input signals
Name Type Default Description V3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Voltage
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKZ BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip from WEI logic by the fuse-failure function
CBOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip from WEI logic by an open breaker
CRL1 BOOLEAN 0 Carrier receive for WEI logic in Phase L1
CRL2 BOOLEAN 0 Carrier receive for WEI logic in Phase L2
CRL3 BOOLEAN 0 Carrier receive for WEI logic in Phase L3
IRVL1 BOOLEAN 0 Activation of current reversal logic in Phase L1
IRVL2 BOOLEAN 0 Activation of current reversal logic in Phase L2
IRVL3 BOOLEAN 0 Activation of current reversal logic in phase L3
IRVBLKL1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of current reversal function in Phase L1
IRVBLKL2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of current reversal function in Phase L2
IRVBLKL3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of current reversal function in Phase L3
WEIBLK BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic
WEIBLKL1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic in Phase L1
WEIBLKL2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic in Phase L2
WEIBLKL3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic in Phase L3
WEIBLKOP BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic due to operation of other protection
WEIBLKO1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic in Phase L1 due to operation of other protection
WEIBLKO2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic in Phase L2 due to operation of other protections
WEIBLKO3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic in Phase L3 due to operation of other protections
Table 445: ZC1WPSCH (85) Output signals
Name Type Description TRPWEI BOOLEAN Trip of WEI logic
TRPWEI_A BOOLEAN Trip of WEI logic in Phase A
TRPWEI_B BOOLEAN Trip of WEI logic in Phase B
TRPWEI_C BOOLEAN Trip of WEI logic in Phase C
IRVOP BOOLEAN Operation of current reversal logic
IRVOP_A BOOLEAN Operation of current reversal logic in Phase A
Table continues on next page
Section 13 1MRK505222-UUS C Scheme communication
826 Technical reference manual
Name Type Description IRVOP_B BOOLEAN Operation of current reversal logic in Phase B
IRVOP_C BOOLEAN Operation of current reversal logic in Phase C
ECHO BOOLEAN Carrier Send by WEI logic
ECHO_A BOOLEAN Carrier Send by WEI logic in Phase A
ECHO_B BOOLEAN Carrier Send by WEI logic in Phase B
ECHO_C BOOLEAN Carrier Send by WEI logic in Phase C
13.7.5 Setting parameters Table 446: ZC1WPSCH (85) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description VBase 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Base setting for Voltage level
OperCurrRev Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Operating mode of Current Reversal Logic
tPickUpRev 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Pickup time for current reversal logic
tDelayRev 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.060 Time Delay to prevent Carrier send and local trip
OperationWEI Disabled Echo Echo & Trip
— — Disabled Operating mode of WEI logic
VPGPickup 10 — 90 %VB 1 70 Phase to Ground voltage for detection of fault condition
PU27PP 10 — 90 %VB 1 70 Phase to Phase voltage for detection of fault condition
tPickUpWEI 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.010 Coordination time for the WEI logic
13.7.6 Technical data Table 447: ZC1WPSCH technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Detection pickup phase to neutral voltage
(10-90)% of VBase 0.5% of Vn
Detection pickup phase to phase voltage
(10-90)% of VBase 0.5% of Vn
Reset ratio <105% —
Operate time for current reversal (0.000-60.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
Delay time for current reversal (0.000-60.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
Coordination time for weak-end infeed logic
(0.000-60.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 13 Scheme communication
827 Technical reference manual
13.8 Direct transfer trip logic
13.8.1 Introduction Direct transfer trip (DTT) logic is used together with Line distance protection function or other type of line protection. One typical example for use of transfer trip is given below. When Line distance protection function is extended to cover power lines feeding the transformer directly and there is a fault in transformer differential area, the transformer differential protection operates faster than line protection. A trip command is sent to the remote end of the line. On remote end, before sending a trip command to the circuit breaker, the certainty of a fault condition is ensured by checking local criterion in DTT logic.
~ IDIFF>
Load
DTT
CSCR TRIP
TRIP
VT1
CT3CT2CT1 Power
Transformer
Line Xsource
Source
en03000120.vsd IEC03000120 V1 EN
Figure 413: Direct transfer trip
On receiving the CR signal from remote end, Direct transfer trip logic needs to check additional local criterion, before sending the trip signal to circuit breaker.
DTT logic can be handled in the following separate application functions:
1. Low active power and power factor protection LAPPGAPC (37_55) 2. Sudden change in current variation SCCVPTOC (51) 3. Compensated over and undervoltage protection COUVGAPC (59_27) 4. Carrier receive logic LCCRPTRC (94) 5. Zero sequence overvoltage protection LCZSPTOV (59N) 6. Negative sequence overvoltage protection LCNSPTOV (47) 7. Zero sequence overcurrent protection LCZSPTOC (51N) 8. Negative sequence overcurrent protection LCNSPTOC (46) 9. Three-phase overcurrent LCP3PTOC (51) 10. Three-phase undercurrent LCP3PTUC (37)
A composite scheme of these functions must be configured in PCM600 configuration tool, to make a complete DTT scheme as shown in Figure 414. The different individual
Section 13 1MRK505222-UUS C Scheme communication
828 Technical reference manual
local criteria functions can also be used as direct tripping protections, normally with a time delay.
C B
Tr ip
o ut
pu t
Low impedance protection
Sudden change in current variation
Zero sequence overcurrent protection
Negative sequence overcurrent protection
Zero sequence overvoltage protection
Negative sequence overvoltage protection
Compensated over and undervoltage protection
Three phase undercurrent
Three phase overcurrent
Backup trip of breaker failure protection
OR
Low active power and power factor protection
A na
lo g
in pu
t
V3P
I3P
ANSI09000773-1-en.vsd
LocalCheck
CR!
CR2
CR!
CR2
Impedance protection
Breaker Failure
LCCRPTRC (94)
CarrierReceiveLogic
ANSI09000773 V1 EN
Figure 414: Direct transfer trip scheme
13.8.2 Low active power and power factor protection LAPPGAPC (37_55)
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Low active power and power factor protection
LAPPGAPC — 37_55
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 13 Scheme communication
829 Technical reference manual
13.8.2.1 Introduction
Low active power and power factor protection (LAPPGAPC, 37_55) function measures power flow. It can be used for protection and monitoring of:
phase wise low active power phase wise low power factor phase wise reactive power and apparent power as service values
Following features are available:
Definite time stage for low active power protection Definite time stage for low power factor protection Individual enabling of Low active power and Low power factor functions Low active power trip with 2 selection modes ‘1 out of 3’ and ‘2 out of 3’ Phase wise calculated values of apparent power, reactive power, active power and
power factor are available as service values Insensitive to small variations in voltage and current
13.8.2.2 Principle of operation
Low active power and low power factor protection (LAPPGAPC, 37_55) calculates power and power factor from voltage and current values. Trip signal must be set independently for low active power and low power factor condition after definite time delay.
Active power calculation
LAPPGAPC (37_55) calculates single phase complex power of A, B and C loop by following equations. From this complex apparent power, the real and imaginary parts can be respective active and reactive power values of respective phases. All the apparent power values given out of the function are absolute values. The active power is the real part of the calculated apparent power.
SA = VA IA
EQUATION2243-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 149)
SB = VB IB
EQUATION2244-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 150)
SC = VC IC
EQUATION2245-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 151)
Power factor calculation
Section 13 1MRK505222-UUS C Scheme communication
830 Technical reference manual
Power factor is a ratio of active power to apparent power. The function calculates power factor from the calculated values of active power and apparent power of A, B and C loop by following equation:
A A
A
pf P S
=
EQUATION2246-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 152)
B B
B
pf P S
=
EQUATION2247-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 153)
C C
C
pf P S
=
EQUATION2248-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 154)
Active power trip mode
The low active power functionality has a trip mode setting. According to this setting, trip is activated if the low active power is detected in one out of three phases or two out of three phases respectively. These two modes are user settable through setting OpModeSel.
Zero clamping filtering
The function will do zero clamping to disable the calculation if the current and voltage values of a particular phase are less than 30% of VBase for voltage and 3% of IBase for current value.
Calculation
The active power setting value used for detection of under power must be given as a three- phase value. The design starts to calculate internally the per phase value from this setting and detect phase wise under power condition individually. The power factor pickup value is common for all the three phases.
Phase wise analog values apparent power, active power, reactive power and power factor are available as service values.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 13 Scheme communication
831 Technical reference manual
I3P
V3P
Calculation P and pf
P < LAP<
pf < pf<
t
t
PU_LAP_x
PU_LPF_x
TRLAP
TRLPFx
ANSI10000011-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000011 V1 EN
Figure 415: Logic diagram of Low active power and low power factor protection (LAPPGAPC, 37_55)
13.8.2.3 Function block
ANSI09000763-1-en.vsd
LAPPGAPC (37_55) I3P* V3P* BLOCK BLKTR
TRLAP TRLPF
TRTPFA TRLPFB TRLPFC PU_LAP PU_LPF
PU_LAP_A PU_LAP_B PU_LAP_C PU_LPF_A PU_LPF_B PU_LPF_C
ANSI09000763 V1 EN
Figure 416: LAPPGAPC (37_55) function block
13.8.2.4 Input and output signals
Table 448: LAPPGAPC (37_55) Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Three phase group signal for current
V3P GROUP SIGNAL
— Three phase group signal for voltage
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block all trip signals of the funtction
Section 13 1MRK505222-UUS C Scheme communication
832 Technical reference manual
Table 449: LAPPGAPC (37_55) Output signals
Name Type Description TRLAP BOOLEAN Trip low active power
TRLPF BOOLEAN Trip low power factor
TRTPFA BOOLEAN Trip low power factor phase A
TRLPFB BOOLEAN Trip low power factor Phase B
TRLPFC BOOLEAN Trip low power factor Phase C
PU_LAP BOOLEAN Pick up low active power
PU_LPF BOOLEAN Pickup low power factor
PU_LAP_A BOOLEAN Pick up low active power phase A
PU_LAP_B BOOLEAN Pick up low active power phase B
PU_LAP_C BOOLEAN Pick up low active power phase C
PU_LPF_A BOOLEAN Pick up low power factor phase A
PU_LPF_B BOOLEAN Pick up low power factor phase B
PU_LPF_C BOOLEAN Pick up low power factor phase C
13.8.2.5 Setting parameters
Table 450: LAPPGAPC (37_55) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Operation Enable/Disable
IBase 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Base Setting for current in A
VBase 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Base setting for voltage in kV
SBase 1 — 50000 MVA 1 1200 Base Setting for power in MVA
OperationLAP Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Operation low active power Enable/disable
OpModeSel 2 out of 3 1 out of 3
— — 2 out of 3 Trip mode low active power 2out of 3 or 1 out of 3
PU_LAP 2.0 — 100.0 %SB 0.1 5.0 3 Phase pick up value for low active power
tdelay_LAP 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.010 Time delay to operate for low active power
OperationLPF Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Operation low power factor enable/disable
PU_LPF 0.00 — 1.00 — 0.01 0.40 Pick up for low power factor
tdelay_LPD 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.010 Time delay to operate for low power factor
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 13 Scheme communication
833 Technical reference manual
13.8.2.6 Technical data
Table 451: LAPPGAPC (37_55)technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Operate value, low active power
(2.0-100.0)% of SBase 1,0% of Sn
Reset ratio, low active power
<105% —
Transient overreach, low active power
<20 % at = 100 ms —
Operate value, low power factor
0.00-1.00 1,0% of Sn
Reset ratio, low power factor
<105% —
Transient overreach, low power factor
<20 % at = 100 ms —
Timers (0.000-60.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
Critical impulse time, low active power
10 ms typically at 1.2 to 0.8xPset —
Impulse margin time, low active power
10 ms typically —
13.8.3 Compensated over and undervoltage protection COUVGAPC (59_27)
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Compensated over and undervoltage protection
COUVGAPC — 59_27
13.8.3.1 Introduction
Compensated over and undervoltage protection (COUVGAPC, 59_27) function calculates the remote end voltage of the transmission line utilizing local measured voltage, current and with the help of transmission line parameters, that is, line resistance, reactance, capacitance and local shunt reactor. For protection of long transmission line for in zone faults, COUVGAPC, (59_27) can be incorporated with local criteria within direct transfer trip logic to ensure tripping of the line only under abnormal conditions.
Section 13 1MRK505222-UUS C Scheme communication
834 Technical reference manual
13.8.3.2 Principle of operation
Compensated over and undervoltage protection (COUVGAPC, 59_27) function is phase segregated and mainly used for local criteria check in Direct transfer trip. The principle is to utilize local measured voltage and current to calculate the voltage at the remote end of the line.
The main measured inputs to COUVGAPC (59_27) are three-phase voltage and current signals. COUVGAPC (59_27)uses line resistance, reactance and line charging capacitance to calculate the remote end voltage. It also takes the input for local shunt reactor, connected at the line side of the line breaker, reactance value. The calculated voltage is referred to as compensated voltage.
ANSI09000782-1-en.vsd
Compensated voltage calculation
V3P
I3P
59_PU_x
27_PU_x AND
SWIPOS
EnShuntReactor
Over voltage
comparator
Under voltage
comparator
t 59_Trip_x
t 27_Trip_x
59 Trip
27 Trip
59 PU
27 PU
ANSI09000782 V1 EN
Figure 417: Logic diagram of Compensated over and undervoltage protection (COUVGAPC, 59_27)
The formula used for calculation of compensated voltage is as follows:
Vremote = Vlocal (Ilocal j x Vlocal/Xsr + j x Vlocal/Xcp) x Zsetting
Where:
Vremote calculated voltage at the opposite side of line
Vlocal measured local voltage
Ilocal measured local current
Xsr reactance of local line connected shunt reactor, if applicable
Xcp half of equivalent reactance of line distributed capacitor
Above calculated compensated voltage is compared to preset over and under voltage levels set as percentage of base voltage VBase. If the calculated voltage exceeds setting
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 13 Scheme communication
835 Technical reference manual
in any phase, COUVGAPC (59_27) generates pickup and trip signals for that phase and common pickup and trip signals. Independent enabling for overvoltage and undervoltage are available with definite time delay. If shunt reactor is not present in the system, COUVGAPC (59_27) does not include any effect of shunt reactor while calculating the compensated voltage. This shunt reactor calculation is enabled when both input SWIPOS is and setting parameter EnShuntReactor is Enabled. Run time change in EnShuntReactor setting parameter restarts the IED and SWIPOS input signal is used to enable/disable the shunt reactor calculations.
Calculations
All resistance and reactance considered in compensated voltage calculation are primary side values.
Calculation of shunt reactor reactance in ohms from given MVAr rating: 2
N sr
N
V X
Q =
EQUATION2249-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 155)
Where:
VN line to line voltage
QN is total three phase MVAr of shunt reactor
If total line capacitance (Ctotal) is known then half line capacitive reactance:
2 cp
total
X Cw
=
EQUATION2250 V1 EN (Equation 156)
and if total line capacitive reactance XcTotal is known:
2cp cTotalX X= EQUATION2251 V1 EN (Equation 157)
Compensated voltage for all three phases is available as service values.
Section 13 1MRK505222-UUS C Scheme communication
836 Technical reference manual
13.8.3.3 Function block
ANSI09000764-1-en.vsd
COUVGAPC (59_27) I3P* V3P* BLOCK BLKTR SWIPOS
27 Trip 59 Trip
27_Trip_A 27_Trip_B 27_Trip_C 59_Trip_A 59_Trip_B 59_Trip_C
27 PU 59 PU
27_PU_A 27_PU_B 27_PU_C 59_PU_A 59_PU_B 59_PU_C
ANSI09000764 V1 EN
Figure 418: COUVGAPC (59_27) function block
13.8.3.4 Input and output signals
Table 452: COUVGAPC (59_27) Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Group signal for voltage inputs
V3P GROUP SIGNAL
— Group signal for voltage inputs
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block the function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all operate outputs
SWIPOS BOOLEAN 1 Local shunt reactor connected or not
Table 453: COUVGAPC (59_27) Output signals
Name Type Description 27 Trip BOOLEAN Common trip signal for compensated under voltage
59 Trip BOOLEAN Common trip signal for compensated over voltage
27_Trip_A BOOLEAN Trip signal for compensated under voltage of phase A
27_Trip_B BOOLEAN Trip signal for compensated under voltage of phase B
27_Trip_C BOOLEAN Trip signal for compensated under voltage of phase C
59_Trip_A BOOLEAN Trip signal for compensated over voltage of phase A
59_Trip_B BOOLEAN Trip signal for compensated over voltage of phase B
59_Trip_C BOOLEAN Trip signal for compensated over voltage of phase C
27 PU BOOLEAN Common PU fr compensated undervoltage
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 13 Scheme communication
837 Technical reference manual
Name Type Description 59 PU BOOLEAN Pick up for overvoltage
27_PU_A BOOLEAN pick up for 27 phase A uncompensated
27_PU_B BOOLEAN pick up for 27 phase B uncompensated
27_PU_C BOOLEAN pickup for compensated 27 phase C
59_PU_A BOOLEAN pick up for uncompensated 59 phase A
59_PU_B BOOLEAN pick up for uncompensated 59 phase B
59_PU_C BOOLEAN pick up for uncompensated 59 phase C
13.8.3.5 Setting parameters
Table 454: COUVGAPC (59_27) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Operation Enable/Disable
VBase 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Base setting for voltage in kV
OperationUV Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Operation compensated under voltage Off/On
27_COMP 1 — 100 %VB 1 70 Compensated under voltage level in % of VBase
tUV 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Time delay to trip under voltage
OperationOV Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Operation compensated over voltage Off/On
59_COMP 1 — 200 %VB 1 120 Compensated over voltage level in % of VBase
tOV 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Time delay to trip over voltage
Table 455: COUVGAPC (59_27) Group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description HystAbs 0.0 — 100.0 %VB 0.1 0.5 Hysteresis absolute for compensated over/
under voltage in % of VBase
Section 13 1MRK505222-UUS C Scheme communication
838 Technical reference manual
Table 456: COUVGAPC (59_27) Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description R1 0.01 — 3000.00 ohm 0.01 5.00 Positive sequence resistance per phase for
the line in ohm
X1 0.01 — 3000.00 ohm 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance per phase for the line in ohm
Xc 1.00 — 10000.00 ohm 0.01 1000.00 Half of equivalent capacitive reactance per phase in ohm
EnShuntReactor Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Enable setting if shunt reactor connected in line
Xsh 1.00 — 10000.00 ohm 0.01 1500.00 Per phase reactance of local Shunt Reactor in ohm
13.8.3.6 Technical data
Table 457: COUVGAPC (59_27)technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Operate value, undervoltage
(1-100)% of VBase 0,5% of Vn
Reset ratio, undervoltage <105% —
Critical impulse time, undervoltage
5 ms typically at 1.2 to 0.8xVset —
Impulse margin time, undervoltage
15 ms typically —
Operate value, overvoltage
(1-200)% of VBase 0.5% of Vn at V Vn
Reset ratio, overvoltage >95% —
Critical impulse time, overvoltage
2 ms typically at 0.8 to 1.2xVset —
Impulse margin time, overvoltage
10 ms typically —
Timers (0.000-60.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
13.8.4 Sudden change in current variation SCCVPTOC (51)
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Sudden change in current variation
SCCVPTOC — 51
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 13 Scheme communication
839 Technical reference manual
13.8.4.1 Introduction
Sudden change in current variation (SCCVPTOC, 51) function is a fast way of finding any abnormality in line currents. When there is a fault in the system, the current changes faster than the voltage. SCCVPTOC (51) finds abnormal condition based on phase-to-phase current variation. The main application is as a local criterion to increase security when transfer trips are used.
13.8.4.2 Principle of operation
Sudden change in current variation (SCCVPTOC, 51) function calculates the variation in phase-to-phase current and gives the RI output when this variation crosses the sum of start level and float threshold for a time of tDelay. The variation is calculated for all the three phase-to-phase currents.
The variation in the current is calculated using the following equation:
( ) ( ) ( )2 2i i t i t T i t TD = — — + — EQUATION2252 V1 EN
Where:
i(t) Amplitude of the current at the present instant
i(t-T) Amplitude of the current at the instant exactly one cycle time before
i(t-2T) Amplitude of the current at the instant exactly two cycle time before
Criteria:
Di > i (1.8 DIT + IPickup ) EQUATION2253-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 158)
IPickup: pickup level
It is the full-circle integral of the phase-to-phase current variation
( ) 2 11 T
T n T
I i t n T
—
=
D = D — EQUATION2254 V1 EN (Equation 159)
T: the count of the sampling value in one cycle
Section 13 1MRK505222-UUS C Scheme communication
840 Technical reference manual
If the above criteria becomes true for a time of tDelay, then respective RI output is activated provided the BLOCK input is false, and the respective TRIP outputs is activated for the time of tHold provided the BLKTR and BLOCK input is false.
13.8.4.3 Function block
ANSI09000765-1-en.vsd
SCCVPTOC (51) I3P* BLOCK BLKTR
TRIP RI
ANSI09000765 V1 EN
Figure 419: SCCVPTOC (51) function block
13.8.4.4 Input and output signals
Table 458: SCCVPTOC (51) Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Three phase to phase current samples group
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block trip signals
Table 459: SCCVPTOC (51) Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
RI BOOLEAN Common start signal
13.8.4.5 Setting parameters
Table 460: SCCVPTOC (51) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Operation Off/On
IBase 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Base setting for current in A
IPickup 0 — 100 %IB 1 20 Fixed threshold setting in % of IBase
tHold 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.500 Hold time for operate signals
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 13 Scheme communication
841 Technical reference manual
Table 461: SCCVPTOC (51) Group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description tDelay 0.000 — 0.005 s 0.001 0.002 Time delay for start and trip signals
13.8.4.6 Technical data
Table 462: SCCVPTOC (51)technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Operate value, overcurrent
(0 — 100)% of IBase 1,0% of In
Reset ratio, overcurrent >95% —
Timers (0.000-60.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
13.8.5 Carrier receive logic LCCRPTRC (94)
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Carrier receive logic
LCCRPTRC — 94
13.8.5.1 Introduction
In Direct transfer trip (DTT) scheme, the received CR signal gives the trip to the circuit breaker after checking certain local criteria functions in order to increase the security of the overall tripping functionality. Carrier receive logic (LCCRPTRC, 94) function gives final trip output of the DTT scheme.
Features:
Carrier redundancy to ensure security in DTT scheme Blocking function output on CR Channel Error Phase wise trip outputs
13.8.5.2 Principle of operation
The functionality of the Carrier receive logic (LCCRPTRC, 94) is to release the TRIP signal for DTT scheme based on the LOCTR_A, LOCTRL_B, LOCTR_C, and LOCTR signals coming from local criterion, and the Carrier receive signals CR! and CR2. There are two modes of operation 1 out of 2 and 2 out of 2. In the case of the 1 out of 2 mode if any one of the carrier signal is received then the trip signals will be
Section 13 1MRK505222-UUS C Scheme communication
842 Technical reference manual
released, and in 2 out of 2 mode both the CRs should be high to release trip signal. If any one of the channel error signals is high in 2 out of 2 mode, then logic automatically switches to 1 out of 2 mode after a time delay of 200 ms. After switching to 1/2 mode under channel error condition and if channel error gets cleared the mode will switch back only after a time delay of 200 ms.
If the input channel error signal is high then the respective carrier receive signal will be blocked.
The complete function can be blocked by setting the BLOCK input high.
13.8.5.3 Function block
ANSI09000766-1-en.vsd
LCCRPTRC (94) BLOCK LOCTR LOCTR_A LOCTR_B LOCTR_C CHERR1 CHERR2 CR! CR2
TRIP TR_A TR_B TR_C
ANSI09000766 V1 EN
Figure 420: LCCRPTRC (94) function block
13.8.5.4 Input and output signals
Table 463: LCCRPTRC (94) Input signals
Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
LOCTR BOOLEAN 0 Local common trip signal coming from DTT
LOCTR_A BOOLEAN 0 Local trip signal for phase A coming from DTT
LOCTR_B BOOLEAN 0 Local trip signal for phase B coming from DTT
LOCTR_C BOOLEAN 0 Local trip signal for phase C coming from DTT
CHERR1 BOOLEAN 0 Channel error indication flag for carrier receive 1
CHERR2 BOOLEAN 0 Channel error indication flag for carrier receive 2
CR! BOOLEAN 0 Carrier receive 1
CR2 BOOLEAN 0 Carrier receive 2
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 13 Scheme communication
843 Technical reference manual
Table 464: LCCRPTRC (94) Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip
TR_A BOOLEAN Trip Phase A
TR_B BOOLEAN Trip phase B
TR_C BOOLEAN Trip Phase C
13.8.5.5 Setting parameters
Table 465: LCCRPTRC (94) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
ChMode 2 out of 3 1 Out Of 2
— — 2 out of 3 Setting to select 1/2 or 2/2 mode
tOperate 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay to operate
13.8.5.6 Technical data
Table 466: LCCRPTRC (94)technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Operation mode 1 Out Of 2
2 Out Of 2 —
Timer (0.000-60.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
13.8.6 Negative sequence overvoltage protection LCNSPTOV (47)
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Negative sequence overvoltage protection
LCNSPTOV — 47
13.8.6.1 Introduction
Negative sequence components are present in all types of fault condition. Negative sequence voltage and current get high values during unsymmetrical faults.
Section 13 1MRK505222-UUS C Scheme communication
844 Technical reference manual
13.8.6.2 Principle of operation
Negative sequence over voltage protection (LCNSPTOV, 47) is a definite time stage comparator function. The negative sequence input voltage from the SMAI block is connected as input to the function through a group connection V3P in PCM600. This voltage is compared against the preset value and a pickup signal will be set high if the input negative sequence voltage is greater than the preset value Pickup2. Trip signal will be set high after a time delay setting oftV2. There is a BLOCK input which will block the complete function. BLKTR will block the trip output. The negative sequence voltage is also available as service value output U2.
13.8.6.3 Function block
ANSI09000767-1-en.vsd
LCNSPTOV (47) V3P* BLOCK BLKTR
TRIP RI
ANSI09000767 V1 EN
Figure 421: LCNSPTOV (47) Function block
13.8.6.4 Input and output signals
Table 467: LCNSPTOV (47) Input signals
Name Type Default Description V3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block overall function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block trip output
Table 468: LCNSPTOV (47) Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal for negative sequence over voltage
RI BOOLEAN Start signal for negative sequence over voltage
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 13 Scheme communication
845 Technical reference manual
13.8.6.5 Setting parameters
Table 469: LCNSPTOV (47) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Operation Enable/Disable
VBase 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400 Base setting for voltage in kV
Pickup2 1 — 200 %VB 1 10 Negative sequence over voltage start value in %VBase
tV2 0.000 — 120.000 s 0.001 2.000 Time delay to operate
13.8.6.6 Technical data
Table 470: LCNSPTOV (47)technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Operate value, negative sequence overvoltage
(1-200)% of VBase 0.5% of Vn at V Vn
Reset ratio, negative sequence overvoltage
>95% —
Operate time, start 20 ms typically at 0 to 2xVset —
Reset time, start 25 ms typically at 2 to 0xVset —
Critical impulse time, negative sequence overvoltage
10 ms typically at 0 to 2xVset —
Impulse margin time, negative sequence overvoltage
15 ms typically —
Timers (0.000-120.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
13.8.7 Zero sequence overvoltage protection LCZSPTOV (59N)
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Zero sequence overvoltage protection
LCZSPTOV — 59N
13.8.7.1 Introduction
Zero sequence components are present in all abnormal conditions involving ground. They can reach considerably high values during ground faults.
Section 13 1MRK505222-UUS C Scheme communication
846 Technical reference manual
13.8.7.2 Principle of operation
Zero sequence over voltage protection (LCZSPTOV, 59N) is a definite time stage comparator function. The zero sequence input voltage from the SMAI block is connected as input to the function through a group connection V3P in PCM600. This voltage is compared against the preset value and a pickup signal will be set high if the input zero sequence voltage is greater than the preset value 3V0PU. Trip signal will be set high after a time delay setting of t3V0. BLOCK input will block the complete function. BLKTR will block the trip output. The zero sequence voltage will be available as service value output as 3V0.
13.8.7.3 Function block
ANSI09000768-1-en.vsd
LCZSPTOV (59N) V3P* BLOCK BLKTR
TRIP RI
ANSI09000768 V1 EN
Figure 422: LCZSPTOV (59N) function block
13.8.7.4 Input and output signals
Table 471: LCZSPTOV (59N) Input signals
Name Type Default Description V3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block overall function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block TRIP output
Table 472: LCZSPTOV (59N) Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN TRIP signal for zero sequence over voltage
RI BOOLEAN Start signal for zero sequence over voltage
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 13 Scheme communication
847 Technical reference manual
13.8.7.5 Setting parameters
Table 473: LCZSPTOV (59N) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
VBase 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400 Base setting for voltage in kV
3V0PU 1 — 200 %VB 1 10 Zero sequence voltage start value in % of VBase
t3V0 0.000 — 120.000 s 0.001 2.000 Time delay to operate
13.8.7.6 Technical data
Table 474: LCZSPTOV (59N)technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Operate value, zero sequence overvoltage
(1-200)% of VBase 0.5% of Vn at V Vn
Reset ratio, zero sequence overvoltage
>95% —
Operate time, start 25 ms typically at 0 to 1.5xVset —
Reset time, start 25 ms typically at 1.5 to 0xVset —
Critical impulse time, zero sequence overvoltage
10 ms typically at 0 to 1.5xVset —
Timers (0.000-120.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
13.8.8 Negative sequence overcurrent protection LCNSPTOC (46)
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Negative sequence overcurrent protection
LCNSPTOC — 46
13.8.8.1 Introduction
Negative sequence components are present in all types of fault condition. They can reach considerably high values during abnormal operation.
Section 13 1MRK505222-UUS C Scheme communication
848 Technical reference manual
13.8.8.2 Principle of operation
Negative sequence overcurrent protection (LCNSPTOC, 46) is a definite time stage comparator function. The negative sequence input current from the SMAI block is connected as input to the function through a group connection I3P in PCM600. This current is compared against the preset value and a pickup signal will be set high if the input negative sequence current is greater than the preset value Pickup2. Trip signal will be set high after a time delay setting of tI2. BLOCK input will block the complete function. BLKTR will block the trip output. The negative sequence current is available as service value output I2.
13.8.8.3 Function block
ANSI09000769-1-en.vsd
LCNSPTOC (46) I3P* BLOCK BLKTR
TRIP RI
ANSI09000769 V1 EN
Figure 423: LCNSPTOC (46) Function block
13.8.8.4 Input and output signals
Table 475: LCNSPTOC (46) Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Three phase group signal for current inputs
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block overall function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block trip signal
Table 476: LCNSPTOC (46) Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal negative sequence over current protection
RI BOOLEAN Start signal for negative sequence over current protection
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 13 Scheme communication
849 Technical reference manual
13.8.8.5 Setting parameters
Table 477: LCNSPTOC (46) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
IBase 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Base setting for current in A
Pickup2 1 — 2500 %IB 1 100 Negative sequence over current start value in % of IBase
tI2 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay to operate
13.8.8.6 Technical data
Table 478: LCNSPTOC (37_55)technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Operate value, negative sequence overcurrent
(1 — 2500)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir at I < In 1.0% of I at I > In
Reset ratio, negative sequence overcurrent
>95% —
Operate time, start 20 ms typically at 0 to 2xIset 15 ms typically at 0 to 10xIset
—
Reset time, start 25 ms typically at 2 to 0xIset —
Critical impulse time, negative sequence overcurrent
10 ms typically at 0 to 2xIset 2 ms typically at 0 to 10xIset
—
Impulse margin time, negative sequence overcurrent
10 ms typically —
Timer (0.000-60.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
Transient overreach, start function
<5% at = 100 ms —
13.8.9 Zero sequence overcurrent protection LCZSPTOC (51N)
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Zero sequence overcurrent protection
LCZSPTOC — 51N
Section 13 1MRK505222-UUS C Scheme communication
850 Technical reference manual
13.8.9.1 Introduction
Zero sequence components are present in all abnormal conditions involving ground. They have a considerably high value during ground faults.
13.8.9.2 Principle of operation
Zero sequence overcurrent protection (LCZSPTOC, 51N) is a definite time stage comparator function. The zero sequence input current from the SMAI block is connected as input to the function through a group connection I3P in PCM600. This current is compared against the preset value and a pickup signal will be set high if the input zero sequence current is greater than the preset value 3I0 PU. Trip signal will be set high after a time delay setting of t3I0. BLOCK input will block the complete function. BLKTR will block the trip output. The zero sequence current is available as service value output 3I0.
13.8.9.3 Function block
ANSI09000770-1-en.vsd
LCZSPTOC (51N) I3P* BLOCK BLKTR
TRIP RI
ANSI09000770 V1 EN
Figure 424: LCZSPTOC (51N) Function block
13.8.9.4 Input and output signals
Table 479: LCZSPTOC (51N) Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Three phase group signal for current inputs
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block overall function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block trip output
Table 480: LCZSPTOC (51N) Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal for zero sequence over current protection
RI BOOLEAN Start signal for zero sequence over current protection
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 13 Scheme communication
851 Technical reference manual
13.8.9.5 Setting parameters
Table 481: LCZSPTOC (51N) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
IBase 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Base setting for current in A
3I0 PU 1 — 2500 %IB 1 100 Zero sequence over current start value in % of IBase
t3I0 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay to operate
13.8.9.6 Technical data
Table 482: LCZSPTOC (51N)technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Operate value, zero sequence overcurrent
(1-2500)% of IBase 1.0% of In at I In
Reset ratio, zero sequence overcurrent
>95% —
Operate time, start 20 ms typically at 0 to 2xIset 15 ms typically at 0 to 10xIset
—
Reset time, start 30 ms typically at 2 to 0xIset —
Critical impulse time, zero sequence overcurrent
10 ms typically at 0 to 2xIset 2 ms typically at 0 to 10xIset
—
Impulse margin time, zero sequence overcurrent
15 ms typically —
Timer (0.000-60.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
13.8.10 Three phase overcurrent LCP3PTOC (51)
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Three phase overcurrent
LCP3PTOC — 51
13.8.10.1 Introduction
Three phase overcurrent (LCP3PTOC, 51) is designed for overcurrent conditions.
Section 13 1MRK505222-UUS C Scheme communication
852 Technical reference manual
Features:
Phase wise pickup and trip signals Overcurrent protection Phase wise RMS current is available as service values Single definite time stage trip function.
13.8.10.2 Principle of operation
Three phase overcurrent (LCP3PTOC, 51) is used for detecting over current conditions. LCP3PTOC (51) pickups when the current exceeds the set limit PU 51. It operates with definite time (DT) characteristics, that is, the function operates after a predefined time tOC and resets when the fault current disappears. The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block the function output, timer or the function itself, if desired.
13.8.10.3 Function block
ANSI09000771-1-en.vsd
LCP3PTOC (51) I3P* BLOCK BLKTR
TRIP TR_A TR_B TR_C
RI PU_A PU_B BFI_C
ANSI09000771 V1 EN
Figure 425: LCP3PTOC (51) Function block
13.8.10.4 Input and output signals
Table 483: LCP3PTOC (51) Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Three phase group signal for current inputs
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block all binary outputs by resetting timers
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block trip of the function
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 13 Scheme communication
853 Technical reference manual
Table 484: LCP3PTOC (51) Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
TR_A BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase A
TR_B BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase B
TR_C BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase C
RI BOOLEAN Common start signal
PU_A BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase A
PU_B BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase B
BFI_C BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase C
13.8.10.5 Setting parameters
Table 485: LCP3PTOC (51) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Operation Enable / Disable
IBase 0 — 99999 A 1 3000 Base setting for current in A
PU 51 5 — 2500 %IB 1 1000 Start value for 3 phase over current in % IBase
tOC 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Time delay to operate
13.8.10.6 Technical data
Table 486: LCP3PTOC (51) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Operate value, overcurrent
(5-2500)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir at I < In 1.0% of I at I > In
Reset ratio, overcurrent >95% —
Operate time, start 20 ms typically at 0 to 2xIset 15 ms typically at 0 to 10xIset
—
Reset time, start 30 ms typically at 2 to 0xIset —
Critical impulse time, overcurrent
5 ms typically at 0 to 2xIset 2 ms typically at 0 to 10xIset
—
Impulse margin time, overcurrent
10 ms typically —
Timers (0.000-60.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
Section 13 1MRK505222-UUS C Scheme communication
854 Technical reference manual
13.8.11 Three phase undercurrent LCP3PTUC (37)
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Three phase undercurrent
LCP3PTUC — 37
13.8.11.1 Introduction
Three phase undercurrent function (LCP3PTUC, 37) is designed for detecting loss of load conditions.
Features:
Phase wise pickup and trip signals Phase wise RMS current is available as service values Single definite time stage trip function
13.8.11.2 Principle of operation
Three phase undercurrent (LCP3PTUC, 37) is used for detecting sudden load loss which is considered as fault condition. LCP3PTUC (37) starts when the current is less than the set limit PU_37. It operates with definite time (DT) characteristics, that is, the function operates after a predefined time tUC and resets when the load current restores. The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block the function output, timer or the function itself, if desired.
13.8.11.3 Function block
ANSI09000772-1-en.vsd
LCP3PTUC (37) I3P* BLOCK BLKTR
TRIP TR_A TR_B TR_C
RI BFI_A PU_B BFI_C
ANSI09000772 V1 EN
Figure 426: LCP3PTUC (37) Function block
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 13 Scheme communication
855 Technical reference manual
13.8.11.4 Input and output signals
Table 487: LCP3PTUC (37) Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Three phase group signal for current inputs
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block all binary outputs by resetting timers
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block trip of the function
Table 488: LCP3PTUC (37) Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
TR_A BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase A
TR_B BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase B
TR_C BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase C
RI BOOLEAN Common start signal
BFI_A BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase A
PU_B BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase B
BFI_C BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase C
13.8.11.5 Setting parameters
Table 489: LCP3PTUC (37) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Operation Enable / Disable
IBase 0 — 99999 A 1 3000 Current Base
PU_37 1.00 — 100.00 %IB 0.01 50.00 Start value for 3 phase under current in % IBase
tUC 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay to operate
Section 13 1MRK505222-UUS C Scheme communication
856 Technical reference manual
13.8.11.6 Technical data
Table 490: LCP3TUC (37) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Operate value, undercurrent
(1.00-100.00)% of IBase 1.0% of In
Reset ratio, undercurrent >105% —
Operate time, start 20 ms typically at 2 to 0xIset —
Reset time, start 30 ms typically at 0 to 2xIset —
Critical impulse time, undercurrent
10 ms typically at 2 to 0xIset —
Impulse margin time, undercurrent
10 ms typically —
Timers (0.000-60.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 13 Scheme communication
857 Technical reference manual
Section 14 Logic
About this chapter This chapter describes primarily tripping and trip logic functions. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are included for each function.
14.1 Tripping logic SMPPTRC (94)
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Tripping logic SMPPTRC
I->O
SYMBOL-K V1 EN
94
14.1.1 Introduction A function block for protection tripping is provided for each circuit breaker involved in the tripping of the fault. It provides a settable pulse prolongation to ensure a trip pulse of sufficient length, as well as all functionality necessary for correct co-operation with autoreclosing functions.
The trip function block also includes a settable latch functionality for evolving faults and breaker lock-out.
14.1.2 Principle of operation The duration of a trip output signal from tripping logic common 3-phase output SMPPTRC (94) is settable (tTripMin). The pulse length should be long enough to secure the breaker opening.
For three-pole tripping logic common 3-phase output, SMPPTRC (94) has a single input (TRINP_3P) through which all trip output signals from the protection functions within the IED, or from external protection functions via one or more of the IEDs binary inputs, are routed. It has a single trip output (TRIP) for connection to one or
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 14 Logic
859 Technical reference manual
more of the IEDs binary outputs, as well as to other functions within the IED requiring this signal.
AND
BLOCK
TRIN
Operation Mode = Enabled
OR t
tTripMin TRIP
Program = 3 phase
ANSI10000266-1-en.vsd ANSI10000266 V1 EN
Figure 427: Simplified logic diagram for three pole trip
SMPPTRC (94) function for single-pole and two-pole tripping has additional phase segregated inputs for this, as well as inputs for faulted phase selection. The latter inputs enable single- pole and two-pole tripping for those functions which do not have their own phase selection capability, and therefore which have just a single trip output and not phase segregated trip outputs for routing through the phase segregated trip inputs of the expanded SMPPTRC (94) function. Examples of such protection functions are the residual overcurrent protections. The expanded SMPPTRC (94) function has two inputs for these functions, one for impedance tripping (for example, carrier-aided tripping commands from the scheme communication logic), and one for ground fault tripping (for example, tripping output from a residual overcurrent protection).
Additional logic, including a timer tWaitForPHS, secures a three-phase trip command for these protection functions in the absence of the required phase selection signals.
The expanded SMPPTRC (94) function has three trip outputs TR_A, TR_B, TR_C (besides the trip output TRIP), one per phase, for connection to one or more of the IEDs binary outputs, as well as to other functions within the IED requiring these signals. There are also separate output signals indicating single-pole, two-pole or three- pole trip. These signals are important for cooperation with the autorecloser SMBRREC (79) function.
The expanded SMPPTRC (94) function is equipped with logic which secures correct operation for evolving faults as well as for reclosing on to persistent faults. A special input is also provided which disables single- pole and two-pole tripping, forcing all tripping to be three-pole.
In multi-breaker arrangements, one SMPPTRC (94) function block is used for each breaker. This can be the case if single pole tripping and autoreclosing is used.
Section 14 1MRK505222-UUS C Logic
860 Technical reference manual
The breaker close lockout function can be activated from an external trip signal from another protection function via input (SETLKOUT) or internally at a three-pole trip, if desired.
It is possible to lockout seal in the tripping output signals or use blocking of closing only the choice is by setting TripLockout.
14.1.2.1 Logic diagram
TRINP_A
TRINP_B
TRINP_C
1PTRZ
1PTRGF
TRINP_3P
OR
OR
OR
Program = 3 phase
AND INTL_ABCTRIP
ANSI05000517-3-en.vsd
ANSI05000517 V3 EN
Figure 428: Three-phase front logic simplified logic diagram
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 14 Logic
861 Technical reference manual
ANSI10000056-3-en.vsd
PS_A
— loop
-loop
TRINP_3P
TR_A OR
OR
OR
AND
AND
AND
OR
OR
OR
AND
OR
AND
OR
AND AND
tWaitForPHS
TR_B
TR_C
TRINP_A
TRINP_B
PS_B
TRINP_C
PS_C
1PTRGF
1PTRZ
ANSI10000056 V3 EN
Figure 429: Phase segregated front logic
Section 14 1MRK505222-UUS C Logic
862 Technical reference manual
ANSI10000268-2-en.vsd
ATRIP
BTRIP
CTRIP
P3PTR
-loop
INTL_ATRIP
INTL_BTRIP
INTL_CTRIP
150 ms
t OR
OR AND
OR
OR
150 ms
t OR
OR AND
OR
OR
AND
OR150 ms
t
OR AND
OR
OR
2000 ms 0
2000 ms 0
2000 ms 0
AND
AND
AND
BLOCK
ANSI10000268 V2 EN
Figure 430: Additional logic for the 1ph/3ph operating mode
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 14 Logic
863 Technical reference manual
BLOCK
ANSI05000520-3.vsd
ANSI05000520 V3 EN
Figure 431: Additional logic for the 1ph/2ph/3ph operating mode
Section 14 1MRK505222-UUS C Logic
864 Technical reference manual
ANSI05000521-3.vsd
ANSI05000521 V3 EN
Figure 432: Final tripping circuits
14.1.3 Function block
ANSI05000707-2-en.vsd
SMPPTRC (94) BLOCK BLKLKOUT TRINP_3P TRINP_A TRINP_B TRINP_C PS_A PS_B PS_C 1PTRZ 1PTRGF P3PTR SETLKOUT RSTLKOUT
TRIP TR_A TR_B TR_C TR1P TR2P TR3P
CLLKOUT
ANSI05000707 V2 EN
Figure 433: SMPPTRC (94) function block
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 14 Logic
865 Technical reference manual
14.1.4 Input and output signals Table 491: SMPPTRC (94) Input signals
Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Blocks circuit breaker lockout output (CLLKOUT)
TRINP_3P BOOLEAN 0 Trip all phases
TRINP_A BOOLEAN 0 Trip phase A
TRINP_B BOOLEAN 0 Trip phase B
TRINP_C BOOLEAN 0 Trip phase C
PS_A BOOLEAN 0 Input from phase selection, phase A
PS_B BOOLEAN 0 Input from phase selection, phase B
PS_C BOOLEAN 0 Input from phase selection, phase C
1PTRZ BOOLEAN 0 Zone Trip with a separate phase selection
1PTRGF BOOLEAN 0 Single phase Directional Ground Fault Overcurrent Trip with phase selection
P3PTR BOOLEAN 0 Prepare all tripping to be three-phase
SETLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Input for setting the circuit breaker lockout function
RSTLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Input for resetting the circuit breaker lockout function
Table 492: SMPPTRC (94) Output signals
Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN General trip output signal
TR_A BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase A
TR_B BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase B
TR_C BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase C
TR1P BOOLEAN Tripping single-pole
TR2P BOOLEAN Tripping two-pole
TR3P BOOLEAN Tripping three-pole
CLLKOUT BOOLEAN Circuit breaker lockout output (set until reset)
Section 14 1MRK505222-UUS C Logic
866 Technical reference manual
14.1.5 Setting parameters Table 493: SMPPTRC (94) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Enabled Disable/Enable Operation
Program 3 phase 1p/3p 1p/2p/3p
— — 1p/3p Three pole; single or three pole; single, two or three pole trip
tTripMin 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Minimum duration of trip output signal
tWaitForPHS 0.020 — 0.500 s 0.001 0.050 Secures 3-pole trip when phase selection failed
Table 494: SMPPTRC (94) Group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description TripLockout Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled If TripLockout is set to On, it will activate
output (CLLKOUT) and trip latch. If set to Off it will activate only CLLKOUT
AutoLock Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled If AutoLock is set to On i will activate lockout from input (SETLKOUT) and trip, If set to Off it will activate only from SETLKOUT
14.1.6 Technical data Table 495: SMPPTRC (94) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Trip action 3-ph, 1/3-ph, 1/2/3-ph —
Minimum trip pulse length (0.000-60.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
Timers (0.000-60.000) s 0.5% 10 ms
14.2 Trip matrix logic TMAGGIO
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Trip matrix logic TMAGGIO — —
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 14 Logic
867 Technical reference manual
14.2.1 Introduction Trip matrix logic TMAGGIO function is used to route trip signals and other logical output signals to different output contacts on the IED.
TMAGGIO output signals and the physical outputs allows the user to adapt the signals to the physical tripping outputs according to the specific application needs.
14.2.2 Principle of operation Trip matrix logic (TMAGGIO) block is provided with 32 input signals and 3 output signals. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gates in order to provide the necessary grouping of connected input signals (for example, for tripping and alarming purposes) to the three output signals from the function block.
Internal built-in OR logic is made in accordance with the following three rules:
1. when any one of first 16 inputs signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1 (TRUE) the first output signal (OUTPUT1) will get logical value 1 (TRUE).
2. when any one of second 16 inputs signals (INPUT17 to INPUT32) has logical value 1 (TRUE) the second output signal (OUTPUT2) will get logical value 1 (TRUE).
3. when any one of all 32 input signals (INPUT1 to INPUT32) has logical value 1 (TRUE) the third output signal (OUTPUT3) will get logical value 1 (TRUE).
By use of the settings ModeOutput1, ModeOutput2, ModeOutput3, PulseTime, OnDelay and OffDelay the behavior of each output can be customized. The OnDelay is always active and will delay the input to output transition by the set time. The ModeOutput for respective output decides whether the output shall be steady with an drop-off delay as set by OffDelay or if it shall give a pulse with duration set by PulseTime. Note that for pulsed operation since the inputs are connected in an OR- function a new pulse will only be given on the output if all related inputs are reset and then one is activated again. And for steady operation the OffDelay will start when all related inputs have reset. Detailed logical diagram is shown in figure 434
Section 14 1MRK505222-UUS C Logic
868 Technical reference manual
PulseTime
Output 1
PulseTime
Output 2
PulseTime
Output 3
Input 17
Input 32
Input 1
Input 16
OR
OR
OR OR
AND
AND
ModeOutput1
OR
ModeOutput2
OR
ModeOutput3
t
t
t
ANSI10000055-1-en.vsd
AND
AND
AND
AND
0 0-OnDelay
0 0-OnDelay
0 0-OnDelay
0-OffDelay 0
0-OffDelay 0
0-OffDelay 0
ANSI10000055 V2 EN
Figure 434: Trip matrix internal logic
Output signals from TMAGGIO are typically connected to other logic blocks or directly to output contacts in the IED. When used for direct tripping of the circuit breaker(s) the pulse time delay shall be set to approximately 0.150 seconds in order to obtain satisfactory minimum duration of the trip pulse to the circuit breaker trip coils.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 14 Logic
869 Technical reference manual
14.2.3 Function block
IEC09000830-1-en.vsd
TMAGGIO INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 INPUT17 INPUT18 INPUT19 INPUT20 INPUT21 INPUT22 INPUT23 INPUT24 INPUT25 INPUT26 INPUT27 INPUT28 INPUT29 INPUT30 INPUT31 INPUT32
OUTPUT1 OUTPUT2 OUTPUT3
IEC09000830 V1 EN
Figure 435: TMAGGIO function block
14.2.4 Input and output signals Table 496: TMAGGIO Input signals
Name Type Default Description INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 16
INPUT17 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 17
Table continues on next page
Section 14 1MRK505222-UUS C Logic
870 Technical reference manual
Name Type Default Description INPUT18 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 18
INPUT19 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 19
INPUT20 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 20
INPUT21 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 21
INPUT22 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 22
INPUT23 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 23
INPUT24 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 24
INPUT25 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 25
INPUT26 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 26
INPUT27 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 27
INPUT28 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 28
INPUT29 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 29
INPUT30 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 30
INPUT31 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 31
INPUT32 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 32
Table 497: TMAGGIO Output signals
Name Type Description OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16
OUTPUT2 BOOLEAN OR function between inputs 17 to 32
OUTPUT3 BOOLEAN OR function between inputs 1 to 32
14.2.5 Setting parameters Table 498: TMAGGIO Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Enabled Operation Disable / Enable
PulseTime 0.050 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Output pulse time
OnDelay 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Output on delay time
OffDelay 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Output off delay time
ModeOutput1 Steady Pulsed
— — Steady Mode for output ,1 steady or pulsed
ModeOutput2 Steady Pulsed
— — Steady Mode for output 2, steady or pulsed
ModeOutput3 Steady Pulsed
— — Steady Mode for output 3, steady or pulsed
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 14 Logic
871 Technical reference manual
14.3 Configurable logic blocks
14.3.1 Introduction A number of logic blocks and timers are available for the user to adapt the configuration to the specific application needs.
OR function block.
INVERTER function blocks that inverts the input signal.
PULSETIMER function block can be used, for example, for pulse extensions or limiting of operation of outputs, settable pulse time.
GATE function block is used for whether or not a signal should be able to pass from the input to the output.
XOR function block.
LOOPDELAY function block used to delay the output signal one execution cycle.
TIMERSET function has pick-up and drop-out delayed outputs related to the input signal. The timer has a settable time delay.
AND function block.
SRMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can set or reset an output from two inputs respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if the block’s output should reset or return to the state it was, after a power interruption.
RSMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can reset or set an output from two inputs respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if the block’s output should reset or return to the state it was, after a power interruption. RESET input has priority.
Section 14 1MRK505222-UUS C Logic
872 Technical reference manual
14.3.2 Inverter function block INV
IEC04000404_2_en.vsd
INV INPUT OUT
IEC04000404 V2 EN
Figure 436: INV function block
Table 499: INV Input signals
Name Type Default Description INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input
Table 500: INV Output signals
Name Type Description OUT BOOLEAN Output
14.3.3 OR function block OR The OR function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean variables. The OR function block has six inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted.
IEC04000405_2_en.vsd
OR INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6
OUT NOUT
IEC04000405 V2 EN
Figure 437: OR function block
Table 501: OR Input signals
Name Type Default Description INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 to OR gate
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 to OR gate
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 to OR gate
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 to OR gate
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 to OR gate
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 to OR gate
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 14 Logic
873 Technical reference manual
Table 502: OR Output signals
Name Type Description OUT BOOLEAN Output from OR gate
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output from OR gate
14.3.4 AND function block AND The AND function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean variables. The AND function block has four inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs are inverted.
IEC04000406_2_en.vsd
AND INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4N
OUT NOUT
IEC04000406 V2 EN
Figure 438: AND function block
Table 503: AND Input signals
Name Type Default Description INPUT1 BOOLEAN 1 Input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 1 Input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 1 Input 3
INPUT4N BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 inverted
Table 504: AND Output signals
Name Type Description OUT BOOLEAN Output
NOUT BOOLEAN Output inverted
14.3.5 Timer function block TIMER The function block TIMER has drop-out and pick-up delayed outputs related to the input signal. The timer has a settable time delay (T).
Section 14 1MRK505222-UUS C Logic
874 Technical reference manual
IEC04000378-3-en.vsd
TIMER INPUT ON
OFF
IEC04000378 V2 EN
Figure 439: TIMER function block
Table 505: TIMER Input signals
Name Type Default Description INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input to timer
Table 506: TIMER Output signals
Name Type Description ON BOOLEAN Output from timer , pickup delay
OFF BOOLEAN Output from timer, dropout delay
Table 507: TIMER Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description T 0.000 — 90000.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of function
14.3.6 Pulse timer function block PULSETIMER The pulse (PULSETIMER) function can be used, for example, for pulse extensions or limiting of operation of outputs. The pulse timer TP has a settable length.
IEC04000407-2-en.vsd
PULSETIMER INPUT T
OUT
IEC04000407 V2 EN
Figure 440: PULSETIMER function block
Table 508: PULSETIMER Input signals
Name Type Default Description INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input to pulse timer
Table 509: PULSETIMER Output signals
Name Type Description OUT BOOLEAN Output from pulse timer
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 14 Logic
875 Technical reference manual
Table 510: PULSETIMER Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description T 0.000 — 90000.000 s 0.001 0.010 Time delay of function
14.3.7 Exclusive OR function block XOR The exclusive OR function (XOR) is used to generate combinatory expressions with boolean variables. XOR has two inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted. The output signal is 1 if the input signals are different and 0 if they are the same.
IEC04000409-2-en.vsd
XOR INPUT1 INPUT2
OUT NOUT
IEC04000409 V2 EN
Figure 441: XOR function block
Table 511: XOR Input signals
Name Type Default Description INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 to XOR gate
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 to XOR gate
Table 512: XOR Output signals
Name Type Description OUT BOOLEAN Output from XOR gate
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output from XOR gate
14.3.8 Loop delay function block LOOPDELAY The Logic loop delay function block (LOOPDELAY) function is used to delay the output signal one execution cycle.
LOOPDELAY INPUT OUT
IEC09000296-1-en.vsd IEC09000296 V1 EN
Figure 442: LOOPDELAY function block
Section 14 1MRK505222-UUS C Logic
876 Technical reference manual
Table 513: LOOPDELAY Input signals
Name Type Default Description INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal
Table 514: LOOPDELAY Output signals
Name Type Description OUT BOOLEAN Output signal, signal is delayed one execution cycle
14.3.9 Set-reset with memory function block SRMEMORY The Set-reset with memory function block (SRMEMORY) is a flip-flop with memory that can set or reset an output from two inputs respectively. Each SRMEMORY function block has two outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if the flip-flop after a power interruption will return the state it had before or if it will be reset.
Table 515: Truth table for SRMEMORY function block
SET RESET OUT NOUT 0 0 Last
value Inverted last value
0 1 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 1 1 0
SRMEMORY SET RESET
OUT NOUT
IEC04000408_2_en.vsd IEC04000408 V2 EN
Figure 443: SRMEMORY function block
Table 516: SRMEMORY Input signals
Name Type Default Description SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 14 Logic
877 Technical reference manual
Table 517: SRMEMORY Output signals
Name Type Description OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal
Table 518: SRMEMORY Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Memory Disabled
Enabled — — Enabled Operating mode of the memory function
14.3.10 Reset-set with memory function block RSMEMORY
The Reset-set with memory function block (RSMEMORY) is a flip-flop with memory that can reset or set an output from two inputs respectively. Each RSMEMORY function block has two outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if the flip-flop after a power interruption will return the state it had before or if it will be reset. For a Reset-Set flip-flop, RESET input has higher priority over SET input.
Table 519: Truth table for RSMEMORY function block
RESET SET OUT NOUT 0 0 Last
value Inverted last value
0 1 1 0
1 0 0 1
1 1 0 1
RSMEMORY SET RESET
OUT NOUT
IEC09000294-1-en.vsd IEC09000294 V1 EN
Figure 444: RSMEMORY function block
Table 520: RSMEMORY Input signals
Name Type Default Description SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset
Section 14 1MRK505222-UUS C Logic
878 Technical reference manual
Table 521: RSMEMORY Output signals
Name Type Description OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal
Table 522: RSMEMORY Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Memory Disabled
Enabled — — Enabled Operating mode of the memory function
14.3.11 Controllable gate function block GATE The Controllable gate function block (GATE) is used for controlling if a signal should be able to pass from the input to the output or not depending on a setting.
IEC04000410-2-en.vsd
GATE INPUT OUT
IEC04000410 V2 EN
Figure 445: GATE function block
Table 523: GATE Input signals
Name Type Default Description INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input to gate
Table 524: GATE Output signals
Name Type Description OUT BOOLEAN Output from gate
Table 525: GATE Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 14 Logic
879 Technical reference manual
14.3.12 Settable timer function block TIMERSET The Settable timer function block (TIMERSET) timer has outputs for delayed input signal at drop-out and at pick-up. The timer has a settable time delay. It also has an Operation setting /Enabled, /Disabled that controls the operation of the timer.
IEC04000411-2-en.vsd
TIMERSET INPUT ON
OFF
IEC04000411 V2 EN
Figure 446: TIMERSET function block
Table 526: TIMERSET Input signals
Name Type Default Description INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input to timer
Table 527: TIMERSET Output signals
Name Type Description ON BOOLEAN Output from timer, pickup delay
OFF BOOLEAN Output from timer, dropout delay
Table 528: TIMERSET Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
t 0.000 — 90000.000 s 0.001 0.000 Delay for settable timer n
14.3.13 Technical data Table 529: Configurable logic blocks
Logic block Quantity with cycle time Range or value Accuracy fast medium normal
LogicAND 60 60 160 — —
LogicOR 60 60 160 — —
LogicXOR 10 10 20 — —
LogicInverter 30 30 80 — —
LogicSRMemory 10 10 20 — —
LogicRSMemory 10 10 20 — —
Table continues on next page
Section 14 1MRK505222-UUS C Logic
880 Technical reference manual
Logic block Quantity with cycle time Range or value Accuracy fast medium normal
LogicGate 10 10 20 — —
LogicTimer 10 10 20 (0.000 90000.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
LogicPulseTimer 10 10 20 (0.000 90000.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
LogicTimerSet 10 10 20 (0.000 90000.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
LogicLoopDelay 10 10 20 (0.000 90000.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Trip Matrix Logic 6 6 — — —
Boolean 16 to Integer 4 4 8 — —
Boolean 16 to integer with Logic Node
4 4 8 — —
Integer to Boolean 16 4 4 8 — —
Integer to Boolean 16 with Logic Node
4 4 8 — —
14.4 Fixed signal function block FXDSIGN
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Fixed signals FXDSIGN — —
The Fixed signals function (FXDSIGN) generates a number of pre-set (fixed) signals that can be used in the configuration of an IED, either for forcing the unused inputs in other function blocks to a certain level/value, or for creating certain logic.
14.4.1 Principle of operation There are eight outputs from FXDSIGN function block:
OFF is a boolean signal, fixed to OFF (boolean 0) value ON is a boolean signal, fixed to ON (boolean 1) value INTZERO is an integer number, fixed to integer value 0 INTONE is an integer number, fixed to integer value 1 INTALONE is an integer value FFFF (hex) REALZERO is a floating point real number, fixed to 0.0 value
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 14 Logic
881 Technical reference manual
STRNULL is a string, fixed to an empty string (null) value ZEROSMPL is a channel index, fixed to 0 value GRP_OFF is a group signal, fixed to 0 value
14.4.2 Function block FXDSIGN
OFF ON
INTZERO INTONE
INTALONE REALZERO
STRNULL ZEROSMPL
GRP_OFF
IEC05000445-3-en.vsd IEC05000445 V3 EN
Figure 447: FXDSIGN function block
14.4.3 Input and output signals Table 530: FXDSIGN Output signals
Name Type Description OFF BOOLEAN Boolean signal fixed off
ON BOOLEAN Boolean signal fixed on
INTZERO INTEGER Integer signal fixed zero
INTONE INTEGER Integer signal fixed one
INTALONE INTEGER Integer signal fixed all ones
REALZERO REAL Real signal fixed zero
STRNULL STRING String signal with no characters
ZEROSMPL GROUP SIGNAL Channel id for zero sample
GRP_OFF GROUP SIGNAL Group signal fixed off
14.4.4 Setting parameters The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.
Section 14 1MRK505222-UUS C Logic
882 Technical reference manual
14.5 Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Boolean 16 to integer conversion B16I — —
14.5.1 Introduction Boolean 16 to integer conversion function (B16I) is used to transform a set of 16 binary (logical) signals into an integer.
14.5.2 Operation principle The Boolean 16 to integer conversion function (B16I) will transfer a combination of up to 16 binary inputs INx where 1×16 to an integer. Each INx represents a value according to the table below from 0 to 32768. This follows the general formula: INx = 2x-1 where 1×16. The sum of all the values on the activated INx will be available on the output OUT as a sum of the values of all the inputs INx that are activated. OUT is an integer. When all INx where 1×16 are activated that is = Boolean 1 it corresponds to that integer 65535 is available on the output OUT. B16I function is designed for receiving up to 16 booleans input locally. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will freeze the output at the last value.
Values of each of the different OUTx from function block B16I for 1×16.
The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the output OUT on the function block B16I
Name of input Type Default Description Value when activated
Value when deactivated
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 1 0
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 2 0
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 4 0
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 8 0
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 16 0
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 32 0
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7 64 0
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8 128 0
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9 256 0
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10 512 0
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 14 Logic
883 Technical reference manual
Name of input Type Default Description Value when activated
Value when deactivated
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11 1024 0
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12 2048 0
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13 4096 0
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14 8192 0
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15 16384 0
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16 32768 0
The sum of the numbers in column Value when activated when all INx (where 1×16) are active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest boolean value that can be converted to an integer by the B16I function block.
14.5.3 Function block
IEC07000128-2-en.vsd
B16I BLOCK IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8 IN9 IN10 IN11 IN12 IN13 IN14 IN15 IN16
OUT
IEC07000128 V2 EN
Figure 448: B16I function block
14.5.4 Input and output signals Table 531: B16I Input signals
Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4
Table continues on next page
Section 14 1MRK505222-UUS C Logic
884 Technical reference manual
Name Type Default Description IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16
Table 532: B16I Output signals
Name Type Description OUT INTEGER Output value
14.5.5 Setting parameters The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.
14.6 Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with logic node representation B16IFCVI
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation
B16IFCVI — —
14.6.1 Introduction Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation function (B16IFCVI) is used to transform a set of 16 binary (logical) signals into an integer.
B16IFCVI can receive remote values via IEC 61850 depending on the operator position input (PSTO).
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 14 Logic
885 Technical reference manual
14.6.2 Operation principle The Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation function (BTIGAPC) will transfer a combination of up to 16 binary inputs INx where 1×16 to an integer. Each INx represents a value according to the table below from 0 to 32768. This follows the general formula: INx = 2x-1 where 1×16. The sum of all the values on the activated INx will be available on the output OUT as a sum of the values of all the inputs INx that are activated. OUT is an integer. When all INx where 1×16 are activated that is = Boolean 1 it corresponds to that integer 65535 is available on the output OUT. The BTIGAPC function is designed for receiving the integer input from a station computer — for example, over IEC 61850. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will freeze the logical outputs at the last value.
Values of each of the different OUTx from function block BTIGAPC for 1×16.
The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the output OUT on the function block BTIGAPC.
Name of input Type Default Description Value when activated
Value when deactivated
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 1 0
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 2 0
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 4 0
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 8 0
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 16 0
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 32 0
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7 64 0
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8 128 0
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9 256 0
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10 512 0
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11 1024 0
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12 2048 0
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13 4096 0
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14 8192 0
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15 16384 0
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16 32768 0
The sum of the numbers in column Value when activated when all INx (where 1×16) are active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest boolean value that can be converted to an integer by the BTIGAPC function block.
Section 14 1MRK505222-UUS C Logic
886 Technical reference manual
14.6.3 Function block B16IFCVI
BLOCK IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8 IN9 IN10 IN11 IN12 IN13 IN14 IN15 IN16
OUT
IEC09000624-1-en.vsd IEC09000624 V1 EN
Figure 449: B16IFCVI function block
14.6.4 Input and output signals Table 533: B16IFCVI Input signals
Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 14 Logic
887 Technical reference manual
Table 534: B16IFCVI Output signals
Name Type Description OUT INTEGER Output value
14.6.5 Setting parameters The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.
14.7 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion IB16
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16 — —
14.7.1 Introduction Integer to boolean 16 conversion function (IB16) is used to transform an integer into a set of 16 binary (logical) signals.
14.7.2 Operation principle With integer 15 on the input INP the OUT1 = OUT2 = OUT3= OUT4 =1 and the remaining OUTx = 0 for (5×16).
OUTx represents a value when activated. The value of each of the OUTx is in accordance with the table IB16_1. When not activated the OUTx has the value 0.
In the above example when integer 15 is on the input INP the OUT1 has a value =1, OUT2 has a value =2, OUT3 has a value =4 and OUT4 has a value =8. The sum of these OUTx is equal to 1 + 2 + 4 + 8 = 15.
This follows the general formulae: The sum of the values of all OUTx = 2x-1 where 1×16 will be equal to the integer value on the input INP.
The Integer to Boolean 16 conversion function (IB16) will transfer an integer with a value between 0 to 65535 connected to the input INP to a combination of activated outputs OUTx where 1×16. The sum of the values of all OUTx will then be equal to the integer on input INP. The values of the different OUTx are according to the table below. When an OUTx is not activated, its value is 0.
Section 14 1MRK505222-UUS C Logic
888 Technical reference manual
When all OUTx where 1×16 are activated that is = Boolean 1 it corresponds to that integer 65535 is connected to input INP. The IB16 function is designed for receiving the integer input locally. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will freeze the logical outputs at the last value.
Values of each of the different OUTx from function block IB16 for 1×16.
The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the output OUT on the function block IB16.
Name of OUTx Type Description Value when activated
Value when deactivated
OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1 1 0
OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2 2 0
OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3 4 0
OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4 8 0
OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5 16 0
OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6 32 0
OUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7 64 0
OUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8 128 0
OUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9 256 0
OUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10 512 0
OUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11 1024 0
OUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12 2048 0
OUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13 4096 0
OUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14 8192 0
OUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15 16384 0
OUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16 32768 0
The sum of the numbers in column Value when activated when all OUTx (where x = 1 to 16) are active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest integer that can be converted by the IB16 function block.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 14 Logic
889 Technical reference manual
14.7.3 Function block
ANSI06000501-1-en.vsd
IB16 BLOCK INP
OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8 OUT9
OUT10 OUT11 OUT12 OUT13 OUT14 OUT15 OUT16
ANSI06000501 V1 EN
Figure 450: IB16 function block
14.7.4 Input and output signals Table 535: IB16 Input signals
Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INP INTEGER 0 INP
Table 536: IB16 Output signals
Name Type Description OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1
OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2
OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3
OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4
OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5
OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6
OUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7
OUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8
OUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9
OUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10
OUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11
OUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12
OUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13
Table continues on next page
Section 14 1MRK505222-UUS C Logic
890 Technical reference manual
Name Type Description OUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14
OUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15
OUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16
14.7.5 Setting parameters The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.
14.8 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation IB16FCVB
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Integer to boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation
IB16FCVB — —
14.8.1 Introduction Integer to boolean conversion with logic node representation function (IB16FCVB) is used to transform an integer to 16 binary (logic) signals.
IB16FCVB function can receive remote values over IEC61850 depending on the operator position input (PSTO).
14.8.2 Operation principle With integer 15 on the input INP the OUT1 = OUT2 = OUT3= OUT4 =1 and the remaining OUTx = 0 for (5×16).
OUTx represents a value when activated. The value of each of the OUTx is in accordance with the table ITBGAPC_1. When not activated the OUTx has the value 0.
In the above example when integer 15 is on the input INP the OUT1 has a value =1, OUT2 has a value =2, OUT3 has a value =4 and OUT4 has a value =8. The sum of these OUTx is equal to 1 + 2 + 4 + 8 = 15.
This follows the general formulae: The sum of the values of all OUTx = 2x-1 where 1×16 will be equal to the integer value on the input INP.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 14 Logic
891 Technical reference manual
The Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation function (ITBGAPC) will transfer an integer with a value between 0 to 65535 connected to the input INP to a combination of activated outputs OUTx where 1×16. The sum of the values of all OUTx will then be equal to the integer on input INP. The values of the different OUTx are according to the table below. When an OUTx is not activated, its value is 0.
When all OUTx where 1×16 are activated that is = Boolean 1 it corresponds to that integer 65535 is connected to input INP. The ITBGAPC function is designed for receiving the integer input from a station computer — for example, over IEC 61850. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will freeze the logical outputs at the last value.
Values of each of the different OUTx from function block ITBGAPC for 1×16.
The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the output OUT on the function block ITBGAPC.
Table 537: Output signals
Name of OUTx Type Description Value when activated
Value when deactivated
OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1 1 0
OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2 2 0
OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3 4 0
OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4 8 0
OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5 16 0
OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6 32 0
OUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7 64 0
OUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8 128 0
OUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9 256 0
OUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10 512 0
OUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11 1024 0
OUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12 2048 0
OUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13 4096 0
OUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14 8192 0
OUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15 16384 0
OUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16 32768 0
The sum of the numbers in column Value when activated when all OUTx (where x = 1 to 16) are active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest integer that can be converted by the ITBGAPC function block.
Section 14 1MRK505222-UUS C Logic
892 Technical reference manual
The operator position input (PSTO) determines the operator place. The integer number can be written to the block while in Remote. If PSTO is in Off or Local, then no change is applied to the outputs.
14.8.3 Function block IB16FCVB
BLOCK PSTO
OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8 OUT9
OUT10 OUT11 OUT12 OUT13 OUT14 OUT15 OUT16
IEC09000399-1-en.vsd IEC09000399 V1 EN
Figure 451: IB16FCVB function block
14.8.4 Input and output signals Table 538: IB16FCVB Input signals
Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 1 Operator place selection
Table 539: IB16FCVB Output signals
Name Type Description OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1
OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2
OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3
OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4
OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5
OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6
OUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7
OUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 14 Logic
893 Technical reference manual
Name Type Description OUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9
OUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10
OUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11
OUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12
OUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13
OUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14
OUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15
OUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16
14.8.5 Setting parameters This function does not have any setting parameters.
Section 14 1MRK505222-UUS C Logic
894 Technical reference manual
Section 15 Monitoring
About this chapter This chapter describes the functions that handle measurements, events and disturbances. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals, and technical data are included for each function.
15.1 Measurements
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Measurements CVMMXN
P, Q, S, I, U, f
SYMBOL-RR V1 EN
—
Phase current measurement CMMXU
I
SYMBOL-SS V1 EN
—
Phase-phase voltage measurement VMMXU
U
SYMBOL-UU V1 EN
—
Current sequence component measurement
CMSQI
I1, I2, I0
SYMBOL-VV V1 EN
—
Voltage sequence measurement VMSQI
U1, U2, U0
SYMBOL-TT V1 EN
—
Phase-neutral voltage measurement VNMMXU
U
SYMBOL-UU V1 EN
—
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 15 Monitoring
895 Technical reference manual
15.1.1 Introduction Measurement functions is used for power system measurement, supervision and reporting to the local HMI, monitoring tool within PCM600 or to station level for example, via IEC 61850. The possibility to continuously monitor measured values of active power, reactive power, currents, voltages, frequency, power factor etc. is vital for efficient production, transmission and distribution of electrical energy. It provides to the system operator fast and easy overview of the present status of the power system. Additionally, it can be used during testing and commissioning of protection and control IEDs in order to verify proper operation and connection of instrument transformers (CTs and VTs). During normal service by periodic comparison of the measured value from the IED with other independent meters the proper operation of the IED analog measurement chain can be verified. Finally, it can be used to verify proper direction orientation for distance or directional overcurrent protection function.
The available measured values of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits that is, low-low limit, low limit, high limit and high-high limit. A zero clamping reduction is also supported, that is, the measured value below a settable limit is forced to zero which reduces the impact of noise in the inputs.
Dead-band supervision can be used to report measured signal value to station level when change in measured value is above set threshold limit or time integral of all changes since the last time value updating exceeds the threshold limit. Measure value can also be based on periodic reporting.
The measurement function, CVMMXN, provides the following power system quantities:
P, Q and S: three phase active, reactive and apparent power PF: power factor V: phase-to-phase voltage magnitude I: phase current magnitude F: power system frequency
Main menu/Measurement/Monitoring/Service values/CVMMXN
The measuring functions CMMXU, VNMMXU and VMMXU provide physical quantities:
I: phase currents (magnitude and angle) (CMMXU) V: voltages (phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltage, magnitude and angle)
(VMMXU, VNMMXU)
Section 15 1MRK505222-UUS C Monitoring
896 Technical reference manual
It is possible to calibrate the measuring function above to get better then class 0.5 presentation. This is accomplished by angle and magnitude compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and at 100% of rated voltage.
The power system quantities provided, depends on the actual hardware, (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
The measuring functions CMSQI and VMSQI provide sequence component quantities:
I: sequence currents (positive, zero, negative sequence, magnitude and angle) V: sequence voltages (positive, zero and negative sequence, magnitude and angle).
The CVMMXN function calculates three-phase power quantities by using fundamental frequency phasors (DFT values) of the measured current respectively voltage signals. The measured power quantities are available either, as instantaneously calculated quantities or, averaged values over a period of time (low pass filtered) depending on the selected settings.
15.1.2 Principle of operation
15.1.2.1 Measurement supervision
The protection, control, and monitoring IEDs have functionality to measure and further process information for currents and voltages obtained from the pre-processing blocks. The number of processed alternate measuring quantities depends on the type of IED and built-in options.
The information on measured quantities is available for the user at different locations:
Locally by means of the local HMI Remotely using the monitoring tool within PCM600 or over the station bus Internally by connecting the analog output signals to the Disturbance Report function
Phase angle reference All phase angles are presented in relation to a defined reference channel. The General setting parameter PhaseAngleRef defines the reference, see section «Analog inputs».
Zero point clamping Measured value below zero point clamping limit is forced to zero. This allows the noise in the input signal to be ignored. The zero point clamping limit is a general setting (XZeroDb where X equals S, P, Q, PF, V, I, F, IA, IB, IC, VA, VB, VC, VAB, VBC, VCA, I1, I2, 3I0, V1, V2 or 3V0). Observe that this measurement supervision
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 15 Monitoring
897 Technical reference manual
zero point clamping might be overridden by the zero point clamping used for the measurement values within CVMMXU.
Continuous monitoring of the measured quantity Users can continuously monitor the measured quantity available in each function block by means of four defined operating thresholds, see figure 452. The monitoring has two different modes of operating:
Overfunction, when the measured current exceeds the High limit (XHiLim) or High- high limit (XHiHiLim) pre-set values
Underfunction, when the measured current decreases under the Low limit (XLowLim) or Low-low limit (XLowLowLim) pre-set values.
X_RANGE is illustrated in figure 452.
en05000657.vsd
X_RANGE= 1
X_RANGE = 3
X_RANGE=0
Hysteresis
High-high limit
High limit
Low limit
Low-low limit
X_RANGE=2
X_RANGE=4
Y
tX_RANGE=0
IEC05000657 V1 EN
Figure 452: Presentation of operating limits
Each analog output has one corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4 (0: Normal, 1: High limit exceeded, 3: High- high limit exceeded, 2: below Low limit and 4: below Low-low limit). The output may be connected to a measurement expander block (XP (RANGE_XP)) to get measurement supervision as binary signals.
The logical value of the functional output signals changes according to figure 452.
The user can set the hysteresis (XLimHyst), which determines the difference between the operating and reset value at each operating point, in wide range for each measuring channel separately. The hysteresis is common for all operating values within one channel.
Section 15 1MRK505222-UUS C Monitoring
898 Technical reference manual
Actual value of the measured quantity The actual value of the measured quantity is available locally and remotely. The measurement is continuous for each measured quantity separately, but the reporting of the value to the higher levels depends on the selected reporting mode. The following basic reporting modes are available:
Cyclic reporting (Cyclic) Magnitude dead-band supervision (Dead band) Integral dead-band supervision (Int deadband)
Cyclic reporting The cyclic reporting of measured value is performed according to chosen setting (XRepTyp). The measuring channel reports the value independent of magnitude or integral dead-band reporting.
In addition to the normal cyclic reporting the IED also report spontaneously when measured value passes any of the defined threshold limits.
en05000500.vsd
Va lu
e 1
Y
t
Va lu
e 2
Va lu
e 3
Va lu
e 4
Value Reported (1st)
Value Reported
Va lu
e 5
Value Reported
Y1
Y2
Y5
Value Reported Value Reported
Y3
Y4
(*)Set value for t: XDbRepInt
t (*) t (*) t (*) t (*)
IEC05000500 V1 EN
Figure 453: Periodic reporting
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 15 Monitoring
899 Technical reference manual
Magnitude dead-band supervision If a measuring value is changed, compared to the last reported value, and the change is larger than the Y pre-defined limits that are set by user (XZeroDb), then the measuring channel reports the new value to a higher level, if this is detected by a new measured value. This limits the information flow to a minimum necessary. Figure 454 shows an example with the magnitude dead-band supervision. The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the values are evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle from each other.
99000529.vsd
Y
t
Value Reported (1st)
Value Reported Value Reported
Y1
Y2
Y3
DY DY
DY DY
DY DY
Value Reported
IEC99000529 V1 EN
Figure 454: Magnitude dead-band supervision reporting
After the new value is reported, the Y limits for dead-band are automatically set around it. The new value is reported only if the measured quantity changes more than defined by the Y set limits.
Integral dead-band reporting The measured value is reported if the time integral of all changes exceeds the pre-set limit (XDbRepInt), figure 455, where an example of reporting with integral dead-band supervision is shown. The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the values are evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle from each other.
The last value reported, Y1 in figure 455 serves as a basic value for further measurement. A difference is calculated between the last reported and the newly measured value and is multiplied by the time increment (discrete integral). The
Section 15 1MRK505222-UUS C Monitoring
900 Technical reference manual
absolute values of these integral values are added until the pre-set value is exceeded. This occurs with the value Y2 that is reported and set as a new base for the following measurements (as well as for the values Y3, Y4 and Y5).
The integral dead-band supervision is particularly suitable for monitoring signals with small variations that can last for relatively long periods.
99000530.vsd
Y
t
Value Reported (1st)
Y1
Value Reported
A1Y2
Value Reported
Y3
Y4
A Value Reported
A2
Y5 A3
A4 A5 A7
A6
Value Reported
A2 >= pre-set value
A1 >= pre-set valueA >=
pre-set value A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 >= pre-set value
IEC99000530 V1 EN
Figure 455: Reporting with integral dead-band supervision
15.1.2.2 Measurements CVMMXN
Mode of operation The measurement function must be connected to three-phase current and three-phase voltage input in the configuration tool (group signals), but it is capable to measure and calculate above mentioned quantities in nine different ways depending on the available VT inputs connected to the IED. The end user can freely select by a parameter setting, which one of the nine available measuring modes shall be used within the function. Available options are summarized in the following table:
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 15 Monitoring
901 Technical reference manual
Set value for parameter Mode
Formula used for complex, three- phase power calculation
Formula used for voltage and current magnitude calculation
Comment
1 A, B, C * * *
A A B B C CS V I V I V I= + + EQUATION1561 V1 EN
( ) ( )
/ 3
/ 3
A B C
A B C
V V V V
I I I I
= + +
= + +
EQUATION1562 V1 EN
Used when three phase-to-ground voltages are available
2 Arone * *
AB A BC CS V I V I= —
EQUATION1563 V1 EN (Equation 160)
( ) ( )
/ 2
/ 2
AB BC
A C
V V V
I I I
= +
= +
EQUATION1564 V1 EN (Equation 161)
Used when three two phase-to- phase voltages are available
3 PosSeq *3 PosSeq PosSeqS V I=
EQUATION1565 V1 EN (Equation 162)
3 PosSeq
PosSeq
V V
I I
=
=
EQUATION1566 V1 EN (Equation 163)
Used when only symmetrical three phase power shall be measured
4 AB ( )* *
AB A BS V I I= —
EQUATION1567 V1 EN (Equation 164) ( ) / 2
AB
A B
V V
I I I
=
= +
EQUATION1568 V1 EN (Equation 165)
Used when only VAB phase-to- phase voltage is available
5 BC ( )* *
BC B CS V I I= —
EQUATION1569 V1 EN (Equation 166) ( ) / 2
BC
B C
V V
I I I
=
= +
EQUATION1570 V1 EN (Equation 167)
Used when only VBC phase-to- phase voltage is available
6 CA ( )* *
CA C AS V I I= —
EQUATION1571 V1 EN (Equation 168) ( ) / 2
CA
C A
V V
I I I
=
= +
EQUATION1572 V1 EN (Equation 169)
Used when only VCA phase-to- phase voltage is available
7 A *3 A AS V I=
EQUATION1573 V1 EN (Equation 170)
3 A
A
V V
I I
=
=
EQUATION1574 V1 EN (Equation 171)
Used when only VA phase-to- ground voltage is available
Table continues on next page
Section 15 1MRK505222-UUS C Monitoring
902 Technical reference manual
Set value for parameter Mode
Formula used for complex, three- phase power calculation
Formula used for voltage and current magnitude calculation
Comment
8 B *3 B BS V I=
EQUATION1575 V1 EN (Equation 172)
3 B
B
V V
I I
=
=
EQUATION1576 V1 EN (Equation 173)
Used when only VB phase-to- ground voltage is available
9 C *3 C CS V I=
EQUATION1577 V1 EN (Equation 174)
3 C
C
V V
I I
=
=
EQUATION1578 V1 EN (Equation 175)
Used when only VC phase-to- ground voltage is available
* means complex conjugated value
It shall be noted that only in the first two operating modes that is, 1 & 2 the measurement function calculates exact three-phase power. In other operating modes that is, from 3 to 9 it calculates the three-phase power under assumption that the power system is fully symmetrical. Once the complex apparent power is calculated then the P, Q, S, & PF are calculated in accordance with the following formulas:
Re( )=P S EQUATION1403 V1 EN (Equation 176)
Im( )=Q S EQUATION1404 V1 EN (Equation 177)
2 2= = +S S P Q
EQUATION1405 V1 EN (Equation 178)
cos PPF Sj= =
EQUATION1406 V1 EN (Equation 179)
Additionally to the power factor value the two binary output signals from the function are provided which indicates the angular relationship between current and voltage phasors. Binary output signal ILAG is set to one when current phasor is lagging behind voltage phasor. Binary output signal ILEAD is set to one when current phasor is leading the voltage phasor.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 15 Monitoring
903 Technical reference manual
Each analog output has a corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section «Measurement supervision».
Calibration of analog inputs Measured currents and voltages used in the CVMMXN function can be calibrated to get class 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by magnitude and angle compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see example in figure 456.
100305
IMagComp5
IMagComp30
IMagComp100
-10
+10
Magnitude compensation% of In
Measured current
% of In
0-5%: Constant 5-30-100%: Linear >100%: Constant
100305
IAngComp5 IAngComp30
IAngComp100
-10
+10
Angle compensation
Degrees
Measured current
% of In
ANSI05000652_3_en.vsd ANSI05000652 V3 EN
Figure 456: Calibration curves
The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and the magnitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.
Low pass filtering In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possible to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for P, Q, S, V, I and power factor. This will make slower measurement response to the step changes in
Section 15 1MRK505222-UUS C Monitoring
904 Technical reference manual
the measured quantity. Filtering is performed in accordance with the following recursive formula:
(1 )Old CalculatedX k X k X= + — EQUATION1407 V1 EN (Equation 180)
where:
X is a new measured value (that is P, Q, S, V, I or PF) to be given out from the function
XOld is the measured value given from the measurement function in previous execution cycle
XCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle
k is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties
Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is immediately given out without any filtering (that is, without any additional delay). When k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. Appropriate value of k shall be determined separately for every application. Some typical value for k =0.14.
Zero point clamping In order to avoid erroneous measurements when either current or voltage signal is not present, it is possible for the end user to set the magnitudeIGenZeroDb level for current and voltage measurement VGenZeroDb is forced to zero. When either current or voltage measurement is forced to zero automatically the measured values for power (P, Q and S) and power factor are forced to zero as well. Since the measurement supervision functionality, included in CVMMXN, is using these values the zero clamping will influence the subsequent supervision (observe the possibility to do zero point clamping within measurement supervision, see section «Measurement supervision»).
Compensation facility In order to compensate for small magnitude and angular errors in the complete measurement chain (CT error, VT error, IED input transformer errors and so on.) it is possible to perform on site calibration of the power measurement. This is achieved by setting the complex constant which is then internally used within the function to multiply the calculated complex apparent power S. This constant is set as magnitude (setting parameter PowMagFact, default value 1.000) and angle (setting parameter PowAngComp, default value 0.0 degrees). Default values for these two parameters are done in such way that they do not influence internally calculated value (complex constant has default value 1). In this way calibration, for specific operating range (for example, around rated power) can be done at site. However, to perform this calibration it is necessary to have an external power meter with high accuracy class available.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 15 Monitoring
905 Technical reference manual
Directionality If CT grounding parameter is set as described in section «Analog inputs», active and reactive power will be measured always towards the protected object. This is shown in the following figure 457.
Busbar
Protected Object
P Q
ANSI05000373_2_en.vsd
52
IED
ANSI05000373 V2 EN
Figure 457: Internal IED directionality convention for P & Q measurements
Practically, it means that active and reactive power will have positive values when they flow from the busbar towards the protected object and they will have negative values when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar.
In some application, for example, when power is measured on the secondary side of the power transformer it might be desirable, from the end client point of view, to have actually opposite directional convention for active and reactive power measurements. This can be easily achieved by setting parameter PowAngComp to value of 180.0 degrees. With such setting the active and reactive power will have positive values when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar.
Frequency Frequency is actually not calculated within measurement block. It is simply obtained from the pre-processing block and then just given out from the measurement block as an output.
15.1.2.3 Phase current measurement CMMXU
The Phase current measurement (CMMXU) function must be connected to three-phase current input in the configuration tool to be operable. Currents handled in the function can be calibrated to get better then class 0.5 measuring accuracy for internal use, on the
Section 15 1MRK505222-UUS C Monitoring
906 Technical reference manual
outputs and IEC 61850. This is achieved by magnitude and angle compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current. The compensation below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see figure 456.
Phase currents (magnitude and angle) are available on the outputs and each magnitude output has a corresponding supervision level output (Ix_RANGE). The supervision output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section «Measurement supervision».
15.1.2.4 Phase-phase and phase-neutral voltage measurements VMMXU, VNMMXU
The voltage function must be connected to three-phase voltage input in the configuration tool to be operable. Voltages are handled in the same way as currents when it comes to class 0.5 calibrations, see above.
The voltages (phase or phase-phase voltage, magnitude and angle) are available on the outputs and each magnitude output has a corresponding supervision level output (Vxy_RANG). The supervision output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section «Measurement supervision».
15.1.2.5 Voltage and current sequence measurements VMSQI, CMSQI
The measurement functions must be connected to three-phase current (CMSQI) or voltage (VMSQI) input in the configuration tool to be operable. No outputs, other than X_RANG, are calculated within the measuring blocks and it is not possible to calibrate the signals. Input signals are obtained from the pre-processing block and transferred to corresponding output.
Positive, negative and three times zero sequence quantities are available on the outputs (voltage and current, magnitude and angle). Each magnitude output has a corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section «Measurement supervision».
15.1.3 Function block The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 15 Monitoring
907 Technical reference manual
CVMMXN I3P* U3P*
S S_RANGE
P_INST P
P_RANGE Q_INST
Q Q_RANGE
PF PF_RANGE
ILAG ILEAD
U U_RANGE
I I_RANGE
F F_RANGE
IEC10000016-1-en.vsd IEC10000016 V1 EN
Figure 458: CVMMXN function block
ANSI05000699-2-en.vsd
CMMXU I3P* I_A
IA_RANGE IA_ANGL
I_B IB_RANGE
IB_ANGL I_C
IC_RANGE IC_ANGL
ANSI05000699 V2 EN
Figure 459: CMMXU function block
ANSI09000850-1-en.vsd
VNMMXU V3P* V_A
VA_RANGE VA_ANGL
V_B VB_RANGE
VB_ANGL V_C
VC_RANGE VC_ANGL
ANSI09000850 V1 EN
Figure 460: VNMMXU function block
Section 15 1MRK505222-UUS C Monitoring
908 Technical reference manual
ANSI05000701-2-en.vsd
VMMXU V3P* V_AB
VAB_RANG VAB_ANGL
V_BC VBC_RANG VBC_ANGL
V_CA VCA_RANG VCA_ANGL
ANSI05000701 V2 EN
Figure 461: VMMXU function block
IEC05000703-2-en.vsd
CMSQI I3P* 3I0
3I0RANG 3I0ANGL
I1 I1RANG I1ANGL
I2 I2RANG I2ANGL
IEC05000703 V2 EN
Figure 462: CMSQI function block
ANSI05000704-2-en.vsd
VMSQI V3P* 3V0
3V0RANG 3V0ANGL
V1 V1RANG V1ANGL
V2 V2RANG V2ANGL
ANSI05000704 V2 EN
Figure 463: VMSQI function block
15.1.4 Input and output signals Table 540: CVMMXN Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Group signal for current input
V3P GROUP SIGNAL
— Group signal for voltage input
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 15 Monitoring
909 Technical reference manual
Table 541: CVMMXN Output signals
Name Type Description S REAL Apparent Power magnitude of deadband value
S_RANGE INTEGER Apparent Power range
P_INST REAL Active Power
P REAL Active Power magnitude of deadband value
P_RANGE INTEGER Active Power range
Q_INST REAL Reactive Power
Q REAL Reactive Power magnitude of deadband value
Q_RANGE INTEGER Reactive Power range
PF REAL Power Factor magnitude of deadband value
PF_RANGE INTEGER Power Factor range
ILAG BOOLEAN Current is lagging voltage
ILEAD BOOLEAN Current is leading voltage
V REAL Calculate voltage magnitude of deadband value
V_RANGE INTEGER Calcuate voltage range
I REAL Calculated current magnitude of deadband value
I_RANGE INTEGER Calculated current range
F REAL System frequency magnitude of deadband value
F_RANGE INTEGER System frequency range
Table 542: CMMXU Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Group connection abstract block 1
Table 543: CMMXU Output signals
Name Type Description I_A REAL Phase A current magnitude of reported value
IA_RANGE INTEGER Phase A current magnitude range
IA_ANGL REAL Phase A current magnitude angle
I_B REAL Phase B current magnitude of reported value
IB_RANGE INTEGER Phase B current magnitude range
IB_ANGL REAL Phase B current magnitude angle
I_C REAL Phase C current magnitude of reported value
IC_RANGE INTEGER Phase C current magnitude range
IC_ANGL REAL Phase C current magnitude angle
Section 15 1MRK505222-UUS C Monitoring
910 Technical reference manual
Table 544: VNMMXU Input signals
Name Type Default Description V3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Group connection abstract block 5
Table 545: VNMMXU Output signals
Name Type Description V_A REAL V_A Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
VA_RANGE INTEGER V_A Amplitude range
VA_ANGL REAL V_A Angle, magnitude of reported value
V_B REAL V_B Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
VB_RANGE INTEGER V_B Amplitude range
VB_ANGL REAL V_B Angle, magnitude of reported value
V_C REAL V_C Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
VC_RANGE INTEGER V_C Amplitude range
VC_ANGL REAL V_C Angle, magnitude of reported value
Table 546: VMMXU Input signals
Name Type Default Description V3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Group connection abstract block 2
Table 547: VMMXU Output signals
Name Type Description V_AB REAL VAB Reported magnitude value
VAB_RANG INTEGER VAB Magnitude range
VAB_ANGL REAL VAB Angle, magnitude of reported value
V_BC REAL VBC Reported magnitude value
VBC_RANG INTEGER VBC Magnitude range
VBC_ANGL REAL VBC Angle, magnitude of reported value
V_CA REAL VCA Reported magnitude value
VCA_RANG INTEGER VCA Magnitude range
VCA_ANGL REAL VCA Angle, magnitude of reported value
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 15 Monitoring
911 Technical reference manual
Table 548: CMSQI Input signals
Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Group connection abstract block 3
Table 549: CMSQI Output signals
Name Type Description 3I0 REAL 3I0 magnitude of reported value
3I0RANG INTEGER 3I0 Magnitude range
3I0ANGL REAL 3I0 Angle, magnitude of reported value
I1 REAL I1magnitude of reported value
I1RANG INTEGER I1 Magnitude range
I1ANGL REAL I1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
I2 REAL I2 Magnitude of reported value
I2RANG INTEGER I2 Magnitude range
I2ANGL REAL I2 Angle, magnitude of reported value
Table 550: VMSQI Input signals
Name Type Default Description V3P GROUP
SIGNAL — Group connection abstract block 4
Table 551: VMSQI Output signals
Name Type Description 3V0 REAL 3V0 Reported magnitude value
3V0RANG INTEGER 3V0 Magnitude range
3V0ANGL REAL 3V0 Magnitude angle
V1 REAL V1 Reported magnitude value
V1RANG INTEGER V1 Magnitude range
V1ANGL REAL V1 Magnitude angle
V2 REAL V2 Reported magnitude value
V2RANG INTEGER V2 Magnitude range
V2ANGL REAL V2 Magnitude angle
Section 15 1MRK505222-UUS C Monitoring
912 Technical reference manual
15.1.5 Setting parameters The available setting parameters of the measurement function (MMXU, MSQI) are depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
Table 552: CVMMXN Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description SLowLim 0.0 — 2000.0 %SB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of SBase
SLowLowLim 0.0 — 2000.0 %SB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of SBase
SMin 0.0 — 2000.0 %SB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of SBase
SMax 0.0 — 2000.0 %SB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of SBase
SRepTyp Cyclic Dead band Int deadband
— — Cyclic Reporting type
PMin -2000.0 — 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -200.0 Minimum value in % of SBase
PMax -2000.0 — 2000.0 %SB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of SBase
PRepTyp Cyclic Dead band Int deadband
— — Cyclic Reporting type
QMin -2000.0 — 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -200.0 Minimum value in % of SBase
QMax -2000.0 — 2000.0 %SB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of SBase
QRepTyp Cyclic Dead band Int deadband
— — Cyclic Reporting type
PFMin -1.000 — 1.000 — 0.001 -1.000 Minimum value
PFMax -1.000 — 1.000 — 0.001 1.000 Maximum value
PFRepTyp Cyclic Dead band Int deadband
— — Cyclic Reporting type
VMin 0.0 — 200.0 %VB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
VMax 0.0 — 200.0 %VB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
VRepTyp Cyclic Dead band Int deadband
— — Cyclic Reporting type
IMin 0.0 — 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
IMax 0.0 — 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
IRepTyp Cyclic Dead band Int deadband
— — Cyclic Reporting type
FrMin 0.000 — 100.000 Hz 0.001 0.000 Minimum value
FrMax 0.000 — 100.000 Hz 0.001 70.000 Maximum value
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 15 Monitoring
913 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description FrRepTyp Cyclic
Dead band Int deadband
— — Cyclic Reporting type
Operation Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
IBase 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Base setting for current values in A
VBase 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Base setting for voltage value in kV
SBase 0.05 — 200000.00 MVA 0.05 2080.00 Base setting for power values in MVA
Mode A, B, C Arone Pos Seq AB BC CA A B C
— — A, B, C Selection of measured current and voltage
PowMagFact 0.000 — 6.000 — 0.001 1.000 Magnitude factor to scale power calculations
PowAngComp -180.0 — 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Angle compensation for phase shift between measured I & V
k 0.000 — 1.000 — 0.001 0.000 Low pass filter coefficient for power measurement, V and I
Table 553: CVMMXN Non group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description SDbRepInt 1 — 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
SZeroDb 0 — 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range
SHiHiLim 0.0 — 2000.0 %SB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of SBase
SHiLim 0.0 — 2000.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of SBase
SLimHyst 0.000 — 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits)
PDbRepInt 1 — 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s
PZeroDb 0 — 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range
PHiHiLim -2000.0 — 2000.0 %SB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of SBase
PHiLim -2000.0 — 2000.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of SBase
PLowLim -2000.0 — 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -120.0 Low limit in % of SBase
PLowLowLim -2000.0 — 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -150.0 Low Low limit in % of SBase
PLimHyst 0.000 — 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits)
QDbRepInt 1 — 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s
Table continues on next page
Section 15 1MRK505222-UUS C Monitoring
914 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description QZeroDb 0 — 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range
QHiHiLim -2000.0 — 2000.0 %SB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of SBase
QHiLim -2000.0 — 2000.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of SBase
QLowLim -2000.0 — 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -120.0 Low limit in % of SBase
QLowLowLim -2000.0 — 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -150.0 Low Low limit in % of SBase
QLimHyst 0.000 — 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits)
PFDbRepInt 1 — 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s
PFZeroDb 0 — 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range
PFHiHiLim -1.000 — 1.000 — 0.001 1.000 High High limit (physical value)
PFHiLim -1.000 — 1.000 — 0.001 0.800 High limit (physical value)
PFLowLim -1.000 — 1.000 — 0.001 -0.800 Low limit (physical value)
PFLowLowLim -1.000 — 1.000 — 0.001 -1.000 Low Low limit (physical value)
PFLimHyst 0.000 — 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits)
VDbRepInt 1 — 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s
VZeroDb 0 — 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range
VHiHiLim 0.0 — 200.0 %VB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
VHiLim 0.0 — 200.0 %VB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
VLowLim 0.0 — 200.0 %VB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
VLowLowLim 0.0 — 200.0 %VB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
VLimHyst 0.000 — 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits)
IDbRepInt 1 — 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s
IZeroDb 0 — 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range
IHiHiLim 0.0 — 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
IHiLim 0.0 — 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
ILowLim 0.0 — 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
ILowLowLim 0.0 — 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
ILimHyst 0.000 — 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits)
FrDbRepInt 1 — 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s
FrZeroDb 0 — 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range
FrHiHiLim 0.000 — 100.000 Hz 0.001 65.000 High High limit (physical value)
FrHiLim 0.000 — 100.000 Hz 0.001 63.000 High limit (physical value)
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 15 Monitoring
915 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description FrLowLim 0.000 — 100.000 Hz 0.001 47.000 Low limit (physical value)
FrLowLowLim 0.000 — 100.000 Hz 0.001 45.000 Low Low limit (physical value)
FrLimHyst 0.000 — 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits)
VGenZeroDb 1 — 100 %VB 1 5 Zero point clamping in % of VBase
IGenZeroDb 1 — 100 %IB 1 5 Zero point clamping in % of IBase
VMagComp5 -10.000 — 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Magnitude factor to calibrate voltage at 5% of Vn
VMagComp30 -10.000 — 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Magnitude factor to calibrate voltage at 30% of Vn
VMagComp100 -10.000 — 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Magnitude factor to calibrate voltage at 100% of Vn
IMagComp5 -10.000 — 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 5% of In
IMagComp30 -10.000 — 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 30% of In
IMagComp100 -10.000 — 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 100% of In
IAngComp5 -10.000 — 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 5% of In
IAngComp30 -10.000 — 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 30% of In
IAngComp100 -10.000 — 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 100% of In
Table 554: CMMXU Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description IA_DbRepInt 1 — 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
Operation Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Disbled/Enabled operation
IBase 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Base setting for current level in A
IA_Max 0.000 — 10000000000.000
A 0.001 1000.000 Maximum value
IA_RepTyp Cyclic Dead band Int deadband
— — Cyclic Reporting type
IA_AngDbRepInt 1 — 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s
IB_DbRepInt 1 — 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s
IB_Max 0.000 — 10000000000.000
A 0.001 1000.000 Maximum value
Table continues on next page
Section 15 1MRK505222-UUS C Monitoring
916 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description IB_RepTyp Cyclic
Dead band Int deadband
— — Cyclic Reporting type
IB_AngDbRepInt 1 — 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s
IC_DbRepInt 1 — 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s
IC_Max 0.000 — 10000000000.000
A 0.001 1000.000 Maximum value
IC_RepTyp Cyclic Dead band Int deadband
— — Cyclic Reporting type
IC_AngDbRepInt 1 — 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s
Table 555: CMMXU Non group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description IA_ZeroDb 0 — 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range
IA_HiHiLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
A 0.001 900.000 High High limit (physical value)
IA_HiLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
A 0.001 800.000 High limit (physical value)
IMagComp5 -10.000 — 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 5% of In
IMagComp30 -10.000 — 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 30% of In
IA_LowLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
A 0.001 0.000 Low limit (physical value)
IA_LowLowLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
A 0.001 0.000 Low Low limit (physical value)
IMagComp100 -10.000 — 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 100% of In
IAngComp5 -10.000 — 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 5% of In
IA_Min 0.000 — 10000000000.000
A 0.001 0.000 Minimum value
IAngComp30 -10.000 — 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 30% of In
IAngComp100 -10.000 — 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 100% of In
IA_LimHys 0.000 — 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits
IB_ZeroDb 0 — 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range
IB_HiHiLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
A 0.001 900.000 High High limit (physical value)
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 15 Monitoring
917 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description IB_HiLim 0.000 —
10000000000.000 A 0.001 800.000 High limit (physical value)
IB_LowLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
A 0.001 0.000 Low limit (physical value)
IB_LowLowLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
A 0.001 0.000 Low Low limit (physical value)
IB_Min 0.000 — 10000000000.000
A 0.001 0.000 Minimum value
IB_LimHys 0.000 — 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits
IC_ZeroDb 0 — 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range
IC_HiHiLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
A 0.001 900.000 High High limit (physical value)
IC_HiLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
A 0.001 800.000 High limit (physical value)
IC_LowLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
A 0.001 0.000 Low limit (physical value)
IC_LowLowLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
A 0.001 0.000 Low Low limit (physical value)
IC_Min 0.000 — 10000000000.000
A 0.001 0.000 Minimum value
IC_LimHys 0.000 — 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits
Table 556: VNMMXU Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description VA_DbRepInt 1 — 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
Operation Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Disbled/Enabled operation
VBase 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Base setting for voltage level in kV
VA_Max 0.000 — 10000000000.000
V 0.001 300000.000 Maximum value
VA_RepTyp Cyclic Dead band Int deadband
— — Cyclic Reporting type
VA_LimHys 0.000 — 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits
VA_AnDbRepInt 1 — 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s
VB_DbRepInt 1 — 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s
Table continues on next page
Section 15 1MRK505222-UUS C Monitoring
918 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description VB_Max 0.000 —
10000000000.000 V 0.001 300000.000 Maximum value
VB_RepTyp Cyclic Dead band Int deadband
— — Cyclic Reporting type
VB_LimHys 0.000 — 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits
VB_AnDbRepInt 1 — 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s
VC_DbRepInt 1 — 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s
VC_Max 0.000 — 10000000000.000
V 0.001 300000.000 Maximum value
VC_RepTyp Cyclic Dead band Int deadband
— — Cyclic Reporting type
VC_LimHys 0.000 — 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits
VC_AnDbRepInt 1 — 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s
Table 557: VNMMXU Non group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description VA_ZeroDb 0 — 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range
VA_HiHiLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
V 0.001 260000.000 High High limit (physical value)
VA_HiLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
V 0.001 240000.000 High limit (physical value)
VA_LowLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
V 0.001 220000.000 Low limit (physical value)
VA_LowLowLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
V 0.001 200000.000 Low Low limit (physical value)
VMagComp100 -10.000 — 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Magnitude factor to calibrate voltage at 100% of Vn
VA_Min 0.000 — 10000000000.000
V 0.001 0.000 Minimum value
VB_ZeroDb 0 — 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range
VB_HiHiLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
V 0.001 260000.000 High High limit (physical value)
VB_HiLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
V 0.001 240000.000 High limit (physical value)
VB_LowLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
V 0.001 220000.000 Low limit (physical value)
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 15 Monitoring
919 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description VB_LowLowLim 0.000 —
10000000000.000 V 0.001 200000.000 Low Low limit (physical value)
VB_Min 0.000 — 10000000000.000
V 0.001 0.000 Minimum value
VC_ZeroDb 0 — 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range
VC_HiHiLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
V 0.001 260000.000 High High limit (physical value)
VC_HiLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
V 0.001 240000.000 High limit (physical value)
VC_LowLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
V 0.001 220000.000 Low limit (physical value)
VC_LowLowLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
V 0.001 200000.000 Low Low limit (physical value)
VC_Min 0.000 — 10000000000.000
V 0.001 0.000 Minimum value
Table 558: VMMXU Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description VAB_DbRepInt 1 — 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
Operation Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Disbled/Enabled operation
VBase 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Base setting for voltage level in kV
VAB_Max 0.000 — 10000000000.000
V 0.001 500000.000 Maximum value
VAB_RepTyp Cyclic Dead band Int deadband
— — Cyclic Reporting type
VAB_AnDbRepInt 1 — 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s
VBC_DbRepInt 1 — 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s
VBC_Max 0.000 — 10000000000.000
V 0.001 500000.000 Maximum value
VBC_RepTyp Cyclic Dead band Int deadband
— — Cyclic Reporting type
VBC_AnDbRepInt 1 — 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s
VCA_DbRepInt 1 — 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s
Table continues on next page
Section 15 1MRK505222-UUS C Monitoring
920 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description VCA_Max 0.000 —
10000000000.000 V 0.001 500000.000 Maximum value
VCA_RepTyp Cyclic Dead band Int deadband
— — Cyclic Reporting type
VCA_AnDbRepInt 1 — 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s
Table 559: VMMXU Non group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description VAB_ZeroDb 0 — 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range
VAB_HiHiLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
V 0.001 450000.000 High High limit (physical value)
VAB_HiLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
V 0.001 420000.000 High limit (physical value)
VAB_LowLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
V 0.001 380000.000 Low limit (physical value)
VAB_LowLowLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
V 0.001 350000.000 Low Low limit (physical value)
VMagComp100 -10.000 — 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Magnitude factor to calibrate voltage at 100% of Vn
VAB_Min 0.000 — 10000000000.000
V 0.001 0.000 Minimum value
VAB_LimHys 0.000 — 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits
VBC_ZeroDb 0 — 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range
VBC_HiHiLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
V 0.001 450000.000 High High limit (physical value)
VBC_HiLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
V 0.001 420000.000 High limit (physical value)
VBC_LowLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
V 0.001 380000.000 Low limit (physical value)
VBC_LowLowLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
V 0.001 350000.000 Low Low limit (physical value)
VBC_Min 0.000 — 10000000000.000
V 0.001 0.000 Minimum value
VBC_LimHys 0.000 — 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits
VCA_ZeroDb 0 — 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range
VCA_HiHiLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
V 0.001 450000.000 High High limit (physical value)
VCA_HiLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
V 0.001 420000.000 High limit (physical value)
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 15 Monitoring
921 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description VCA_LowLim 0.000 —
10000000000.000 V 0.001 380000.000 Low limit (physical value)
VCA_LowLowLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
V 0.001 350000.000 Low Low limit (physical value)
VCA_Min 0.000 — 10000000000.000
V 0.001 0.000 Minimum value
VCA_LimHys 0.000 — 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits
Table 560: CMSQI Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description 3I0DbRepInt 1 — 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
3I0Min 0.000 — 10000000000.000
A 0.001 0.000 Minimum value
3I0Max 0.000 — 10000000000.000
A 0.001 1000.000 Maximum value
3I0RepTyp Cyclic Dead band Int deadband
— — Cyclic Reporting type
3I0LimHys 0.000 — 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits
3I0AngDbRepInt 1 — 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s
Operation Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Disbled/Enabled operation
3I0AngMin -180.000 — 180.000 Deg 0.001 -180.000 Minimum value
3I0AngMax -180.000 — 180.000 Deg 0.001 180.000 Maximum value
3I0AngRepTyp Cyclic Dead band Int deadband
— — Cyclic Reporting type
I1DbRepInt 1 — 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s
I1Min 0.000 — 10000000000.000
A 0.001 0.000 Minimum value
I1Max 0.000 — 10000000000.000
A 0.001 1000.000 Maximum value
I1RepTyp Cyclic Dead band Int deadband
— — Cyclic Reporting type
I1AngDbRepInt 1 — 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s
I1AngMax -180.000 — 180.000 Deg 0.001 180.000 Maximum value
Table continues on next page
Section 15 1MRK505222-UUS C Monitoring
922 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description I1AngRepTyp Cyclic
Dead band Int deadband
— — Cyclic Reporting type
I2DbRepInt 1 — 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s
I2Min 0.000 — 10000000000.000
A 0.001 0.000 Minimum value
I2Max 0.000 — 10000000000.000
A 0.001 1000.000 Maximum value
I2RepTyp Cyclic Dead band Int deadband
— — Cyclic Reporting type
I2LimHys 0.000 — 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits
I2AngDbRepInt 1 — 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s
I2AngMin -180.000 — 180.000 Deg 0.001 -180.000 Minimum value
I2AngRepTyp Cyclic Dead band Int deadband
— — Cyclic Reporting type
Table 561: CMSQI Non group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description 3I0ZeroDb 0 — 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range
3I0HiHiLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
A 0.001 900.000 High High limit (physical value)
3I0HiLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
A 0.001 800.000 High limit (physical value)
3I0LowLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
A 0.001 0.000 Low limit (physical value)
3I0LowLowLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
A 0.001 0.000 Low Low limit (physical value)
3I0AngZeroDb 0 — 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range
I1ZeroDb 0 — 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range
I1HiHiLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
A 0.001 900.000 High High limit (physical value)
I1HiLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
A 0.001 800.000 High limit (physical value)
I1LowLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
A 0.001 0.000 Low limit (physical value)
I1LowLowLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
A 0.001 0.000 Low Low limit (physical value)
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 15 Monitoring
923 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description I1LimHys 0.000 — 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
I1AngZeroDb 0 — 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range
I1AngMin -180.000 — 180.000 Deg 0.001 -180.000 Minimum value
I2ZeroDb 0 — 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range
I2HiHiLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
A 0.001 900.000 High High limit (physical value)
I2HiLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
A 0.001 800.000 High limit (physical value)
I2LowLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
A 0.001 0.000 Low limit (physical value)
I2LowLowLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
A 0.001 0.000 Low Low limit (physical value)
I2AngZeroDb 0 — 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range
I2AngMax -180.000 — 180.000 Deg 0.001 180.000 Maximum value
Table 562: VMSQI Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description 3V0DbRepInt 1 — 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
3V0Min 0.000 — 10000000000.000
V 0.001 0.000 Minimum value
3V0Max 0.000 — 10000000000.000
V 0.001 300000.000 Maximum value
3V0RepTyp Cyclic Dead band Int deadband
— — Cyclic Reporting type
3V0LimHys 0.000 — 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits
3V0AngDbRepInt 1 — 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s
Operation Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Disbled/Enabled operation
3V0AngZeroDb 0 — 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range
3V0AngMin -180.000 — 180.000 Deg 0.001 -180.000 Minimum value
3V0AngMax -180.000 — 180.000 Deg 0.001 180.000 Maximum value
3V0AngRepTyp Cyclic Dead band Int deadband
— — Cyclic Reporting type
V1DbRepInt 1 — 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s
Table continues on next page
Section 15 1MRK505222-UUS C Monitoring
924 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description V1Min 0.000 —
10000000000.000 V 0.001 0.000 Minimum value
V1Max 0.000 — 10000000000.000
V 0.001 300000.000 Maximum value
V1RepTyp Cyclic Dead band Int deadband
— — Cyclic Reporting type
V1LimHys 0.000 — 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits
V1AngDbRepInt 1 — 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s
V2DbRepInt 1 — 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s
V2Min 0.000 — 10000000000.000
V 0.001 0.000 Minimum value
V2Max 0.000 — 10000000000.000
V 0.001 300000.000 Maximum value
V2RepTyp Cyclic Dead band Int deadband
— — Cyclic Reporting type
V2LimHys 0.000 — 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits
V2AngDbRepInt 1 — 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s
V2AngMin -180.000 — 180.000 Deg 0.001 -180.000 Minimum value
V2AngMax -180.000 — 180.000 Deg 0.001 180.000 Maximum value
V2AngRepTyp Cyclic Dead band Int deadband
— — Cyclic Reporting type
UAmpPreComp5 -10.000 — 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to pre-calibrate voltage at 5% of Ir
UAmpPreComp30 -10.000 — 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to pre-calibrate voltage at 30% of Ir
UAmpPreComp100 -10.000 — 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to pre-calibrate voltage at 100% of Ir
Table 563: VMSQI Non group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description 3V0ZeroDb 0 — 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range
3V0HiHiLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
V 0.001 260000.000 High High limit (physical value)
3V0HiLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
V 0.001 240000.000 High limit (physical value)
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 15 Monitoring
925 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description 3V0LowLim 0.000 —
10000000000.000 V 0.001 220000.000 Low limit (physical value)
3V0LowLowLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
V 0.001 200000.000 Low Low limit (physical value)
V1ZeroDb 0 — 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range
V1HiHiLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
V 0.001 260000.000 High High limit (physical value)
V1HiLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
V 0.001 240000.000 High limit (physical value)
V1LowLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
V 0.001 220000.000 Low limit (physical value)
V1LowLowLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
V 0.001 200000.000 Low Low limit (physical value)
V1AngZeroDb 0 — 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range
V1AngMin -180.000 — 180.000 Deg 0.001 -180.000 Minimum value
V1AngMax -180.000 — 180.000 Deg 0.001 180.000 Maximum value
V1AngRepTyp Cyclic Dead band Int deadband
— — Cyclic Reporting type
V2ZeroDb 0 — 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range
V2HiHiLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
V 0.001 260000.000 High High limit (physical value)
V2HiLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
V 0.001 240000.000 High limit (physical value)
V2LowLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
V 0.001 220000.000 Low limit (physical value)
V2LowLowLim 0.000 — 10000000000.000
V 0.001 200000.000 Low Low limit (physical value)
V2AngZeroDb 0 — 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range
15.1.6 Technical data Table 564: CVMMXN technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Frequency (0.95-1.05) fn 2.0 mHz
Voltage (0.1-1.5) Vn 0.5% of Vn at VVn 0.5% of V at V > Vn
Connected current (0.2-4.0) In 0.5% of In at I In 0.5% of I at I > In
Table continues on next page
Section 15 1MRK505222-UUS C Monitoring
926 Technical reference manual
Function Range or value Accuracy Active power, P 0.1 x Vn< V < 1.5 x Vn
0.2 x In < I < 4.0 x In 1.0% of Sn at S Sn 1.0% of S at S > Sn Conditions: 0.8 x Vn < V < 1.2 Vn 0.2 x In < I < 1.2 In
Reactive power, Q 0.1 x Vn< V < 1.5 x Vn 0.2 x In < I < 4.0 x In
Apparent power, S 0.1 x Vn < V < 1.5 x Vn 0.2 x In< I < 4.0 x In
Power factor, cos () 0.1 x Vn < V < 1.5 x Vn 0.2 x In< I < 4.0 x In
0.02
Table 565: CMMXU technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Current (0.1-4.0) In 0.2% of In at I 0.5 In
0.2% of I at I > 0.5 In
Phase angle (0.14.0) x In 0.5 at 0.2 In < I < 0.5 In 0.2 at 0.5 In I < 4.0 In
Table 566: VMMXU technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Voltage (10 to 300) V 0.3% of V at V 50 V
0.2% of V at V > 50 V
Phase angle (10 to 300) V 0.3 at V 50 V 0.2 at V > 50 V
Table 567: VNMMXU technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Voltage (10 to 300) V 0.3% of V at V 50 V
0.2% of V at V > 50 V
Phase angle (10 to 300) V 0.3 at V 50 V 0.2 at V > 50 V
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 15 Monitoring
927 Technical reference manual
Table 568: CMSQI technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Current positive sequence, I1 Three phase settings
(0.14.0) In 0.2% of In at I 0.5 In 0.2% of I at I > 0.5 In
Current zero sequence, 3I0 Three phase settings
(0.11.0) In 0.2% of In at I 0.5 In 0.2% of I at I > 0.5 In
Current negative sequence, I2 Three phase settings
(0.11.0) In 0.2% of In at I 0.5 In 0.2% of I at I > 0.5 In
Phase angle (0.14.0) In 0.5 at 0.2 In < I < 0.5 In 0.2 at 0.5 In I < 4.0 In
Table 569: VMSQI technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Voltage positive sequence, U1 (10 to 300) V 0.3% of V at V 50 V
0.2% of V at V > 50 V
Voltage zero sequence, 3U0 (10 to 300) V 0.3% of V at V 50 V 0.2% of V at V > 50 V
Voltage negative sequence, U2 (10 to 300) V 0.3% of V at V 50 V 0.2% of V at V > 50 V
Phase angle (10 to 300) V 0.3 at V 50 V 0.2 at V > 50 V
15.2 Event counter CNTGGIO
15.2.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850
identification IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Event counter CNTGGIO S00946 V1 EN
—
15.2.2 Introduction Event counter (CNTGGIO) has six counters which are used for storing the number of times each counter input has been activated.
Section 15 1MRK505222-UUS C Monitoring
928 Technical reference manual
15.2.3 Principle of operation Event counter (CNTGGIO) has six counter inputs. CNTGGIO stores how many times each of the inputs has been activated. The counter memory for each of the six inputs is updated, giving the total number of times the input has been activated, as soon as an input is activated.
To not risk that the flash memory is worn out due to too many writings, a mechanism for limiting the number of writings per time period is included in the product. This however gives as a result that it can take long time, up to several minutes, before a new value is stored in the flash memory. And if a new CNTGGIO value is not stored before auxiliary power interruption, it will be lost. CNTGGIO stored values in flash memory will however not be lost at an auxiliary power interruption.
The function block also has an input BLOCK. At activation of this input all six counters are blocked. The input can for example, be used for blocking the counters at testing.The function block has an input RESET. At activation of this input all six counters are set to 0.
All inputs are configured via PCM600.
15.2.3.1 Reporting
The content of the counters can be read in the local HMI.
Reset of counters can be performed in the local HMI and a binary input.
Reading of content can also be performed remotely, for example from a IEC 61850 client. The value can also be presented as a measuring value on the local HMI graphical display.
15.2.3.2 Design
The function block has six inputs for increasing the counter values for each of the six counters respectively. The content of the counters are stepped one step for each positive edge of the input respectively.
The function block also has an input BLOCK. At activation of this input all six counters are blocked and are not updated. Valid number is held.
The function block has an input RESET. At activation of this input all six counters are set to 0.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 15 Monitoring
929 Technical reference manual
15.2.4 Function block
IEC05000345-2-en.vsd
CNTGGIO BLOCK COUNTER1 COUNTER2 COUNTER3 COUNTER4 COUNTER5 COUNTER6 RESET
VALUE1 VALUE2 VALUE3 VALUE4 VALUE5 VALUE6
IEC05000345 V2 EN
Figure 464: CNTGGIO function block
15.2.5 Input signals Table 570: CNTGGIO Input signals
Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
COUNTER1 BOOLEAN 0 Input for counter1
COUNTER2 BOOLEAN 0 Input for counter2
COUNTER3 BOOLEAN 0 Input for counter3
COUNTER4 BOOLEAN 0 Input for counter4
COUNTER5 BOOLEAN 0 Input for counter5
COUNTER6 BOOLEAN 0 Input for counter6
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of function
Table 571: CNTGGIO Output signals
Name Type Description VALUE1 INTEGER Output of counter1
VALUE2 INTEGER Output of counter2
VALUE3 INTEGER Output of counter3
VALUE4 INTEGER Output of counter4
VALUE5 INTEGER Output of counter5
VALUE6 INTEGER Output of counter6
Section 15 1MRK505222-UUS C Monitoring
930 Technical reference manual
15.2.6 Setting parameters Table 572: CNTGGIO Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
15.2.7 Technical data Table 573: CNTGGIO technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Counter value 0-100000 —
Max. count up speed 10 pulses/s (50% duty cycle) —
15.3 Event function EVENT
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Event function EVENT S00946 V1 EN
—
15.3.1 Introduction When using a Substation Automation system with LON or SPA communication, time- tagged events can be sent at change or cyclically from the IED to the station level. These events are created from any available signal in the IED that is connected to the Event function (EVENT). The event function block is used for remote communication.
Analog and double indication values are also transferred through EVENT function.
15.3.2 Principle of operation The main purpose of the event function (EVENT) is to generate events when the state or value of any of the connected input signals is in a state, or is undergoing a state transition, for which event generation is enabled.
Each EVENT function has 16 inputs INPUT1 — INPUT16. Each input can be given a name from the Application Configuration tool. The inputs are normally used to create single events, but are also intended for double indication events.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 15 Monitoring
931 Technical reference manual
EVENT function also has an input BLOCK to block the generation of events.
The events that are sent from the IED can originate from both internal logical signals and binary input channels. The internal signals are time-tagged in the main processing module, while the binary input channels are time-tagged directly on the input module. The time-tagging of the events that are originated from internal logical signals have a resolution corresponding to the execution cyclicity of EVENT function. The time- tagging of the events that are originated from binary input signals have a resolution of 1 ms.
The outputs from EVENT function are formed by the reading of status, events and alarms by the station level on every single input. The user-defined name for each input is intended to be used by the station level.
All events according to the event mask are stored in a buffer, which contains up to 1000 events. If new events appear before the oldest event in the buffer is read, the oldest event is overwritten and an overflow alarm appears.
The events are produced according to the set-event masks. The event masks are treated commonly for both the LON and SPA communication. The EventMask can be set individually for each input channel. These settings are available:
NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect
It is possible to define which part of EVENT function generates the events. This can be performed individually for the SPAChannelMask and LONChannelMask respectively. For each communication type these settings are available:
Disabled Channel 1-8 Channel 9-16 Channel 1-16
For LON communication the events normally are sent to station level at change. It is possibly also to set a time for cyclic sending of the events individually for each input channel.
To protect the SA system from signals with a high change rate that can easily saturate the event system or the communication subsystems behind it, a quota limiter is implemented. If an input creates events at a rate that completely consume the granted quota then further events from the channel will be blocked. This block will be removed
Section 15 1MRK505222-UUS C Monitoring
932 Technical reference manual
when the input calms down and the accumulated quota reach 66% of the maximum burst quota. The maximum burst quota per input channel is 45 events per second.
15.3.3 Function block
IEC05000697-2-en.vsd
EVENT BLOCK ^INPUT1 ^INPUT2 ^INPUT3 ^INPUT4 ^INPUT5 ^INPUT6 ^INPUT7 ^INPUT8 ^INPUT9 ^INPUT10 ^INPUT11 ^INPUT12 ^INPUT13 ^INPUT14 ^INPUT15 ^INPUT16
IEC05000697 V2 EN
Figure 465: EVENT function block
15.3.4 Input and output signals Table 574: EVENT Input signals
Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INPUT1 GROUP SIGNAL
0 Input 1
INPUT2 GROUP SIGNAL
0 Input 2
INPUT3 GROUP SIGNAL
0 Input 3
INPUT4 GROUP SIGNAL
0 Input 4
INPUT5 GROUP SIGNAL
0 Input 5
INPUT6 GROUP SIGNAL
0 Input 6
INPUT7 GROUP SIGNAL
0 Input 7
INPUT8 GROUP SIGNAL
0 Input 8
INPUT9 GROUP SIGNAL
0 Input 9
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 15 Monitoring
933 Technical reference manual
Name Type Default Description INPUT10 GROUP
SIGNAL 0 Input 10
INPUT11 GROUP SIGNAL
0 Input 11
INPUT12 GROUP SIGNAL
0 Input 12
INPUT13 GROUP SIGNAL
0 Input 13
INPUT14 GROUP SIGNAL
0 Input 14
INPUT15 GROUP SIGNAL
0 Input 15
INPUT16 GROUP SIGNAL
0 Input 16
15.3.5 Setting parameters Table 575: EVENT Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description SPAChannelMask Disabled
Channel 1-8 Channel 9-16 Channel 1-16
— — Disabled SPA channel mask
LONChannelMask Disabled Channel 1-8 Channel 9-16 Channel 1-16
— — Disabled LON channel mask
EventMask1 NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect
— — AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 1
EventMask2 NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect
— — AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 2
EventMask3 NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect
— — AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 3
EventMask4 NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect
— — AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 4
Table continues on next page
Section 15 1MRK505222-UUS C Monitoring
934 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description EventMask5 NoEvents
OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect
— — AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 5
EventMask6 NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect
— — AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 6
EventMask7 NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect
— — AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 7
EventMask8 NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect
— — AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 8
EventMask9 NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect
— — AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 9
EventMask10 NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect
— — AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 10
EventMask11 NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect
— — AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 11
EventMask12 NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect
— — AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 12
EventMask13 NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect
— — AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 13
EventMask14 NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect
— — AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 14
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 15 Monitoring
935 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description EventMask15 NoEvents
OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect
— — AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 15
EventMask16 NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect
— — AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 16
MinRepIntVal1 0 — 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 1
MinRepIntVal2 0 — 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 2
MinRepIntVal3 0 — 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 3
MinRepIntVal4 0 — 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 4
MinRepIntVal5 0 — 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 5
MinRepIntVal6 0 — 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 6
MinRepIntVal7 0 — 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 7
MinRepIntVal8 0 — 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 8
MinRepIntVal9 0 — 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 9
MinRepIntVal10 0 — 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 10
MinRepIntVal11 0 — 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 11
MinRepIntVal12 0 — 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 12
MinRepIntVal13 0 — 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 13
MinRepIntVal14 0 — 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 14
MinRepIntVal15 0 — 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 15
MinRepIntVal16 0 — 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 16
15.4 Logical signal status report BINSTATREP
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Logical signal status report BINSTATREP — —
15.4.1 Introduction The Logical signal status report (BINSTATREP) function makes it possible for a SPA master to poll signals from various other functions.
Section 15 1MRK505222-UUS C Monitoring
936 Technical reference manual
15.4.2 Principle of operation The Logical signal status report (BINSTATREP) function has 16 inputs and 16 outputs. The output status follows the inputs and can be read from the local HMI or via SPA communication.
When an input is set, the respective output is set for a user defined time. If the input signal remains set for a longer period, the output will remain set until the input signal resets.
t t
INPUTn
OUTPUTn
IEC09000732-1-en.vsd IEC09000732 V1 EN
Figure 466: BINSTATREP logical diagram
15.4.3 Function block BINSTATREP
BLOCK ^INPUT1 ^INPUT2 ^INPUT3 ^INPUT4 ^INPUT5 ^INPUT6 ^INPUT7 ^INPUT8 ^INPUT9 ^INPUT10 ^INPUT11 ^INPUT12 ^INPUT13 ^INPUT14 ^INPUT15 ^INPUT16
OUTPUT1 OUTPUT2 OUTPUT3 OUTPUT4 OUTPUT5 OUTPUT6 OUTPUT7 OUTPUT8 OUTPUT9
OUTPUT10 OUTPUT11 OUTPUT12 OUTPUT13 OUTPUT14 OUTPUT15 OUTPUT16
IEC09000730-1-en.vsd IEC09000730 V1 EN
Figure 467: BINSTATREP function block
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 15 Monitoring
937 Technical reference manual
15.4.4 Input and output signals Table 576: BINSTATREP Input signals
Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 16
Table 577: BINSTATREP Output signals
Name Type Description OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 1
OUTPUT2 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 2
OUTPUT3 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 3
OUTPUT4 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 4
OUTPUT5 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 5
OUTPUT6 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 6
OUTPUT7 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 7
OUTPUT8 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 8
OUTPUT9 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 9
OUTPUT10 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 10
OUTPUT11 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 11
OUTPUT12 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 12
OUTPUT13 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 13
Table continues on next page
Section 15 1MRK505222-UUS C Monitoring
938 Technical reference manual
Name Type Description OUTPUT14 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 14
OUTPUT15 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 15
OUTPUT16 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 16
15.4.5 Setting parameters Table 578: BINSTATREP Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description t 0.000 — 60000.000 s 0.001 10.000 Time delay of function
15.5 Fault locator LMBRFLO
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Fault locator LMBRFLO — —
15.5.1 Introduction The accurate fault locator is an essential component to minimize the outages after a persistent fault and/or to pin-point a weak spot on the line.
The fault locator is an impedance measuring function giving the distance to the fault as a relative (in%) or an absolute value. The main advantage is the high accuracy achieved by compensating for load current and for the mutual zero-sequence effect on double circuit lines.
The compensation includes setting of the remote and local sources and calculation of the distribution of fault currents from each side. This distribution of fault current, together with recorded load (pre-fault) currents, is used to exactly calculate the fault position. The fault can be recalculated with new source data at the actual fault to further increase the accuracy.
Especially on heavily loaded long lines (where the fault locator is most important) where the source voltage angles can be up to 35-40 degrees apart the accuracy can be still maintained with the advanced compensation included in fault locator.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 15 Monitoring
939 Technical reference manual
15.5.2 Principle of operation The Fault locator (LMBRFLO) in the IED is an essential complement to other monitoring functions, since it measures and indicates the distance to the fault with high accuracy.
When calculating distance to fault, pre-fault and fault phasors of currents and voltages are selected from the Trip value recorder data, thus the analog signals used by the fault locator must be among those connected to the disturbance report function. The analog configuration (channel selection) is performed using the parameter setting tool within PCM600.
The calculation algorithm considers the effect of load currents, double-end infeed and additional fault resistance.
Z0m=Z0m+jX0m
R1A+jX1A
R0L+jX0L R1L+jX1L
R0L+jX0L R1L+jX1L
R1B+jX1B
DRPRDRE
LMBRFLO
ANSI05000045_2_en.vsd ANSI05000045 V2 EN
Figure 468: Simplified network configuration with network data, required for settings of the fault location-measuring function
If source impedance in the near and far end of the protected line have changed in a significant manner relative to the set values at fault location calculation time (due to exceptional switching state in the immediate network, power generation out of order, and so on), new values can be entered via the local HMI and a recalculation of the distance to the fault can be ordered using the algorithm described below. Its also possible to change fault loop. In this way, a more accurate location of the fault can be achieved.
The function indicates the distance to the fault as a percentage of the line length, in kilometers or miles as selected on the local HMI. The fault location is stored as a part of the disturbance report information (ER, DR, IND, TVR and FL) and managed via the local HMI or PCM600.
15.5.2.1 Measuring Principle
For transmission lines with voltage sources at both line ends, the effect of double-end infeed and additional fault resistance must be considered when calculating the distance
Section 15 1MRK505222-UUS C Monitoring
940 Technical reference manual
to the fault from the currents and voltages at one line end. If this is not done, the accuracy of the calculated figure will vary with the load flow and the amount of additional fault resistance.
The calculation algorithm used in the fault locator in compensates for the effect of double- end infeed, additional fault resistance and load current.
15.5.2.2 Accurate algorithm for measurement of distance to fault
Figure 469 shows a single-line diagram of a single transmission line, that is fed from both ends with source impedances ZA and ZB. Assume that the fault occurs at a distance F from IED A on a line with the length L and impedance ZL. The fault resistance is defined as RF. A single-line model is used for better clarification of the algorithm.
ZA pZL A
IF
(1-p).ZL B ZB
F
L
IBIA
xx01000171_ansi.vsd
RFAV
ANSI01000171 V1 EN
Figure 469: Fault on transmission line fed from both ends
From figure 469 it is evident that:
= + A A L F FV I p Z I R
EQUATION1595 V1 EN (Equation 181)
Where:
IA is the line current after the fault, that is, pre-fault current plus current change due to the fault,
IF is the fault current and
p is a relative distance to the fault
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 15 Monitoring
941 Technical reference manual
The fault current is expressed in measurable quantities by:
IF IFA DA ——-=
EQUATION96 V1 EN (Equation 182)
Where:
IFA is the change in current at the point of measurement, IED A and
DA is a fault current-distribution factor, that is, the ratio between the fault current at line end A and the total fault current.
For a single line, the value is equal to:
DA 1 p( ) Z L ZB+ ZA ZL ZB+ +
——————————————=
EQUATION97 V1 EN (Equation 183)
Thus, the general fault location equation for a single line is:
FA A A L F
A
I V I p Z R
D = +
EQUATION1596 V1 EN (Equation 184)
Table 579: Expressions for VA, IA and IFA for different types of faults
Fault type: VA IA IFA
AG VAA IAA + KN x INA ( )AA 0A 3 2 I I D —
EQUATION1597 V1 EN
BG VBA IBA + KN x INA ( )BA 0A 3 2 I I D —
EQUATION1598 V1 EN
CG VCA ICA + KN x INA ( )CA 0A 3 2 I I D —
EQUATION1599 V1 EN
ABC, AB, ABG VAA-VBA IAA — IBA DIABA
BC, BCG VBA-VCA IBA — ICA DICBA
CA, CAG VCA-VAA ICA — IAA DICAA
The KN complex quantity for zero-sequence compensation for the single line is equal to:
Section 15 1MRK505222-UUS C Monitoring
942 Technical reference manual
KN Z0L Z1L
3 Z1L ————————=
EQUATION99 V1 EN (Equation 185)
DI is the change in current, that is the current after the fault minus the current before the fault.
In the following, the positive sequence impedance for ZA, ZB and ZL is inserted into the equations, because this is the value used in the algorithm.
For double lines, the fault equation is:
FA A A 1L F 0P 0M
A
I V I p Z R I Z
D = + +
EQUATION1600 V1 EN (Equation 186)
Where:
I0P is a zero sequence current of the parallel line,
Z0M is a mutual zero sequence impedance and
DA is the distribution factor of the parallel line, which is:
DA 1 p( ) ZA ZAL ZB+ +( ) ZB+
2 ZA ZL 2 ZB+ + —————————————————————————-=
EQUATION101 V1 EN
The KN compensation factor for the double line becomes:
KN Z0L Z1L
3 Z1L ————————
Z0M 3 Z1L —————-
I0P I0A ——-+=
EQUATION102 V1 EN (Equation 187)
From these equations it can be seen, that, if Z0m = 0, then the general fault location equation for a single line is obtained. Only the distribution factor differs in these two cases.
Because the DA distribution factor according to equation 184 or 186 is a function of p, the general equation 186 can be written in the form:
p2 p K1 K2 K3 RF+ 0=
EQUATION103 V1 EN (Equation 188)
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 15 Monitoring
943 Technical reference manual
Where:
A B 1
A L L ADD
V Z K 1
I Z Z Z = + +
+
EQUATION1601 V1 EN (Equation 189)
A B 2
A L L ADD
V Z K 1
I Z Z Z = +
+
EQUATION1602 V1 EN (Equation 190)
K3 IFA
IA ZL —————
ZA ZB+ Z1 ZADD+ ————————— 1+
=
EQUATION106 V1 EN (Equation 191)
and:
ZADD = ZA + ZB for parallel lines. IA, IFA and VA are given in the above table. KN is calculated automatically according to equation 187. ZA, ZB, ZL, Z0L and Z0M are setting parameters.
For a single line, Z0M = 0 and ZADD = 0. Thus, equation 188 applies to both single and parallel lines.
Equation 188 can be divided into real and imaginary parts:
p2 p Re K1( ) Re K2( ) RF Re K3( ) 0=+
EQUATION107 V1 EN (Equation 192)
p Im K1( ) Im K2( ) RF Im K3( ) 0= +
EQUATION108 V1 EN (Equation 193)
If the imaginary part of K3 is not zero, RF can be solved according to equation 193, and then inserted to equation 192. According to equation 192, the relative distance to the fault is solved as the root of a quadratic equation.
Equation 192 gives two different values for the relative distance to the fault as a solution. A simplified load compensated algorithm, which gives an unequivocal figure for the relative distance to the fault, is used to establish the value that should be selected.
Section 15 1MRK505222-UUS C Monitoring
944 Technical reference manual
If the load compensated algorithms according to the above do not give a reliable solution, a less accurate, non-compensated impedance model is used to calculate the relative distance to the fault.
15.5.2.3 The non-compensated impedance model
In the non-compensated impedance model, IA line current is used instead of IFA fault current:
A 1L A F AV p Z I R I= +
EQUATION1603 V1 EN (Equation 194)
Where:
IA is according to table 579.
The accuracy of the distance-to-fault calculation, using the non-compensated impedance model, is influenced by the pre-fault load current. So, this method is only used if the load compensated models do not function.
15.5.2.4 IEC 60870-5-103
The communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 may be used to poll fault location information from the IED to a master (that is station HSI). There are two outputs that must be connected to appropriate inputs on the function block I103StatFltDis, FLTDISTX gives distance to fault (reactance, according the standard) and CALCMADE gives a pulse (100 ms) when a result is obtainable on FLTDISTX output.
15.5.3 Function block
ANSI05000679-2-en.vsd
LMBRFLO PHSEL_A* PHSEL_B* PHSEL_C* CALCDIST*
FLTDISTX CALCMADE
BCD_80 BCD_40 BCD_20 BCD_10
BCD_8 BCD_4 BCD_2 BCD_1
ANSI05000679 V2 EN
Figure 470: FLO function block
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 15 Monitoring
945 Technical reference manual
15.5.4 Input and output signals Table 580: LMBRFLO Input signals
Name Type Default Description PHSEL_A BOOLEAN 0 Phase selection phase A
PHSEL_B BOOLEAN 0 Phase selection phase B
PHSEL_C BOOLEAN 0 Phase selection phase C
CALCDIST BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to initiate fault distance calculation
Table 581: LMBRFLO Output signals
Name Type Description FLTDISTX REAL Reactive distance to fault
CALCMADE BOOLEAN Fault calculation made
BCD_80 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 80%
BCD_40 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 40%
BCD_20 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 20%
BCD_10 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 10%
BCD_8 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 8%
BCD_4 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 4%
BCD_2 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 2%
BCD_1 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 1%
15.5.5 Setting parameters Table 582: LMBRFLO Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description R1A 0.001 — 1500.000 ohm/p 0.001 2.000 Source resistance A (near end)
X1A 0.001 — 1500.000 ohm/p 0.001 12.000 Source reactance A (near end)
R1B 0.001 — 1500.000 ohm/p 0.001 2.000 Source resistance B (far end)
X1B 0.001 — 1500.000 ohm/p 0.001 12.000 Source reactance B (far end)
R1L 0.001 — 1500.000 ohm/p 0.001 2.000 Positive sequence line resistance
X1L 0.001 — 1500.000 ohm/p 0.001 12.500 Positive sequence line reactance
R0L 0.001 — 1500.000 ohm/p 0.001 8.750 Zero sequence line resistance
X0L 0.001 — 1500.000 ohm/p 0.001 50.000 Zero sequence line reactance
R0M 0.000 — 1500.000 ohm/p 0.001 0.000 Zero sequence mutual resistance
X0M 0.000 — 1500.000 ohm/p 0.001 0.000 Zero sequence mutual reactance
LineLength 0.0 — 10000.0 — 0.1 40.0 Length of line
Section 15 1MRK505222-UUS C Monitoring
946 Technical reference manual
Table 583: LMBRFLO Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description DrepChNoI_A 1 — 30 Ch 1 1 Recorder Input number recording phase
current, IA
DrepChNoI_B 1 — 30 Ch 1 2 Recorder Input number recording phase current, IB
DrepChNoI_C 1 — 30 Ch 1 3 Recorder Input number recording phase current, IC
DrepChNoIN 0 — 30 Ch 1 4 Recorder input number recording residual current, IN
DrepChNoIP 0 — 30 Ch 1 0 Recorder input number recording 3I0 on parallel line
DrepChNoV_A 1 — 30 Ch 1 5 Recorder Input number recording phase voltage, VA
DrepChNoV_B 1 — 30 Ch 1 6 Recorder Input number recording phase voltage, VB
DrepChNoV_C 1 — 30 Ch 1 7 Recorder Input number recording phase voltage, VC
15.5.6 Technical data Table 584: LMBRFLO technical data
Function Value or range Accuracy Reactive and resistive reach (0.001-1500.000) /phase 2.0% static accuracy
2.0% degrees static angular accuracy Conditions: Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Vn Current range: (0.5-30) x In
Phase selection According to input signals —
Maximum number of fault locations
100 —
15.6 Measured value expander block RANGE_XP
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Measured value expander block RANGE_XP — —
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 15 Monitoring
947 Technical reference manual
15.6.1 Introduction The current and voltage measurements functions (CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU and VNMMXU), current and voltage sequence measurement functions (CMSQI and VMSQI) and IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions (MVGGIO) are provided with measurement supervision functionality. All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits: low-low limit, low limit, high limit and high-high limit. The measure value expander block (RANGE_XP) has been introduced to enable translating the integer output signal from the measuring functions to 5 binary signals: below low-low limit, below low limit, normal, above high-high limit or above high limit. The output signals can be used as conditions in the configurable logic or for alarming purpose.
15.6.2 Principle of operation The input signal must be connected to a range output of a measuring function block (CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU, VNMMXU, CMSQI, VMSQ or MVGGIO). The function block converts the input integer value to five binary output signals according to table 585.
Table 585: Input integer value converted to binary output signals
Measured supervised value is:
below low-low limit
between low low and low limit
between low and high limit
between high- high and high limit
above high-high limit
Output: LOWLOW High
LOW High
NORMAL High
HIGH High
HIGHHIGH High
15.6.3 Function block
IEC05000346-2-en.vsd
RANGE_XP RANGE* HIGHHIGH
HIGH NORMAL
LOW LOWLOW
IEC05000346 V2 EN
Figure 471: RANGE_XP function block
Section 15 1MRK505222-UUS C Monitoring
948 Technical reference manual
15.6.4 Input and output signals Table 586: RANGE_XP Input signals
Name Type Default Description RANGE INTEGER 0 Measured value range
Table 587: RANGE_XP Output signals
Name Type Description HIGHHIGH BOOLEAN Measured value is above high-high limit
HIGH BOOLEAN Measured value is between high and high-high limit
NORMAL BOOLEAN Measured value is between high and low limit
LOW BOOLEAN Measured value is between low and low-low limit
LOWLOW BOOLEAN Measured value is below low-low limit
15.7 Disturbance report DRPRDRE
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Analog input signals A41RADR — —
Disturbance report DRPRDRE — —
Disturbance report A1RADR — —
Disturbance report A4RADR — —
Disturbance report B1RBDR — —
15.7.1 Introduction Complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in the secondary system together with continuous event-logging is accomplished by the disturbance report functionality.
Disturbance report DRPRDRE, always included in the IED, acquires sampled data of all selected analog input and binary signals connected to the function block with a, maximum of 40 analog and 96 binary signals.
The Disturbance report functionality is a common name for several functions:
Sequential of events Indications Event recorder
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 15 Monitoring
949 Technical reference manual
Trip value recorder Disturbance recorder Fault locator
The Disturbance report function is characterized by great flexibility regarding configuration, initiating conditions, recording times, and large storage capacity.
A disturbance is defined as an activation of an input to the AxRADR or BxRBDR function blocks, which are set to trigger the disturbance recorder. All signals from start of pre-fault time to the end of post-fault time will be included in the recording.
Every disturbance report recording is saved in the IED in the standard Comtrade format. The same applies to all events, which are continuously saved in a ring-buffer. The local HMI is used to get information about the recordings. The disturbance report files may be uploaded to PCM600 for further analysis using the disturbance handling tool.
15.7.2 Principle of operation Disturbance report DRPRDRE is a common name for several functions to supply the operator, analysis engineer, and so on, with sufficient information about events in the system.
The functions included in the disturbance report are:
Sequential of events (SOE) Indications (IND) Event recorder (ER) Trip value recorder(TVR) Disturbance recorder (DR)
Figure 472 shows the relations between Disturbance Report, included functions and function blocks. Sequential of events (SOE), Event recorder (ER) and Indications (IND) uses information from the binary input function blocks (BxRBDR). Trip value recorder (TVR) uses analog information from the analog input function blocks (AxRADR). Disturbance recorder DRPRDRE acquires information from both AxRADR and BxRBDR.
Section 15 1MRK505222-UUS C Monitoring
950 Technical reference manual
Trip value rec Fault locator
Sequential of events
Event recorder
Indications
Disturbance recorder
Disturbance Report
Binary signals
Analog signals A4RADR
B6RBDR
DRPRDRE FL
ANSI09000336-1-en.vsd
A1-4RADR
B1-6RBDR
ANSI09000336 V1 EN
Figure 472: Disturbance report functions and related function blocks
The whole disturbance report can contain information for a number of recordings, each with the data coming from all the parts mentioned above. The sequential of events function is working continuously, independent of disturbance triggering, recording time, and so on. All information in the disturbance report is stored in non-volatile flash memories. This implies that no information is lost in case of loss of auxiliary power. Each report will get an identification number in the interval from 0-999.
en05000125_ansi.vsd
Disturbance report
Record no. N Record no. N+1 Record no. N+100
General dist. information Indications Trip
values Event
recordings Disturbance
recording Fault locator Event list (SOE)
ANSI05000125 V1 EN
Figure 473: Disturbance report structure
Up to 100 disturbance reports can be stored. If a new disturbance is to be recorded when the memory is full, the oldest disturbance report is overwritten by the new one. The total recording capacity for the disturbance recorder is depending of sampling
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 15 Monitoring
951 Technical reference manual
frequency, number of analog and binary channels and recording time. Figure 474 shows the number of recordings versus the total recording time tested for a typical configuration, that is, in a 60 Hz system it is possible to record 80 where the average recording time is 3.4 seconds. The memory limit does not affect the rest of the disturbance report (Event list (EL), Event recorder (ER), Indications (IND) and Trip value recorder (TVR)).
100
400 s350300
40
60
80 40 analog 96 binary
20 analog 96 binary
3.4s
6.3s
6.3s 60 Hz
50 Hz
6.3s
3.4s
250
Total recording time
Number of recordings
en05000488_ansi.vsd ANSI05000488 V1 EN
Figure 474: Example of number of recordings versus the total recording time
The maximum number of recordings depend on each recordings total recording time. Long recording time will reduce the number of recordings to less than 100.
The IED flash disk should NOT be used to store any user files. This might cause disturbance recordings to be deleted due to lack of disk space.
Disturbance information Date and time of the disturbance, the indications, events, fault location and the trip values are available on the local HMI. To acquire a complete disturbance report the
Section 15 1MRK505222-UUS C Monitoring
952 Technical reference manual
user must use a PC and — either the PCM600 Disturbance handling tool — or a FTP or MMS (over 61850) client. The PC can be connected to the IED front, rear or remotely via the station bus (Ethernet ports).
Indications (IND) Indications is a list of signals that were activated during the total recording time of the disturbance (not time-tagged), see section «Indications» for more detailed information.
Event recorder (ER) The event recorder may contain a list of up to 150 time-tagged events, which have occurred during the disturbance. The information is available via the local HMI or PCM600, see section «Event recorder» for more detailed information.
Sequential of events (SOE) The sequetial of events may contain a list of totally 1000 time-tagged events. The list information is continuously updated when selected binary signals change state. The oldest data is overwritten. The logged signals may be presented via local HMI or PCM600, see section «Sequential of events» for more detailed information.
Trip value recorder (TVR) The recorded trip values include phasors of selected analog signals before the fault and during the fault, see section «Trip value recorder» for more detailed information.
Disturbance recorder (DR) Disturbance recorder records analog and binary signal data before, during and after the fault, see section «Disturbance recorder» for more detailed information.
Fault locator (FL) The fault location function calculates the distance to fault, see section «Fault locator LMBRFLO» for more detailed information.
Time tagging The IED has a built-in real-time calendar and clock. This function is used for all time tagging within the disturbance report
Recording times Disturbance report DRPRDRE records information about a disturbance during a settable time frame. The recording times are valid for the whole disturbance report. Disturbance recorder (DR), event recorder (ER) and indication function register disturbance data and events during tRecording, the total recording time.
The total recording time, tRecording, of a recorded disturbance is:
tRecording = PreFaultrecT + tFault + PostFaultrecT or PreFaultrecT + TimeLimit, depending on which criterion stops the current disturbance recording
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 15 Monitoring
953 Technical reference manual
PreFaultRecT
TimeLimit
PostFaultRecT
en05000487.vsd
1 2 3
Trig point
IEC05000487 V1 EN
Figure 475: The recording times definition
PreFaultRecT, 1 Pre-fault or pre-trigger recording time. The time before the fault including the operate time of the trigger. Use the setting PreFaultRecT to set this time.
tFault, 2 Fault time of the recording. The fault time cannot be set. It continues as long as any valid trigger condition, binary or analog, persists (unless limited by TimeLimit the limit time).
PostFaultRecT, 3 Post fault recording time. The time the disturbance recording continues after all activated triggers are reset. Use the setting PostFaultRecT to set this time.
TimeLimit Limit time. The maximum allowed recording time after the disturbance recording was triggered. The limit time is used to eliminate the consequences of a trigger that does not reset within a reasonable time interval. It limits the maximum recording time of a recording and prevents subsequent overwriting of already stored disturbances. Use the setting TimeLimit to set this time.
Analog signals Up to 40 analog signals can be selected for recording by the Disturbance recorder and triggering of the Disturbance report function. Out of these 40, 30 are reserved for external analog signals from analog input modules (TRM) and line data communication module (LDCM) via preprocessing function blocks (SMAI) and summation block (3PHSUM). The last 10 channels may be connected to internally calculated analog signals available as function block output signals (mA input signals, phase differential currents, bias currents and so on).
Section 15 1MRK505222-UUS C Monitoring
954 Technical reference manual
ANSI10000029-1-en.vsd
A3RADR A2RADR
A1RADRSMAI
AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4
AI3P ^GRP2_A ^GRP2_B ^GRP2_C
Block
^GRP2_N
INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 …
A4RADR
INPUT31 INPUT32 INPUT33 INPUT34 INPUT35 INPUT36
…
INPUT40
Internal analog signals
External analog signals
AINType
ANSI10000029 V1 EN
Figure 476: Analog input function blocks
The external input signals will be acquired, filtered and skewed and (after configuration) available as an input signal on the AxRADR function block via the SMAI function block. The information is saved at the Disturbance report base sampling rate (1000 or 1200 Hz). Internally calculated signals are updated according to the cycle time of the specific function. If a function is running at lower speed than the base sampling rate, Disturbance recorder will use the latest updated sample until a new updated sample is available.
If the IED is preconfigured the only tool needed for analog configuration of the Disturbance report is the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT, external signal configuration). In case of modification of a preconfigured IED or general internal configuration the Application Configuration tool within PCM600 is used.
The preprocessor function block (SMAI) calculates the residual quantities in cases where only the three phases are connected (AI4-input not used). SMAI makes the information available as a group signal output, phase outputs and calculated residual output (AIN-output). In situations where AI4-input is used as an input signal the corresponding information is available on the non-calculated output (AI4) on the SMAI function block. Connect the signals to the AxRADR accordingly.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 15 Monitoring
955 Technical reference manual
For each of the analog signals, Operation = Enabled means that it is recorded by the disturbance recorder. The trigger is independent of the setting of Operation, and triggers even if operation is set to Disabled. Both undervoltage and overvoltage can be used as trigger conditions. The same applies for the current signals.
If Operation = Disabled, no waveform (samples) will be recorded and reported in graph. However, Trip value, pre-fault and fault value will be recorded and reported. The input channel can still be used to trig the disturbance recorder.
If Operation = Enabled, waveform (samples) will also be recorded and reported in graph.
The analog signals are presented only in the disturbance recording, but they affect the entire disturbance report when being used as triggers.
Binary signals Up to 96 binary signals can be selected to be handled by disturbance report. The signals can be selected from internal logical and binary input signals. A binary signal is selected to be recorded when:
the corresponding function block is included in the configuration the signal is connected to the input of the function block
Each of the 96 signals can be selected as a trigger of the disturbance report (Operation = Operation>TrigDR =Disabled). A binary signal can be selected to activate the red LED on the local HMI (SetLED = Enabled/Disabled).
The selected signals are presented in the event recorder, sequential of events and the disturbance recording. But they affect the whole disturbance report when they are used as triggers. The indications are also selected from these 96 signals with local HMI IndicationMask=Show/Hide.
Trigger signals The trigger conditions affect the entire disturbance report, except the sequential of events, which runs continuously. As soon as at least one trigger condition is fulfilled, a complete disturbance report is recorded. On the other hand, if no trigger condition is fulfilled, there is no disturbance report, no indications, and so on. This implies the importance of choosing the right signals as trigger conditions.
A trigger can be of type:
Manual trigger Binary-signal trigger Analog-signal trigger (over/under function)
Section 15 1MRK505222-UUS C Monitoring
956 Technical reference manual
Manual trigger A disturbance report can be manually triggered from the local HMI, PCM600 or via station bus (IEC 61850). When the trigger is activated, the manual trigger signal is generated. This feature is especially useful for testing. Refer to the operator’s manual for procedure.
Binary-signal trigger Any binary signal state (logic one or a logic zero) can be selected to generate a trigger (Triglevel = Trig on 0/Trig on 1). When a binary signal is selected to generate a trigger from a logic zero, the selected signal will not be listed in the indications list of the disturbance report.
Analog-signal trigger All analog signals are available for trigger purposes, no matter if they are recorded in the disturbance recorder or not. The settings are OverTrigOp, UnderTrigOp, OverTrigLe and UnderTrigLe.
The check of the trigger condition is based on peak-to-peak values. When this is found, the absolute average value of these two peak values is calculated. If the average value is above the threshold level for an overvoltage or overcurrent trigger, this trigger is indicated with a greater than (>) sign with the user-defined name.
If the average value is below the set threshold level for an undervoltage or undercurrent trigger, this trigger is indicated with a less than (<) sign with its name. The procedure is separately performed for each channel.
This method of checking the analog trigger conditions gives a function which is insensitive to DC offset in the signal. The operate time for this initiation is typically in the range of one cycle, 16 2/3 ms for a 60 Hz network.
All under/over trig signal information is available on the local HMI and PCM600.
Post Retrigger Disturbance report function does not automatically respond to any new trig condition during a recording, after all signals set as trigger signals have been reset. However, under certain circumstances the fault condition may reoccur during the post-fault recording, for instance by automatic reclosing to a still faulty power line.
In order to capture the new disturbance it is possible to allow retriggering (PostRetrig = Enabled) during the post-fault time. In this case a new, complete recording will start and, during a period, run in parallel with the initial recording.
When the retrig parameter is disabled (PostRetrig = Disabled), a new recording will not start until the post-fault (PostFaultrecT or TimeLimit) period is terminated. If a new trig occurs during the post-fault period and lasts longer than the proceeding recording a new complete recording will be started.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 15 Monitoring
957 Technical reference manual
Disturbance report function can handle maximum 3 simultaneous disturbance recordings.
15.7.3 Function block DRPRDRE
DRPOFF RECSTART RECMADE CLEARED
MEMUSED
IEC05000406-3-en.vsd IEC05000406 V3 EN
Figure 477: DRPRDRE function block
IEC05000430-3-en.vsd
A1RADR ^INPUT1 ^INPUT2 ^INPUT3 ^INPUT4 ^INPUT5 ^INPUT6 ^INPUT7 ^INPUT8 ^INPUT9 ^INPUT10
IEC05000430 V3 EN
Figure 478: A1RADR function block
IEC05000431-3-en.vsd
A4RADR ^INPUT31 ^INPUT32 ^INPUT33 ^INPUT34 ^INPUT35 ^INPUT36 ^INPUT37 ^INPUT38 ^INPUT39 ^INPUT40
IEC05000431 V3 EN
Figure 479: A4RADR function block, derived analog inputs
Section 15 1MRK505222-UUS C Monitoring
958 Technical reference manual
IEC05000432-3-en.vsd
B1RBDR ^INPUT1 ^INPUT2 ^INPUT3 ^INPUT4 ^INPUT5 ^INPUT6 ^INPUT7 ^INPUT8 ^INPUT9 ^INPUT10 ^INPUT11 ^INPUT12 ^INPUT13 ^INPUT14 ^INPUT15 ^INPUT16
IEC05000432 V3 EN
Figure 480: B1RBDR function block, binary inputs, example for B1RBDR — B6RBDR
15.7.4 Input and output signals Table 588: DRPRDRE Output signals
Name Type Description DRPOFF BOOLEAN Disturbance report function turned off
RECSTART BOOLEAN Disturbance recording started
RECMADE BOOLEAN Disturbance recording made
CLEARED BOOLEAN All disturbances in the disturbance report cleared
MEMUSED BOOLEAN More than 80% of memory used
Table 589: A1RADR Input signals
Name Type Default Description INPUT1 GROUP
SIGNAL — Group signal for input 1
INPUT2 GROUP SIGNAL
— Group signal for input 2
INPUT3 GROUP SIGNAL
— Group signal for input 3
INPUT4 GROUP SIGNAL
— Group signal for input 4
INPUT5 GROUP SIGNAL
— Group signal for input 5
INPUT6 GROUP SIGNAL
— Group signal for input 6
INPUT7 GROUP SIGNAL
— Group signal for input 7
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 15 Monitoring
959 Technical reference manual
Name Type Default Description INPUT8 GROUP
SIGNAL — Group signal for input 8
INPUT9 GROUP SIGNAL
— Group signal for input 9
INPUT10 GROUP SIGNAL
— Group signal for input 10
Table 590: A4RADR Input signals
Name Type Default Description INPUT31 REAL 0 Analog channel 31
INPUT32 REAL 0 Analog channel 32
INPUT33 REAL 0 Analog channel 33
INPUT34 REAL 0 Analog channel 34
INPUT35 REAL 0 Analog channel 35
INPUT36 REAL 0 Analog channel 36
INPUT37 REAL 0 Analog channel 37
INPUT38 REAL 0 Analog channel 38
INPUT39 REAL 0 Analog channel 39
INPUT40 REAL 0 Analog channel 40
Table 591: B1RBDR Input signals
Name Type Default Description INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 13
Table continues on next page
Section 15 1MRK505222-UUS C Monitoring
960 Technical reference manual
Name Type Default Description INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 16
15.7.5 Setting parameters Table 592: DRPRDRE Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Operation Enable/Disable
PreFaultRecT 0.05 — 9.90 s 0.01 0.10 Pre-fault recording time
PostFaultRecT 0.1 — 10.0 s 0.1 0.5 Post-fault recording time
TimeLimit 0.5 — 10.0 s 0.1 1.0 Fault recording time limit
PostRetrig Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Post-fault retrig enabled (On) or not (Off)
ZeroAngleRef 1 — 30 Ch 1 1 Reference channel (voltage), phasors, frequency measurement
OpModeTest Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Operation mode during test mode
Table 593: A1RADR Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation01 Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Operation On/Off
NomValue01 0.0 — 999999.9 — 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 1
UnderTrigOp01 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Use under level trig for analog cha 1 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe01 0 — 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog cha 1 in % of signal
OverTrigOp01 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Use over level trig for analog cha 1 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe01 0 — 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog cha 1 in % of signal
Operation02 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Operation On/Off
NomValue02 0.0 — 999999.9 — 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 2
UnderTrigOp02 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Use under level trig for analog cha 2 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe02 0 — 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog cha 2 in % of signal
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 15 Monitoring
961 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description OverTrigOp02 Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Use over level trig for analog cha 2 (on) or
not (off)
OverTrigLe02 0 — 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog cha 2 in % of signal
Operation03 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Operation On/Off
NomValue03 0.0 — 999999.9 — 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 3
UnderTrigOp03 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Use under level trig for analog cha 3 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe03 0 — 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog cha 3 in % of signal
OverTrigOp03 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Use over level trig for analog cha 3 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe03 0 — 5000 % 1 200 Overtrigger level for analog cha 3 in % of signal
Operation04 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Operation On/Off
NomValue04 0.0 — 999999.9 — 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 4
UnderTrigOp04 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Use under level trig for analog cha 4 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe04 0 — 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog cha 4 in % of signal
OverTrigOp04 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Use over level trig for analog cha 4 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe04 0 — 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog cha 4 in % of signal
Operation05 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Operation On/Off
NomValue05 0.0 — 999999.9 — 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 5
UnderTrigOp05 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Use under level trig for analog cha 5 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe05 0 — 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog cha 5 in % of signal
OverTrigOp05 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Use over level trig for analog cha 5 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe05 0 — 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog cha 5 in % of signal
Operation06 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Operation On/Off
NomValue06 0.0 — 999999.9 — 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 6
UnderTrigOp06 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Use under level trig for analog cha 6 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe06 0 — 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog cha 6 in % of signal
OverTrigOp06 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Use over level trig for analog cha 6 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe06 0 — 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog cha 6 in % of signal
Table continues on next page
Section 15 1MRK505222-UUS C Monitoring
962 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation07 Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Operation On/Off
NomValue07 0.0 — 999999.9 — 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 7
UnderTrigOp07 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Use under level trig for analog cha 7 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe07 0 — 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog cha 7 in % of signal
OverTrigOp07 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Use over level trig for analog cha 7 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe07 0 — 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog cha 7 in % of signal
Operation08 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Operation On/Off
NomValue08 0.0 — 999999.9 — 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 8
UnderTrigOp08 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Use under level trig for analog cha 8 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe08 0 — 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog cha 8 in % of signal
OverTrigOp08 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Use over level trig for analog cha 8 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe08 0 — 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog cha 8 in % of signal
Operation09 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Operation On/Off
NomValue09 0.0 — 999999.9 — 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 9
UnderTrigOp09 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Use under level trig for analog cha 9 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe09 0 — 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog cha 9 in % of signal
OverTrigOp09 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Use over level trig for analog cha 9 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe09 0 — 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog cha 9 in % of signal
Operation10 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Operation On/Off
NomValue10 0.0 — 999999.9 — 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 10
UnderTrigOp10 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Use under level trig for analog cha 10 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe10 0 — 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog cha 10 in % of signal
OverTrigOp10 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Use over level trig for analog cha 10 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe10 0 — 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog cha 10 in % of signal
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 15 Monitoring
963 Technical reference manual
Table 594: A4RADR Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation31 Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Operation On/off
NomValue31 0.0 — 999999.9 — 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 31
UnderTrigOp31 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Use under level trig for analog cha 31 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe31 0 — 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog cha 31 in % of signal
OverTrigOp31 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Use over level trig for analog cha 31 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe31 0 — 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog cha 31 in % of signal
Operation32 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Operation On/off
NomValue32 0.0 — 999999.9 — 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 32
UnderTrigOp32 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Use under level trig for analog cha 32 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe32 0 — 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog cha 32 in % of signal
OverTrigOp32 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Use over level trig for analog cha 32 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe32 0 — 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog cha 32 in % of signal
Operation33 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Operation On/off
NomValue33 0.0 — 999999.9 — 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 33
UnderTrigOp33 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Use under level trig for analog cha 33 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe33 0 — 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog cha 33 in % of signal
OverTrigOp33 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Use over level trig for analog cha 33 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe33 0 — 5000 % 1 200 Overtrigger level for analog cha 33 in % of signal
Operation34 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Operation On/off
NomValue34 0.0 — 999999.9 — 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 34
UnderTrigOp34 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Use under level trig for analog cha 34 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe34 0 — 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog cha 34 in % of signal
OverTrigOp34 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Use over level trig for analog cha 34 (on) or not (off)
Table continues on next page
Section 15 1MRK505222-UUS C Monitoring
964 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description OverTrigLe34 0 — 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog cha 34 in % of
signal
Operation35 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Operation On/off
NomValue35 0.0 — 999999.9 — 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 35
UnderTrigOp35 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Use under level trig for analog cha 35 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe35 0 — 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog cha 35 in % of signal
OverTrigOp35 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Use over level trig for analog cha 35 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe35 0 — 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog cha 35 in % of signal
Operation36 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Operation On/off
NomValue36 0.0 — 999999.9 — 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 36
UnderTrigOp36 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Use under level trig for analog cha 36 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe36 0 — 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog cha 36 in % of signal
OverTrigOp36 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Use over level trig for analog cha 36 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe36 0 — 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog cha 36 in % of signal
Operation37 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Operation On/off
NomValue37 0.0 — 999999.9 — 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 37
UnderTrigOp37 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Use under level trig for analog cha 37 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe37 0 — 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog cha 37 in % of signal
OverTrigOp37 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Use over level trig for analog cha 37 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe37 0 — 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog cha 37 in % of signal
Operation38 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Operation On/off
NomValue38 0.0 — 999999.9 — 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 38
UnderTrigOp38 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Use under level trig for analog cha 38 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe38 0 — 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog cha 38 in % of signal
OverTrigOp38 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Use over level trig for analog cha 38 (on) or not (off)
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 15 Monitoring
965 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description OverTrigLe38 0 — 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog cha 38 in % of
signal
Operation39 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Operation On/off
NomValue39 0.0 — 999999.9 — 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 39
UnderTrigOp39 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Use under level trig for analog cha 39 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe39 0 — 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog cha 39 in % of signal
OverTrigOp39 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Use over level trig for analog cha 39 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe39 0 — 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog cha 39 in % of signal
Operation40 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Operation On/off
NomValue40 0.0 — 999999.9 — 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 40
UnderTrigOp40 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Use under level trig for analog cha 40 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe40 0 — 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog cha 40 in % of signal
OverTrigOp40 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Use over level trig for analog cha 40 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe40 0 — 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog cha 40 in % of signal
Table 595: B1RBDR Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation01 Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
TrigLevel01 Trig on 0 Trig on 1
— — Trig on 1 Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 1
IndicationMa01 Hide Show
— — Hide Indication mask for binary channel 1
SetLED01 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 1
Operation02 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
TrigLevel02 Trig on 0 Trig on 1
— — Trig on 1 Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 2
IndicationMa02 Hide Show
— — Hide Indication mask for binary channel 2
SetLED02 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 2
Table continues on next page
Section 15 1MRK505222-UUS C Monitoring
966 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation03 Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
TrigLevel03 Trig on 0 Trig on 1
— — Trig on 1 Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 3
IndicationMa03 Hide Show
— — Hide Indication mask for binary channel 3
SetLED03 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 3
Operation04 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
TrigLevel04 Trig on 0 Trig on 1
— — Trig on 1 Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 4
IndicationMa04 Hide Show
— — Hide Indication mask for binary channel 4
SetLED04 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 4
Operation05 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
TrigLevel05 Trig on 0 Trig on 1
— — Trig on 1 Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 5
IndicationMa05 Hide Show
— — Hide Indication mask for binary channel 5
SetLED05 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 5
Operation06 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
TrigLevel06 Trig on 0 Trig on 1
— — Trig on 1 Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 6
IndicationMa06 Hide Show
— — Hide Indication mask for binary channel 6
SetLED06 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 6
Operation07 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
TrigLevel07 Trig on 0 Trig on 1
— — Trig on 1 Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 7
IndicationMa07 Hide Show
— — Hide Indication mask for binary channel 7
SetLED07 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 7
Operation08 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
TrigLevel08 Trig on 0 Trig on 1
— — Trig on 1 Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 8
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 15 Monitoring
967 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description IndicationMa08 Hide
Show — — Hide Indication mask for binary channel 8
SetLED08 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 8
Operation09 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
TrigLevel09 Trig on 0 Trig on 1
— — Trig on 1 Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 9
IndicationMa09 Hide Show
— — Hide Indication mask for binary channel 9
SetLED09 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 9
Operation10 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
TrigLevel10 Trig on 0 Trig on 1
— — Trig on 1 Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 10
IndicationMa10 Hide Show
— — Hide Indication mask for binary channel 10
SetLED10 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 10
Operation11 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
TrigLevel11 Trig on 0 Trig on 1
— — Trig on 1 Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 11
IndicationMa11 Hide Show
— — Hide Indication mask for binary channel 11
SetLED11 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 11
Operation12 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
TrigLevel12 Trig on 0 Trig on 1
— — Trig on 1 Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 12
IndicationMa12 Hide Show
— — Hide Indication mask for binary channel 12
SetLED12 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Set red-LED on HMI for binary input 12
Operation13 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
TrigLevel13 Trig on 0 Trig on 1
— — Trig on 1 Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 13
IndicationMa13 Hide Show
— — Hide Indication mask for binary channel 13
SetLED13 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 13
Table continues on next page
Section 15 1MRK505222-UUS C Monitoring
968 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation14 Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
TrigLevel14 Trig on 0 Trig on 1
— — Trig on 1 Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 14
IndicationMa14 Hide Show
— — Hide Indication mask for binary channel 14
SetLED14 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 14
Operation15 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
TrigLevel15 Trig on 0 Trig on 1
— — Trig on 1 Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 15
IndicationMa15 Hide Show
— — Hide Indication mask for binary channel 15
SetLED15 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 15
Operation16 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
TrigLevel16 Trig on 0 Trig on 1
— — Trig on 1 Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 16
IndicationMa16 Hide Show
— — Hide Indication mask for binary channel 16
SetLED16 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 16
FUNT1 0 — 255 FunT 1 0 Function type for binary channel 1 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FUNT2 0 — 255 FunT 1 0 Function type for binary channel 2 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FUNT3 0 — 255 FunT 1 0 Function type for binary channel 3 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FUNT4 0 — 255 FunT 1 0 Function type for binary channel 4 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FUNT5 0 — 255 FunT 1 0 Function type for binary channel 5 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FUNT6 0 — 255 FunT 1 0 Function type for binary channel 6 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FUNT7 0 — 255 FunT 1 0 Function type for binary channel 7 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FUNT8 0 — 255 FunT 1 0 Function type for binary channel 8 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FUNT9 0 — 255 FunT 1 0 Function type for binary channel 9 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FUNT10 0 — 255 FunT 1 0 Function type for binary channel 10 (IEC -60870-5-103)
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 15 Monitoring
969 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description FUNT11 0 — 255 FunT 1 0 Function type for binary channel 11 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
FUNT12 0 — 255 FunT 1 0 Function type for binary channel 12 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FUNT13 0 — 255 FunT 1 0 Function type for binary channel 13 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FUNT14 0 — 255 FunT 1 0 Function type for binary channel 14 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FUNT15 0 — 255 FunT 1 0 Function type for binary channel 15 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FUNT16 0 — 255 FunT 1 0 Function type for binary channel 16 (IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO1 0 — 255 InfNo 1 0 Information number for binary channel 1 (IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO2 0 — 255 InfNo 1 0 Information number for binary channel 2 (IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO3 0 — 255 InfNo 1 0 Information number for binary channel 3 (IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO4 0 — 255 InfNo 1 0 Information number for binary channel 4 (IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO5 0 — 255 InfNo 1 0 Information number for binary channel 5 (IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO6 0 — 255 InfNo 1 0 Information number for binary channel 6 (IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO7 0 — 255 InfNo 1 0 Information number for binary channel 7 (IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO8 0 — 255 InfNo 1 0 Information number for binary channel 8 (IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO9 0 — 255 InfNo 1 0 Information number for binary channel 9 (IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO10 0 — 255 InfNo 1 0 Information number for binary channel 10 (IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO11 0 — 255 InfNo 1 0 Information number for binary channel 11 (IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO12 0 — 255 InfNo 1 0 Information number for binary channel 12 (IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO13 0 — 255 InfNo 1 0 Information number for binary channel 13 (IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO14 0 — 255 InfNo 1 0 Information number for binary channel 14 (IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO15 0 — 255 InfNo 1 0 Information number for binary channel 15 (IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO16 0 — 255 InfNo 1 0 Information number for binary channel 16 (IEC -60870-5-103)
Section 15 1MRK505222-UUS C Monitoring
970 Technical reference manual
15.7.6 Technical data Table 596: DRPRDRE technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy Pre-fault time (0.059.90) s —
Post-fault time (0.110.0) s —
Limit time (0.510.0) s —
Maximum number of recordings 100, first in — first out —
Time tagging resolution 1 ms See table 28
Maximum number of analog inputs 30 + 10 (external + internally derived)
—
Maximum number of binary inputs 96 —
Maximum number of phasors in the Trip Value recorder per recording
30 —
Maximum number of indications in a disturbance report
96 —
Maximum number of events in the Event recording per recording
150 —
Maximum number of events in the Sequence of events
1000, first in — first out —
Maximum total recording time (3.4 s recording time and maximum number of channels, typical value)
340 seconds (100 recordings) at 50 Hz, 280 seconds (80 recordings) at 60 Hz
—
Sampling rate 1 kHz at 50 Hz 1.2 kHz at 60 Hz
—
Recording bandwidth (5-300) Hz —
15.8 Sequential of events
15.8.1 Introduction Continuous event-logging is useful for monitoring the system from an overview perspective and is a complement to specific disturbance recorder functions.
The sequential of events logs all binary input signals connected to the Disturbance report function. The list may contain up to 1000 time-tagged events stored in a ring-buffer.
15.8.2 Principle of operation When a binary signal, connected to the disturbance report function, changes status, the sequential of events function stores input name, status and time in the sequential of
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 15 Monitoring
971 Technical reference manual
events in chronological order. The list can contain up to 1000 events from both internal logic signals and binary input channels. If the list is full, the oldest event is overwritten when a new event arrives.
The list can be configured to show oldest or newest events first with a setting on the local HMI.
The sequential of events function runs continuously, in contrast to the event recorder function, which is only active during a disturbance, and each event record is an integral part of its associated DR.
The name of the binary signal that appears in the event recording is the user-defined name assigned when the IED is configured. The same name is used in the disturbance recorder function (DR), indications (IND) and the event recorder function (ER).
The sequential of events is stored and managed separate from the disturbance report information(ER, DR, IND, TVR and FL).
15.8.3 Function block The Sequential of events has no function block of its own.It is included in the DRPRDRE block and uses information from the BxRBDR block.
15.8.4 Input signals The Sequential of events logs the same binary input signals as configured for the Disturbance report function.
15.8.5 Technical data Table 597: technical data
Function Value Buffer capacity Maximum number of events in the list 1000
Resolution 1 ms
Accuracy Depending on time synchronizing
Section 15 1MRK505222-UUS C Monitoring
972 Technical reference manual
15.9 Indications
15.9.1 Introduction To get fast, condensed and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/ or in the secondary system it is important to know, for example binary signals that have changed status during a disturbance. This information is used in the short perspective to get information via the local HMI in a straightforward way.
There are three LEDs on the local HMI (green, yellow and red), which will display status information about the IED and the Disturbance report function (triggered).
The Indication list function shows all selected binary input signals connected to the Disturbance report function that have changed status during a disturbance.
15.9.2 Principle of operation The LED indications display this information:
Green LED:
Steady light In Service
Flashing light Internal fail
Dark No power supply
Yellow LED:
Steady light A disturbance report is triggered
Flashing light The IED is in test mode or in configuration mode
Red LED:
Steady light Trigged on binary signal N with SetLEDN=On
Indication list:
The possible indication signals are the same as the ones chosen for the disturbance report function and disturbance recorder.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 15 Monitoring
973 Technical reference manual
The indication function tracks 0 to 1 changes of binary signals during the recording period of the collection window. This means that constant logic zero, constant logic one or state changes from logic one to logic zero will not be visible in the list of indications. Signals are not time tagged. In order to be recorded in the list of indications the:
the signal must be connected to binary input(DRB1-6) the DRP parameter Operation must be set Enabled the DRP must be trigged (binary or analog)
Indications are selected with the indication mask (IndicationMask) when setting the binary inputs.
The name of the binary signal that appears in the Indication function is the user-defined name assigned at configuration of the IED. The same name is used in disturbance recorder function (DR), indications (IND) and event recorder function (ER).
15.9.3 Function block The Indications function has no function block of its own. It is included in the DRPRDRE block and uses information from the BxRBDR block.
15.9.4 Input signals The Indications function logs the same binary input signals as the Disturbance report function.
15.9.5 Technical data Table 598: technical data
Function Value Buffer capacity Maximum number of indications presented
for single disturbance 96
Maximum number of recorded disturbances 100
15.10 Event recorder
15.10.1 Introduction Quick, complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in the secondary system is vital, for example, time-tagged events logged during
Section 15 1MRK505222-UUS C Monitoring
974 Technical reference manual
disturbances. This information is used for different purposes in the short term (for example corrective actions) and in the long term (for example functional analysis).
The event recorder logs all selected binary input signals connected to the Disturbance report function. Each recording can contain up to 150 time-tagged events.
The event recorder information is available for the disturbances locally in the IED.
The event recording information is an integrated part of the disturbance record (Comtrade file).
15.10.2 Principle of operation When one of the trig conditions for the disturbance report is activated, the event recorder logs every status change in the 96 selected binary signals. The events can be generated by both internal logical signals and binary input channels. The internal signals are time-tagged in the main processor module, while the binary input channels are time-tagged directly in each I/O module. The events are collected during the total recording time (pre-, post-fault and limit time), and are stored in the disturbance report flash memory at the end of each recording.
In case of overlapping recordings, due to PostRetrig = Enabled and a new trig signal appears during post-fault time, events will be saved in both recording files.
The name of the binary input signal that appears in the event recording is the user- defined name assigned when configuring the IED. The same name is used in the disturbance recorder function (DR), indications (IND) and event recorder function(ER).
The event record is stored as a part of the disturbance report information (ER, DR, IND, TVR and FL) and managed via the local HMI or PCM600.
Events can not be read from the IED if more than one user is accessing the IED simultaneously.
15.10.3 Function block The Event recorder has no function block of its own. It is included in the DRPRDRE block and uses information from the BxRBDR block.
15.10.4 Input signals The Event recorder function logs the same binary input signals as the Disturbance report function.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 15 Monitoring
975 Technical reference manual
15.10.5 Technical data Table 599: technical data
Function Value Buffer capacity Maximum number of events in disturbance report 150
Maximum number of disturbance reports 100
Resolution 1 ms
Accuracy Depending on time synchronizing
15.11 Trip value recorder
15.11.1 Introduction Information about the pre-fault and fault values for currents and voltages are vital for the disturbance evaluation.
The Trip value recorder calculates the values of all selected analog input signals connected to the Disturbance report function. The result is magnitude and phase angle before and during the fault for each analog input signal.
The trip value recorder information is available for the disturbances locally in the IED.
The trip value recorder information is an integrated part of the disturbance record (Comtrade file).
15.11.2 Principle of operation Trip value recorder (TVR)calculates and presents both fault and pre-fault magnitudes as well as the phase angles of all the selected analog input signals. The parameter ZeroAngleRef points out which input signal is used as the angle reference. The calculated data is input information to the fault locator (FL).
When the disturbance report function is triggered the sample for the fault interception is searched for, by checking the non-periodic changes in the analog input signals. The channel search order is consecutive, starting with the analog input with the lowest number.
When a fault interception point is found, the Fourier estimation of the pre-fault values of the complex values of the analog signals starts 1.5 cycle before the fault sample. The estimation uses samples during one period. The post-fault values are calculated using the Recursive Least Squares (RLS) method. The calculation starts a few samples after
Section 15 1MRK505222-UUS C Monitoring
976 Technical reference manual
the fault sample and uses samples during 1/2 — 2 cycles depending on the shape of the signals.
If no starting point is found in the recording, the disturbance report trig sample is used as the start sample for the Fourier estimation. The estimation uses samples during one cycle before the trig sample. In this case the calculated values are used both as pre-fault and fault values.
The name of the analog signal that appears in the Trip value recorder function is the user- defined name assigned when the IED is configured. The same name is used in the Disturbance recorder function (DR).
The trip value record is stored as a part of the disturbance report information (ER, DR, IND, TVR and fault locator) and managed in PCM600 or via the local HMI.
15.11.3 Function block The Trip value recorder has no function block of its own. It is included in the DRPRDRE block and uses information from the BxRBDR block.
15.11.4 Input signals The trip value recorder function uses analog input signals connected to A1RADR to A3RADR (not A4RADR).
15.11.5 Technical data Table 600: technical data
Function Value Buffer capacity
Maximum number of analog inputs 30
Maximum number of disturbance reports 100
15.12 Disturbance recorder
15.12.1 Introduction The Disturbance recorder function supplies fast, complete and reliable information about disturbances in the power system. It facilitates understanding system behavior and related primary and secondary equipment during and after a disturbance. Recorded information is used for different purposes in the short perspective (for example corrective actions) and long perspective (for example functional analysis).
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 15 Monitoring
977 Technical reference manual
The Disturbance recorder acquires sampled data from selected analog- and binary signals connected to the Disturbance report function (maximum 40 analog and 96 binary signals). The binary signals available are the same as for the event recorder function.
The function is characterized by great flexibility and is not dependent on the operation of protection functions. It can record disturbances not detected by protection functions. Up to ten seconds of data before the trigger instant can be saved in the disturbance file.
The disturbance recorder information for up to 100 disturbances are saved in the IED and the local HMI is used to view the list of recordings.
15.12.2 Principle of operation Disturbance recording (DR) is based on the acquisition of binary and analog signals. The binary signals can be either true binary input signals or internal logical signals generated by the functions in the IED. The analog signals to be recorded are input channels from the Transformer Input Module (TRM), Line Differential communication Module (LDCM) through the Signal Matrix Analog Input (SMAI) and possible summation (Sum3Ph) function blocks and some internally derived analog signals.For details, refer to section «Disturbance report DRPRDRE».
Disturbance recorder collects analog values and binary signals continuously, in a cyclic buffer. The pre-fault buffer operates according to the FIFO principle; old data will continuously be overwritten as new data arrives when the buffer is full. The size of this buffer is determined by the set pre-fault recording time.
Upon detection of a fault condition (triggering), the disturbance is time tagged and the data storage continues in a post-fault buffer. The storage process continues as long as the fault condition prevails — plus a certain additional time. This is called the post-fault time and it can be set in the disturbance report.
The above mentioned two parts form a disturbance recording. The whole memory, intended for disturbance recordings, acts as a cyclic buffer and when it is full, the oldest recording is overwritten. Up to the last 100 recordings are stored in the IED.
The time tagging refers to the activation of the trigger that starts the disturbance recording. A recording can be trigged by, manual start, binary input and/or from analog inputs (over-/underlevel trig).
A user-defined name for each of the signals can be set. These names are common for all functions within the disturbance report functionality.
Section 15 1MRK505222-UUS C Monitoring
978 Technical reference manual
15.12.2.1 Memory and storage
The maximum number of recordings depend on each recordings total recording time. Long recording time will reduce the number of recordings to less than 100.
The IED flash disk should NOT be used to store any user files. This might cause disturbance recordings to be deleted due to lack of disk space.
When a recording is completed, a post recording processing occurs.
This post-recording processing comprises:
Saving the data for analog channels with corresponding data for binary signals Add relevant data to be used by the Disturbance handling tool (part of PCM 600) Compression of the data, which is performed without losing any data accuracy Storing the compressed data in a non-volatile memory (flash memory)
The recorded disturbance is now ready for retrieval and evaluation.
The recording files comply with the Comtrade standard IEC 60255-24 and are divided into three files; a header file (HDR), a configuration file (CFG) and a data file (DAT).
The header file (optional in the standard) contains basic information about the disturbance, that is, information from the Disturbance report sub-functions(ER, TVR and FL). The Disturbance handling tool use this information and present the recording in a user-friendly way.
General:
Station name, object name and unit name Date and time for the trig of the disturbance Record number Sampling rate Time synchronization source Recording times Activated trig signal Active setting group
Analog:
Signal names for selected analog channels Information e.g. trig on analog inputs Primary and secondary instrument transformer rating
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 15 Monitoring
979 Technical reference manual
Over- or Undertrig: level and operation Over- or Undertrig status at time of trig CT direction
Binary:
Signal names Status of binary input signals
The configuration file is a mandatory file containing information needed to interpret the data file. For example sampling rate, number of channels, system frequency, channel info etc.
The data file, which also is mandatory, containing values for each input channel for each sample in the record (scaled value). The data file also contains a sequence number and time stamp for each set of samples.
15.12.2.2 IEC 60870-5-103
The communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 may be used to poll disturbance recordings from the IED to a master (station HSI). The standard describes how to handle 8 disturbance recordings, 8 analog channels (4 currents and 4 voltages) using the public range and binary signals.
The last 8 recordings, out of maximum 100, are available for transfer to the master. When the last one is transferred and acknowledged new recordings in the IED will appear, in the master points of view (even if they already where stored in the IED).
To be able to report 40 analog channels from the IED using IEC 60870-5-103 the first 8 channels are placed in the public range and the next 32 are placed in the private range. To comply the standard the first 8 must be configured according to table 601.
Table 601: Configuration of analog channels
Signal Disturbance recorder IA A1RADR INPUT1
IB A1RADR INPUT2
IC A1RADR INPUT3
IN A1RADR INPUT4
VA A1RADR INPUT5
VB A1RADR INPUT6
VC A1RADR INPUT7
VN A1RADR INPUT8
Section 15 1MRK505222-UUS C Monitoring
980 Technical reference manual
The binary signals connected to BxRBDR are reported by polling. The function blocks include function type and information number.
15.12.3 Function block The Disturbance recorder has no function block of its own. It is included in the DRPRDRE, AxRADR and BxRBDR block.
15.12.4 Input and output signals For signals see section, in Disturbance report, «Input and output signals».
15.12.5 Setting parameters For Setting parameters see section «Disturbance report DRPRDRE».
15.12.6 Technical data Table 602: technical data
Function Value Buffer capacity Maximum number of analog inputs 40
Maximum number of binary inputs 96
Maximum number of disturbance reports 100
Maximum total recording time (3.4 s recording time and maximum number of channels, typical value)
340 seconds (100 recordings) at 50 Hz 280 seconds (80 recordings) at 60 Hz
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 15 Monitoring
981 Technical reference manual
Section 16 Metering
About this chapter This chapter describes among others, Pulse counter logic which is a function used to meter externally generated binary pulses. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals, and technical data are included for each function.
16.1 Pulse-counter logic PCGGIO
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Pulse-counter logic PCGGIO
S00947 V1 EN
—
16.1.1 Introduction Pulse counter (PCGGIO) function counts externally generated binary pulses, for instance pulses coming from an external energy meter, for calculation of energy consumption values. The pulses are captured by the binary input module and then read by the function. A scaled service value is available over the station bus. The special Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities must be ordered to achieve this functionality.
16.1.2 Principle of operation
The registration of pulses is done for positive transitions (0->1) on one of the 16 binary input channels located on the Binary Input Module (BIM). Pulse counter values are sent to the station HMI with predefined cyclicity without reset.
The reporting time period can be set in the range from 1 second to 60 minutes and is synchronized with absolute system time. Interrogation of additional pulse counter values can be done with a command (intermediate reading) for a single counter. All
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 16 Metering
983 Technical reference manual
active counters can also be read by the LON General Interrogation command (GI) or IEC 61850.
Pulse counter (PCGGIO) function in the IED supports unidirectional incremental counters. That means only positive values are possible. The counter uses a 32 bit format, that is, the reported value is a 32-bit, signed integer with a range 0…+2147483647. The counter is reset at initialization of the IED.
The reported value to station HMI over the station bus contains Identity, Scaled Value (pulse count x scale), Time, and Pulse Counter Quality. The Pulse Counter Quality consists of:
Invalid (board hardware error or configuration error) Wrapped around Blocked Adjusted
The transmission of the counter value by SPA can be done as a service value, that is, the value frozen in the last integration cycle is read by the station HMI from the database. PCGGIO updates the value in the database when an integration cycle is finished and activates the NEW_VAL signal in the function block. This signal can be connected to an Event function block, be time tagged, and transmitted to the station HMI. This time corresponds to the time when the value was frozen by the function.
The pulse counter function requires a binary input card, BIMp, that is specially adapted to the pulse counter function.
Figure 481 shows the pulse counter function block with connections of the inputs and outputs.
Section 16 1MRK505222-UUS C Metering
984 Technical reference manual
en05000744_ansi.vsd
PulseCounter BLOCK
READ_VAL
BI_PULSE
Pulse INPUT OUT
Database Pulse counter value: 0…2147483647
SMS settings 1.Operation = Off/On 2.tReporting = 0s…60min 3.Event Mask = No Events/Report Events
SingleCmdFunc OUTx
SingleCmdFunc OUTx
I/O- module
Pulse length >1s
INVALID RESTART
BLOCKED NEW_VAL
INPUT1 INPUT2
INPUT3 INPUT4
EVENT
Reset counter RS_CNT NAME
SCAL_VAL
4.Scale = 1-90000
IEC EVENT
ANSI05000744 V1 EN
Figure 481: Overview of the pulse counter function
The BLOCK and READ_VAL inputs can be connected to Single Command blocks, which are intended to be controlled either from the station HMI or/and the local HMI. As long as the BLOCK signal is set, the pulse counter is blocked. The signal connected to READ_VAL performs one additional reading per positive flank. The signal must be a pulse with a length >1 second.
The BI_PULSE input is connected to the used input of the function block for the Binary Input Module (BIM).
The RS_CNT input is used for resetting the counter.
Each pulse counter function block has four binary output signals that can be connected to an Event function block for event recording: INVALID, RESTART, BLOCKED and NEW_VAL. The SCAL_VAL signal can be connected to the IEC Event function block.
The INVALID signal is a steady signal and is set if the Binary Input Module, where the pulse counter input is located, fails or has wrong configuration.
The RESTART signal is a steady signal and is set when the reported value does not comprise a complete integration cycle. That is, in the first message after IED start-up, in the first message after deblocking, and after the counter has wrapped around during last integration cycle.
The BLOCKED signal is a steady signal and is set when the counter is blocked. There are two reasons why the counter is blocked:
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 16 Metering
985 Technical reference manual
The BLOCK input is set, or The Binary Input Module, where the counter input is situated, is inoperative.
The NEW_VAL signal is a pulse signal. The signal is set if the counter value was updated since last report.
Note, the pulse is short, one cycle.
The SCAL_VAL signal consists of scaled value (according to parameter Scale), time and status information.
16.1.3 Function block
IEC05000709-2-en.vsd
PCGGIO BLOCK READ_VAL BI_PULSE* RS_CNT
INVALID RESTART BLOCKED NEW_VAL
SCAL_VAL
IEC05000709 V3 EN
Figure 482: PCGGIO function block
16.1.4 Input and output signals Table 603: PCGGIO Input signals
Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
READ_VAL BOOLEAN 0 Initiates an additional pulse counter reading
BI_PULSE BOOLEAN 0 Connect binary input channel for metering
RS_CNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets pulse counter value
Table 604: PCGGIO Output signals
Name Type Description INVALID BOOLEAN The pulse counter value is invalid
RESTART BOOLEAN The reported value does not comprise a complete integration cycle
BLOCKED BOOLEAN The pulse counter function is blocked
NEW_VAL BOOLEAN A new pulse counter value is generated
SCAL_VAL REAL Scaled value with time and status information
Section 16 1MRK505222-UUS C Metering
986 Technical reference manual
16.1.5 Setting parameters Table 605: PCGGIO Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Operation Enable/Disable
EventMask NoEvents ReportEvents
— — NoEvents Report mask for analog events from pulse counter
CountCriteria Disabled RisingEdge Falling edge OnChange
— — RisingEdge Pulse counter criteria
Scale 1.000 — 90000.000 — 0.001 1.000 Scaling value for SCAL_VAL output to unit per counted value
Quantity Count ActivePower ApparentPower ReactivePower ActiveEnergy ApparentEnergy ReactiveEnergy
— — Count Measured quantity for SCAL_VAL output
tReporting 0 — 3600 s 1 60 Cycle time for reporting of counter value
16.1.6 Technical data Table 606: PCGGIO technical data
Function Setting range Accuracy Input frequency See Binary Input Module (BIM) —
Cycle time for report of counter value
(13600) s —
16.2 Function for energy calculation and demand handling ETPMMTR
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Energy calculation and demand handling
ETPMMTR —
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 16 Metering
987 Technical reference manual
16.2.1 Introduction Outputs from the Measurements (CVMMXN) function can be used to calculate energy consumption. Active as well as reactive values are calculated in import and export direction. Values can be read or generated as pulses. Maximum demand power values are also calculated by the function.
16.2.2 Principle of operation The instantaneous output values of active and reactive power from the Measurements (CVMMXN) function block are used and integrated over a selected time tEnergy to measure the integrated energy. The energy values (in MWh and MVarh) are available as output signals and also as pulsed output which can be connected to a pulse counter. Outputs are available for forward as well as reverse direction. The accumulated energy values can be reset from the local HMI reset menu or with input signal RSTACC.
The maximum demand values for active and reactive power are calculated for the set time tEnergy and the maximum value is stored in a register available over communication and from outputs MAXPAFD, MAXPARD, MAXPRFD, MAXPRRD for the active and reactive power forward and reverse direction until reset with input signal RSTDMD or from the local HMI reset menu.
P Q
STACC RSTACC RSTDMD
TRUE FALSE FALSE
CVMMXN
IEC09000106.vsd
ETPMMTR P_INST Q_INST
IEC09000106 V1 EN
Figure 483: Connection of Energy calculation and demand handling function (ETPMMTR) to the Measurements function (CVMMXN)
Section 16 1MRK505222-UUS C Metering
988 Technical reference manual
16.2.3 Function block
IEC07000120-2-en.vsd
ETPMMTR P Q STACC RSTACC RSTDMD
ACCST EAFPULSE EARPULSE ERFPULSE ERRPULSE
EAFALM EARALM ERFALM ERRALM EAFACC EARACC ERFACC ERRACC
MAXPAFD MAXPARD MAXPRFD MAXPRRD
IEC07000120 V2 EN
Figure 484: ETPMMTR function block
16.2.4 Input and output signals Table 607: ETPMMTR Input signals
Name Type Default Description P REAL 0 Measured active power
Q REAL 0 Measured reactive power
STACC BOOLEAN 0 Start to accumulate energy values
RSTACC BOOLEAN 0 Reset of accumulated enery reading
RSTDMD BOOLEAN 0 Reset of maximum demand reading
Table 608: ETPMMTR Output signals
Name Type Description ACCST BOOLEAN Start of accumulating energy values.
EAFPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated forward active energy pulse
EARPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated reverse active energy pulse
ERFPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated forward reactive energy pulse
ERRPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated reverse reactive energy pulse
EAFALM BOOLEAN Alarm for active forward energy exceed limit in set interval
EARALM BOOLEAN Alarm for active reverse energy exceed limit in set interval
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 16 Metering
989 Technical reference manual
Name Type Description ERFALM BOOLEAN Alarm for reactive forward energy exceed limit in set
interval
ERRALM BOOLEAN Alarm for reactive reverse energy exceed limit in set interval
EAFACC REAL Accumulated forward active energy value in Ws
EARACC REAL Accumulated reverse active energy value in Ws
ERFACC REAL Accumulated forward reactive energy value in VArS
ERRACC REAL Accumulated reverse reactive energy value in VArS
MAXPAFD REAL Maximum forward active power demand value for set interval
MAXPARD REAL Maximum reverse active power demand value for set interval
MAXPRFD REAL Maximum forward reactive power demand value for set interval
MAXPRRD REAL Maximum reactive power demand value in reverse direction
16.2.5 Setting parameters Table 609: ETPMMTR Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Operation Enable/Disable
StartAcc Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Activate the accumulation of energy values
tEnergy 1 Minute 5 Minutes 10 Minutes 15 Minutes 30 Minutes 60 Minutes 180 Minutes
— — 1 Minute Time interval for energy calculation
tEnergyOnPls 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Energy accumulated pulse ON time in secs
tEnergyOffPls 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.500 Energy accumulated pulse OFF time in secs
EAFAccPlsQty 0.001 — 10000.000 MWh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for active forward accumulated energy value
EARAccPlsQty 0.001 — 10000.000 MWh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for active reverse accumulated energy value
ERFAccPlsQty 0.001 — 10000.000 MVArh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for reactive forward accumulated energy value
ERVAccPlsQty 0.001 — 10000.000 MVArh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for reactive reverse accumulated energy value
Section 16 1MRK505222-UUS C Metering
990 Technical reference manual
Table 610: ETPMMTR Non group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description EALim 0.001 —
10000000000.000 MWh 0.001 1000000.000 Active energy limit
ERLim 0.001 — 10000000000.000
MVArh 0.001 1000.000 Reactive energy limit
DirEnergyAct Forward Reverse
— — Forward Direction of active energy flow Forward/ Reverse
DirEnergyReac Forward Reverse
— — Forward Direction of reactive energy flow Forward/ Reverse
EnZeroClamp Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Enable of zero point clamping detection function
LevZeroClampP 0.001 — 10000.000 MW 0.001 10.000 Zero point clamping level at active Power
LevZeroClampQ 0.001 — 10000.000 MVAr 0.001 10.000 Zero point clamping level at reactive Power
EAFPrestVal 0.000 — 10000.000 MWh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for forward active energy
EARPrestVal 0.000 — 10000.000 MWh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for reverse active energy
ERFPresetVal 0.000 — 10000.000 MVArh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for forward reactive energy
ERVPresetVal 0.000 — 10000.000 MVArh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for reverse reactive energy
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 16 Metering
991 Technical reference manual
Section 17 Station communication
About this chapter This chapter describes the functions and protocols used on the interfaces to the substation automation and substation monitoring buses. The way these work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are included for each function.
17.1 Overview
Each IED is provided with a communication interface, enabling it to connect to one or many substation level systems or equipment, either on the Substation Automation (SA) bus or Substation Monitoring (SM) bus.
Following communication protocols are available:
IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol IEC 61850-9-2LE communication protocol LON communication protocol SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol DNP3.0 communication protocol
Theoretically, several protocols can be combined in the same IED.
17.2 IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol
17.2.1 Introduction The IED is equipped with single or double optical Ethernet rear ports (order dependent) for IEC 61850-8-1 station bus communication. The IEC 61850-8-1 communication is also possible from the optical Ethernet front port. IEC 61850-8-1 protocol allows intelligent electrical devices (IEDs) from different vendors to exchange information and simplifies system engineering. Peer-to-peer communication according to GOOSE is part of the standard. Disturbance files uploading is provided.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 17 Station communication
993 Technical reference manual
17.2.2 Setting parameters Table 611: IEC61850-8-1 Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Off
On — — Off Operation Off/On
GOOSE Front OEM311_AB OEM311_CD
— — OEM311_AB Port for GOOSE communication
17.2.3 Technical data Table 612: IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol
Function Value Protocol IEC 61850-8-1
Communication speed for the IEDs 100BASE-FX
Protocol IEC 6085103
Communication speed for the IEDs 9600 or 19200 Bd
Protocol DNP3.0
Communication speed for the IEDs 30019200 Bd
Protocol TCP/IP, Ethernet
Communication speed for the IEDs 100 Mbit/s
17.2.4 IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions SPGGIO, SP16GGIO
17.2.4.1 Introduction
IEC61850 generic communication I/O functions (SPGGIO) is used to send one single logical signal to other systems or equipment in the substation.
17.2.4.2 Principle of operation
Upon receiving a signal at its input, IEC61850 generic communication I/O functions (SPGGIO) function sends the signal over IEC 61850-8-1 to the equipment or system that requests this signal. To get the signal, PCM600 must be used to define which function block in which equipment or system should receive this information.
Section 17 1MRK505222-UUS C Station communication
994 Technical reference manual
17.2.4.3 Function block
IEC07000124-2-en.vsd
SPGGIO BLOCK ^IN
IEC07000124 V2 EN
Figure 485: SPGGIO function block
IEC07000125-2-en.vsd
SP16GGIO BLOCK ^IN1 ^IN2 ^IN3 ^IN4 ^IN5 ^IN6 ^IN7 ^IN8 ^IN9 ^IN10 ^IN11 ^IN12 ^IN13 ^IN14 ^IN15 ^IN16
IEC07000125 V2 EN
Figure 486: SP16GGIO function block
17.2.4.4 Input and output signals
Table 613: SPGGIO Input signals
Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN BOOLEAN 0 Input status
Table 614: SP16GGIO Input signals
Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 status
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 status
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 status
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 status
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 status
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 status
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 17 Station communication
995 Technical reference manual
Name Type Default Description IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7 status
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8 status
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9 status
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10 status
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11 status
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12 status
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13 status
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14 status
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15 status
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16 status
17.2.4.5 Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.
17.2.5 IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions MVGGIO
IEC61850 generic communication I/O functions (MVGGIO) function is used to send the instantaneous value of an analog signal to other systems or equipment in the substation. It can also be used inside the same IED, to attach a RANGE aspect to an analog value and to permit measurement supervision on that value.
17.2.5.1 Principle of operation
Upon receiving an analog signal at its input, IEC61850 generic communication I/O functions (MVGGIO) will give the instantaneous value of the signal and the range, as output values. In the same time, it will send over IEC 61850-8-1 the value, to other IEC 61850 clients in the substation.
17.2.5.2 Function block
IEC05000408-2-en.vsd
MVGGIO BLOCK ^IN
^VALUE RANGE
IEC05000408 V2 EN
Figure 487: MVGGIO function block
Section 17 1MRK505222-UUS C Station communication
996 Technical reference manual
17.2.5.3 Input and output signals
Table 615: MVGGIO Input signals
Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN REAL 0 Analogue input value
Table 616: MVGGIO Output signals
Name Type Description VALUE REAL Magnitude of deadband value
RANGE INTEGER Range
17.2.5.4 Setting parameters
Table 617: MVGGIO Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description MV db 1 — 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
MV zeroDb 0 — 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range
MV hhLim -10000000000.000 — 10000000000.000
— 0.001 90.000 High High limit
MV hLim -10000000000.000 — 10000000000.000
— 0.001 80.000 High limit
MV lLim -10000000000.000 — 10000000000.000
— 0.001 -80.000 Low limit
MV llLim -10000000000.000 — 10000000000.000
— 0.001 -90.000 Low Low limit
MV min -10000000000.000 — 10000000000.000
— 0.001 -100.000 Minimum value
MV max -10000000000.000 — 10000000000.000
— 0.001 100.000 Maximum value
MV dbType Cyclic Dead band Int deadband
— — Dead band Reporting type
MV limHys 0.000 — 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits)
17.2.6 IEC 61850-8-1 redundant station bus communication
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 17 Station communication
997 Technical reference manual
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Parallel Redundancy Protocol Status PRPSTATUS — —
Duo driver configuration DUODRV — —
17.2.6.1 Introduction
Redundant station bus communication according to IEC 62439-3 Edition 1 and IEC 62439-3 Edition 2 are available as options in 670 series IEDs. IEC 62439-3 parallel redundant protocol is an optional quantity and the selection is made at ordering. Redundant station bus communication according to IEC 62439-3 uses both port AB and port CD on the OEM module.
Select IEC 62439-3 Edition 1 protocol at the time of ordering when an existing redundant station bus DuoDriver installation is extended. Select IEC 62439-3 Edition 2 protocol at the time of ordering for new installations with redundant station bus. IEC 62439-3 Edition 1 is NOT compatible with IEC 62439-3 Edition 2.
17.2.6.2 Principle of operation
The redundant station bus communication (DUODRV) is configured using the local HMI. The settings for DUODRV are also visible in PST in PCM600.
The communication is performed in parallel, that is the same data package is transmitted on both channels simultaneously. The received package identity from one channel is compared with data package identity from the other channel, if the same, the last package is discarded.
PRPSTATUS function block supervise the redundant communication on the two channels. If no data package has been received on one (or both) channels within the last 10 s, the output LAN-A-STATUS and/or LAN-B-STATUS is set to indicate error.
Section 17 1MRK505222-UUS C Station communication
998 Technical reference manual
Duo
Switch A Switch B 1 2
Redundancy Supervision
Station Control System
DataData
DataData
IEC09000758-2-en.vsd
IED Configuration
DUODRV PRPSTATUS
1 2
OEM
AB CD
IEC09000758 V2 EN
Figure 488: Redundant station bus
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 17 Station communication
999 Technical reference manual
17.2.6.3 Function block
PRPSTATUS LAN-A-Status LAN-B-Status
IEC09000757-1-en.vsd IEC09000757 V1 EN
Figure 489: PRPSTATUS function block
17.2.6.4 Output signals
Table 618: PRPSTATUS Output signals
Name Type Description LAN-A-Status BOOLEAN Channel A status
LAN-B-Status BOOLEAN Channel B status
17.2.6.5 Setting parameters
Table 619: DUODRV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
IPAddress 0 — 18 IP Address
1 192.168.7.10 IP-Address
IPMask 0 — 18 IP Address
1 255.255.255.0 IP-Mask
17.3 IEC 61850-9-2LE communication protocol
17.3.1 Introduction The IEC 61850-9-2LE process bus communication protocol enables an IED to communicate with devices providing measured values in digital format, commonly known as Merging Units (MU). The physical interface in the IED that is used for the communication is the OEM modules (the two port module version) «CD» port.
17.3.2 Principle of operation The ABB merging units (MUs) are situated close to primary equipment, like circuit breakers, isolators, etc. The MUs have the capability to gather measured values from
Section 17 1MRK505222-UUS C Station communication
1000 Technical reference manual
measuring transformers, non-conventional transducers or both. The gathered data are then transmitted to subscribers over the process bus, utilizing the IEC 61850-9-2LE protocol.
ABB «physical MU» contains up to 3 logical MUs, each capable of sampling 4 currents and 4 voltages.
The IED communicates with the MUs over the process bus via the OEM module port «CD». For the user, the MU appears in the IED as a normal analogue input module and is engineered in the very same way.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 17 Station communication
1001 Technical reference manual
Combi Sensor
ABB Merging
Unit
ABB Merging
Unit
Ethernet Switch
Combi Sensor
IEC61850-9-2LE
IEC61850-9-2LE
IEC61850-9-2LE
Splitter Electrical-to-
Optical Converter
IRIG-B 1344
1PPS 1PPS
Station Wide GPS Clock
en08000212-2.vsd
OEM Module
Preprocessing blocks SMAI
Application
IED
MU1 (Logic MU) MU2 (Logic MU)
CD
SMAI1 BLOCK DFTSPFC ^GRP1L1 ^GRP1L2 ^GRP1L3 ^GRP1N TYPE
SPFCOUT AI3P
AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AIN
IEC08000212 V2 EN
Figure 490: Example of signal path for sampled analog values from MU with IRIG- B synchronization
Section 17 1MRK505222-UUS C Station communication
1002 Technical reference manual
CTCT Combi Sensor
ABB Merging
Unit
ABB Merging
Unit
Ethernet Switch
Combi Sensor
Conventional VT
IEC61850-9-2LE
IEC61850-9-2LE
IEC61850-9-2LE
Splitter Electrical-to-
Optical Converter
1PPS
1PPS 1PPS
110 V 1 A
Station Wide GPS Clock
en08000072-2.vsd
OEM Module
Preprocessing blocks SMAI
Application
MU1 MU2
1 A
TRM module
Preprocessing blocks SMAI
IED
CD
IEC08000072 V2 EN
Figure 491: Example of signal path for sampled analogue values from MU and conventional CT/VT
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 17 Station communication
1003 Technical reference manual
The function has the following alarm signals:
MUDATA: Indicates when sample sequence needs to be realigned. that is the application soon needs to be restarted. The signal is raised to 2 s before the application is restarted.
SYNCH: Indicates that the time quality of the hardware is out of the set value from parameter synchAccLevel (1 s, 4 s or unspecified) and the parameter AppSynch is set to Synch. In case of AppSynch is set to NoSynch the SYNCH output will never go high.
SMPLLOST: Indicates that more than one sample has been lost/been marked invalid/ overflow/ been marked failed, and the sample has thereafter been substituted. When SMPLLOST is high, protection is blocked.
MUSYNCH: Indicates that the MU connected is not synchronized. Received from quality flag in datastream. No IED setting affects this signal.
TESTMODE: Indicates that the MU connected is in TestMode. Received from quality flag in datastream. No IED setting affects this signal.
Timeout
TSYNCERR Indicates that there is some timeout on any configured time source or the time quality is worse than specified in SynchAccLevel. The timeout is individually specified per time source (PPS, IRIG-B, SNTP etc.) See section «Time synchronization»
Blocking condition
Blocking of protection functions is indicated by (SAMPLOST is high) or (MUSYNCH is high and AppSynch is set to Synch) or (SYNCH is high)
Application synch is not required for differential protection based on ECHO mode. A missing PPS however will lead to a drift between MU and IED. Therefore protection functions in this case will be blocked.
17.3.3 Consequence on accuracy for power measurement functions when using signals from IEC 61850-9-2LE communication The Power measurement functions (CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU and VNMMXU) contains correction factors to account for the non-linearity in the input circuits, mainly in the input transformers, when using direct analogue connection to the IED.
The IED will use the same correction factors also when feeding the IED with analog signals over IEC 61850-9-2LE. Since the signals via IEC 61850-9-2LE are not subject to the same non-linearity errors this will cause an inaccuracy in the measured values.
For voltage signals the correction factors are less than 0.05% of the measured value and no angle compensation why the impact on reported value can be ignored.
Section 17 1MRK505222-UUS C Station communication
1004 Technical reference manual
For current signals the correction factors will cause a not insignificant impact on the reported values at low currents. The correction factors are +2.4% and -3.6 degrees at signal levels below 5% of set base current, +0.6% and -1.12 degrees at signal level 30% of set base current and 0% and -0.44 degrees at signal levels above 100% of set base current. Between the calibration points 5%, 30% and 100% of set base current, linear interpolation is used. Since the output from the Power measurement function is used as an input for the Energy measuring function (ETPMMTR) the above described impact will also be valid for the output values for ETPMMTR.
17.3.4 Function block
The function blocks are not represented in the configuration tool. The signals appear only in the SMT tool when merging units (MU) are included in the configuration with the function selector tool. In the SMT tool they can be mapped to the desired virtual input (SMAI) of the IED and used internally in the configuration.
17.3.5 Output signals Table 620: MU1_4I_4U Output signals
Name Type Description I1 STRING Analogue input I1
I2 STRING Analogue input I2
I3 STRING Analogue input I3
I4 STRING Analogue input I4
V1 STRING Analogue input U1
V2 STRING Analogue input U2
V3 STRING Analogue input U3
V4 STRING Analogue input U4
MUDATA BOOLEAN Fatal error, serious data loss
SYNCH BOOLEAN MU clock synchronized to same clock as IED
SMPLLOST BOOLEAN Sample lost
MUSYNCH BOOLEAN Synchronization lost in MU
TESTMODE BOOLEAN MU in test mode
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 17 Station communication
1005 Technical reference manual
17.3.6 Setting parameters Table 621: MU1_4I_4U Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description SVId 0 — 35 — 1 ABB_MU0101 MU identifier
SmplGrp 0 — 65535 — 1 0 Sampling group
CT_WyePoint1 FromObject ToObject
— — ToObject ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite
CT_WyePoint2 FromObject ToObject
— — ToObject ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite
CT_WyePoint3 FromObject ToObject
— — ToObject ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite
CT_WyePoint4 FromObject ToObject
— — ToObject ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite
Table 622: MU1_4I_4U Non group settings (advanced)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description SynchMode NoSynch
Init Operation
— — Operation Synchronization mode
17.3.7 Technical data Table 623: IEC 61850-9-2LE communication protocol
Functions Value Protocol IEC 61850-9-2LE
Communication speed for the IEDs 100BASE-FX
17.4 LON communication protocol
17.4.1 Introduction An optical network can be used within the substation automation system. This enables communication with the IED through the LON bus from the operators workplace, from the control center and also from other terminals.
LON communication protocol is specified in LonTalkProtocol Specification Version 3 from Echelon Corporation and is designed for communication in control networks. These networks are characterized by high speed for data transfer, short messages (few
Section 17 1MRK505222-UUS C Station communication
1006 Technical reference manual
bytes), peer-to-peer communication, multiple communication media, low maintenance, multivendor equipment, and low support costs. LonTalk supports the needs of applications that cover a range of requirements. The protocol follows the reference model for open system interconnection (OSI) designed by the International Standardization Organization (ISO).
In this document the most common addresses for commands and events are available. For other addresses, refer to section «Related documents».
It is assumed that the reader is familiar with LON communication protocol in general.
17.4.2 Principle of operation The speed of the network depends on the medium and transceiver design. With protection and control devices, fibre optic media is used, which enables the use of the maximum speed of 1.25 Mbits/s. The protocol is a peer-to-peer protocol where all the devices connected to the network can communicate with each other. The own subnet and node number are identifying the nodes (max. 255 subnets, 127 nodes per one subnet).
The LON bus links the different parts of the protection and control system. The measured values, status information, and event information are spontaneously sent to the higher-level devices. The higher-level devices can read and write memorized values, setting values, and other parameter data when required. The LON bus also enables the bay level devices to communicate with each other to deliver, for example, interlocking information among the terminals without the need of a bus master.
The LonTalk protocol supports two types of application layer objects: network variables and explicit messages. Network variables are used to deliver short messages, such as measuring values, status information, and interlocking/blocking signals. Explicit messages are used to transfer longer pieces of information, such as events and explicit read and write messages to access device data.
The benefits achieved from using the LON bus in protection and control systems include direct communication among all terminals in the system and support for multi- master implementations. The LON bus also has an open concept, so that the terminals can communicate with external devices using the same standard of network variables.
Introduction of LON protocol For more information, refer to LON bus, LonWorks Network in Protection and Control, Users manual and Technical description.
LON protocol
Configuration of LON Lon Network Tool (LNT 505) is a multi-purpose tool for LonWorks network configuration. All the functions required for setting up and configuring a LonWorks
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 17 Station communication
1007 Technical reference manual
network, is easily accessible on a single tool program. For more information, refer to the operator’s manual.
Activate LON Communication Activate LON communication in the Parameter Setting tool under Main menu/ Communication/ SLM configuration/ Rear optical LON port/ Horizontal communication, where Operation must be set to ON.
Add LON Device Types LNT A new device is added to LON Network Tool from the Device menu or by installing the device from the ABB LON Device Types package for LNT 505, with the SLDT 670 series package version 1p2 r03.
LON net address To establish a LON connection with the 670 series IEDs, the IED has to be given a unique net address. The net address consists of a subnet and node number. This is accomplished with the LON Network Tool by creating one device for each IED.
Vertical communication Vertical communication describes communication between the monitoring devices and protection and control IEDs. This communication includes sending of changed process data to monitoring devices as events and transfer of commands, parameter data and disturbance recorder files. This communication is implemented using explicit messages.
Events and indications Events sent to the monitoring devices are using explicit messages (message code 44H) with unacknowledged transport service of the LonTalk protocol. When a signal is changed in the IED, one message with the value, quality and time is transmitted from terminal.
Binary events Binary events are generated in event function blocks EVENT:1 to EVENT:20 in the 670 series IEDs. The event function blocks have predefined LON addresses. table 624 shows the LON addresses to the first input on the event function blocks. The addresses to the other inputs on the event function block are consecutive after the first input. For example, input 15 on event block EVENT:17 has the address 1280 + 14 (15-1) = 1294.
For double indications only the first eight inputs 18 must be used. Inputs 916 can be used for other type of events at the same event block.
As basic, three event function blocks EVENT:1 to EVENT:3 running with a fast loop time (3 ms) is available in the 670 series IEDs. The remaining event function blocks EVENT:4 to EVENT:9 runs with a loop time on 8 ms and EVENT:10 to EVENT:20 runs with a loop time on 100 ms. The event blocks are used to send binary signals, integers, real time values like analogue data from measuring functions and mA input modules as well as pulse counter signals.
Section 17 1MRK505222-UUS C Station communication
1008 Technical reference manual
16 pulse counter value function blocks PCGGIO:1 to PCGGIO:16 and 24 mA input service values function blocks SMMI1_In1 to 6 SMMI4_In1 to 6 are available in the 670 series IEDs.
The first LON address in every event function block is found in table 624
Table 624: LON adresses for Event functions
Function block First LON address in function block
EVENT:1 1024
EVENT:2 1040
EVENT:3 1056
EVENT:4 1072
EVENT:5 1088
EVENT:6 1104
EVENT:7 1120
EVENT:8 1136
EVENT:9 1152
EVENT:10 1168
EVENT:11 1184
EVENT:12 1200
EVENT:13 1216
EVENT:14 1232
EVENT:15 1248
EVENT:16 1264
EVENT:17 1280
EVENT:18 1296
EVENT:19 1312
EVENT:20 1328
Event masks The event mask for each input can be set individually from Parameter Setting Tool (PST) under: Settings/ General Settings/ Monitoring / EventFunction as follows:
No events OnSet, at pick-up of the signal OnReset, at drop-out of the signal OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal AutoDetect, event system itself make the reporting decision, (reporting criteria for
integers has no semantic, prefer to be set by the user)
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 17 Station communication
1009 Technical reference manual
The following type of signals from application functions can be connected to the event function block.
Single indication Directly connected binary IO signal via binary input function block (SMBI) is always reported on change, no changed detection is done in the event function block. Other Boolean signals, for example a start or a trip signal from a protection function is event masked in the event function block.
Double indications Double indications can only be reported via switch-control (SCSWI) functions, the event reporting is based on information from switch-control, no change detection is done in the event function block.
Directly connected binary IO signal via binary input function block (SMBI) is not possible to handle as double indication. Double indications can only be reported for the first 8 inputs on an event function block.
00 generates an intermediate event with the read status 0 01 generates an open event with the read status 1 10 generates a close event with the read status 2 11 generates an undefined event with the read status 3
Analog value All analog values are reported cyclic, the reporting interval is taken from the connected function if there is a limit supervised signal, otherwise it is taken from the event function block.
Command handling Commands are transferred using transparent SPA-bus messages. The transparent SPA- bus message is an explicit LON message, which contains an ASCII character message following the coding rules of the SPA-bus protocol. The message is sent using explicit messages with message code 41H and using acknowledged transport service.
Both the SPA-bus command messages (R or W) and the reply messages (D, A or N) are sent using the same message code. It is mandatory that one device sends out only one SPA-bus message at a time to one node and waits for the reply before sending the next message.
For commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatus control, That is, the function blocks type SCSWI 1 to 32, SXCBR 1 to 18 and SXSWI 1 to 28; the SPA addresses are according to table 625.
Section 17 1MRK505222-UUS C Station communication
1010 Technical reference manual
Horizontal communication Network variables are used for communication between 500 series and 670 series IEDs. The supported network variable type is SNVT_state (NV type 83). SNVT_state is used to communicate the state of a set of 1 to 16 Boolean values.
Multiple command send function block (MULTICMDSND) is used to pack the information to one value. This value is transmitted to the receiving node and presented for the application by a multiple command function block (MULTICMDRCV). At horizontal communication the input BOUND on the event function block (MULTICMDSND) must be set to 1. There are 10 MULTICMDSND and 60 MULTICMDRCV function blocks available. The MULTICMDSND and MULTICMDRCV function blocks are connected using Lon Network Tool (LNT 505). This tool also defines the service and addressing on LON.
This is an overview for configuring the network variables for 670 series IEDs.
Configuration of LON network variables Configure the Network variables according to the specific application using the LON network Tool. For more information, refer to LNT 505 in Operation manual. The following is an example of how to configure network variables concerning, for example, interlocking between two IEDs.
MULTICMDSND: 7 BAY E1
MULTICMDSND: 9 BAY E3
LON
BAY E4
MULTICMDSND: 9
en05000718.vsd IEC05000718 V2 EN
Figure 492: Examples connections between MULTICMDSND and MULTICMDRCV function blocks in three IEDs
The network variable connections are done from the NV Connection window. From LNT window select Connections/ NVConnections/ New.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 17 Station communication
1011 Technical reference manual
en05000719.vsd IEC05000719 V1 EN
Figure 493: The network variables window in LNT
There are two ways of downloading NV connections. Either the users can use the drag- and-drop method where they can select all nodes in the device window, drag them to the Download area in the bottom of the program window and drop them there; or, they can perform it by selecting the traditional menu, Configuration/ Download.
Section 17 1MRK505222-UUS C Station communication
1012 Technical reference manual
en05000720.vsd IEC05000720 V1 EN
Figure 494: The download configuration window in LNT
Communication ports The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA/IEC60870-5-103/DNP and LON communication. This module is a mezzanine module, and can be placed on the Main Processing Module (NUM). The serial communication module can have connectors for two plastic fibre cables (snap-in) or two glass fibre cables (ST, bayonet) or a combination of plastic and glass fibre. Three different types are available depending on type of fibre. The incoming optical fibre is connected to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing optical fibre to the TX transmitter output. When the fibre optic cables are laid out, pay special attention to the instructions concerning the handling and connection of the optical fibres. The module is identified with a number on the label on the module.
Table 625: SPA addresses for commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatus control
Name Function block
SPA address
Description
BL_CMD SCSWI01 1 I 5115 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI02 1 I 5139 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI02 1 I 5161 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI04 1 I 5186 SPA parameters for block command
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 17 Station communication
1013 Technical reference manual
Name Function block
SPA address
Description
BL_CMD SCSWI05 1 I 5210 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI06 1 I 5234 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI07 1 I 5258 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI08 1 I 5283 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI09 1 I 5307 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI10 1 I 5331 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI11 1 I 5355 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI12 1 I 5379 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI13 1 I 5403 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI14 1 I 5427 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI15 1 I 5451 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI16 1 I 5475 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI17 1 I 5499 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI18 1 I 5523 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI19 1 I 5545 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI20 1 I 5571 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI21 1 I 5594 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI22 1 I 5619 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI23 1 I 5643 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI24 1 I 5667 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI25 1 I 5691 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI26 1 I 5715 SPA parameters for block command
Table continues on next page
Section 17 1MRK505222-UUS C Station communication
1014 Technical reference manual
Name Function block
SPA address
Description
BL_CMD SCSWI27 1 I 5739 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI28 1 I 5763 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI29 1 I 5787 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI30 1 I 5811 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI31 1 I 5835 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI32 1 I 5859 SPA parameters for block command
CANCEL SCSWI01 1 I 5107 SPA parameters for cancel command
CANCEL SCSWI02 1 I 5131 SPA parameters for cancel command
CANCEL SCSWI03 1 I 5153 SPA parameters for cancel command
CANCEL SCSWI04 1 I 5178 SPA parameters for cancel command
CANCEL SCSWI05 1 I 5202 SPA parameters for cancel command
CANCEL SCSWI06 1 I 5226 SPA parameters for cancel command
CANCEL SCSWI07 1 I 5250 SPA parameters for cancel command
CANCEL SCSWI08 1 I 5275 SPA parameters for cancel command
CANCEL SCSWI09 1 I 5299 SPA parameters for cancel command
CANCEL SCSWI10 1 I 5323 SPA parameters for cancel command
CANCEL SCSWI11 1 I 5347 SPA parameters for cancel command
CANCEL SCSWI12 1 I 5371 SPA parameters for cancel command
CANCEL SCSWI13 1 I 5395 SPA parameters for cancel command
CANCEL SCSWI14 1 I 5419 SPA parameters for cancel command
CANCEL SCSWI15 1 I 5443 SPA parameters for cancel command
CANCEL SCSWI16 1 I 5467 SPA parameters for cancel command
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 17 Station communication
1015 Technical reference manual
Name Function block
SPA address
Description
CANCEL SCSWI17 1 I 5491 SPA parameters for cancel command
CANCEL SCSWI18 1 I 5515 SPA parameters for cancel command
CANCEL SCSWI19 1 I 5537 SPA parameters for cancel command
CANCEL SCSWI20 1 I 5563 SPA parameters for cancel command
CANCEL SCSWI21 1 I 5586 SPA parameters for cancel command
CANCEL SCSWI22 1 I 5611 SPA parameters for cancel command
CANCEL SCSWI23 1 I 5635 SPA parameters for cancel command
CANCEL SCSWI24 1 I 5659 SPA parameters for cancel command
CANCEL SCSWI25 1 I 5683 SPA parameters for cancel command
CANCEL SCSWI26 1 I 5707 SPA parameters for cancel command
CANCEL SCSWI27 1 I 5731 SPA parameters for cancel command
CANCEL SCSWI28 1 I 5755 SPA parameters for cancel command
CANCEL SCSWI29 1 I 5779 SPA parameters for cancel command
CANCEL SCSWI30 1 I 5803 SPA parameters for cancel command
CANCEL SCSWI31 1 I 5827 SPA parameters for cancel command
CANCEL SCSWI32 1 I 5851 SPA parameters for cancel command
SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, SELOpen+ILO=10, SELClose+ILO=11, SELOpen+SCO=20, SELClose+SCO=21, SELOpen+ILO+SCO=30, SELClose+ILO+SCO=31
SCSWI01 1 I 5105 SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command Note: Send select command before operate command
SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI02 1 I 5129 SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI03 1 I 5151 SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI04 1 I 5176 SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command
Table continues on next page
Section 17 1MRK505222-UUS C Station communication
1016 Technical reference manual
Name Function block
SPA address
Description
SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI05 1 I 5200 SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI06 1 I 5224 SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI07 1 I 5248 SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI08 1 I 5273 SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI09 1 I 5297 SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI10 1 I 5321 SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI11 1 I 5345 SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI12 1 I 5369 SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI13 1 I 5393 SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI14 1 I 5417 SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI15 1 I 5441 SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI16 1 I 5465 SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI17 1 I 5489 SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI18 1 I 5513 SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI19 1 I 5535 SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI20 1 I 5561 SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI21 1 I 5584 SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI22 1 I 5609 SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI23 1 I 5633 SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI24 1 I 5657 SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI25 1 I 5681 SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI26 1 I 5705 SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 17 Station communication
1017 Technical reference manual
Name Function block
SPA address
Description
SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI27 1 I 5729 SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI28 1 I 5753 SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI29 1 I 5777 SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI30 1 I 5801 SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI31 1 I 5825 SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI32 1 I 5849 SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command
ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, ExcOpen+ILO=10, ExcClose+ILO=11, ExcOpen+SCO=20, ExcClose+SCO=21, ExcOpen+ILO+SCO=30, ExcClose+ILO+SCO=31
SCSWI01 1 I 5106 SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command Note: Send select command before operate command
ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI02 1 I 5130 SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command
ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI02 1 I 5152 SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command
ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI04 1 I 5177 SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command
ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI05 1 I 5201 SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command
ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI06 1 I 5225 SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command
ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI07 1 I 5249 SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command
ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI08 1 I 5274 SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command
ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI09 1 I 5298 SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command
ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI10 1 I 5322 SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command
ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI11 1 I 5346 SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command
ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI12 1 I 5370 SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command
ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI13 1 I 5394 SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command
ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI14 1 I 5418 SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command
Table continues on next page
Section 17 1MRK505222-UUS C Station communication
1018 Technical reference manual
Name Function block
SPA address
Description
ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI15 1 I 5442 SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command
ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI16 1 I 5466 SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command
ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI17 1 I 5490 SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command
ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI18 1 I 5514 SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command
ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI19 1 I 5536 SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command
ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI20 1 I 5562 SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command
ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI21 1 I 5585 SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command
ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI22 1 I 5610 SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command
ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI23 1 I 5634 SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command
ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI24 1 I 5658 SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command
ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI25 1 I 5682 SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command
ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI26 1 I 5706 SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command
ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI27 1 I 5730 SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command
ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI28 1 I 5754 SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command
ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI29 1 I 5778 SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command
ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI30 1 I 5802 SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command
ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI31 1 I 5826 SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command
ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI32 1 I 5850 SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command
Sub Value SXCBR01 2 I 7854 SPA parameter for position to be substituted Note: Send the value before Enable
Sub Value SXCBR02 2 I 7866 SPA parameter for position to be substituted
Sub Value SXCBR03 2 I 7884 SPA parameter for position to be substituted
Sub Value SXCBR04 2 I 7904 SPA parameter for position to be substituted
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 17 Station communication
1019 Technical reference manual
Name Function block
SPA address
Description
Sub Value SXCBR05 2 I 7923 SPA parameter for position to be substituted
Sub Value SXCBR06 2 I 7942 SPA parameter for position to be substituted
Sub Value SXCBR07 2 I 7961 SPA parameter for position to be substituted
Sub Value SXCBR08 2 I 7980 SPA parameter for position to be substituted
Sub Value SXCBR09 3 I 7 SPA parameter for position to be substituted
Sub Value SXCBR10 3 I 26 SPA parameter for position to be substituted
Sub Value SXCBR11 3 I 45 SPA parameter for position to be substituted
Sub Value SXCBR12 3 I 56 SPA parameter for position to be substituted
Sub Value SXCBR13 3 I 74 SPA parameter for position to be substituted
Sub Value SXCBR14 3 I 94 SPA parameter for position to be substituted
Sub Value SXCBR15 3 I 120 SPA parameter for position to be substituted
Sub Value SXCBR16 3 I 133 SPA parameter for position to be substituted
Sub Value SXCBR17 3 I 158 SPA parameter for position to be substituted
Sub Value SXCBR18 3 I 179 SPA parameter for position to be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI01 3 I 196 SPA parameter for position to be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI02 3 I 216 SPA parameter for position to be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI03 3 I 235 SPA parameter for position to be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI04 3 I 254 SPA parameter for position to be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI05 3 I 272 SPA parameter for position to be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI06 3 I 292 SPA parameter for position to be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI07 3 I 310 SPA parameter for position to be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI08 3 I 330 SPA parameter for position to be substituted
Table continues on next page
Section 17 1MRK505222-UUS C Station communication
1020 Technical reference manual
Name Function block
SPA address
Description
Sub Value SXSWI09 3 I 348 SPA parameter for position to be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI10 3 I 359 SPA parameter for position to be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI11 3 I 378 SPA parameter for position to be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI12 3 I 397 SPA parameter for position to be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI13 3 I 416 SPA parameter for position to be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI14 3 I 435 SPA parameter for position to be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI15 3 I 454 SPA parameter for position to be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI16 3 I 473 SPA parameter for position to be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI17 3 I 492 SPA parameter for position to be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI18 3 I 511 SPA parameter for position to be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI19 3 I 530 SPA parameter for position to be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI20 3 I 549 SPA parameter for position to be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI21 3 I 568 SPA parameter for position to be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI22 3 I 587 SPA parameter for position to be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI23 3 I 606 SPA parameter for position to be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI24 3 I 625 SPA parameter for position to be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI25 3 I 644 SPA parameter for position to be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI26 3 I 663 SPA parameter for position to be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI27 3 I 682 SPA parameter for position to be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI28 3 I 701 SPA parameter for position to be substituted
Sub Enable SXCBR01 2 I 7855 SPA parameter for substitute enable command Note: Send the Value before Enable
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 17 Station communication
1021 Technical reference manual
Name Function block
SPA address
Description
Sub Enable SXCBR02 2 I 7865 SPA parameter for substitute enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR03 2 I 7885 SPA parameter for substitute enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR04 2 I 7903 SPA parameter for substitute enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR05 2 I 7924 SPA parameter for substitute enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR06 2 I 7941 SPA parameter for substitute enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR07 2 I 7962 SPA parameter for substitute enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR08 2 I 7979 SPA parameter for substitute enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR09 3 I 8 SPA parameter for substitute enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR10 3 I 25 SPA parameter for substitute enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR11 3 I 46 SPA parameter for substitute enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR12 3 I 55 SPA parameter for substitute enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR13 3 I 75 SPA parameter for substitute enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR14 3 I 93 SPA parameter for substitute enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR15 3 I 121 SPA parameter for substitute enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR16 3 I 132 SPA parameter for substitute enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR17 3 I 159 SPA parameter for substitute enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR18 3 I 178 SPA parameter for substitute enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI01 3 I 197 SPA parameter for substitute enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI02 3 I 215 SPA parameter for substitute enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI03 3 I 234 SPA parameter for substitute enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI04 3 I 252 SPA parameter for substitute enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI05 3 I 271 SPA parameter for substitute enable command
Table continues on next page
Section 17 1MRK505222-UUS C Station communication
1022 Technical reference manual
Name Function block
SPA address
Description
Sub Enable SXSWI06 3 I 290 SPA parameter for substitute enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI07 3 I 309 SPA parameter for substitute enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI08 3 I 328 SPA parameter for substitute enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI09 3 I 347 SPA parameter for substitute enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI10 3 I 360 SPA parameter for substitute enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI11 3I 379 SPA parameter for substitute enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI12 3 I 398 SPA parameter for substitute enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI13 3 I 417 SPA parameter for substitute enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI14 3 I 436 SPA parameter for substitute enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI15 3 I 455 SPA parameter for substitute enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI16 3 I 474 SPA parameter for substitute enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI17 3 I 493 SPA parameter for substitute enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI18 3 I 512 SPA parameter for substitute enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI19 3 I 531 SPA parameter for substitute enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI20 3 I 550 SPA parameter for substitute enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI21 3 I 569 SPA parameter for substitute enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI22 3 I 588 SPA parameter for substitute enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI23 3 I 607 SPA parameter for substitute enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI24 3 I 626 SPA parameter for substitute enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI25 3 I 645 SPA parameter for substitute enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI26 3 I 664 SPA parameter for substitute enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI27 3 I 683 SPA parameter for substitute enable command
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 17 Station communication
1023 Technical reference manual
Name Function block
SPA address
Description
Sub Enable SXSWI28 3 I 702 SPA parameter for substitute enable command
Update Block SXCBR01 2 I 7853 SPA parameter for update block command
Update Block SXCBR02 2 I 7864 SPA parameter for update block command
Update Block SXCBR03 2 I 7883 SPA parameter for update block command
Update Block SXCBR04 2 I 7905 SPA parameter for update block command
Update Block SXCBR05 2 I 7922 SPA parameter for update block command
Update Block SXCBR06 2 I 7943 SPA parameter for update block command
Update Block SXCBR07 2 I 7960 SPA parameter for update block command
Update Block SXCBR08 2 I 7981 SPA parameter for update block command
Update Block SXCBR09 3 I 6 SPA parameter for update block command
Update Block SXCBR10 3 I 27 SPA parameter for update block command
Update Block SXCBR11 3 I 44 SPA parameter for update block command
Update Block SXCBR12 3 I 57 SPA parameter for update block command
Update Block SXCBR13 3 I 73 SPA parameter for update block command
Update Block SXCBR14 3 I 92 SPA parameter for update block command
Update Block SXCBR15 3 I 122 SPA parameter for update block command
Update Block SXCBR16 3 I 131 SPA parameter for update block command
Update Block SXCBR17 3 I 160 SPA parameter for update block command
Update Block SXCBR18 3 I 177 SPA parameter for update block command
Update Block SXSWI01 3 I 198 SPA parameter for update block command
Update Block SXSWI02 3 I 214 SPA parameter for update block command
Update Block SXSWI03 3 I 236 SPA parameter for update block command
Table continues on next page
Section 17 1MRK505222-UUS C Station communication
1024 Technical reference manual
Name Function block
SPA address
Description
Update Block SXSWI04 3 I 253 SPA parameter for update block command
Update Block SXSWI05 3 I 273 SPA parameter for update block command
Update Block SXSWI06 3 I 291 SPA parameter for update block command
Update Block SXSWI07 3 I 311 SPA parameter for update block command
Update Block SXSWI08 3 I 329 SPA parameter for update block command
Update Block SXSWI09 3 I 349 SPA parameter for update block command
Update Block SXSWI10 3 I 358 SPA parameter for update block command
Update Block SXSWI11 3 I 377 SPA parameter for update block command
Update Block SXSWI12 3 I 396 SPA parameter for update block command
Update Block SXSWI13 3 I 415 SPA parameter for update block command
Update Block SXSWI14 3 I 434 SPA parameter for update block command
Update Block SXSWI15 3 I 453 SPA parameter for update block command
Update Block SXSWI16 3 I 472 SPA parameter for update block command
Update Block SXSWI17 3 I 491 SPA parameter for update block command
Update Block SXSWI18 3 I 510 SPA parameter for update block command
Update Block SXSWI19 3 I 529 SPA parameter for update block command
Update Block SXSWI20 3 I 548 SPA parameter for update block command
Update Block SXSWI21 3 I 567 SPA parameter for update block command
Update Block SXSWI22 3 I 586 SPA parameter for update block command
Update Block SXSWI23 3 I 605 SPA parameter for update block command
Update Block SXSWI24 3 I 624 SPA parameter for update block command
Update Block SXSWI25 3 I 643 SPA parameter for update block command
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 17 Station communication
1025 Technical reference manual
Name Function block
SPA address
Description
Update Block SXSWI26 3 I 662 SPA parameter for update block command
Update Block SXSWI27 3 I 681 SPA parameter for update block command
Update Block SXSWI28 3 I 700 SPA parameter for update block command
17.4.3 Setting parameters Table 626: HORZCOMM Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Operation
Table 627: ADE Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Operation
TimerClass Slow Normal Fast
— — Slow Timer class
17.4.4 Technical data Table 628: LON communication protocol
Function Value Protocol LON
Communication speed 1.25 Mbit/s
17.5 SPA communication protocol
17.5.1 Introduction In this section the most common addresses for commands and events are available. For other addresses, refer to section «Related documents».
It is assumed that the reader is familiar with the SPA communication protocol in general.
Section 17 1MRK505222-UUS C Station communication
1026 Technical reference manual
17.5.2 Principle of operation The SPA bus uses an asynchronous serial communications protocol (1 start bit, 7 data bits + even parity, 1 stop bit) with data transfer rate up to 38400 bit/s. For more information on recommended baud rate for each type of IED, refer to Technical reference manual. Messages on the bus consist of ASCII characters.
Introduction of SPA protocol The basic construction of the protocol assumes that the slave has no self-initiated need to talk to the master but the master is aware of the data contained in the slaves and, consequently, can request required data. In addition, the master can send data to the slave. Requesting by the master can be performed either by sequenced polling (for example, for event information) or only on demand.
The master requests slave information using request messages and sends information to the slave in write messages. Furthermore, the master can send all slaves in common a broadcast message containing time or other data. The inactive state of bus transmit and receive lines is a logical «1».
SPA protocol The tables below specify the SPA addresses for reading data from and writing data to an IED with the SPA communication protocol implemented.
The SPA addresses for the mA input service values (MIM3 to MIM16) are found in table 629.
Table 629: SPA addresses for the MIM function
Function block SPA address MIM3-CH1 4-O-6508
MIM3-CH2 4-O-6511
MIM3-CH3 4-O-6512
MIM3-CH4 4-O-6515
MIM3-CH5 4-O-6516
MIM3-CH6 4-O-6519
MIM4-CH1 4-O-6527
MIM4-CH2 4-O-6530
MIM4-CH3 4-O-6531
MIM4-CH4 4-O-6534
MIM4-CH5 4-O-6535
MIM4-CH6 4-O-6538
MIM5-CH1 4-O-6546
MIM5-CH2 4-O-6549
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 17 Station communication
1027 Technical reference manual
Function block SPA address MIM5-CH3 4-O-6550
MIM5-CH4 4-O-6553
MIM5-CH5 4-O-6554
MIM5-CH6 4-O-6557
MIM6-CH1 4-O-6565
MIM6-CH2 4-O-6568
MIM6-CH3 4-O-6569
MIM6-CH4 4-O-6572
MIM6-CH5 4-O-6573
MIM6-CH6 4-O-6576
MIM7-CH1 4-O-6584
MIM7-CH2 4-O-6587
MIM7-CH3 4-O-6588
MIM7-CH4 4-O-6591
MIM7-CH5 4-O-6592
MIM7-CH6 4-O-6595
MIM8-CH1 4-O-6603
MIM8-CH2 4-O-6606
MIM8-CH3 4-O-6607
MIM8-CH4 4-O-6610
MIM8-CH5 4-O-6611
MIM8-CH6 4-O-6614
MIM9-CH1 4-O-6622
MIM9-CH2 4-O-6625
MIM9-CH3 4-O-6626
MIM9-CH4 4-O-6629
MIM9-CH5 4-O-6630
MIM9-CH6 4-O-6633
MIM10-CH1 4-O-6641
MIM10-CH2 4-O-6644
MIM10-CH3 4-O-6645
MIM10-CH4 4-O-6648
MIM10-CH5 4-O-6649
MIM10-CH6 4-O-6652
MIM11-CH1 4-O-6660
MIM11-CH2 4-O-6663
Table continues on next page
Section 17 1MRK505222-UUS C Station communication
1028 Technical reference manual
Function block SPA address MIM11-CH3 4-O-6664
MIM11-CH4 4-O-6667
MIM11-CH5 4-O-6668
MIM11-CH6 4-O-6671
MIM12-CH1 4-O-6679
MIM12-CH2 4-O-6682
MIM12-CH3 4-O-6683
MIM12-CH4 4-O-6686
MIM12-CH5 4-O-6687
MIM12-CH6 4-O-6690
MIM13-CH1 4-O-6698
MIM13-CH2 4-O-6701
MIM13-CH3 4-O-6702
MIM13-CH4 4-O-6705
MIM13-CH5 4-O-6706
MIM13-CH6 4-O-6709
MIM14-CH1 4-O-6717
MIM14-CH2 4-O-6720
MIM14-CH3 4-O-6721
MIM14-CH4 4-O-6724
MIM14-CH5 4-O-6725
MIM14-CH6 4-O-6728
MIM15-CH1 4-O-6736
MIM15-CH2 4-O-6739
MIM15-CH3 4-O-6740
MIM15-CH4 4-O-6743
MIM15-CH5 4-O-6744
MIM15-CH6 4-O-6747
MIM16-CH1 4-O-6755
MIM16-CH2 4-O-6758
MIM16-CH3 4-O-6759
MIM16-CH4 4-O-6762
MIM16-CH5 4-O-6763
MIM16-CH6 4-O-6766
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 17 Station communication
1029 Technical reference manual
The SPA addresses for the pulse counter values PCGGIO:1 to PCGGIO:16 are found in table 630.
Table 630: SPA addresses for the PCGGIO function
Function block SPA address CNT_VAL SPA address NEW_VAL PCGGIO:1 3-O-5834 3-O-5833
PCGGIO:2 3-O-5840 3-O-5839
PCGGIO:3 3-O-5846 3-O-5845
PCGGIO:4 3-O-5852 3-O-5851
PCGGIO:5 3-O-5858 3-O-5857
PCGGIO:6 3-O-5864 3-O-5863
PCGGIO:7 3-O-5870 3-O-5869
PCGGIO:8 3-O-5876 3-O-5875
PCGGIO:9 3-O-5882 3-O-5881
PCGGIO:10 3-O-5888 3-O-5887
PCGGIO:11 3-O-5894 3-O-5893
PCGGIO:12 3-O-5900 3-O-5899
PCGGIO:13 3-O-5906 3-O-5905
PCGGIO:14 3-O-5912 3-O-5911
PCGGIO:15 3-O-5918 3-O-5917
PCGGIO:16 3-O-5924 3-O-5923
I/O modules To read binary inputs, the SPA-addresses for the outputs of the I/O-module function block are used, that is, the addresses for BI1 BI16. For SPA addresses, refer to section «Related documents».
Single command, 16 signals The IEDs can be provided with a function to receive signals either from a substation automation system or from the local HMI. That receiving function block has 16 outputs that can be used, for example, to control high voltage apparatuses in switchyards. For local control functions, the local HMI can also be used.
Single command, 16 signals function consists of three function blocks; SINGLECMD: 1 to SINGLECMD:3 for 16 binary output signals each.
The signals can be individually controlled from the operator station, remote-control gateway, or from the local HMI on the IED. For Single command, 16 signals function block, SINGLECMD:1 to SINGLECMD:3, the address is for the first output. The other
Section 17 1MRK505222-UUS C Station communication
1030 Technical reference manual
outputs follow consecutively after the first one. For example, output 7 on the SINGLECMD:2 function block has the 5O533 address.
The SPA addresses for Single command, 16 signals functions SINGLECMD:1 to SINGLECMD:3 are found in table 631.
Table 631: SPA addresses for SINGLECMD function
Function block SPA address CMD Input SPA address CMD output SINGLECMD1-Cmd1 4-S-4639 5-O-511
SINGLECMD1-Cmd2 4-S-4640 5-O-512
SINGLECMD1-Cmd3 4-S-4641 5-O-513
SINGLECMD1-Cmd4 4-S-4642 5-O-514
SINGLECMD1-Cmd5 4-S-4643 5-O-515
SINGLECMD1-Cmd6 4-S-4644 5-O-516
SINGLECMD1-Cmd7 4-S-4645 5-O-517
SINGLECMD1-Cmd8 4-S-4646 5-O-518
SINGLECMD1-Cmd9 4-S-4647 5-O-519
SINGLECMD1-Cmd10 4-S-4648 5-O-520
SINGLECMD1-Cmd11 4-S-4649 5-O-521
SINGLECMD1-Cmd12 4-S-4650 5-O-522
SINGLECMD1-Cmdt13 4-S-4651 5-O-523
SINGLECMD1-Cmd14 4-S-4652 5-O-524
SINGLECMD1-Cmd15 4-S-4653 5-O-525
SINGLECMD1-Cmd16 4-S-4654 5-O-526
SINGLECMD2-Cmd1 4-S-4672 5-O-527
SINGLECMD2-Cmd2 4-S-4673 5-O-528
SINGLECMD2-Cmdt3 4-S-4674 5-O-529
SINGLECMD2-Cmd4 4-S-4675 5-O-530
SINGLECMD2-Cmd5 4-S-4676 5-O-531
SINGLECMD2-Cmd6 4-S-4677 5-O-532
SINGLECMD2-Cmd7 4-S-4678 5-O-533
SINGLECMD2-Cmd8 4-S-4679 5-O-534
SINGLECMD2-Cmd9 4-S-4680 5-O-535
SINGLECMD2-Cmd10 4-S-4681 5-O-536
SINGLECMD2-Cmd11 4-S-4682 5-O-537
SINGLECMD2-Cmd12 4-S-4683 5-O-538
SINGLECMD2-Cmd13 4-S-4684 5-O-539
SINGLECMD2-Cmd14 4-S-4685 5-O-540
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 17 Station communication
1031 Technical reference manual
Function block SPA address CMD Input SPA address CMD output SINGLECMD2-Cmd15 4-S-4686 5-O-541
SINGLECMD2-Cmd16 4-S-4687 5-O-542
SINGLECMD3-Cmd1 4-S-4705 5-O-543
SINGLECMD3-Cmd2 4-S-4706 5-O-544
SINGLECMD3-Cmd3 4-S-4707 5-O-545
SINGLECMD3-Cmd4 4-S-4708 5-O-546
SINGLECMD3-Cmd5 4-S-4709 5-O-547
SINGLECMD3-Cmd6 4-S-4710 5-O-548
SINGLECMD3-Cmd7 4-S-4711 5-O-549
SINGLECMD3-Cmd8 4-S-4712 5-O-550
SINGLECMD3-Cmd9 4-S-4713 5-O-551
SINGLECMD3-Cmd10 4-S-4714 5-O-552
SINGLECMD3-Cmd11 4-S-4715 5-O-553
SINGLECMD3-Cmd12 4-S-4716 5-O-554
SINGLECMD3-Cmd13 4-S-4717 5-O-555
SINGLECMD3-Cmd14 4-S-4718 5-O-556
SINGLECMD3-Cmd15 4-S-4719 5-O-557
SINGLECMD3-Cmd16 4-S-4720 5-O-558
Figure 495 shows an application example of how the user can, in a simplified way, connect the command function via the configuration logic circuit in a protection IED for control of a circuit breaker.
A pulse via the binary outputs of the IED normally performs this type of command control. The SPA addresses to control the outputs OUT1 OUT16 in SINGLECMD:1 are shown in table 631.
Section 17 1MRK505222-UUS C Station communication
1032 Technical reference manual
To output board, CLOSE SINGLECMD
BLOCK ^OUT1 ^OUT2 ^OUT3 ^OUT4 ^OUT5 ^OUT6 ^OUT7 ^OUT8 ^OUT9
^OUT10 ^OUT11 ^OUT12 ^OUT13 ^OUT14 ^OUT15 ^OUT16
AND INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4N
OUT NOUT
PULSETIMER INPUT T
OUT
SYNCH OK
PULSETIMER INPUT T
OUT
#1.000
#1.000
To output board, OPEN
IEC05000717-2-en.vsd
IEC05000717 V2 EN
Figure 495: Application example showing a simplified logic diagram for control of a circuit breaker
The MODE input defines if the output signals from SINGLECMD:1 is off, steady or pulsed signals. This is set in Parameter Setting Tool (PST) under: Setting / General Settings / Control / Commands / Single Command.
Event function Event function is intended to send time-tagged events to the station level (for example, operator workplace) over the station bus. The events are there presented in an event list. The events can be created from both internal logical signals and binary input channels. All the internal signals are time tagged in the main processing module, while the binary input channels are time tagged directly on each I/O module. The events are produced according to the set event masks. The event masks are treated commonly for both the LON and SPA channels. All events according to the event mask are stored in a buffer, which contains up to 1000 events. If new events appear before the oldest event in the buffer is read, the oldest event is overwritten and an overflow alarm appears.
Two special signals for event registration purposes are available in the IED, Terminal Restarted (0E50) and Event buffer overflow (0E51).
The input parameters can be set individually from the Parameter Setting Tool (PST) under: Setting / General Setting / Monitoring / Event Function as follows:
No events OnSet, at pick-up of the signal OnReset, at drop-out of the signal OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal AutoDetect, event system itself make the reporting decision, (reporting criteria for
integers has no semantic, prefer to be set by the user)
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 17 Station communication
1033 Technical reference manual
The Status and event codes for the Event functions are found in table 632.
Table 632: Status and event codes
Single indication1) Double indication Event block Status Set event Reset
event Intermedi ate 00
Closed 10 Open 01 Undefined 11
EVENT:1 Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Input 9 Input 10 Input 11 Input 12 Input 13 Input 14 Input 15 Input 16
22O1 22O2 22O3 22O4 22O5 22O6 22O7 22O8 22O9 22O10 22O11 22O12 22O13 22O14 22O15 22O16
22E33 22E35 22E37 22E39 22E41 22E43 22E45 22E47 22E49 22E51 22E53 22E55 22E57 22E59 22E61 22E63
22E32 22E34 22E36 22E38 22E40 22E42 22E44 22E46 22E48 22E50 22E52 22E54 22E56 22E58 22E60 22E62
22E0 22E4 22E8 22E12 22E16 22E20 22E24 22E28 — — — — — — — —
22E1 22E5 22E9 22E13 22E17 22E21 22E25 22E29 — — — — — — — —
22E2 22E6 22E10 22E14 22E18 22E22 22E26 22E30 — — — — — — — —
22E3 22E7 22E11 22E15 22E19 22E23 22E27 22E31 — — — — — — — —
EVENT:2 EVENT:3 — — — EVENT:20
230.. 240.. — — — 410..
23E.. 24E.. — — — 41E..
23E.. 24E.. — — — 41E..
23E.. 24E.. — — — 41E..
23E.. 23E.. — — — 41E..
23E.. 24E.. — — — 41E..
23E.. 24E.. — — — 41E..
These values are only applicable if the Event mask is masked OFF.
Connection of signals as events Signals coming from different protection and control functions and must be sent as events to the station level over the SPA-bus (or LON-bus) are connected to the Event function block according to figure 496.
Section 17 1MRK505222-UUS C Station communication
1034 Technical reference manual
EVENT BLOCK ^INPUT1 ^INPUT2 ^INPUT3 ^INPUT4 ^INPUT5 ^INPUT6 ^INPUT7 ^INPUT8 ^INPUT9 ^INPUT10 ^INPUT11 ^INPUT12 ^INPUT13 ^INPUT14 ^INPUT15 ^INPUT16
Block ILRANG
PSTO UL12RANG
UL31RANG UL23RANG
3I0RANG 3U0RANG
FALSE
IEC07000065-2-en.vsd
IEC07000065 V2 EN
Figure 496: Connection of protection signals for event handling
17.5.2.1 Communication ports
The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA /IEC 60870-5-103/DNP and LON communication. This module is a mezzanine module, and can be placed on the Analog/Digital conversion module (ADM). The serial communication module can have connectors for two plastic fibre cables (snap-in) or two glass fibre cables (ST, bayonet) or a combination of plastic and glass fibre. Three different types are available depending on type of fibre.
The incoming optical fibre is connected to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing optical fibre to the TX transmitter output. When the fibre optic cables are laid out, pay special attention to the instructions concerning the handling and connection of the optical fibres. The module is identified with a number on the label on the module.
The procedure to set the transfer rate and slave number can be found in the Installation and commissioning manual for respective IEDs.
17.5.3 Design When communicating locally with a computer (PC) in the station, using the rear SPA port, the only hardware needed for a station monitoring system is:
Optical fibres Opto/electrical converter for the PC PC
When communicating remotely with a PC using the rear SPA port, the same hardware and telephone modems are needed.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 17 Station communication
1035 Technical reference manual
The software needed in the PC, either local or remote, is PCM600.
When communicating between the local HMI and a PC, the only hardware required is a front-connection cable.
17.5.4 Setting parameters Table 633: SPA Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description SlaveAddress 1 — 899 — 1 30 Slave address
BaudRate 300 Bd 1200 Bd 2400 Bd 4800 Bd 9600 Bd 19200 Bd 38400 Bd
— — 9600 Bd Baudrate on serial line
Table 634: LONSPA Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Operation
SlaveAddress 1 — 899 — 1 30 Slave address
17.5.5 Technical data Table 635: SPA communication protocol
Function Value Protocol SPA
Communication speed 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400 Bd
Slave number 1 to 899
17.6 IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol
17.6.1 Introduction IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol is mainly used when a protection IED communicates with a third party control or monitoring system. This system must have software that can interpret the IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages.
Section 17 1MRK505222-UUS C Station communication
1036 Technical reference manual
17.6.2 Principle of operation
17.6.2.1 General
IEC 60870-5-103 is an unbalanced (master-slave) protocol for coded-bit serial communication exchanging information with a control system, and with a data transfer rate up to 38400 bit/s. In IEC terminology, a primary station is a master and a secondary station is a slave. The communication is based on a point-to-point principle. The master must have software that can interpret IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages.
Introduction to IEC 608705103 protocol IEC 60870-5-103 protocol functionality consists of the following functions:
Event handling Report of analog service values (measurements) Fault location Command handling
Autorecloser ON/OFF Teleprotection ON/OFF Protection ON/OFF LED reset Characteristics 1 — 4 (Setting groups)
File transfer (disturbance files) Time synchronization
For detailed information about IEC 60870-5-103, refer to the IEC 60870 standard part 5: Transmission protocols, and to the section 103: Companion standard for the informative interface of protection equipment.
IEC 60870-5-103 vendor specific implementation The signal and setting tables specify the information types supported by the IEDs with the communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 implemented.
The information types are supported when corresponding functions are included in the protection and control IED.
Commands in control direction Commands in control direction, I103IEDCMD Command block in control direction with defined output signals.
Number of instances: 1
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 17 Station communication
1037 Technical reference manual
Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.
Information number is defined for each output signals.
Info. no Message Supported 19 LED Reset Yes
23 Activate setting group 1 Yes
24 Activate setting group 2 Yes
25 Activate setting group 3 Yes
26 Activate setting group 4 Yes
Function commands in control direction, pre-defined I103CMD Function command block in control direction with defined output signals.
Number of instances: 1
Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.
Information number is defined for each output signals.
Info. no. Message Supported 16 Auto-recloser on/off Yes
17 Teleprotection on/off Yes
18 Protection on/off Yes
Function commands in control direction, user-defined, I103UserCMD Function command blocks in control direction with user-defined output signals.
Number of instances: 4
Function type for each function block instance in private range is selected with parameter FunctionType. Default values are defined in private range 1 — 4. One for each instance.
Information number must be selected for each output signal. Default values are 1 — 8.
Info. no. Message Supported 1 Output signal 01 Yes
2 Output signal 02 Yes
3 Output signal 03 Yes
4 Output signal 04 Yes
5 Output signal 05 Yes
Table continues on next page
Section 17 1MRK505222-UUS C Station communication
1038 Technical reference manual
Info. no. Message Supported 6 Output signal 06 Yes
7 Output signal 07 Yes
8 Output signal 08 Yes
Status Terminal status indications in monitor direction, I103IED Indication block for status in monitor direction with defined IED functions.
Number of instances: 1
Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.
Information number is defined for each input signals.
Info. no. Message Supported 19 LED reset Yes
20 Monitor direction blocked No
21 TestMode
22 Local Parameter setting
23 Setting group 1 active Yes
24 Setting group 2 active Yes
25 Setting group 3 active Yes
26 Setting group 4 active Yes
Function status indications in monitor direction, user-defined, I103UserDef Function indication blocks in monitor direction with user-defined input signals.
Number of instances: 20
Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType for each function block instance in private range. Default values are defined in private range 5 — 24. One for each instance.
Information number is required for each input signal. Default values are defined in range 1 — 8.
Supervision indications in monitor direction, I103Superv Indication block for supervision in monitor direction with defined functions.
Number of instances: 1
Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 17 Station communication
1039 Technical reference manual
Information number is defined for output signals.
Ground fault indications in monitor direction, I103EF Indication block for ground fault in monitor direction with defined functions.
Number of instances: 1
Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.
Information number is defined for each output signal.
Info. no. Message Supported 48 Ground fault A No
49 Ground fault B No
50 Ground fault C No
51 Ground fault forward Yes
52 Ground fault reverse Yes
Fault indications in monitor direction, type 1, I103FltDis Fault indication block for faults in monitor direction with defined functions.
The instance type is suitable for distance protection function.
FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block.
INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each input signal.
Number of instances: 1
Info. no. Message Supported 64 Start L1 Yes
65 Start L2 Yes
66 Start L3 Yes
67 Start IN Yes
84 General start Yes
69 Trip L1 Yes
70 Trip L2 Yes
71 Trip L3 Yes
68 General trip Yes
74 Fault forward/line Yes
75 Fault reverse/busbar Yes
78 Zone 1 Yes
Table continues on next page
Section 17 1MRK505222-UUS C Station communication
1040 Technical reference manual
Info. no. Message Supported 79 Zone 2 Yes
80 Zone 3 Yes
81 Zone 4 Yes
82 Zone 5 Yes
76 Signal transmitted Yes
77 Signal received Yes
73 SCL, Fault location in ohm Yes
Fault indications in monitor direction, type 2, I103FltStd Fault indication block for faults in monitor direction with defined functions.
The instance type is suitable for line differential, transformer differential, overcurrent and ground fault protection functions.
FUNCTION TYPE setting for each block.
INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each input signal.
Number of instances: 1
Info. no. Message Supported 64 Start L1 Yes
65 Start L2 Yes
66 Start L3 Yes
67 Start IN Yes
84 General start Yes
69 Trip L1 Yes
70 Trip L2 Yes
71 Trip L3 Yes
68 General trip Yes
74 Fault forward/line Yes
75 Fault reverse/busbar Yes
85 Breaker failure Yes
86 Trip measuring system L1 Yes
87 Trip measuring system L2 Yes
88 Trip measuring system L3 Yes
89 Trip measuring system N Yes
90 Over current trip I> Yes
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 17 Station communication
1041 Technical reference manual
Info. no. Message Supported 91 Over current trip I>> Yes
92 Ground fault trip IN> Yes
93 Ground fault trip IN>> Yes
Autorecloser indications in monitor direction, I103AR Indication block for autorecloser in monitor direction with defined functions.
Number of instances: 1
Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.
Information number is defined for each output signal.
Info. no. Message Supported 16 Autorecloser active Yes
17 Teleprotection active No
18 Protection active No
128 CB on by Autorecloser Yes
129 CB on by long-time AR No
130 Autorecloser blocked Yes
Measurands Function blocks in monitor direction for input measurands. Typically connected to monitoring function, for example to power measurement CVMMXN.
Measurands in public range, I103Meas Number of instances: 1
The IED reports all valid measuring types depending on connected signals.
Upper limit for measured currents, active/reactive-power is 2.4 times rated value.
Upper limit for measured voltages and frequency is 1.2 times rated value.
Info. no. Message Supported 148 I_A Yes
144, 145, 148
I_B Yes
148 I_C Yes
147 IN, Neutral current Yes
Table continues on next page
Section 17 1MRK505222-UUS C Station communication
1042 Technical reference manual
Info. no. Message Supported 148 V_A Yes
148 V_B Yes
148 V_C Yes
145, 146 V_A-V_B Yes
147 UN, Neutral voltage Yes
146, 148 P, active power Yes
146, 148 Q, reactive power Yes
148 f, frequency Yes
Measurands in private range, I103MeasUsr Number of instances: 3
Function type parameter for each block in private range. Default values are defined in private range 25 27. One for each instance.
Information number must be selected for measurands.
Info. Message Supported *1) Meas1 Yes
* Meas2 Yes
* Meas3 Yes
* Meas4 Yes
* Meas5 Yes
* Meas6 Yes
* Meas7 Yes
* Meas8 Yes
* Meas9 Yes
1) * User defined information number
Disturbance recordings The following elements are used in the ASDUs (Application Service Data Units) defined in the standard.
Analog signals, 40-channels: the channel number for each channel has to be specified. Channels used in the public range are 1 to 8 and with:
IA connected to channel 1 on disturbance function block A1RADR IB connected to channel 2 on disturbance function block A1RADR IC connected to channel 3 on disturbance function block A1RADR
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 17 Station communication
1043 Technical reference manual
IN connected to channel 4 on disturbance function block A1RADR VAE connected to channel 5 on disturbance function block A1RADR VBE connected to channel 6 on disturbance function block A1RADR VCE connected to channel 7 on disturbance function block A1RADR VEN connected to channel 8 on disturbance function block A1RADR
Channel number used for the remaining 32 analog signals are numbers in the private range 64 to 95.
Binary signals, 96-channels: for each channel the user can specify a FUNCTION TYPE and an INFORMATION NUMBER.
Disturbance upload
All analog and binary signals that are recorded with disturbance recorder can be reported to the master. The last eight disturbances that are recorded are available for transfer to the master. A successfully transferred disturbance (acknowledged by the master) will not be reported to the master again.
When a new disturbance is recorded by the IED a list of available recorded disturbances will be sent to the master, an updated list of available disturbances can be sent whenever something has happened to disturbances in this list. For example, when a disturbance is deteceted (by other client, for example, SPA) or when a new disturbance has been recorded or when the master has uploaded a disturbance.
Deviations from the standard
Information sent in the disturbance upload is specified by the standard; however, some of the information are adapted to information available in disturbance recorder in 670 series.
This section describes all data that is not exactly as specified in the standard.
ASDU23
In list of recorded disturbances (ASDU23) an information element named SOF (status of fault) exists. This information element consists of 4 bits and indicates whether:
Bit TP: the protection equipment has tripped during the fault Bit TM: the disturbance data are currently being transmitted Bit TEST: the disturbance data have been recorded during normal operation or test
mode. Bit OTEV: the disturbance data recording has been initiated by another event than
pick-up
Section 17 1MRK505222-UUS C Station communication
1044 Technical reference manual
The only information that is easily available is test-mode status. The other information is always set (hard coded) to:
TP Recorded fault with trip. [1]
TM Disturbance data waiting for transmission [0]
OTEV Disturbance data initiated by other events [1]
Another information element in ASDU23 is the FAN (fault number). According to the standard this is a number that is incremented when a protection function takes action. In 670 series FAN is equal to disturbance number, which is incremented for each disturbance.
ASDU26
When a disturbance has been selected by the master; (by sending ASDU24), the protection equipment answers by sending ASDU26, which contains an information element named NOF (number of grid faults). This number must indicate fault number in the power system,that is, a fault in the power system with several trip and auto- reclosing has the same NOF (while the FAN must be incremented). NOF is in 670 series, just as FAN, equal to disturbance number.
To get INF and FUN for the recorded binary signals there are parameters on the disturbance recorder for each input. The user must set these parameters to whatever he connects to the corresponding input.
Interoperability, physical layer Supported Electrical Interface
EIA RS-485 No
number of loads No
Optical interface
glass fibre Yes
plastic fibre
Transmission speed
9600 bit/s Yes
19200 bit/s Yes
Link Layer
DFC-bit used Yes
Connectors
connector F-SMA No
connector BFOC/2.5 Yes
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 17 Station communication
1045 Technical reference manual
Interoperability, application layer
Supported Selection of standard ASDUs in monitoring direction
ASDU Yes
1 Time-tagged message Yes
2 Time-tagged message with rel. time Yes
3 Measurands I Yes
4 Time-tagged message with rel. time Yes
5 Identification Yes
6 Time synchronization Yes
8 End of general interrogation Yes
9 Measurands II Yes
10 Generic data No
11 Generic identification No
23 List of recorded disturbances Yes
26 Ready for transm. of disturbance data Yes
27 Ready for transm. of a channel Yes
28 Ready for transm of tags Yes
29 Transmission of tags Yes
30 Transmission fo disturbance data Yes
31 End of transmission Yes
Selection of standard ASDUs in control direction
ASDU Yes
6 Time synchronization Yes
7 General interrogation Yes
10 Generic data No
20 General command Yes
21 Generic command No
24 Order for disturbance data transmission Yes
25 Acknowledgement for distance data transmission Yes
Selection of basic application functions
Test mode No
Blocking of monitoring direction Yes
Disturbance data Yes
Private data Yes
Generic services No
Section 17 1MRK505222-UUS C Station communication
1046 Technical reference manual
17.6.2.2 Communication ports
The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP and LON communication. This module is a mezzanine module, and can be placed on the Analog/Digital conversion module (ADM). The serial communication module can have connectors for two plastic fibre cables (snap-in) or two glass fibre cables (ST, bayonet) or a combination of plastic and glass fibre. Three different types are available depending on type of fibre.
The incoming optical fibre is connected to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing optical fibre to the TX transmitter output. When the fibre optic cables are laid out, pay special attention to the instructions concerning the handling and connection of the optical fibres. The module is identified with a number on the label on the module.
17.6.3 Function block
IEC05000689-2-en.vsd
I103IEDCMD BLOCK FUNTYPE
19-LEDRS 23-GRP1 24-GRP2 25-GRP3 26-GRP4
IEC05000689 V2 EN
IEC05000684-2-en.vsd
I103CMD BLOCK FUNTYPE
16-AR 17-DIFF
18-PROT
IEC05000684 V2 EN
IEC05000693-2-en.vsd
I103USRCMD BLOCK PULSEMOD T FUNTYPE INFNO_1 INFNO_2 INFNO_3 INFNO_4 INFNO_5 INFNO_6 INFNO_7 INFNO_8
OUTPUT1 OUTPUT2 OUTPUT3 OUTPUT4 OUTPUT5 OUTPUT6 OUTPUT7 OUTPUT8
IEC05000693 V2 EN
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 17 Station communication
1047 Technical reference manual
IEC05000688-2-en.vsd
I103IED BLOCK 19_LEDRS 23_GRP1 24_GRP2 25_GRP3 26_GRP4 21_TESTM FUNTYPE
IEC05000688 V2 EN
IEC05000694-2-en.vsd
I103USRDEF BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 FUNTYPE INFNO_1 INFNO_2 INFNO_3 INFNO_4 INFNO_5 INFNO_6 INFNO_7 INFNO_8
IEC05000694 V2 EN
IEC05000692-2-en.vsd
I103SUPERV BLOCK 32_MEASI 33_MEASU 37_IBKUP 38_VTFF 46_GRWA 47_GRAL FUNTYPE
IEC05000692 V2 EN
IEC05000685-2-en.vsd
I103EF BLOCK 51_EFFW 52_EFREV FUNTYPE
IEC05000685 V2 EN
Section 17 1MRK505222-UUS C Station communication
1048 Technical reference manual
IEC05000686-2-en.vsd
I103FLTDIS BLOCK 64_STL1 65_STL2 66_STL3 67_STIN 84_STGEN 69_TRL1 70_TRL2 71_TRL3 68_TRGEN 74_FW 75_REV 78_ZONE1 79_ZONE2 80_ZONE3 81_ZONE4 82_ZONE5 76_TRANS 77_RECEV 73_SCL FLTLOC ARINPROG FUNTYPE
IEC05000686 V2 EN
IEC05000687-2-en.vsd
I103FLTSTD BLOCK 64_STL1 65_STL2 66_STL3 67_STIN 84_STGEN 69_TRL1 70_TRL2 71_TRL3 68_TRGEN 74_FW 75_REV 85_BFP 86_MTRL1 87_MTRL2 88_MTRL3 89_MTRN 90_IOC 91_IOC 92_IEF 93_IEF ARINPROG FUNTYPE
IEC05000687 V2 EN
IEC05000683-2-en.vsd
I103AR BLOCK 16_ARACT 128_CBON 130_UNSU FUNTYPE
IEC05000683 V2 EN
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 17 Station communication
1049 Technical reference manual
ANSI05000690-2-en.vsd
I103MEAS BLOCK I_A I_B I_C IN V_A V_B V_C V_AB V_N P Q F FUNTYPE
ANSI05000690 V2 EN
17.6.4 Input and output signals Table 636: I103IEDCMD Input signals
Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of commands
Table 637: I103IEDCMD Output signals
Name Type Description 19-LEDRS BOOLEAN Information number 19, reset LEDs
23-GRP1 BOOLEAN Information number 23, activate setting group 1
24-GRP2 BOOLEAN Information number 24, activate setting group 2
25-GRP3 BOOLEAN Information number 25, activate setting group 3
26-GRP4 BOOLEAN Information number 26, activate setting group 4
Table 638: I103CMD Input signals
Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of commands
Table 639: I103CMD Output signals
Name Type Description 16-AR BOOLEAN Information number 16, block of autorecloser
17-DIFF BOOLEAN Information number 17, block of differential protection
18-PROT BOOLEAN Information number 18, block of protection
Section 17 1MRK505222-UUS C Station communication
1050 Technical reference manual
Table 640: I103USRCMD Input signals
Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of commands
Table 641: I103USRCMD Output signals
Name Type Description OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN Command output 1
OUTPUT2 BOOLEAN Command output 2
OUTPUT3 BOOLEAN Command output 3
OUTPUT4 BOOLEAN Command output 4
OUTPUT5 BOOLEAN Command output 5
OUTPUT6 BOOLEAN Command output 6
OUTPUT7 BOOLEAN Command output 7
OUTPUT8 BOOLEAN Command output 8
Table 642: I103IED Input signals
Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
19_LEDRS BOOLEAN 0 Information number 19, reset LEDs
23_GRP1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 23, setting group 1 is active
24_GRP2 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 24, setting group 2 is active
25_GRP3 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 25, setting group 3 is active
26_GRP4 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 26, setting group 4 is active
21_TESTM BOOLEAN 0 Information number 21, test mode is active
Table 643: I103USRDEF Input signals
Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal Input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 8
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 17 Station communication
1051 Technical reference manual
Table 644: I103SUPERV Input signals
Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
32_MEASI BOOLEAN 0 Information number 32, measurand supervision of I
33_MEASU BOOLEAN 0 Information number 33, measurand supervision of U
37_IBKUP BOOLEAN 0 Information number 37, I high-high back-up protection
38_VTFF BOOLEAN 0 Information number 38, fuse failure VT
46_GRWA BOOLEAN 0 Information number 46, group warning
47_GRAL BOOLEAN 0 Information number 47, group alarm
Table 645: I103EF Input signals
Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
51_EFFW BOOLEAN 0 Information number 51, ground-fault forward
52_EFREV BOOLEAN 0 Information number 52, ground-fault reverse
Table 646: I103FLTDIS Input signals
Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
64_PU_A BOOLEAN 0 Information number 64, start phase A
65_PU_B BOOLEAN 0 Information number 65, start phase B
66_PU_C BOOLEAN 0 Information number 66, start phase C
67_STIN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 67, start residual current IN
84_STGEN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 84, start general
69_TR_A BOOLEAN 0 Information number 69, trip phase A
70_TR_B BOOLEAN 0 Information number 70, trip phase B
71_TR_C BOOLEAN 0 Information number 71, trip phase C
68_TRGEN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 68, trip general
74_FW BOOLEAN 0 Information number 74, forward/line
75_REV BOOLEAN 0 Information number 75, reverse/bus
78_ZONE1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 78, zone 1
79_ZONE2 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 79, zone 2
80_ZONE3 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 79, zone 3
81_ZONE4 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 79, zone 4
82_ZONE5 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 79, zone 5
76_TRANS BOOLEAN 0 Information number 76, signal transmitted
Table continues on next page
Section 17 1MRK505222-UUS C Station communication
1052 Technical reference manual
Name Type Default Description 77_RECEV BOOLEAN 0 Information number 77, signal recevied
73_SCL REAL 0 Information number 73, fault location in ohm
FLTLOC BOOLEAN 0 Faultlocator faultlocation valid (LMBRFLO- CALCMADE)
ARINPROG BOOLEAN 0 Autorecloser in progress (SMBRREC- INPROGR)
Table 647: I103FLTSTD Input signals
Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
64_PU_A BOOLEAN 0 Information number 64, start phase A
65_PU_B BOOLEAN 0 Information number 65, start phase B
66_PU_C BOOLEAN 0 Information number 66, start phase C
67_STIN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 67, start residual curent IN
84_STGEN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 84, start general
69_TR_A BOOLEAN 0 Information number 69, trip phase A
70_TR_B BOOLEAN 0 Information number 70, trip phase B
71_TR_C BOOLEAN 0 Information number 71, trip phase C
68_TRGEN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 68, trip general
74_FW BOOLEAN 0 Information number 74, forward/line
75_REV BOOLEAN 0 Information number 75, reverse/bus
85_BFP BOOLEAN 0 Information number 85, breaker failure
86_MTR_A BOOLEAN 0 Information number 86, trip measuring system phase A
87_MTR_B BOOLEAN 0 Information number 87, trip measuring system phase B
88_MTR_C BOOLEAN 0 Information number 88, trip measuring system phase L3
89_MTRN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 89, trip measuring system neutral N
90_IOC BOOLEAN 0 Information number 90, over current trip, stage low
91_IOC BOOLEAN 0 Information number 91, over current trip, stage high
92_IEF BOOLEAN 0 Information number 92, ground-fault trip, stage low
93_IEF BOOLEAN 0 Information number 93, ground-fault trip, stage high
ARINPROG BOOLEAN 0 Autorecloser in progress (SMBRREC- INPROGR)
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 17 Station communication
1053 Technical reference manual
Table 648: I103AR Input signals
Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
16_ARACT BOOLEAN 0 Information number 16, auto-recloser active
128_CBON BOOLEAN 0 Information number 128, circuit breaker on by auto- recloser
130_UNSU BOOLEAN 0 Information number 130, unsuccessful reclosing
Table 649: I103MEAS Input signals
Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of service value reporting
I_A REAL 0.0 Service value for current phase A
I_B REAL 0.0 Service value for current phase B
I_C REAL 0.0 Service value for current phase C
IN REAL 0.0 Service value for residual current IN
V_A REAL 0.0 Service value for voltage phase A
V_B REAL 0.0 Service value for voltage phase B
V_C REAL 0.0 Service value for voltage phase C
V_AB REAL 0.0 Service value for voltage phase-phase A-B
V_N REAL 0.0 Service value for residual voltage VN
P REAL 0.0 Service value for active power
Q REAL 0.0 Service value for reactive power
F REAL 0.0 Service value for system frequency
Table 650: I103MEASUSR Input signals
Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of service value reporting
INPUT1 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 1
INPUT2 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 2
INPUT3 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 3
INPUT4 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 4
INPUT5 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 5
INPUT6 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 6
INPUT7 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 7
INPUT8 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 8
INPUT9 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 9
Section 17 1MRK505222-UUS C Station communication
1054 Technical reference manual
17.6.5 Setting parameters Table 651: IEC60870-5-103 Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description SlaveAddress 0 — 255 — 1 30 Slave address
BaudRate 9600 Bd 19200 Bd
— — 9600 Bd Baudrate on serial line
RevPolarity Disabled Enabled
— — Enabled Invert polarity
CycMeasRepTime 1.0 — 3600.0 — 0.1 5.0 Cyclic reporting time of measurments
Table 652: I103IEDCMD Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description FUNTYPE 1 — 255 FunT 1 255 Function type (1-255)
Table 653: I103CMD Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description FUNTYPE 1 — 255 FunT 1 1 Function type (1-255)
Table 654: I103USRCMD Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description PULSEMOD 0 — 1 Mode 1 1 Pulse mode 0=Steady, 1=Pulsed
T 0.200 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Pulse length
FUNTYPE 1 — 255 FunT 1 1 Function type (1-255)
INFNO_1 1 — 255 InfNo 1 1 Information number for output 1 (1-255)
INFNO_2 1 — 255 InfNo 1 2 Information number for output 2 (1-255)
INFNO_3 1 — 255 InfNo 1 3 Information number for output 3 (1-255)
INFNO_4 1 — 255 InfNo 1 4 Information number for output 4 (1-255)
INFNO_5 1 — 255 InfNo 1 5 Information number for output 5 (1-255)
INFNO_6 1 — 255 InfNo 1 6 Information number for output 6 (1-255)
INFNO_7 1 — 255 InfNo 1 7 Information number for output 7 (1-255)
INFNO_8 1 — 255 InfNo 1 8 Information number for output 8 (1-255)
Table 655: I103IED Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description FUNTYPE 1 — 255 FunT 1 1 Function type (1-255)
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 17 Station communication
1055 Technical reference manual
Table 656: I103USRDEF Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description FUNTYPE 1 — 255 FunT 1 5 Function type (1-255)
INFNO_1 1 — 255 InfNo 1 1 Information number for binary input 1 (1-255)
INFNO_2 1 — 255 InfNo 1 2 Information number for binary input 2 (1-255)
INFNO_3 1 — 255 InfNo 1 3 Information number for binary input 3 (1-255)
INFNO_4 1 — 255 InfNo 1 4 Information number for binary input 4 (1-255)
INFNO_5 1 — 255 InfNo 1 5 Information number for binary input 5 (1-255)
INFNO_6 1 — 255 InfNo 1 6 Information number for binary input 6 (1-255)
INFNO_7 1 — 255 InfNo 1 7 Information number for binary input 7 (1-255)
INFNO_8 1 — 255 InfNo 1 8 Information number for binary input 8 (1-255)
Table 657: I103SUPERV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description FUNTYPE 1 — 255 FunT 1 1 Function type (1-255)
Table 658: I103EF Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description FUNTYPE 1 — 255 FunT 1 160 Function type (1-255)
Table 659: I103FLTDIS Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description FUNTYPE 1 — 255 FunT 1 128 Function type (1-255)
Table 660: I103FLTSTD Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description FUNTYPE 1 — 255 FunT 1 1 Function type (1-255)
Table 661: I103AR Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description FUNTYPE 1 — 255 FunT 1 1 Function type (1-255)
Section 17 1MRK505222-UUS C Station communication
1056 Technical reference manual
Table 662: I103MEAS Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description RatedI_A 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Rated current phase A
RatedI_B 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Rated current phase B
RatedI_C 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Rated current phase C
RatedI_N 1 — 99999 A 1 3000 Rated residual current IN
RatedV_A 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 230.00 Rated voltage for phase A
RatedV_B 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 230.00 Rated voltage for phase B
RatedV_C 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 230.00 Rated voltage for phase C
RatedV_AB 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated voltage for phase-phase A-B
RatedV_N 0.05 — 2000.00 kV 0.05 230.00 Rated residual voltage VN
RatedP 0.00 — 2000.00 MW 0.05 1200.00 Rated value for active power
RatedQ 0.00 — 2000.00 MVA 0.05 1200.00 Rated value for reactive power
RatedF 50.0 — 60.0 Hz 10.0 50.0 Rated system frequency
FUNTYPE 1 — 255 FunT 1 1 Function type (1-255)
Table 663: I103MEASUSR Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description FUNTYPE 1 — 255 FunT 1 25 Function type (1-255)
INFNO 1 — 255 InfNo 1 1 Information number for measurands (1-255)
RatedMeasur1 0.05 — 10000000000.00
— 0.05 1000.00 Rated value for measurement on input 1
RatedMeasur2 0.05 — 10000000000.00
— 0.05 1000.00 Rated value for measurement on input 2
RatedMeasur3 0.05 — 10000000000.00
— 0.05 1000.00 Rated value for measurement on input 3
RatedMeasur4 0.05 — 10000000000.00
— 0.05 1000.00 Rated value for measurement on input 4
RatedMeasur5 0.05 — 10000000000.00
— 0.05 1000.00 Rated value for measurement on input 5
RatedMeasur6 0.05 — 10000000000.00
— 0.05 1000.00 Rated value for measurement on input 6
RatedMeasur7 0.05 — 10000000000.00
— 0.05 1000.00 Rated value for measurement on input 7
RatedMeasur8 0.05 — 10000000000.00
— 0.05 1000.00 Rated value for measurement on input 8
RatedMeasur9 0.05 — 10000000000.00
— 0.05 1000.00 Rated value for measurement on input 9
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 17 Station communication
1057 Technical reference manual
17.6.6 Technical data Table 664: IEC60870-5-103 communication protocol
Function Value Protocol IEC 60870-5-103
Communication speed 9600, 19200 Bd
Section 17 1MRK505222-UUS C Station communication
1058 Technical reference manual
17.7 Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking GOOSEINTLKRCV
17.7.1 Function block
IEC07000048-2-en.vsd
GOOSEINTLKRCV BLOCK ^RESREQ
^RESGRANT ^APP1_OP ^APP1_CL APP1VAL
^APP2_OP ^APP2_CL APP2VAL
^APP3_OP ^APP3_CL APP3VAL
^APP4_OP ^APP4_CL APP4VAL
^APP5_OP ^APP5_CL APP5VAL
^APP6_OP ^APP6_CL APP6VAL
^APP7_OP ^APP7_CL APP7VAL
^APP8_OP ^APP8_CL APP8VAL
^APP9_OP ^APP9_CL APP9VAL
^APP10_OP ^APP10_CL APP10VAL
^APP11_OP ^APP11_CL APP11VAL
^APP12_OP ^APP12_CL APP12VAL
^APP13_OP ^APP13_CL APP13VAL
^APP14_OP ^APP14_CL APP14VAL
^APP15_OP ^APP15_CL APP15VAL COM_VAL
IEC07000048 V2 EN
Figure 497: GOOSEINTLKRCV function block
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 17 Station communication
1059 Technical reference manual
17.7.2 Input and output signals Table 665: GOOSEINTLKRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of output signals
Table 666: GOOSEINTLKRCV Output signals
Name Type Description RESREQ BOOLEAN Reservation request
RESGRANT BOOLEAN Reservation granted
APP1_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 1 position is open
APP1_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 1 position is closed
APP1VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 1 position is valid
APP2_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 2 position is open
APP2_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 2 position is closed
APP2VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 2 position is valid
APP3_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 3 position is open
APP3_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 3 position is closed
APP3VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 3 position is valid
APP4_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 4 position is open
APP4_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 4 position is closed
APP4VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 4 position is valid
APP5_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 5 position is open
APP5_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 5 position is closed
APP5VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 5 position is valid
APP6_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 6 position is open
APP6_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 6 position is closed
APP6VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 6 position is valid
APP7_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 7 position is open
APP7_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 7 position is closed
APP7VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 7 position is valid
APP8_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 8 position is open
APP8_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 8 position is closed
APP8VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 8 position is valid
APP9_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 9 position is open
APP9_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 9 position is closed
APP9VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 9 position is valid
Table continues on next page
Section 17 1MRK505222-UUS C Station communication
1060 Technical reference manual
Name Type Description APP10_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 10 position is open
APP10_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 10 position is closed
APP10VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 10 position is valid
APP11_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 11 position is open
APP11_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 11 position is closed
APP11VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 11 position is valid
APP12_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 12 position is open
APP12_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 12 position is closed
APP12VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 12 position is valid
APP13_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 13 position is open
APP13_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 13 position is closed
APP13VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 13 position is valid
APP14_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 14 position is open
APP14_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 14 position is closed
APP14VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 14 position is valid
APP15_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 15 position is open
APP15_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 15 position is closed
APP15VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 15 position is valid
COM_VAL BOOLEAN Receive communication status is valid
17.7.3 Setting parameters Table 667: GOOSEINTLKRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 17 Station communication
1061 Technical reference manual
17.8 Goose binary receive GOOSEBINRCV
17.8.1 Function block
IEC07000047-2-en.vsd
GOOSEBINRCV BLOCK ^OUT1
OUT1VAL ^OUT2
OUT2VAL ^OUT3
OUT3VAL ^OUT4
OUT4VAL ^OUT5
OUT5VAL ^OUT6
OUT6VAL ^OUT7
OUT7VAL ^OUT8
OUT8VAL ^OUT9
OUT9VAL ^OUT10
OUT10VAL ^OUT11
OUT11VAL ^OUT12
OUT12VAL ^OUT13
OUT13VAL ^OUT14
OUT14VAL ^OUT15
OUT15VAL ^OUT16
OUT16VAL
IEC07000047 V2 EN
Figure 498: GOOSEBINRCV function block
17.8.2 Input and output signals Table 668: GOOSEBINRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of output signals
Table 669: GOOSEBINRCV Output signals
Name Type Description OUT1 BOOLEAN Binary output 1
OUT1VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 1
OUT2 BOOLEAN Binary output 2
Table continues on next page
Section 17 1MRK505222-UUS C Station communication
1062 Technical reference manual
Name Type Description OUT2VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 2
OUT3 BOOLEAN Binary output 3
OUT3VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 3
OUT4 BOOLEAN Binary output 4
OUT4VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 4
OUT5 BOOLEAN Binary output 5
OUT5VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 5
OUT6 BOOLEAN Binary output 6
OUT6VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 6
OUT7 BOOLEAN Binary output 7
OUT7VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 7
OUT8 BOOLEAN Binary output 8
OUT8VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 8
OUT9 BOOLEAN Binary output 9
OUT9VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 9
OUT10 BOOLEAN Binary output 10
OUT10VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 10
OUT11 BOOLEAN Binary output 11
OUT11VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 11
OUT12 BOOLEAN Binary output 12
OUT12VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 12
OUT13 BOOLEAN Binary output 13
OUT13VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 13
OUT14 BOOLEAN Binary output 14
OUT14VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 14
OUT15 BOOLEAN Binary output 15
OUT15VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 15
OUT16 BOOLEAN Binary output 16
OUT16VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 16
17.8.3 Setting parameters Table 670: GOOSEBINRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Disabled
Enabled — — Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 17 Station communication
1063 Technical reference manual
17.9 Multiple command and transmit MULTICMDRCV, MULTICMDSND
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Multiple command and transmit MULTICMDRCV — —
Multiple command and transmit MULTICMDSND — —
17.9.1 Introduction The IED can be provided with a function to send and receive signals to and from other IEDs via the interbay bus. The send and receive function blocks has 16 outputs/inputs that can be used, together with the configuration logic circuits, for control purposes within the IED or via binary outputs. When it is used to communicate with other IEDs, these IEDs have a corresponding Multiple transmit function block with 16 outputs to send the information received by the command block.
17.9.2 Principle of operation Two multiple transmit function blocks MULTICMDSND:1 and MULTICMDSND:2 and 8 slow multiple transmit function blocks MULTICMDSND:3 to MULTICMDSND: 10 are available in the IED.
Sixteen signals can be connected and they will then be sent to the multiple command block in the other IED. The connections are set with the LON Network Tool (LNT).
Twelve multiple command function blocks MULTICMDRCV:1 to MULTICMDRCV: 12 with fast execution time and 48 multiple command function blocks MULTICMDRCV: 13 to MULTICMDRCV:60 with slower execution time are available in the IED.
Multiple command function block MULTICMDRCV has 16 outputs combined in one block, which can be controlled from other IEDs.
The output signals, here OUTPUT1 to OUTPUT16, are then available for configuration to built-in functions or via the configuration logic circuits to the binary outputs of the IED.
MULTICMDRCV also has a supervision function, which sets the output VALID to 0 if the block does not receive data within set maximum time.
Section 17 1MRK505222-UUS C Station communication
1064 Technical reference manual
17.9.3 Design
17.9.3.1 General
The output signals can be of the types Disabled, Steady, or Pulse. The setting is done on the MODE settings, common for the whole block, from PCM600.
0 = Disabled sets all outputs to 0, independent of the values sent from the station level, that is, the operator station or remote-control gateway.
1 = Steady sets the outputs to a steady signal 0 or 1, depending on the values sent from the station level.
2 = Pulse gives a pulse with one execution cycle duration, if a value sent from the station level is changed from 0 to 1. That means that the configured logic connected to the command function blocks may not have a cycle time longer than the execution cycle time for the command function block.
17.9.4 Function block
IEC06000007-2-en.vsd
MULTICMDRCV BLOCK ERROR
NEWDATA OUTPUT1 OUTPUT2 OUTPUT3 OUTPUT4 OUTPUT5 OUTPUT6 OUTPUT7 OUTPUT8 OUTPUT9
OUTPUT10 OUTPUT11 OUTPUT12 OUTPUT13 OUTPUT14 OUTPUT15 OUTPUT16
VALID
IEC06000007 V2 EN
Figure 499: MULTICMDRCV function block
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 17 Station communication
1065 Technical reference manual
IEC06000008-2-en.vsd
MULTICMDSND BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16
ERROR
IEC06000008 V2 EN
Figure 500: MULTICMDSND function block
17.9.5 Input and output signals Table 671: MULTICMDRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
Table 672: MULTICMDSND Input signals
Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13
Table continues on next page
Section 17 1MRK505222-UUS C Station communication
1066 Technical reference manual
Name Type Default Description INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16
Table 673: MULTICMDRCV Output signals
Name Type Description ERROR BOOLEAN MultiReceive error
NEWDATA BOOLEAN New data is received
OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1
OUTPUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2
OUTPUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3
OUTPUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4
OUTPUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5
OUTPUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6
OUTPUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7
OUTPUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8
OUTPUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9
OUTPUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10
OUTPUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11
OUTPUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12
OUTPUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13
OUTPUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14
OUTPUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15
OUTPUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16
VALID BOOLEAN Output data is valid
Table 674: MULTICMDSND Output signals
Name Type Description ERROR BOOLEAN MultiSend error
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 17 Station communication
1067 Technical reference manual
17.9.6 Setting parameters Table 675: MULTICMDRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description tMaxCycleTime 0.050 — 200.000 s 0.001 11.000 Maximum cycle time between receptions of
input data
tMinCycleTime 0.000 — 200.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum cycle time between receptions of input data
Mode Steady Pulsed
— — Steady Mode for output signals
tPulseTime 0.000 — 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Pulse length for multi command outputs
Table 676: MULTICMDSND Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description tMaxCycleTime 0.000 — 200.000 s 0.001 5.000 Maximum time interval between transmission
of output data
tMinCycleTime 0.000 — 200.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum time interval between transmission of output data
Section 17 1MRK505222-UUS C Station communication
1068 Technical reference manual
Section 18 Remote communication
About this chapter This chapter describes the Binary signal transfer function and associated hardware functionality. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals, and technical data are included for each function.
18.1 Binary signal transfer
Function description IEC 61850 identification
IEC 60617 identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number
Binary signal transfer BinSignReceive — —
Binary signal transfer BinSignTransm — —
18.1.1 Introduction The remote end data communication is used either for the transmission of current values together with maximum 8 binary signals in the line differential protection, or for transmission of only binary signals, up to 192 signals, in the other 670 series IEDs. The binary signals are freely configurable and can, thus, be used for any purpose, for example, communication scheme related signals, transfer trip and/or other binary signals between IEDs.
Communication between two IEDs requires that each IED is equipped with an LDCM (Line Data Communication Module). The LDCMs are then interfaces to a 64 kbit/s communication channel for duplex communication between the IEDs.
The IED can be equipped with up to four short range, medium range or long range LDCM.
18.1.2 Principle of operation The communication is made on standard ITU (CCITT) PCM digital 64 kbit/s channels. It is a two-way communication where telegrams are sent every 5 ms (same in 50 Hz and 60 Hz), exchanging information between two IEDs. The format used is C37.94 and one telegram consists of start and stop flags, address, data to be transmitted, Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) and Yellow bit (which is associated with C37.94).
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 18 Remote communication
1069 Technical reference manual
en01000134.vsd
Start flag Information CRC Stop
flag
8 bits n x 16 bits 8 bits16 bits
IEC01000134 V1 EN
Figure 501: Data message structure
The start and stop flags are the 0111 1110 sequence (7E hexadecimal), defined in the HDLC standard. The CRC is designed according to the standard CRC16 definition. The optional address field in the HDLC frame is not used instead a separate addressing is included in the data field.
The address field is used for checking that the received message originates from the correct equipment. There is always a risk that multiplexers occasionally mix the messages up. Each terminal in the system is given a number. The terminal is then programmed to accept messages from a specific terminal number. If the CRC function detects a faulty message, the message is thrown away and not used in the evaluation.
When the communication is used for line differential purpose, the transmitted data consists of three currents, clock information, trip-, block- and alarm-signals and eight binary signals which can be used for any purpose. The three currents are represented as sampled values.
When the communication is used exclusively for binary signals, the full data capacity of the communication channel is used for the binary signal purpose which gives the capacity of 192 signals.
Section 18 1MRK505222-UUS C Remote communication
1070 Technical reference manual
18.1.3 Function block
IEC07000043-2-en.vsd
LDCMRecBinStat1 COMFAIL
YBIT NOCARR NOMESS
ADDRERR LNGTHERR
CRCERROR REMCOMF LOWLEVEL
IEC07000043 V2 EN
IEC07000044-2-en.vsd
LDCMRecBinStat2 COMFAIL
YBIT NOCARR NOMESS
ADDRERR LNGTHERR
CRCERROR TRDELERR SYNCERR
REMCOMF REMGPSER
SUBSTITU LOWLEVEL
IEC07000044 V2 EN
Figure 502: LDCMRecBinStat function blocks
IEC05000451-2-en.vsd
LDCMRecBinStat3 COMFAIL
YBIT NOCARR NOMESS
ADDRERR LNGTHERR
CRCERROR TRDELERR SYNCERR
REMCOMF REMGPSER
SUBSTITU LOWLEVEL
IEC05000451 V2 EN
Figure 503: LDCMRecBinStat function block
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 18 Remote communication
1071 Technical reference manual
18.1.4 Input and output signals Table 677: LDCMRecBinStat1 Output signals
Name Type Description COMFAIL BOOLEAN Detected error in the differential communication
YBIT BOOLEAN Detected error in remote end with incoming message
NOCARR BOOLEAN No carrier is detected in the incoming message
NOMESS BOOLEAN No start and stop flags identified for the incoming message
ADDRERR BOOLEAN Incoming message from a wrong terminal
LNGTHERR BOOLEAN Wrong length of the incoming message
CRCERROR BOOLEAN Identified error by CRC check in incoming message
REMCOMF BOOLEAN Remote terminal indicates problem with received message
LOWLEVEL BOOLEAN Low signal level on the receive link
Table 678: LDCMRecBinStat2 Output signals
Name Type Description COMFAIL BOOLEAN Detected error in the differential communication
YBIT BOOLEAN Detected error in remote end with incoming message
NOCARR BOOLEAN No carrier is detected in the incoming message
NOMESS BOOLEAN No start and stop flags identified for the incoming message
ADDRERR BOOLEAN Incoming message from a wrong terminal
LNGTHERR BOOLEAN Wrong length of the incoming message
CRCERROR BOOLEAN Identified error by CRC check in incoming message
TRDELERR BOOLEAN Transmission time is longer than permitted
SYNCERR BOOLEAN Indicates when echo synchronication is used
REMCOMF BOOLEAN Remote terminal indicates problem with received message
REMGPSER BOOLEAN Remote terminal indicates problem with GPS synchronization
SUBSTITU BOOLEAN Link error, values are substituted
LOWLEVEL BOOLEAN Low signal level on the receive link
Section 18 1MRK505222-UUS C Remote communication
1072 Technical reference manual
Table 679: LDCMRecBinStat3 Output signals
Name Type Description COMFAIL BOOLEAN Detected error in the differential communication
YBIT BOOLEAN Detected error in remote end with incoming message
NOCARR BOOLEAN No carrier is detected in the incoming message
NOMESS BOOLEAN No start and stop flags identified for the incoming message
ADDRERR BOOLEAN Incoming message from a wrong terminal
LNGTHERR BOOLEAN Wrong length of the incoming message
CRCERROR BOOLEAN Identified error by CRC check in incoming message
TRDELERR BOOLEAN Transmission time is longer than permitted
SYNCERR BOOLEAN Indicates when echo synchronication is used
REMCOMF BOOLEAN Remote terminal indicates problem with received message
REMGPSER BOOLEAN Remote terminal indicates problem with GPS synchronization
SUBSTITU BOOLEAN Link error, values are substituted
LOWLEVEL BOOLEAN Low signal level on the receive link
18.1.5 Setting parameters Table 680: LDCMRecBinStat1 Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description ChannelMode Disabled
Enabled OutOfService
— — Enabled Channel mode of LDCM, 0=OFF, 1=ON, 2=OutOfService
TerminalNo 0 — 255 — 1 0 Terminal number used for line differential communication
RemoteTermNo 0 — 255 — 1 0 Terminal number on remote terminal
CommSync Slave Master
— — Slave Com Synchronization mode of LDCM, 0=Slave, 1=Master
OptoPower LowPower HighPower
— — LowPower Transmission power for LDCM, 0=Low, 1=High
ComFailAlrmDel 5 — 500 ms 5 100 Time delay before communication error signal is activated
ComFailResDel 5 — 500 ms 5 100 Reset delay before communication error signal is reset
InvertPolX21 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Invert polarization for X21 communication
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 18 Remote communication
1073 Technical reference manual
Table 681: LDCMRecBinStat2 Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description ChannelMode Disabled
Enabled OutOfService
— — Enabled Channel mode of LDCM, 0=OFF, 1=ON, 2=OutOfService
NAMECH1 0 — 13 — 1 LDCM#-CH1 User defined string for analog input 1
TerminalNo 0 — 255 — 1 0 Terminal number used for line differential communication
RemoteTermNo 0 — 255 — 1 0 Terminal number on remote terminal
NAMECH2 0 — 13 — 1 LDCM#-CH2 User defined string for analog input 2
DiffSync Echo GPS
— — Echo Diff Synchronization mode of LDCM, 0=ECHO, 1=GPS
GPSSyncErr Block Echo
— — Block Operation mode when GPS synchroniation signal is lost
CommSync Slave Master
— — Slave Com Synchronization mode of LDCM, 0=Slave, 1=Master
NAMECH3 0 — 13 — 1 LDCM#-CH3 User defined string for analog input 3
OptoPower LowPower HighPower
— — LowPower Transmission power for LDCM, 0=Low, 1=High
NAMECH4 0 — 13 — 1 LDCM#-CH4 User defined string for analog input 4
TransmCurr CT-GRP1 CT-GRP2 CT-SUM CT-DIFF1 CT-DIFF2
— — CT-GRP1 Summation mode for transmitted current values
ComFailAlrmDel 5 — 500 ms 5 100 Time delay before communication error signal is activated
ComFailResDel 5 — 500 ms 5 100 Reset delay before communication error signal is reset
RedChSwTime 5 — 500 ms 5 5 Time delay before switching in redundant channel
RedChRturnTime 5 — 500 ms 5 100 Time delay before switching back from redundant channel
AsymDelay -20.00 — 20.00 ms 0.01 0.00 Asymmetric delay when communication use echo synch.
AnalogLatency 2 — 20 — 1 2 Latency between local analogue data and transmitted
remAinLatency 2 — 20 — 1 2 Analog latency of remote terminal
MaxTransmDelay 0 — 40 ms 1 20 Max allowed transmission delay
CompRange 0-10kA 0-25kA 0-50kA 0-150kA
— — 0-25kA Compression range
Table continues on next page
Section 18 1MRK505222-UUS C Remote communication
1074 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description MaxtDiffLevel 200 — 2000 us 1 600 Maximum time diff for ECHO back-up
DeadbandtDiff 200 — 1000 us 1 300 Deadband for t Diff
InvertPolX21 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Invert polarization for X21 communication
Table 682: LDCMRecBinStat3 Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description ChannelMode Disabled
Enabled OutOfService
— — Enabled Channel mode of LDCM, 0=OFF, 1=ON, 2=OutOfService
NAMECH1 0 — 13 — 1 LDCM#-CH1 User defined string for analog input 1
TerminalNo 0 — 255 — 1 0 Terminal number used for line differential communication
RemoteTermNo 0 — 255 — 1 0 Terminal number on remote terminal
NAMECH2 0 — 13 — 1 LDCM#-CH2 User defined string for analog input 2
DiffSync Echo GPS
— — Echo Diff Synchronization mode of LDCM, 0=ECHO, 1=GPS
GPSSyncErr Block Echo
— — Block Operation mode when GPS synchroniation signal is lost
CommSync Slave Master
— — Slave Com Synchronization mode of LDCM, 0=Slave, 1=Master
NAMECH3 0 — 13 — 1 LDCM#-CH3 User defined string for analog input 3
OptoPower LowPower HighPower
— — LowPower Transmission power for LDCM, 0=Low, 1=High
NAMECH4 0 — 13 — 1 LDCM#-CH4 User defined string for analog input 4
TransmCurr CT-GRP1 CT-GRP2 CT-SUM CT-DIFF1 CT-DIFF2 RedundantChannel
— — CT-GRP1 Summation mode for transmitted current values
ComFailAlrmDel 5 — 500 ms 5 100 Time delay before communication error signal is activated
ComFailResDel 5 — 500 ms 5 100 Reset delay before communication error signal is reset
RedChSwTime 5 — 500 ms 5 5 Time delay before switching in redundant channel
RedChRturnTime 5 — 500 ms 5 100 Time delay before switching back from redundant channel
AsymDelay -20.00 — 20.00 ms 0.01 0.00 Asymmetric delay when communication use echo synch.
AnalogLatency 2 — 20 — 1 2 Latency between local analogue data and transmitted
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 18 Remote communication
1075 Technical reference manual
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description remAinLatency 2 — 20 — 1 2 Analog latency of remote terminal
MaxTransmDelay 0 — 40 ms 1 20 Max allowed transmission delay
CompRange 0-10kA 0-25kA 0-50kA 0-150kA
— — 0-25kA Compression range
MaxtDiffLevel 200 — 2000 us 1 600 Maximum time diff for ECHO back-up
DeadbandtDiff 200 — 1000 us 1 300 Deadband for t Diff
InvertPolX21 Disabled Enabled
— — Disabled Invert polarization for X21 communication
18.2 Transmission of analog data from LDCM LDCMTransmit
18.2.1 Function block LDCMTRN
^CT1L1 ^CT1L2 ^CT1L3 ^CT1N ^CT2L1 ^CT2L2 ^CT2L3 ^CT2N
IEC10000017-1-en.vsd IEC10000017 V1 EN
Figure 504: LDCMTransmit function block
The function blocks are not represented in the Application Configuration tool except for the LDCMTRN function block that is visible in ACT. The signals appear only in the Signal Matrix tool when a LDCM is included in the configuration with the function selector tool.
Section 18 1MRK505222-UUS C Remote communication
1076 Technical reference manual
18.2.2 Input and output signals Table 683: LDCMTRN Input signals
Name Type Default Description CT1L1 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group1 line L1 to
remote end
CT1L2 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group1 line L2 to remote end
CT1L3 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group1 line L3 to remote end
CT1N STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group1 neutral N to remote end
CT2L1 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group2 line L1 to remote end
CT2L2 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group2 line L2 to remote end
CT2L3 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group2 line L3 to remote end
CT2N STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group2 neutral N to remote end
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 18 Remote communication
1077 Technical reference manual
Section 19 IED hardware
About this chapter This chapter describes the different hardware modules available in the IED. The descriptions includes diagrams from different elevations indicating the location of connection terminals and modules.
19.1 Overview
19.1.1 Variants of case and local HMI display size
xx04000458_ansi.e
Close
Open
ANSI04000458 V1 EN
Figure 505: 1/2 19 case with medium local HMI display.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 19 IED hardware
1079 Technical reference manual
xx05000762_ansi.eps
Close
Open
ANSI05000762 V1 EN
Figure 506: 3/4 19 case with medium local HMI display.
Close
Open
xx04000460_ansi.e
ANSI04000460 V1 EN
Figure 507: 1/1 19 case with medium local HMI display.
Section 19 1MRK505222-UUS C IED hardware
1080 Technical reference manual
19.1.2 Case from the rear side Table 684: Designations for 1/2 x 19 casing with 1 TRM slot
1MRK002801-AC-2-670-1.2-PG V1 EN
Module Rear Positions
PSM X11
BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM or MIM
X31 and X32 etc. to X51 and X52
SLM X301:A, B, C, D
LDCM, IRIG-B or RS485 X302
LDCM or RS485 X303
OEM X311:A, B, C, D
LDCM, RS485 or GTM X312, 313
TRM X401
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 19 IED hardware
1081 Technical reference manual
Table 685: Designations for 3/4 x 19 casing with 1 TRM slot
1MRK002801-AC-3-670-1.2-PG V1 EN
Module Rear Positions
PSM X11
BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM or MIM
X31 and X32 etc. to X101 and X102
SLM X301:A, B, C, D
LDCM, IRIG-B or RS485 X302
LDCM or RS485 X303
OEM X311:A, B, C, D
LDCM, RS485 or GTM X312, X313
TRM X401
Section 19 1MRK505222-UUS C IED hardware
1082 Technical reference manual
Table 686: Designations for 3/4 x 19 casing with 2 TRM slot
1MRK002801-AC-4-670-1.2-PG V1 EN
Module Rear Positions
PSM X11
BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM or MIM
X31 and X32 etc. to X71 and X72
SLM X301:A, B, C, D
LDCM, IRIG-B or RS485 X302
LDCM or RS485 X303
OEM X311:A, B, C, D
LDCM, RS485 or GTM X312, X313, X322, X323
TRM 1 X401
TRM 2 X411
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 19 IED hardware
1083 Technical reference manual
Table 687: Designations for 1/1 x 19 casing with 1 TRM slot
1MRK002801-AC-5-670-1.2-PG V1 EN
Module Rear Positions
PSM X11
BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM or MIM
X31 and X32 etc. to X161 and X162
SLM X301:A, B, C, D
LDCM, IRIG-B or RS485
X302
LDCM or RS485 X303
OEM X311:A, B, C, D
LDCM,RS485 or GTM
X312, X313
TRM X401
Section 19 1MRK505222-UUS C IED hardware
1084 Technical reference manual
Table 688: Designations for 1/1 x 19 casing with 2 TRM slots
1MRK002801-AC-6-670-1.2-PG V1 EN
Module Rear Positions
PSM X11
BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM or MIM
X31 and X32 etc. to X131 and X132
SLM X301:A, B, C, D
LDCM, IRIG-B or RS485
X302
LDCM or RS485 X303
OEM X311:A, B, C, D
LDCM, RS485 or GTM
X312, X313, X322, X323
TRM 1 X401
TRM 2 X411
19.2 Hardware modules
19.2.1 Overview Table 689: Basic modules
Module Description Combined backplane module (CBM) A backplane PCB that carries all internal signals
between modules in an IED. Only the TRM (when included) is not connected directly to this board.
Universal backplane module (UBM) A backplane PCB that forms part of the IED backplane with connectors for TRM (when included), ADM etc.
Power supply module (PSM) Including a regulated DC/DC converter that supplies auxiliary voltage to all static circuits.
An internal fail alarm output is available.
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 19 IED hardware
1085 Technical reference manual
Module Description Numerical module (NUM) Module for overall application control. All information is
processed or passed through this module, such as configuration, settings and communication.
Local Human machine interface (LHMI) The module consists of LED:s, an LCD, a push button keyboard and an ethernet connector used to connect a PC to the IED.
Transformer input module (TRM) Transformer module that galvanically separates the internal circuits from the VT and CT circuits. It has 12 analog inputs.
Analog digital conversion module (ADM) Slot mounted PCB with A/D conversion.
Table 690: Application specific modules
Module Description Binary input module (BIM) Module with 16 optically isolated binary inputs
Binary output module (BOM) Module with 24 single outputs or 12 double-pole command outputs including supervision function
Binary I/O module (IOM) Module with 8 optically isolated binary inputs, 10 outputs and 2 fast signalling outputs.
Line data communication modules (LDCM), short range, medium range, long range, X21
Modules used for digital communication to remote terminal.
Serial SPA/LON/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3 communication modules (SLM)
Used for SPA/LON/IEC 608705103/DNP3 communication
Optical ethernet module (OEM) PMC board for IEC 61850 based communication.
mA input module (MIM) Analog input module with 6 independent, galvanically separated channels.
GPS time synchronization module (GTM) Used to provide the IED with GPS time synchronization.
Static output module (SOM) Module with 6 fast static outputs and 6 change over output relays.
IRIG-B Time synchronization module (IRIG-B) Module with 2 inputs. One is used for handling both pulse-width modulated signals and amplitude modulated signals and one is used for optical input type ST for PPS time synchronization.
19.2.2 Combined backplane module (CBM)
19.2.2.1 Introduction
The combined backplane module (CBM) carries signals between modules in an IED.
Section 19 1MRK505222-UUS C IED hardware
1086 Technical reference manual
19.2.2.2 Functionality
The Compact PCI makes 3.3V or 5V signaling in the backplane possible. The CBM backplane and connected modules are 5V PCI-compatible.
Some pins on the Compact PCI connector are connected to the CAN bus, to be able to communicate with CAN based modules.
If a modules self test discovers an error it informs other modules using the Internal Fail signal IRF.
19.2.2.3 Design
There are two basic versions of the CBM:
with 3 Compact PCI connectors and a number of euro connectors depending on the IED case size. One Compact PCI connector is used by NUM and two are used by other PCI modules, for example two ADMs in IEDs with two TRMs. See figure 509
with 2 Compact PCI connectors and a number of euro connectors depending on the IED case size. One Compact PCI connector is used by NUM and one is used by for example an ADM in IEDs with one TRM. See figure 508
Each PCI connector consists of 2 compact PCI receptacles. The euro connectors are connected to the CAN bus and used for I/O modules and power supply.
en05000516.vsd
1 2
IEC05000516 V1 EN
Figure 508: CBM for 1 TRM.
Pos Description
1 CAN slots
2 CPCI slots
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 19 IED hardware
1087 Technical reference manual
1 2
en05000755.vsd IEC05000755 V1 EN
Figure 509: CBM for 2 TRM.
Pos Description
1 CAN slots
2 CPCI slots
1
en05000756.vsd IEC05000756 V1 EN
Figure 510: CBM position, rear view.
Pos Description
1 CBM
Section 19 1MRK505222-UUS C IED hardware
1088 Technical reference manual
19.2.3 Universal backplane module (UBM)
19.2.3.1 Introduction
The Universal Backplane Module (UBM) is part of the IED backplane and is mounted above the CBM. It connects the Transformer input module (TRM) to the Analog digital conversion module (ADM) and the Numerical module (NUM).
19.2.3.2 Functionality
The Universal Backplane Module connects the CT and VT analog signals from the transformer input module to the analog digital converter module. The Numerical processing module (NUM) is also connected to the UBM. The ethernet contact on the front panel as well as the internal ethernet contacts are connected to the UBM which provides the signal path to the NUM board.
19.2.3.3 Design
It connects the Transformer input module (TRM) to the Analog digital conversion module (ADM) and the Numerical module (NUM).
The UBM exists in 2 versions.
for IEDs with two TRM and two ADM. It has four 48 pin euro connectors and one 96 pin euro connector, see figure 512
for IEDs with one TRM and one ADM. It has two 48 pin euro connectors and one 96 pin euro connector, see figure 513.
The 96 pin euro connector is used to connect the NUM board to the backplane. The 48 pin connectors are used to connect the TRM and ADM.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 19 IED hardware
1089 Technical reference manual
en05000489.vsd
TRM
X1 X3
LHMI Front
connection port
X10
NUM
RS485
Ethernet
Ethernet X5
ADM
X2 X4
AD Data
X10
IEC05000489 V1 EN
Figure 511: UBM block diagram.
en05000757.vsd IEC05000757 V1 EN
Figure 512: UBM for 1 TRM.
en05000758.vsd IEC05000758 V1 EN
Figure 513: UBM for 2 TRM.
Section 19 1MRK505222-UUS C IED hardware
1090 Technical reference manual
1
en05000759.vsd
IEC05000759 V1 EN
Figure 514: UBM position, rear view.
Pos Description
1 UBM
19.2.4 Numeric processing module (NUM)
19.2.4.1 Introduction
The Numeric processing module (NUM), is a CPU-module that handles all protection functions and logic.
For communication with high speed modules, e.g. analog input modules and high speed serial interfaces, the NUM is equipped with a Compact PCI bus. The NUM is the compact PCI system card i.e. it controls bus mastering, clock distribution and receives interrupts.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 19 IED hardware
1091 Technical reference manual
19.2.4.2 Functionality
The NUM, Numeric processing module is a high performance, standard off-the-shelf compact-PCI CPU module. It is 6U high and occupies one slot. Contact with the backplane is via two compact PCI connectors and an euro connector.
The NUM has one PMC slot (32-bit IEEE P1386.1 compliant) and two PC-MIP slots onto which mezzanine cards such as SLM or LDCM can be mounted.
To reduce bus loading of the compact PCI bus in the backplane the NUM has one internal PCI bus for internal resources and the PMC/PC-MIP slots and external PCI accesses through the backplane are buffered in a PCI/PCI bridge.
The application code and configuration data are stored in flash memory using a flash file system.
The NUM is equipped with a real time clock. It uses a capacitor for power backup of the real time clock.
No forced cooling is used on this standard module because of the low power dissipation.
Section 19 1MRK505222-UUS C IED hardware
1092 Technical reference manual
19.2.4.3 Block diagram
en04000473.vsd
Logic Compact
Flash
North bridge
CPU
Memory
PC-MIP
PMC connector
U B
M
co nn
ec to
r
Ethernet
Ba ck
pl an
e co
nn ec
to rPCI-PCI- bridge
IEC04000473 V1 EN
Figure 515: Numeric processing module block diagram
19.2.5 Power supply module (PSM)
19.2.5.1 Introduction
The power supply module is used to provide the correct internal voltages and full isolation between the terminal and the battery system. An internal fail alarm output is available.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 19 IED hardware
1093 Technical reference manual
19.2.5.2 Design
There are two types of the power supply module. They are designed for different DC input voltage ranges see table 691. The power supply module contains a built-in, self- regulated DC/DC converter that provides full isolation between the terminal and the external battery system.
Block diagram
99000516.vsd
B ac
kp la
ne c
on ne
ct or
In pu
t c on
ne ct
or
Power supplyFilter
Supervision
IEC99000516 V1 EN
Figure 516: PSM Block diagram.
19.2.5.3 Technical data
Table 691: PSM — Power supply module
Quantity Rated value Nominal range Auxiliary dc voltage, EL (input) EL = (24 — 60) V
EL = (90 — 250) V EL 20% EL 20%
Power consumption 50 W typically —
Auxiliary DC power in-rush < 5 A during 0.1 s —
19.2.6 Local human-machine interface (Local HMI) Refer to section «Local HMI» for information.
Section 19 1MRK505222-UUS C IED hardware
1094 Technical reference manual
19.2.7 Transformer input module (TRM)
19.2.7.1 Introduction
The transformer input module is used to galvanically separate and transform the secondary currents and voltages generated by the measuring transformers. The module has twelve inputs in different combinations of currents and voltage inputs.
Alternative connectors of Ring lug or Compression type can be ordered.
19.2.7.2 Design
The transformer module has 12 input transformers. There are several versions of the module, each with a different combination of voltage and current input transformers.
Basic versions:
6 current channels and 6 voltage channels 7 current channels and 5 voltage channels 9 current channels and 3 voltage channels 12 current channels
The rated values and channel type, measurement or protection, of the current inputs are selected at order.
Transformer input module for measuring should not be used with current transformers intended for protection purposes, due to limitations in overload characteristics.
The TRM is connected to the ADM and NUM via the UBM.
For configuration of the input and output signals, refer to section «Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI».
19.2.7.3 Technical data
Table 692: TRM — Energizing quantities, rated values and limits for protection transformer modules
Quantity Rated value Nominal range Current In = 1 or 5 A (0.2-40) In
Operative range (0-100) x In
Permissive overload 4 In cont. 100 In for 1 s *)
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 19 IED hardware
1095 Technical reference manual
Quantity Rated value Nominal range Burden < 150 mVA at In = 5 A
< 20 mVA at In = 1 A
Ac voltage Vn = 120 V 0.5288 V
Operative range (0340) V
Permissive overload 420 V cont. 450 V 10 s
Burden < 20 mVA at 110 V
Frequency fn = 60/50 Hz 5%
*) max. 350 A for 1 s when COMBITEST test switch is included.
Table 693: TRM — Energizing quantities, rated values and limits for measuring transformer modules
Quantity Rated value Nominal range Current In = 1 or 5 A (0-1.8) In at In = 1 A
(0-1.6) In at In = 5 A
Permissive overload 1.1 In cont. 1.8 In for 30 min at In = 1 A 1.6 In for 30 min at In = 5 A
Burden < 350 mVA at In = 5 A < 200 mVA at In = 1 A
Ac voltage Vn = 120 V 0.5288 V
Operative range (0340) V
Permissive overload 420 V cont. 450 V 10 s
Burden < 20 mVA at 110 V
Frequency fn = 60/50 Hz 5%
19.2.8 Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization (ADM)
19.2.8.1 Introduction
The Analog/Digital module has twelve analog inputs, 2 PC-MIP slots and 1 PMC slot. The PC-MIP slot is used for PC-MIP cards and the PMC slot for PMC cards according to table 694. The OEM card should always be mounted on the ADM board. The UBM connects the ADM to the transformer input module (TRM).
Section 19 1MRK505222-UUS C IED hardware
1096 Technical reference manual
Table 694: PC-MIP cards and PMC cards
PC-MIP cards PMC cards LDCM SLM
LR-LDCM OEM 1 ch
MR-LDCM OEM 2 ch
X21-LDCM
IRIG-B
RS485
19.2.8.2 Design
The Analog digital conversion module input signals are voltage and current from the transformer module. Shunts are used to adapt the current signals to the electronic voltage level. To gain dynamic range for the current inputs, two shunts with separate A \D channels are used for each input current. In this way a 20 bit dynamic range is obtained with a 16 bit A\D converter.
Input signals are sampled with a sampling freqency of 5 kHz at 50 Hz system frequency and 6 kHz at 60 Hz system frequency.
The A\D converted signals goes through a filter with a cut off frequency of 500 Hz and are reported to the numerical module (NUM) with 1 kHz at 50 Hz system frequency and 1,2 kHz at 60 Hz system frequency.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 19 IED hardware
1097 Technical reference manual
PMC
PCI to PCI
PC-MIP
PC-MIP
AD3
AD1
AD2
AD4
Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 Channel 9 Channel 10 Channel 11 Channel 12
1.2v
2.5v
level shift
en05000474.vsd IEC05000474 V1 EN
Figure 517: The ADM layout
Section 19 1MRK505222-UUS C IED hardware
1098 Technical reference manual
19.2.9 Binary input module (BIM)
19.2.9.1 Introduction
The binary input module has 16 optically isolated inputs and is available in two versions, one standard and one with enhanced pulse counting capabilities on the inputs to be used with the pulse counter function. The binary inputs are freely programmable and can be used for the input of logical signals to any of the functions. They can also be included in the disturbance recording and event-recording functions. This enables extensive monitoring and evaluation of operation of the IED and for all associated electrical circuits.
19.2.9.2 Design
The Binary input module contains 16 optical isolated binary inputs. The voltage level of the binary input is selected at order.
For configuration of the input signals, refer to section «Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI».
A signal discriminator detects and blocks oscillating signals. When blocked, a hysteresis function may be set to release the input at a chosen frequency, making it possible to use the input for pulse counting. The blocking frequency may also be set.
Well defined input high and input low voltages ensure normal operation at battery supply earth faults, see figure 518 The figure shows the typical operating characteristics of the binary inputs of the four voltage levels.
The standard version of binary inputs gives an improved capability to withstand disturbances and should generally be used when pulse counting is not required. Inputs are debounced by software.
I/O events are time stamped locally on each module for minimum time deviance and stored by the event recorder if present.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 19 IED hardware
1099 Technical reference manual
300
176 144
88 72 38 32 19
17
24/30V 48/60V 110/125V 220/250V
[V]
xx99000517-2_ansi.vsd ANSI99000517 V2 EN
Figure 518: Voltage dependence for the binary inputs
IEC99000517-ABC V1 EN
Operation Operation uncertain No operation
This binary input module communicates with the Numerical module (NUM) via the CAN-bus on the backplane.
The design of all binary inputs enables the burn off of the oxide of the relay contact connected to the input, despite the low, steady-state power consumption, which is shown in figure 519 and 520.
Section 19 1MRK505222-UUS C IED hardware
1100 Technical reference manual
en07000104-3.vsd
50
55 [ms]
[mA]
IEC07000104 V3 EN
Figure 519: Approximate binary input inrush current for the standard version of BIM.
en07000105-1.vsd
50
5.5 [ms]
[mA]
IEC07000105 V2 EN
Figure 520: Approximate binary input inrush current for the BIM version with enhanced pulse counting capabilities.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 19 IED hardware
1101 Technical reference manual
B ac
kp la
ne c
on ne
ct or
P ro
ce ss
c on
ne ct
or P
ro ce
ss c
on ne
ct or
Micro- controller
C A
N
Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input
99000503-2.vsd IEC99000503 V2 EN
Figure 521: Block diagram of the Binary input module.
Section 19 1MRK505222-UUS C IED hardware
1102 Technical reference manual
19.2.9.3 Technical data
Table 695: BIM — Binary input module
Quantity Rated value Nominal range Binary inputs 16 —
DC voltage, RL 24/30 V 48/60 V 125 V 220/250 V
RL 20% RL 20% RL 20% RL 20%
Power consumption 24/30 V, 50mA 48/60 V, 50mA 125 V, 50mA 220/250 V, 50mA 220/250 V, 110mA
max. 0.05 W/input max. 0.1 W/input max. 0.2 W/input max. 0.4 W/input max. 0.5 W/input
—
Counter input frequency 10 pulses/s max —
Oscillating signal discriminator Blocking settable 140 Hz Release settable 130 Hz
Debounce filter Settable 120ms
Maximum 176 binary input channels may be activated simultaneously with influencing factors within nominal range.
Table 696: BIM — Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities
Quantity Rated value Nominal range Binary inputs 16 —
DC voltage, RL 24/30 V 48/60 V 125 V 220/250 V
RL 20% RL 20% RL 20% RL 20%
Power consumption 24/30 V 48/60 V 125 V 220/250 V
max. 0.05 W/input max. 0.1 W/input max. 0.2 W/input max. 0.4 W/input
—
Counter input frequency 10 pulses/s max —
Balanced counter input frequency 40 pulses/s max —
Oscillating signal discriminator Blocking settable 140 Hz Release settable 130 Hz
Maximum 176 binary input channels may be activated simultaneously with influencing factors within nominal range.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 19 IED hardware
1103 Technical reference manual
19.2.10 Binary output modules (BOM)
19.2.10.1 Introduction
The binary output module has 24 independent output relays and is used for trip output or any signaling purpose.
19.2.10.2 Design
The binary output module (BOM) has 24 software supervised output relays. Each pair of relays have a common power source input to the contacts, see figure 522. This should be considered when connecting the wiring to the connection terminal on the back of the IED.
The high closing and carrying current capability allows connection directly to breaker trip and closing coils. If breaking capability is required to manage fail of the breaker auxiliary contacts normally breaking the trip coil current, a parallel reinforcement is required.
For configuration of the output signals, refer to section «Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO».
ANSI_xx00000299.vsd
2
1
3
Output module
ANSI00000299 V1 EN
Figure 522: Relay pair example
1 Output connection from relay 1
2 Output signal power source connection
3 Output connection from relay 2
Section 19 1MRK505222-UUS C IED hardware
1104 Technical reference manual
Ba ck
pl an
e co
nn ec
to r
P ro
ce ss
c on
ne ct
or P
ro ce
ss c
on ne
ct or
Micro- controller
C A
N
R el
ayRelay Relay
Relay Relay
Relay Relay
Relay Relay
Relay Relay
Relay Relay
Relay Relay
Relay Relay
Relay Relay
Relay Relay
R el
ay
R el
ay
R el
ay
99000505-2-en.vsd IEC99000505 V2 EN
Figure 523: Block diagram of the Binary Output Module
19.2.10.3 Technical data
Table 697: BOM — Binary output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
Function or quantity Trip and Signal relays Binary outputs 24
Max system voltage 250 V AC, DC
Test voltage across open contact, 1 min 1000 V rms
Current carrying capacity Per relay, continuous Per relay, 1 s Per process connector pin, continuous
8 A 10 A 12 A
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 19 IED hardware
1105 Technical reference manual
Function or quantity Trip and Signal relays Making capacity at inductive load with L/R>10 ms 0.2 s 1.0 s
30 A 10 A
Breaking capacity for AC, cos j>0.4 250 V/8.0 A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40 ms 48 V/1 A 110 V/0.4 A 125 V/0.35 A 220 V/0.2 A 250 V/0.15 A
Maximum 72 outputs may be activated simultaneously with influencing factors within nominal range. After 6 ms an additional 24 outputs may be activated. The activation time for the 96 outputs must not exceed 200 ms. 48 outputs can be activated during 1 s. Continued activation is possible with respect to current consumption but after 5 minutes the temperature rise will adversely affect the hardware life. Maximum two relays per BOM/IOM/SOM should be activated continuously due to power dissipation.
19.2.11 Static binary output module (SOM)
19.2.11.1 Introduction
The static binary output module has six fast static outputs and six change over output relays for use in applications with high speed requirements.
19.2.11.2 Design
The Static output module (SOM) have 6 normally open (NO) static outputs and 6 electromechanical relay outputs with change over contacts.
The SOM consists mainly of:
An MCU A CAN-driver 6 static relays outputs 6 electromechanical relay outputs A DC/DC converter Connectors interfacing
CAN-bus to backplane CBM IO-connectors to binary outputs (2 pcs.)
Section 19 1MRK505222-UUS C IED hardware
1106 Technical reference manual
The following parts are supervised:
Interruption in relay coil Short circuit of relay coil Driver failure
M C
U
Reset
CAN- driver
Code- flash
Pr oc
es s
co nn
ec to
r Pr
oc es
s co
nn ec
to r
Ba ck
pl an
e co
nn ec
to rDC/DC
Internal_fail_n AC_fail_n RCAN_ID
Sync
Drive & Read back
Drive & Read back
Drive & Read back
en07000115.vsd
Drive & Read back
Drive & Read back
Drive & Read back
Drive & Read back
Drive & Read back
Drive & Read back
Drive & Read back
Drive & Read back
Drive & Read back
IEC07000115 V1 EN
Figure 524: Block diagram of the static output module
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 19 IED hardware
1107 Technical reference manual
Z
IEC09000974-1-en.vsd
IEC09000974 V1 EN
Figure 525: SOM Static output principle
1MRK002802-AB-13-670-1.2-PG-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 526: Connection diagram of the static output module
19.2.11.3 Technical data
Table 698: SOM — Static Output Module (reference standard: IEC 61810-2): Static binary outputs
Function of quantity Static binary output trip Rated voltage 48 — 60 VDC 110 — 250 VDC
Number of outputs 6 6
Impedance open state ~300 k ~810 k
Test voltage across open contact, 1 min
No galvanic separation No galvanic separation
Current carrying capacity:
Continuous 5A 5A
1.0s 10A 10A
Making capacity at capacitive load with the maximum capacitance of 0.2 F :
0.2s 30A 30A
1.0s 10A 10A
Table continues on next page
Section 19 1MRK505222-UUS C IED hardware
1108 Technical reference manual
Function of quantity Static binary output trip Breaking capacity for DC with L/R 40ms
48V / 1A 110V / 0.4A
60V / 0.75A 125V / 0.35A
220V / 0.2A
250V / 0.15A
Operating time <1ms <1ms
Table 699: SOM — Static Output module data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2): Electromechanical relay outputs
Function of quantity Trip and signal relays Max system voltage 250V AC/DC
Number of outputs 6
Test voltage across open contact, 1 min 1000V rms
Current carrying capacity:
Continuous 8A
1.0s 10A
Making capacity at capacitive load with the maximum capacitance of 0.2 F:
0.2s 30A
1.0s 10A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R 40ms 48V / 1A
110V / 0.4A
125V / 0.35A
220V / 0.2A
250V / 0.15A
Maximum 72 outputs may be activated simultaneously with influencing factors within nominal range. After 6 ms an additional 24 outputs may be activated. The activation time for the 96 outputs must not exceed 200 ms. 48 outputs can be activated during 1 s. Continued activation is possible with respect to current consumption but after 5 minutes the temperature rise will adversely affect the hardware life. Maximum two relays per BOM/IOM/SOM should be activated continuously due to power dissipation.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 19 IED hardware
1109 Technical reference manual
19.2.12 Binary input/output module (IOM)
19.2.12.1 Introduction
The binary input/output module is used when only a few input and output channels are needed. The ten standard output channels are used for trip output or any signaling purpose. The two high speed signal output channels are used for applications where short operating time is essential. Eight optically isolated binary inputs cater for required binary input information.
19.2.12.2 Design
The binary input/output module is available in two basic versions, one with unprotected contacts and one with MOV (Metal Oxide Varistor) protected contacts.
Inputs are designed to allow oxide burn-off from connected contacts, and increase the disturbance immunity during normal protection operate times. This is achieved with a high peak inrush current while having a low steady-state current, see figure 519. Inputs are debounced by software.
Well defined input high and input low voltages ensures normal operation at battery supply ground faults, see figure 518.
The voltage level of the inputs is selected when ordering.
I/O events are time stamped locally on each module for minimum time deviance and stored by the event recorder if present.
The binary I/O module, IOM, has eight optically isolated inputs and ten output relays. One of the outputs has a change-over contact. The nine remaining output contacts are connected in two groups. One group has five contacts with a common and the other group has four contacts with a common, to be used as single-output channels, see figure 527.
The binary I/O module also has two high speed output channels where a reed relay is connected in parallel to the standard output relay.
For configuration of the input and output signals, refer to sections «Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI» and «Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO».
The making capacity of the reed relays are limited.
Section 19 1MRK505222-UUS C IED hardware
1110 Technical reference manual
IEC1MRK002801-AA11-UTAN-RAM V1 EN
IEC1MRK002802-AA-13 V1 EN
Figure 527: Binary in/out module (IOM), input contacts named XA corresponds to rear position X31, X41, and so on, and output contacts named XB to rear position X32, X42, and so on
The binary input/output module version with MOV protected contacts can for example be used in applications where breaking high inductive load would cause excessive wear of the contacts.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 19 IED hardware
1111 Technical reference manual
The test voltage across open contact is lower for this version of the binary input/output module.
xx04000069.vsd
IEC04000069 V1 EN
Figure 528: IOM with MOV protection, relay example
19.2.12.3 Technical data
Table 700: IOM — Binary input/output module
Quantity Rated value Nominal range Binary inputs 8 —
DC voltage, RL 24/30 V 48/60 V 125 V 220/250 V
RL 20% RL 20% RL 20% RL 20%
Power consumption 24/30 V, 50 mA 48/60 V, 50 mA 125 V, 50 mA 220/250 V, 50 mA 220/250 V, 110 mA
max. 0.05 W/input max. 0.1 W/input max. 0.2 W/input max. 0.4 W/input max. 0.5 W/input
—
Counter input frequency 10 pulses/s max
Oscillating signal discriminator Blocking settable 1-40 Hz Release settable 1-30 Hz
Debounce filter Settable 1-20 ms
Maximum 176 binary input channels may be activated simultaneously with influencing factors within nominal range.
Section 19 1MRK505222-UUS C IED hardware
1112 Technical reference manual
Table 701: IOM — Binary input/output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
Function or quantity Trip and signal relays Fast signal relays (parallel reed relay)
Binary outputs 10 2
Max system voltage 250 V AC, DC 250 V DC
Test voltage across open contact, 1 min 1000 V rms 800 V DC
Current carrying capacity Per relay, continuous Per relay, 1 s Per process connector pin, continuous
8 A 10 A 12 A
8 A 10 A 12 A
Making capacity at inductive load with L/R>10 ms 0.2 s 1.0 s
30 A 10 A
0.4 A 0.4 A
Making capacity at resistive load 0.2 s 1.0 s
30 A 10 A
220250 V/0.4 A 110125 V/0.4 A 4860 V/0.2 A 2430 V/0.1 A
Breaking capacity for AC, cos > 0.4 250 V/8.0 A 250 V/8.0 A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40 ms
48 V/1 A 110 V/0.4 A 125 V/0.35 A 220 V/0.2 A 250 V/0.15 A
48 V/1 A 110 V/0.4 A 125 V/0.35 A 220 V/0.2 A 250 V/0.15 A
Maximum capacitive load — 10 nF
Maximum 72 outputs may be activated simultaneously with influencing factors within nominal range. After 6 ms an additional 24 outputs may be activated. The activation time for the 96 outputs must not exceed 200 ms. 48 outputs can be activated during 1 s. Continued activation is possible with respect to current consumption but after 5 minutes the temperature rise will adversely affect the hardware life. Maximum two relays per BOM/IOM/SOM should be activated continuously due to power dissipation.
Table 702: IOM with MOV and IOM 220/250 V, 110mA — contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
Function or quantity Trip and Signal relays Fast signal relays (parallel reed relay)
Binary outputs IOM: 10 IOM: 2
Max system voltage 250 V AC, DC 250 V DC
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 19 IED hardware
1113 Technical reference manual
Test voltage across open contact, 1 min
250 V rms 250 V rms
Current carrying capacity Per relay, continuous Per relay, 1 s Per process connector pin, continuous
8 A 10 A 12 A
8 A 10 A 12 A
Making capacity at inductive loadwith L/R>10 ms 0.2 s 1.0 s
30 A 10 A
0.4 A 0.4 A
Making capacity at resistive load 0.2 s 1.0 s
30 A 10 A
220250 V/0.4 A 110125 V/0.4 A 4860 V/0.2 A 2430 V/0.1 A
Breaking capacity for AC, cos j>0.4
250 V/8.0 A 250 V/8.0 A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/ R < 40 ms
48 V/1 A 110 V/0.4 A 220 V/0.2 A 250 V/0.15 A
48 V/1 A 110 V/0.4 A 220 V/0.2 A 250 V/0.15 A
Maximum capacitive load — 10 nF
Maximum 72 outputs may be activated simultaneously with influencing factors within nominal range. After 6 ms an additional 24 outputs may be activated. The activation time for the 96 outputs must not exceed 200 ms. 48 outputs can be activated during 1 s. Continued activation is possible with respect to current consumption but after 5 minutes the temperature rise will adversely affect the hardware life. Maximum two relays per BOM/IOM/SOM should be activated continuously due to power dissipation.
19.2.13 mA input module (MIM)
19.2.13.1 Introduction
The milli-ampere input module is used to interface transducer signals in the 20 to +20 mA range from for example OLTC position, temperature or pressure transducers. The module has six independent, galvanically separated channels.
Section 19 1MRK505222-UUS C IED hardware
1114 Technical reference manual
19.2.13.2 Design
The Milliampere Input Module has six independent analog channels with separated protection, filtering, reference, A/D-conversion and optical isolation for each input making them galvanically isolated from each other and from the rest of the module.
For configuration of the input signals, refer to section «Signal matrix for mA inputs SMMI».
The analog inputs measure DC current in the range of +/- 20 mA. The A/D converter has a digital filter with selectable filter frequency. All inputs are calibrated separately The filter parameters and the calibration factors are stored in a non-volatile memory on the module.
The calibration circuitry monitors the module temperature and starts an automatical calibration procedure if the temperature drift is outside the allowed range. The module communicates, like the other I/O-modules on the serial CAN-bus.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 19 IED hardware
1115 Technical reference manual
Ba ck
pl an
e co
nn ec
to r
Pr oc
es s
co nn
ec to
r
Micro- controller
Memory C AN
Protection & filter
A/D Converter
Volt-ref
Opto- isolation
DC/DC
Protection & filter
A/D Converter
Volt-ref
Opto- isolation
DC/DC
Protection & filter
A/D Converter
Volt-ref
Opto- isolation
DC/DC
Protection & filter
A/D Converter
Volt-ref
Opto- isolation
DC/DC
Protection & filter
A/D Converter
Volt-ref
Opto- isolation
DC/DC
Protection & filter
A/D Converter
Volt-ref
Opto- isolation
DC/DC
99000504.vsd
IEC99000504 V1 EN
Figure 529: MIM block diagram
19.2.13.3 Technical data
Table 703: MIM — mA input module
Quantity: Rated value: Nominal range: Input resistance Rin = 194 Ohm —
Input range 5, 10, 20mA 0-5, 0-10, 0-20, 4-20mA
—
Power consumption each mA-board each mA input
2 W 0.1 W
—
Section 19 1MRK505222-UUS C IED hardware
1116 Technical reference manual
19.2.14 Serial and LON communication module (SLM)
19.2.14.1 Introduction
The serial and LON communication module (SLM) is used for SPA, IEC 60870-5-103, DNP3 and LON communication. The module has two optical communication ports for plastic/plastic, plastic/glass or glass/glass. One port is used for serial communication (SPA, IEC 60870-5-103 and DNP3 port or dedicated IEC 60870-5-103 port depending on ordered SLM module) and one port is dedicated for LON communication.
19.2.14.2 Design
The SLM is a PMC card and it is factory mounted as a mezzanine card on the NUM module. Three variants of the SLM is available with different combinations of optical fiber connectors, see figure 530. The plastic fiber connectors are of snap-in type and the glass fiber connectors are of ST type.
IEC05000760 V1 EN
Figure 530: The SLM variants, component side view
A Snap in connector for plastic fiber
B ST connector for glass fiber
1 LON port
2 SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3 port or dedicated IEC 60870-5-103 port depending on ordered SLM module
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 19 IED hardware
1117 Technical reference manual
IEC05000761 V1 EN
Figure 531: The SLM layout overview, component side view
1 Receiver, LON
2 Transmitter, LON
3 Receiver, SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3
4 Transmitter, SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3
Observe that when the SLM connectors are viewed from the rear side of the IED, contact 4 above is in the uppermost position and contact 1 in the lowest position.
19.2.14.3 Technical data
Table 704: SLM LON port
Quantity Range or value Optical connector Glass fiber: type ST
Plastic fiber: type HFBR snap-in
Fiber, optical budget Glass fiber: 11 dB (3000 ft typically *) Plastic fiber: 7 dB (35 ft 10 m typically *)
Fiber diameter Glass fiber: 62.5/125 mm Plastic fiber: 1 mm
*) depending on optical budget calculation
Section 19 1MRK505222-UUS C IED hardware
1118 Technical reference manual
Table 705: SLM SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3 port
Quantity Range or value Optical connector Glass fiber: type ST
Plastic fiber: type HFBR snap-in
Fiber, optical budget Glass fiber: 11 dB (3000ft/1000 m typically *) Plastic fiber: 7 dB (80ft/25 m typically *)
diameter Glass fiber: 62.5/125 mm Plastic fiber: 1 mm
*) depending on optical budget calculation
19.2.15 Galvanic RS485 communication module
19.2.15.1 Introduction
The Galvanic RS485 communication module (RS485) is used for DNP3.0 communication. The module has one RS485 communication port. The RS485 is a balanced serial communication that can be used either in 2-wire or 4-wire connections. A 2-wire connection uses the same signal for RX and TX and is a multidrop communication with no dedicated Master or slave. This variant requires however a control of the output. The 4-wire connection has separated signals for RX and TX multidrop communication with a dedicated Master and the rest are slaves. No special control signal is needed in this case.
19.2.15.2 Design
The RS485 is a PMC card and it is factory mounted as a mezzanine card on the NUM module. The internal structure of the RS485 can be seen in figure 532:
P C
I- c
o n
32 MHz
UART
Tx
Rx
Isolation
Isolation
Isolation
Isolated DC/DC
RS485 tranceiver
PCI-bus
ID-chip
FPGA
PCI- Controller
Local bus to
wishbone
Status Register Termination
Control Register
Info Register
Soft ground
Internal bus
P C
I- c
o n
2 -p
o le
c
o n
n e
c to
r
W is
h b
o n
e i
n te
rc o
n n
e c
t s w
it c h
6 -p
o le
-c o
n n
e c
to r
IEC06000516 V1 EN
Figure 532: The internal structure of the RS485 card
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 19 IED hardware
1119 Technical reference manual
RS485 connector pinouts The arrangement for the pins in the RS485 connector (figure 533) are presented in table 706:
Table 706: The arrangement for the pins
Pin Name 2-wire Name 4-wire Description
1 RS485+ TX+ Receive/transmit high or transmit high
2 RS485 TX Receive/transmit
3 Term T-Term Termination resistor for transmitter (and receiver in 2 wir case) (connect to TX+)
4 N.A. R-Term Termination resistor for receiver (connect to RX+)
5 N.A. RX Receive low
6 N.A. RX+ Receive high
Screw terminal
X3
1
2
1
2
3 4 5
6
Screw terminal
X1
Backplane
Angle bracket
RS485 PWB
IEC06000517 V1 EN
Figure 533: RS485 connector
2-wire: Connect pin 1 to pin 6 and pin 2 to pin 5
Termination (2-wire): Connect pin 1 to pin 3
Termination (4-wire): Connect pin 1 to pin 3 and pin 4 to pin 6
Soft ground connector pinouts A second 2-pole screw connector is used for the connection of IO-ground. It can be used in two combinations like:
Section 19 1MRK505222-UUS C IED hardware
1120 Technical reference manual
Unconnected: No ground of the IO-part .
Soft grounded: The IO is connected to the GND with an RC net parallel with a MOV
19.2.15.3 Technical data
Table 707: Galvanic RS485 communication module
Quantity Range or value Communication speed 240019200 bauds
External connectors RS-485 6-pole connector Soft ground 2-pole connector
19.2.16 Optical ethernet module (OEM)
19.2.16.1 Introduction
The optical fast-ethernet module is used to connect an IED to the communication buses (like the station bus) that use the IEC 61850-8-1 protocol (OEM rear port A, B). The process bus use the IEC 61850-9-2LE protocol (OEM rear port C, D). The module has one or two optical ports with ST connectors.
19.2.16.2 Functionality
The Optical Ethernet module (OEM) is used when communication systems according to IEC6185081 have been implemented.
19.2.16.3 Design
The Optical Ethernet module (OEM) is a PMC card and mounted as a mezzanine card on the ADM. The OEM is a 100base Fx module and available as a single channel or double channel unit.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 19 IED hardware
1121 Technical reference manual
en04000472.vsd
PCI — PCI Bridge
Ethernet Controller
Ethernet Controller
100Base-FX Transmitter
PCI — bus Connector
ST fiber optic connectors
ST fiber optic connectors
EEPROM
EEPROM
ID chip
IO — bus Connector
100Base-FX Receiver
100Base-FX Transmitter
100Base-FX Receiver
IEC04000472 V1 EN
Figure 534: OEM block diagram.
PC I b
us IO
b us
PCI to PCI bridge
Ethernet cont.
Ethernet cont.
ID chip
25MHz oscillator
25MHz oscillator
LED
LED
Receiver
Transmitter
Receiver
Transmitter
en05000472.vsd
IEC05000472 V1 EN
Figure 535: OEM layout, standard PMC format 2 channels
19.2.16.4 Technical data
Table 708: OEM — Optical ethernet module
Quantity Rated value Number of channels 1 or 2 (port A, B for IEC61850-8-1 and port C, D for
IEC 61850-9-2LE)
Standard IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-FX
Type of fiber 62.5/125 mm multimode fibre
Wave length 1300 nm
Optical connector Type ST
Communication speed Fast Ethernet 100 MB
Section 19 1MRK505222-UUS C IED hardware
1122 Technical reference manual
19.2.17 Line data communication module (LDCM)
19.2.17.1 Introduction
The line data communication module (LDCM) is used for communication between the IEDs situated at distances <68 miles or from the IED to optical to electrical converter with G.703 interface located on a distances <1.9 miles away. The LDCM module sends and rereceives data, to and from another LDCM module. The IEEE/ANSI standard format is used.
The line data communication module is used for binary signal transfer. The module has one optical port with ST connectors see figure 536.
Line data communication module LDCM Each module has one optical port, one for each remote end to which the IED communicates.
Alternative cards for Long range (1550 nm single mode), Medium range (1310 nm single mode) and Short range (850 nm multi mode) are available.
Class 1 laser product. Take adequate measures to protect the eyes. Never look into the laser beam.
19.2.17.2 Design
The LDCM is a PCMIP type II single width format module. The LDCM can be mounted on:
the ADM the NUM
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 19 IED hardware
1123 Technical reference manual
ST
16 .0
00 M
H z
ID
ST
32 ,7
68 M
H z
IO -c
on ne
ct or
en07000087.vsd IEC07000087 V1 EN
Figure 536: The SR-LDCM layout. PCMIP type II single width format with two PCI connectors and one I/O ST type connector
3 2
X1
C
PCI9054 TQ176FPGA
256 FBGA
ADN 2841
DS 3904
M AX
36 45
2.5V ID
DS 3904
en06000393.vsd IEC06000393 V1 EN
Figure 537: The MR-LDCM and LR-LDCM layout. PCMIP type II single width format with two PCI connectors and one I/O FC/PC type connector
19.2.17.3 Technical data
Section 19 1MRK505222-UUS C IED hardware
1124 Technical reference manual
Table 709: Line data communication module
Characteristic Range or value Type of LDCM Short range (SR) Medium range (MR) Long range (LR) Type of fiber Graded-index
multimode 62.5/125 m or 50/125 m
Singlemode 9/125 m
Singlemode 9/125 m
Wave length 850 nm 1310 nm 1550 nm
Optical budget Graded-index multimode 62.5/125 mm, Graded-index multimode 50/125 mm
13 dB (typical distance about 2 mile *) 9 dB (typical distance about 1 mile *)
22 dB (typical distance 50 mile *)
26 dB (typical distance 68 mile *)
Optical connector Type ST Type FC/PC Type FC/PC
Protocol C37.94 C37.94 implementation **)
C37.94 implementation **)
Data transmission Synchronous Synchronous Synchronous
Transmission rate / Data rate
2 Mb/s / 64 kbit/s 2 Mb/s / 64 kbit/s 2 Mb/s / 64 kbit/s
Clock source Internal or derived from received signal
Internal or derived from received signal
Internal or derived from received signal
*) depending on optical budget calculation **) C37.94 originally defined just for multimode; using same header, configuration and data format as C37.94
19.2.18 Galvanic X.21 line data communication (X.21-LDCM)
19.2.18.1 Introduction
The galvanic X.21 line data communication module is used for connection to telecommunication equipment, for example leased telephone lines. The module supports 64 kbit/s data communication between IEDs.
Examples of applications:
Line differential protection Binary signal transfer
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 19 IED hardware
1125 Technical reference manual
19.2.18.2 Design
The galvanic X.21 line data communication module uses a ABB specific PC*MIP Type II format.
C
en07000196.vsd IEC07000196 V1 EN
Figure 538: Overview of the X.21 LDCM module
1
23
4
en07000239.wmf
1 8
9 15
IEC07000239 V1 EN
Figure 539: The X.21 LDCM module external connectors
Section 19 1MRK505222-UUS C IED hardware
1126 Technical reference manual
1. Ground selection connector for IO, screw terminals, 2-pole 2. Ground pin 3. Soft ground pin, see figure 540 4. X.21 Micro D-sub 15 pole male connector according to the V11 (X:27) balanced
version
I/O
100kW 100nF
Soft ground
en07000242.vsd IEC07000242 V1 EN
Figure 540: Schematic view of soft ground
Grounding
At special problems with ground loops, the soft ground connection for the IO-ground can be tested.
Three different kinds of grounding principles can be set (used for fault tracing):
1. Direct ground — The normal grounding is direct ground, connect terminal 2 direct to the chassi.
2. No ground — Leave the connector without any connection. 3. Soft ground — Connect soft ground pin (3), see figure 539
X.21 connector
Table 710: Pinout for the X.21 communication connector
Pin number Signal
1 Shield (ground)
2 TXD A
3 Control A
4 RXD A
6 Signal timing A
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 19 IED hardware
1127 Technical reference manual
8 Ground
9 TXD B
10 Control B
11 RXD B
13 Signal timing B
5,7,12,14,15 Not used
19.2.18.3 Functionality
The data format is HDLC. The speed for the transmission of the messages used is 64 kbit/ s.
A maximum of 100 meter of cable is allowed to ensure the quality of the data (deviation from X.21 standard cable length).
Synchronization
The X.21 LDCM works like a DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) and is normally expecting synchronization from the DCE (Data Circuit Equipment). The transmission is normally synchronized to the Signal Element Timing signal when a device is a DTE. When the signal is high it will read the data at the receiver and when the signal is low it will write data to the transmitter. This behaviour can be inverted in the control register.
Normally an external multiplexer is used and it should act like the master.
When two X.21 LDCM is directly communicating with each other one must be set as a master generating the synchronization for the other (the slave). The DTE Signal Element Timing is created from the internal 64 kHz clock.
The Byte Timing signal is not used in ABB devices.
19.2.18.4 Technical data
Table 711: Galvanic X.21 line data communication module (X.21-LDCM)
Quantity Range or value Connector, X.21 Micro D-sub, 15-pole male, 1.27 mm (0.050″) pitch
Connector, ground selection 2 pole screw terminal
Standard CCITT X21
Communication speed 64 kbit/s
Insulation 1 kV
Maximum cable length 100 m
Section 19 1MRK505222-UUS C IED hardware
1128 Technical reference manual
19.2.19 GPS time synchronization module (GTM)
19.2.19.1 Introduction
This module includes a GPS receiver used for time synchronization. The GPS has one SMA contact for connection to an antenna. It also includes an optical PPS ST- connector output.
19.2.19.2 Design
The GTM is a PCMIP-format card and is placed only on one of the ADM slots. The antenna input connector is shielded and directly attached to a grounded plate to eliminate the risk of electromagnetic interference.
All communication between the GCM and the NUM is via the PCI-bus. PPS time data is sent from the GCM to the rest of the time system to provide 1s accuracy at sampling level. An optical transmitter for PPS output is available for time synchronization of another relay with an optical PPS input. The PPS output connector is of ST-type for multimode fibre and could be used up to 1 km.
GPS- receiver
FPGA
PCI
PCI
IO
Antenna connector
Config- memory OSC ID-chip
Wishbone bus
Optical PPS
transmitter
Transmitter Driver
Registers
PCI-core
Receiver memory
Stripline ( 50 Ohms)
TSU
JTAG connector
UART— core
Controller
Se le
ct or
IEC09000980-1-en.vsd
IEC09000980 V1 EN
Figure 541: Block diagram of the GCM
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 19 IED hardware
1129 Technical reference manual
19.2.19.3 Technical data
Table 712: GPS time synchronization module (GTM)
Function Range or value Accuracy Receiver 1s relative UTC
Time to reliable time reference with antenna in new position or after power loss longer than 1 month
<30 minutes
Time to reliable time reference after a power loss longer than 48 hours
<15 minutes
Time to reliable time reference after a power loss shorter than 48 hours
<5 minutes
19.2.20 GPS antenna
19.2.20.1 Introduction
In order to receive GPS signals from the satellites orbiting the earth a GPS antenna with applicable cable must be used.
19.2.20.2 Design
The antenna with a console for mounting on a horizontal or vertical flat surface or on an antenna mast. See figure 542
Section 19 1MRK505222-UUS C IED hardware
1130 Technical reference manual
xx04000155.vsd
1
2
4
3
5
6
7
IEC04000155 V2 EN
Figure 542: Antenna with console
where:
1 GPS antenna
2 TNC connector
3 Console, (2’6.7″x4’11’)
4 Mounting holes about 1/5″
5 Tab for securing of antenna cable
6 Vertical mounting position
7 Horizontal mounting position
Antenna cable Use a 50 ohm coaxial cable with a male TNC connector in the antenna end and a male SMA connector in the receiver end to connect the antenna to GTM. Choose cable type and length so that the total attenuation is max. 26 dB at 1.6 GHz.
Make sure that the antenna cable is not charged when connected to the antenna or to the receiver. Short-circuit the end of the antenna cable with some metal device, when first connected to the antenna. When the
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 19 IED hardware
1131 Technical reference manual
antenna is connected to the cable, connect the cable to the receiver. REx670 must be switched off when the antenna cable is connected.
19.2.20.3 Technical data
Table 713: GPS Antenna and cable
Function Value Max antenna cable attenuation 26 db @ 1.6 GHz
Antenna cable impedance 50 ohm
Lightning protection Must be provided externally
Antenna cable connector SMA in receiver end TNC in antenna end
Accuracy +/-2s
19.2.21 IRIG-B time synchronization module IRIG-B
19.2.21.1 Introduction
The IRIG-B time synchronizing module is used for accurate time synchronizing of the IED from a station clock.
The Pulse Per Second (PPS) input shall be used for synchronizing when IEC 61850-9-2LE is used.
Electrical (BNC) and optical connection (ST) for 0XX and 12X IRIG-B support.
Optical connection (ST) for 1344 IRIG-B support.
19.2.21.2 Design
The IRIG-B module have two inputs. One input is for the IRIG-B that can handle both a pulse-width modulated signal (also called unmodulated) and an amplitude modulated signal (also called sine wave modulated). The other is an optical input type ST for PPS to synchronize the time between several protections.
Section 19 1MRK505222-UUS C IED hardware
1132 Technical reference manual
TSU
PCI-Controller
ID-chip
MPPS
PPS
FPGA
PCI-bus
PC I-c
on P
C I-c
on IO
-c on
32 MHz
Registers
IRIG- Decoder
Isolated DC/DC
5 to +- 12V
ST —
co nn
ec to
r
Isolated receiver
4 mm barrier
ZXING
IRIG_INPUT
OPTO_INPUT
Zero-cross detector
Amplitude modulator
B N
C —
co nn
ec to
r
CMPPS
Capture1
Capture2
en06000303.vsd
IEC06000303 V1 EN
Figure 543: IRIG-B block diagram
3 2
CST A1
Y2
D C
//D C
D C
//D C
O O
C
T
A1
C C
en06000304.vsd IEC06000304 V1 EN
Figure 544: IRIG-B PC-MIP board with top left ST connector for PPS 820 nm multimode fibre optic signal input and lower left BNC connector for IRIG- B signal input
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 19 IED hardware
1133 Technical reference manual
19.2.21.3 Technical data
Table 714: IRIG-B
Quantity Rated value Number of channels IRIG-B 1
Number of channels PPS 1
Electrical connector:
Electrical connector IRIG-B BNC
Pulse-width modulated 5 Vpp
Amplitude modulated low level high level
1-3 Vpp 3 x low level, max 9 Vpp
Supported formats IRIG-B 00x, IRIG-B 12x
Accuracy +/-10s for IRIG-B 00x and +/-100s for IRIG-B 12x
Input impedance 100 k ohm
Optical connector:
Optical connector PPS and IRIG-B Type ST
Type of fibre 62.5/125 m multimode fibre
Supported formats IRIG-B 00x, PPS
Accuracy +/- 2s
Section 19 1MRK505222-UUS C IED hardware
1134 Technical reference manual
19.3 Dimensions
19.3.1 Case without rear cover
xx08000164.vsd
CB
D
E
A
IEC08000164 V1 EN
Figure 545: Case without rear cover
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 19 IED hardware
1135 Technical reference manual
xx08000166.vsd
J G
F
K
H
IEC08000166 V1 EN
Figure 546: Case without rear cover with 19 rack mounting kit
Case size (inches)
A B C D E F G H J K
6U, 1/2 x 19 10.47 8.81 7.92 9.96 8.10 7.50 8.02 — 7.39 —
6U, 3/4 x 19 10.47 13.23 7.92 9.96 12.52 7.50 12.44 — 7.39 —
6U, 1/1 x 19 10.47 17.65 7.92 9.96 16.94 7.50 16.86 18.31 7.39 19.00
The H and K dimensions are defined by the 19 rack mounting kit
Section 19 1MRK505222-UUS C IED hardware
1136 Technical reference manual
19.3.2 Case with rear cover
xx08000163.vsd
C B
D
E
A
IEC08000163 V1 EN
Figure 547: Case with rear cover
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 19 IED hardware
1137 Technical reference manual
xx08000165.vsd
J G
F
K
H
IEC08000165 V1 EN
Figure 548: Case with rear cover and 19 rack mounting kit
xx05000503.vsd
IEC05000503 V1 EN
Figure 549: Rear cover case with details
Section 19 1MRK505222-UUS C IED hardware
1138 Technical reference manual
Case size (inches)
A B C D E F G H J K
6U, 1/2 x 19 10.47 8.81 9.53 10.07 8.10 7.50 8.02 — 9.00 —
6U, 3/4 x 19 10.47 13.23 9.53 10.07 12.52 7.50 12.4 — 9.00 —
6U, 1/1 x 19 10.47 17.65 9.53 10.07 16.86 7.50 16.86 18.31 9.00 19.00
The H and K dimensions are defined by the 19 rack mounting kit.
19.3.3 Flush mounting dimensions
CA B
E D
xx08000162.vsd IEC08000162 V1 EN
Figure 550: Flush mounting
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 19 IED hardware
1139 Technical reference manual
Case size Tolerance
Cut-out dimensions (inches)
A +/0.04
B +/0.04
C D
6U, 1/2 x 19 8.27 10.01 0.160.39 0.49
6U, 3/4 x 19 12.69 10.01 0.160.39 0.49
6U, 1/1 x 19 17.11 10.01 0.160.39 0.49
E = 188.6 mm without rear protection cover, 229.6 mm with rear protection cover
19.3.4 Side-by-side flush mounting dimensions
xx06000182.vsd
IEC06000182 V1 EN
Figure 551: A 1/2 x 19 size 670 series IED side-by-side with RHGS6.
Section 19 1MRK505222-UUS C IED hardware
1140 Technical reference manual
xx05000505.vsd
B
A
C
G
D
E
F
IEC05000505 V1 EN
Figure 552: Panel-cut out dimensions for side-by-side flush mounting
Case size (inches) Tolerance
A 0.04
B 0.04
C 0.04
D 0.04
E 0.04
F 0.04
G 0.04
6U, 1/2 x 19 8.42 10.21 9.46 7.50 1.35 0.52 0.25 diam
6U, 3/4 x 19 12.85 10.21 13.89 7.50 1.35 0.52 0.25 diam
6U, 1/1 x 19 17.27 10.21 18.31 7.50 1.35 0.52 0.25 diam
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 19 IED hardware
1141 Technical reference manual
19.3.5 Wall mounting dimensions
en04000471.vsd
E
A
B
C D
IEC04000471 V1 EN
Figure 553: Wall mounting
Case size (inches) A B C D E 6U, 1/2 x 19 10.50 10.52 10.74 15.36 9.57
6U, 3/4 x 19 15.92 14.94 10.74 15.36 9.57
6U, 1/1 x 19 20.31 19.33 10.74 15.36 9.57
19.3.6 External resistor unit for high impedance differential protection
WARNING! — USE EXTREME CAUTION!Dangerously high voltages might be present on this equipment, especially on the plate with resistors. Do any maintenance ONLY if the primary object protected with this equipment is de-energized. If required by national low/
Section 19 1MRK505222-UUS C IED hardware
1142 Technical reference manual
standard enclose the plate with resistors with a protective cover or in a separate box!
xx06000232.eps Dimension
mm [inches]
[18.98]
[18.31][0.33]
[6 .9
7 ]
[4 .0
2 ]
[1 .4
8 ]
[0.79] [7.68]
IEC06000232 V2 EN
Figure 554: Dimension drawing of a one phase impedance resistor unit
en06000234.eps [inches]
[18.98]
[18.31][0.33]
[7 .5
0 ]
[1 0 .4
7 ]
[7.68][0.79]
[1 .5
0 ]
IEC06000234 V2 EN
Figure 555: Dimension drawing of a three phase high impedance resistor unit
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 19 IED hardware
1143 Technical reference manual
19.4 Mounting alternatives
19.4.1 Flush mounting
19.4.1.1 Overview
The flush mounting kit are utilized for case sizes:
1/2 x 19 3/4 x 19 1/1 x 19 1/4 x 19 (RHGS6 6U)
Only a single case can be mounted in each cut-out on the cubicle panel, for class IP54 protection.
Flush mounting cannot be used for side-by-side mounted IEDs when IP54 class must be fulfilled. Only IP20 class can be obtained when mounting two cases side-by-side in one (1) cut-out.
To obtain IP54 class protection, an additional factory mounted sealing must be ordered when ordering the IED.
Section 19 1MRK505222-UUS C IED hardware
1144 Technical reference manual
19.4.1.2 Mounting procedure for flush mounting
1
3
5
xx08000161.vsd
4
2
6
IEC08000161 V1 EN
Figure 556: Flush mounting details.
PosNo Description Quantity Type
1 Sealing strip, used to obtain IP54 class. The sealing strip is factory mounted between the case and front plate.
— —
2 Fastener 4 —
3 Groove — —
4 Screw, self tapping 4 2.9×9.5 mm
5 Joining point of sealing strip — —
6 Panel — —
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 19 IED hardware
1145 Technical reference manual
19.4.2 19 panel rack mounting
19.4.2.1 Overview
All IED sizes can be mounted in a standard 19 cubicle rack by using the for each size suited mounting kit which consists of two mounting angles and fastening screws for the angles.
The mounting angles are reversible which enables mounting of IED size 1/2 x 19 or 3/4 x 19 either to the left or right side of the cubicle.
Please note that the separately ordered rack mounting kit for side-by- side mounted IEDs, or IEDs together with RHGS cases, is to be selected so that the total size equals 19.
When mounting the mounting angles, be sure to use screws that follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws with other dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs inside the IED.
Section 19 1MRK505222-UUS C IED hardware
1146 Technical reference manual
19.4.2.2 Mounting procedure for 19 panel rack mounting
xx08000160.vsd
1a
2
1b
IEC08000160 V1 EN
Figure 557: 19 panel rack mounting details
Pos Description Quantity Type 1a, 1b Mounting angels, which can be mounted, either to the
left or right side of the case. 2 —
2 Screw 8 M4x6
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 19 IED hardware
1147 Technical reference manual
19.4.3 Wall mounting
19.4.3.1 Overview
All case sizes, 1/2 x 19, 3/4 x 19,1/1 x 19, can be wall mounted. It is also possible to mount the IED on a panel or in a cubicle.
When mounting the side plates, be sure to use screws that follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws with other dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs inside the IED.
If fiber cables are bent too much, the signal can be weakened. Wall mounting is therefore not recommended for communication modules with fiber connection; Serial SPA/IEC 60870-5-103, DNP3 and LON communication module (SLM),Optical Ethernet module (OEM) and Line data communication module (LDCM).
19.4.3.2 Mounting procedure for wall mounting
xx04000453.vsd
1
2
3
4
5
6
DOCUMENT127716-IMG2265 V1 EN
Figure 558: Wall mounting details.
Section 19 1MRK505222-UUS C IED hardware
1148 Technical reference manual
PosNo Description Quantity Type
1 Bushing 4 —
2 Screw 8 M4x10
3 Screw 4 M6x12 or corresponding
4 Mounting bar 2 —
5 Screw 6 M5x8
6 Side plate 2 —
19.4.3.3 How to reach the rear side of the IED
The IED can be equipped with a rear protection cover, which is recommended to use with this type of mounting. See figure 559.
To reach the rear side of the IED, a free space of 3.2 inches is required on the unhinged side.
3.2″
View from above
1
ANSI_en06000135.vsd
3
2 (80 mm)
ANSI06000135 V1 EN
Figure 559: How to reach the connectors on the rear side of the IED.
PosNo Description Type
1 Screw M4x10
2 Screw M5x8
3 Rear protection cover —
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 19 IED hardware
1149 Technical reference manual
19.4.4 Side-by-side 19 rack mounting
19.4.4.1 Overview
IED case sizes, 1/2 x 19 or 3/4 x 19 and RHGS cases, can be mounted side-by-side up to a maximum size of 19. For side-by-side rack mounting, the side-by-side mounting kit together with the 19 rack panel mounting kit must be used. The mounting kit has to be ordered separately.
When mounting the plates and the angles on the IED, be sure to use screws that follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws with other dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs inside the IED.
19.4.4.2 Mounting procedure for side-by-side rack mounting
xx04000456.vsd
3
4
1
2
IEC04000456 V1 EN
Figure 560: Side-by-side rack mounting details.
PosNo Description Quantity Type
1 Mounting plate 2 —
2, 3 Screw 16 M4x6
4 Mounting angle 2 —
Section 19 1MRK505222-UUS C IED hardware
1150 Technical reference manual
19.4.4.3 IED in the 670 series mounted with a RHGS6 case
An 1/2 x 19 or 3/4 x 19 size IED can be mounted with a RHGS (6 or 12 depending on IED size) case. The RHGS case can be used for mounting a test switch of type RTXP 24. It also has enough space for a terminal base of RX 2 type for mounting of, for example, a DC-switch or two trip IEDs.
xx06000180.vsd
8 88
7
5
6
3
4
2
7
5
6
7
5
6
3
4
2
3
4
2
1
1
1
2
1 1
1
8
7
5
6
3
4
2
2
2
1
IEC06000180 V1 EN
Figure 561: IED in the 670 series (1/2 x 19) mounted with a RHGS6 case containing a test switch module equipped with only a test switch and a RX2 terminal base
19.4.5 Side-by-side flush mounting
19.4.5.1 Overview
It is not recommended to flush mount side by side mounted cases if IP54 is required. If your application demands side-by-side flush mounting, the side-by-side mounting details kit and the 19 panel rack mounting kit must be used. The mounting kit has to be ordered separately. The maximum size of the panel cut out is 19.
With side-by-side flush mounting installation, only IP class 20 is obtained. To reach IP class 54, it is recommended to mount the IEDs separately. For cut out dimensions of separately mounted IEDs, see section «Flush mounting».
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 19 IED hardware
1151 Technical reference manual
When mounting the plates and the angles on the IED, be sure to use screws that follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws with other dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs inside the IED.
Please contact factory for special add on plates for mounting FT switches on the side (for 1/2 19″ case) or bottom of the relay.
19.4.5.2 Mounting procedure for side-by-side flush mounting
xx06000181.vsd
1 2
3
4
IEC06000181 V1 EN
Figure 562: Side-by-side flush mounting details (RHGS6 side-by-side with 1/2 x 19 IED).
PosNo Description Quantity Type
1 Mounting plate 2 —
2, 3 Screw 16 M4x6
4 Mounting angle 2 —
Section 19 1MRK505222-UUS C IED hardware
1152 Technical reference manual
19.5 Technical data
19.5.1 Enclosure Table 715: Case
Material Steel sheet Front plate Steel sheet profile with cut-out for HMI
Surface treatment Aluzink preplated steel
Finish Light grey (RAL 7035)
Table 716: Water and dust protection level according to IEC 60529
Front IP40 (IP54 with sealing strip)
Sides, top and bottom IP20
Rear side IP20 with screw compression type IP10 with ring lug terminals
Table 717: Weight
Case size Weight 6U, 1/2 x 19 22 lb
6U, 3/4 x 19 33 lb
6U, 1/1 x 19 40 lb
19.5.2 Connection system Table 718: CT and VT circuit connectors
Connector type Rated voltage and current Maximum conductor area Screw compression type 250 V AC, 20 A 4 mm2 (AWG12)
2 x 2.5 mm2 (2 x AWG14)
Terminal blocks suitable for ring lug terminals
250 V AC, 20 A 4 mm2 (AWG12)
Table 719: Binary I/O connection system
Connector type Rated voltage Maximum conductor area Screw compression type 250 V AC 2.5 mm2 (AWG14)
2 1 mm2 (2 x AWG18)
Terminal blocks suitable for ring lug terminals
300 V AC 3 mm2 (AWG14)
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 19 IED hardware
1153 Technical reference manual
Because of limitations of space, when ring lug terminal is ordered for Binary I/O connections, one blank slot is necessary between two adjacent IO cards. Please refer to the ordering particulars for details.
19.5.3 Influencing factors Table 720: Temperature and humidity influence
Parameter Reference value Nominal range Influence Ambient temperature, operate value
+20 C -10 C to +55 C 0.02% /C
Relative humidity Operative range
10%-90% 0%-95%
10%-90% —
Storage temperature -40 C to +70 C — —
Table 721: Auxiliary DC supply voltage influence on functionality during operation
Dependence on Reference value Within nominal range Influence Ripple, in DC auxiliary voltage Operative range
max. 2% Full wave rectified
15% of EL 0.01% /%
Auxiliary voltage dependence, operate value
20% of EL 0.01% /%
Interrupted auxiliary DC voltage
24-60 V DC 20% 90-250 V DC 20%
Interruption interval 050 ms
No restart
0 s Correct behaviour at power down
Restart time <300 s
Section 19 1MRK505222-UUS C IED hardware
1154 Technical reference manual
Table 722: Frequency influence (reference standard: IEC 602551)
Dependence on Within nominal range Influence Frequency dependence, operate value
fn 2.5 Hz for 50 Hz fn 3.0 Hz for 60 Hz
1.0% / Hz
Frequency dependence for distance protection operate value
fn 2.5 Hz for 50 Hz fn 3.0 Hz for 60 Hz
2.0% / Hz
Harmonic frequency dependence (20% content)
2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fn 1.0%
Harmonic frequency dependence for distance protection (10% content)
2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fn 6.0%
Harmonic frequency dependence for high impedance differential protection (10% content)
2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fn 5.0%
19.5.4 Type tests according to standard Table 723: Electromagnetic compatibility
Test Type test values Reference standards 1 MHz Oscillatory burst disturbance
2.5 kV IEC 60255-22-1
100 kHz slow damped oscillatory wave immunity test
2.5 kV IEC 61000-4-18, Class III
Ring wave immunity test, 100 kHz 2-4 kV IEC 61000-4-12, Class IV
Surge withstand capability test 2.5 kV, oscillatory 4.0 kV, fast transient
IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1
Electrostatic discharge Direct application Indirect application
15 kV air discharge 8 kV contact discharge 8 kV contact discharge
IEC 60255-22-2, Class IV IEC 61000-4-2, Class IV
Electrostatic discharge Direct application Indirect application
15 kV air discharge 8 kV contact discharge 8 kV contact discharge
IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1
Fast transient disturbance 4 kV IEC 60255-22-4, Class A
Surge immunity test 1-2 kV, 1.2/50 ms high energy
IEC 60255-22-5
Power frequency immunity test 150-300 V IEC 60255-22-7, Class A
Conducted common mode immunity test
15 Hz-150 kHz IEC 61000-4-16, Class IV
Power frequency magnetic field test
1000 A/m, 3 s 100 A/m, cont.
IEC 61000-4-8, Class V
Damped oscillatory magnetic field test
100 A/m IEC 61000-4-10, Class V
Table continues on next page
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 19 IED hardware
1155 Technical reference manual
Test Type test values Reference standards Radiated electromagnetic field disturbance
20 V/m, 80-1000 MHz 1.4-2.7 GHz
IEC 60255-22-3
Radiated electromagnetic field disturbance
35 V/m 26-1000 MHz
IEEE/ANSI C37.90.2
Conducted electromagnetic field disturbance
10 V, 0.15-80 MHz IEC 60255-22-6
Radiated emission 30-1000 MHz IEC 60255-25
Conducted emission 0.15-30 MHz IEC 60255-25
Table 724: Insulation
Test Type test values Reference standard Dielectric test 2.0 kV AC, 1 min. ANSI C37.90
Impulse voltage test 5 kV, 1.2/50 ms, 0.5 J
Insulation resistance >100 MW at 500 VDC
Table 725: Environmental tests
Test Type test value Reference standard Cold test Test Ad for 16 h at -25C IEC 60068-2-1
Storage test Test Ad for 16 h at -40C IEC 60068-2-1
Dry heat test Test Bd for 16 h at +70C IEC 60068-2-2
Damp heat test, steady state Test Ca for 4 days at +40 C and humidity 93%
IEC 60068-2-78
Damp heat test, cyclic Test Db for 6 cycles at +25 to +55 C and humidity 93 to 95% (1 cycle = 24 hours)
IEC 60068-2-30
Table 726: CE compliance
Test According to Immunity EN 50263
Emissivity EN 50263
Low voltage directive EN 50178
Section 19 1MRK505222-UUS C IED hardware
1156 Technical reference manual
Table 727: Mechanical tests
Test Type test values Reference standards Vibration response test Class II IEC 60255-21-1
Vibration endurance test Class I IEC 60255-21-1
Shock response test Class II IEC 60255-21-2
Shock withstand test Class I IEC 60255-21-2
Bump test Class I IEC 60255-21-2
Seismic test Class II IEC 60255-21-3
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 19 IED hardware
1157 Technical reference manual
Section 20 Labels
About this chapter This chapter includes descriptions of the different labels and where to find them.
20.1 Labels on IED
Front view of IED
1
2
3
4
5
6
56
7 xx06000574.ep
IEC06000574 V1 EN
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 20 Labels
1159 Technical reference manual
IEC06000577-CUSTOMER-SPECIFIC V1 EN
1
Product type, description and serial number
2 Order number, dc supply voltage and rated frequency
3 Optional, customer specific information
4 Manufacturer
5 Transformer input module, rated currents and voltages
6 Transformer designations
IEC06000576-POS-NO V1 EN
7
Ordering and serial number
Section 20 1MRK505222-UUS C Labels
1160 Technical reference manual
Rear view of IED
1
2
3
4
en06000573.ep
IEC06000573 V1 EN
1 Warning label
2 Caution label
3 Class 1 laser product label
IEC06000575 V1 EN
4 Warning label
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 20 Labels
1161 Technical reference manual
Section 21 Connection diagrams
This chapter includes diagrams of the IED with all slot, terminal block and optical connector designations. It is a necessary guide when making electrical and optical connections to the IED.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 21 Connection diagrams
1163 Technical reference manual
1MRK002802-AB-1-670-1.2-PG-ANSI V1 EN
Section 21 1MRK505222-UUS C Connection diagrams
1164 Technical reference manual
1MRK002802-AB-2-670-1.2-PG-ANSI V1 EN
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 21 Connection diagrams
1165 Technical reference manual
1MRK002802-AB-3-670-1.2-PG-ANSI V1 EN
Section 21 1MRK505222-UUS C Connection diagrams
1166 Technical reference manual
1MRK002802-AB-4-670-1.2-PG-ANSI V1 EN
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 21 Connection diagrams
1167 Technical reference manual
1MRK002802-AB-5-670-1.2-ANSI V1 EN
Section 21 1MRK505222-UUS C Connection diagrams
1168 Technical reference manual
1MRK002802-AB-6-670-1.2-ANSI V1 EN
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 21 Connection diagrams
1169 Technical reference manual
1MRK002802-AB-7-670-1.2-ANSI V1 EN
Section 21 1MRK505222-UUS C Connection diagrams
1170 Technical reference manual
1MRK002802-AB-8-670-1.2-ANSI V1 EN
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 21 Connection diagrams
1171 Technical reference manual
1MRK002802-AB-9-670-1.2-ANSI V1 EN
Section 21 1MRK505222-UUS C Connection diagrams
1172 Technical reference manual
1MRK002802-AB-10-670-1.2-ANSI V1 EN
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 21 Connection diagrams
1173 Technical reference manual
1MRK002802-AB-11-670-1.2-ANSI V1 EN
Section 21 1MRK505222-UUS C Connection diagrams
1174 Technical reference manual
1MRK002802-AB-12-670-1.2-ANSI V1 EN
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 21 Connection diagrams
1175 Technical reference manual
1MRK002802-AB-13-670-1.2-ANSI V1 EN
Section 21 1MRK505222-UUS C Connection diagrams
1176 Technical reference manual
1MRK002802-AB-14-670-1.2-ANSI V1 EN
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 21 Connection diagrams
1177 Technical reference manual
1MRK002802-AB-15-670-1.2-ANSI V1 EN
Section 21 1MRK505222-UUS C Connection diagrams
1178 Technical reference manual
Section 22 Inverse time characteristics
About this chapter This chapter describes current and voltage dependant time functionality. Both ANSI and IEC Inverse time curves and tables are included.
22.1 Application
In order to assure time selectivity between different overcurrent protections at different points in the network different time delays for the different protections are normally used. The simplest way to do this is to use definite time-lag. In more sophisticated applications current dependent time characteristics are used. Both alternatives are shown in a simple application with three overcurrent protections operating in series.
xx05000129_ansi.vsd
IPickup IPickup IPickup
ANSI05000129 V1 EN
Figure 563: Three overcurrent protections operating in series
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 22 Inverse time characteristics
1179 Technical reference manual
en05000130.vsd
Time
Fault point position
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 1
IEC05000130 V1 EN
Figure 564: Definite time overcurrent characteristics
en05000131.vsd
Time
Fault point position
IEC05000131 V1 EN
Figure 565: Inverse time overcurrent characteristics with inst. function
The inverse time characteristic makes it possible to minimize the fault clearance time and still assure the selectivity between protections.
To assure selectivity between protections there must be a time margin between the operation time of the protections. This required time margin is dependent of following factors, in a simple case with two protections in series:
Difference between pickup time of the protections to be co-ordinated Opening time of the breaker closest to the studied fault Reset times of the protections Margin dependent of the time delay inaccuracy of the protections
Assume we have the following network case.
Section 22 1MRK505222-UUS C Inverse time characteristics
1180 Technical reference manual
en05000132_ansi.vsd
51 51
A1 B1 Feeder
Time axis
t=0 t=t1 t=t2 t=t3
ANSI05000132 V1 EN
Figure 566: Selectivity steps for a fault on feeder B1
where:
t=0 is The fault occurs
t=t1 is Protection B1 trips
t=t2 is Breaker at B1 opens
t=t3 is Protection A1 resets
In the case protection B1 shall operate without any intentional delay (instantaneous). When the fault occurs the protections pickup to detect the fault current. After the time t1 the protection B1 send a trip signal to the circuit breaker. The protection A1 starts its delay timer at the same time, with some deviation in time due to differences between the two protections. There is a possibility that A1 will start before the trip is sent to the B1 circuit breaker. At the time t2 the circuit breaker B1 has opened its primary contacts and thus the fault current is interrupted. The breaker time (t2 — t1) can differ between different faults. The maximum opening time can be given from manuals and test protocols. Still at t2 the timer of protection A1 is active. At time t3 the protection A1 is reset, that is the timer is stopped.
In most applications it is required that the times shall reset as fast as possible when the current fed to the protection drops below the set current level, the reset time shall be minimized. In some applications it is however beneficial to have some type of delayed reset time of the overcurrent function. This can be the case in the following applications:
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 22 Inverse time characteristics
1181 Technical reference manual
If there is a risk of intermittent faults. If the current IED, close to the faults, picks up and resets there is a risk of unselective trip from other protections in the system.
Delayed resetting could give accelerated fault clearance in case of automatic reclosing to a permanent fault.
Overcurrent protection functions are sometimes used as release criterion for other protection functions. It can often be valuable to have a reset delay to assure the release function.
22.2 Principle of operation
22.2.1 Mode of operation The function can operate in a definite time-lag mode or in a current definite inverse time mode. For the inverse time characteristic both ANSI and IEC based standard curves are available. Also programmable curve types are supported via the component inputs: p, A, B, C pr, tr, and cr.
Different characteristics for reset delay can also be chosen.
If current in any phase exceeds the set pickup current value (here internal signal pickupValue), a timer, according to the selected operating mode, is started. The component always uses the maximum of the three phase current values as the current level used in timing calculations.
In case of definite time-lag mode the timer will run constantly until the time is reached or until the current drops below the reset value (pickup value minus the hysteresis) and the reset time has elapsed.
For definite time delay curve ANSI/IEEE Definite time or IEC Definite time are chosen.
The general expression for inverse time curves is according to equation 195.
Section 22 1MRK505222-UUS C Inverse time characteristics
1182 Technical reference manual
[ ] =
—
+
P
A t td
i C
Pickupn
s B
EQUATION1640 V1 EN (Equation 195)
where:
p, A, B, C are constants defined for each curve type,
Pickupn is the set pickup current for step n,
td is set time multiplier for step n and
i is the measured current.
For inverse time characteristics a time will be initiated when the current reaches the set pickup level. From the general expression of the characteristic the following can be seen:
( )- — =
P
op i
t B td C A td Pickupn
EQUATION1642 V1 EN (Equation 196)
where:
top is the operating time of the protection
The time elapsed to the moment of trip is reached when the integral fulfils according to equation 197, in addition to the constant time delay:
—
0
Pt i
C dt A td Pickupn
EQUATION1643 V1 EN (Equation 197)
For the numerical protection the sum below must fulfil the equation for trip.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 22 Inverse time characteristics
1183 Technical reference manual
( )
=
D —
1
Pn
j
i j t C A td
Pickupn
EQUATION1644 V1 EN (Equation 198)
where:
j = 1 is the first protection execution cycle when a fault has been detected, that is, when
> 1 i
Pickupn EQUATION1646 V1 EN
Dt is the time interval between two consecutive executions of the protection algorithm,
n is the number of the execution of the algorithm when the trip time equation is fulfilled, that is, when a trip is given and
i (j) is the fault current at time j
For inverse time operation, the inverse time characteristic is selectable. Both the IEC and ANSI/IEEE standardized inverse time characteristics are supported.
For the IEC curves there is also a setting of the minimum time-lag of operation, see figure 567.
Section 22 1MRK505222-UUS C Inverse time characteristics
1184 Technical reference manual
IEC05000133-3-en.vsd
tMin
Current
Operate time
IMin
IEC05000133 V2 EN
Figure 567: Minimum time-lag operation for the IEC curves
In order to fully comply with IEC curves definition setting parameter tMin shall be set to the value which is equal to the operating time of the selected IEC inverse time curve for measured current of twenty times the set current pickup value. Note that the operating time value is dependent on the selected setting value for time multiplier k.
In addition to the ANSI and IEC standardized characteristics, there are also two additional inverse curves available; the RI curve and the RD curve.
The RI inverse time curve emulates the characteristic of the electromechanical ASEA relay RI. The curve is described by equation 200:
[ ] =
—
0.339 0.235
td t s
Pickupn i
EQUATION1647 V1 EN (Equation 200)
where:
Pickupn is the set pickup current for step n
td is set time multiplier for step n
i is the measured current
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 22 Inverse time characteristics
1185 Technical reference manual
The RD inverse curve gives a logarithmic delay, as used in the Combiflex protection RXIDG. The curve enables a high degree of selectivity required for sensitive residual ground-fault current protection, with ability to detect high-resistive ground faults. The curve is described by equation 201:
[ ] = —
5.8 1.35 ln i
t td Pickupn
s
EQUATION1648 V1 EN (Equation 201)
where:
Pickupn is the set pickup current for step n,
td is set time multiplier for step n and
i is the measured current
If the curve type programmable is chosen, the user can make a tailor made inverse time curve according to the general equation 202.
[ ] =
—
+
P
A t td
i C
Pickupn
s B
EQUATION1640 V1 EN (Equation 202)
Also the reset time of the delayed function can be controlled. There is the possibility to choose between three different reset time-lags.
Instantaneous Reset IEC Reset ANSI Reset.
If instantaneous reset is chosen the timer will be reset directly when the current drops below the set pickup current level minus the hysteresis.
If IEC reset is chosen the timer will be reset after a set constant time when the current drops below the set pickup current level minus the hysteresis.
If ANSI reset time is chosen the reset time will be dependent of the current after fault clearance (when the current drops below the pickup current level minus the hysteresis). The timer will reset according to equation 203.
Section 22 1MRK505222-UUS C Inverse time characteristics
1186 Technical reference manual
[ ] 2
1
rtt s td i
pickupn
=
—
ANSIEQUATION1197 V1 EN (Equation 203)
where:
The set value tr is the reset time in case of zero current after fault clearance.
The possibility of choice of reset characteristics is to some extent dependent of the choice of time delay characteristic.
For the definite time delay characteristics the possible reset time settings are instantaneous and IEC constant time reset.
For ANSI inverse time delay characteristics all three types of reset time characteristics are available; instantaneous, IEC constant time reset and ANSI current dependent reset time.
For IEC inverse time delay characteristics the possible delay time settings are instantaneous and IEC set constant time reset).
For the programmable inverse time delay characteristics all three types of reset time characteristics are available; instantaneous, IEC constant time reset and ANSI current dependent reset time. If the current dependent type is used settings pr, tr and cr must be given, see equation 204:
[ ] r
pr
t t s td
i cr
pickupn
=
—
ANSIEQUATION1198 V1 EN (Equation 204)
For RI and RD inverse time delay characteristics the possible delay time settings are instantaneous and IEC constant time reset.
When inverse time overcurrent characteristic is selected, the operate time of the stage will be the sum of the inverse time delay and the set
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 22 Inverse time characteristics
1187 Technical reference manual
definite time delay. Thus, if only the inverse time delay is required, it is of utmost importance to set the definite time delay for that stage to zero.
22.3 Inverse characteristics
Table 728: ANSI Inverse time characteristics
Function Range or value Accuracy Operating characteristic:
( ) = +
—
1P
A t B td
I
EQUATION1651 V1 EN
Reset characteristic:
( ) =
— 2 1
trt td I
EQUATION1652 V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
td = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01 —
ANSI Extremely Inverse A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0 , tr=29.1 ANSI/IEEE C37.112, 5% + 40 ms
ANSI Very inverse A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0 , tr=21.6
ANSI Normal Inverse A=0.0086, B=0.0185, P=0.02, tr=0.46
ANSI Moderately Inverse A=0.0515, B=0.1140, P=0.02, tr=4.85
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0, tr=30
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0, tr=13.46
ANSI Long Time Inverse A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02, tr=4.6
Section 22 1MRK505222-UUS C Inverse time characteristics
1188 Technical reference manual
Table 729: IEC Inverse time characteristics
Function Range or value Accuracy Operating characteristic:
( ) =
—
1P
A t td
I
EQUATION1653 V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
td = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01 —
Time delay to reset, IEC inverse time (0.000-60.000) s 0.5% of set time 10 ms
IEC Normal Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02 IEC 60255-151, 5% + 40 ms
IEC Very inverse A=13.5, P=1.0
IEC Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02
IEC Extremely inverse A=80.0, P=2.0
IEC Short time inverse A=0.05, P=0.04
IEC Long time inverse A=120, P=1.0
Programmable characteristic Operate characteristic:
( ) = +
—
P
A t B td
I C
EQUATION1654 V1 EN
Reset characteristic:
( ) =
— PR
TR t td
I CR
EQUATION1655 V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
td = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01 A=(0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001 B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of 0.01 C=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1 P=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001 TR=(0.005-100.000) in steps of 0.001 CR=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1 PR=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 22 Inverse time characteristics
1189 Technical reference manual
Table 730: RI and RD type inverse time characteristics
Function Range or value Accuracy RI type inverse characteristic
=
—
1
0.236 0.339
t td
I EQUATION1656 V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
td = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01 IEC 60255-151, 5% + 40 ms
RD type logarithmic inverse characteristic
= —
5.8 1.35t I
In td
EQUATION1657 V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
td = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01
Section 22 1MRK505222-UUS C Inverse time characteristics
1190 Technical reference manual
Table 731: Inverse time characteristics for overvoltage protection
Function Range or value Accuracy Type A curve:
= —
t td
V VPickup
VPickup EQUATION1661 V1 EN
V = Vmeasured
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01
5% +40 ms
Type B curve:
=
— — —
2.0
480
32 0.5 0.035
t td
V VPickup
VPickup EQUATION1662 V1 EN
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01
Type C curve:
=
— — —
3.0
480
32 0.5 0.035
t td
V VPickup
VPickup EQUATION1663 V1 EN
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01
Programmable curve:
= +
— —
P
td A t D
V VPickup B C
VPickup EQUATION1664 V1 EN
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01 A = (0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001 B = (0.50-100.00) in steps of 0.01 C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of 0.1 D = (0.000-60.000) in steps of 0.001 P = (0.000-3.000) in steps of 0.001
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 22 Inverse time characteristics
1191 Technical reference manual
Table 732: Inverse time characteristics for undervoltage protection
Function Range or value Accuracy Type A curve:
= —
td t
VPickup V
VPickup EQUATION1658 V1 EN
V = Vmeasured
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01
5% +40 ms
Type B curve:
= +
— —
2.0
480 0.055
32 0.5
td t
VPickup V
VPickup EQUATION1659 V1 EN
V = Vmeasured
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01
Programmable curve:
= +
— —
P
td A t D
VPickup V B C
VPickup EQUATION1660 V1 EN
V = Vmeasured
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01 A = (0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001 B = (0.50-100.00) in steps of 0.01 C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of 0.1 D = (0.000-60.000) in steps of 0.001 P = (0.000-3.000) in steps of 0.001
Section 22 1MRK505222-UUS C Inverse time characteristics
1192 Technical reference manual
Table 733: Inverse time characteristics for residual overvoltage protection
Function Range or value Accuracy Type A curve:
= —
t td
V VPickup
VPickup EQUATION1661 V1 EN
V = Vmeasured
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01
5% +40 ms
Type B curve:
=
— — —
2.0
480
32 0.5 0.035
t td
V VPickup
VPickup EQUATION1662 V1 EN
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01
Type C curve:
=
— — —
3.0
480
32 0.5 0.035
t td
V VPickup
VPickup EQUATION1663 V1 EN
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01
Programmable curve:
= +
— —
P
td A t D
V VPickup B C
VPickup EQUATION1664 V1 EN
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01 A = (0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001 B = (0.50-100.00) in steps of 0.01 C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of 0.1 D = (0.000-60.000) in steps of 0.001 P = (0.000-3.000) in steps of 0.001
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 22 Inverse time characteristics
1193 Technical reference manual
A070750 V2 EN
Figure 568: ANSI Extremely inverse time characteristics
Section 22 1MRK505222-UUS C Inverse time characteristics
1194 Technical reference manual
A070751 V2 EN
Figure 569: ANSI Very inverse time characteristics
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 22 Inverse time characteristics
1195 Technical reference manual
A070752 V2 EN
Figure 570: ANSI Normal inverse time characteristics
Section 22 1MRK505222-UUS C Inverse time characteristics
1196 Technical reference manual
A070753 V2 EN
Figure 571: ANSI Moderately inverse time characteristics
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 22 Inverse time characteristics
1197 Technical reference manual
A070817 V2 EN
Figure 572: ANSI Long time extremely inverse time characteristics
Section 22 1MRK505222-UUS C Inverse time characteristics
1198 Technical reference manual
A070818 V2 EN
Figure 573: ANSI Long time very inverse time characteristics
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 22 Inverse time characteristics
1199 Technical reference manual
A070819 V2 EN
Figure 574: ANSI Long time inverse time characteristics
Section 22 1MRK505222-UUS C Inverse time characteristics
1200 Technical reference manual
A070820 V2 EN
Figure 575: IEC Normal inverse time characteristics
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 22 Inverse time characteristics
1201 Technical reference manual
A070821 V2 EN
Figure 576: IEC Very inverse time characteristics
Section 22 1MRK505222-UUS C Inverse time characteristics
1202 Technical reference manual
A070822 V2 EN
Figure 577: IEC Inverse time characteristics
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 22 Inverse time characteristics
1203 Technical reference manual
A070823 V2 EN
Figure 578: IEC Extremely inverse time characteristics
Section 22 1MRK505222-UUS C Inverse time characteristics
1204 Technical reference manual
A070824 V2 EN
Figure 579: IEC Short time inverse time characteristics
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 22 Inverse time characteristics
1205 Technical reference manual
A070825 V2 EN
Figure 580: IEC Long time inverse time characteristics
Section 22 1MRK505222-UUS C Inverse time characteristics
1206 Technical reference manual
A070826 V2 EN
Figure 581: RI-type inverse time characteristics
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 22 Inverse time characteristics
1207 Technical reference manual
A070827 V2 EN
Figure 582: RD-type inverse time characteristics
Section 22 1MRK505222-UUS C Inverse time characteristics
1208 Technical reference manual
GUID-ACF4044C-052E-4CBD-8247-C6ABE3796FA6 V1 EN
Figure 583: Inverse curve A characteristic of overvoltage protection
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 22 Inverse time characteristics
1209 Technical reference manual
GUID-F5E0E1C2-48C8-4DC7-A84B-174544C09142 V1 EN
Figure 584: Inverse curve B characteristic of overvoltage protection
Section 22 1MRK505222-UUS C Inverse time characteristics
1210 Technical reference manual
GUID-A9898DB7-90A3-47F2-AEF9-45FF148CB679 V1 EN
Figure 585: Inverse curve C characteristic of overvoltage protection
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 22 Inverse time characteristics
1211 Technical reference manual
GUID-35F40C3B-B483-40E6-9767-69C1536E3CBC V1 EN
Figure 586: Inverse curve A characteristic of undervoltage protection
Section 22 1MRK505222-UUS C Inverse time characteristics
1212 Technical reference manual
GUID-B55D0F5F-9265-4D9A-A7C0-E274AA3A6BB1 V1 EN
Figure 587: Inverse curve B characteristic of undervoltage protection
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 22 Inverse time characteristics
1213 Technical reference manual
Section 23 Glossary
About this chapter This chapter contains a glossary with terms, acronyms and abbreviations used in ABB technical documentation.
AC Alternating current
ACT Application configuration tool within PCM600
A/D converter Analog-to-digital converter
ADBS Amplitude deadband supervision
ADM Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization
AI Analog input
ANSI American National Standards Institute
AR Autoreclosing
AngNegRes Setting parameter/ZD/
ArgDirAngDir Setting parameter/ZD/
ASCT Auxiliary summation current transformer
ASD Adaptive signal detection
AWG American Wire Gauge standard
BBP Busbar protection
BFP Breaker failure protection
BI Binary input
BIM Binary input module
BOM Binary output module
BOS Binary outputs status
BR External bistable relay
BS British Standards
BSR Binary signal transfer function, receiver blocks
BST Binary signal transfer function, transmit blocks
C37.94 IEEE/ANSI protocol used when sending binary signals between IEDs
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 23 Glossary
1215 Technical reference manual
CAN Controller Area Network. ISO standard (ISO 11898) for serial communication
CB Circuit breaker
CBM Combined backplane module
CCITT Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and Telephony. A United Nations-sponsored standards body within the International Telecommunications Union.
CCM CAN carrier module
CCVT Capacitive Coupled Voltage Transformer
Class C Protection Current Transformer class as per IEEE/ ANSI
CMPPS Combined megapulses per second
CMT Communication Management tool in PCM600
CO cycle Close-open cycle
Codirectional Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves two twisted pairs making it possible to transmit information in both directions
COMTRADE Standard Common Format for Transient Data Exchange format for Disturbance recorder according to IEEE/ANSI C37.111, 1999 / IEC60255-24
Contra-directional Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves four twisted pairs, two of which are used for transmitting data in both directions and two for transmitting clock signals
CPU Central processor unit
CR Carrier receive
CRC Cyclic redundancy check
CROB Control relay output block
CS Carrier send
CT Current transformer
CVT or CCVT Capacitive voltage transformer
DAR Delayed autoreclosing
DARPA Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (The US developer of the TCP/IP protocol etc.)
DBDL Dead bus dead line
DBLL Dead bus live line
DC Direct current
Section 23 1MRK505222-UUS C Glossary
1216 Technical reference manual
DFC Data flow control
DFT Discrete Fourier transform
DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DIP-switch Small switch mounted on a printed circuit board
DI Digital input
DLLB Dead line live bus
DNP Distributed Network Protocol as per IEEE Std 1815-2012
DR Disturbance recorder
DRAM Dynamic random access memory
DRH Disturbance report handler
DSP Digital signal processor
DTT Direct transfer trip scheme
EHV network Extra high voltage network
EIA Electronic Industries Association
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
EMF (Electromotive force)
EMI Electromagnetic interference
EnFP End fault protection
EPA Enhanced performance architecture
ESD Electrostatic discharge
FCB Flow control bit; Frame count bit
FOX 20 Modular 20 channel telecommunication system for speech, data and protection signals
FOX 512/515 Access multiplexer
FOX 6Plus Compact time-division multiplexer for the transmission of up to seven duplex channels of digital data over optical fibers
G.703 Electrical and functional description for digital lines used by local telephone companies. Can be transported over balanced and unbalanced lines
GCM Communication interface module with carrier of GPS receiver module
GDE Graphical display editor within PCM600
GI General interrogation command
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 23 Glossary
1217 Technical reference manual
GIS Gas-insulated switchgear
GOOSE Generic object-oriented substation event
GPS Global positioning system
GSAL Generic security application
GTM GPS Time Module
HDLC protocol High-level data link control, protocol based on the HDLC standard
HFBR connector type Plastic fiber connector
HMI Human-machine interface
HSAR High speed autoreclosing
HV High-voltage
HVDC High-voltage direct current
IDBS Integrating deadband supervision
IEC International Electrical Committee
IEC 60044-6 IEC Standard, Instrument transformers Part 6: Requirements for protective current transformers for transient performance
IEC 60870-5-103 Communication standard for protective equipment. A serial master/slave protocol for point-to-point communication
IEC 61850 Substation automation communication standard
IEC 6185081 Communication protocol standard
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IEEE 802.12 A network technology standard that provides 100 Mbits/s on twisted-pair or optical fiber cable
IEEE P1386.1 PCI Mezzanine Card (PMC) standard for local bus modules. References the CMC (IEEE P1386, also known as Common Mezzanine Card) standard for the mechanics and the PCI specifications from the PCI SIG (Special Interest Group) for the electrical EMF (Electromotive force).
IEEE 1686 Standard for Substation Intelligent Electronic Devices (IEDs) Cyber Security Capabilities
IED Intelligent electronic device
I-GIS Intelligent gas-insulated switchgear
IOM Binary input/output module
Instance When several occurrences of the same function are available in the IED, they are referred to as instances of that function.
Section 23 1MRK505222-UUS C Glossary
1218 Technical reference manual
One instance of a function is identical to another of the same kind but has a different number in the IED user interfaces. The word «instance» is sometimes defined as an item of information that is representative of a type. In the same way an instance of a function in the IED is representative of a type of function.
IP 1. Internet protocol. The network layer for the TCP/IP protocol suite widely used on Ethernet networks. IP is a connectionless, best-effort packet-switching protocol. It provides packet routing, fragmentation and reassembly through the data link layer. 2. Ingression protection, according to IEC standard
IP 20 Ingression protection, according to IEC standard, level IP20- Protected against solidforeign objects of12.5mm diameter andgreater.
IP 40 Ingression protection, according to IEC standard, level IP40- Protected against solid foreign objects of 1mm diameter and greater.
IP 54 Ingression protection, according to IEC standard, level IP54-Dust-protected,protected againstsplashing water.
IRF Internal failure signal
IRIG-B: InterRange Instrumentation Group Time code format B, standard 200
ITU International Telecommunications Union
LAN Local area network
LIB 520 High-voltage software module
LCD Liquid crystal display
LDCM Line differential communication module
LDD Local detection device
LED Light-emitting diode
LNT LON network tool
LON Local operating network
MCB Miniature circuit breaker
MCM Mezzanine carrier module
MIM Milli-ampere module
MPM Main processing module
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 23 Glossary
1219 Technical reference manual
MVB Multifunction vehicle bus. Standardized serial bus originally developed for use in trains.
NCC National Control Centre
NUM Numerical module
OCO cycle Open-close-open cycle
OCP Overcurrent protection
OEM Optical ethernet module
OLTC On-load tap changer
OV Over-voltage
Overreach A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault condition. For example, a distance relay is overreaching when the impedance presented to it is smaller than the apparent impedance to the fault applied to the balance point, that is, the set reach. The relay sees the fault but perhaps it should not have seen it.
PCI Peripheral component interconnect, a local data bus
PCM Pulse code modulation
PCM600 Protection and control IED manager
PC-MIP Mezzanine card standard
PMC PCI Mezzanine card
POR Permissive overreach
POTT Permissive overreach transfer trip
Process bus Bus or LAN used at the process level, that is, in near proximity to the measured and/or controlled components
PSM Power supply module
PST Parameter setting tool within PCM600
PT ratio Potential transformer or voltage transformer ratio
PUTT Permissive underreach transfer trip
RASC Synchrocheck relay, COMBIFLEX
RCA Relay characteristic angle
RFPP Resistance for phase-to-phase faults
Resistance for phase-to-ground faults
RISC Reduced instruction set computer
RMS value Root mean square value
Section 23 1MRK505222-UUS C Glossary
1220 Technical reference manual
RS422 A balanced serial interface for the transmission of digital data in point-to-point connections
RS485 Serial link according to EIA standard RS485
RTC Real-time clock
RTU Remote terminal unit
SA Substation Automation
SBO Select-before-operate
SC Switch or push button to close
SCS Station control system
SCADA Supervision, control and data acquisition
SCT System configuration tool according to standard IEC 61850
SDU Service data unit
SLM Serial communication module. Used for SPA/LON/IEC/ DNP3 communication.
SMA connector Subminiature version A, A threaded connector with constant impedance.
SMT Signal matrix tool within PCM600
SMS Station monitoring system
SNTP Simple network time protocol is used to synchronize computer clocks on local area networks. This reduces the requirement to have accurate hardware clocks in every embedded system in a network. Each embedded node can instead synchronize with a remote clock, providing the required accuracy.
SPA Strmberg protection acquisition, a serial master/slave protocol for point-to-point communication
SRY Switch for CB ready condition
ST Switch or push button to trip
Starpoint Neutral/Wye point of transformer or generator
SVC Static VAr compensation
TC Trip coil
TCS Trip circuit supervision
TCP Transmission control protocol. The most common transport layer protocol used on Ethernet and the Internet.
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 23 Glossary
1221 Technical reference manual
TCP/IP Transmission control protocol over Internet Protocol. The de facto standard Ethernet protocols incorporated into 4.2BSD Unix. TCP/IP was developed by DARPA for Internet working and encompasses both network layer and transport layer protocols. While TCP and IP specify two protocols at specific protocol layers, TCP/IP is often used to refer to the entire US Department of Defense protocol suite based upon these, including Telnet, FTP, UDP and RDP.
TEF Time delayed gound-fault protection function
TNC connector Threaded Neill-Concelman, a threaded constant impedance version of a BNC connector
TPZ, TPY, TPX, TPS Current transformer class according to IEC
UMT User management tool
Underreach A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault condition. For example, a distance relay is underreaching when the impedance presented to it is greater than the apparent impedance to the fault applied to the balance point, that is, the set reach. The relay does not see the fault but perhaps it should have seen it. See also Overreach.
UTC Coordinated Universal Time. A coordinated time scale, maintained by the Bureau International des Poids et Mesures (BIPM), which forms the basis of a coordinated dissemination of standard frequencies and time signals. UTC is derived from International Atomic Time (TAI) by the addition of a whole number of «leap seconds» to synchronize it with Universal Time 1 (UT1), thus allowing for the eccentricity of the Earth’s orbit, the rotational axis tilt (23.5 degrees), but still showing the Earth’s irregular rotation, on which UT1 is based. The Coordinated Universal Time is expressed using a 24-hour clock, and uses the Gregorian calendar. It is used for aeroplane and ship navigation, where it is also sometimes known by the military name, «Zulu time.» «Zulu» in the phonetic alphabet stands for «Z», which stands for longitude zero.
UV Undervoltage
WEI Weak end infeed logic
VT Voltage transformer
X.21 A digital signalling interface primarily used for telecom equipment
Section 23 1MRK505222-UUS C Glossary
1222 Technical reference manual
3IO Three times zero-sequence current. Often referred to as the residual or the -fault current
3VO Three times the zero sequence voltage. Often referred to as the residual voltage or the neutral point voltage
1MRK505222-UUS C Section 23 Glossary
1223 Technical reference manual
Contact us
ABB Inc. 1021 Main Campus Drive Raleigh, NC 27606, USA Phone Toll Free: 1-800-HELP-365, menu option #8
ABB Inc. 3450 Harvester Road Burlington, ON L7N 3W5, Canada Phone Toll Free: 1-800-HELP-365, menu option #8
ABB Mexico S.A. de C.V. Paseo de las Americas No. 31 Lomas Verdes 3a secc. 53125, Naucalpan, Estado De Mexico, MEXICO Phone (+1) 440-585-7804, menu option #8
1M R
K 50
52 22
-U U
S C
C
op yr
i
-
Page 1
® Relion 670 SERIES Line differential protection RED670 Version 2.2 Product guide… -
Page 2: Table Of Contents
The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by Hitachi Power Grids. Hitachi Power Grids assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document. Drawings and diagrams are not binding. ABB is a registered trademark of ABB Asea Brown Boveri Ltd.
-
Page 3: Document Revision History
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Issued: September 2020 Revision: N 1. Document revision history GUID-34B323E4-1319-4D42-80CE-29B0F2D36E2C v4 Table 1. Document revision history Document Date Product revision History revision 2017-07 2.2.0 First release for product version 2.2 2017-10 2.2.1 Ethernet ports with RJ45 connector added.
-
Page 4: Application
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Disturbance recording and fault locator are available to allow independent post-fault analysis after primary 2. Application disturbances. The Disturbance recorder will also show M13635-3 v9 The Intelligent Electronic Device (IED) is used for the remote station currents, as received to this IED, time protection, control and monitoring of overhead lines compensated with measure communication time.
-
Page 5
On request, ABB is available to support the re-configuration The basic delivery includes one binary input module and work, either directly or to do the design checking. -
Page 6
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Description of configuration A42 GUID-A3E1E81D-9278-4AC1-8AAA-AD0D56DABE23 v2 RED670 A42 – Single breaker with single or three phase tripping 12AI (6I+6U) WA2_VT VN MMXU WA1_VT Control Control Control S SCBR S SCBR S XCBR VN MMXU 1→0… -
Page 7
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Description of configuration B33 GUID-1231CFD6-8CEF-464E-8124-E9F7EFD0FF62 v2 RED670 B33 – Multi breaker with single or three phase tripping 12AI (6I+6U) WA1_VT WA1_CT Control Control Control 50BF 3I>BF 52PD S SCBR S SCBR S SCBR CC PDSC VN MMXU… -
Page 8
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Description of configuration B42 GUID-D1058782-6EAD-4E94-8513-1D3647E67250 v2 RED670 B42 – Multi breaker with single or three phase tripping 12AI (6I+6U) WA1_VT WA1_CT Control Control 52PD Control 50BF 3I>BF S SCBR S SCBR S SCBR CC PDSC VN MMXU… -
Page 9
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Description of configuration C42 GUID-C82DE474-FDC4-49CF-AF12-445716D9C6B6 v2 RED670 C42 – Single breaker with single or three phase tripping and back-up distance protection 12AI (6I+6U) 21FL DFR/SER DR DRP RDRE LMB RFLO WA2_VT VN MMXU WA1_VT… -
Page 10: Available Functions
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 3. Available functions GUID-F5776DD1-BD04-4872-BB89-A0412B4B5CC3 v1 The following tables list all the functions available in the IED. Those functions that are not exposed to the user or do not need to be configured are not described in this manual.
-
Page 11: Differential Protection
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Line Differential function name RED670 (Customized) Differential protection HZPDIF High impedance differential protection, single 3-A02 3-A02 3-A02 3-A02 phase REFPDIF Restricted earth fault protection, low impedance 0–2 L3CPDIF Line differential protection for 3 CT sets, 2-3 line…
-
Page 12
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Line Differential function name RED670 (Customized) ZMRPDIS, Distance measuring zone, quad characteristic ZMRAPDIS separate Ph-Ph and Ph-E settings FRPSPDIS Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle ZMFPDIS High speed distance protection, quad and mho… -
Page 13: Current Protection
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Back-up protection functions GUID-A8D0852F-807F-4442-8730-E44808E194F0 v16 IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Line Differential function name RED670 (Customized) Current protection PHPIOC Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection OC4PTOC Directional phase overcurrent 51_67 protection, four steps EFPIOC Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection…
-
Page 14: Frequency Protection
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Line Differential function name RED670 (Customized) VDCPTOV Voltage differential protection LOVPTUV Loss of voltage check PAPGAPC Radial feeder protection Frequency protection SAPTUF Underfrequency protection 3-E04 3-E04 3-E04…
-
Page 15: Control
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Control and monitoring functions GUID-E3777F16-0B76-4157-A3BF-0B6B978863DE v20 IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Line Differential function name RED670 (Customized) Control SESRSYN Synchrocheck, energizing check and synchronizing SMBRREC Autorecloser 2-H05 1-H04 2-H05 1-H04 APC10 Control functionality for a…
-
Page 16: Logic
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Line Differential function name RED670 (Customized) I103POSCMD IED commands with position and select for IEC 60870-5-103 I103POSCMDV IED direct commands with position for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IEDCMD IED commands for IEC…
-
Page 17
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Line Differential function name RED670 (Customized) ANDQT, Configurable logic blocks Q/T INDCOMBSPQT, (see Table 6) INDEXTSPQT, INVALIDQT, INVERTERQT, ORQT, PULSETIMERQT, RSMEMORYQT, SRMEMORYQT, TIMERSETQT, XORQT AND, GATE, INV, Extension logic package (see LLD, OR,… -
Page 18: Monitoring
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Line Differential function name RED670 (Customized) Monitoring CVMMXN Power system measurement CMMXU Current measurement VMMXU Voltage measurement phase-phase CMSQI Current sequence measurement VMSQI Voltage sequence measurement VNMMXU Voltage measurement…
-
Page 19: Metering
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Line Differential function name RED670 (Customized) I103AR Function status auto- recloser for IEC 60870-5-103 I103EF Function status earth-fault for IEC 60870-5-103 I103FLTPROT Function status fault protection for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IED…
-
Page 20
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Table 3. Total number of instances for basic configurable logic blocks Basic configurable logic block Total number of instances GATE PULSETIMER RSMEMORY SRMEMORY TIMERSET Table 4. Number of function instances in APC10 Function name Function description Total number of instances… -
Page 21
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Table 5. Number of function instances in APC15 Function name Function description Total number of instances SCILO Interlocking BB_ES A1A2_BS A1A2_DC ABC_BC BH_CONN BH_LINE_A BH_LINE_B DB_BUS_A DB_BUS_B DB_LINE ABC_LINE AB_TRAFO SCSWI Switch controller SXSWI… -
Page 22
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Table 7. Total number of instances for extended logic package Extended configurable logic block Total number of instances GATE PULSETIMER RSMEMORY SLGAPC SRMEMORY TIMERSET VSGAPC Hitachi Power Grids © Copyright 2017 Hitachi Power Grids. All rights reserved… -
Page 23
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Communication GUID-5F144B53-B9A7-4173-80CF-CD4C84579CB5 v18 IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Line Differential function name RED670 (Customized) Station communication LONSPA, SPA SPA communication protocol LON communication protocol HORZCOMM Network variables via LON PROTOCOL Operation selection between SPA and IEC60870-5-103 for SLM… -
Page 24
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Line Differential function name RED670 (Customized) OPTICAL103 IEC 60870-5-103 Optical serial communication RS485103 IEC 60870-5-103 serial communication for RS485 AGSAL Generic security application component LD0LLN0 IEC 61850 LD0 LLN0 SYSLLN0… -
Page 25
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Line Differential function name RED670 (Customized) QUALEXP IEC 61850 quality expander Remote communication BinSignRec1_1 Binary signal transfer, receive 3/3/6 3/3/6 3/3/6 3/3/6 3/3/6 BinSignRec1_2 BinSignReceive2 BinSignTrans1_1 Binary signal transfer, transmit… -
Page 26
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Line Differential function name RED670 (Customized) ZC1WPSCH Current reversal and weak-end infeed 1-B05 1-B05 1-B05 1-B05 logic for phase segregated communication ZCLCPSCH Local acceleration logic 1-B35 1-B35 1-B35… -
Page 27: Basic Ied Functions
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Basic IED functions GUID-C8F0E5D2-E305-4184-9627-F6B5864216CA v14 Table 9. Basic IED functions IEC 61850 or function Description name INTERRSIG Self supervision with internal event list SELFSUPEVLST TIMESYNCHGEN Time synchronization module BININPUT, SYNCHCAN, Time synchronization SYNCHGPS, SYNCHCMPPS,…
-
Page 28
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Table 9. Basic IED functions, continued IEC 61850 or function Description name ALTMS Time master supervision ALTIM Time management CAMCONFIG Central account management configuration CAMSTATUS Central account management status TOOLINF Tools information COMSTATUS Protocol diagnostic… -
Page 29
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 measured by one and sometimes by two three-phase current transformer (CT) groups. The voltages at all YNdx ends are also measured if the exact method is selected for charging current compensation. The protected zone is determined by the positions of the CTs at all ends of Autotransformer the protected circuit. -
Page 30
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Protected zone Comm. Channel Comm. Channel Comm. Channel IEC05000040_2_en.vsd IEC05000040 V2 EN-US Figure 7. Example of application on a three-terminal line with 1½ breaker arrangements The current differential algorithm provides high differential protection can be time-delayed for low sensitivity for internal faults and it has excellent differential currents to achieve coordination with… -
Page 31
In this versions than 670 1.2.3 must be verified system, a 64 kbits/s or 2 Mbit/s communication channel with ABB. is only needed between the master and each one of the slave IEDs. The Master-Slave condition for the… -
Page 32
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 protection logic to always release operation for all faults Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic detected by the differential function. LDRGFC consists (ZMQPDIS) together with Phase selection with load of four sub functions: encroachment (FDPSPDIS) has functionality for load encroachment, which increases the possibility to detect •… -
Page 33
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Quadrilateral characteristic is available. this matter. Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with fixed angle (FDPSPDIS) is designed to accurately Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic select the proper fault loop in the distance function for series compensated lines (ZMCPDIS) function has dependent on the fault type. -
Page 34
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Forward operation Operation area Operation area Operation area Reverse No operation area No operation area operation IEC07000117-2-en.vsd IEC07000117 V2 EN-US Figure 13. Load encroachment influence on the offset mho characteristic en05000034.vsd IEC05000034 V1 EN-US Figure 14. -
Page 35
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Faulty phase identification with load encroachment FMPSPDIS SEMOD153825-5 v7 The ability to accurately and reliably classify different Forward types of fault so that single phase tripping and operation autoreclosing can be used plays an important roll in today’s power systems. -
Page 36
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 the possibility to enlarge the resistive setting of both High speed distance protection ZMFCPDIS is the phase selection and the measuring zones without fundamentally the same function as ZMFPDIS but interfering with the load. -
Page 37
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 fault type and thereby, reliable fault clearance can be Two current channels I3P1 and I3P2 are available in achieved for faults during power swing. OOSPPAM function to allow the direct connection of two groups of three-phase currents;… -
Page 38
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Synchrophasor data can be reported to up to 8 clients Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage and over TCP and/or 6 UDP group clients for multicast or current based ZCVPSOF unicast transmission of phasor data from the IED. -
Page 39
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 protection being out of service due to communication or directional zero sequence current can be used. Current voltage transformer circuit failure. reversal and weak-end infeed functionality are available. Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power EF4PTOC has an inverse or definite time delay protection SDEPSDE independent for each step. -
Page 40
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 CCRBRF provides three different options to select how flow in the power system. There are a number of t1 and t2 timers are run: applications where such functionality is needed. Some 1. -
Page 41
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 selective tripping of a faulty line. Alternatively, the Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH function can be used solely for signaling of the earth- M13319-3 v9 When the laminated core of a power transformer or fault location to the SCADA system when the power generator is subjected to a magnetic flux density network is allowed to operate for a longer time with an… -
Page 42
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 phase(s) in which the phase selection function has shedding and remedial action schemes. SAPFRC can operated. discriminate between a positive or negative change of frequency. A definite time delay is provided for operate. For delayed tripping, single pole and three pole delays are separately and independently settable. -
Page 43
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 and islanding in grid networks. Voltage based delta Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC supervision (DELVSPVC) is needed at the grid SEMOD113820-4 v13 The aim of the fuse failure supervision function interconnection point. (FUFSPVC) is to block voltage measuring functions at failures in the secondary circuits between the voltage Current based delta supervision DELISPVC… -
Page 44
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 asynchronous systems are in phase and can be evaluated with an additional supervision of the status connected. The synchronizing feature evaluates voltage value of the control object. The command sequence with difference, phase angle difference, slip frequency and enhanced security is always terminated by a frequency rate of change before issuing a controlled… -
Page 45
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Hardware switches are however sources for Reservation function QCRSV maintenance issues, lower system reliability and an M13506-3 v5 The purpose of the reservation (QCRSV) function is extended purchase portfolio. The selector switch primarily to transfer interlocking information between function eliminates all these problems. -
Page 46
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 types of communication schemes for permissive On verification of a weak end infeed condition, the weak underreaching, permissive overreaching, blocking, delta end infeed logic provides an output for sending the based blocking, unblocking and intertrip are available. -
Page 47
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 logic for weak-end infeed and current reversal, included • Low active power trip with 2 selection modes ‘1 out of in Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for 3’ and ‘2 out of 3’ residual overcurrent protection (ECRWPSCH) function. -
Page 48
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Zero sequence overcurrent protection LCZSPTOC Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC GUID-F0C38DA1-2F39-46DE-AFFE-F919E6CF4A57 v2 Zero sequence components are present in all abnormal M15321-3 v14 The trip matrix logic (TMAGAPC) function is used to conditions involving earth. -
Page 49
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 • PULSETIMER function block can be used, for example, inputs signal are copied to the corresponding quality for pulse extensions or limiting of operation of output. outputs, settable pulse time. •… -
Page 50
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 certain logic. Boolean, integer, floating point, string be used for monitoring, supervision, interlocking and types of signals are available. other logics. One FXDSIGN function block is included in all IEDs. 16. -
Page 51
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 The Disturbance report function is characterized by The event recorder information is available for the great flexibility regarding configuration, starting disturbances locally in the IED. conditions, recording times, and large storage capacity. The event recording information is an integrated part of A disturbance is defined as an activation of an input to the disturbance record (Comtrade file). -
Page 52
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Analog, integer and double indication values are also Circuit breaker condition monitoring SSCBR transferred through the EVENT function. GUID-E1FD74C3-B9B6-4E11-AA1B-7E7F822FB4DD v14 The circuit breaker condition monitoring function Generic communication function for Single Point (SSCBR) is used to monitor different parameters of the indication SPGAPC breaker condition. -
Page 53
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 • Applicable to very long time accumulation (≤ 99999.9 Voltage harmonic monitoring VHMMHAI hours) GUID-868ED1BB-A921-45DE-94C4-0CF23ECD9ADA v1 Voltage harmonic monitoring function VHMMHAI is used • Supervision of limit transgression conditions and to monitor the voltage part of the power quality of a rollover/overflow system. -
Page 54: Ethernet
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 reverse directions. These energy values are available as The LHMI is used for setting, monitoring and controlling. output signals and also as pulse outputs. Integration of energy values can be controlled by inputs (STARTACC 19.
-
Page 55: Station Communication
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 communication. SCHLCCH is used for communication Substation Automation (SA) bus or Substation over the rear Ethernet ports, RCHLCCH is used for Monitoring (SM) bus. redundant communications over the rear Ethernet ports Available communication protocols are: and FRONTSTATUS is used for communication over the front port.
-
Page 56
SPA communication protocol Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103SUPERV SEMOD120134-5 v1 A single glass or plastic port is provided for the ABB SPA I103SUPERV is a function block with defined functions protocol. This allows extensions of simple substation for supervision indications in monitor direction. This automation systems but the main use is for Substation FunctionType parameter;… -
Page 57: Remote Communication
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 as interface for horizontal peer-to-peer communication IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IEDCMD (over LON only). I103IEDCMD is a command block in control direction with defined IED functions. All outputs are pulsed and 22.
-
Page 58: Hardware Description
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 designed for 64 kbit/s resp 2Mbit/s operation. The transducers. The module has six independent, converter is delivered with 19” rack mounting galvanically separated channels. accessories. Optical Ethernet module M16073-3 v9 The optical Ethernet module (OEM) provides two 23.
-
Page 59
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Transformer input module TRM M14875-3 v10 The transformer input module is used to galvanically separate and adapt the secondary currents and voltages generated by the measuring transformers. The module has twelve inputs in different combinations of currents and voltage inputs. -
Page 60
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Table 11. Case dimensions, continued Case size (mm)/ (inches) The G and H dimensions are defined by the 19” rack mounting kit. Mounting alternatives M16079-3 v14 • 19” rack mounting kit •… -
Page 61: Connection Diagrams
1446-18 IEC 61850 Ed2 level A1 10175313-INC 20-2185rev1 certificate issued by DNV GL IEC 61850 Ed1 level B1 1KHL050130 certificate issued by ABB Power Grids Switzerland Ltd, System Verification and Validation Center, SVC Baden IEC 60870-5-103 certificate 10021419-OPE/INC 16-2490 issued by DNV GL DNP 3.0 certificate issued by…
-
Page 62: Technical Data
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 26. Technical data General M10993-1 v4 IP11376-1 v3 Definitions Reference value The specified value of an influencing factor to which are referred the characteristics of the equipment Nominal range The range of values of an influencing quantity (factor) within which, under specified conditions, the equipment meets the specified requirements Operative range The range of values of a given energizing quantity for which the equipment, under specified conditions, is able to…
-
Page 63
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Energizing quantities, rated values and limits Analog inputs M16988-1 v11 IP15842-1 v1 Table 12. TRM — Energizing quantities, rated values and limits for protection transformer Description Value Frequency Rated frequency f 50/60 Hz Operating range ±… -
Page 64
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Table 13. TRM — Energizing quantities, rated values and limits for measuring transformer Description Value Frequency Rated frequency f 50/60 Hz Operating range ± 10% Current inputs Rated current I Operating range (0-1.8) ×… -
Page 65
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Binary inputs and outputs M12576-1 v13 IP15844-1 v1 Table 16. BIM — Binary input module Quantity Rated value Nominal range Binary inputs DC voltage, RL 24/30 V RL ±20% 48/60 V RL ±20% 110/125 V RL ±20%… -
Page 66
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Table 18. IOM — Binary input/output module Quantity Rated value Nominal range Binary inputs DC voltage, RL 24/30 V RL ±20% 48/60 V RL ±20% 110/125 V RL ±20% 220/250 V RL ±20% Power consumption 24/30 V, 50 mA… -
Page 67
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 M12318-1 v11 Table 19. IOM — Binary input/output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-1) Function or quantity Trip and signal relays Fast signal relays (parallel reed relay) Binary outputs Max system voltage 250 V AC/DC 250 V DC… -
Page 68
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 M12584-1 v11 Table 20. IOM with MOV and IOM 220/250 V, 110mA — contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-1) Function or quantity Trip and Signal relays Fast signal relays (parallel reed relay) Binary outputs IOM: 10 IOM: 2… -
Page 69
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 SEMOD175395-2 v11 Table 21. SOM — Static Output Module data (reference standard: IEC 61810-1): Heavy duty static binary outputs Function of quantity Static binary output trip Max system voltage 250 V DC Number of outputs Impedance open state High impedance… -
Page 70
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Table 22. SOM — Static Output module data (reference standard: IEC 61810-1): Electromechanical relay outputs Function of quantity Trip and signal relays Max system voltage 250 V AC/DC Min load voltage 24 V DC Number of outputs Test voltage across open contact, 1 min… -
Page 71
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 M12441-1 v11 Table 23. BOM — Binary output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-1) Function or quantity Trip and Signal relays Binary outputs Max system voltage 250 V AC/DC Min load voltage 24V DC Test voltage across open contact, 1 min… -
Page 72
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Table 25. Auxiliary DC supply voltage influence on functionality during operation Dependence on Reference value Within nominal Influence range Ripple, in DC auxiliary voltage max. 2% 15% of EL 0.01%/% Operative range Full wave rectified… -
Page 73
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Type tests according to standards M16706-1 v15 IP15778-1 v1 Table 27. Electromagnetic compatibility Test Type test values Reference standards 1 MHz burst disturbance 2.5 kV IEC 60255-26 100 kHz slow damped oscillatory wave immunity test 2.5 kV IEC 61000-4-18, Level 3 Ring wave immunity test, 100 kHz… -
Page 74
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Table 29. Environmental conditions Description Value Operating temperature range -25°C to +55°C (continuous) Short-time service temperature range -40°C to +70°C (<16h) Note: Degradation in MTBF and HMI performance outside the temperature range of -25°C to +55°C Relative humidity <93%, non-condensing… -
Page 75
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Differential protection M13062-1 v22 Table 33. Restricted earth-fault protection, low impedance REFPDIF Function Range or value Accuracy Operating characteristic Adaptable ±1.0% of I at I ≤ I ±1.0% of I at I > I Reset ratio >… -
Page 76
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 M16023-1 v12 Table 35. Line differential protection L3CPDIF, L6CPDIF, LT3CPDIF , LT6CPDIF single IED without communication Function Range or value Accuracy IBase Minimum operate current (20-200)% of ±1.0% of I at I ≤… -
Page 77
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Table 35. Line differential protection L3CPDIF, L6CPDIF, LT3CPDIF , LT6CPDIF single IED without communication , continued Function Range or value Accuracy **Operate time, unrestrained negative Min. = 10 ms sequence function Max. -
Page 78
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Table 36. Line differential protection L3CPDIF, L6CPDIF, LT3CPDIF , LT6CPDIF with 64 Kbit/s communication Function Range or value Accuracy IBase Minimum operate current (20-200)% of ±4.0% of I at I ≤ I ±4.0% of I at I >… -
Page 79
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Table 36. Line differential protection L3CPDIF, L6CPDIF, LT3CPDIF , LT6CPDIF with 64 Kbit/s communication , continued Function Range or value Accuracy **Operate time, unrestrained negative Min. = 15 ms sequence function Max. -
Page 80
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Table 37. Line differential protection L3CPDIF, L6CPDIF, LT3CPDIF , LT6CPDIF with 2 Mbits/s communication Function Range or value Accuracy IBase Minimum operate current (20-200)% of ±1.0% of I at I ≤ I ±1.0% of I at I >… -
Page 81
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Table 37. Line differential protection L3CPDIF, L6CPDIF, LT3CPDIF , LT6CPDIF with 2 Mbits/s communication , continued Function Range or value Accuracy **Operate time, unrestrained negative Min. = 10 ms sequence function Max. -
Page 82
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 GUID-6746298E-4C29-44C6-AB59-41EBF408A5E4 v4 Table 38. High speed line differential protection for 4 CT sets, 2-3 line ends L4CPDIF with 2 Mbit/s communication Function Range or value Accuracy Minimum operate current (20-200)% of IBase ±1.0% of I at I ≤… -
Page 83
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 GUID-0BD8D3C9-620A-426C-BDB5-DAA0E4F8247F v4 Table 39. Additional security logic for differential protection LDRGFC Function Range or value Accuracy Operate current, zero sequence current (1-100)% of lBase ±1.0% of I Operate current, low current operation (1-100)% of lBase ±1.0% of I Operate voltage, phase to neutral… -
Page 84
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Impedance protection M13842-1 v15 Table 40. Distance measuring zone, Quad ZMQPDIS Function Range or value Accuracy Number of zones Max 5 with selectable direction Minimum operate residual (5-1000)% of IBase current, zone 1 Minimum operate current, (10-1000)% of IBase… -
Page 85
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 SEMOD173239-2 v10 Table 41. Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines ZMCPDIS, ZMCAPDIS Function Range or value Accuracy Number of zones Max 5 with selectable direction IBase Minimum operate residual (5-1000)% of current, zone 1 IBase… -
Page 86
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 SEMOD173242-2 v14 Table 43. Full-scheme distance protection, Mho characteristic ZMHPDIS Function Range or value Accuracy Number of zones, Ph-E Max 5 with selectable direction Minimum operate current (10–30)% of IBase Positive sequence impedance, (0.005–3000.000) W/phase ±2.0% static accuracy… -
Page 87
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 SEMOD153649-2 v8 Table 45. Faulty phase identification with load encroachment FMPSPDIS Function Range or value Accuracy Load encroachment criteria: ±2.0% static accuracy (1.00–3000.00) W/ Load resistance, forward and phase Conditions: reverse Voltage range: (0.1–1.1) x U (5–70) degrees… -
Page 88
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 GUID-9E13C38A-3B6D-402B-98A6-6CDA20632CE7 v5 Table 47. Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle FRPSPDIS Function Range or value Accuracy Minimum operate current (5-500)% of IBase ±1.0% of I at I ≤ I ±1.0% of I at I >… -
Page 89
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 GUID-6C2EF52A-8166-4A23-9861-38931682AA7D v8 Table 48. High speed distance protection ZMFPDIS, ZMFCPDIS Function Range or value Accuracy Number of zones 5 selectable directions, 2 fixed directions Minimum operate current, Ph- (5-6000)% of IBase ±1.0% of I Ph and Ph-E Positive sequence reactance… -
Page 90
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 GUID-E65CE996-C0CE-4620-8E01-A96896E62802 v1 Table 49. Power swing detection, blocking and unblocking ZMBURPSB Function Range or value Accuracy Reactive reach ±2.0% static accuracy (0.10-3000.00) W/phase Conditions: Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x U Current range: (0.5-30) x I Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees Resistive reach (0.10–1000.00) W/loop… -
Page 91
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 GUID-BACA37F7-E945-40BC-BF9D-A65BFC96CA91 v9 Table 53. Phase preference logic PPLPHIZ Function Range or value Accuracy Operate value, phase-to-phase and (10 — 90)% of UBase ±0.5% of U UPN< phase-to-neutral undervoltage, UPP< Reset ratio, undervoltage <… -
Page 92
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 GUID-42119BFF-1756-431C-A5A1-0AB637213E96 v2 Table 54. Phase preference logic PPL2PHIZ Function Range or value Accuracy Operate value, phase-to-phase and (10 — 90)% of UBase ±0.5% of U UPN< phase-to-neutral undervoltage, UPP< Reset ratio, undervoltage <… -
Page 93
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Wide area measurement system GUID-F0BAEBD8-E361-4D50-9737-7DF8B043D66A v5 Table 56. Protocol reporting via IEEE 1344 and IEC/IEEE 60255-118 (C37.118) PMUREPORT Influencing quantity Range Accuracy Signal frequency ± 0.1 x f ≤ 1.0% TVE Signal magnitude: Voltage phasor (0.1–1.2) x U… -
Page 94
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Current protection M12336-1 v14 Table 57. Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection PHPIOC Function Range or value Accuracy Operate current (5-2500)% of lBase ±1.0% of I at I ≤ I ±1.0% of I at I > I Reset ratio >… -
Page 95
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 M12342-1 v22 Table 58. Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps OC4PTOC Function Range or value Accuracy lBase Operate current, step 1-4 (5-2500)% of ±1.0% of I at I ≤ I ±1.0% of I at I >… -
Page 96
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 M12340-2 v9 Table 59. Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC Function Range or value Accuracy Operate current (5-2500)% of lBase ±1.0% of I at I ≤ I ±1.0% of I at I > I Reset ratio >… -
Page 97
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 M15223-1 v18 Table 60. Directional residual overcurrent protection, four steps EF4PTOC Function Range or value Accuracy Operate current, step 1-4 (1-2500)% of IBase ±1.0% of I at I ≤ I ±1.0% of I at I >… -
Page 98
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 GUID-E83AD807-8FE0-4244-A50E-86B9AF92469E v6 Table 61. Four step directional negative phase sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC Function Range or value Accuracy lBase Operate current, step 1 — 4 (1-2500)% of ±1.0% of I at I £… -
Page 99
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 SEMOD173350-2 v16 Table 62. Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection SDEPSDE Function Range or value Accuracy (0.25-200.00)% of IBase Operate level for 3I ·cosj directional ±1.0% of I at I £ I residual overcurrent ±1.0% of I at I >… -
Page 100
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 M12352-1 v15 Table 63. Thermal overload protection, one time constant LCPTTR/LFPTTR Function Range or value Accuracy Reference current (2-400)% of IBase ±1.0% of I Reference temperature (0-300)°C, (0 — 600)°F ±1.0°C, ±2.0°F Operate time: IEC 60255-149, ±5.0% or ±200 ms whichever is greater… -
Page 101
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 M12353-1 v15 Table 64. Breaker failure protection CCRBRF Function Range or value Accuracy lBase Operate phase current (5-200)% of ±1.0% of I at I £ I ±1.0% of I at I > I Reset ratio, phase current >… -
Page 102
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 SEMOD175152-2 v11 Table 67. Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP Function Range or value Accuracy SBase Power level (0.0–500.0)% of ±1.0% of S at S ≤ S for Step 1 and Step 2 ±1.0% of S at S >… -
Page 103
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 GUID-7EA9731A-8D56-4689-9072-D72D9CDFD795 v8 Table 70. Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection VRPVOC Function Range or value Accuracy Start overcurrent (2.0 — 5000.0)% of IBase ±1.0% of I at I ≤ I ±1.0% of I at I > I Reset ratio, overcurrent >… -
Page 104
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 GUID-BCCA5F2D-9FF7-4188-9B5D-DA05E8E80CC0 v1 Table 71. Average Power Transient Earth Fault Protection APPTEF Function Range or value Accuracy Minimum operate level for residual (5-80)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur overvoltage 3Uo> start condition «UN>» Reset ratio for residual overvoltage 3Uo>… -
Page 105
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Voltage protection M13290-1 v15 Table 72. Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV Function Range or value Accuracy UBase Operate voltage, low and high step (1.0–100.0)% of ±0.5% of U UBase Absolute hysteresis (0.0–50.0)% of ±0.5% of U UBase… -
Page 106
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 M13304-1 v15 Table 73. Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV Function Range or value Accuracy UBase Operate voltage, step 1 and 2 (1.0-200.0)% of ±0.5% of U at U ≤ U ±0.5% of U at U >… -
Page 107
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 M13317-2 v15 Table 74. Residual overvoltage protection, two steps ROV2PTOV Function Range or value Accuracy UBase Operate voltage, step 1 — step 2 (1.0-200.0)% of ± 0.5% of U at U ≤ U ±… -
Page 108
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 SEMOD166919-2 v7 Table 76. Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV Function Range or value Accuracy UBase Voltage difference for alarm and trip (2.0–100.0) % of ±0.5% of U Under voltage level (1.0–100.0) % of UBase ±0.5% of U Independent time delay for voltage… -
Page 109
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Frequency protection M13360-1 v16 Table 79. Underfrequency protection SAPTUF Function Range or Value Accuracy Operate value, start function, at (35.00 — 75.00) Hz ±2.0 mHz symmetrical three phase voltage, StartFrequency Reset hysteresis 10.0 mHz fixed ±2.0 mHz… -
Page 110
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 M14964-1 v13 Table 80. Underfrequency protection SAPTOF Function Range or Value Accuracy Operate value, start function, (35.00 — 90.00) Hz ±2.0 mHz at symmetrical three phase voltage, StartFrequency 10.0 mHz fixed ±2.0 mHz Reset hysteresis Start time measurement with… -
Page 111
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Multipurpose protection M13095-2 v11 Table 82. General current and voltage protection CVGAPC Function Range or value Accuracy Measuring current input phase1, phase2, phase3, PosSeq, — NegSeq, -3*ZeroSeq, MaxPh, MinPh, UnbalancePh, phase1- phase2, phase2-phase3, phase3- phase1, MaxPh-Ph, MinPh-Ph, UnbalancePh-Ph… -
Page 112
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Table 82. General current and voltage protection CVGAPC, continued Function Range or value Accuracy Start undervoltage, step 1 — 2 (2.0 — 150.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of U at U ≤ U ±0.5% of U at U >… -
Page 113
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Table 82. General current and voltage protection CVGAPC, continued Function Range or value Accuracy Impulse margin time 15 ms typically Undervoltage: Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 1.2 x U to 0.8 x Impulse margin time 15 ms typically… -
Page 114
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Secondary system supervision M12358-1 v10 Table 83. Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC Function Range or value Accuracy Operate current (10-200)% of IBase ±10.0% of I at I ≤ I ±10.0% of I at I > I Reset ratio, Operate current >90% Block current… -
Page 115
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 GUID-E2EA8017-BB4B-48B0-BEDA-E71FEE353774 v5 Table 85. Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC Function Range or value Accuracy Operate value, block of main fuse failure (10.0-80.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur Reset ratio <110% Operate time, block of main fuse failure at 1 x U Min. -
Page 116
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Control M12359-1 v15 Table 88. Synchronizing, synchrocheck and energizing check SESRSYN Function Range or value Accuracy Phase shift, j (-180 to 180) degrees line Voltage high limit for synchronizing and synchrocheck (50.0-120.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of U at U ≤… -
Page 117
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 M12379-1 v13 Table 89. Autorecloser SMBRREC Function Range or value Accuracy Dead time: shot 1 “t1 1Ph” (0.000-120.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms shot 1 “t1 2Ph” whichever is greater shot 1 “t1 3Ph “… -
Page 118
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Scheme communication M16038-1 v14 Table 90. Scheme communication logic with delta based blocking scheme signal transmit ZCPSCH Function Range or value Accuracy Scheme type Intertrip Permissive UR Permissive OR Blocking DeltaBlocking Operate voltage, Delta U (0–100)% of UBase… -
Page 119
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 M16039-1 v16 Table 92. Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for distance protection ZCRWPSCH Function Range or value Accuracy Detection level phase-to- (10-90)% of UBase ±0.5% of U neutral voltage Detection level phase-to-phase (10-90)% of UBase ±0.5% of U… -
Page 120
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 M16051-2 v11 Table 96. Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection ECRWPSCH Function Range or value Accuracy Operate mode of WEI logic Echo Echo & Trip Operate voltage 3U0 for WEI (5-70)% of UBase ±0.5% of U trip… -
Page 121
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Direct transfer trip GUID-B5714FAE-A87D-4C2D-A167-6CB3522CE1D5 v5 Table 97. Low active power and power factor protection LAPPGAPC Function Range or value Accuracy Operate value, low active power (2.0-100.0)% of SBase ±1.0% of S Reset ratio, low active power <105% Operate value, low power factor… -
Page 122
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 GUID-C99E063D-B377-40D5-8481-9F46D4166AED v3 Table 100. Carrier receive logic LCCRPTRC Function Range or value Accuracy Operation mode 1 Out Of 2 2 Out Of 2 Independent time delay (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater GUID-122A206E-27D2-4D15-AD5A-86B68F1ED559 v6 Table 101. -
Page 123
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 GUID-0E964441-43DE-43B6-B454-485FBBF66B5C v5 Table 103. Negative sequence overcurrent protection LCNSPTOC Function Range or value Accuracy Operate value, negative sequence (3 — 2500)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ I overcurrent ±1.0% of I at I >… -
Page 124
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 GUID-C4ACE306-2A54-483D-B247-A479D48CBF5F v5 Table 105. Three phase overcurrent LCP3PTOC Function Range or value Accuracy Operate value, overcurrent (5-2500)% of IBase ±1.0% of I at I ≤ I ±1.0% of I at I > I Reset ratio, overcurrent >… -
Page 125
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Logic M12380-1 v15 Table 107. Tripping logic common 3-phase output SMPPTRC Function Range or value Accuracy Program Trip action, 3 phase, 1ph/2ph, 1ph/2ph/3ph Minimum trip pulse (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater length , tTripMin tWaitForPHS… -
Page 126
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 GUID-EAA43288-01A5-49CF-BF5B-9ABF6DC27D85 v2 Table 113. Number of INDCALH instances Function Quantity with cycle time 3 ms 8 ms 100 ms INDCALH GUID-D1179280-1D99-4A66-91AC-B7343DBA9F23 v3 Table 114. Number of AND instances Logic block Quantity with cycle time 3 ms 8 ms… -
Page 127
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 GUID-BE6FD540-E96E-4F15-B2A2-12FFAE6C51DB v2 Table 120. Number of RSMEMORY instances Logic block Quantity with cycle time 3 ms 8 ms 100 ms RSMEMORY GUID-7A0F4327-CA83-4FB0-AB28-7C5F17AE6354 v2 Table 121. Number of SRMEMORY instances Logic block Quantity with cycle time 3 ms 8 ms… -
Page 128
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 GUID-77FEBE9B-0882-4E85-8B1A-7671807BFC02 v2 Table 127. Number of INVALIDQT instances Logic block Quantity with cycle time 3 ms 8 ms 100 ms INVALIDQT GUID-F25B94C6-9CC9-48A0-A7A3-47627D2B56E2 v1 Table 128. Number of INVERTERQT instances Logic block Quantity with cycle time 3 ms 8 ms… -
Page 129
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 GUID-1C381E02-6B9E-44DC-828F-8B3EA7EDAA54 v1 Table 134. Number of XORQT instances Logic block Quantity with cycle time 3 ms 8 ms 100 ms XORQT GUID-19810098-1820-4765-8F0B-7D585FFC0C78 v8 Table 135. Number of instances in the extension logic package Logic block Quantity with cycle time 3 ms… -
Page 130
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 GUID-A339BBA3-8FD0-429D-BB49-809EAC4D53B0 v2 Table 139. Number of ITBGAPC instances Function Quantity with cycle time 3 ms 8 ms 100 ms ITBGAPC GUID-B258726E-1129-47C9-94F9-BE634A2085FA v4 Table 140. Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and overflow supervision TEIGAPC Function Cycle time (ms) Range or value… -
Page 131
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Monitoring M12386-1 v16 Table 144. Power system measurement CVMMXN Function Range or value Accuracy Frequency (0.95-1.05) x f ±2.0 mHz Voltage (10 to 300) V ±0.3% of U at U ≤ 50 V ±0.2% of U at U >… -
Page 132
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 GUID-ED634B6D-9918-464F-B6A4-51B78129B819 v6 Table 147. Voltage measurement phase-earth VNMMXU Function Range or value Accuracy Voltage (5 to 175) V ±0.5% of U at U ≤ 50 V ±0.2% of U at U > 50 V Phase angle (5 to 175) V ±0.5 degrees at U ≤… -
Page 133
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 M12760-1 v12 Table 151. Disturbance report DRPRDRE Function Range or value Accuracy Pre-fault time (0.05–9.90) s Post-fault time (0.1–10.0) s Limit time (0.5–10.0) s Maximum number of recordings 200, first in — first out Time tagging resolution 1 ms See table… -
Page 134
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 GUID-83B0F607-D898-403A-94FD-7FE8D45C73FF v9 Table 153. Insulation supervision for liquid medium function SSIML Function Range or value Accuracy Oil alarm level 1.00-100.00 ±10.0% of set value or 0.2 whichever is greater Oil lockout level 1.00-100.00 ±10.0% of set value or 0.2 whichever is greater Temperature alarm level… -
Page 135
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 M12700-1 v5 Table 156. Event list Function Value Buffer capacity Maximum number of events in the list 5000 Resolution 1 ms Accuracy Depending on time synchronizing M13765-1 v6 Table 157. Indications Function Value Buffer capacity… -
Page 136
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 GUID-C43B8654-60FE-4E20-8328-754C238F4AD0 v3 Relion® 670 series can store up to 10240 security events. Table 161. Event counter with limit supervision L4UFCNT Function Range or value Accuracy Counter value 0-65535 Hitachi Power Grids ©… -
Page 137
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Table 161. Event counter with limit supervision L4UFCNT , continued Function Range or value Accuracy Max. count up speed 30 pulses/s (50% duty cycle) GUID-F5E124E3-0B85-41AC-9830-A2362FD289F2 v1 Table 162. Running hour-meter TEILGAPC Function Range or value Accuracy… -
Page 138
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 GUID-2068BBA0-9026-48D0-9DEB-301BCB3C600C v2 Table 165. Voltage harmonic monitoring VHMMHAI (50/60 Hz) Function Range or value Accuracy Fundamental Harmonic Frequency (0.95 — 1.05) X f 2nd order to 5th order (0.1 — 0.5) X U ±… -
Page 139
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Metering M13404-2 v5 Table 166. Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT Function Setting range Accuracy Input frequency See Binary Input Module (BIM) Cycle time for report of (1–3600) s counter value SEMOD153707-2 v5 Table 167. -
Page 140
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Station communication M15031-1 v9 Table 168. Communication protocols Function Value Protocol IEC 61850-8-1 Communication speed for the IEDs 100BASE-FX Protocol IEC 60870–5–103 Communication speed for the IEDs 9600 or 19200 Bd Protocol DNP3.0 Communication speed for the IEDs… -
Page 141
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 M12589-1 v5 Table 173. SLM – LON port Quantity Range or value Optical connector Glass fiber: type ST Plastic fiber: type HFBR snap-in Fiber, optical budget Glass fiber: 11 dB (1000m/3000 ft typically *) Plastic fiber: 7 dB (10m/35 ft typically *) Fiber diameter Glass fiber: 62.5/125 mm… -
Page 142
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Table 177. SFP — Galvanic RJ45 Quantity Rated value Number of channels Up to 6 single or 3 redundant or a combination of single and redundant links for communication using any protocol Standard IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-TX Type of cable… -
Page 143
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Remote communication M12756-1 v13 Table 179. Line data communication module Characteristic Range or value Type of LDCM Short range (SR) Medium range (MR) Long range (LR) Type of fiber Multi-mode fiber Single-mode fiber Single-mode fiber glass 62.5/125 µm… -
Page 144
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Hardware M11778-1 v7 SEMOD53385-1 v1 Table 181. Case Material Steel sheet Front plate Stainless steel with cut-out for HMI Surface treatment Aluzink preplated steel Finish Light grey (RAL 7035) M12327-1 v5 Table 182. -
Page 145
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 GUID-96676D5D-0835-44DA-BC22-058FD18BDF34 v3 Because of limitations of space, when ring lug terminal is ordered for Binary I/O connections, one blank slot is necessary between two adjacent I/O modules. Please refer to the ordering particulars for details. -
Page 146
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Basic IED functions M11963-1 v5 Table 189. Self supervision with internal event list Data Value Recording manner Continuous, event controlled List size 40 events, first in-first out M12331-1 v9 Table 190. Time synchronization, time tagging Function Value Time tagging accuracy of the synchrophasor data… -
Page 147
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 SEMOD141136-2 v10 Table 194. IRIG-B Quantity Rated value Number of channels IRIG-B Number of optical channels Electrical connector: Electrical connector IRIG-B Pulse-width modulated 5 Vpp Amplitude modulated – low level 1-3 Vpp –… -
Page 148
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Inverse characteristic M12388-1 v23 Table 195. ANSI Inverse time characteristics Function Range or value Accuracy Operating characteristic: 0.05 ≤ k ≤ 999.00 ANSI/IEEE C37.112 , 1.5 x I ≤ I ≤ 20 x I ±2.0% or ±40 ms whichever is greater æ… -
Page 149
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Table 197. IEC Inverse time characteristics Function Range or value Accuracy Operating characteristic: 0.05 ≤ k ≤ 999.00 IEC 60255-151, ±2.0% 1.5 x I ≤ I ≤ 20 x I or ±40 ms whichever is greater æ… -
Page 150
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Table 198. IEC Inverse time characteristics for Line differential protection Function Range or value Accuracy Operating characteristic: 0.05 ≤ k ≤ 1.10 IEC 60255-151, ±5.0% or ±40 ms whichever is greater æ… -
Page 151
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Table 200. RI and RD type inverse time characteristics for Line differential protection Function Range or value Accuracy RI type inverse characteristic 0.05 ≤ k ≤ 1.10 IEC 60255-151, ±5.0% or ±40 ms whichever is greater ×… -
Page 152
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Table 202. IEC Inverse time characteristics for Line Differential protection Function Range or value Accuracy Operating characteristic: k = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01 IEC 60255-151, ± 5.0% or ± 40 ms whichever is greater æ… -
Page 153
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 GUID-19F8E187-4ED0-48C3-92F6-0D9EAA2B39BB v4 Table 204. ANSI Inverse time characteristics for Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection Function Range or value Accuracy Operating characteristic: 0.05 ≤ k ≤ 2.00 ANSI/IEEE C37.112 , 1.5 x I ≤… -
Page 154
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Table 205. IEC Inverse time characteristics for Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection Function Range or value Accuracy Operating characteristic: 0.05 ≤ k ≤ 2.00 IEC 60255-151, ±5.0% 1.5 x I ≤… -
Page 155
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 GUID-2AE8C92E-5DA8-487F-927D-8E553EE29240 v2 Table 207. ANSI Inverse time characteristics for Voltage restrained time overcurrent protection Function Range or value Accuracy Operating characteristic: 0.05 ≤ k ≤ 999.00 ANSI/IEEE C37.112 , ± 5.0% or ±40 ms whichever is greater æ… -
Page 156
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 SEMOD116978-2 v10 Table 209. Inverse time characteristics for overvoltage protection Function Range or value Accuracy Type A curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01 ±5.0% or ±45 ms whichever is greater æ… -
Page 157
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Table 210. Inverse time characteristics for undervoltage protection Function Range or value Accuracy Type A curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01 ±5.0% or ±45 ms whichever is greater æ… -
Page 158
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Table 211. Inverse time characteristics for residual overvoltage protection Function Range or value Accuracy Type A curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps ±5.0% or ±45 ms whichever is greater of 0.01 æ… -
Page 159: Ordering For Customized Ied
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 27. Ordering for customized IED GUID-79B6B8D2-5EE1-4456-A767-5820B9FA61D7 v13 Table 212. General guidelines Guidelines Carefully read and follow the set of rules to ensure problem-free order management. Please refer to the available functions table for included application functions. PCM600 can be used to make changes and/or additions to the delivered factory configuration of the pre-configured.
-
Page 160
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Table 216. Differential protection Position Table 217. Differential functions Function Function Ordering no Position Available Selected Notes and identification rules High impedance differential protection, single phase HZPDIF 1MRK005904-HB 00-03 Restricted earth fault protection, low impedance REFPDIF 1MRK005904-LD Line differential protection for 3 CT sets, 2-3 line ends… -
Page 161
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Table 219. Impedance functions, alternatives Function Function Ordering no Position Available Selected Notes and identification rules Note: One and only one alternative can be selected. Selected qty is 0 for other functions in an unselected alternative. Alternative 1 Distance protection, quadrilateral Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic ZMQPDIS,… -
Page 162
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Table 220. Current protection Position Table 221. Current functions Function Function Ordering no Position Available Selected Notes and identification rules Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection PHPIOC 1MRK005910-AD Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps OC4PTOC 1MRK005910-BC Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection… -
Page 163
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Table 227. Multipurpose protection Position Table 228. Multipurpose functions Function Function Ordering no Position Available Selected Notes and rules identification General current and voltage protection CVGAPC 1MRK005915-AA Table 229. General calculation Position Table 230. -
Page 164
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Table 236. Scheme communication functions Function Function Ordering no Position Available Selected Notes and identification rules Scheme communication logic with delta based blocking ZCPSCH 1MRK005920-AA scheme signal transmit Phase segregated scheme communication logic for distance ZC1PPSCH 1MRK005920-BA protection… -
Page 165
Additional local HMI user dialogue language No additional HMI language HMI language, English US 1MRK002920-UB Selected Additional 2nd languages are continuously being added. Please get in touch with local ABB sales contact. Table 244. Casing selection Casing Ordering no Selection Notes and rules 1/2 x 19″… -
Page 166
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Table 248. Analog system selection Analog system Ordering no Selection Notes and rules When more than one TRM is selected, the connector type on both TRMs must be the same (A compression or B ring lug). Slot position (front view/rear view) No Transformer input module included TRM 12I 1A, 50/60Hz, compression terminals… -
Page 167
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Table 249. Maximum quantity of I/O modules, with compression terminals When ordering I/O modules, observe the maximum quantities according to the tables below. Note: Standard order of location for I/O modules is BIM-BOM-SOM-IOM-MIM from left to right as seen from the rear side of the IED, but can also be freely placed. -
Page 168
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Table 251. Binary input/output module selection Binary input/ Ordering no Selection Notes and rules output modules Slot position (front view/rear view) 1/2 case with 1 █ █ █ 3/4 case with 1 █… -
Page 169
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Table 251. Binary input/output module selection, continued Binary input/ Ordering no Selection Notes and rules output modules IOM 8 inputs, RL 1MRK000173-BE 110-125 VDC, 50mA, 10+2 output relays IOM 8 inputs, RL 1MRK000173-CE 220-250 VDC, 50mA, 10+2… -
Page 170
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Table 252. Station communication, remote end serial communication and time synchronization selection Station communication, remote end Ordering no Selection Notes and rules serial communication and time synchronization Slot position (front view/rear view) Available slots in 1/2, 3/4 and 1/1 █… -
Page 171: Ordering For Pre-Configured Ied
Line differential protection, Multi breaker, 1/3 phase tripping, 2-3 line ends 1MRK004810-HG Line differential protection, Single breaker, 1/3 phase tripping, with distance 1MRK004810-KG protection ACT configuration ABB standard configuration Selection for position #2 Hitachi Power Grids © Copyright 2017 Hitachi Power Grids. All rights reserved…
-
Page 172
No additional HMI language HMI language, English US 1MRK002920-UB Selection for position #4 Additional 2nd languages are continuously being added. Please get in touch with local ABB sales contact. Hitachi Power Grids © Copyright 2017 Hitachi Power Grids. All rights reserved… -
Page 173
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Casing Ordering no Notes and rules 1/2 x 19″ rack casing, 1 TRM 1MRK000151-VA 3/4 x 19″ rack casing, 1 TRM 1MRK000151-VB 3/4 x 19″ rack casing, 2 TRM 1MRK000151-VE 1/1 x 19″… -
Page 174
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Analog system Ordering no Notes and rules When more than one TRM is selected, the connector type on both TRMs must be the same (A compression or B ring lug). Slot position (front view/rear view) No Transformer input module included TRM 9I 1A + 3U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, compression terminals… -
Page 175
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Binary input/ Ordering no Notes and rules output modules For pulse counting, for example kWh metering, the BIM with enhanced pulse counting capabilities must be used. Note: 1 BIM required in position P3 and 1 BOM required in position P4. Slot position (front view/rear view) -
Page 176
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Binary input/ Ordering no Notes and rules output modules For pulse counting, for example kWh metering, the BIM with enhanced pulse counting capabilities must be used. Note: 1 BIM required in position P3 and 1 BOM required in position P4. IOM 8 inputs, RL 1MRK000173-CE 220-250 VDC,… -
Page 177
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Station communication, remote end serial Ordering no Notes and rules communication and time synchronization Slot position (front view/rear view) Available slots in 1/2, 3/4 and 1/1 case with 1 █ █… -
Page 178: Ordering For Accessories
(ordering number RK926 315- IEDs is described in 1MRK 512 001-BEN and 1MRK BE). 001024-CA. Please refer to the website: Multi-breaker/Single or Three Phase trip with external www.abb.com/protection-control for detailed neutral on current circuit (ordering number RK926 315- information. BV).
-
Page 179
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Protection cover M15040-3 v8 Protective cover for rear side of RHGS6, 6U, 1/4 x 19” Quantity: 1MRK 002 420-AE Protective cover for rear side of terminal, 6U, 1/2 x 19” Quantity: 1MRK 002 420-AC Protective cover for rear side of terminal, 6U, 3/4 x 19”… -
Page 180
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 Specify additional quantity of IED Connect USB flash drive requested . Quantity: 1MRK 002 290-AE Hitachi Power Grids © Copyright 2017 Hitachi Power Grids. All rights reserved… -
Page 181
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 User documentation Specify the number of printed manuals requested Application manual Quantity: 1MRK 505 376-UEN ANSI Quantity: 1MRK 505 376-UUS Technical manual Quantity: 1MRK 505 377-UEN ANSI Quantity: 1MRK 505 377-UUS Commissioning manual Quantity: 1MRK 505 378-UEN… -
Page 182
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N Version 2.2 ANSI Quantity: 1MRK 511 398-UUS Cyber security deployment guideline Quantity: 1MRK 511 399-UEN Application guide, Communication set-up Quantity: 1MRK 505 382-UEN Reference information M2175-3 v4 For our reference and statistics we would be pleased to be provided with the following application data: Country: End user: Station name:… -
Page 184
ABB Power Grids Sweden AB Grid Automation Products SE-721 59 Västerås, Sweden Phone +46 (0) 10 738 00 00 Scan this QR code to visit our website https://www.abb.com/protection-control © Copyright 2017 Hitachi Power Grids. All rights reserved.
Line differential protection RED670 ANSI
Customized
Product version: 1.2
1. Application……………………………………………………………….3
2. Available functions…………………………………………………….4
3. Differential protection…………………………………………………9
4. Impedance protection………………………………………………15
5. Current protection……………………………………………………19
6. Voltage protection……………………………………………………20
7. Frequency protection……………………………………………….21
8. Multipurpose protection……………………………………………21
9. Secondary system supervision…………………………………..22
10. Control…………………………………………………………………22
11. Scheme communication………………………………………….24
Disclaimer
The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by ABB. ABB assumes no responsibility for any errors
that may appear in this document.
© Copyright 2012 ABB.
All rights reserved.
Trademarks
ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group. All other brand or product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks
of their respective holders.
2
12. Logic……………………………………………………………………26
13. Monitoring…………………………………………………………….27
14. Metering……………………………………………………………….29
15. Basic IED functions…………………………………………………29
16. Human machine interface………………………………………..29
17. Station communication …………………………………………..29
18. Remote communication…………………………………………..30
19. Hardware description………………………………………………30
20. Connection diagrams………………………………………………34
21. Technical data……………………………………………………….42
22. Ordering……………………………………………………………….99
1MRK505226-BUS D
ABB